SM Tractor Massey 5710-13 SL, 21460, en - Jan16

Workshop Service Manual
MF 5700 SL series tractors
Beauvais
AGCO S.A.S. - 41 avenue Blaise Pascal - 60000 January 2016
Beauvais - France - RC B562 104 539 ACT0021460
© AGCO 2016 English
Table of contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 MF 5700 SL - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.1 Using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.2 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.2.1 MF 5700 SL models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.3 Forward speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.1.3.1 Forward speed at 2200 rpm for models MF 5710 SL, MF 5711 SL, MF
5712 SL, MF 5713 SL and 16.9R34 tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.1.3.2 Forward speed at 2200 rpm for models MF 5710 SL, MF 5711 SL, MF
5712 SL, MF 5713 SL and 18.4R38 tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.1.4 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.1.4.1 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.1.5 Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.1.5.1 Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.1.6 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.1.6.1 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.1.7 Tightening torques, retaining compounds and sealing products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.1.7.1 Retaining compounds and sealing products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.1.7.2 Tightening torques for screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.1.7.3 Tightening torques for hydraulic unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.1.8 Units of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1.1.8.1 Conversion table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1.2 MF 5700 SL - Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.2.1 Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.2.1.1 Bleeding the main brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.2.1.2 Bleeding the trailer brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.2.2 Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.2.2.1 Calibration of the clutch pedal sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.2.2.2 Calibration of the throttle pedal sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1.2.2.3 Calibrating the rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.2.2.4 Calibrate the suspended front axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1.2.2.5 Calibrating the automatic disengagement of the differential and 4-wheel
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
1.2.2.6 Calibration of the forward-travel lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1.2.2.7 Forward speed calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1.2.2.8 Calibration of the Dyna-4 and Dyna-6 PowerShuttle transmission . . . . . . 1-43
1.2.2.9 Calibration of electrohydraulic block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
1.2.2.10 Calibrations to be carried out using the diagnostic tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
2 Separation of assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.1 Removing and refitting the front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2 Front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.1 Removing/refitting the fixed front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2 Removing and refitting the front axle and front suspension assembly . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.2.2 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.2.3 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.2.2.4 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3 Cooling unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3.1 Removing - Refitting the cooling unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

ACT0021460
Table of contents
2.3.1.1 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.4 Front frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.4.1 Removing and refitting the front frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.4.1.1 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.5 Engine cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.5.1 Removing/refitting the engine cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.5.1.1 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.6 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.6.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.6.2 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.7 Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.7.1 Removing/refitting the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.7.1.1 Refitting the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.8 Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.8.1 Removing and refitting the cab (4-cylinder engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.8.1.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.8.1.2 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.9 Rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.9.1 Removing the rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.9.1.1 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.10 Rear power take-off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.10.1 Removing/refitting the GPA50 rear power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.10.1.1 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
3 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Tier 4F/Stage IV SCR Technology engine 4 cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.1.1 Notice to the technician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.1.2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.1.3 Description of engine types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.1.4 Location of the engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.1.5 Lifting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.2.1 General operating diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.2.2 Mechanical part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.2.3 Exhaust and intake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.2.4 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.2.5 Lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.1.2.6 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.1.2.7 Electric control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.1.2.8 CCV (Closed Crankcase Ventilation) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.1.3 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.1.3.1 Layout of components in the engine environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.1.4 Tests and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.1.4.1 Measuring the engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.1.5 Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1.5.1 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1.5.2 Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1.6 Disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.1.6.1 AGCO Power Workshop Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.1.7 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.1.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.1.7.2 Cylinder block tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.1.7.3 Timing gear and flywheel housing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.1.7.4 Cylinder head and valve mechanism tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.1.7.5 Crank mechanism tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

ACT0021460
Table of contents
3.1.7.6 Coolant pump tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

3.1.7.7 Engine control system tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.1.7.8 Maintenance and troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.2 SCR Technology 3rd generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.2.1.1 Notice to the technician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.2.1.2 Safety instructions for DEF or AdBlue™™ . Identification of hazards . . . . 3-29
3.2.1.3 Abbreviations or terms used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.2.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.2.2.1 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.2.2.2 Layout of the SCR Technology system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.2.3 Schematic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.2.3.1 Simplified diagram of the SCR Technology system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.2.3.2 Detailed diagram of the SCR Technology system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.2.4.1 Description of SCR Technology system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.2.5.1 Removing the module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.2.5.2 Refitting the module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.2.5.3 Removing the injector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.2.5.4 Refitting the injector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.2.5.5 Removing the solenoid valve for the DEF or AdBlue™™ cooling system . 3-45
3.2.5.6 Refitting the solenoid valve for the DEF or AdBlue™™ cooling system . . 3-46
3.2.5.7 Removing the DEF or AdBlue™™ tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.2.5.8 Refitting the DEF or AdBlue™™ reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.2.5.9 Removing the DEF or AdBlue™™ gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.2.5.10 Removing the catalyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.2.5.11 Refitting the catalyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.6.2 3rd generation SCR engine - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
4 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Chapter not used for this model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
5 Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 GBA25/General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.1.2.1 Construction and description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.1.2.2 Kinematics of the Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.1.2.3 Kinematics of the Dyna-6 GBA25 gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.1.2.4 Synchronisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.1.2.5 Main gearbox robotic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.1.3.1 View of Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.1.3.5 Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.1.3.6 Dyna-6 GBA25 gearbox specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.1.3.7 GBA25 gearbox specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.1.4.1 Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.1.4.2 Dyna-6 GBA25 gearbox disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.1.4.3 Synchronizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.2 GBA25/PowerShuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

ACT0021460
Table of contents
5.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

5.2.3.1 View of the GBA25 PowerShuttle assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.2.3.2 Blown-up view of the GBA25 PowerShuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
5.2.4.1 Dyna-4 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5.2.4.2 Dyna-6 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.2.4.3 Disassembling the PowerShuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.2.4.4 Reassembling the PowerShuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.2.4.5 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5.2.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.2.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.2.5.2 PowerShuttle - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.3 GBA25/Dyna-4 PowerShift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.3.1 Dyna-4 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.3.2 Dyna-4 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.3.2.1 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.3.3.1 View of Dyna-4 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
5.3.3.2 Dyna-4 blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
5.3.4 Removing/refitting Dyna-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5.3.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5.3.4.2 Removing the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
5.3.4.3 Refitting the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
5.3.4.4 Disassembling the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
5.3.4.5 Reassembling the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
5.3.4.6 Disassembling the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
5.3.4.7 Reassembling the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5.3.4.8 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
5.3.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.3.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.3.5.2 Powershift module - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.4 GBA25/Dyna-6 PowerShift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.4.1 Dyna-6 - General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.4.2 Dyna-6 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.4.2.1 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
5.4.3 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5.4.3.1 View of Dyna-6 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5.4.3.2 Dyna-6 blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
5.4.4 Removing/refitting Dyna-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5.4.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5.4.4.2 Removing the Powershift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
5.4.4.3 Refitting the Powershift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
5.4.4.4 Disassembling the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
5.4.4.5 Reassembling the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
5.4.4.6 Disassembling the multiplier module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
5.4.4.7 Reassembling the multiplier module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
5.4.4.8 Disassembling the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
5.4.4.9 Reassembling the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
5.4.4.10 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
5.4.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
5.4.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
5.4.5.2 Powershift module - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
5.5 GBA25/Robotic mechanical gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
5.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
5.5.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130

ACT0021460
Table of contents
5.5.2.1 Description and kinematics of ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-131

5.5.3.1 View of the primary and secondary shaft assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
5.5.3.2 View of the reverse layshaft and synchroniser control assembly . . . . . . 5-138
5.5.3.3 Blown-up view of the robotic mechanical gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
5.5.4 Disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
5.5.4.2 Removing the primary and secondary shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
5.5.4.3 Refitting the primary and secondary shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
5.5.4.4 Disassembling the primary and secondary shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
5.5.4.5 Reassembling the primary and secondary shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
5.5.4.6 Shimming the primary and secondary shafts in the housing . . . . . . . . . .5-155
5.5.4.7 Adjusting the selector rails and forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
5.5.4.8 Adjusting the interlock mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
5.5.4.9 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
5.5.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
5.5.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
5.5.5.2 Robotic mechanical gearbox - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
5.6 GBA25/Super creeper gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
5.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
5.6.3 Schematic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
5.6.4.1 View of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168
5.6.4.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
5.6.5 Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
5.6.5.1 Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the layshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
5.6.6.2 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-178
5.6.6.3 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181
5.6.6.4 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185
5.6.7 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185
5.6.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185
5.6.7.2 Super creeper gears - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185
6 Rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 GPA50/General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.3 Schematic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.3.1 Main kinematics of the GPA50 rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.3.2 Kinematics of the two-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.1.3.3 Kinematics of the three-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.1.3.4 Kinematics of the super creeper gear mechanism – final drive . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.1.3.5 Kinematics of the super creeper gear mechanism – direct drive . . . . . . . 6-16
6.1.4 Center housing with two-speed or three-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.1.4.1 View of the center housing with two-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.1.4.2 View of the center housing with three-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.1.4.3 View of the center housing with GSPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.1.4.4 Exploded view of GPA50 center housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.1.4.5 2-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.1.4.6 3-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.1.5 Center housing with creeper gear mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.1.5.1 Super creeper gears (option) (ratio 1:13.68) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.1.5.2 Super creeper gears (option) (ratio 1:1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.1.6.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
ACT0021460
Table of contents
6.2 GPA50/GPA52 trumpet housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

6.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.2.3.1 View of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.2.3.2 View of the GLA52 trumpet housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.2.4.1 Shimming the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.2.4.2 Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the axle shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6.2.5.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6.2.5.2 Removing and refitting the trumpet housing assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6.2.5.3 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the planet carrier . . . 6-51
6.2.5.4 Replacing tapered roller bearings and seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
6.2.5.5 Replacing a stud on the flanged axle shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.2.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.2.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.2.6.2 GPA50/Final drives - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.3 GPA50/GPA54 trumpet housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6.3.3.2 View of GPA54 trumpet housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
6.3.4.1 Shimming the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
6.3.4.2 Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the axle shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.3.5.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.3.5.2 Removing the trumpet housing assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
6.3.5.3 Removing the final drive ring gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
6.3.5.4 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the planet carrier . . . 6-84
6.3.5.5 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
6.3.5.6 Replacing a stud on the flanged axle shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
6.3.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
6.3.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
6.3.6.2 GPA50/Final drives - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
6.4 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 9x40 and 10x42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
6.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
6.4.3.1 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - Cross-section view . . . . . . . . . 6-100
6.4.3.2 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
6.4.3.3 Rear differential mechanism and its lock - Cross-section view . . . . . . . . 6-104
6.4.4.1 Adjusting the position of the pinion in the center housing (taper distance) 6-105
6.4.4.2 Shimming the pinion tapered roller bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
6.4.4.3 Shimming the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly tapered roller
bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
6.4.4.4 Adjusting and checking the backlash between the ring gear and the pinion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
6.4.5.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128
6.4.5.2 Preliminary step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130
6.4.5.3 Removing and refitting the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly . 6-135
6.4.5.4 Removing and refitting the rear differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-141
6.4.5.5 Removing and refitting the crown wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145

ACT0021460
Table of contents
6.4.5.6 Removing and refitting the planet gears and sun gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149
6.4.5.7 Removing and refitting the pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-151
6.4.5.8 Replacing the left-hand lubrication sleeve lip seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165
6.4.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-168
6.4.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-168
6.4.6.2 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 9x40 and 10x42 - Service tools . . . 6-169
6.5 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 10x47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173
6.5.1 GPA50 general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173
6.5.3.1 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - GPA50 cross-section view . . . . 6-178
6.5.3.2 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-180
6.5.3.3 Rear differential mechanism and its lock - Cross-section view . . . . . . . . 6-182
6.5.4.1 Adjusting the position of the pinion in the center housing (taper distance) 6-183
6.5.4.2 Shimming the pinion tapered roller bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-185
6.5.4.3 Shimming the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly tapered roller
bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202
6.5.5.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206
6.5.5.2 Preliminary step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208
6.5.5.3 Removing and refitting the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly . 6-213
6.5.5.4 Removing and refitting the rear differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-219
6.5.5.5 Removing and refitting the crown wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223
6.5.5.6 Removing and refitting the planet gears and sun gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-227
6.5.5.7 Removing and refitting the pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-229
6.5.5.8 Replacing the left-hand lubrication sleeve lip seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-243
6.5.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-246
6.5.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-246
6.5.6.2 GPA50 rear crown wheel and pinion 10x47 - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . 6-247
6.6 GPA50/Tractor braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-251
6.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-251
6.6.3.1 Overview of the main brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-254
6.6.3.2 Blown-up view of the main brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-256
6.6.3.3 Location of the hand brake control components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-258
6.6.4.1 Adjusting the main brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-259
6.6.4.2 Adjusting the hand brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-264
6.6.4.3 Bleeding the main brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-264
6.6.5.1 Removing and refitting the disks, the intermediate plates and a brake
mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-266
6.6.5.2 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-272
6.6.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-283
6.6.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-283
6.6.6.2 GPA50/Tractor braking – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-284
6.7 Pneumatic trailer braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-285
6.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-285
6.7.1.1 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-285
6.7.1.2 Schematic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-287
6.7.3 Test and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-290
6.7.3.1 Pneumatic system test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-290

ACT0021460
Table of contents
6.7.3.2 Sealing test on the pneumatic system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-292

6.7.4.1 Adjusting the hand brake rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-292
6.7.4.2 Adjusting the pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-293
6.7.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-295
6.7.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-295
6.7.5.2 Pneumatic trailer brake — Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-296
6.8 GPA50/Linkage and hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-298
6.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-298
6.8.2 General information about the linkage angular sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-300
6.8.3 Layout of the linkage components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-301
6.8.3.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-301
6.8.4 Layout of the hitch mechanism components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-302
6.8.4.2 Exploded view of hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-303
6.8.5.2 Removing/refitting a draft sensor (bottom link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-310
6.8.5.3 Removing/refitting the draft sensor (top link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-312
6.8.5.4 Removing/refitting the linkage angular sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-316
6.8.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-320
6.8.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-320
6.8.6.2 GPA50/Linkage and hitch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-321
6.9 GPA50/Auto-hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-322
6.9.1 Auto-hitch general features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-322
6.9.2.2 Blown-up view of the auto-hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-324
6.9.3.1 Adjusting the auto-hitch tie-rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-324
6.9.3.2 Adjusting the control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-326
6.9.4.1 Refitting the auto-hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-327
6.10 GPA50/Wheels and hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-328
6.10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-328
6.10.2 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-330
6.10.2.1 Layout of wheel and hub components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-330
6.10.2.2 Exploded view of a steel front wheel and its hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-331
6.10.2.3 Blown-up view of a steel rear wheel and its hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-332
6.10.3 Disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-333
6.10.3.1 Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-333
6.10.3.2 Removing/refitting a rear wheel on a flanged shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-334
6.10.3.3 Replacing a rear wheel stud on a flanged shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-336
7 Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 GPA50/Rear PTO clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.1.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.2.1 View of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.2.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.1.2.3 Gerotor lubrication pump composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.1.2.4 Rear power take-off clutch composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.1.2.5 Identification of channels and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

ACT0021460
Table of contents
7.1.3.1 Specifications - Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

7.1.3.2 Removing/refitting the clutch assembly/gerotor lubrication pump body . . 7-14
7.1.3.3 Separation and assembly of the clutch assembly/gerotor lubrication pump
body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.1.3.4 Disassembling/reassembling the clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.1.3.5 Disassembling/reassembling the gerotor lubrication pump . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.1.4 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.1.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.1.4.2 GPA50/Rear PTO clutch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.2.2.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.2.2.3 Identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.2.2.4 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7.2.3.1 Shimming shafts of the rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds . . . . . 7-41
7.2.4.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.2.4.2 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the rear power take-
off with two electrohydraulic speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.2.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.2.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.2.5.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools . . . . . 7-67
7.3 GPA50/Rear PTO with three electrohydraulic speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
7.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
7.3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
7.3.2.1 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7.3.2.3 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
7.3.2.4 Identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
7.3.2.5 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
7.3.3.1 Preparation for shaft shimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
7.3.3.2 Shimming the drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
7.3.3.3 Shimming the output shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
7.3.3.4 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
7.3.4.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
7.3.4.2 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the rear PTO with
three electrohydraulic speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
7.3.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-108
7.3.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-108
7.3.5.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with three electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools . . . 7-108
7.4 GPA50/GSPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-110
7.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-110
7.4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-110
7.4.1.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-110
7.4.2.1 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-112
7.4.2.3 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-114

ACT0021460
Table of contents
7.4.2.4 Identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-116

7.4.2.5 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-118
7.4.3.1 Shimming the GSPTO gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-119
7.4.4.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-120
7.4.4.2 Removing/refitting the rear block with the GSPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-120
7.4.4.3 Disassembling/reassembling the GSPTO control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-122
7.5 Zuidberg front power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-125
7.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-125
7.5.2.1 Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-126
7.5.2.2 Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-127
7.5.2.3 Hydraulics diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-128
7.5.3.1 Exploded view of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-129
7.5.3.2 Exploded view of the hydraulic pump and the clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-130
7.5.3.3 Exploded view of drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-131
7.5.4 Tests and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-132
7.5.4.1 Electrical tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-132
7.5.4.2 Hydraulic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-133
7.5.5.1 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-133
7.5.5.2 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137
8 Front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 LODI 140 front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.2.1 View of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.2.2 Exploded view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.1.3 Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.1.3.1 Adjustments/General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.1.3.2 Track width adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.1.3.3 Wheel alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.1.4.1 Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2 DANA 730 front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.2.1.1 DANA General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.2.1.2 View of DANA 730 axle assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.2.1.3 DANA front axle - dimensions - specifications - identification . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.2.1.4 Topping up and checking oil levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.2.3.1 Layout of front axle components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.2.4.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8.2.5.1 Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.2.5.2 DANA Workshop Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.3 Front suspension for DANA 730 axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.3.1.1 General information - front suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.3.3.1 Layout of hydraulic components for the front suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

ACT0021460
Table of contents
8.3.3.2 Layout of mechanical components for the front suspension . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

8.3.3.3 Layout of components for the suspension control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.3.4.1 Removing and refitting the front axle and front suspension assembly . . . 8-27
8.3.4.2 Removing and refitting the front suspension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8.3.4.3 Removing and refitting the suspension rams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.3.4.4 Disassembling/reassembling the control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
8.3.4.5 Removing/refitting the accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
8.4 GPA50/4-wheel drive clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.4.2.3 Overview of 4WD clutch mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
8.4.2.4 Identification of channels and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
8.4.3.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.4.3.2 Shimming the 4-wheel drive clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
8.4.4.1 Removing/refitting the 4-wheel drive clutch assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
8.4.4.2 Disassembling/reassembling the 4-wheel drive clutch assembly . . . . . . . 8-63
8.4.4.3 Extracting/fitting the rear ball bearing and the hydraulic ring . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
8.4.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8.4.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8.4.5.2 GPA50/Clutch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8.5 Steering unit/Open Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
8.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
8.5.3.1 Cross-section view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
8.5.3.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
8.5.3.3 Identification of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
8.5.4.1 Removing/refitting the steering spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82
8.5.4.2 Disassembling/reassembling the steering spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
8.6 Steering unit/Closed Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
8.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
8.6.2 Hydraulic operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
8.6.3 Electrohydraulic operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93
8.6.4.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
8.6.5.1 Removing/refitting the steering spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
8.6.5.2 Disassembling/reassembling the steering spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
9 Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 GPA50/Open Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.2.1 Low-pressure system, low flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.2.2 High-pressure system, high flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.1.3.1 Layout of components of the low pressure low flow rate system . . . . . . . 9-7

ACT0021460
Table of contents
9.1.3.2 Layout of components of the high pressure high flow rate system . . . . . . 9-8
9.1.3.3 Open Center lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.1.4 Hydraulic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.1.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.1.4.2 High flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.1.4.3 Low flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.1.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.1.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.1.5.2 Hydraulic test – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.2 GPA50/Open Center/Right-hand cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.2.2 Thermostatic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.2.3.1 View of external assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.2.3.2 View of internal assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.2.3.3 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.2.4 Removing/refitting the cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.2.5 Disassembly/Reassembly: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9.2.5.1 Disassembling/reassembling the high pressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9.2.5.2 Disassembling/reassembling the 21-bar valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9.2.5.3 Disassembling/reassembling the lubrication valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.2.5.4 Disassembling/reassembling the brake lubrication valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.2.5.5 Disassembling/reassembling the thermostatic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9.2.5.6 Disassembling/reassembling the cooling bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
9.2.5.7 Removing/refitting the pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
9.3 GPA50/100 l/min Open Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9.3.2.1 Low-pressure system, low flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9.3.2.2 High-pressure system, high flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9.3.3.1 Layout of components of the low pressure low flow rate system . . . . . . 9-47
9.3.3.2 Layout of components of the high pressure high flow rate system . . . . . 9-48
9.3.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
9.3.4.2 High flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
9.3.4.3 Low flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
9.3.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
9.3.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
9.3.5.2 Hydraulic test – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
9.4 GPA50/100 l/min Open Center/Right-hand cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9.4.2 Thermostatic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9.4.3.3 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
9.4.5.2 Disassembling/reassembling the 21-bar valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
9.4.5.3 Disassembling/reassembling the lubrication valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
9.4.5.4 Disassembling/reassembling the brake lubrication valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79

ACT0021460
Table of contents
9.4.5.5 Disassembling/reassembling the thermostatic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80

9.4.5.6 Disassembling/reassembling the cooling bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
9.5 GPA50/100 l/min Open Center/Left-hand cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
9.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
9.5.2.3 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
9.6 GPA50/Closed Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
9.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
9.6.3.2 Closed Center lubrication circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
9.6.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
9.6.4.2 High flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
9.6.4.3 Low flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
9.6.4.4 Lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
9.6.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
9.6.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
9.6.5.2 Hydraulic test – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-109
9.7 GPA50/Closed Center/Right-hand cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-115
9.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-115
9.7.3 Filtration and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119
9.7.4 Priority block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121
9.7.5.2 Exploded view of the hydraulic cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-127
9.7.5.3 Exploded view of the single priority block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128
9.7.5.4 Exploded view of the double priority block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129
9.7.5.5 Identification of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-130
9.7.6.1 Removing/refitting the cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-131
9.7.6.2 Disassembling/reassembling the right-hand cover plate and charge pump 9-134
9.7.6.3 Replacing the charge pump seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-137
9.8 GPA50/Closed Center/Left-hand cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140
9.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140
9.8.3.1 View of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-144
9.8.3.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-145
9.8.4.1 Removing/refitting the cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-145
9.8.4.2 Disassembling/reassembling the cover plate and the variable
displacement pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-147
9.9 GPA50 Open Center/Spool valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-150
9.9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-150

ACT0021460
Table of contents
9.9.3.1 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-156

9.9.3.2 Identification of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-158
9.9.4.1 Removing/refitting the spool valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-159
9.9.4.2 Fitting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-160
9.10 GPA50 Open Center/Rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-166
9.10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-166
9.10.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-166
9.10.3.1 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-169
9.10.3.2 Identification of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-170
9.10.4 Tests and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-170
9.10.4.1 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-170
9.10.5.1 Removing/refitting the linkage spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-171
9.11 GPA50 Open Center/Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-172
9.11.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-172
9.11.3.1 Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-175
9.11.4 Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-175
9.11.4.1 Setting the accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-175
9.12 GPA50 Open Center/Mid-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176
9.12.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176
9.12.5 Removing/refitting the Mid Mounted unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-180
9.12.5.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-180
9.12.5.2 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-182
9.12.5.3 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-182
9.13 GPA50 Closed Center/Spool valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-183
9.13.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-183
9.13.2 Layout of components and identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-184
9.13.3.1 Exploded view of the control valve block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-187
9.13.4.1 Removing/refitting the spool valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-189
9.14 GPA50 Closed Center/Rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-192
9.14.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-192
9.14.4.1 Removing/refitting the linkage spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-194
9.15 GPA50 Closed Center/Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196
9.15.1.1 Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196
9.16 GPA50 Closed Center/Mid-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-198
9.16.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-198
ACT0021460
Table of contents

9.16.5 Removing/refitting the Mid Mounted unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-202
9.16.5.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-202
9.16.5.2 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204
9.16.5.3 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204
9.17 GPA50/Brake master cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-206
9.17.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-206
9.17.3.1 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-210
9.17.3.2 Identification of Open Center system channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-211
9.17.3.3 Identification of Closed Center system channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-212
9.17.4.1 Bleeding the main brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-212
9.17.4.2 Bleeding the trailer brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-214
9.17.4.3 Adjusting brake pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-215
9.17.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-216
9.17.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-216
9.17.5.2 GPA50/Hydraulic braking – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-216
9.18 Open Center/Hydraulic trailer braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-217
9.18.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-217
9.18.3.1 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-221
9.18.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-225
9.18.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-225
9.19 Closed Center/Hydraulic trailer braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-227
9.19.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-227
9.19.3 Schematic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-230
9.19.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-233
9.19.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-233
10 Electricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.1 List of generic procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.2 Checking the insulation of a harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.3 Checking the continuity of a harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.4 Checking the CAN network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.1.5 Checking a harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.1.6 Measuring a voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.1.7 Measuring the resistance of a component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.8 Measuring current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.9 Hook-on ammeter procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.10 Ammeter procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.2 Electrical circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

ACT0021460
Table of contents
10.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

10.2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.1.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.1.3 Electricity - color code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2.1.4 Schematic diagram of the electrical circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.2.2 Lighting - Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
10.3 Cab fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.3.2.1 Fuse box - Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.3.3.1 Removing and refitting the fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
10.4 Fuse box on battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.4.1.1 Description of the secondary fuse box (depending on model) . . . . . . . 10-18
10.4.2.1 Removing/refitting the secondary fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.5 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.5.1 Alternator - Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.5.2.1 Alternator - test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22
10.5.3.1 Removing and refitting the drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.5.3.2 Removing and refitting the alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.5.4 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.5.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.5.4.2 Belt - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.6 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.6.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.6.1.3 Schematic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
10.6.2 Starter - Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10.6.3.1 Starter diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10.6.4.1 Removing/refitting the starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10.7 Circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10.7.1.1 Battery isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10.8 Triflash triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10.8.1.1 Triflash on standard roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10.8.1.2 Triflash on high-visibility roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
11 Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Diagnostic tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.1.1 Diagnostic tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.2 Telemetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

ACT0021460
Table of contents
11.2.1.3 Schematic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

11.2.2 Telemetry error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.2.4 Programming and setting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.2.5.1 Access to the AGCOMMAND aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.2.5.2 Disassembling the AM50 AGCOMMAND unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
12 Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Standard air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.1.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.1.1.3 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.1.1.4 Schematic diagram of the air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12.1.1.5 Air conditioning hydraulics diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.1.2.1 Diagram of the air conditioning compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.1.2.2 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.1.3.1 Air conditioning tests - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
12.1.3.2 Air conditioning tests - Air conditioning unit breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.1.3.3 Air conditioning tests - Cleaning the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.1.4.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.1.4.2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.1.4.3 Adjusting the clutch air gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.1.4.4 Draining the system and checking for leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12.1.4.5 Filling the unit (engine stopped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
12.1.4.6 Checking pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.1.5.1 Removing and refitting the roof trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-23
12.1.5.3 Air conditioning - Replacing the dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12.1.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
12.1.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
12.2 Self-regulating air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.2.1.2 Using the air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.2.1.3 Fan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.2.1.4 Activating the compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.2.1.5 Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.2.1.6 Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.2.1.7 Special conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12.2.2.1 Diagram of the air conditioning compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
12.2.2.3 Self-regulating air conditioning - Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
12.2.3.1 Air conditioning tests - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
12.2.3.2 Air conditioning tests - Air conditioning unit breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
12.2.3.3 Air conditioning tests - Cleaning the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38
12.2.4.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38
12.2.4.2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
12.2.4.3 Adjusting the clutch air gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40
ACT0021460
Table of contents
12.2.4.4 Draining the system and checking for leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41

12.2.4.5 Filling the unit (engine stopped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42
12.2.4.6 Checking pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43
12.2.5.1 Removing and refitting the roof trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-45
12.2.5.3 Air conditioning - Replacing the dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48
12.2.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50
12.2.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50
12.3 Cab suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52
12.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52
12.3.2.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55
12.3.3.1 Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56
13 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 accessories kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.1 Accessories kits - Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.2 Accessories kits - Rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.3 Accessories kits - Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.4 Accessories kits - Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.1.5 Accessories kits - Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.1.6 Accessories kits - Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
14 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.2 Separation of assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.2.1 Separation of assemblies - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.3 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.3.1 AGCO Power engine - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.3.1.1 Cylinder block tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.3.1.2 Timing gear and flywheel housing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.3.1.3 Cylinder head and valve mechanism tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.3.1.4 Crank mechanism tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.3.1.5 Coolant pump tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14.3.1.6 Engine control system tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14.3.1.7 Maintenance and troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14.3.2 3rd generation SCR engine - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14.4 Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14.4.1 Robotic mechanical gearbox - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14.4.2 Powershift module - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
14.4.3 PowerShuttle - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
14.4.4 Super creeper gears - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-14
14.5 Rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.5.1 GPA50/Final drives - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.5.2 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 9x40 and 10x42 - Service tools . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.5.3 GPA50 rear crown wheel and pinion 10x47 - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
14.5.4 GPA50/Linkage and hitch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
14.5.5 GPA50/Tractor braking – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23
14.5.6 Pneumatic trailer brake — Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
14.6 Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
14.6.1 GPA50/Rear PTO clutch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26

ACT0021460
Table of contents
14.6.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
14.6.3 GPA50/Rear PTO with three electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools . . . . . . . . . 14-29
14.7 Front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14.7.1 GPA50/Clutch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14.7.2 Front axle - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14.7.3 DANA 730 - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33
14.8 Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
14.8.1 Hydraulic test – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
14.8.2 Tractor braking - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-40
14.9 Electricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41
14.9.1 Belt - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41
14.10 Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42
14.10.1 Harness - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-42

ACT0021460
Table of contents

ACT0021460
Table of contents
1. Introduction
1.1 MF 5700 SL - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.1.1 Using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.2 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.2.1 MF 5700 SL models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.3 Forward speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.1.3.1 Forward speed at 2200 rpm for models MF 5710 SL, MF 5711 SL, MF 5712 SL,
MF 5713 SL and 16.9R34 tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.1.3.2 Forward speed at 2200 rpm for models MF 5710 SL, MF 5711 SL, MF 5712 SL,
MF 5713 SL and 18.4R38 tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.1.4 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.1.4.1 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.1.5 Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.1.5.1 Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.1.6 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.1.6.1 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.1.7 Tightening torques, retaining compounds and sealing products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.1.7.1 Retaining compounds and sealing products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.1.7.2 Tightening torques for screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.1.7.3 Tightening torques for hydraulic unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.1.8 Units of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1.1.8.1 Conversion table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1.2 MF 5700 SL - Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.2.1 Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.2.1.1 Bleeding the main brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.2.1.2 Bleeding the trailer brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.2.2 Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.2.2.1 Calibration of the clutch pedal sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.2.2.2 Calibration of the throttle pedal sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1.2.2.3 Calibrating the rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.2.2.4 Calibrate the suspended front axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1.2.2.5 Calibrating the automatic disengagement of the differential and 4-wheel drive . . 1-37
1.2.2.6 Calibration of the forward-travel lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1.2.2.7 Forward speed calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1.2.2.8 Calibration of the Dyna-4 and Dyna-6 PowerShuttle transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1.2.2.9 Calibration of electrohydraulic block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
1.2.2.10 Calibrations to be carried out using the diagnostic tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
MF 5700 SL series tractors 1-1

ACT0021460
Table of contents
1-2 MF 5700 SL series tractors

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
1.1 MF 5700 SL - General

1.1.1 Using the manual
General
The purpose of this manual is to assist Dealers and Agents in the installation, servicing and repair of
Massey Ferguson equipment. It is important to follow the methods shown and to use special tools in order
to perform the operations within the times stated in the repair time schedule.
Structure of the manual

Contents
For quick reference, each chapter starts with a table of contents, listing the various sections included in
that chapter.
Meaning of reference numbers
(...) Reference number for parts
Service tools
Where the use of a service tool is necessary to carry out an operation, the tool reference is mentioned with
the relevant instruction.
Tool drawings for makeshift tools are given at the end of the relevant sections.
Repairs and parts replacement

During replacement operations, using genuine Massey Ferguson parts is essential.
Fitting parts other than genuine Massey Ferguson parts invalidates the tractor warranty and tractor safety
may be compromised. All Massey Ferguson parts are guaranteed by the manufacturer. Massey Ferguson
Dealers and Agents are required to supply genuine parts.
For repairs and for fitting replacement parts and accessories, we draw your attention to the
following points in particular:
• Legislation in certain countries prohibits the fitting of parts that do not comply with the tractor
manufacturer's specifications
• Torque wrench setting figures given in the workshop manual must be strictly respected
• Locking devices must be fitted where specified. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during
disassembly, it must be replaced.
1.1.2 General specifications
1.1.2.1 MF 5700 SL models
Engine
Model MF 5710 SL MF 5711 SL MF 5712 SL MF 5713 SL
Brand AGCO Power
Type 44 AWFC
Nominal power hp ISO (kW) at an 95 (70) 105 (77) 115 (85) 125 (92)
engine speed of 2200 rpm

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Engine
Maximum power hp ISO (kW) at 100 (74) 110 (81) 120 (88) 130 (96)
an engine speed of 2000 rpm
Maximum PTO power HP SAE 81 (60) 90 (66) 101 (75) 109 (80)
(kW) at an engine speed of 2000
rpm
Maximum torque, Nm 420 Nm 468 Nm 502 Nm 545 Nm
Displacement in liters 4.4
Piston travel 120 mm
Piston diameter 108 mm
Compression ratio 17,4 bar : 1 bar
Number of cylinders 4
Idle speed, hand brake engaged 750 rpm
Idle speed, hand brake 850 rpm

disengaged
Nominal speed 2100 rpm
Maximum speed 2260 rpm
Engine weight 430 kg
High-pressure pump brand Bosch
High-pressure pump type CB18
Firing order 1-2-4-3
Maximum pressure in the high- 1800 bar

pressure system
Injector brand Bosch
Injector type CRI 2.2
Charge pump type Manual
Fuel prefilter filtration capacity 10 µ
Main fuel filter filtration capacity 5µ
Low-pressure system pressure at 0,5 bar to 1 bar

minimum speed
Low-pressure system pressure at 0,5 bar to 1 bar

maximum speed
Recommended oil: API CJ4 or ACEA E9
Maximum operating tilt 25° pitch

(precautions)
20° roll

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Engine
Oil/fuel consumption Maximum 0.2%
Lubrication system Gear pump
Oil cooling system Oil/water heat exchanger
Oil pressure at minimum speed 1,5 bar
Oil pressure at maximum speed 2,5 bar at 5 bar depending on the temperature
Relief valve adjustment pressure 5 bar (spring pressure)
Air suction type Turbocharged with air/air intercooler
Air preheating type Grid heater with relay controlled by the ECU
Number of valves 16
Valve clearance value 0,35 mm (inlet and exhaust)
Engine cooling system Coolant
Fan type Vistronic
Thermostat begins to open at 83 °C
Coolant temperature -35 °C to 106 °C
Air compressor brand for the Knorr Bremse

brake system
Type of compressor Piston
Pressure range: 6,5 bar to 8 bar
Block preheater 110 or 220 volts
Fuel preheater Not available
Urea preheater Tank: coolant
Exhaust fumes recirculation Pump module and supply lines: electric

system
DOC + SCR system (DEF or DOC with metal substrate (exhaust fumes oxidation catalyzer)
AdBlue™™ injection)
SCR Technology with ceramic substrate (exhaust fume treatment)
Safety system NOx sensors at exhaust inlet and outlet
Device brand Bosch Denox 2.2+
Type of control Engine controller EEM4
Urea solidification temperature -11 °C
Oil vapor recirculation system Closed system breather (CCV)

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Engine
Belt: Air conditioning compressor/ Poly V belt

left-hand alternator
Belt: Fan/right-hand alternator Poly V belt
Belt: Air compressor Poly V belt
Rear axle transmission
Gearbox type Dyna-4 GBA25 or Dyna-6 GBA25
Number of ratios 4
Number of ranges 4 or 6
Number of gears 16/16 or 24/24
Super creeper gears 13.68/1
Number of gears with super creeper gears 32/32
Maximum speed 40 km/h
Rear axle type GPA54
Number of pinion/crown wheel teeth 10/47
Rear axle ratio 25.179
4WD ratio 0.775
Final drive type GPA54
Final drive reduction ratio (61+14)/14
Maximum 4WD clutch torque 180 daNm
Number of 4WD disks 6 disks
Main brake type Multidisc ball ramp
Number of disks per side 5
Braking pressure -
Parking brake type Hand brake
Trailer brake type Hydraulic and/or pneumatic with built-in antifreeze

pump
Pneumatic trailer braking pressure 6,9 bar to 8,3 bar
Hydraulic trailer braking pressure 0 to 150 bar
Maximum operating tilt - pitch (front/rear) 25°
Maximum operating tilt - roll (right/left) 22°

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Rear axle transmission
Maximum operating tilt - combined 22°
Total loaded weight supported by rear axle 4-wheel drive: 6400 kg
2-wheel drive: 6000 kg
Two-wheel drive front axle

Front axle brand LODI 140 CP
Four-wheel drive front axle
Brand DANA
Supplier reference - suspended axle 730/563
Supplier reference - fixed axle 730/563
Suspended front axle weight -
Fixed front axle weight 278 kg
Number of differential disks -
Total ratio for fixed and suspended front axle 14.57
Axle type Suspended or fixed
Total loaded weight supported by front axle -
Rotational direction Anti-clockwise
Recommended oil type (beam and final drive) SAE85W90 (API GL4-MIL L-2105)
Ratio for fixed and suspended axle final drive 6
Number of pinion/crown wheel teeth 14/34
Maximum steering angle 4-wheel drive: 55°
2-wheel drive: 52°
Oscillation angle ± 9°
Type of oscillation stop Mechanical
Suspension type Hydraulics
Suspension ram diameter 2 mm x 45 mm/35 mm
Suspension ram stroke 140 mm
Hydraulic control unit brand Husco
Hydraulic control unit nominal pressure 190 bar
Number of accumulators 2
Volume/pressure of accumulators 0,75 l : 70 bar

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Four-wheel drive front axle
2 l : 40 bar
Suspension sensor type Angular potentiometer.
Steering sensor type Angular potentiometer.
Brake type Combined with the rear brake
Factor K 1.339
Spool valves
System type Open Center (OC) 57 l/min or 100 l/min

Closed Center Load Sensing (CCLS) 110 l/min
Flow rate 57 l/min or 100 l/min (OC)

110 l/min (CCLS)
High-pressure pump type Bosch Rexroth gear pump(s) (OC)

Bosch Rexroth piston pump (CCLS)
High-pressure pump displacement 19 cm3 (OC 57 l/min)

19 cm3 + 14 cm3 (OC 100 l/min)
45 cm3 (CCLS)
High-pressure pump rotational speed 3042 rpm (OC)
865 rpm (CCLS)
High-pressure pump maximum flow rate 57 l/min or 100 l/min (OC)

110 l/min (CCLS)
High-pressure pump maximum pressure 200 bar
Maximum quantity of oil to add for heavy 25 l

implements
Maximum exportable oil quantity (without adding 24 l

oil)
Maximum exportable oil quantity (adding oil) 49 l
Charge pump type Suction (OC)

60 cm3 gear pump (CCLS 110 l/min)
Main relief valve adjustment pressure 195 bar ± 5 bar (OC)

197 bar ± 5 bar (CCLS)
Number of spool valves (maximum) 4
Number of front "push-pull" connectors (maximum) 2
Number of rear "push-pull" connectors (maximum) 8
Maximum flow rate per spool valve 57 l/min or 100 l/min (OC)

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Spool valves
100 l/min (CCLS)
Spool valve control type Mechanical
Recommended oil: According to MF CMS M 1145 specification
Steering
Steering type Hydrostatic
Type of control Steering wheel
Orbitrol displacement 2-wheel drive: 80 cm3
4-wheel drive: 125 cm3
Steering ram diameter 2-wheel drive: 63 mm x 36 mm
4-wheel drive: 70 mm x 40 mm
Steering ram stroke 2-wheel drive: 2 x 80 mm
4-wheel drive: 2 x 108 mm
Working pressure 170 bar - 175 bar
Pressure relief valve adjustment pressure 170 bar - 175 bar
Shock valve adjustment pressure 225 bar - 245 bar
Oil recommended for steering According to MF CMS M1145 specification
Rear linkage
Lift ram diameter 85 mm
Linkage travel 737 mm
Maximum lifting capacity at ball joints 4206 kg
Working pressure 180 bar
3-point linkage category CAT3
Front linkage
Lift ram diameter 80 mm x 40 mm
Linkage travel 695 mm
Maximum lifting capacity at ball joints 2236 kg
Working pressure 190 bar
3-point linkage category CAT2

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Rear power take-off (PTO)
Number of selections possible for rear PTO 540

540/540E
540/540E/1000
Maximum permissible power 540/540E in 1"3/8 (6 111 hp

and 21 splines)
Maximum permissible power 540/540E in 1"3/4 (20 56 hp

splines)
Maximum permissible power 1000 in 1"3/8 (6 and 111 hp

21 splines)
Maximum permissible power 1000 in 1"3/4 (20 111 hp

splines)
Engine speed for 540 PTO 1920 rpm
Engine speed for 540E PTO 1560 rpm
Engine speed for 1000 PTO 1964 rpm
Rotational direction Clockwise
Clutch type Multidisc hydraulic
Number of clutch disks 4
Control pressure 21 bar
Splined shaft type 6 and 21 in 1"3/8
Front power take-off
Number of selections possible for front PTO 1000 rpm
Maximum permissible power Anti-clockwise: 128 hp (94 kW)
Maximum permissible input-output torque Anti-clockwise: 449 Nm - 898 Nm
Rotational direction anti-clockwise
Engine speed if PTO 1000 2000 rpm
Ratio 2
Clutch type Multidisc hydraulic
Splined shaft type 6 or 21 in 1"3/8
Electric
Battery brand TAB
Battery specifications (1 battery) 12 V - 105 A/h Type L5
Maximum current at start-up (SAE standard) 505A

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Electric
Starter type 12 V Iskra
Starter power 3.2 KW
Alternator type 1 x 120 A or 1 x 175 A
Current available on ISOBUS connector Not available
Electronics
Instrument panel IC1
3 Autotronic 5 DC Transmission/linkage/suspended front axle
Lighting/linkage controller Management of the lighting and of the rear linkage
1 EEM4 (ECM Tier 4f AGCO Power) Engine and SCR Denox 2.2+ system
1 Orbitrol Danfoss valve Auto-Guide™/SpeedSteer function
Datatronic CCD Onboard computer
Automatic air conditioning module Air conditioning
CAN switches key pad Controls for several tractor functions, such as 4WD,
differential lock, high beam, Auto-Guide™,
SpeedSteer.
AM50 unit AgCommand™ (telemetry)
Cab and fittings
Type of cab suspension available Mechanical
Type of rear-view mirror control available Manual or electric
Type of air conditioning control available Manual or automatic
Type and brand of air conditioning compressor SANDEN with axial pistons
Compressor displacement 154.9 cm3/rev.
Refrigerant R134a
Cab noise level 71 DBA
Roof type Standard

High-visibility
Flat

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
1.1.3 Forward speeds
1.1.3.1 Forward speed at 2200 rpm for models MF 5710 SL, MF 5711 SL, MF 5712 SL, MF 5713 SL
and 16.9R34 tires
Forward and reverse travel, Dyna-4 transmission
Range Ratio GTA2550E

Without creeper gears engaged With creeper gears engaged
1 A 1,93 km/h 0,14 km/h
1 B 2,38 km/h 0,17 km/h
1 C 2,90 km/h 0,21 km/h
1 D 3,57 km/h 0,26 km/h
2 A 4,59 km/h 0,34 km/h
2 B 5,64 km/h 0,41 km/h
2 C 6,88 km/h 0,50 km/h
2 D 8,47 km/h 0,62 km/h
3 A 9,32 km/h 0,68 km/h
3 B 11,46 km/h 0,84 km/h
3 C 13,98 km/h 1,02 km/h
3 D 17,19 km/h 1,26 km/h
4 A 21,50 km/h 1,57 km/h
4 B 26,44 km/h 1,93 km/h
4 C 32,25 km/h 2,36 km/h
4 D 39,66 km/h 2,90 km/h
Range Ratio GTA2550

1 A 1,50 km/h 0,11 km/h
1 B 1,80 km/h 0,13 km/h
1 C 2,11 km/h 0,15 km/h
1 D 2,55 km/h 0,17 km/h
1 E 2,99 km/h 0,22 km/h
1 F 3,60 km/h 0,26 km/h
2 A 4,05 km/h 0,30 km/h
2 B 4,88 km/h 0,36 km/h
2 C 5,72 km/h 0,42 km/h
2 D 6,88 km/h 0,50 km/h
2 E 8,10 km/h 0,59 km/h

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Range Ratio GTA2550

2 F 9,74 km/h 0,71 km/h
3 A 8,23 km/h 0,60 km/h
3 B 9,91 km/h 0,72 km/h
3 C 11,62 km/h 0,85 km/h
3 D 13,98 km/h 1,02 km/h
3 E 16,44 km/h 1,20 km/h
3 F 19,79 km/h 1,45 km/h
4 A 20,78 km/h 1,52 km/h
4 B 25,01 km/h 1,83 km/h
4 C 29,33 km/h 2,14 km/h
4 D 35,29 km/h 2,58 km/h
4 E 40 km/h [1] 3,03 km/h
4 F 3,65 km/h
[1] The speed is limited by the engine's electronic management system.
1.1.3.2 Forward speed at 2200 rpm for models MF 5710 SL, MF 5711 SL, MF 5712 SL, MF 5713 SL
and 18.4R38 tires
Range Ratio GTA2550E

1 A 2,13 km/h 0,16 km/h
1 B 2,62 km/h 0,19 km/h
1 C 3,19 km/h 0,23 km/h
1 D 3,93 km/h 0,29 km/h
2 A 5,05 km/h 0,37 km/h
2 B 6,21 km/h 0,45 km/h
2 C 7,57 km/h 0,55 km/h
2 D 9,31 km/h 0,68 km/h
3 A 10,25 km/h 0,75 km/h
3 B 12,61 km/h 0,92 km/h
3 C 15,38 km/h 1,12 km/h
3 D 18,91 km/h 1,38 km/h
4 A 23,65 km/h 1,73 km/h
4 B 29,08 km/h 2,13 km/h
4 C 35,48 km/h 2,59 km/h
4 D 40 km/h [1] 3,19 km/h

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Range Ratio GTA2550

1 A 1,65 km/h 0,12 km/h
1 B 1,98 km/h 0,15 km/h
1 C 2,33 km/h 0,17 km/h
1 D 2,80 km/h 0,20 km/h
1 E 3,29 km/h 0,24 km/h
1 F 3,96 km/h 0,29 km/h
2 A 4,46 km/h 0,33 km/h
2 B 5,37 km/h 0,39 km/h
2 C 6,29 km/h 0,46 km/h
2 D 7,57 km/h 0,55 km/h
2 E 8,91 km/h 0,65 km/h
2 F 10,72 km/h 0,78 km/h
3 A 9,06 km/h 0,66 km/h
3 B 10,90 km/h 0,80 km/h
3 C 12,78 km/h 0,93 km/h
3 D 15,38 km/h 1,12 km/h
3 E 18,09 km/h 1,32 km/h
3 F 21,77 km/h 1,59 km/h
4 A 22,86 km/h 1,67 km/h
4 B 27,51 km/h 2,01 km/h
4 C 32,26 km/h 2,36 km/h
4 D 38,82 km/h 2,84 km/h
4 E 40 km/h[1] 3,34 km/h
4 F 4,02 km/h

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
1.1.4 Dimensions and weights
1.1.4.1 Dimensions and weights
Fig. 1
General specifications: MF 5700 SL
Referen Measured specification Dimension/weight

ce
(A) Wheel base 2550 mm
(B) External length with folded front linkage 4485 mm
External length with horizontal front linkage 4490 mm
External length without front linkage with 4805 mm
weights
External length without front linkage without 4355 mm
weights
External length without front linkage with hitch 4765 mm
weight
(C) Height to roof
Standard cab (add 208 mm for the rotary 1956 mm / 2035 mm
beacon on the roof):
High-visibility cab (add 185 mm for the rotary 1970 mm / 2049 mm

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Referen Measured specification Dimension/weight

ce
Slimline cab (add 194 mm for the rotary 1866 mm to 1945 mm
Height at roof with Auto-Guide™ 2777 mm to 3007 mm
(D) Maximum external width 2010 mm / 2300 mm
(E) Ground clearance 240 mm to 315 mm
(F) Front overhang:
Without weights 605 mm
With weights 1015 mm
With hitch weight 1055 mm
With front linkage horizontal 1140 mm
With front linkage folded 735 mm
With rear linkage horizontal 1200 mm
Tractor weight (with full fuel tank, without
steel wheel weights) [1]
2-wheel drive Minimum 4300 Kg/Maximum 5800 Kg
4-wheel drive Minimum 4600 Kg/Maximum 5800 Kg
Total loaded weight supported by rear axle - 40 7300 kg
km/h
Total loaded weight supported by rear axle - 40 8500 kg
km/h
[1] Dimensions given vary according to tire assembly and the type of cab.
DANA 730 front axle
Referen Measured specification Front axle 730

ce
(G) Distance between flanges 1640 mm
(H) Center-to-center distance between studs 275 mm
(I) Centring diameter 220,8 mm
(J) Stud length 34 mm
(K) Stud diameter M18 x 1.5
(L) Number of studs 8
LODI 140 CP front axle
Referen Measured specification 140 CP front axle

ce
(G) Distance between flanges 1506 mm to 2006 mm
(H) Center-to-center distance between studs 152,4 mm

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Referen Measured specification 140 CP front axle

ce
(J) Screw length NC
(K) Screw diameter M16 x 1.5
(L) Number of screws 6
Rear axle
Refere Measured specification GPA54 rear axle

nce
(G) Distance between flanges for GPA 54 1680 mm
(H) Center-to-center distance between studs 203,20 mm
(J) Stud length 41 mm
(K) Stud diameter M18 x 1.5
(L) Number of studs 8

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
1.1.5 Attachment points
1.1.5.1 Attachment points
Fig. 2
NOTE: Values x, y and z correspond to reference point 0 of the tractor (engine).
Attachment points X Y Z
(1) M16x55 -1175 mm -295 mm 18 mm
(2) M16x55 -1175 mm -260 mm -78 mm
(3) M8x16 -1008 mm -260 mm -35 mm
(4) M8x16 -752 mm -260 mm -35 mm
(5) M16x55 -692 mm -295 mm 18 mm
(6) M16x55 -692 mm -260 mm -98 mm
(7) M16x75 35 mm -225 mm 2,5 mm
(8) M16x75 35 mm -225 mm -46 mm

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Attachment points X Y Z
(9) M16x75 35 mm -225 mm -161 mm
(10) M16x34 140 mm -183 mm -155 mm
(11) M16x34 140 mm -223 mm -53 mm
(12) M16x34 241 mm -183 mm -155 mm
(13) M16x34 241 mm -223 mm -53 mm
(14) M8x31 113 mm -205 mm 183 mm
(15) M16x34 441 mm -228 mm -65 mm
(16) M16x34 441 mm -228 mm -165 mm
((17)) M8x23 532 mm -200 mm 98 mm
(18) M16x56 374 mm -166 mm -259 mm
(19) M16x56 374 mm -166 mm -319 mm
(20) 8xM18 1571 mm -840 mm -4 mm
(21) M16x26 894 mm -185 mm -12 mm
(22) M16x26 894 mm -157 mm -290 mm
(23) M16x26 980 mm -157 mm -290 mm
Dimensions
(24) 292 mm
(25) 2549 mm
(26) 456 mm
(27) 698 mm
(28) 540 mm
(29) 616 mm
(30) 400 mm
(31) 872 mm
(32) 537 mm
(33) 106 mm
(34) 290 mm
(35) 228 mm
(36) 248 mm
(37) 220 mm
(38) 419 mm
(39) 379 mm

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
1.1.6 Capacities
1.1.6.1 Capacities
Type Model Capacity

Fuel tank All models 180 l
Urea tank All models 25 l
Cooling system All models 13.7 l
Engine sump All models 12 l
Transmission/rear axle All models Minimum 65 l
Maximum 75 l
Extra Maximum 90 l after adding 15 l for large
implements or work on a 10 % slope.
Quantity to add for work All models 15 l
on a slope or for large
implements (maximum)
Front axle beam All models 5l
Front final drive All models 0,8 l
Front power take-off All models 1,9 l
Refrigerant fluid R134A Standard roof/flat roof 900 g
High-visibility roof 1050 g
Windscreen washer All models 4l
bottle
1.1.7 Tightening torques, retaining compounds and sealing products
1.1.7.1 Retaining compounds and sealing products
General
The Loctite compounds mentioned in this manual are referred to by their industrial name.
For repair purposes, use their commercial names or the corresponding Massey Ferguson references listed
in the table below.
Loctite product type Operation

221
Standard threadlock
241
242 Medium threadlock
270 Strong threadlock
496 Glue (for metals)
510 Standard sealant
518 Sealant for flat surfaces and paper seals
542 Thread sealant
549 Oil-resistant surface sealant

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Loctite product type Operation

573
Surface sealant (engine, gearbox)
574
577 Threaded union sealant (prevents loosening and leakages caused by vibrations)
603 Retainer for cylindrical assemblies (bearings, rings etc.)
638 Strong retainer for cylindrical assemblies (bearings, rings etc.)
648 Strong retainer for cylindrical assemblies (resistant to high temperatures)
706 Degreasing cleaner
5206 Metallic surface sealant (gearbox housing, engine sump)
5910 ± Flexible surface sealant
5922 Sealant paste for ± flexible unions (sensor attachments etc.)
7100 Leakage detector for pneumatic systems
NOTE: Use the product "Form A gasket 2" when sealing between plastic material and cast iron or steel.
Application method for Loctite products

1. Remove all traces of previous sealants and corrosion
• mechanically: wire brush or emery cloth
• chemically: "DECAPLOC 88" (Leave the product to take effect then scrape off and wipe clean).
2. Degrease the components with dry solvent: preferably use "Super Solvant Sec LOCTITE 706".
3. Allow the solvents to evaporate
4. Apply the recommended type of LOCTITE product to the parts:
• For all blind tapped holes, apply a quantity of the product to the last threads at the bottom of the
hole.
• for cylindrical fittings, apply the product on the two mating faces using a clean brush.
• for mating faces, apply a bead to one of the two faces, circling the holes, and then tighten as quickly
as possible.
NOTE:
• Do not use too much of the compound, in order to avoid locking adjacent parts.
• Do not attempt to retighten after 5 minutes of curing, in order to avoid breaking the film of compound.
• If the ambient temperature is less than +10°C and to ensure quicker setting of Loctite products (except
SILICOMET), use LOCTITE T 747 activator on at least one of the two parts after phase 2. Excess
product outside the joint will not harden (anaerobic products — curing takes place only when there is no
oxygen).
Grease
When grease is used in components in contact with transmission oil, use grease that is miscible with oil to
avoid blocking the hydraulic filters.
1.1.7.2 Tightening torques for screws and nuts

Use the tightening torques recommended for screws and nuts according to the tables below:
• 1 and 2 for metric threads
• 3, 4, 5 and 6 for threads in inches
When a specific torque is required, this is stated in the text.

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Tables 1, 3 and 5 indicate the normal tightening torque values to apply to threaded zinc-plated elements,
with normal nuts, coarse or fine threads, and with or without a flat washer or lock washer, and weldable
nuts with a height greater than or equal to 0.8 d.
Tables 2, 4 and 6 indicate the reduced tightening torque values to apply to threaded elements in
assemblies with zinc-plated self-locking locknuts, phosphated or zinc-flake-coated nuts or screws, thin
nuts, weldable nuts with a height of less than 0.8 d.
To check these torque values, loosen the threaded element by one quarter turn and then retighten.
These values apply to dry assemblies. If the threads are oiled, reduce the tightening torques.
NOTE:
Read the tensile grade on the screw head and determine the corresponding torque to be applied.
1 - Tightening torque values: zinc dichromate-plated or white zinc-plated metric threads
Nominal Tensile grade Tensile grade Tensile grade

dimension
ISO 4.6 (SAE 1-BS B) ISO 8.8 (SAE 5-BS S) ISO 10.9 (SAE 8-BS V)
Torque Torque Torque
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
M3 0.5 Nm 0.7 Nm 1.3 Nm 1.7 Nm 1.8 Nm 2.4 Nm
M4 1.2 Nm 1.6 Nm 3.1 Nm 4.1 Nm 4.3 Nm 5.7 Nm
M5 2.2 Nm 3 Nm 6 Nm 8 Nm 8.5 Nm 11.5 Nm
M6 4 Nm 5 Nm 10 Nm 14 Nm 14 Nm 20 Nm
M8 9.5 Nm 12.5 Nm 25 Nm 35 Nm 36 Nm 46 Nm
M10 19 Nm 25 Nm 50 Nm 70 Nm 72 Nm 96 Nm
M12 33 Nm 43 Nm 90 Nm 120 Nm 120 Nm 160 Nm
M16 84 Nm 110 Nm 200 Nm 260 Nm 300 Nm 400 Nm
M20 160 Nm 210 Nm 420 Nm 560 Nm 600 Nm 800 Nm
M24 280 Nm 360 Nm 720 Nm 960 Nm 1000 Nm 1300 Nm
M30 540 Nm 720 Nm 1400 Nm 1800 Nm 2100 Nm 2800 Nm
M36 950 Nm 1250 Nm 2500 Nm 3300 Nm 3600 Nm 4800 Nm
2 - Reduced tightening torque values: phosphated or zinc-flake-coated metric threads

dimension
ISO 4.6 (SAE 1-BS B) ISO 8.8 (SAE 5-BS S) ISO 10.9 (SAE 8-BS V)
Torque Torque Torque
M3 0.4 Nm 0.6 Nm 1 Nm 1.4 Nm 1.5 Nm 1.9 Nm
M4 1 Nm 1.3 Nm 2.5 Nm 3.3 Nm 3.4 Nm 4.6 Nm
M5 1.8 Nm 2.4 Nm 4.8 Nm 6.4 Nm 6.8 Nm 9.2 Nm

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
M6 3.2 Nm 4 Nm 8 Nm 11 Nm 12 Nm 16 Nm
M8 7.6 Nm 10 Nm 20 Nm 28 Nm 29 Nm 37 Nm
M10 15 Nm 20 Nm 40 Nm 56 Nm 57 Nm 77 Nm
M12 26 Nm 34 Nm 72 Nm 96 Nm 100 Nm 130 Nm
M16 68 Nm 88 Nm 160 Nm 210 Nm 240 Nm 320 Nm
M20 130 Nm 170 Nm 340 Nm 450 Nm 480 Nm 640 Nm.
M24 230 Nm 290 Nm 570 Nm 770 Nm 800 Nm 1040 Nm
M30 430 Nm 570 Nm 1100 Nm 1400 Nm 1700 Nm 2200 Nm
M36 760 Nm 1000 Nm 2000 Nm 2600 Nm 2900 Nm 3800 Nm
3 - Tightening torque values: zinc dichromate-plated or white zinc-plated threads in inches

dimension
SAE 1 (ISO 4.6-BS B) SAE 5 (ISO 8.8-BS S) SAE 8 (ISO 10.9-BS V)
Torque (Nm) Torque (Nm) Torque (Nm)
#6 0.9 1.3 1.8 2.4 2.5 3.3
#8 1.7 2.3 3.4 4.4 4.7 6.3
#10 2.5 3.3 4.7 6.3 6.7 8.9
1/4 6 8 11 15 16 22
5/16 12 16 22 30 31 (43)
3/8 22 30 (39) 53 55 75.
7/16 35 (47) 64 86 90; 120
1/2 54 72 100 130 140 180
5/8 110 140 200 260 280 370
3/4 190 250 350 460 490 660
7/8 310 410 560 760 800 1060
1 460 620 840 1120 1200 1600
1 1/8 480 640 1050 1390 1700 2200
1 1/4 680 900 1500 2000 2400 3200
1 1/2 1200 1600 2600 3400 4100 5400
4 - Reduced tightening torque values: phosphated or zinc-flake-coated threads in inches

ACT0021460
1. Introduction

dimension
Torque (Nm) Torque (Nm) Torque (Nm)
#6 0.7 1 1.5 1.9 2 2.6
#8 1.4 1.8 2.7 3.5 3.8 5
#10 2 2.6 3.8 5 5.3 7.1
1/4 4.8 6.4 8.8 12 13 18
5/16 9.6 13 18 24 25 34
3/8 18 24 31 42 (44) 60
7/16 28 38 51 69 72 96
1/2 (43) 57 80 104 110 140
5/8 90; 110 160 210 220 300
3/4 150 200 280 370 390 530
7/8 250 330 450 610 640 850
1 370 500 670 900 960 1280
1 1/8 390 510 840 1100 1360 1760
1 1/4 540 720 1200 1600 1920 2560
1 1/2 960 1300 2100 2700 3280 4320
5 - Tightening torque values: zinc dichromate-plated or white zinc-plated threads in inches

dimension
Torque lbf ft Torque lbf ft Torque lbf ft
#6 0.6 1 1.3 1.8 1.8 2.4
#8 1.3 1.7 2.5 3.2 3.4 4.6
#10 1.8 2.4 3.4 4.6 4.9 6.6
1/4 4.4 5.9 8 11 12 16
5/16 9 12 16 22 23 31
3/8 16 22 29 (39) (41) 55
7/16 26 35 (47) 63 66 88
1/2 (40) 53 74. 96 100 130
5/8 81 103 150 190 210 270

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
3/4 140 180 260 340 360 490
7/8 230 300 410 560 590 780
1 340 460 620 830 880 1180
1 1/8 350 470 775 1025 1200 1600
1 1/4 500 660 1100 1470 1800 2400
1 1/2 880 1180 1900 2500 3000 4000
6 - Reduced tightening torque values: phosphated or zinc-flake-coated threads in inches

dimension
Torque lbf ft Torque lbf ft Torque lbf ft
#6 0.5 0.8 1 1.4 1.5 1.9
#8 1 1.4 2 2.6 2.7 3.7
#10 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.7 3.9 5.3
1/4 3.5 4.7 6.6 8.8 9 13
5/16 7 9.4 13 18 18 25
3/8 13 18 23 31 32 (44)
7/16 20 28 37 51 53 71
1/2 32 42 59 77 82 106
5/8 65 83 120 150 160 220
3/4 110 150 210 270 290 390
7/8 180 240 330 450 470 630
1 270 370 500 660 710 940
1 1/8 280 380 620 820 1000 1300
1 1/4 400 530 880 1180 1400 1900
1 1/2 700 940 1500 2000 2400 3200
1.1.7.3 Tightening torques for hydraulic unions

Use the tightening torques recommended for hydraulic unions according to the tables below:
• 1 for hydraulic unions with 37° flare
• 2 for EO2 hydraulic unions
• 3 for hydraulic unions with metric straight thread
• 4 for hydraulic unions with straight thread in inches
• 5 for steel unions with sealed thread.
When a specific torque is required, this is stated in the text.

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
The specifications for these tightening torques apply to zinc-plated steel unions used with hoses and rigid
hydraulic pipes that ideally include straight thread unions, unions with 37° flare or unions with an "O" ring
for bosses.
These values apply to dry assemblies. If the threads are oiled, reduce the tightening torques.
1 - Tightening torques: hydraulic unions with 37° flare
Tensile grade SAE J 514
Outside diameter Outside diameter Thread

Torque
of pipe, metric of pipe, in inches
mm inch inch Min. Max.
4 1/8 5/16 - 24 UNF 8 Nm 9 Nm
5 3/16 3/8 - 24 UNF 11 Nm 12 Nm
6 1/4 7/16 - 20 UNF 15 Nm 16 Nm
8 5/16 1/2 - 20 UNF 19 Nm 21 Nm
10 3/8 9/16 - 18 UNF 24 Nm 28 Nm
12 1/2 3/4 - 16 UNF 49 Nm 53 Nm
16 5/8 7/8 - 14 UNF 77 Nm 85 Nm
20 3/4 1-1/16 - 12 UN 107 Nm 119 Nm
22 7/8 1-3/16 - 12 UN 127 Nm 140 Nm
25 1 1-5/16 - 12 UN 147 Nm 154 Nm
32 1-1/4 1-5/8 - 12 UN 172 Nm 181 Nm
(40) 1-1/2 1-7/8 - 12 UN 215 Nm 226 Nm
50 2 2-1/2 - 12 UN 332 Nm 350 Nm
IMPORTANT:
The unions for pipes must not be tightened using a pipe wrench or a torque wrench. Special pipe
wrenches, flat open-end wrenches and Allen keys of the appropriate size must be used to avoid crushing
the pipes and unions and tearing the threads.
2 - Tightening torques: EO2 hydraulic unions
Pipe dimension Torque +10%
mm
6x1 17 Nm
8x1 25 Nm
10 x 1 35 Nm
12 x 1 45 Nm
12 x 1.5 48 Nm
15 x 1.5 70 Nm
18 x 2 105 Nm

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
22 x 2 160 Nm
25 x 2 210 Nm
28 x 2 205 Nm
3 - Tightening torques: hydraulic unions with metric straight thread
Tensile grade ISO 6149-3
Thread Torque +10% / 0%
mm Nominal
M8 x 1 8 Nm
M10 x 1 15 Nm
M12 x 1.5 25 Nm
M14 x 1.5 35 Nm
M16 x 1.5 40 Nm
M18 x 1.5 45 Nm
M22 x 1.5 60 Nm
M27 x 2 100 Nm
M33 x 2 160 Nm
M42 x 2 210 Nm
M48 x 2 260 Nm
M60 x 2 315 Nm
4 - Tightening torques: hydraulic unions with straight thread in inches
Tensile grade SAE J 514
Thread Torque
Inch Min. Max.
5/16 - 24 UNF 8 Nm 9 Nm
3/8 - 24 UNF 11 Nm 12 Nm
7/16 - 20 UNF 18 Nm 20 Nm
1/2 - 20 UNF 23 Nm 26 Nm
9/16 - 18 UNF 29 Nm 33 Nm
3/4 - 16 UNF 49 Nm 53 Nm
7/8 - 14 UNF 59 Nm 64 Nm
1-1/16 - 12 UN 93 Nm 102 Nm
1-3/16 - 12 UN 122 Nm 134 Nm

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
1-5/16 - 12 UN 151 Nm 166 Nm
1-5/8 - 12 UN 198 Nm 218 Nm
1-7/8 - 12 UN 209 Nm 231 Nm
2-1/2 - 12 UN 296 Nm 325 Nm
5 - Tightening torques: steel unions with sealed thread
Nominal diameter of pipe Torque
inch Min. [1] Max.
1/8 20 Nm 30 Nm
1/4 40 Nm 50 Nm
3/8 60 Nm 80 Nm
1/2 110 Nm 140 Nm
3/4 160 Nm 200 Nm
1 210 Nm 270 Nm
1-1/4 250 Nm 310 Nm
[1] The minimum values of tightening torques are not applicable if a sealing product is used.
Application of the sealing product on the
sealed threads
• Apply the sealing product to the length (A).
• Do not apply sealing product to the first two
threads (B).
Fig. 3
1.1.8 Units of measurement
1.1.8.1 Conversion table
Length
mm x 0.0394 in
in x 25.400 mm
m x 3.2808 ft
ft x 0.3048 m
km x 0.6214 mile
mile x 1.6093 km

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Surface area
mm² x 0.0016 in²
in² x 645.16 mm²
m² x 10.7639 ft²
ft² x 0.0929 m²
ha x 2.4711 acre
acre x 0.4047 ha
Volume
cm³ x 0.0610 in³
in³ x 16.387 cm³
m³ x 35.315 ft³
ft³ x 0.0283 m³
Capacity
ml x 0.0338 fl oz (US)
fl oz (US) x 29.5735 ml
l x 0.2642 gal (US)
gal (US) x 3.7853 l
Power
kW x 1.3410 HP SAE[1]
HP SAE[1] x 0.7457 kW
kW x 1.36 hp[2]
HP[2] x 0.736 kW
[1] US unit
[2] Metric unit
Torque
Nm x 0.7375 lbf ft
lbf ft x 1.3558 Nm
daNm x 7.3756 lbf ft
lbf ft x 0.1356 daNm

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Pressure
bar x 14.504 psi
psi x 0.0690 bar
Flow rate
l/min x 0.2642 gal/min (US)
gal/min (US) x 3.7853 l/min
l/hr x 0.2642 gal/hr (US)
gal/hr (US) x 3.7853 l/hr
l/ha x 0.1069 gal/acre (US)
gal/acre (US) x 9.3531 l/ha
Speed
kph x 0.6214 mph
mph x 1.6093 kph
Weight
g x 0.03527 oz
oz x 28.3495 g
kg x 2.2046 lb
lb x 0.4536 kg
t x 1.1023 US ton
US ton x 0.9072 t
Temperature
°C (°C x 1.8) + 32 °F
°F (°F - 32)/1.8 °C

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
1.2 MF 5700 SL - Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations

1.2.1 Bleeding
1.2.1.1 Bleeding the main brake system
Installation
NOTE: A male quick connector is fitted as standard on the right-hand hydraulic cover plate for pressure
tests. The pressure on this line makes it easier to bleed the brake system.
Open Center version
1. Join the connector (P9) to the connector (1)
with a makeshift hose (2) fitted at each end
with a female connector ref. 3582045M1
see Fig. 4 .
2. Using a clamp fitted with protective jaws,
pinch the return hose (4) without flattening it
excessively.
NOTE: Some hoses may be difficult to pinch
due to their rigid sheath. Consequently, it will
be necessary to disconnect the union (4) and
to replace it temporarily with a plug.
Fig. 4

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Load Sensing version

3. Join the (low-pressure) connector to the
connector (1) with a makeshift hose (2) fitted
at each end with a female connector ref.
3582045M1 see Fig. 4 .
excessively.
Fig. 5
5. Connect a transparent pipe to the right-hand
and left-hand bleed screws (3) of the brake
mechanisms see Fig. 6 .
6. Immerse the ends of the two pipes into a
container partially filled with transmission oil.
Fig. 6
Bleeding procedure
Procedure
1. Run the engine at approximately 1300 rpm and heat the oil to operating temperature.
2. Open the two bleed screws by one turn and wait 5 minutes.
3. Pedals coupled: Fully press down and slowly release the pedals 8 times until the oil flows free of air
bubbles.
4. Pedals uncoupled: Fully press down and slowly release each pedal 8 times until the oil flows free of
air bubbles.
bubbles.
6. First close the left-hand bleed screw and then the right-hand bleed screw.

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
7. Remove the hose (2), the clamp fitted on the hose (4) and the transparent bleed pipes (3).
Check
8. Press very hard (approximately 60 kg to 80 kg) on each pedal to position the brake pistons.
9. Check the hardness under force of each pedal. Coupled pedals should not travel more than 120 mm
for the force stated above.
10. Turn off engine.
In the event of incorrect operation
11. If an operating problem emerges, carry out the bleed sequence a second time.
If the problem remains, check tightness of:
• The system
• The master cylinders
• The brake mechanism seals
1.2.1.2 Bleeding the trailer brake system

If the tractor is fitted with a trailer brake, it is strongly recommended to bleed the main brake and trailer
brake systems simultaneously. To carry out this bleeding procedure, use the same equipment and method
as described for the bleeding of the main brake system see chapter Bleeding the main brake system, page
1-31 , but follow these additional points:
Procedure
1. Open the two bleed screws (3) on the main
brake and the bleed screw on the trailer
brake (5) Open Center version or (6) Load
Sensing version.
2. When the bleeding is complete, tighten in
the following order:
• The left-hand brake bleed screw (3)
• The right-hand brake bleed screw (3)
• bleed screw (5) or (6) on the trailer brake.
3. Check the trailer brake pressure on the quick
coupling located at the rear of the tractor. If
this pressure is not correct, eliminate any air
entering in the system and repeat the
bleeding procedure.
4. Carry out a road test.
Fig. 7
1.2.2 Calibrations
1.2.2.1 Calibration of the clutch pedal sensor

Calibration of the clutch pedal sensor

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Calibration procedure
The calibration of the clutch pedal potentiometer must be carried out each time one of the following
elements is replaced or modified:
• clutch pedal switch
• instrument panel.
NOTE: This calibration is carried out with the engine stopped.
Procedure
1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press down the clutch pedal and keep it depressed.
3. Lift the Power Control lever arm (PowerShuttle) and keep it raised throughout the calibration
procedure.
4. An alarm sounds. Slowly release the clutch pedal.
5. The alarm will stop. Fully release the clutch pedal.
6. The alarm will sound again. Release the Power Control lever arm (PowerShuttle).
7. Switch off the ignition for at least 5 seconds to validate calibration.
1.2.2.2 Calibration of the throttle pedal sensor

Calibration of the throttle pedal sensor
The calibration of the throttle pedal potentiometer must be carried out each time one of the following
• Throttle potentiometer
WARNING:
This calibration is carried out with the engine stopped.
The calibration is carried out in two successive steps so as to determine the minimum and maximum
engine speeds in relation to the position of the pedal.
Procedure
1. Switch on the ignition, with the Power Control (PowerShuttle) lever in neutral.
NOTE: The power take-off must be disengaged.
Minimum speed
2. When the pedal is fully released, this corresponds to minimum engine speed.
3. Press and hold down the differential lock switch for 5 seconds.
4. An alarm sounds. This indicates the end of the first calibration phase (pedal fully released).
Release the differential switch.
Maximum speed
5. When the pedal is fully depressed, this corresponds to maximum engine speed.
6. Press and hold down the differential lock switch for 5 seconds.
7. An alarm sounds. This indicates the end of the second calibration phase (pedal fully depressed).
Release the differential switch.

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
1.2.2.3 Calibrating the rear linkage

Calibrating the rear linkage
Adjusting the position sensor
For correct linkage calibration, ensure that the position sensor is fitted properly.
Calibration is the only way to obtain precise linkage positioning.
Procedure
1. Position the mark on the rotating shaft on the
same side as the connector.
2. Tighten the sensor approximately in the
center of the ports. After adjusting, calibrate
the linkage.
Fig. 8
Calibration procedure and purpose
The linkage must be calibrated after changing:
• a linkage solenoid valve
• the position sensor
• the linkage height/depth setting potentiometer
• the controller or software type.
The purpose of this calibration is:
• to define the high and low stops of the linkage for optimum use of the linkage travel
• to measure sensor signals to obtain maximum linkage position precision according to the
setting potentiometer
• to measure the solenoid valve starter currents that start to move the linkage
3.
Preliminary steps
4. Hitch a weight of approximately 500 kg to the linkage.
5. Check that, with the hitch, the linkage moves through its entire operating range, between the upper
and lower stops.
6. Position the tractor in a location where the linkage can operate freely, and ensure that no one can
enter the area of linkage travel throughout the calibration process.
Calibration
DANGER:
Ensure that no one enters the linkage operating area throughout the calibration process.

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
NOTE:
To exit the calibration process, press the shock absorber switch or the lifting/neutral/lowering
selector switch. In this case, the system uses the parameter settings stored previously or, in the
event of a new controller, the default parameter settings are used.
7. Set the tractor engine to idle speed.
8. Position the height/depth setting
potentiometer (B) between positions 3 and 4.
9. Set the selector switch (A) to the linkage
lowered position (work position).
Fig. 9
10. Set the 3 potentiometers on the linkage
console to the following positions:
• maximum raised stop (A),
• pure position sensor (B),
• maximum automatic lowering speed (C).
11. Press the shock absorber switch (D) 4 times
in quick succession. Indicator light (LED) (E)
starts to flash. Calibration takes
approximately 1 minute.
12. When calibration is complete, the indicator
light stops flashing and the linkage locks.
Fig. 10
Validation of the calibration
NOTE:
If the calibration appears to be incorrect (impossible to change position), reset the linkage by
pressing the shock absorber switch 5 times in quick succession. In this case, the controller uses the
default values. Then launch a new calibration procedure.
13. Check maximum linkage travel using the cab controls:
• high position
• low position; the lowering indicator light should always remain illuminated.
14. Check the sensitivity of the linkage height/depth setting potentiometer.
15. Set the linkage to transport position, engage the shock absorber and ensure that the linkage is
lowered slightly (the lowering indicator light should come on).
16. Check the external controls and ensure that the lifting switch raises the linkage to its mechanical stop
(hydraulic pump throttling sound).
1.2.2.4 Calibrate the suspended front axle.

Calibrate the suspended front axle.

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
NOTE:
Calibration must be carried out on the suspended front axle when:
• the position sensor is adjusted or replaced,
• the front axle suspension controller is changed.
Calibration consists of determining the values of the upper and lower suspension stops.
Adjusting the position sensor

1. Tighten the sensor that is approximately in the centre of the ports so that the voltage is between
1.2 V and 4.3 V.
Fig. 11
2. Tighten the sensor screws to a torque of 2 Nm to 3 Nm .
3. Calibrate after the sensor has been adjusted.
To enter calibration mode:
4. Start the engine
Fig. 12
5. Press the "suspended front axle" switch 5 times in less than 3 seconds.
6. The "suspended front axle" indicator light will flash to indicate the start of the calibration procedure.
7. The "suspended front axle" indicator light will stop flashing once calibration is complete.
NOTE:
The controller remains in calibration mode if the stop values are outside the allowed tolerances or if
suspension travel is lower than the minimum fixed value. In this case, adjust the position sensor
more accurately.
1.2.2.5 Calibrating the automatic disengagement of the differential and 4-wheel drive
Calibrating the automatic disengagement of the differential and 4-wheel drive
General
ACT0021460
1. Introduction
This calibration makes it possible to obtain a front-wheel angle of 0 for temporarily disengaging the
differential lock and/or the 4-wheel drive front axle when the steering wheel is turned and these functions
are engaged in automatic mode.
The 10° disengagement angle of the differential lock is set by the software. A different disengagement
angle cannot be set.
The disengagement angle of the 4-wheel drive front axle can be modified during calibration.
NOTE:
If the calibration is not carried out, these functions may not be disengaged when the wheels are turned or
they may disengage at an undesired angle.
Calibration of the angle for the automatic disengagement function of the differential and the 4-
wheel drive: Procedure
NOTE:
This function must be calibrated whenever one of the following elements is replaced or modified:
• Angular sensor in the front axle
• Front axle
• Instrument panel
To select CAL2:
1. Switch on the ignition (do not start the engine).
2. When the function is selected, it is displayed
on a white background.
Within the next five seconds, simultaneously
press keys on the Setup and

Information Screen keypad.
The screen opposite appears with several
icons corresponding to the available
functions:
•
Fig. 13
Calibration of the forward lever
on the armrest. If the OK symbol is
present, calibration was already carried
out.
•
Calibration of the 0 angle for

the automatic disengagement functions
of the differential lock/4-wheel drive and
the disengagement angle for the 4-wheel
drive
•
Clears the calibration values

•
Clears the error codes stored

in the instrument panel

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Calibration of the throttle pedal.

If the OK symbol is present, calibration
was already carried out.
•
Calibration of the clutch pedal.

3.
Select the required function using keys
on the Setup and Information Screen

keypad, and then press OK.
4.
Select the icon, and press . The following screen is displayed:

Calibrating the 0 value of the front wheel angle
5. Start the engine and position the wheels
straight to set the 0 angle.
6.
Press the key on the control

keyboard to store the 0 value for the angle of
the front wheels.
7. The value read at (2) must be identical to the
value at (1).
Fig. 14
(1) Current value in points of the front wheel

angle
(2) Stored value for the 0 position of the front
wheels
(3) Stored value of the 4-wheel drive function
disengagement angle

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Calibrating the disengagement angle of the 4-wheel drive front axle

8. After calibrating the 0 angle for the front
wheels, turn the wheels to the right or left to
set the required disengagement angle.
Example: A difference of 20 points
corresponds to an angle of approximately
10°.
9.
Press the key. The value in points of
the difference between the 0 angle and the
disengagement angle is displayed at (3).
10. Test the disengagement by resetting the
wheels to the 0 angle, engaging the 4-wheel
drive in automatic mode and turning the
steering wheel.
11. If the angle is correct, exit this mode by
pressing the icon on the control keyboard.
Fig. 15
12. If this angle is incorrect, recalibrate the
disengagement angle.
1.2.2.6 Calibration of the forward-travel lever

Calibration of the forward-travel lever
Input at level 2 - CAL 2: Procedure
To select CAL2:
1. Switch on the ignition (do not start the engine).
2. When the function is selected, it is displayed
on a white background.
Within the next five seconds, simultaneously
press keys on the Setup and

Information Screen keypad.
The screen see Fig. 16 appears with
several icons corresponding to the available
functions:
•
Fig. 16
Calibration of the forward lever
on the armrest. If the OK symbol is
present, calibration was already carried
out.
•
Calibration of the automatic

differential disengagement function. If the
OK symbol is present, calibration was
already carried out.
•
Clears the calibration values

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Clears the error codes stored

in the instrument panel
•
Calibration of the throttle pedal.

•
Calibration of the clutch pedal.

3.
Select the required function using keys
on the Setup and Information Screen

keypad, and then press OK.
Calibrating the forward lever on the armrest
4. NOTE:
The calibration of the armrest lever must be
carried out each time one of the following
• Armrest lever potentiometer
Select the icon and press
Fig. 17
. The screen see Fig. 17 is
displayed:
5. The value on the first line indicates the
current position of the lever, i.e. Neutral.
6. Push the lever fully forward to +, and the
value of the first line will change. When the
lever reaches its stop, validate the position
by pressing on the Setup and

Information Screen control keyboard.
7. Move the lever back to Neutral, and the
value on the first line will change back until it
reaches this position. Validate the position by
pressing the key on the Setup and


ACT0021460
1. Introduction
8. Pull the lever fully backward to -, and the

value of the first line will change. When the
lever reaches its stop, validate the position
by pressing on the Setup and

9. When calibration is complete, the values can
be checked by moving the lever to the three
positions +, 0 and - and comparing the value
on the first line with the selected position.
10. To quit this mode, press the key on the
Setup and Information Screen control
keyboard.
11. Switch off the ignition for at least 5
seconds to validate calibration.
NOTE:
If ERROR is displayed, repeat the procedure,
making sure to observe the time of action
and the lever position.
1.2.2.7 Forward speed calibration

Forward speed calibration
General
This calibration allows improved precision of forward speed depending on:
• the different tire sizes available
• radar (if fitted)
Procedure
1. Mark out a distance of 100 m, depending on the selected unit of measurement, on a firm surface.
2. Start up the tractor, and then press and hold the display selector switch (A) for 15 seconds.
NOTE:
The daily hourmeter resets to 0 after 5 seconds.
3. "CAL" should appear on the screen .
4. Drive the tractor forward at normal working
speed.
NOTE:
The tractor must be moving at a constant
speed before starting out on the measured
course. Otherwise, the calibration is not
correct.
5. Press the display selector switch (A) when
the starting line of the 100 m course has
been passed.
Fig. 18

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
6. "run" should appear on the screen .

7. Press the display selector switch (A) when
the finish line of the course has been passed.
8. Press the display selector switch (A). The
constant forward speed (theoretical)
measured during calibration is displayed.
9. Press the display selector switch (A) again.
The actual constant forward speed (radar)
measured during calibration is displayed on
tractors fitted with radar.
10. Press the display selector switch (A) one final
time to return the instrument panel to normal
operating mode. Fig. 19
1.2.2.8 Calibration of the Dyna-4 and Dyna-6 PowerShuttle transmission

Calibration of the Dyna-4 and Dyna-6 PowerShuttle transmission
Conditions for calibration

DANGER:
The tractor must be positioned on flat ground to carry out the calibration procedure.
NOTE: Calibration of the PowerShuttle is mandatory when the following components are changed:
• a PowerShuttle solenoid valve
• the solenoid valve control unit
• the PowerShuttle unit or one of its components
• the transmission controller.
NOTE:
The reduced temperature range allowed for calibration enables the controller to optimize the quality of
shifting by continually correcting it depending on the transmission temperature.
Calibration is automatic, which allows a deft and smooth quality of shifting.
The user can then, depending on requirements, adjust the progressivity of the PowerShuttle.
IMPORTANT: To authorize access to calibration mode, the transmission oil temperature should be
between 35 °C and 45 °C.
The temperature is measured by the sensor fitted on the gearbox.
It can be read in two different ways:
Procedure
1. Scroll through the Setup and Information
Screen screen menus on the instrument
panel in order to display diagnostic screen 1.
2. Read using the diagnostic tool EDT.
Fig. 20

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Warming up to temperature
3. Tractor stationary:
Run the engine with the transmission lever and PowerShuttle lever in neutral and the PTO clutch
engaged.
4. Tractor moving:
Carry out shuttling maneuvers every 5 to 10 seconds, in 2nd or 3rd range.
5. Measure and note the temperature.
6. Before starting calibration, activate the reverse shuttle, moving it 10 times in each direction, leaving
the reverse shuttle lever in each position for 5 to 10 seconds to bring the control unit and solenoid
valves up to the temperature of the transmission.
Automatic calibration
NOTE: At the end of calibration, error 4.X.A2 may be displayed; this does not indicate a calibration
error.
NOTE: To avoid calibration errors, it is important to:
• keep the engine speed set at 1500 rpm ± 100
• keep the Power Control lever in forward position
NOTE: The calibration phase is totally independent of the possible PowerShuttle sensitivity
settings.
7. Release the hand brake.
8. Start the engine
9. Release the clutch pedal.
10. Increase the engine speed to 1500 rpm ± 100 using the hand throttle control, or by activating stored
speed A or B.
11. Operate the following at the same time for at least 10 seconds:
• the PowerShuttle arm to raised position (manual declutching)
• the differential lock switch
NOTE: The transmission temperature must be between 35 °C and 45 °C in order for the calibration to
start.
12. The right-hand screen of the instrument
panel displays Ct, indicating that the
calibration is ready to start.
13. Place the PowerShuttle lever in forward
position to begin the calibration.
14. During calibration, Ct remains displayed on
the right-hand screen of the instrument
panel.
Calibration takes approximately 10 minutes.
Fig. 21

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
15. Calibration is complete when the right-hand

screen of the instrument panel alternately
displays 1A/2A.
16. Calibration is complete when the right-hand
screen of the instrument panel alternately
displays 1C/2C.
17. Place the PowerShuttle lever in neutral and
switch off the engine to confirm the
calibration.
Fig. 22
Immediate validation after calibration
NOTE: Take the PowerShuttle progressivity setting into account. A zero setting will allow the
calibration to be validated correctly.
NOTE: Ensure the differential lock and front axle are disengaged before carrying out any
maneuvers.
18. Carry out 10 forward/reverse PowerShuttle maneuvers.
19. Carry out 10 neutral to forward and neutral to reverse PowerShuttle maneuvers.
20. Assess the quality of the shifting, which should be deft and smooth.
Validation of a tractor that has already been calibrated
NOTE: The transmission temperature must be above 15 °C.
NOTE: Take the PowerShuttle progressivity setting into account. A zero setting will allow the
calibration to be validated correctly.
21. Start the engine
NOTE: Ensure the differential lock and front axle are disengaged before carrying out any maneuvers.
22. Carry out 10 forward/reverse PowerShuttle maneuvers.
23. Carry out 10 neutral to forward and neutral to reverse PowerShuttle maneuvers.
24. Assess the quality of the shifting, which should be deft and smooth.
Calibration faults
NOTE: A fault due to non-compliance of the conditions required to access or maintain calibration
mode will cause errors and poor tractor performance.
Calibration mode access is not provided if:
• the transmission temperature is not correct
• the engine speed is not 1500 rpm ± 100
• the PowerShuttle lever has not been placed in the forward position
• the forward speed is not zero
• the solenoid valve coils are incorrectly connected
The calibration is not correct if:
• the engine speed is not 1500 rpm ± 100
• the gearbox temperature exceeds 60 °C
• the transmission controller label code is incorrect
• the PowerShuttle lever is placed in neutral position

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
NOTE:
If calibration fails, the incorrect parameters or default parameters (in the case of a new
transmission controller) are taken into account.
25. In the event of a fault, perform the calibration again.
1.2.2.9 Calibration of electrohydraulic block

Calibration of electrohydraulic block
General
This calibration provides better progressivity of the electrohydraulic block depending on:
• The sensitivity of the solenoid valves
• The sensitivity of the position sensors
NOTE:
This function must be calibrated every time one of the following components is replaced or modified:
• The controller
• A position sensor on the electrohydraulic block
• The electrohydraulic block
Conditions for calibration

DANGER:
Ensure that tractor is in a place where it can be used in complete safety. Before
calibration, lock the front linkage, unhitch the front loader and the implement hoses at the
auxiliary hydraulic spool valves, if present. During calibration, the electrohydraulic block is
activated. This could lead to an accident if implements are connected.
1. Before performing the calibration, the transmission oil temperature must be greater than 45°C.
2. The park brake must be engaged.
3. The operator presence detector must be activated (operator detected on seat).
4. The auxiliary hydraulics must be unlocked (button in the cab activated).
5. Coupling of the hydraulic pumps (100 l/min) must be activated if available.
6. Lock the front loader valve located by the couplers (front loader mode deactivated).
7. Use a hose to connect the "+" and "-" couplers of each rear hydraulic spool valve no. 1 and no. 2.
Procedure
1. Start the tractor.
2. Increase engine speed to 2200 rpm using the hand throttle control.
3. Select the hydraulic spool valve no. 1 setting
on the instrument panel.
4. Press and hold the manual differential lock
switch for 5 seconds.Calibration starts and
the screen shown opposite appears.
Fig. 23

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
5. The different calibration steps are noted on

the screen. Calibration is automatic and
includes ten steps numbered from one to
ten.
Calibration is completed with "OK" or "ERR".
• "Cal OK": The calibration was successful.
• "Cal ERR": An error occurred during
calibration; check the conditions and
restart calibration.
6. Stop the tractor to exit calibration mode.
Fig. 24
1.2.2.10 Calibrations to be carried out using the diagnostic tool
Calibration of the FingerTIP controls on the armrest

Calibration of the FingerTIP controls on the armrest
Description of the calibration screen
Fig. 25
(1) Selection of the FingerTip control to be (5) Step to follow during calibration
calibrated (6) Calibration status information message
(2) Indication of the FingerTIP position (7) Start button or to confirm the various steps
(3) FingerTIP position value (8) Button used to exit calibration
(4) An information icon is displayed once the
calibration is complete

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Selecting the calibration
Fig. 26
(1) Calibration of the FingerTIPs (2) Start calibration
1. Select FingerTIP.
Fig. 26
(1) Calibration of the FingerTIPs (2) Start calibration
2. Then click on button (2) to display the screen to select the position of the FingerTIP controls to be
calibrated.

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Fig. 27
(1) Selecting the FingerTIP controls on the (3) Close the screen
armrest
(2) Selecting the FingerTIP controls on the
console
3. Click start at (1) to begin the calibration.
Fig. 27
(1) Selecting the FingerTIP controls on the (3) Close the screen
armrest
(2) Selecting the FingerTIP controls on the
console

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Calibration
Fig. 28
4. Select the FingerTIP control to be calibrated at (1).
5. The values and position at (2) and (3) change when the FingerTIP control is moved.
6. Click start at (7).
Fig. 29
7. During calibration, no information is displayed in boxes (2) and (3).
8. The various calibration steps are displayed at (5).
9. Maintain the position displayed at (5) then click on the continuer (continue) button at (7).
10. The next step will be displayed at (5).

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Fig. 30
11. Once the calibration is complete, a message confirming successful calibration is displayed at (6) and
an icon is displayed at (4).
12. To exit the calibration, use button (8).
Joystick calibration
Joystick calibration
Fig. 31
(1)) Selecting the axis to be calibrated (6) Step to follow during calibration
(2) Indication of the joystick position (7) An information icon is displayed once the
(3) Joystick position value calibration is complete
(4) Start button or to confirm the various steps (8) Button used to exit calibration
(5) Calibration status information message

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Fig. 32
(1) Joystick calibration (2) Start calibration
1. Select joystick
Fig. 32
(1) Joystick calibration (2) Start calibration
2. Then click on the button (2) to start calibration

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Calibration
Fig. 33
3. The joystick position is displayed at (2). The joystick position value is displayed at (3).
4. Select the axis to be calibrated (1).
5. Then click the start button (4).
Fig. 34
6. During calibration, no information is displayed in boxes (2) and (3).
8. Maintain the position displayed at (6) then click on the continue button at (4).

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Fig. 35
Calibrating the hand throttle.

Calibrating the hand throttle.
Fig. 36
(1) Hand throttle position value (4) Information icon displayed once the
(2) Start button or button to confirm the various calibration is complete
steps (5) Button used to exit calibration
(3) Step to follow during calibration (6) Calibration status information message

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Fig. 37
(1) Calibrating the hand throttle. (2) Start calibration
1. Select hand throttle.
Fig. 37
(1) Calibrating the hand throttle. (2) Start calibration
2. Then click on the button (2) to begin the calibration.

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Calibration
Fig. 38
3. During calibration, no information is displayed in box (1).
4. Click start at (2).
Fig. 39
7. To exit the calibration, click on button (5).
Calibrating the depth control thumb wheel

Calibrating the depth control thumb wheel

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Fig. 40
(1) Depth control thumb wheel position value (4) Calibration status information message
(2) Step to follow during calibration (5) Start button or to confirm the various steps
(3) An information icon is displayed once the (6) Button used to exit calibration
calibration is complete
Fig. 41
(1) Calibrating the depth control thumb wheel (2) Start calibration
1. Select depth control thumb wheel

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Fig. 41
(1) Calibrating the depth control thumb wheel (2) Start calibration
2. Then click on the button (2) to start calibration
Calibration
Fig. 42
3. Begin the calibration by clicking on start at (5).
4. During calibration, no value is displayed at (1).
6. Maintain the position displayed at (2) then click on the continue button at (5).

ACT0021460
1. Introduction
Fig. 43

ACT0021460
1. Introduction

ACT0021460
Table of contents
2. Separation of assemblies
2.1 Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.1.1 Removing and refitting the front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2 Front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.1 Removing/refitting the fixed front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2 Removing and refitting the front axle and front suspension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.2.2 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.2.3 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.2.2.4 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3 Cooling unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3.1 Removing - Refitting the cooling unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3.1.1 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.4 Front frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.4.1 Removing and refitting the front frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.4.1.1 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.5 Engine cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.5.1 Removing/refitting the engine cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.5.1.1 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.6 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.6.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.6.2 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.7 Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.7.1 Removing/refitting the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.7.1.1 Refitting the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.8 Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.8.1 Removing and refitting the cab (4-cylinder engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.8.1.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.8.1.2 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.9 Rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.9.1 Removing the rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.9.1.1 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.10 Rear power take-off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.10.1 Removing/refitting the GPA50 rear power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.10.1.1 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

ACT0021460
Table of contents

ACT0021460
2.1 Front linkage

2.1.1 Removing and refitting the front linkage
Removal
1. Place the front linkage in low position to assist disassembly.
2. Open the engine cover.
3. Remove the top link.
4. Mark and remove the electrical connector (1).
Fig. 1
5. Disconnect the connector of the front PTO

solenoid valve (1).
Fig. 2

ACT0021460
6. Unscrew the screw (1) that holds the front

coupler support.
7. Remove the front coupler oil recovery unit.
Fig. 3
8. Unscrew the 3 screws (1) attached to the
front linkage (tightening torque: 280 Nm and
Loctite 270).
9. Unscrew the 7 other screws on the side
member (tightening torque: 280 Nm and
Loctite 270).
10. Carry out the same operations on the second
side member.
Fig. 4
11. For tractors fitted with front PTO, see step
see step 12, page 2-4 . Otherwise, refer to
step see step 14, page 2-5 .
12. Remove the side protective grille to access
the PTO shaft.
13. Unscrew the locking screw (1) on the sleeve
(tightening torque: 85 Nm and Loctite 241).
Fig. 5

ACT0021460
14. CAUTION:
Make sure the residual pressure
in the hydraulic system is
released before disconnecting a
hose.
Mark and disconnect the hoses of the lift
rams (1) and (2) (tightening torque 70 Nm).
15. Fit plugs on each of the ports to prevent
contamination and minimize oil loss.
Fig. 6
16. Sling the front linkage assembly as shown in
the photo.
Fig. 7
17. Unscrew the two screws (2) (tightening

torque: 560 Nm and Loctite 270).
18. Unscrew the two nuts (1) (tightening torque:
560 Nm and Loctite 270).
Fig. 8

ACT0021460
19. Remove the linkage assembly by pulling it

forward.
Refitting
20. Follow the removal steps in reverse order to
refit.
Fig. 9

ACT0021460
2.2 Front axle

2.2.1 Removing/refitting the fixed front axle
Removal
1. Raise the front of the tractor.
2. Place two axle stands under the engine oil
sump .
3. Remove the two front wheels (tightening
torque 450 Nm).
Fig. 10
4. Unscrew the four screws (1) on the front
mudguard support.
5. Remove the mudguard.
mudguard.
7. Remove the wheel steering sensor support.
Fig. 11
8. Remove the cooling unit.
9. For tractors fitted with a front power take-off, move the front linkage aside 40 mm.

ACT0021460
10. Unscrew the two screws (1) on the 4-wheel

drive shaft guard.
11. Place an axle stand under the 4-wheel drive
shaft guard to support it.
Fig. 12
12. Unscrew the locknut (1) on the connecting
sleeve (2).
13. Move the sleeve (2) back in order to free the
shaft.
Fig. 13
14. CAUTION:
hose.
Mark and disconnect the hose (1) (tightening
torque 70 Nm).
16. Carry out the same operations on the two
remaining hoses on the other side of the
axle.
Fig. 14

ACT0021460
17. Sling the front axle as follows, using

appropriate lifting equipment .
Fig. 15
18. Unscrew the four screws (1) (tightening

torque 560 Nm and Loctite 270).
Fig. 16

ACT0021460
19. Remove the grease nipple (1) for easier

removal of the front bearing.
Fig. 17
20. Remove the front bearing .

21. Remove the front axle.
Fig. 18
Refitting
22. Refit in reverse order to the removal steps and grease the two front axle bearings.
2.2.2 Removing and refitting the front axle and front suspension assembly
General

ACT0021460
The front wheels and mudguards must be

removed before removing the front axle and front
suspension assembly.
Fig. 19
2.2.2.1 Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Chock the tractor, place it on axle stands located under the engine spacer and remove the front
wheels and the mudguards.
2. Lower the pressure in the steering cylinder.
2.2.2.2 Removal
Procedure
1. Fit two M16 lifting rings on each side of the
tractor, as shown in the diagram.
Fig. 20

ACT0021460
2. Keep the front axle and suspension assembly

in position using the four lifting rings and
straps with sufficient capacity. (C).
Fig. 21
3. (Fig 1) Remove the screws, the plate and the

guard from the right-hand and left-hand
suspension frames.
4. (Fig 2) Remove the pins from the right-hand
and left-hand suspension frames. A slide
hammer puller can be used, fitted where the
grease nipple is located.
5. (Fig 3) Remove the lower screws from the
right-hand and left-hand suspension rams.
6. (Fig 4) Remove the lower pins from the right-
hand and left-hand suspension rams. A slide
Fig. 22
7. Move away the left-hand and right-hand
suspension rams.
8. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the
steering cylinder and the front differential
lock.
9. Remove the transmission shaft from the
front axle.
Fig. 23

ACT0021460
10. Lower the front axle using a lifting tool, and

slide it under the tractor to release it.
Fig. 24
2.2.2.3 Refitting
Procedure
1. Carry out the removal steps in reverse order.
No difficulties to report.
Fig. 25
2. (Fig 1) Fit the pins onto the right-hand and

left-hand suspension frames.
3. (Fig 2) Fit the screws smeared with
(LOCTITE 270), the plate and the guard onto
the right-hand and left-hand suspension
frames. Tighten the M16 screws to a torque
of 350 Nm ± 50 Nm and the M12 screws to
a torque of 105 Nm ± 15 Nm .
4. (Fig 3) Fit the lower pins onto the right-hand
and left-hand suspension rams.
5. (Fig 4) Fit the lower screws smeared with
(LOCTITE 270) onto the right-hand and left-
hand suspension rams. Tighten the screws
Fig. 26
to a torque of 105 Nm ± 15 Nm .
2.2.2.4 Final steps
Procedure
1. Remove the lifting rings.

2. Fit the front transmission shaft.
3. Fit the hydraulic hoses onto the steering cylinder, tightening torque for the unions 50 Nm, and onto
the front differential lock, tightening torque 45 Nm.

ACT0021460
4. Refit the wheels and the mudguards.

5. Check that there are no leaks from the hydraulic unions.

ACT0021460
2.3 Cooling unit

2.3.1 Removing - Refitting the cooling unit
Removal
Procedure
1. Remove the engine cover.
2. Drain the air conditioning system.
3. Drain the coolant system.
4. Remove the engine side protection grilles.
Fig. 27
5. Disconnect the horn wiring harness (1).
6. Mark and disconnect the fuel pipes (2) and
(3).
Fig. 28

ACT0021460
7. Remove the flanges (1).

8. Remove the support (2).
Fig. 29
9. Loosen the air conditioning unions (1) and (2).
Fig. 30
10. Mark and disconnect the oil cooler hoses (1)

and (2).
Fig. 31

ACT0021460
11. Remove the four screws.

12. Remove the air conditioning condenser and
oil/fuel cooler assembly.
Fig. 32
13. Remove the hoses (1), (2), (3) and (4).
Fig. 33
14. Remove the hoses (1) and (2).

15. Remove the expansion tank.
Fig. 34

ACT0021460
16. Sling the cooling unit.
Fig. 35
17. Loosen the four fixing screws on the radiator

support.
18. Remove the cooling unit.
NOTE:
Move the cooling unit forward before raising
so as not to damage the fan.
Fig. 36
2.3.1.1 Reassembly
Procedure
1. To refit the cooling unit, perform the removal operations in reverse order
2. Check the transmission oil level; top it up if necessary.

ACT0021460
2.4 Front frame

2.4.1 Removing and refitting the front frame
Removal
Procedure
1. Raise the front of the tractor.
2. Place two axle stands under the engine oil
sump.
3. Remove the two front wheels (tightening
torque 450 Nm).
Fig. 37
4. Unscrew the four screws (1) on the front
mudguard support.
5. Remove the mudguard.
mudguard.
7. Remove the wheel steering sensor support.
Fig. 38

ACT0021460
10. Unscrew the two screws (1) securing the 4-

wheel drive shaft guard
11. Place an axle stand under the 4-wheel drive
shaft guard to support it.
Fig. 39
sleeve (2).
shaft.
Fig. 40
14. CAUTION:
hose.
torque 70 Nm).
axle.
Fig. 41

ACT0021460
Fig. 42
18. Disconnect the horn wiring harness (1).

19. Mark and disconnect the fuel pipes (2) and
(3).
Fig. 43
20. Remove the flanges (1).
21. Remove the support (2).
Fig. 44

ACT0021460
22. Loosen the air conditioning unions (1) and (2).

23. Remove the protective grilles for side access
to the engine.
Fig. 45
24. Remove the hoses (1), (2), (3) and (4).
Fig. 46
25. Remove the hoses (1) and (2).
Fig. 47

ACT0021460
26. For tractors fitted with a front linkage or a

front-end loader, see step see step 27, page
2-23 , otherwise refer to step see step 34,
page 2-23 .
27. Sling the side member.
28. Unscrew the attachment screws on the side
member (tightening torque: 280 Nm and
Loctite 270). Remove the side member.
side member.
30. Disconnect the front linkage harness.
Fig. 48
31. CAUTION:
hose.
Mark and disconnect the hoses (1) and (2).
33. Disassemble the flanges (3).
Fig. 49
34. Mark and disconnect the pipes (1).
36. Remove the flange (2).
Fig. 50

ACT0021460
37. For tractors fitted with front PTO, see step

see step 38, page 2-24 , otherwise refer to
38. Unscrew the locking screw (1) on the sleeve
(tightening torque: 85 Nm and Loctite 241).
Fig. 51
39. Stop the front axle swinging by placing a
suitable chock at each side of it.
Fig. 52
40. Sling the entire front frame and weight frame

or front linkage.
Fig. 53

ACT0021460
Fig. 54
41. Unscrew the attachment screws from the front frame (tightening torque: 280 Nm).
42. Remove the assembly.
2.4.1.1 Reassembly
Procedure
1. Fit a centring stud at each side of the engine
to facilitate reassembly.
2. To refit the front frame, carry out the removal
steps in reverse order.
3. Check the transmission oil level; top it up if
necessary.
Fig. 55

ACT0021460
2.5 Engine cover

2.5.1 Removing/refitting the engine cover
Removal
Procedure
1. Clean the top of the engine cover.
2. Position the suction pads on the front of the
engine cover.
3. Sling the engine cover.
Fig. 56
5. Remove the retaining strap.
6. Disconnect the engine cover harness
connector.
Fig. 57

ACT0021460
7. Unclip the four ram ball joint clips as shown.

8. Remove the two engine cover rams.
Fig. 58
9. Loosen the four nuts (1).
10. Remove the two engine cover flanges (2).
Fig. 59
Fig. 60

ACT0021460
2.5.1.1 Refitting
Procedure
Refit by carrying out the removal steps in reverse order.

ACT0021460
2.6 Engine
2.6.1 Removal
Procedure
1. Apply the hand brake.
2. For tractors fitted with a suspended front axle, deactivate this function.
5. Move the cab away from the engine approximately 150 mm to access the coolant pipes and the
engine/gearbox connecting screws under the cab.
6. Unscrew the two air conditioning hoses (1)
and (2) (tightening torque: (2) 38 Nm and (1)
17 Nm).
7. Disconnect the fuel pipe (3).
Fig. 61
8. Remove the turbocharger guard (1).
9. Disconnect the sensor (2).
10. Disassemble the exhaust (3).
Fig. 62

ACT0021460
12. Mark and disconnect the heating pipes (1) (2)

(3) (4) and (5) located behind the engine.
13. Remove the protective grilles for side access
to the engine.
14. Disconnect the battery.
Fig. 63
15. Disconnect:
• The wiring harness connectors (1)
• The coolant pipe (2)
• The engine controller connectors (3)
16. Remove the engine cover support assembly
(4).
Fig. 64
17. Disconnect the harness from the following:
• Alternator
• Starter
• Negative cable

ACT0021460
18. CAUTION:
hose.
For tractors fitted with a suspended front
axle, disconnect the pipes (1), (2) and (3)
from the suspension unit.
19. For tractors fitted with a front linkage or a
front-end loader, see step 20, page 2-31 ,
otherwise see step 27, page 2-32 .
Fig. 65
20. Move the fuel tank aside.
21. Remove
• The exhaust guards (2) and the DEF or
AdBlue™™ module
• The all-in-one catalyzer (3)
Fig. 66
22. Sling the side member.

23. Loosen the mounting screws on the side
member (1) (tightening torque: 280 Nm and
Loctite 270). Remove the side member.
side member.
25. CAUTION:
hose.
Disconnect the front linkage hoses.
26. Disconnect the front coupler hoses.
Fig. 67

ACT0021460
27. CAUTION:
hose.
Mark and disconnect the steering hoses
(tightening torque 70 Nm).
Fig. 68
29. Disconnect the differential pipe (1).
30. Remove the 4-wheel drive guard (2).
31. Uncouple the drive shaft from the front axle.
Fig. 69
32. Mark and disconnect hoses (1) and (2) .
Fig. 70

ACT0021460

Fig. 71
35. Place a mobile axle stand (1) under the

engine sump.
36. Position a fixed axle stand (2) under the
gearbox.
37. Chock the rear of the tractor to prevent any
rocking.
Fig. 72
38. Loosen the engine/gearbox coupling screws
(1) and nuts (2) (tightening torque: screw
115 Nm and Loctite 270, nut 140 Nm).
39. Move the engine aside.
NOTE:
To make reassembly easier, fit a centring
stud on each side of the transmission.
Fig. 73

ACT0021460
40. Position an axle stand (1) under the rear

bearing of the front axle.
41. Position an axle stand (2) under the front
hitch.
Fig. 74
42. Tighten the M16 lifting rings as shown.
43. Sling the engine.
Fig. 75
44. Disconnect the engine from the front frame.
2.6.2 Refitting
Procedure
1. To refit the assembly, carry out the removal steps in reverse order.
2. Check the transmission oil level.
3. Check the operation of the tractor.
4. Check that there are no leaks.

ACT0021460
2.7 Gearbox
2.7.1 Removing/refitting the gearbox
Removal
1. Remove the DEF or AdBlue™™ tank (1) and
the fuel tank (2).
2. Remove the tank supports.
Fig. 76
3. Remove the turbocharger guard (1).
4. Disconnect the sensor (2).
5. Disassemble the exhaust (3).
Fig. 77
6. Remove
• The battery box (1)
• The exhaust guards (3) and the DEF or
AdBlue™™ module
• The all-in-one catalytic converter (3)
7. Drain the transmission; see the part
concerning the hydraulic drain operation in
the Maintenance chapter of the Operator's
Manual.
Fig. 78

ACT0021460
8. CAUTION:
hose.
torque 70 Nm).
axle.
Fig. 79
11. For tractors fitted with a suspended front axle, see step see step 12, page 2-36 , otherwise
see step 13, page 2-36
12. Disconnect the differential pipe (1).
13. Remove the 4-wheel drive guard (2).
14. Uncouple the drive shaft from the front axle.
Fig. 80
15. Remove the 4-wheel drive guard.
sleeves (2).
17. Push back the sleeves (2) in order to release
the shaft.
18. Remove the drive shaft from the front axle.
Fig. 81
19. For tractors with Mid Mounted, remove the Mid Mounted unit.

ACT0021460
20. Remove the flanges (1) and (2).

21. Disconnect and remove the front differential
supply pipe (3).
22. If the tractor is fitted with a front linkage and/
or a suspended front axle, remove the pipes
concerned.
Fig. 82
23. Unscrew the cooler pipe (1).
24. Unscrew the cooler pipe (2).
Fig. 83
25. Mark and disconnect the transmission harness.

ACT0021460

Fig. 84
27. Place a fixed axle stand (1) under the rear

axle.
transmission.
29. Place an axle stand under the rear hitch to
prevent any movement.
Fig. 85
30. Unscrew the screws (1) securing the
gearbox and the rear axle (tightening torque
31. Separate the gearbox from the rear axle.
Fig. 86

ACT0021460
32. Sling the transmission.
Fig. 87
33. Loosen the engine/gearbox coupling screws

(1) and nuts (2) (tightening torque: screw
115 Nm and Loctite 270, nut 140 Nm).
34. Remove the transmission.
NOTE: To make reassembly easier, fit a
centring stud on each side of the
transmission.
Fig. 88
2.7.1.1 Refitting the gearbox
Procedure
1. To refit the assembly, carry out the removal steps in reverse order.
2. Top up the coolant level.
3. Top up the transmission level.
4. Bleed the brake system.
5. Check the operation of the transmission and the front and rear hydraulic systems.

ACT0021460
2.8 Cab
2.8.1 Removing and refitting the cab (4-cylinder engine)
General
The operation consists of removing the cab, which
allows access to all the transmission components.
IMPORTANT: Any locknuts that have been
removed must be changed.
Fig. 89
2.8.1.1 Removal
Procedure
3. Remove the rear wheels (tightening torque:
450 Nm).
4. Place axle stands under the rear drive units .
Fig. 90

ACT0021460
5. Unscrew the two air conditioning hoses (1)

and (2) (tightening torque: (2) 38 Nm and (1)
17 Nm).
Fig. 91
6. Place suitable clamps on the coolant hoses

(1) located on the front right-hand side of the
cab.
7. Mark and disconnect the hoses.
Fig. 92
9. Remove the earth cables (1).
10. Disassemble the cab harness connectors (2).
Fig. 93

ACT0021460
11. Disconnect the hoses:

• (1) Supply to the steering spool valve.
• (2) Steering spool valve return.
• (3) Supply to master cylinder.
• The control hose of the trailer brake spool
valve, if fitted.
Fig. 94
12. Disconnect the right (1) and left (2) brake

hoses.
13. Disconnect the hand brake cable (3).
14. Mark and disconnect the auxiliary spool valve
cables (4).
Fig. 95
15. Disconnect the fuel tank vent pipe.
16. Remove the trailer connector.
17. Sling the front of the cab .
NOTE: The sling points are the supports of
the hand rails for the front lights.
Fig. 96

ACT0021460
18. Sling the rear of the cab.

NOTE: The sling points are the rear arch
rings.
Fig. 97
19. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the cab is

balanced correctly to keep it from swinging
when lifted.
Exert force on anchor points (1) and (2) of the
beam to keep the cab from tipping.
20. Raise the cab slightly to tension the straps.
Fig. 98
21. Unscrew the two screws (1) (tightening
torque: 115 Nm + Loctite 270).
Fig. 99

ACT0021460
22. For tractors fitted with a suspended cab,

see step 28, page 2-44 otherwise
see step 23, page 2-44
23. Unscrew the screws (1) (tightening torque:)
115 Nm.
24. Carry out the same operation on the other
side.
Fig. 100
25. Unscrew the screws (1) (tightening torque:)
115 Nm.
side.
27. see step 31, page 2-45 .
Fig. 101
28. Remove the screw (1) (tightening torque:
185 Nm).
29. Unscrew the screw (2) (tightening torque:)
105 Nm.
30. Carry out the same operations on the other
side.
Fig. 102

ACT0021460
31. Raise the cab slightly and move it back carefully until the cab can be raised without damaging the
engine cover.
32. Mark and unscrew the steering hoses (1) and
(2) (tightening torque:) 37 Nm.
Fig. 103
34. Disconnect the return hose (1).
Fig. 104
35. CAUTION:
Check that all the components connected to the cab have been disconnected.
Remove the cab.
2.8.1.2 Refitting
Procedure
1. To refit the cab, carry out the steps in reverse order.

2. Check the coolant level and top up if necessary.
3. Check the transmission oil level and top up if necessary.
4. Bleed the main brakes and the trailer brake, if fitted.
5. Using a pressure gage tool, check the adjustment of the auxiliary spool valves.

ACT0021460
2.9 Rear axle

2.9.1 Removing the rear axle
NOTE: For tractors equipped with a 4-cylinder engine, remove the cab.
Procedure
2. Drain the transmission; see the part concerning the hydraulic drain operation in the Maintenance
chapter of the Operator's Manual.
3. Remove the rear wheels (tightening torque
450 Nm).
4. Place the rear axle on an axle stand.
Fig. 105
5. Remove the fuel tank.
6. Remove the rear support of the fuel tank.
7. Remove the flanges (1) and (2).
8. Disconnect and remove the front differential
supply pipe (3).
Fig. 106

ACT0021460
9. Remove the 4-wheel drive guard.

10. Unscrew the locknut (1) on the rear
connecting sleeve (2).
shaft.
Fig. 107
12. Disconnect the right (1) and left (2) brake
hoses.
13. Disconnect the hand brake cable (3).
14. Mark and disconnect the auxiliary spool valve
cables (4).
Fig. 108
15. Remove the trailer connector.
Fig. 109

ACT0021460
16. Unscrew the hoses (1) and (2).

17. If equipped with a trailer brake, disconnect
the hose (3).
Fig. 110
18. Unscrew the pipe (1).
19. Unscrew the pipe (2).
Fig. 111
20. Disconnect the earth cables (1).
21. Disconnect the connector (2) from the
transmission harness.
Fig. 112

ACT0021460
22. Disconnect the transmission harness connectors.

suitable chock at each side of it .
Fig. 113
24. Place a fixed axle stand (1) under the rear

axle.
transmission.
26. Place an axle stand under the rear hitch to
prevent any movement.
Fig. 114

ACT0021460
27. Sling the rear of the cab .

NOTE: The sling points are the rear arch
rings.
Fig. 115
28. For tractors fitted with a suspended cab, see

29. Unscrew the screws (1) (tightening torque:
115 Nm).
side.
Fig. 116
31. Unscrew the screws (1) (tightening torque:
115 Nm).
side.
33. Proceed directly to step see step 36, page
2-51 .
Fig. 117

ACT0021460
34. Remove the screw (1) (tightening torque:

185 Nm).
35. Unscrew the screw (2) (tightening torque:
105 Nm).
Fig. 118
36. Unscrew the screws (1) (tightening torque
37. Move the front section of the tractor
forward.
Fig. 119
38. Place the cab on an axle stand (1).
Fig. 120

ACT0021460
2.9.1.1 Reassembly
Procedure
1. To refit the rear axle, carry out steps see Reassembly step 1, page 2-46 to see Reassembly step 38,
page 2-51 in reverse order.
2. Check the transmission level and bleed the brake system.
3. Check the operation of the hydraulic components disconnected during the operation.

ACT0021460
2.10 Rear power take-off (PTO)

2.10.1 Removing/refitting the GPA50 rear power take-off
Disassembly
Procedure
1. Place a lift table under the rear hitch
assembly.
Fig. 121
2. Unscrew the screws (1) (tightening torque

280 Nm and Loctite 270) of the rear hitch.
3. Remove the assembly.
Fig. 122

ACT0021460
4. Mark and disconnect the electrical

connectors (1).
Fig. 123
5. Drain the transmission by removing the plug

(1).
Fig. 124
6. IMPORTANT:
For two-speed PTOs, the PTO speed position
sensor will be located at (1).
For three-speed PTOs, the PTO speed
position sensor will be located at (2).
Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Remove the sensor (shown here at (1)).
Fig. 125

ACT0021460
8. Replace the screws (2) with studs.

9. Unscrew the screws (1) from the PTO
housing and move it aside by 10 mm
(tightening torque 115 Nm and Loctite 270).
Fig. 126
10. Fit service tool 4346862M1 (1).
11. Remove the housing by following along the
studs installed previously.
Fig. 127
12. Ensure that the pipes (1) are correctly
positioned after removing the housing.
Fig. 128

ACT0021460
2.10.1.1 Reassembly
Procedure
1. Apply Loctite 5206 sealing paste or equivalent to the mating face.

2. To refit the power take-off, carry out the removal steps in reverse order.
3. Test the PTO.

ACT0021460
Table of contents
3. Engine
3.1 Tier 4F/Stage IV SCR Technology engine 4 cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.1.1 Notice to the technician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.1.2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.1.3 Description of engine types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.1.4 Location of the engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.1.5 Lifting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.2.1 General operating diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.1.2.2 Mechanical part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.2.3 Exhaust and intake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.2.4 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.1.2.5 Lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.1.2.6 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.1.2.7 Electric control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.1.2.8 CCV (Closed Crankcase Ventilation) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.1.3 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.1.3.1 Layout of components in the engine environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.1.4 Tests and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.1.4.1 Measuring the engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.1.5 Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1.5.1 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1.5.2 Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1.6 Disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.1.6.1 AGCO Power Workshop Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.1.7 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.1.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.1.7.2 Cylinder block tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.1.7.3 Timing gear and flywheel housing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.1.7.4 Cylinder head and valve mechanism tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.1.7.5 Crank mechanism tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.1.7.6 Coolant pump tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.1.7.7 Engine control system tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.1.7.8 Maintenance and troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.2 SCR Technology 3rd generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.2.1.1 Notice to the technician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.2.1.2 Safety instructions for DEF or AdBlue™™ . Identification of hazards . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.2.1.3 Abbreviations or terms used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.2.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.2.2.1 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.2.2.2 Layout of the SCR Technology system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.2.3 Schematic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.2.3.1 Simplified diagram of the SCR Technology system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.2.3.2 Detailed diagram of the SCR Technology system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.2.4.1 Description of SCR Technology system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.2.5.1 Removing the module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.2.5.2 Refitting the module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.2.5.3 Removing the injector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
ACT0021460
Table of contents
3.2.5.4 Refitting the injector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

3.2.5.5 Removing the solenoid valve for the DEF or AdBlue™™ cooling system . . . . . . 3-45
3.2.5.6 Refitting the solenoid valve for the DEF or AdBlue™™ cooling system . . . . . . . 3-46
3.2.5.7 Removing the DEF or AdBlue™™ tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.2.5.8 Refitting the DEF or AdBlue™™ reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.2.5.9 Removing the DEF or AdBlue™™ gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.2.5.10 Removing the catalyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.2.5.11 Refitting the catalyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.6.2 3rd generation SCR engine - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1 Tier 4F/Stage IV SCR Technology engine 4 cylinders

3.1.1 General
3.1.1.1 Notice to the technician

Engines in the Tier 4 Final/Stage IV phase are generally constructed to the same model: the repair
instructions will therefore usually apply to different engine types. The differences between engine types
that do affect repair work are explained in the technical specifications and repair instructions. All
measurements are made in millimeters and are valid when the room temperature is +20°C, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.1.1.2 Safety instructions

When using and servicing an engine, there is always a risk of injury. Before carrying out any servicing work,
make sure you have read and correctly understood the following safety instructions and information!
• Do not begin any repair work until you have completely understood the procedure.
• Ensure that the location chosen to carry out the repair work, as well as the immediate surroundings,
provide a safe working environment.
• Always check that the space is clean and tidy.
• Do not use faulty or unsuitable tools.
• Remove any jewelry (rings, chains and watches) before starting.
• Use new protective equipment during the operation. For example, wear safety goggles for protection
when using compressed air for cleaning, grinding, striking etc.
• Use a lifting device to raise and transport heavy items (more than 20 kg). Make sure all lifting hooks and
chains are in good condition. The engine lifting rings should not be subjected to lateral forces during
lifting.
• Never work beneath an engine raised by a lifting device or jack. Always check that supports are sound
before starting.
• Only use genuine Massey Ferguson spare parts.
• Only start the engine using the start switch in the cab.
• Do not start the engine unless all protective covers are fitted.
NOTE:
It is difficult to see the fan clearly while the engine is running! Make sure baggy clothes and long hair
cannot be caught up in the rotating parts of the engine.
• If the engine is running in a closed space, make sure the ventilation system is operating correctly.
• Never use aerosol as a cold-starting aid! (risk of explosion)
• When the engine is running or when working close to machinery, use ear protection to prevent hearing
loss.
• Always stop the engine before starting any maintenance or repair work.
• Take care not to touch the exhaust manifold, turbocharger or any other hot part of the engine.
• Take care when opening the radiator cap if the engine is still hot, because the cooling system is
pressurized. The coolant and lubricating oil of a hot engine can cause injury on contact with skin.
• Keep naked flames, smoke and sparks away from the fuel system and batteries at all times, especially
when charging the batteries, because there is a risk of explosion.
• Always disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal when maintaining or repairing the electrical circuit.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
• At temperatures above 300°C for example, if the engine is on fire, the fluorocarbon elastomer engine
seals (i.e. the "O" ring on the lower cylinder liner) emit hydrofluoric acid, which is highly corrosive. Do
not touch the fluorinated rubber seals with your bare hands when they are exposed to excessively high
temperatures. Always wear neoprene or reinforced gloves and protective goggles for decontamination
work. Wash the seals and the contaminated area with a 10% calcium hydroxide solution or other alkali
solution. Place any materials that you remove in sealed plastic bags and take them to the appropriate
disposal site specified by the authorities concerned.
NOTE:
Never burn fluorinated rubber seals to destroy them!
• When checking the fuel injectors, do not allow the jet of high-pressure fuel to come into contact with
skin. If fuel penetrates the skin, it can cause serious injury. Seek medical advice immediately!
• Fuel, lubricating oil and coolant can cause prolonged irritation if they come into contact with skin.
• When welding or carrying out similar operations requiring a high voltage current, it is strongly
recommended that you disconnect the main connector of the EEM3 control unit before starting.
• Avoid running the engine at idle speed unnecessarily.
• Do not allow oil or any other liquid to spill on the floor during engine maintenance.
• All engine seals are asbestos-free.
• Take care when cleaning the engine with high-pressure cleaning equipment. Do not use high-pressure
equipment to wash electrical equipment, the fuel system, the radiator etc. because they are very
fragile.
3.1.1.3 Description of engine types

(1) Tier 4 Final/Stage IV
(2) Turbo with wastegate
(3) Exhaust treatment system
(4) Cubic capacity in decilitres
Fig. 1
3.1.1.4 Location of the engine serial number

The engine serial number is always embossed on
the cylinder block as shown in the illustration.
Fig. 2

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.1.5 Lifting the engine

The engine can be lifted safely using a mechanism
that applies vertical lifting force to the lifting rings
(A).
Fig. 3

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.2 Principles of operation
3.1.2.1 General operating diagram
Fig. 4
(1) Temperature sensor (12) EGR valve
(2) Exhaust SCR Technology and DOC (14) Pressure and temperature sensor
(catalyseur d'oxydation diesel) (15) NOx sensor
(3) NOx sensor (16) Temperature sensor
(4) Temperature sensor (18) Turbo with controlled pressure relief cap
(5) Air filter (23) Coolant line of DEF or AdBlue™™ gage
(6) Air to air heat exchanger (24) DEF or AdBlue™™ gage
(7) DEF or AdBlue™™ line between gage and (25) Engine auxiliary CAN network
module (26) DEF or AdBlue™™ pipe between injector and
(8) tank control module
(9) DEF or AdBlue™™ system control module (27) Coolant line of the injector
(10) injector

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.2.2 Mechanical part

The Tier 4F/Stage IV SCR Technology engine used
is a diesel engine with in-line cylinders, water
cooling and four or six cylinders, depending on the
cubic capacity. The engine has one or two
turbochargers depending on the cubic capacity.
This engine has a rigid and splined cylinder block.
The mobile engine parts are able to withstand
boost pressure. The cylinder head screws are
highly resistant to traction.
Fig. 5
Cylinder block
The cylinder block is the main component of the engine, and the other engine parts are attached to it. The
wet, replaceable cylinder liners are supported by the middle in order to reduce vibration and essentially
direct the coolant flow toward the top of the liners.
"O" rings are fitted in the grooves of the cylinder block on these engines. The top part is sealed by the
cylinder head seal.
The camshaft is located in the cylinder block. On these engines, separate bearing sleeves are fitted on all
camshaft bearing locations. The drilled port at the rear end of the camshaft is blocked with a plug.
Spaces on both sides of the rear bearing allow guide-bearing shims to be fitted (crankshaft thrust bearings).
Flywheel housing
The flywheel housing is fitted at the back of the cylinder block. The seal at the rear end of the crankshaft is
fitted into a bore in the housing. The starter attachment point is fitted in the flywheel housing.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
The lower part of the flywheel housing functions as a friction surface for the oil sump seal. For this reason,
the lower part of the cylinder block must be fitted at the same level as the flywheel housing. When
installing the flywheel housing, its position is determined by tensioning pins.
Valve mechanism
The valve mechanism is activated by the camshaft located in the cylinder block. Movement is transmitted
via the valve lifters and rocker arm rods. The camshaft gear is fitted with a nut and fixed with a key. Each
bearing is lubricated by the pressurized lubricating system via oil channels drilled in the cylinder block.
Cylinder head, 4 V engines

The engines used are fitted with two cylinder heads. Each cylinder has four valves. The injector may be
located in the middle of the four valves. The injector is fitted vertically at the center of the cylinder, in the
middle of the combustion chamber. This allows a precise, homogenous mix of fuel and air, and ensures
that the clean and low emission combustion takes place efficiently.
Each cylinder has its own inlet and exhaust ports located to either side of the cylinder head. Each cylinder
has its own inlet port, but there is only one exhaust port for the two exhaust valves of the cylinder. The
cylinder head inlet does not have a port to channel water. Water can therefore not mix with the inlet air.
The cylinder head bolts are highly resistant to traction and are tightened to maximum capacity via the angle
tightening method. Because they have been lengthened significantly, the tightening force is maintained at
a constant level for the complete lifetime of the parts, and the bolts will not need to be retightened.
The locations of the injector and lateral supply pipe are machined directly into the cylinder head. The port
intended for the lateral supply pipe is located between the inlet ports. The inlet and exhaust valve guides
are identical and can be interchanged. Exhaust valves are fitted with separate seat rings. Very powerful
engines are also fitted with separate inlet valve seats.
Mobile engine components

The crankshaft is forged from a special chrome alloy steel. However, the bearing and seal friction surfaces
of this part are hardened by induction. It is therefore possible to regrind the bearings up to four times
before applying a new heat treatment. The gears are located at the front end of the crankshaft. They are
force fitted and drive the idler wheel and oil pump. In addition, the front end of the crankshaft is splined to
fit the hub of the V belt pulley. The engine hub is fixed to the crankshaft using a gasket cone. The oil
deflector is located between the hub and the gear.
The crankshaft is supported on the cylinder block by bearings fitted to either side of each cylinder. The
bearings therefore number one more than the cylinders. The crankshaft thrust washers are positioned to
either side of the rearmost bearing.
The rear end of the crankshaft is fitted with a flywheel which includes a force fitted starter crown wheel.
The transverse cross section of the forged connecting rod is an "I" shape. The bearing housing at the lower
end of the rod is divided in two, and the bearing cup is fixed using two special lengthened screws. The top
part has a wedge-shaped bearing housing into which the gudgeon pin bush is force fitted.
The piston is made from an aluminum eutectic alloy. The top part of the piston comprises a combustion
chamber. The shape of this chamber is designed to optimize the air-fuel mix. The housing for the top ring is
formed in a cast iron ring, which has itself been cast in the piston. In addition, the piston is covered in
graphite to ensure smooth running in.
The piston has three rings. The top ring has a molybdenum covering and a wedge-shaped transversal cross
section. On some slightly turbocharged engines, the top ring is fitted at a right angle. The middle ring is
tapered and fits into the groove. The angle compensates for the clearance. The oil control ring comprises a
spring and is fitted with a two-level chrome-plated scraper edge. Some four-cylinder engines are fitted with
a balancing unit. The eccentric weights, which rotate at twice the engine speed, balance out the vibrations
caused by the movement of the pistons and mobile engine components.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Timing gears
1. Camshaft gear
2. High-pressure pump gear
3. Layshaft gear
4. Timing gear
The timing includes the camshaft gear, the high-
pressure pump gear and the crankshaft gear. The
timing gears are made of helical cut hardened
steel.
The layshaft gear is supported by a chamfered ball
bearing on the shaft, located at the front of the
cylinder block. Fig. 6
3.1.2.3 Exhaust and intake system
Fig. 7
(1) DOC (catalyseur d'oxydation diesel) (5) Turbo with controlled wastegate
(2) Intermediate exhaust pipe (6) Turbo control wastegate actuator
(3) Exhaust column (7) Inlet hose between air to air heat exchanger
(4) Air filter unit and turbo

ACT0021460
3. Engine
(8) Air hose between air filter unit and turbo (12) Controlled inlet valve
(9) Air intake type (13) Inlet air preheater
(10) Air to air heat exchanger (14) Inlet manifold
(11) Fitting from the CCV (Closed Crankcase (15) Hose between air to air heat exchanger and
Ventilation) centrifugal breather inlet valve
NOTE: Some components may look slightly different, but the principle and location remain the same.
The engine air intake filtration system (4) consists of a suction tube and a main filter. The incoming air must
pass through the main filter cartridge, which can be cleaned if necessary. The internal safety filter prevents
impurities from entering inside the engine if the main filter cartridge should fail or is incorrectly fitted. An
electrical or mechanical maintenance indicator may be fitted to the filter body or the inlet pipe to warn of
any filter cartridge obstruction. The exhaust manifold is connected to the cylinder head by high traction
resistance bolts, with no separate gasket. It is not necessary to retighten the manifold bolts. The
turbocharger (2) is driven by the exhaust fumes. It is controlled by an electric wastegate. It is lubricated and
cooled by the engine lubricating system. The air from the air filter (4) enters at a temperature of
approximately 25 C. When it leaves the turbocharger it has a temperature of approximately 180°C. Then
the air compressed by the turbo is directed toward the air to air heat exchanger, located at the front of the
tractor. Cooling of the compressed air to approximately 150°C stabilizes combustion, regardless of the
temperature, and minimizes the mechanical and thermal load on the engine, thus reducing the level of
nitrous oxides (NOx) and particulates (PT).

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.2.4 Cooling system
Fig. 8
(1) Engine cooling radiator (10) Solenoid valve for DEF or AdBlue™™ gage
(2) Fan preheating
(3) Expansion tank (11) Coolant tubes for DEF or AdBlue™™ gage
(4) Turbo wastegate actuator (12) DEF or AdBlue™™ injector
(5) Water pump (13) Coolant tubes for DEF or AdBlue™™ injector
(6) Expansion tank breather pipe (14) Radiator bottom hose
(7) Engine oil filter unit (15) Connecting hose between radiator and
(8) Coolant tubes expansion tank
(9) Cab heater hoses

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.2.5 Lubrication system
Fig. 9
(1) Turbocharger
(2) High-pressure fuel pump
(3) Oil pressure sensor
(4) Main lubrication line
(5) Oil filter
(6) Oil pump
(7) Oil pressure regulating valve

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.2.6 Fuel system
Fig. 10
(1) Fuel cooler (8) Prefilter
(2) Fuel pipes to the cooler (9) Water separator
(3) Injectors (10) Pipes from the tank
(4) High-pressure pipes to common rail (11) Fuel sender unit
(5) Fuel filter (12) Tank
(6) Temperature sensor (13) Fuel pressure sensor
(7) Fuel pump

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.2.7 Electric control circuit
Fig. 11
(1) Electronic control unit (9) Water detection sensor
(2) Controlled injectors (10) Fuel pressure sensor
(3) Turbo wastegate actuator (11) Fuel temperature sensor
(4) Coolant T° sensor (12) Injection common rail pressure sensor
(5) Camshaft speed sensor (13) Air intake heater control unit
(6) Oil pressure sensor (14) Air intake controlled throttle valve
(7) Crankshaft speed sensor (15) Air temperature and pressure sensor
(8) High-pressure pump (16) Injector harness

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.2.8 CCV (Closed Crankcase Ventilation) system
Fig. 12
(1) Pipe from the air intake manifold (3) Pipe from the cylinder head cover.
(2) Return pipe to the air intake system. (4) Oil return pipe to the engine sump

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.3 Layout of components
3.1.3.1 Layout of components in the engine environment
Fig. 13
(1) Engine controller (10) Inlet air preheater
(2) Turbo electronic wastegate actuator (11) Inlet air preheater control relay
(3) Speed sensor (crankshaft) (12) Sensor detecting water in the fuel
(4) Oil preheater (13) EGR valve
(5) Common rail pressure sensor (14) Fuel pump
(6) Fuel temperature sensor (15) Fuel filter
(7) Fuel pressure sensor (16) CCV (Closed Crankcase Ventilation) breather
(8) Speed sensor (camshaft) ((17))Non-return valve on the CCV (Closed
(9) Inlet air temperature sensor Crankcase Ventilation) breather system

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.4 Tests and diagnostics
3.1.4.1 Measuring the engine oil pressure
Procedure
1. Remove the oil pressure sensor (7) and
replace it with a pressure gage of 0 bar to
10 bar.
2. Measure the lubrication pressure between
minimum and maximum speed. This should
be between 2.5 bar and 5 bar.
3. If the engine lubrication oil pressure is low or
varies, check the oil level, check the
regulating valve and then check the
lubrication pump.
Fig. 14
Checking the oil pressure regulating valve
4. NOTE:
The oil pressure regulating valve is located
underneath the oil filter.
Remove the cover and spring with the valve
disk.
5. IMPORTANT:
There are two types of spring.
ATTENTION:
Any damaged parts should be replaced.
Clean the parts and check that the mating
faces are not damaged. Remove any residue
left on the seal.
6. Apply a locking product such as (Loctite 638)
to the outside of the valve seat.
7. Using a suitable pin punch, tap on the new
valve seat to insert it into the cylinder block.
Fig. 15
8. Insert the spring with the valve disk into the
cylinder block and fit the cover with a new
seal.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Checking the oil pressure regulating valve

9. NOTE:
The oil pressure regulating valve is located
under the oil filler plug located on the right-
hand side of the engine.
Clean the cover of the pressure regulating
valve and the surrounding surfaces.
10. Remove the cover and spring with the valve
disk.
11. Clean the parts and check that the mating
faces of the valve disk and valve seat are not
damaged. Any damaged parts should be
replaced.
12. Using a spring tester, check the tension of
the valve spring.
13. If the valve seat has been removed from the
cylinder block, apply a locking product such
as (Loctite 603, 638 or equivalent) to the
external surface of the valve seat.
14. Using a suitable pin punch, tap on the new
valve seat to insert it into the cylinder block.
15. Insert the spring with the valve disk into the
cylinder block and fit the cover with a new Fig. 16
seal.
Checking the lubrication oil pump
16. NOTE:
The rotor-type lubrication pump, which is
driven by a crankshaft hub, is located in the
timing housing.
Drain the engine oil and remove the timing
housing to check the condition of the
lubrication oil pump (see maintenance
chapter).
17. Remove the lubrication pump cover and then
clean the pump housing and components.
18. Check the level of wear of the pump
components and check for any cracks and
other signs of damage.
19. Measure the clearance between the outer Fig. 17
rotor and the pump housing. Also measure
the clearance between the different rotors.
20. IMPORTANT:
If the pump components are worn or
damaged, the timing housing should be
replaced. There are no spare parts for the
lubrication pump.
If the pump parts are in good condition, fit
the pump rotors in the housing and tighten
the screws to 8 Nm. Fit the removed
components.
Removing and disassembling the lubrication oil pump
21. Drain the engine oil and remove the oil sump (see maintenance chapter).
22. Remove the suction pipe and the pressurized pipe from the oil pump.
ACT0021460
3. Engine
23. Take out the oil pump with the shims inserted between the pump and the cylinder block.
24. Remove the pump cover and seal. Remove the gearing from the lazy axle.
25. Clamp the pump gearing by its teeth in a vice with soft jaws and loosen the driving gear nut. Use a
bronze drift to take out the gearing. Extract the gear from the drive shaft.
26. Clean the parts. Check for wear and check the general condition. Replace any damaged parts and all
the seals.
27. On (66), (74) and (84) type engines, the bearing points are fitted with separate bearing rings. If the
rings need replacing, machine them to a dimension of 18 mm to 18.018 mm after assembly.
3.1.5 Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations
3.1.5.1 Adjustments
Adjusting valve clearances

Checking and adjusting valve clearances
Valve clearance, which can be adjusted when the engine is either hot or cold, is 0.35 mm for both inlet and
exhaust valves. It is adjusted when the corresponding piston is at TDC in the compression stroke. The
valves of different cylinders are adjusted in the same sequence as the order of injection. Several tractor
components need to be removed in order to adjust the valve tip clearances.
Settings
1. Turn the crankshaft in the direction of
operation until the valves of the 4th cylinder
are rocking (exhaust closed, inlet open).
Check the valve clearance of the 1st cylinder.
2. Loosen the locknut on the adjustment screw.
3. Check the clearance with a depth gage and
adjust by turning the adjustment screw.
4. Tighten the locknut and check the clearance
again.
5. Turn the crankshaft one third-turn in the
direction of operation to rock the valves of
the 3rd cylinder. Check the valves of the 2nd
cylinder. Fig. 18
6. Continue in this manner following the order (1) Inlet valves
of injection: (2) Exhaust valves
(3) Injector
Firing order 1-2-4-3
Valve rocker in cylinders 4 - 3 - 1 - 2

number
3.1.5.2 Bleeding
Fuel system bleeding

Bleeding the fuel system is required when a filter is changed, or during an operation on the fuel suction
system.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Procedure
1. Open the bleed plug located on the side of
the pre-filter.
2. Fit a transparent pipe and direct the flow into
a suitable container.
3. Pump using the hand pump located on the
top of the pre-filter. Pump until there are no
bubbles flowing with the fuel.
4. Remove the transparent pipe and then refit
the bleed plug.
5. Clean up any fuel spillage.
6. Start the engine. The power supply circuit
automatically removes the air in the system.
Fig. 19
NOTE:
Do not use the hand pump when the engine
is running. Do not use tools to press the
pump, or excessive force on the pre-filter
pump.
3.1.6 Disassembly/reassembly
3.1.6.1 AGCO Power Workshop Service Manual
AGCO Power engine: See Workshop Service Manual.
3.1.7 Service tools
3.1.7.1 General
Service tools can be ordered from the AGCO spare parts department or from the Beauvais tooling division
via AGCOnet with bulletin Trac 60/07.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.7.2 Cylinder block tools
Fig. 20
Ref. Description Order 33 44 49 66 74 84 98

number
1 Puller for cylinder liner V905173100 x x x x x
1 Puller for cylinder liner V910451500 x x
2 Milling cutter for cylinder V910165600 x x x x x
liner seat
2 Milling cutter for cylinder V910452000 x x
liner seat
Spare cutting blade for V904587600 x x x x x x x
milling cutter
3 Drift for 40 mm cup plug V905246620 x x x x x x x
5 Drift for fitting camshaft cup V902587400 x x x x x x x
plug
6 Press tool for cylinder liner V910166300 x x x x x x x
7 Holder for dial gauge V902579200 x x x x x x x

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.7.3 Timing gear and flywheel housing tools
Fig. 21
Ref Description Order 33 44 49 66 74 84 98

number
1 Centring tool for flywheel V905246400 x x x x x
housing
1 Centring tool for flywheel V910452700 x x
housing
2 Drift for fitting rear V905246300 x x x x x
crankshaft seal
2 Drift for fitting rear V910452600 x x
crankshaft seal
3 Drift for fitting front V910394600 x x x x x x
crankshaft seal
4 Drift for fitting front V923517520 x
crankshaft seal
5 Drift for tension pins in V902598800 x x x x x x
timing gear housing
6 Drift for tension pins in V902598700 x x x x x x x
timing gear housing

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.7.4 Cylinder head and valve mechanism tools
Fig. 22

number
1 Tightening tool for injector V920179670 x x x x x x x
wiring connector
2 Fitting tool for valve stem V920185580 x x x x x x x
gasket
3 Milling cutter kit for valve V837062635 x x x x x x x
seat
4 Milling tool for injector seat V912085400 x x x x x x x
5 Drift for removing valve V921085300 x x x x x x x
guide
6 Drift for fitting valve guide V912085000 x x x x x x x
8 Drift for 45 mm cup plug V910394800 x x x x

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.7.5 Crank mechanism tools
Fig. 23

number
1 Puller for crankshaft gears V905248800 x x x x x x
2 Spanner for crankshaft nut V902455800 x x x x x x x
3 Puller for crankshaft hub V920182390 x x x x x x x
4 Piston fitting tool V920185840 x x x x x
4 Piston fitting tool V923106340 x x
5 Piston ring pliers V905246900 x x x x x x x
6 Drift for fitting oil deflector V910394900 x x x x x x
ring, crankshaft front end

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.7.6 Coolant pump tools
Fig. 24

number
1 Puller for coolant pump V910193200 x x
impeller
2 Drift for fitting coolant pump V920197870 x x x x x
water seal
2 Drift for fitting coolant pump V920197880 x x
water seal
bearing (V610060124)
4 Fitting tool for coolant pump V920186480 x x x x
with Flexonic belt, coolant
pump with 115,5 mm belt
pulley
4 Fitting tool for coolant pump V920218980 x x
pump with 100 mm belt
pulley
5 Socket for coolant pump V920187410 x x x x x x x
nut[1]
[1] Nut V836759512

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.1.7.7 Engine control system tools
Fig. 25

number
1 Sisutronic EEM 4 service 8370 79541 x x x x x x x
tool (incl. USB adapter)
2 Adapter for application 8370 79553 x x x x x x x
connector
3 Extension cable (L = 5 m) 8368 62483 x x x x x x x
3.1.7.8 Maintenance and troubleshooting tools

(1) Return quantity tester V837079449
Fig. 26
(4) Fuel filter wrench V837079717
Fig. 27

ACT0021460
3. Engine
(5) Socket for injector wiring V920179670
Fig. 28

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2 SCR Technology 3rd generation

3.2.1 General
3.2.1.1 Notice to the technician
Fig. 29
Selective Catalytic Reduction, also known as SCR Technology, is a process applied to the emissions from
diesel engines, designed to meet emissions control standards. In the SCR Technology process, a diesel
emissions reducing agent in the form of an aqueous DEF or AdBlue™™ solution is injected into the exhaust
fumes in order to convert nitrous oxide (NOx) into a harmless mixture of nitrogen and water vapor.
SCR Technology is a simple nitrous oxide (NOx) after-treatment system that offers the following
advantages:
• fuel savings
• a simple solution that requires no modification to current engine cooling systems Because it is possible
to reduce the recirculation rate of exhaust fumes, engine performance can be increased and the
operating temperature lowered.
• very little maintenance is required
• a proven and reliable method
The SCR Technology system comprises a DEF or AdBlue™™ tank, an injector, a dosing control unit, some
sensors and a catalyst.
The system is automated; the operator has only to monitor the gage and to fill the DEF or AdBlue™™ tank
as required. There are warnings of low DEF or AdBlue™™ level similar to the warnings for other fluids,
such as the low fuel level warning.
DEF or AdBlue™™ is a mixture comprising 67.5% water and 32.5% urea. DEF or AdBlue™™ is a non-
hazardous nitrogen product that is also used in fertilizers.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2.1.2 Safety instructions for DEF or AdBlue™™ . Identification of hazards

According to Directive 1999/45/EC and its amendments, the product is not classified as hazardous.
Classification Not classified
Information about the components
Substance/preparation Preparation
Component name CAS Number % EC Number Classification
water 7732-18-5 67.5 231-791-2 Not classified
urea 57-13-6 32.5 200-315-5 Not classified
First aid
Ingestion If large quantities of this product are swallowed,

seek medical advice immediately. Do not induce
vomiting unless advised to do so by medical staff.
Do not administer liquid to a person who is
unconscious.
Contact with the skin Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with the skin.
After handling, always wash your hands thoroughly
with soap and water. In the event of irritation, seek
medical advice.
Contact with the eyes In case of contact with the eyes, rinse immediately
under running water. In the event of irritation, seek
medical advice.
Protection of rescuers No action must be taken which puts an individual at

risk or in the absence of appropriate training.
Fire protection measures and prevention of explosions and fires
Extinguishing methods In the event of fire, spray with water (spray mist),
foam, dry chemical powder or carbon dioxide gas
(CO2)
Items that can be used Use a suitable extinguishing agent to put out a
neighboring fire.
Risks related to thermal decomposition products These products can be: oxides of carbon (CO, CO2),
oxides of nitrogen (NO, NO2 etc.), ammonia (NH3).
Special protective equipment for personnel pre- Fire brigade officers must wear suitable protective
equipped to fight a fire equipment as well as self-contained breathing
apparatus with an integral mask operating in
positive pressure mode.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Measures to be taken in the event of accidental spillage
Individual precautionary measures Follow all of the procedures relating to fighting a

fire.
Measures to protect the environment and clean-up Prevent the spilled substance from coming into
methods contact with the ground and surface water courses.
Absorb using sand or an alternative dry non-
combustible material. Collect up solid material and
the absorbed product using a shovel and place it all
inside a suitable and labeled waste container. Avoid
forming a cloud of dust and prevent it from being
spread by the wind. Keep a safe distance away
from aquatic environments.
Handling and storage
Handling Avoid all contact with the eyes, skin and clothing.
Ensure that automatic eye rinsing systems and
safety douches are located in close proximity to the
location of the work stations.
Fuel storage Keep the container firmly closed. Store the

container in a cool and well-ventilated area. Keep
away from heat and direct sunlight.
Recommended packaging materials Use the original container.
Physical and chemical properties
General information
Physical state Liquid (clear)
Color Colorless
Odor Ammoniacal (weak)
Information relating to health, safety and the environment
pH 9.8 to 10 (Conc. (% weight/weight): 10%)
Boiling point Decomposition temperature: 100°C
Melting/freezing point -11.5°C
Vapor pressure 6.4 kPa (48 mm Hg) (at 40°C)
Volume mass 1.09 g/cm3 (20°C)
Can be mixed with water Yes

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Stability and reactivity
Stability Stable under storage and recommended handling

conditions.
Conditions to avoid Urea reacts with sodium hypochlorite or calcium to

form very explosive nitrogen trichloride.
Materials to avoid Extremely reactive or incompatible with the

following materials: oxidant materials, acids and
alkalines.
Hazardous decomposition products These products can be: oxides of carbon (CO, CO2),
oxides of nitrogen (NO, NO2 etc.), ammonia (NH3).
Toxicological information
Potential acute effects on health.
Effects on health are considered as fairly unlikely if the product is used in accordance with the
recommendations.
Potential chronic effects on health
Chronic effects No major effects or critical dangers are known.
Carcinogenicity No major effects or critical dangers are known.
Mutagenesis No major effects or critical dangers are known.
Congenital abnormalities No major effects or critical dangers are known.
Effects on development No major effects or critical dangers are known.
Effects on fertility No major effects or critical dangers are known.
Signs/symptoms of over-exposure
Inhalation No specific data.
Ingestion No specific data.
Skin No specific data.
Eyes No specific data.
Information relating to waste disposal options
Waste processing methods Empty containers or inner packaging may retain

traces of product. Do not discard residue down the
drain and do not dispose of this product and its
container without taking all the necessary
precautions relating to its use. Discard in
accordance with all applicable local and national
regulations.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2.1.3 Abbreviations or terms used
CAN Controller Area Network
CAT Catalyzer
Denox Catalyst Catalyzer capable of reducing nitrous oxides as an oxidizing mixture
Denoxtronic Technical name of the metering module (BOSCH)
H2O Chemical symbol for water
N2 Chemical symbol for nitrogen
NOx Chemical symbol for nitrous oxide
SCR Selective Catalytic Reduction
3.2.2.1 Principles of operation

The principle of the SCR Technology is based on the following components: An DEF or AdBlue™™ tank
fitted inside the fuel tank, an DEF or AdBlue™™ spool valve, an injector and a catalyzer. The engine is not
really involved in the process other than to deliver the optimum combustion ratios and exchange
information from the various sensors that control it.
The three main lines of the system are:
• The DEF or AdBlue™™ tank fitted inside the fuel tank
• The DEF or AdBlue™™ additive injected into the exhaust fumes in the form of a fine spray
• In the catalyzer, the heat of the exhaust fumes converts the nitrous oxides into harmless nitrogen gas
and water vapor.
The consumption of DEF or AdBlue™™ is approximately 6 to 8%. This proportion is controlled
electronically using the input and output sensors on the DOC (catalyseur d'oxydation diesel) and on the
exhaust outlet.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Fig. 30
(1) Denoxtronic module (LC1)Auxiliary engine CAN connection with
(2) Filter Denoxtronic module
(3) Injector (LC2)Auxiliary engine CAN connection with the
(4) control unit DEF or AdBlue™™ sender unit
(5) Exhaust pipe between turbo and DOC (LC3)Auxiliary engine CAN connection with the
(catalyseur d'oxydation diesel) EEM4 control unit
(6.1) NOx sensor before DOC (catalyseur (LC4)Auxiliary engine CAN connection with the
d'oxydation diesel) injector
(6.2) Exhaust outlet NOx sensor (LC5)Auxiliary engine CAN connection with the
(7.1) Temperature sensor before DOC (catalyseur temperature sensor after DOC (catalyseur
d'oxydation diesel) d'oxydation diesel)
(7.2) Temperature sensor after DOC (catalyseur (LC6)Auxiliary engine CAN connection with the
d'oxydation diesel) exhaust outlet NOx sensor
(7.3) Exhaust outlet temperature sensor (LC7)Auxiliary engine CAN connection with the
(8) Exhaust exhaust outlet temperature sensor
(9) tank (LC8)Auxiliary engine CAN connection with the
(10) DEF or AdBlue™™ gage NOx sensor before DOC (catalyseur
(A) DEF or AdBlue™™ intake line d'oxydation diesel)
(R) DEF or AdBlue™™ return line (LC9)Auxiliary engine CAN connection with the
(I) DEF or AdBlue™™ injection line temperature sensor before DOC (catalyseur
(X) Auxiliary engine CAN network d'oxydation diesel)

ACT0021460
3. Engine
(LDR Liquid coolant pipes

)
Normal operating phase

When the engine has reached an exhaust temperature above 200 °C, the DEF or AdBlue™™ injection can
begin.
To do this, the DEF or AdBlue™™ stored in its specific tank (9) is sucked in through the sender unit (10) by
a diaphragm pump located in the Denoxtronic module (1).
The DEF or AdBlue™™ which flows through a prefilter and a main filter (2) is directed to the injector.
As the Denoxtronic module (1) is connected to the EEM4 control unit (4) via the auxiliary engine CAN
network, it is able to adjust the injection, namely the amount of DEF or AdBlue™™ injected, based on the
instantaneous fuel consumption.
The variable flow rate injector (3) is then electrically controlled in order to inject a spray of DOC (catalyseur
d'oxydation diesel) into the DEF or AdBlue™™ (5) to reduce the pollution generated by the internal
combustion of the engine.
During this normal operating phase, several critical points are controlled by parallel systems and the
electronic system.
For example, the coolant line of the injector (3) provides continuous cooling of the DEF or AdBlue™™
which, at a temperature above 80 °C, could cause the occurrence of ammonia (very dangerous).
The sender unit (10) continues to monitor the level and warns the user if it approaches the critical
minimum level. The minimum level is 5 l. This level of 5 l ensures normal operation.
Operating phase in low external air temperatures

The external air temperature is an index that can be raised by the engine and the temperature of the DEF
or AdBlue™™ can be raised via the dosing control unit.
This information is sent to the Denoxtronic module, activating a parallel system to quickly heat the DEF or
AdBlue™™ which may be frozen inside the tank.
A pipe coil containing coolant and a rigid pipe on the top of the tank heat the contents of the tank as soon
as the engine coolant has warmed up.
The electronic system locks SCR Technology operation if circulation of the DEF or AdBlue™™ fluid is not
possible over the whole loop. A degraded mode is activated to inform the user and to reduce engine
power.
To allow the coolant to circulate, a solenoid valve opens the heating loop, which is also electrically
controlled by the module.
The parallel coolant/DEF or AdBlue™™ line, which under normal operating conditions cools the DEF or
AdBlue™™ , also enters this phase to heat the DEF or AdBlue™™ system.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Operating phase after the engine is switched off

After the engine is switched off, the temperature
of the DEF or AdBlue™™ injector causes the
coolant to circulate as a result of the
thermosyphon effect until it reaches the additional
bowl. The hot coolant rises and therefore causes
liquid that is cooler to enter the injector.
The DEF or AdBlue™™ pump is reversed and
sucks in the DEF or AdBlue™™ that remains in the
injector. The injector is controlled at the same
time, and therefore sucks the exhaust fumes until
the injector line is completely empty. This draining
procedure is controlled by the EEM4 engine
controller.
Fig. 31
For this purpose, a 30-minute time delay is preset
in the electric battery isolator, after which the
battery isolator opens.
As a result, after switching off the engine it is
normal for the pump inside the dosing control unit
to continue to supply a flow.
Degraded mode operating phase

The electronic system is able to operate several degraded modes, which are represented by:
• an instrument panel display: flashing indicator lights and error codes
• a reduction in power level
The different degraded modes are more or less obstructive to the user depending on the type of problem
that has occurred.
• DEF or AdBlue™™ level is low: the sender unit indicates the level. If the level is below 10% of the total
tank, a degraded mode will be activated to avoid damaging the system (reduction in power).
• Low external air temperature: when the SCR Technology system is being heated up, a degraded mode
warns the user and protects the system by reducing the power.
• System breakdown: error codes and degraded modes are used to warn of a potential problem.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2.2.2 Layout of the SCR Technology system
Fig. 32
(1) DEF or AdBlue™™ tank (5) Catalyzer
(2) Metering module (6) DEF or AdBlue™™ injector
(3) Engine (7) Exhaust line
(4) Supply pipe for DEF or AdBlue™™ (8) Muffler

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2.3 Schematic diagrams
3.2.3.1 Simplified diagram of the SCR Technology system
Fig. 33
(1) Electronic control module (8) Coolant line of DEF or AdBlue™™ gage
(2) Filter (9) tank
(3) injector (S1- (NOx) sensors
(4) Engine electronic control unit S2)
(5) DOC (catalyseur d'oxydation diesel) catalyzer (T1- Temperature sensors
(6) Auxiliary engine (CAN) network T2-
(7) Coolant line of the DEF or AdBlue™™ injector T3)
Normal operating phase

When the temperature of the exhaust gases is greater than 230°C, the injection of DEF or AdBlue™™
begins. The diaphragm pump located in the pump module sucks in the DEF or AdBlue™™ via the sender
unit. The DEF or AdBlue™™ that flows through a prefilter and a main filter is directed to the injector. The
sensors for the exhaust line control the quality of the exhaust gases to optimize the system as required.
The engine controller adapts the injection of DEF or AdBlue™™ by the module. The variable flow rate
injector is electrically controlled in order to inject a mist of DEF or AdBlue™™ into the exhaust line, which,
due to the catalyzer, reduces the pollution generated by the engine internal combustion process. During

ACT0021460
3. Engine
this normal operating phase, checks on the preheating function, blockage of hoses, NOx sensors and their
operation, DEF or AdBlue™™ pressure sensor, the ability to increase and maintain the pressure of the DEF
or AdBlue™™ , as well as DEF or AdBlue™™ leakage detection, valve reversal function, temperature
sensors operation and NOx emission levels are all continuously monitored. For example, the parallel
coolant line provides continuous cooling of the DEF or AdBlue™™ which, at a temperature above 80°C,
could cause the occurrence of ammonia (very dangerous). The injector is permanently cooled by an engine
coolant bypass to control its temperature and therefore its operating life. The gage continues to monitor
the level and warns the user if it approaches the critical minimum level. The minimum threshold is 5 liters.
These 5 liters ensure normal operation of the system.
Normal operating phase in low external air temperatures

The external air temperature and the temperature of the DEF or AdBlue™™ are monitored by the engine
controller. This information can be picked up by the Denoxtronic module, and can trigger the activation of a
parallel system to quickly heat the DEF or AdBlue™™ , which may be frozen inside the tank. A pipe coil
containing coolant and a rigid pipe on the top of the tank heat the contents of the tank as soon as the
engine coolant has warmed up. The electronic system locks operation of the SCR Technology if circulation
of the DEF or AdBlue™™ fluid is not possible over the whole loop. A degraded mode is activated to inform
the user and to reduce engine power. To allow the coolant to circulate, a solenoid valve opens the heating
loop, which is also electrically controlled by the controller. The parallel coolant/DEF or AdBlue™™ line,
which under normal operating conditions cools the DEF or AdBlue™™ , also enters this phase to heat the
system.
Operating phase after the engine is switched off

After the engine is switched off, the DEF or AdBlue™™ injector is unable to reach very high operating
temperatures. To prevent this during operation, a coolant bypass provides cooling. When the engine is
switched off, the DEF or AdBlue™™ injection stops, but the pump runs in the opposite direction to bleed
the injector and a coolant feed pipe drains through the injector to lower the temperature of the injector. For
this purpose, a 30-minute time delay is preset in the electric battery isolator. As a result, after switching off
the engine, it is normal for the pump inside the metering module to continue to operate.
Operating phase in degraded mode

The electronic system is able to operate several degraded modes, which are represented by: – An
instrument panel display: flashing indicator lights and error codes; – A reduction in power level. The
different degraded modes are more or less obstructive to the user depending on the type of problem that
has occurred. – DEF or AdBlue™™ level is low: the sender unit indicates the level. If the level is below
10% of the total tank, a degraded mode will be activated to avoid damaging the system (reduction in
power). – Low external air temperature: when the SCR Technology system is being heated up, a degraded
mode warns the user and protects the system by reducing the power. – System breakdown: error codes
and degraded modes are used to warn of a potential problem.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2.3.2 Detailed diagram of the SCR Technology system
Fig. 34
(1) Tank (13) Relay
(2) Temperature sensor (14) 12 V tractor battery
(3) Preheater integrated in the gage (15) Injector
(4) Coolant circulation solenoid valve (16) Catalyst assembly
(5) Prefilter ((17))Exhaust outlet
(6) Diaphragm pump (18) Coolant delivery to sender unit
(7) Level gage (19) Coolant return to sender unit
(8) Main filter (20) Coolant delivery to injector
(9) Pressure sensor (21) Coolant outlet from the injector
(10) Temperature sensor (22) NOx sensors
(11) Controller (A) Pumping module
(12) Urea reverse circulation (B) Injection module
Coolant system
system

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Electrical connection system
3.2.4.1 Description of SCR Technology system components
DEF or AdBlue™™ tank

The DEF or AdBlue™™ tank is located on the left-
hand side of the tractor. It has a capacity of 25
liters and is used to store the DEF or AdBlue™™ .
The DEF or AdBlue™™ filler cap is blue, in
accordance with the current standard, in order to
avoid an error by the user when filling.
Fig. 35
The module
The dosing module is a vital component of the
SCR Technology system. It comprises a diaphragm
pump system, a filter and a sensor. It is controlled
by the engine controller. Communication between
the module and the engine controller is ensured by
the engine CAN network, in order to control the
dosage according to the engine load.
Fig. 36
Injector
The injector is located on the exhaust line. It is
controlled by the module and delivers the correct
amount of DEF or AdBlue™™
The injector is cooled by the engine coolant as its
operating temperature must not exceed 600°C. It
is active as soon as its temperature in the exhaust
line exceeds 230°C. It is deactivated when the
ignition is switched off and the exhaust
temperature drops below 230°C. After the engine
is switched off, the module pump continues to run
in order to bleed the injector.
1. Supply line
2. Cooling line Fig. 37
3. Electrical connector
4. Injector nozzle
5. Protection against high temperatures
6. Metal heat shield

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Tank sender unit

The sender unit controls the DEF or AdBlue™™
level and directs the flow of DEF or AdBlue™™ .
This sender unit has a coil which directs the
engine coolant to the DEF or AdBlue™™ reservoir
in order to heat the DEF or AdBlue™™ above
-11.5°. Coolant circulation is controlled by a
solenoid valve managed by the engine controller
according to the temperature information.
1. Cooling line
2. Cooling line
3. Coolant solenoid valve
4. Cooling line
5. DEF or AdBlue™™ line Fig. 38
6. Sender unit
7. Module/injector line
8. DEF or AdBlue™™ pumping-return line
Temperature sensors
1. Temperature sensors
2. NOx sensors
The system has three temperature sensors, two
on the exhaust and one at the turbocharger outlet.
The system also has two Nox sensors on the
exhaust.
Fig. 39
Catalyzer
The catalyzer is located low on the right-hand side
of the engine. It has two main roles. Reduce the
noise by acting as a muffler, and mix the mixture
of DEF or AdBlue™™ and exhaust gases in order
to minimize the toxic nitrogen oxides Nox by
converting them to nitrogen N2 and water H2O.
Fig. 40

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2.5.1 Removing the module
Procedure
1. Remove the screws (1).
Fig. 41
2. Remove the protective plate.
Fig. 42
3. Disconnect the unions (3) and the harnesses

(2) on the metering module.
NOTE: If any DEF or AdBlue™™ has
crystallized on the pipes, clean them before
carrying out any work.
Fig. 43

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Fig. 44
5. Remove the module (4).
Fig. 45
3.2.5.2 Refitting the module

Refitting the module is not especially difficult. Carry out the removal steps in reverse order.
Tighten the three screws securing the module to a torque of 15 Nm.
IMPORTANT:
If any DEF or AdBlue™™ has crystallized on the pipes, they must be cleaned prior to installation.
Changing the DEF or AdBlue™™ filter

NOTE: Replace the filter every 1200 hours or once a year.
ATTENTION:
As this fluid may be corrosive, wear protective gloves when carrying out these operations.
Procedure
1. Remove the dosing module by following the
removal procedure.
Fig. 46
2. Unscrew the filter cover plate (1)
3. Remove the element (2) and the filter (3).
Discard them.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
4. Fit a new filter (3) and a new element (2).

5. Fit the cover (1) back in place and tighten to a
torque of 20 Nm to 25 Nm.
6. Refit the dosing module by following the reassembly procedure.
IMPORTANT:
Before refitting, the contact surfaces of the different elements must be clean and undamaged.
Do not reuse worn or wet elements.
Do not use mineral oil, silicone or grease when fitting filter seals as the seals are Teflon-coated to
facilitate assembly.
3.2.5.3 Removing the injector
Procedure
1. Remove the screws (1) that secure the cover
plate, then remove the cover plate.
Fig. 47
2. From the metering module, disconnect the

unions (3) for the coolant and the union (4)
for the DEF or AdBlue™™ .
Fig. 48
3. Remove the attachment screws (5), then

remove the injector.
Fig. 49

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2.5.4 Refitting the injector

Refitting the injector is not especially difficult. Carry out the removal steps in reverse order.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure that the ends of the pipes are blocked to prevent dirt or debris from entering.
3.2.5.5 Removing the solenoid valve for the DEF or AdBlue™™ cooling system
Procedure
1. Pinch the coolant hoses. Disconnect the
hoses.
Fig. 50
2. Disconnect the electrical connector (1).
Fig. 51
3. Remove the attachment screws (2), remove
the solenoid valve and mounting plate.
Fig. 52
5. Change the solenoid valve (4).

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2.5.6 Refitting the solenoid valve for the DEF or AdBlue™™ cooling system
Procedure
Fig. 53
2. Start the tractor, check the coolant level and
check that there are no leaks.
3.2.5.7 Removing the DEF or AdBlue™™ tank
Procedure
1. The capacity of the DEF or AdBlue™™ tank is
40 l. The step (2) must be removed in order
to remove the DEF or AdBlue™™ tank. To
make it easier to handle the DEF or
AdBlue™™ tank, it should preferably be
drained. The tightening torque of the drain
plug is 6.5 Nm ± 0.5 Nm, which must be
fitted with a new seal.
Fig. 54

3. Remove the plate (2).
Fig. 55

ACT0021460
3. Engine
4. Disconnect the unions (3).

Fig. 56
6. Remove the screws (5) and the attachment
support (6).
7. Remove the tank.
Fig. 57
3.2.5.8 Refitting the DEF or AdBlue™™ reservoir
Procedure
Fig. 58
2. Start the tractor, check the coolant level and
check that there are no leaks on the DEF or
AdBlue™™ system.

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2.5.9 Removing the DEF or AdBlue™™ gage
Procedure
1. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the tank
in order to remove the gage.
Remove the screws (1).
Fig. 59
3. Disconnect the unions (3).
Fig. 60
5. Using service tool 4346206M1, remove the
sender unit.
Fig. 61
3.2.5.10 Removing the catalyzer
Before starting the procedure

Remove the DEF or AdBlue™™ module
Remove the DEF or AdBlue™™ injector

ACT0021460
3. Engine
Procedure
1. Remove the screws (1) that secure the cover
plate, then remove the cover plate.
Fig. 62
2. Remove the fixing nuts (3)

4. Remove the housing (5)
Fig. 63
5. Remove the nuts (6)
6. Remove the battery (7)
Fig. 64

ACT0021460
3. Engine
7. Remove the housings (8) and (9)
Fig. 65
8. Move aside or remove any electrical
harnesses that are in the way
9. Disassemble the exhaust (11)
10. Remove the exhaust pipe (10)
Fig. 66
11. Remove the fixing straps (12)
12. Remove the catalyzer (13).
Fig. 67

ACT0021460
3. Engine
3.2.5.11 Refitting the catalyzer
Procedure
Continue by carrying out the removal steps in
reverse order.
Fig. 68
3.2.6 Service tools
3.2.6.1 General
3.2.6.2 3rd generation SCR engine - Service tools

Reference 4346206M1
Description Tool for the urea tank gage
Supplier AGCO Beauvais

ACT0021460
3. Engine

ACT0021460
Table of contents
4. Clutch
4.1 Chapter not used for this model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

ACT0021460
Table of contents

ACT0021460
4. Clutch
4.1 Chapter not used for this model

ACT0021460
4. Clutch

ACT0021460
Table of contents
5. Gearbox
5.1 GBA25/General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.1.2.1 Construction and description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.1.2.2 Kinematics of the Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.1.2.3 Kinematics of the Dyna-6 GBA25 gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.1.2.4 Synchronisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.1.2.5 Main gearbox robotic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.1.3.1 View of Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.1.3.5 Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.1.3.6 Dyna-6 GBA25 gearbox specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.1.3.7 GBA25 gearbox specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.1.4.1 Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.1.4.2 Dyna-6 GBA25 gearbox disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.1.4.3 Synchronizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.2 GBA25/PowerShuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.2.3.1 View of the GBA25 PowerShuttle assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.2.3.2 Blown-up view of the GBA25 PowerShuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
5.2.4.1 Dyna-4 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5.2.4.2 Dyna-6 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.2.4.3 Disassembling the PowerShuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.2.4.4 Reassembling the PowerShuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5.2.4.5 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5.2.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.2.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.2.5.2 PowerShuttle - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.3 GBA25/Dyna-4 PowerShift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.3.1 Dyna-4 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.3.2 Dyna-4 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.3.2.1 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.3.3.1 View of Dyna-4 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
5.3.3.2 Dyna-4 blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
5.3.4 Removing/refitting Dyna-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5.3.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5.3.4.2 Removing the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
5.3.4.3 Refitting the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
5.3.4.4 Disassembling the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
5.3.4.5 Reassembling the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
5.3.4.6 Disassembling the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
5.3.4.7 Reassembling the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

ACT0021460
Table of contents
5.3.4.8 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96

5.3.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.3.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.3.5.2 Powershift module - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
5.4 GBA25/Dyna-6 PowerShift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.4.1 Dyna-6 - General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.4.2 Dyna-6 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5.4.2.1 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
5.4.3 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5.4.3.1 View of Dyna-6 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
5.4.3.2 Dyna-6 blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
5.4.4 Removing/refitting Dyna-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5.4.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5.4.4.2 Removing the Powershift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
5.4.4.3 Refitting the Powershift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
5.4.4.4 Disassembling the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
5.4.4.5 Reassembling the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
5.4.4.6 Disassembling the multiplier module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
5.4.4.7 Reassembling the multiplier module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
5.4.4.8 Disassembling the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
5.4.4.9 Reassembling the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
5.4.4.10 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
5.4.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
5.4.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
5.4.5.2 Powershift module - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
5.5 GBA25/Robotic mechanical gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
5.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
5.5.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
5.5.2.1 Description and kinematics of ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
5.5.3.1 View of the primary and secondary shaft assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
5.5.3.2 View of the reverse layshaft and synchroniser control assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
5.5.3.3 Blown-up view of the robotic mechanical gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
5.5.4 Disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
5.5.4.2 Removing the primary and secondary shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
5.5.4.3 Refitting the primary and secondary shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
5.5.4.4 Disassembling the primary and secondary shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
5.5.4.5 Reassembling the primary and secondary shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
5.5.4.6 Shimming the primary and secondary shafts in the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
5.5.4.7 Adjusting the selector rails and forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
5.5.4.8 Adjusting the interlock mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
5.5.4.9 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
5.5.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
5.5.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
5.5.5.2 Robotic mechanical gearbox - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
5.6 GBA25/Super creeper gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
5.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
5.6.3 Schematic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
5.6.4.1 View of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168
5.6.4.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
5.6.5 Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
5.6.5.1 Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the layshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171

ACT0021460
Table of contents
5.6.6.2 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-178

5.6.6.3 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181
5.6.6.4 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185
5.6.7 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185
5.6.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185
5.6.7.2 Super creeper gears - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185

ACT0021460
Table of contents

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.1 GBA25/General
5.1.1 General
Dyna-4 transmission
The gearbox housing consists of the following main components, in the following order:
Fig. 1
(1) Dynashift module with ratios A, B, C and D (3) Main gearbox comprising four robotically
for shifting under load controlled mechanical ratios
(2) PowerShuttle (4) Creeper or super creeper gearbox (if fitted)
Dyna-6 transmission
The gearbox housing consists of the following main components, in the following order:
Fig. 2
(1) Multiplier module to obtain ratios E and F for (2) Dynashift module with ratios A, B, C and D
shifting under load for shifting under load
(3) PowerShuttle

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(4) Main gearbox comprising four robotically (5) Creeper or super creeper gearbox (if fitted)
controlled mechanical ratios
This section is mainly limited to a description of the gearbox. Only a partial description will be given here of
each major component, as more specific and detailed descriptions are given in their respective sections.
Gear reduction module (Dyna-6 only)

The gear reduction module is fitted at the gearbox input. It enables ratios E and F to be obtained by
applying overdrive to ratios C and D respectively of the Dynashift module.
The multiplier comprises an epicyclic gear train, a brake and a multidisc clutch.
The brake is controlled hydraulically by a proportional solenoid valve with an ON/OFF control, and the
multidisc clutch is controlled mechanically by this brake.
The two ratios provided by this module are 1/1 and 1.423/1.
Dynashift module
This module provides four ratios for shifting under load (A, B, C and D).
The Dynashift module comprises two epicyclic gear trains, two brakes and two multidisc clutches.
The brakes are controlled hydraulically by two proportional solenoid valves with an ON/OFF control, and the
clutches are controlled mechanically, engaged by the Belleville springs and disengaged by the brakes
located in the same module.
PowerShuttle
The PowerShuttle is fitted in the center of the gearbox. It links the ratios for shifting under load with the
gearbox.
The PowerShuttle comprises two multidisc wet clutches controlled by two proportional solenoid valves
with PWM control.
A layshaft enables reverse position.
Robotic gearbox
The gearbox has four ranges. The ratios are selected by two hydraulically-controlled synchronisers.
Gearbox input drive is supplied by the Dynashift.
The four gearbox ranges are automated, so all ratios can be engaged or disengaged automatically by the
tractor's electronic management system without intervention by the driver.
Super creeper module

A unit fitted on the secondary shaft, to the rear of the gearbox, enables very slow travel speeds. This
system consists of a series of locking gear wheels, providing a reduction of 14/1.
The super creeper gears are engaged electrohydraulically by a switch in the cab.
Lubrication
Lubrication is provided by the tractor's hydraulic system. Oil arrives at two points located on the right-hand
side of the gearbox housing. Oil flows to the bearings and clutches to be lubricated via internal channels in
the gearbox shafts.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Dyna-4 diagram
Fig. 3
(A) Dynashift module (H) Gearbox output shaft
(B) PowerShuttle module (Av) Forward clutch
(C) Reverse driving gear (Ar) Reverse clutch
(D) Mechanical gearbox module providing four (L) Brake cone
robotically-controlled ranges (M) Clutch
(E) Single cone synchronizer (N) Brake cone
(F) Double cone synchronizer (O) Clutch
(G) PTO shaft

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Dyna-6 diagram
Fig. 4
(A) Dynashift module (Av) Forward clutch
(B) PowerShuttle module (Ar) Reverse clutch
(C) Reverse driving gear (L) Brake cone
(D) Mechanical gearbox module providing four (M) Clutch
robotically-controlled ranges (N) Brake cone
(E) Single cone synchronizer (O) Clutch
(F) Double cone synchronizer (P) Brake cone
(G) PTO shaft (Q) Clutch
(H) Gearbox output shaft
5.1.2.1 Construction and description

The GBA25 gearbox provides four basic synchronized ratios and four or six ratios for shifting under load.
The ratios can be engaged manually or automatically in forward gear and reverse gear, without using the
clutch pedal.
The gearbox housing is divided into two sections:

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
• front housing: fitted just behind the engine, this supports the shifting under load section of the
transmission (multiplier module [Dyna-6] and Dynashift module) and the PowerShuttle.
• rear housing: fitted behind the front housing, this supports the robotic mechanical gearbox.
Construction of the main gearbox

The PTO shaft (31), which links the engine flywheel to the PTO clutch at the front of the rear axle, crosses
the main gearbox from one side to the other. This shaft turns at the center of a series of shafts forming the
upper shaftline.
In the rear housing (1), a vertical compartment (2) supports the front bearings (5) (6) and (38) (39) of the
primary (4) and secondary (32) gearbox shafts. It also contains the lubricating channels.
The housings are bolted together and act as an oil tank for the tractor's hydraulic system.
The main gearbox comprises four synchronized ratios with two synchronisers (15) and (54). Four gear
trains are distributed on the two shafts (4) and (32).
Each ratio is obtained by engaging only one synchroniser at a time.
The primary shaft (4) is supported by two tapered roller bearings (5) (6) and (27) (28). Clearance is ensured
by the shims (3) fitted under the bearing cup (5).
The secondary shaft (32) is also supported by two tapered roller bearings (38) (39) and (34) (33). Clearance
is ensured by the shims (43) fitted under the bearing cup (38).
Primary shaft (4)
On the primary shaft (4), the 1st and 3rd gears are integral and form a double gear (7) that turns idle on the
shaft. This assembly is supported by two tapered roller bearings (11) (12) and (13) (14) fitted in an X shape,
and two needle roller bearings (20) and (21).
The position of the bearings (11) (12) and (13) (14) is adjusted by shims (10).
The 4th gear (26) rotates idle and is supported by a lubricated bush (25).
Secondary shaft (32)
On the secondary shaft, the 2nd gear (52) turns idle. It is supported by two tapered roller bearings (48) (49)
and (50) (51) fitted in an X shape, and a needle roller bearing (55).
The bearings (48) (49) and (50) (51) are adjusted by shims (47). The 2nd gear (52) acts as an axis of rotation
for the 1st gear (53), which turns without a bearing. The friction surface is lubricated by internal channels.
The double cone synchroniser (54) is fitted on the 2nd gear and is meshed with the gears (53) or (37.)
The 3rd (37) and 4th (35) gears are splined to the secondary shaft (32).
Construction of the Dyna-6 Powershift module

The Powershift section of the GBA25 transmission is fitted behind the engine flywheel.
Each module is fitted in a cast iron housing screwed into the gearbox housing. The Powershift section is
divided into two modules:
• Multiplier module
The multiplier module comprises an epicyclic gear train, a clutch and a brake.
The primary shaft (62) is connected to the planet carrier (68). It links the PTO shaft and engine flywheel.
The clutch disks (59) are splined to the primary shaft (62). The backing plates of the clutch (59) are
integral with the clutch bell housing (60) and the sun gear (72). The brake disks (58) are connected to
the clutch bell housing (60) and the sun gear (72).
The ring gear (70) and ring gear carrier (71) of the epicyclic gear train drive the primary shaft (87) of the
Dynashift module.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
• Dynashift module
The Dynashift module comprises two epicyclic gear trains (primary and secondary), two brakes and two
clutches.
- Primary epicyclic gear train
The ring gear (89) of the primary gear train is splined to the primary shaft (87). It rotates at the
secondary speed of the multiplier.
The planet carrier (94), linked to the secondary shaft (109), supplies output rotational speed to the
Dynashift module.
The sun gear (95) of the first gear train is linked to the planet carrier (101) of the second gear train.
- Secondary epicyclic gear train
The ring gear of the second gear train (97) can be locked in rotation by the brake (81), or attached to
the primary shaft (87) by the clutch (83).
The sun gear (102) can be locked in rotation by the brake (106), or attached to the secondary shaft
(109) by the clutch (107).
The planet carrier (101) is integral with the sun gear of the first gear train (95).
Construction of the Dyna-4 Powershift module see Fig. 21

The Powershift module on the Dyna-4 GBA25 transmission is located behind the engine flywheel. The
module is fitted in a cast iron housing screwed into the gearbox housing. It includes two epicyclic gear
trains with three planet gears.
Front epicyclic gear train
The front epicyclic gear train functions with the clutch (M) and the brake (L). The primary shaft (62) is
connected to the planet carrier (68). It links the PTO shaft and the engine flywheel. The clutch disks (59)
are splined to the primary shaft (62). The backing plates of the clutch (59) are integral with the clutch bell
housing (60) and the sun gear (72). The brake disks (58) are connected to the clutch bell housing (60) and
the sun gear (72) via the cover plate (67). The ring gear (70) of the front epicyclic gear train drives the ring
gear (81) of the rear epicyclic gear train via the ring gear carrier (71).
Rear epicyclic gear train
The rear epicyclic gear train functions with the clutch (O) and the brake (N). The clutch disks (107) are
splined to the output shaft (109) and the planet carrier (80). The backing plates of the clutch (107) are
integral with the clutch bell housing (111) and the sun gear (84). The sun gear is held to the clutch cover
plate (86) by the snap ring (85). The brake disks (105) are connected to the clutch bell housing (111) and the
sun gear (84). Drive enters via the ring gear (81), driven by the ring gear (70) of the front epicyclic gear train.
Drive exits via the planet carrier (80) toward the PowerShuttle.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Reverse
Fig. 5
Reverse position is provided by a main shaft comprising a shaft (114) and two gears (113) and (115). It
transmits drive from the PowerShuttle (112) to the 2nd gear (52) on the secondary shaft of the main
gearbox (32).
The gears (113) and (115) are splined to the shaft.
The gear (115) is fitted on bearings (116) (118) and (117) (119) with preload shimming at the bearing cup
(116).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Clutch/brake operation
Fig. 6
The clutches/brakes that select the Dynashift gearbox ratios are each controlled by a piston (P). When a
brake is engaged, the related clutch is disengaged, and vice versa.
The control pistons (P) act both on the brake disks (F) and on the intermediate plate (I). When the piston (P)
is under pressure, the plate (I) pushes back the Belleville spring(s) (B) of the clutch (E). When the pressure
is released, the Belleville spring(s) (B) and the screws (R) push the piston (P) back via the intermediate
plate (I) and tighten the clutch disks (E).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.1.2.2 Kinematics of the Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox

Kinematic diagram
Fig. 7
(A) Dynashift module (C) Robotic gearbox
(B) PowerShuttle (Av) Forward clutch

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(Ar) Reverse clutch (N) Sun gear brake, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the
(L) Ring gear brake, 2nd epicyclic gear train of Dynashift module
the Dynashift module (O) Sun gear clutch, 2nd epicyclic gear train of
(M) Ring gear clutch, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the Dynashift module
the Dynashift module
Dynashift module kinematics see Fig. 21

• Ratio A (1/1.5)
The front epicyclic gear train piston (69) is not under pressure, the clutch M (59) is engaged via the
Belleville springs (65). The sun gear (72) and the planet carrier (68) are attached, thereby creating a
mechanical lock; the front epicyclic gear train is thus "locked" and its ratio is 1/1. The rear epicyclic gear
train piston (104) is under pressure. The brake N (106) is engaged and holds the sun gear in relation to
the housing. The rear epicyclic gear train turns and reduces the input speed.
• Ratio B (1/1.22)
The front epicyclic gear train piston (69) is under pressure, the clutch M (59) is disengaged. The brake L
(58) is engaged and holds the sun gear (72) in relation to the housing. The front epicyclic gear train turns
and multiplies the input speed. The rear epicyclic gear train is in the same position as at ratio A.
• Ratio C (1/1)
The pistons (69) (104) of the two epicyclic gear trains are not under pressure. The two clutches M and
O are engaged via the Belleville springs (59) and (108). The sun gear is attached to the planet carrier in
each epicyclic gear train, thus creating a mechanical lock. The two epicyclic gear trains are "locked"; the
module input speed is the same at its output.
• Ratio D (1/0.813)
The front epicyclic gear train piston (69) is under pressure, the clutch M (59) is disengaged. The brake L
(58) is engaged and holds the sun gear (72) in relation to the housing. The front epicyclic gear train turns
and multiplies the input speed. The second epicyclic gear train is "locked" as at ratio C.
Kinematics of the PowerShuttle see Fig. 52

When the transmission is in neutral, the PowerShuttle clutches are not under pressure.
In forward position, the (Fwd) clutch is engaged, and directly transmits drive from the Powershift to the
primary shaft of the gearbox.
In reverse position, the (Rev) clutch is engaged, and transmits drive to a layshaft then to the 2nd gear on
the secondary shaft of the main gearbox.
Kinematics of the main gearbox

• Range 1
Reduction is achieved via three gear trains. The
first gear train drives the second train via the
1st synchroniser, then the third train.
Fig. 8

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
• Range 2
Reduction is achieved via the first gear train.
The 2nd synchroniser attaches the 2nd gear to
the secondary shaft.
Fig. 9
• Range 3
Reduction is achieved via the third gear train.
The primary shaft is attached to the 3rd gear by
the 3rd synchroniser.
Fig. 10
• Range 4
Reduction is achieved via the fourth gear train.
The primary shaft is attached to the 4th gear by
the 4th synchroniser.
Fig. 11

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.1.2.3 Kinematics of the Dyna-6 GBA25 gearbox

Kinematic diagram
Fig. 12
(A) Multiplier module (C) PowerShuttle
(B) Dynashift module (D) Robotic gearbox

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(Av) Forward clutch (N) Sun gear brake, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the
(Ar) Reverse clutch Dynashift module
(L) Ring gear brake, 2nd epicyclic gear train of (O) Sun gear clutch, 2nd epicyclic gear train of
the Dynashift module the Dynashift module
(M) Ring gear clutch, 2nd epicyclic gear train of (P) Ring gear brake of the multiplier module
the Dynashift module (Q) Ring gear clutch of the multiplier module
Multiplier module kinematics

• Ratio 1/1
The clutch Q (59) secures the planet carrier with the sun gear of the epicyclic gear train. The gear train
assembly is locked and turns at engine speed. The ratio obtained is 1/1.
• Ratio 1.423/1
The brake P (58) locks the rotation of the sun gear on the gearbox housing. Drive enters via the planet
carrier which drives the rotation of the crown wheel. In this case, the ratio obtained is 1.423/1.
Dynashift module kinematics

Drive is always transmitted via the primary epicyclic gear train, entering via the crown wheel and exiting via
the primary planet carrier. The four ratios are obtained by modifying the rotational speed of the primary sun
gear, which is set by the secondary epicyclic gear train.
• Ratio A (1/1.698)
The two brake pistons (L) and (N) are under pressure. The crown wheel and sun gear of the secondary
epicyclic gear train are fixed in relation to the gearbox housing. As a result, the planet carrier of this gear
train is fixed and holds the sun gear of the 1st gear train.
Reduction is provided by the speed of the primary planet carrier.
• Ratio B (1/1.423)
The brake piston (L) is under pressure. The clutch (O) is locked by the Belleville springs. The sun gear of
the secondary epicyclic gear train turns at the same speed as the secondary shaft, driving the rotation
of the planet carrier and therefore the sun gear of the primary epicyclic gear train.
The secondary epicyclic gear train determines the rotational speed of the primary sun gear.
Reduction is provided by the speed of the primary planet carrier and the speed of the primary sun gear.
• Ratio C (1/1.193)
The brake piston (N) is under pressure. The clutch (M) is engaged by the Belleville springs. The primary
shaft drives the crown wheels of the two epicyclic gear trains. On the secondary epicyclic gear train,
the sun gear is fixed in relation to the gearbox housing and the crown wheel drives the secondary
planet carrier and the primary sun gear.
• Ratio D (1/1)
The two brakes (L) and (N) are not under pressure. The two clutches (M) and (O) are engaged by the
Belleville springs. The primary and secondary crown wheels receive the input speed. The secondary
sun gear is integral with the secondary shaft, thus mechanically locking the Dynashift module.
The input and output speeds are identical. The ratio is 1/1.
PowerShuttle kinematics
When the transmission is in neutral, the PowerShuttle clutches are not under pressure.
In forward position, the (Fwd) clutch is engaged, and directly transmits drive from the Powershift to the
primary shaft of the gearbox.
In reverse position, the (Rev) clutch is engaged, and transmits drive to a layshaft then to the 2nd gear on
the secondary shaft of the main gearbox.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

• Range 1
1st synchronizer, then the third train.
Fig. 13
• Range 2
The 2nd synchronizer attaches the 2nd gear to
Fig. 14
• Range 3
the 3rd synchronizer.
Fig. 15

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
• Range 4
the 4th synchronizer.
Fig. 16
5.1.2.4 Synchronisers
Single cone synchronisers (ranges 3 and 4)

(1) Sliding coupler
(2) Cone (brake)
(3) Coupling flange
(4) Ball bearing
(5) Thrust components
(6) Spring
Fig. 17
• Locked position
When the slider (1) moves towards the gear to be locked, it presses against the cone (2), which in turn
presses against the male cone of the coupling flange (3) by means of the ball bearings (4) and thrust
components (5).
When the synchronization is set, the slider (1) can mesh and silently lock with the teeth of the coupling
flange (3).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
• Neutral position
The slider (1) is in the middle position. The ball bearings (4) are pushed into the V groove of the slider by
the pressure springs (6). In this neutral position, the slider is locked by three balls held in place by the
pressure springs.
Double cone synchronisers (ranges 1 and 2)

(1) Sliding coupler
(2) Cone (brake)
(3) Coupling flange
(4) Ball bearing
(6) Spring
(7) Ring
(8) Cone (brake)
Fig. 18
Advantages and operation

The double cone synchroniser has the following advantages: increased reliability and greater resistance to
transmission effort.
The operating principle of the double-cone synchroniser is similar to that of the single-cone synchroniser.
The positions (locked and neutral) are obtained in the same way.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.1.2.5 Main gearbox robotic control
Fig. 19
The synchronisers are controlled by forks (1) and (2) and selector rails (3) and (4).
The forks and selector rails are assembled with pins.
The selector rails are controlled hydraulically. The selector rails are fitted on double-acting pistons (5) and
(6).
On the selector rail (4) that controls the 1st and 2nd synchroniser, the piston (6) is damped by a spring (7) to
enable smoother shifting between ranges 1 and 2.
The forks and selector rails are adjusted by tightening or loosening the adjustable stops (8) and (9). Once
adjusted, the stops are held in position by the screws (10) and (11).
A safety rod (12) prevents the selector rails from being engaged simultaneously. When a selector rail is
engaged, the rod locks the other one at the groove (13).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.1.3.1 View of Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox assembly
Fig. 20
(1) Gearbox housing (3) Shims
(2) Compartment (4) Primary shaft

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(5) Bearing cup (31) PTO shaft

(6) Bearing cone (32) Secondary shaft
(7) Double gear (33) Bearing cone
(8) Circlip (34) Bearing cup
(9) Spacer (35) 4th driven gear
(10) Shims (36) Spacer
(11) Bearing cone (37) 3rd driven gear
(12) Bearing cup (38) Bearing cup
(13) Bearing cup ((39))Bearing cone
(14) Bearing cone ((40))Lubrication pipe
(15) 3rd and 4th single cone synchronizer ((41))Spring
(16) Spacer (42) "O" ring
((17))Circlip ((43))Shims
(18) Circlip ((44))Spacer
(19) Spacer (45) Circlip
(20) Needle roller bearing ((46))Washer
(21) Needle roller bearing ((47))Shims
(22) Spacer ((48))Bearing cup
(23) Circlip ((49))Bearing cone
(24) Circlip (50) Bearing cone
(25) Ring (51) Bearing cup
(26) 4th driving gear (52) 2nd gear
(27) Bearing cup (53) 1st idler gear
(28) Bearing cone (54) 1st and 2nd double cone synchronizer
(29) Plug (55) Needle roller bearing
(30) "O" ring

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 21
(56) Powershift module housing (60) M clutch bell housing
(57) Spring (61) Ball bearing
(58) L brake disk/backing plate assembly (62) Front epicyclic gear train primary shaft
(59) M clutch disk/backing plate assembly (63) Lip seal

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(64) Friction washers (82) Pin

(65) Belleville spring (83) Needle roller bearing
(66) Cover plate (84.) Sun gear
(67) M clutch cover plate (85) Snap ring
(68) Planet carrier (86) O clutch cover plate
(69) L brake piston (104) N brake piston
(70) Ring gear (105) Spring
(71) Ring gear carrier (106) N brake disk/backing plate assembly
(72) Sun gear (107) O clutch disk/backing plate assembly
(73) Planet gear (108) Belleville springs
(74.) Ring (109) Secondary shaft
(75.) Ball bearing (110) Ball bearing
(76) Circlip (111) O clutch bell housing
(77) Spacer (112) PowerShuttle assembly
(78) Pin (120) Cover plate
(79) Needle roller bearing (121) Hub
(80) Planet carrier (122) Ball bearing
(81) Ring gear

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 22
(1) Gearbox housing (5) Bearing cup
(2) Compartment (6) Bearing cone
(3) Shims (7) Double gear
(4) Primary shaft (8) Circlip

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(9) Spacer (33) Bearing cone

(10) Shims (34) Bearing cup
(11) Bearing cone (35) 4th driven gear
(12) Bearing cup (36) Spacer
(13) Bearing cup (37) 3rd driven gear
(14) Bearing cone (38) Bearing cup
(15) 3rd and 4th single cone synchronizer (39) Bearing cone
(16) Spacer ((40))Lubrication pipe
((17))Circlip ((41))Spring
(18) Circlip (42) "O" ring
(19) Spacer (43) Shims
(20) Needle roller bearing (44) Spacer
(21) Needle roller bearing (45) Circlip
(22) Spacer (46) Washer
(23) Circlip (47) Shims
(25) Ring (49) Bearing cone
(26) 4th driving gear (50) Bearing cone
(27) Bearing cup (51) Bearing cup
(28) Bearing cone (52) 2nd gear
(29) Plug (53) 1st idler gear
(30) "O" ring (54) 1st and 2nd double cone synchronizer
(31) PTO shaft (55) Needle roller bearing
(32) Secondary shaft

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 23
(56) Multiplier module housing (60) Q clutch bell housing
(57) Spring (61) Ball bearing
(58) P brake disk/backing plate assembly (62) Multiplier primary shaft
(59) Q clutch disk/backing plate assembly (63) Lip seal

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(64) Friction washers (90;) Planet gear

(65) Belleville springs (91.) Ring gear carrier
(66) Cover plate (92.) Pin
(67) Q clutch cover plate (93) Ring
(68) Planet carrier (94) Planet carrier
(69) P brake piston (95) Sun gear
(70) Ring gear (96) Ball bearing
(71) Ring gear carrier (97) Ring gear
(72) Sun gear (98) Planet gear
(73) Ring (99) Pin
(74.) Planet gear (100) Ring
(75) Pin (101) Planet carrier
(76) Ball bearing (102) Sun gear
(77) Ball bearing (103) Ball bearing
(78) Friction washers (104) N brake piston
(79) M clutch bell housing (105) Spring
(80) Dynashift module housing (106) N brake disk/backing plate assembly
(81) L brake disk/backing plate assembly (107) O clutch disk/backing plate assembly
(82) L brake piston (108) Belleville spring
(83) M clutch disk/backing plate assembly (109) Secondary shaft
(84.) Belleville spring (110) Ball bearing
(85) Spring (111) O clutch bell housing
(86) Ball bearing (112) PowerShuttle assembly
(87) Primary shaft (120) Cover plate
(88) Ring gear carrier (121) Hub
(89) Ring gear (122) Ball bearing

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.1.3.5 Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox specifications
Fig. 24
(P) Preload (C) Dimension
(J) Clearance

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.1.3.6 Dyna-6 GBA25 gearbox specifications
Fig. 25
(J) Clearance

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.1.3.7 GBA25 gearbox specifications
Fig. 26
(J) Clearance

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
GBA25 gearbox specifications
1-2 3-4
X1 20.785 mm ± 1 mm 21.830 mm ± 0.8 mm
X2 21.255 mm ± 1.095 mm 22.300 mm ± 0.895 mm
Y 32.215 mm ± 1.245 mm 33.213 mm ± 1.093 mm
Z1 43.625 mm ± 0.9 mm 44.425 mm ± 0.8 mm
Z2 43.155 mm ± 0.995 mm 43.955 mm ± 0.895 mm
Z2 - X2 21.9 mm ± 1.4 mm 21.655 mm ± 1.275 mm

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.1.4.1 Dyna-4 GBA25 gearbox disassembly
Procedure
Fig. 27
1. Remove the PTO shaft.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 28
2. Separate the mechanical gearbox.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 29
3. Remove the spacer and the reverse layshaft.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 30
4. Remove the primary and secondary shafts.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 31
5. Remove the Dynashift module and PowerShuttle assembly.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 32
6. Remove the PowerShuttle and planet carrier from the Dynashift module.
Fig. 33
7. Separate the PowerShuttle and planet carrier from the Dynashift module.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 34
8. Remove the crown wheels and the housing from the Dynashift module.
Fig. 35
9. Remove the Dynashift module front cover plate.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.1.4.2 Dyna-6 GBA25 gearbox disassembly
Procedure
Fig. 36
1. Remove the PTO shaft.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 37
2. Separate the mechanical gearbox.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 38
3. Remove the spacer and the reverse layshaft.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 39
4. Remove the primary and secondary shafts.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 40
5. Remove the multiplier module, Dynashift module and PowerShuttle assembly.
Fig. 41
6. Remove the PowerShuttle and planet carriers from the Dynashift module.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 42
7. Separate the PowerShuttle and planet carriers from the Dynashift module.
Fig. 43
8. Remove the crown wheels from the Dynashift module.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 44
9. Remove the Dynashift module housing.
Fig. 45
10. Remove the multiplier module cover plate.
5.1.4.3 Synchronizers
Synchronisers service
Single cone synchronisers (ranges 3 and 4) - operation

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(1) Sliding coupler

(2) Cone (brake)
(3) Coupling flange
(4) Ball bearing
(6) Spring
• Locked position
When the slider (1) moves toward the gear to
be locked, it presses against the cone (2),
which in turn presses against the male cone of
the coupling flange (3) by means of the ball
bearings (4) and thrust components (5).
When the synchronization is set, the slider (1)
can mesh and silently lock with the teeth of the
coupling flange (3).
• Neutral position
The slider (1) is in the middle position. The ball
bearings (4) are pushed into the V groove of the
slider by the pressure springs (6). In this neutral
position, the slider is locked by three balls held
in place by the pressure springs.
Fig. 46
Single cone synchronisers - service

If the single cone synchronisers (11), (23) and (31) have been disassembled, check the wear to the cone (2)
as follows:
Procedure
1. Stack the coupling flange (3) and the cone (2)
on the relevant gear.
2. Correctly position the cone (2) on the male
cone of the coupling flange, turning it one
way then the other several times and
applying manual pressure.
3. Using a set of shims, measure dimension X
at three equidistant points. Calculate the
average of the three values and proceed as
described below, depending on the result
obtained. On a new synchronizer, dimension
X must be 1.5 mm maximum.
After operation, if X is less than or equal to
Fig. 47
0.80 mm:
• replace the cone (2);
• check the measurement of X again, using
the same process.
If dimension X is still incorrect, also replace
the coupling flange (3) or, if necessary, the
entire synchronizer.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Double cone synchronisers (ranges 1 and 2) - operation

(1) Sliding coupler
(2) Cone (brake)
(3) Coupling flange
(4) Ball bearing
(6) Spring
(7) Ring
(8) Cone (brake)
Advantages and operation
The double cone synchronizer has the following
advantages: increased reliability and greater
resistance to transmission effort.
The operating principle of the double-cone
synchronizer is similar to that of the single-cone
synchronizer. The positions (locked and neutral)
are obtained in the same way.
Fig. 48
Double cone synchronisers - service

If the double cone synchronizer of the mechanical reverse shuttle has been disassembled, check the cones
(2) and (8) for wear as follows:
Procedure
1. Stack the coupling flange (3), cones (2) and
(8) and ring (7).
2. Correctly position the ring (7) on the cones
(2) and (8), turning it one way then the other
several times and applying manual pressure.
3. Using a set of shims, measure dimension X
at three equidistant points. Calculate the
average of the three values and proceed as
described below, depending on the result
obtained. On a new synchronizer, dimension
X must be 1.6 mm minimum.
After operation, if X is less than or equal to
0.60 mm - 0.80 mm:
Fig. 49
• replace the cones (2) and (8);
• check the measurement of X again, using
the same process.
If dimension X is still incorrect, also replace
the ring (7) or, if necessary, the entire
synchronizer.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.2 GBA25/PowerShuttle
5.2.1 General
The PowerShuttle, also called "ISC", is a system consisting of two electrohydraulically controlled multidisc
clutches. It enables the direction to be reversed under load. It is fitted to all tractors with a GBA25 gearbox.
The reverse shuttle is fitted in the center of the gearbox. It links the gearbox Powershift module to the
mechanical section of the gearbox.
The PowerShuttle is used as the main clutch of the transmission.
The PowerShuttle design is simple. It comprises two multidisc clutches, one for forward travel and one for
reverse travel. The PowerShuttle transmits the drive from the gearbox Powershift module to the
mechanical section of the gearbox.
Forward drive is transmitted directly to the primary shaft of the mechanical gearbox. For reverse travel, a
gear train and a layshaft transmit drive to the 2nd gear on the secondary shaft of the mechanical gearbox.
A shared lever, located on the left-hand side under
the steering wheel, reverses the direction of travel
and shifts between ratios under load.
It also has a position for manual declutching of the
transmission.
Fig. 50
Depending on the position selected by the operator, the lever controls two proportional solenoid valves via
an Autotronic 5 controller.
The clutch pedal or maneuvering pedal also controls the clutch via sensors and the controller. It is useful
when carrying out precise maneuvers or attaching implements.
The two solenoid valves (1) and (2) are fitted on
the hydraulic unit located at the front right-hand
side of the gearbox. This unit also includes the
solenoid valves that control the Powershift ratios.
It is fed by the tractor hydraulic system with a
pressure of 20 bar.
• (1) Forward solenoid valve.
• (2) Reverse solenoid valve.
Fig. 51
A speed sensor fitted to the right-hand side of the gearbox informs the controller of the rotational output
speed of the PowerShuttle. The measurement is taken on the 2nd gear of the secondary shaft.

see chapter View of the GBA25 PowerShuttle assembly, page 5-55 and see chapter Blown-up view of the
GBA25 PowerShuttle, page 5-57 .

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Construction
The PowerShuttle unit comprises two identical clutches fitted one opposite the other.
The PowerShuttle consists mainly of a unit (14) fitted to the output shaft (1) of the Dynashift module. The
shaft (1) is supported on the Dynashift module side by a ball bearing (3) held on the bearing (57) by the
flange (59). On the mechanical gearbox side, the shaft (1) is supported by a ball bearing (39) fitted on the
primary shaft of the mechanical gearbox (22). The forward position output hub (20) is splined to the shaft
(22).
The reverse gear (6) turns on two ball bearings (5) and (7).
Each clutch mechanism comprises a piston (30) and (32), a series of disks (16) (11) and backing plates (15)
(12). The pistons are sealed by square seals (35) (36) and (33) (34). Each piston is repositioned by a series
of Belleville springs (17) and (31).
A thrust washer (13) or (37) is positioned between the piston (32) or (30) and the Belleville springs (31) or
(17). The Belleville springs (31) and (17) are held on the shaft (1) by the rings (10) and (45) and snap rings (9)
and (44) respectively.
The reverse layshaft (51) is supported at the front by a ball bearing (50) fitted tightly in the cover plate of
the Dynashift module (26). On the mechanical gearbox side, the gear (38), splined to the shaft (51), turns
on two tapered roller bearings. This part of the mechanism is described in the "Mechanical gearbox"
section.
The gear (49) is splined to the shaft (51). A retainer ring (58) holds the gear (49) in position on the shaft (51).
Operation
• Forward
To engage the forward position, the piston is fed by the tractor 20 bar hydraulic system. Oil flows
through the channel (B) in the shaft (1) and moves the piston (30). The disks (16) and backing plates (15)
are compressed between the piston and the cover plate (40).
Input drive is transmitted via the unit (14) to the backing plates (15) and disks (16). The splined hub (20)
directly drives the gearbox primary shaft (22).
• Reverse
The clutch mechanism is identical to the forward position. The reverse gear (6) drives the 2nd gear (48)
of the mechanical gearbox via the layshaft (51); the 2nd gear turns idle on the secondary shaft (47). The
direction of travel is reversed by a series of layshaft gears (6), (49) and (38).
NOTE:
The forward and reverse position ratios are identical.
Control
Pressure is supplied to the pistons (30) and (32) by internal channels (A) and (B) located in the shaft (1).
Two solenoid valves located on the gearbox right-hand cover plate control the clutches. The internal
channels are located in the bearing (57) and in the shaft (1). Three rings (4) provide the seal between the
bearing (57) and the shaft (1). The channels are blocked at the end of the shaft (1) by plugs.
Lubrication
A flow of oil from the tractor's hydraulic system is sent to the bearing (57) on the left-hand side of the
gearbox. The oil flow is channeled to the center of the upper shaftline. Radial holes distribute the oil to the
various elements. The channels are blocked at the end of the shaft (1) by plugs. The seal ring (42), "O" ring
(41) and ring (43) prevent the oil from leaking out where the shafts (1) and (22) join.
PowerShuttle control
Reversal of the direction of travel is controlled electrohydraulically by an Autotronic 5 controller used to
control the transmission. The controller operates two proportional solenoid valves that control the

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
PowerShuttle clutches. To control the reversal cycle or engagement of a clutch, the controller receives
information concerning engine rotational speed, forward speed and PowerShuttle output rotational speed.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.2.3.1 View of the GBA25 PowerShuttle assembly
Fig. 52
(1) PowerShuttle primary shaft (3) Bearing
(2) Snap ring (4) Rings

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(5) Bearing (34) Seal

(6) Reverse driving gear (35) Seal
(7) Bearing (36) Seal
(8) Circlip (37) Washer
(9) Snap ring (38) Reverse driving gear
(10) Ring (39) Bearing
(11) Disks (40) Forward clutch cover plate
(12) Backing plates (41) "O" ring
(13) Washer (42) Seal ring
(14) PowerShuttle unit (43) Ring
(15) Backing plates (44) Snap ring
(16) Disks (45) Ring
(17) Belleville springs (46) Gearbox internal compartment
(18) Circlip (47) Mechanical gearbox secondary shaft
(19) Snap ring (48) Second range driven gear
(20) Forward output hub (49) Reverse layshaft gear
(21) Gearbox housing (50) Bearing
(22) Mechanical gearbox primary shaft (51) Layshaft
(23) PTO shaft (52) Shims
(24) Lubricating oil deflector (53) Bearing cup
(25) Snap ring (54) Bearing cone
(26) Dynashift module cover plate (55) Bearing cup
(28) Reverse clutch cover plate (57) Bush
(29) Circlip (58) Circlip
(30) Forward clutch piston (59) Clamp
(31) Belleville springs (60) Needle roller bearing
(32) Reverse clutch piston (61) Circlip
(33) Seal

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.2.3.2 Blown-up view of the GBA25 PowerShuttle
Fig. 53
(1) PowerShuttle primary shaft (5) Bearing
(2) Snap ring (6) Reverse driving gear
(3) Bearing (7) Bearing
(4) Rings (8) Circlip

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(9) Snap ring (36) Seal

(10) Ring (37) Washer
(11) Disks (38) Reverse driving gear
(12) Backing plates (39) Bearing
(13) Washer (40) Forward clutch cover plate
(14) PowerShuttle unit (41) "O" ring
(15) Backing plates (42) Seal ring
(17) Belleville springs (44) Snap ring
(18) Circlip (45) Ring
(19) Snap ring (46) Gearbox internal compartment
(20) Forward output hub (47) Mechanical gearbox secondary shaft
(21) Gearbox housing (48) Second range driven gear
(22) Mechanical gearbox primary shaft (49) Reverse layshaft gear
(23) PTO shaft (50) Bearing
(24) Lubricating oil deflector (51) Layshaft
(25) Snap ring (52) Shims
(26) Dynashift module cover plate (53) Bearing cup
(28) Reverse clutch cover plate (55) Bearing cup
(29) Circlip (56) Bearing cone
(30) Forward clutch piston (57) Bush
(31) Belleville springs (58) Circlip
(32) Reverse clutch piston (59) Clamp
(33) Seal (60) Needle roller bearing
(34) Seal (61) Circlip
(35) Seal

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.2.4.1 Dyna-4 transmission
Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Drain the transmission oil.
2. Split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox.
3. Remove:
• either the complete gearbox (if an operation is to be carried out on the whole transmission
assembly),
• or only the gearbox Powershift module, leaving the mechanical gearbox coupled to the rear axle (if
an operation is to be carried out on the Powershift module or reverse shuttle only).
NOTE:
It is possible to carry out an operation on the forward clutch by splitting the tractor between the
Powershift module and the mechanical gearbox.
4. Remove the plug (A) and its seal (B).
5. Remove the retainer ring (C) using a small
pair of pliers.
6. Remove the lubrication pipe (D).
Fig. 54
7. Remove the hydraulic gearbox control unit
(E).
8. Remove the connecting pipes (F) and (G).
Fig. 55
9. Remove
• The front axle shaft
• The PTO shaft
• The reverse layshaft and gear

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Removing the PowerShuttle
Procedure
1. Position the gearbox vertically on blocks of
approximately 120 mm.
2. Unscrew the two diametrically opposed
screws (A) and replace them with two
shackles to sling the module.
3. CAUTION:
Do not remove the screws (C).
They hold the housing (D) in
place.
Unscrew the 8 screws (B).
4. Sling the gearbox Dynashift module using
the shackles.
5. Lift the module out of the housing.
NOTE: Rotate the module anti-clockwise by
approximately 120° to help remove the
reverse layshaft.
Fig. 56
6. Make a mark (R) on the housings to ensure
the modules are positioned correctly on
reassembly.
7. Place the Dynashift module on a support
positioned on the forward clutch.
8. Take out the screws holding the cover plate
(26) on the housing (D).
Fig. 57
9. Using the sling, raise and separate the front section of the unit (D) (Dynashift module).
NOTE: During this step, the brake, the clutch and the rear planet carrier remain on the PowerShuttle.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
10. Remove the planet carrier (F).

11. Take out the brake and clutch assembly (G)
and the friction washer (H).
12. Remove the screws from the cover plate (26)
on the bearing (57).
Fig. 58
Refitting the PowerShuttle
Procedure
1. Place the PowerShuttle on a support positioned on the forward clutch.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
2. Fit the cover plate (26) on the bearing (57).

Check that the snap ring (2) is present on the
shaft (1).
3. Fit the cover plate (26) screws, after
smearing them with Loctite 242 or
equivalent. Tighten to a torque of 29 Nm -
37 Nm.
4. Fit the friction washer (H), smeared with oil,
on the clutch unit (G).
5. Refit the brake and clutch assembly (G) on
the cover plate (26).
NOTE: If the brake disks and clutch disks
have been replaced, they must be soaked for
approximately one hour in a transmission oil
bath.
6. Refit the planet carrier (F).
Fig. 59
7. Align the lubrication hole (arrow) with a tooth
on each planet gear.
8. Sling the Dynashift module as per the
removal process.
9. Check that the return springs (S) are present
in the cover plate (26).
Fig. 60
10. Refit the module to the PowerShuttle, aligning the two parts using the mark (R) made during
removal.
NOTE: Take care when inserting the planet gears into the Dynashift module piston.
11. Fit the cover plate (26) screws to the Dynashift module, after smearing them with Loctite 242 or
equivalent. Tighten the screws to a torque of 66 Nm.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
12. Clean the mating faces then apply Loctite

510 or an equivalent sealing product.
13. Replace the "O" ring (J). Lightly smear it with
grease and fit it on the Dynashift module.
14. Sling the reverse shuttle and Dynashift
module assembly. Fit this assembly in the
gearbox housing.
15. Lower the sling, aligning the centring pin (L)
with the hole.
Fig. 61
16. Refit the screws (B) of the unit (D).
5.2.4.2 Dyna-6 transmission
Preliminary steps
Procedure
3. Remove:
assembly),
NOTE:
pair of pliers.
Fig. 62

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

(E).
Fig. 63
9. Remove
• The PTO shaft
Removing the PowerShuttle
Procedure
3. CAUTION:
place.
the shackles.
NOTE:
Rotate the module anti-clockwise by
reverse layshaft.
Fig. 64

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

reassembly.
Fig. 65
9. Using the sling, raise and separate the front section of the unit (D) (multiplier module, Dynashift
module).
NOTE:
During this operation, the rear brake, reverse clutch and double epicyclic gear train stay on the
PowerShuttle.
10. Take off the retainer ring (E) holding the
double planet carrier in position (F).
11. Extract the double planet carrier (F). Remove
the spring washer.
12. Take out the brake and clutch assembly (G)
and the friction washer (H).
13. Remove the screws from the cover plate (26)
on the bearing (57).
Fig. 66
Refitting the PowerShuttle
Procedure
1. Place the PowerShuttle on a support positioned on the forward clutch.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
2. Fit the cover plate (26) on the bearing (57).

Check that the snap ring (2) is present on the
shaft (1).
3. Fit the cover plate (26) screws, after
smearing them with Loctite 242 or
equivalent. Tighten to a torque of 29 Nm -
37 Nm.
4. Fit the friction washer (H), smeared with oil,
on the clutch unit (G).
5. Refit the brake and clutch assembly (G) on
NOTE:
If the brake disks and clutch disks have been
replaced, they must be soaked for
bath.
6. Refit the double planet carrier (F).
7. Refit the retainer ring (E) on the shaft.
Fig. 67
removal process.
Fig. 68
removal.
NOTE:
Take care when inserting the planet gears into the Dynashift module piston.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

gearbox housing.
with the hole.
Fig. 69
5.2.4.3 Disassembling the PowerShuttle
Reverse clutch
Procedure
1. Remove the PowerShuttle assembly .
2. Remove the plate (59). Remove the snap ring
(2).
3. Remove the retainer ring (29).
4. Remove the bearing (57), reverse gear (6),
bearings (57) and bearing (3) assembly.
5. If it is necessary to replace the bearings (5)
and (7), take off the retainer ring (8), oil
deflector (24) and snap ring (25).
NOTE: Mark the direction in which the oil
deflector is fitted (25).
6. Remove the clutch disks (11) and backing
plates (12).
7. Remove and discard the rings (4).
Fig. 70

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
8. Fit the reverse shuttle unit on a press with

the Belleville springs (31) facing upward.
Using tool ATP3002, compress the Belleville
springs (31).
Fig. 71
9. Remove the snap ring (9) and washer (10).

Release the press and take off the Belleville
springs (31) and the thrust washer (13).
10. Drive out the piston (32) using compressed
air. Discard the square seals (33) (34).
Fig. 72
Forward clutch
Procedure
1. Turn over the clutch unit (14).
3. Take off the forward clutch cover plate (40) with the hub (20) and snap ring (19).
4. Remove the disks (16) and backing plates (15).
5. Repeat steps see Forward clutch step 8, page 5-68 and see Forward clutch step 9, page 5-68 (see
chapter Reverse clutch, page 5-67 ) with the Belleville springs (17), snap ring (44) and washers (45)
and (37).
6. Drive out the piston (30) using compressed air. Discard the square seals (35) (36).
7. Take off the seal ring (42) and the bearing
(39). Discard the "O" ring (41) and the ring
(43).
8. If necessary, take off the needle roller
bearing (60).
Fig. 73

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.2.4.4 Reassembling the PowerShuttle

NOTE:
The "O" rings and square seals must be lubricated prior to assembly to ensure they are positioned correctly.
NOTE:
New disks must always be soaked for approximately one hour in transmission oil.
Procedure
Check the condition of the parts of the mechanism. Replace those that are defective. Ensure that the
clutch lubrication holes and control ports in the shaft (1) are clean.
Assembling the pistons (30) and (32)
Procedure
1. Fit new pre-lubricated square seals (33) (34)
and (35) (36) in the grooves of the pistons
(30) and (32).
NOTE: Ensure that the seals are correctly
positioned in the grooves.
2. Lubricate the piston liners in the unit (14).
3. Fit the pistons (30) and (32) in the unit (14) by
striking the rim of each piston alternately
with a plastic hammer.
Fig. 74
Reverse clutch
Procedure
1. Position the washer (13) then the Belleville springs (31) on the unit (14). Using a press and the tool
ATP3002 (see chapter PowerShuttle - Service tools, page 5-71 , 5B28), compress the Belleville
springs (31) as in step see Reverse clutch step 8, page 5-68 (see chapter Reverse clutch, page 5-67 ,
see chapter Reverse clutch, page 5-67 ).
2. Fit the thrust washer (10). Fit a new snap ring (9).
NOTE: Ensure the washer (10) is positioned correctly. Its shoulder should be facing the snap ring.
3. Oil three new rings (4) and fit them on the grooves of the shaft (1).
4. If the bearings (5) and (7) have been removed at step see Reverse clutch step 5, page 5-67 (see
chapter Reverse clutch, page 5-67 , see chapter Reverse clutch, page 5-67 ), refit them in order on
the hub (6):
• the bearing (7),
• the oil deflector (24),
• a new snap ring (25),
• the bearing (5).
5. Ensure that the clutch lubrication holes and control ports in the bearing (57) are clean.
6. Assemble the hub/gear (6) with the bearing (57).
7. Fit the retainer ring (8).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
8. Position the bearing (57), hub/gear (6) and

bearings (57) assembly on a support with a
central hole to insert the shaft (1), with the
hub turned upwards.
9. Slide the disks (11) and backing plates (12)
onto the reverse gear (6).
NOTE: Ensure that the disks and backing
plates are stacked in the correct order.
10. Align the splines of the backing plates (12).
11. Lower the reverse shuttle unit (14) so that
the splines of the backing plates slide into
those of the unit.
12. Fit the retainer ring (29) in its groove on the Fig. 75
unit (14.)
Forward clutch
Procedure
1. If the needle roller bearing (60) supporting the PTO shaft has been removed at step see Forward
clutch step 7, page 5-68 (see chapter Forward clutch, page 5-68 , see chapter Reverse clutch, page
5-67 ), replace it with a new one.
2. Lubricate the "O" ring (41) and ring (43). Fit them on the seal ring (42).
3. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the ring (42) is the
right way round. Its shoulder (arrow) should
be facing the bearing (39).
On the shaft (1):
• insert the bearing (39),
• insert the ring (42).
4. Carry out steps see Forward clutch step 1,
page 5-69 and see Forward clutch step 2,
page 5-69 (see chapter Reverse clutch, page
5-69 ) with the forward clutch.
5. Fit the hub (20) in the unit (14).
6. Slide on the disks (16) and backing plates
Fig. 76
(15).
NOTE: Ensure that the disks and backing
plates are stacked in the correct order see
Fig. 75 .
7. Fit the cover plate (40) with the snap ring
(19).
9. Refit the PowerShuttle assembly .
5.2.4.5 Final steps
Procedure
1. Refit the PTO shaft in the upper transmission shaftline.

2. Refit the reverse layshaft and gear assembly.
3. Refit the hydraulic control cover plates, and reconnect the hydraulic pipes and hoses.
4. Assemble the Dynashift module with the engine.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5. Assemble the Dynashift module with the robotic gearbox, applying Loctite 5206 or an equivalent
sealing product to the mating faces.
5.2.5 Service tools
5.2.5.1 General
5.2.5.2 PowerShuttle - Service tools

Reference ATP3002
Description Belleville spring compression tool
Supplier AGCO replacement parts department

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.3 GBA25/Dyna-4 PowerShift module

5.3.1 Dyna-4 General information
The Powershift module is fitted on Dyna-4 GBA25 gearboxes. It is located at the gearbox input and is
driven directly by the engine. This module provides the GBA25 transmission with four gear ratios for
shifting under load.
These four ratios are provided by two epicyclic gear trains, operating with two brakes and two clutches.
The gear ratios can be controlled with the PowerShuttle lever (to the left under the steering wheel) or with
the lever on the right-hand console or right-hand armrest, depending on option.
The brakes and clutches are controlled by
proportional solenoid valves (L) and (N). They are
fitted to a hydraulic unit to the front right of the
gearbox that operates on the tractor 20 bar
system.
Fig. 77
5.3.2 Dyna-4 Operating principle
Dynashift module
The Powershift module is made up of two epicyclic gear trains:
• Front epicyclic gear train, located at the gearbox input. This comprises a sun gear (36), a planet carrier
(25), three planet gears (48) and a crown wheel (65). It is controlled by a brake and a clutch. Its ratio is
1.23/1 (speed multiplied) or 1/1 (train locked).
• Rear epicyclic gear train, located on the unit output. This comprises a sun gear (49), a planet carrier (30),
three planet gears (50) and a crown wheel (29). It is controlled by a brake and a clutch. Its ratio is 1/1.5
(speed reduced) or 1/1 (train locked).
Front epicyclic gear train

The input shaft (10) of the module is connected to the planet carrier (25) of the primary epicyclic gear train.
The sun gear (36) is either integral with the planet carrier (25) (clutch M engaged, epicyclic gear train
locked) or integral with the gearbox housing (brake L engaged, input speed multiplied). Drive is transmitted
by the crown wheel (65) to the crown wheel (29) of the rear epicyclic gear train.
Rear epicyclic gear train

Input drive is transmitted by the crown wheel (29). The sun gear (49) is either integral with the planet
carrier (30) (clutch O engaged, epicyclic gear train locked) or integral with the gearbox housing (brake N
engaged, input speed reduced). The output shaft (47) is integral with the planet carrier (30), and is
connected to the PowerShuttle.
Lubrication
The Powershift module is lubricated under pressure by a network of internal channels. Oil enters the upper
main shaft of the gearbox, then travels through radial holes to the elements requiring lubrication.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
The oil flows from the tractor's hydraulic system.
Powershift module control

The Powershift module ratio can be changed via:
• The Power Control lever (1) located on the left
underneath the steering wheel
• The transmission lever (2)
Fig. 78
5.3.2.1 Kinematics
Fig. 79
(L) Sun gear brake, Dynashift module front (N) Sun gear brake, Dynashift module rear
epicyclic gear train epicyclic gear train
(M) Sun gear clutch, Dynashift module front (O) Sun gear clutch, Dynashift module rear
epicyclic gear train epicyclic gear train

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Logic of the ratios
Powershift Front epicyclic gear Front epicyclic gear train Solenoid valve Clutches/
ratio train Brakes (X =
engaged)
Status Ratio Status Ratio L N L M N O
A Direct drive 1/1 Epicyclic gear 1/1.5 12 V X X
train engaged
B Epicyclic 1.23/1 Epicyclic gear 1/1.5 12 V 12 V X X
gear train train engaged
engaged
C Direct drive 1/1 Direct drive 1/1 X X
D Epicyclic 1.23/1 Direct drive 1/1 12 V X X
gear train
engaged
The four ratios are obtained by combining the two epicyclic gear trains. The front epicyclic gear train
multiplies the input speed to 1.23/1, while the rear epicyclic gear train reduces the speed to 1/1.5.
Each epicyclic gear train may be engaged (multiplication or reduction) or locked (ratio 1/1). The two
epicyclic gear trains are used in combination to obtain the four ratios A, B, C and D.
Piston (P)
Brake (F)
Junction plate (L)
Clutch (E)
Belleville spring (R)
The brakes and clutches operate as a 1 brake/1

clutch set. The brakes (F) mesh an element to the Fig. 80
housing (fixed), and the clutches (E) mesh two
elements in rotation.
The clutches/brakes are controlled by a single
piston (P). A junction plate (L) allows the clutch to
be released when the brake is engaged, and vice
versa.
When there is no pressure on the piston (position
A), the Belleville spring (R) engages the clutch (E).
When the piston (P) is actuated (position B), it
engages the brake (F), and pushes back the
Belleville spring (R) via the plate (L).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Ratio A (1/1.5)
Fig. 81
Brake piston "L" is not under pressure, clutch "M" is engaged and locks the front epicyclic gear train. Brake
piston "N" is under pressure. The sun gear of the rear epicyclic gear train is held in relation to the gearbox
housing, enabling the rear epicyclic gear train to reduce the input speed.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Ratio B (1/1.22)
Fig. 82
The two brake pistons L and N are under pressure. The sun gears are held in relation to the gearbox
housing. The two epicyclic gear trains are engaged. The front epicyclic gear train increases the input speed
to 1.23/1 and the rear epicyclic gear train reduces the speed to 1/1.5, giving an overall ratio of 1/1.22.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Ratio C (1/1)
Fig. 83
None of the pistons is under pressure, clutches "M" and "O" are engaged by their respective Belleville
springs. Both epicyclic gear trains are locked and the input speed is identical to the output speed.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Ratio D (1.23/1)
Fig. 84
Brake piston "L" is under pressure, it holds the sun gear of the front epicyclic gear train in relation to the
housing. The front epicyclic gear train multiplies the input speed by 1.23/1. The brake piston "N" is not
under pressure. Clutch "O" locks the rear epicyclic gear train; its ratio is 1/1.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.3.3.1 View of Dyna-4 assembly
Fig. 85
(1) Housing (3) M clutch bell housing
(2) Cover plate (4) Belleville spring

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(5) Disks (42) Snap ring

(6) Backing plates (43) Bronze spacer
(7) M clutch cover plate (44) Ball bearing
(8) Disks (45) Spacer
(9) Thrust plate (46) Circlip
(10) Input shaft (47) Output shaft
(11) Lip seal (48) Planet gear
(12) Ball bearing (49) Sun gear
(13) Friction washer (50) Planet gear
(14) Friction washer (51) Needle roller bearing
(15) Screw (52) Pin
(16) Clutch M / brake L junction plate (53) Plug
(17) Brake L piston (54) Friction washers
(18) Powershift module front housing (55) "O" ring
(19) "O" ring (56) "O" ring
(20) "O" ring (57) N brake piston
(21) "O" ring (58) Spring
(22) Spring (59) Snap ring
(23) "O" ring (60) Ball bearing
(24) "O" ring (61) Clutch hub
(25) Front planet carrier (62) Backing plates
(26) Cover plate (63) Disks
(27) Ring gear carrier (64) Screw
(28) Rear housing (65) Front ring gear
(29) Rear ring gear (66) Clutch O bell housing
(30) Rear planet carrier (67) Belleville spring
(31) Snap ring (68) Belleville spring
(32) Clutch O cover plate (69) Friction washer
(33) Disks (70) Spacer
(34) Backing plates (71) Bush
(35) Clutch O / brake N junction plate (72) Spring washer
(36) Sun gear (73) Needle roller bearing
(37) Snap ring (74.) "O" ring
(38) Needle roller bearing (75.) "O" ring
(39) Pin (76) "O" ring
(40) Plug (77) Washer
(41) Friction washers

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.3.3.2 Dyna-4 blown-up view
Fig. 86
(1) Housing (4) Belleville spring
(2) Cover plate (5) Disks
(3) M clutch bell housing (6) Backing plates

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(7) M clutch cover plate (43) Bronze spacer

(8) Disks (44) Ball bearing
(9) Thrust plate (45) Spacer
(10) Input shaft (46) Circlip
(11) Lip seal (47) Output shaft
(12) Ball bearing (48) Planet gear
(13) Friction washer (49) Sun gear
(14) Friction washer (50) Planet gear
(15) Screw (51) Needle roller bearing
(16) Clutch M / brake L junction plate (52) Pin
(17) Brake L piston (53) Plug
(18) Powershift module front housing (54) Friction washers
(19) "O" ring (55) "O" ring
(20) "O" ring (56) "O" ring
(21) "O" ring (57) N brake piston
(22) Spring (58) Spring
(23) "O" ring (59) Snap ring
(25) Front planet carrier (61) Clutch hub
(26) Cover plate (62) Backing plates
(27) Ring gear carrier (63) Disks
(28) Rear housing (64) Screw
(29) Rear ring gear (65) Front ring gear
(30) Rear planet carrier (66) Clutch O bell housing
(31) Snap ring (67) Belleville spring
(32) Clutch O cover plate (68) Belleville spring
(33) Disks (69) Friction washer
(34) Backing plates (70) Spacer
(35) Clutch O / brake N junction plate (71) Bush
(36) Sun gear (72) Spring washer
(37) Snap ring (73) Needle roller bearing
(38) Needle roller bearing (74.) "O" ring
(39) Pin (75.) "O" ring
(40) Plug (76) "O" ring
(41) Friction washers (77) Washer
(42) Snap ring

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.3.4 Removing/refitting Dyna-4
Procedure
3. Remove:
assembly),
NOTE:
pair of pliers.
Fig. 87
(E).
Fig. 88
9. Remove
• The PTO shaft

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.3.4.2 Removing the Dynashift module
Procedure
1. If the entire gearbox has been removed, separate the Powershift module from the mechanical
gearbox.
4. CAUTION:
place.
the shackles.
NOTE: Rotate the module anti-clockwise by
reverse layshaft.
Fig. 89
reassembly.
Fig. 90
10. Using the sling, raise and separate the front section of the unit (D) (Dynashift module).
NOTE: During this step, the brake, the clutch and the rear planet carrier remain on the PowerShuttle.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.3.4.3 Refitting the Dynashift module
Procedure
removal process.
Fig. 91
removal.
gearbox housing.
with the hole.
Fig. 92

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.3.4.4 Disassembling the Dynashift module
Procedure
1. Remove the piston (57) and the springs (58).
2. Place the section with the reverse shuttle on
a suitable support, with the cover plate (26)
and the planet carrier (30) facing upward.
3. Remove the planet carrier (30).
Fig. 93
4. Remove the clutch O and brake N assembly
from the cover plate (26). Recover the
friction washer (69).
5. Remove the clutch hub (61). Take out the
screws (64) to remove the clutch cover plate
(32).
6. Mark the order and remove the disks and
backing plates of the brake and clutch.
7. Mark the direction and remove the Belleville
springs (67) and (68).
Fig. 94

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
8. If necessary, take out the needle roller

bearing (73) from the clutch bell housing (66).
Fig. 95
9. Place the front part of the Powershift module

facing downwards on a suitable support.
Make a mark (G) on the housings (28) and
(18).
10. Remove the screws from the housings (28)
and (18), then remove the housing (28).
11. Take out and discard the "O" rings (74) and
(75) from the control ports on the housing.
Fig. 96
12. Discard the "O" ring (19) and the "O" ring (76).
Fig. 97

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
13. Remove the ring gear carrier assembly (27),

and the two ring gears (29) and (65) with the
front planet carrier.
Fig. 98
15. Separate the front planet carrier from the ring
gears.
16. Recover the spacer (45).
Fig. 99
17. Remove the bearing (44), the washer (77)
and the spacer (43) from the planet carrier
(25).
Fig. 100

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
18. Place the housing (18) on shims, with the

input shaft (10) facing upward. Place service
tool 3378012M2 on the input shaft (10) to
protect the lip seal (11).
19. Unscrew the cover plate screws (2) on the
housing (18). Remove the cover plate (2) and
recover the springs (22). Discard the "O" ring
(21).
20. Remove the brake piston (17) from the
housing (18). Discard the "O" rings (23) and
(24).
21. Remove the friction washer (13). Remove
the lip seal (11).
Fig. 101
22. Remove the clutch M and brake L assembly
from the housing (18).
23. Remove the friction washer (14) and the
snap ring (42).
Fig. 102
24. Place the clutch M and brake L assembly on
a support. Take out the screws (15) to
remove the clutch cover plate (7).
Fig. 103
25. If necessary, take out the snap ring (37) to

separate the sun gear (36) from the clutch
cover plate (7).
Fig. 104

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
26. Mark the order of the disks and brake/clutch

backing plates Remove the disks (5) and
backing plates (6) of clutch M and the disks
(8) and backing plates (9) of brake L.
27. Remove the junction plate (16).
Fig. 105
28. Mark the assembly order then remove the
input shaft (10), the Belleville spring (4), the
spring washer (72) and the bearing (12).
Fig. 106
5.3.4.5 Reassembling the Dynashift module
Procedure
1. Ensure all parts are in good condition. Ensure
the clutch control ports and lubrication holes
are clean.
2. Fit a new pre-oiled "O" ring (21) on the
Powershift module cover plate (2).
3. In the cover plate (2), fit a new lip seal (11)
smeared with grease on the inside and oiled
on the outside.
4. Fit the springs (22) in their housings. Fit a
disk (8) on the cover plate (2).
NOTE: If the brake disks or clutch disks have
been replaced, they must be soaked for
approximately one hour in a transmission oil Fig. 107
bath.
5. Fit the friction washer (13), with the grease
removed and smeared with Loctite 648 or
equivalent.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
6. Fit the Belleville spring (4), the ball bearing

(12) and the spring washer (72) on the clutch
bell housing (3). Slide on the shaft (10).
Fig. 108
7. On the clutch bell housing (3), fit the junction

plate (16), the clutch disks (5) and backing
plates (6), and a brake disk (8) and backing
plate (9).
Fig. 109
8. Refit the clutch cover plate (7). Fit the

screws (15), smeared with Loctite 242.
Tighten them to a torque of 33 Nm.
9. Fit the snap ring (42) on the shaft (10).
Fig. 110
10. Fit the friction washer (14), smeared with
grease, on the clutch bell housing (3).
11. Fit service tool 3378012M2 (see § I) on the
input shaft (10) to protect the lip seal (11). Fit
clutch M/brake L on the cover plate (2),
keeping an eye on the lip seal (11).
NOTE: Place the cover plate (2) on a support
to position the input shaft (10).
Fig. 111

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
12. Refit the last disk (8) of brake L. Fit the brake
piston (17) with new, oiled "O" rings (23)(24),
in the housing (18).
13. Refit the housing (18) on the cover plate (2).
Fit the cover plate attachment screws
smeared with Loctite 242. Tighten them to
29 Nm - 37 Nm
Fig. 112
14. Place the planet carrier (25) on the input
shaft (10).
NOTE: Turn the planet gears (48) to engage
them with the sun gear (36) and line up the
splines of the planet carrier on the shaft.
Fig. 113
15. Insert the spacer (43), smeared with grease,

and the ball bearing (44) in the planet carrier
(25). Fit the friction washer (77).
Fig. 114
16. Position the crown wheels (29)(65) and

crown wheel carrier (27) assembly on the
planet carrier (25).
17. Fit the spacer (45) and the retainer ring (46).
Fig. 115

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
18. Fit the new "O" rings (76) and (19), using
miscible grease to hold them in place on the
housing (28).
19. IMPORTANT: Make sure that the "O" rings
are correctly positioned.
Using a sling, position the housing (28) on
the housing (18). Align the marks made
during removal.
20. Fit and tighten the screws on housings (18)
and (28), smeared with Loctite 242.
Fig. 116
21. Insert the brake piston (57), fitted with two
new oiled "O" rings (55)(56), in the housing
(28).
22. Fit two shims in the housing (28) to hold the
crown wheels and the front planet carrier in
place during assembly of the module and the
reverse shuttle.
Fig. 117
23. Check that the needle roller bearing (73) is
present in the clutch bell housing (66). Check
its condition and replace it if necessary.
Fig. 118
24. Fit the friction washer (69), smeared with

grease, on the cover plate (26). Fit a brake
disk (33).
25. Fit the bell housing (66) on the cover plate
(26), followed by the hub (61), the Belleville
springs (67)(68) and the junction plate (35).
26. Fit the clutch disks (63) and backing plates
(62).
NOTE: If the brake disks or clutch disks have
been replaced, they must be soaked for
bath.
Fig. 119

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
27. Fit the brake disks (33) and backing plates

(34).
28. Fit the clutch cover plate (32), fit the screws
(64), smeared with Loctite 242, and tighten
them to a torque of 33 Nm.
29. Fit the springs (58) in the cover plate (26).
Fig. 120
30. Fit the planet carrier (30) on the output shaft

(47).
Fig. 121
5.3.4.6 Disassembling the planet gears

Reminder
The planet gear pins are fitted already tightened in
the thickest part of the planet carriers.
The pins comprise lubrication holes that must be
positioned facing the corresponding holes on the
planet carrier.
Fig. 122

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Procedure
1. NOTE: The disassembly principle is the
same for all planet carriers. The following
example applies to planet gears in the
primary epicyclic gear train of the Dynashift
module.
Place the planet carrier (74) in a vice fitted
with protective jaws.
2. Using a drift and a mallet, drive out the pins
(69) from the planet carrier (74) by striking
the thicker side of the planet carrier.
3. Take out the planet gear and recover the
friction washers (68) and bearing needles
(70). Fig. 123
5.3.4.7 Reassembling the planet gears

Reminder
planet carrier.
Fig. 124
Procedure
1. Clean all the parts, check their condition and
replace any that are defective.
2. Ensure that the lubrication holes in the planet
carriers and pins are clean.
NOTE: The pins of the planet gears (69) are
blocked by plugs (75). Check that the plugs
are present. Fit new ones if any are missing.
3. Prepare the planet gears. Fit the bearing
needles in the planet gears using miscible
grease.
4. Place the planet carrier on a suitable support.
Fit a planet gear (71) with the needle roller
bearing (70), and the two friction bearings Fig. 125
(68).
5. Insert the pin (69), then drive it in with a
hammer and a bronze drift. Insert the pin
until it is flush with the planet carrier surface.
NOTE: This procedure can be carried out
with a hydraulic press.
6. Check that the planet gears rotate freely.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.3.4.8 Final steps
Procedure
1. Replace the PTO shaft.
2. Check that the "O" rings are present in the
module and in the housing, then refit the
lubrication pipe (D).
NOTE: If the "O" rings have to be replaced,
oil them lightly.
3. Fit the retainer ring (C) that holds the pipe.
4. Fit the plug (A) and its seal (B).
Fig. 126
5. Clean and check the condition of the
hydraulic gearbox control unit (F).
module.
oil them lightly.
Fig. 127
7. Ensure that there are "O" rings in the
hydraulic unit ports.
oil them lightly.
8. Apply Loctite 510 or an equivalent sealing
product to the mating face of the unit.
9. Refit the connecting pipes, then the hydraulic
control unit.
10. Fit the screws and tighten them to a torque
of 67 Nm.
11. Assemble the gearbox with the engine and
the rear axle.
Fig. 128

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.3.5 Service tools
5.3.5.1 General
5.3.5.2 Powershift module - Service tools

Reference 3376920M2
Description Ring gear compression tool
Reference 3378012M2
Description Input shaft lip seal protector tool

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.4 GBA25/Dyna-6 PowerShift module

5.4.1 Dyna-6 - General information
The Powershift module is fitted on GBA25 gearboxes. It is located at the gearbox input and is driven
directly by the engine. This module provides the GBA25 transmission with six gear ratios for shifting under
load.
These six ratios are supplied by three epicyclic gear trains that operate with three brakes and three
clutches.
The gear ratios can be controlled with the PowerShuttle lever (to the left under the steering wheel) or with
the lever on the right-hand console or right-hand armrest, depending on option.
The brakes and clutches are controlled by
proportional solenoid valves (N), (P) and (L). They
are fitted to a hydraulic unit to the front right of the
gearbox that operates on the tractor 20 bar
system.
Fig. 129
5.4.2 Dyna-6 Operating principle

The Powershift module consists of two modules comprised mainly of three epicyclic gear trains :
• Multiplier module: located at the gearbox input. It comprises an epicyclic gear train with three planet
gears, a brake and a clutch.
• Dynashift module: fitted behind the multiplier. It comprises two epicyclic gear trains with four planet
gears, two brakes and two clutches.
Multiplier module
Located in the input unit, the multiplier provides a ratio of 1/1 (gear train locked) or 1.423/1.
Drive enters via the planet carrier (26) and exits via the crown wheel (29). When the epicyclic gear train
ratio is 1/1, the sun gear is meshed to the planet carrier by a clutch. The gear train assembly turns at the
same speed as the engine.
When the epicyclic gear train ratio is 1.423/1, the brake locks the sun gear on the gearbox housing,
allowing the engine speed to go into overdrive (for ratios E and F).
Dynashift module
This module is located at the multiplier output, and allows four ratios to be obtained when shifting under
load. It comprises two identical epicyclic gear trains, two clutches and two brakes.
Drive enters and exits via the primary epicyclic gear train.
The clutches and brakes act on the crown wheel and the sun gear of the secondary epicyclic gear train to
vary the speed of the primary sun gear, thus creating different ratios.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Lubrication
The Powershift module is lubricated under pressure by a network of internal channels. Oil enters the upper
main shaft of the gearbox, then travels through radial holes to the elements requiring lubrication.
The oil flows from the tractor's hydraulic system.
Powershift module control

The Powershift module ratio can be changed via:
Fig. 130

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.4.2.1 Kinematics
Fig. 131
(1) Multiplier module (N) Sun gear brake, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the
(2) Dynashift module Dynashift module
(Av)Forward clutch (O) Sun gear clutch, 2nd epicyclic gear train of
(Ar)Reverse clutch the Dynashift module
(L) Ring gear brake, 2nd epicyclic gear train of (P) Gear reduction module sun gear brake
the Dynashift module (Q) Gear reduction module sun gear clutch
(M) Ring gear clutch, 2nd epicyclic gear train of
the Dynashift module

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Logic of the ratios
Powershi Multiplier Dynashift Solenoid valve Clutches/Brakes (X =

ft ratio engaged)
Status Ratio Status Ratio L N P L M N O P Q
A Direct 1/1 A 1/1.698 12 V 12 V X X X

drive
B Direct 1/1 B 1/1.423 12 V X X X
drive
C Direct 1/1 C 1/1.193 12 V X X X
drive
D Direct 1/1 D 1/1 X X X
drive
E Epicyclic 1.423/1 C 1/1.193 12 V 12 V X X X
gear train
engaged
F Epicyclic 1.423/1 D 1/1 12 V X X X
gear train
engaged
The six ratios are obtained by combining the four Dynashift module ratios with the two multiplier module
ratios.
For ratios A, B, C and D, the multiplier is not engaged: its ratio is 1/1.
For ratios E and F, ratios C and D of the Dynashift module are used in combination with the multiplier
module, which provides a ratio of 1.423/1.
Drive is always transmitted via the primary epicyclic gear train, entering via the primary crown wheel and
exiting via the primary planet carrier. The four ratios are obtained by modifying the rotational speed of the
primary sun gear, which is set by the secondary epicyclic gear train.
Piston (P)
Brake (F)
Junction plate (L)
Clutch (E)
Belleville spring (R)
The brakes and clutches operate as a 1 brake/1

clutch set. The brakes (F) mesh an element to the Fig. 132
housing (fixed), and the clutches (E) mesh two
elements in rotation.
The clutches/brakes are controlled by a single
piston (P). A junction plate (L) allows the clutch to
be released when the brake is engaged, and vice
versa.
When there is no pressure on the piston (position
A), the Belleville spring (R) engages the clutch (E).
ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
When the piston (P) is actuated (position B), it

engages the brake (F), and pushes back the
Belleville spring (R) via the plate (L).
Ratio A (1/1.698)
Fig. 133
The epicyclic gear train of the multiplier is locked in rotation by clutch (Q). Its ratio is 1/1.
The two brake pistons (L) and (N) are under pressure. The crown wheel and sun gear of the secondary
epicyclic gear train are fixed in relation to the gearbox housing. As a result, the planet carrier of this gear
train is fixed and holds the sun gear of the 1st gear train.
Reduction is provided by the speed of the primary planet carrier.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Ratio B (1/1.423)
Fig. 134
The brake piston (L) is under pressure. The clutch (O) is locked by the Belleville spring. The sun gear of the
secondary epicyclic gear train turns at the same speed as the secondary shaft, driving the rotation of the
planet carrier and therefore the sun gear of the primary epicyclic gear train.
The secondary epicyclic gear train determines the rotational speed of the primary sun gear.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Ratio C (1/1.193)
Fig. 135
The brake piston (N) is under pressure. The clutch (M) is engaged by the Belleville spring. The primary shaft
drives the crown wheels of the two epicyclic gear trains. On the secondary epicyclic gear train, the sun
gear is fixed in relation to the gearbox housing and the crown wheel drives the secondary planet carrier and
the primary sun gear.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Ratio D (1/1)
Fig. 136
The two brakes (L) and (N) are not under pressure. The two clutches (M) and (O) are engaged by the
Belleville springs. The primary and secondary crown wheels receive the input speed. The secondary sun
gear is integral with the secondary shaft, thus mechanically locking the Dynashift module.
The input and output speeds are identical. The ratio is 1/1.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Ratio E (1.423/1.193)
Fig. 137
Brake (P) is engaged, locking the sun gear of the multiplier to the gearbox housing. The multiplier epicyclic
gear train can therefore turn.
It increases the input speed with a ratio of 1.423/1.
The position of the other clutches/brakes is identical to ratio C.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Ratio F (1.423/1)
Fig. 138
Brake (P) is engaged, locking the sun gear of the multiplier to the gearbox housing. The multiplier epicyclic
gear train can therefore turn.
It increases the input speed with a ratio of 1.423/1.
The position of the other clutches/brakes is identical to ratio D.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.4.3.1 View of Dyna-6 assembly
Fig. 139
(1) Multiplier input shaft (3) Multiplier cover plate
(2) Lip seal (4) "O" ring

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(5) Multiplier housing (62) Screw

(6) Ball bearing (63) Primary crown wheel
(7) Clutch Q bell housing (64) Circlip
(8) Screw (65) Circlip
(9) Friction washer (66) Snap ring
(10) Friction washer (67) Ball bearing
(11) Intermediate plate (68) Friction washer
(12) Clutch Q / brake P junction plate (69) Pin
(13) Brake P disk (70) Needle roller bearing
(14) Sun gear (multiplier epicyclic gear train) (71) Planet gear
(15) Snap ring (72) Primary sun gear
(16) Clutch Q cover plate (73) Screw
((17))Belleville spring (74.) Primary planet carrier
(18) Belleville spring (75) Plug
(19) Plug (76) Secondary planet carrier
(20) Friction washer (77) Spacer
(21) Pin (78) Ball bearing
(22) Needle roller bearing (79) Friction washer
(23) Planet gear (80) Pin
(24) Clutch Q disk (81) Plug
(25) Clutch Q backing plate (82) Needle roller bearing
(26) Planet carrier (83) Planet gear
(27) Spring (84.) Sun gear
(29) Multiplier crown wheel (85) Screw
(30) Brake P piston (86) Clutch O cover plate
(31) "O" ring (87) Spring washer
(33) PTO shaft (89) N brake piston
(34) Ball bearing (90;) "O" ring
(35) Ring (91.) "O" ring
(36) Friction washer (92.) Centring pin
(37) Friction washer (93) Dynashift module cover plate
(38) Ball bearing (94) Spring
(39) Dynashift module input shaft (95) Clutch O / brake N junction plate
((40))Hub (96) Clutch O bell housing
((41))M clutch bell housing (97) Belleville spring
(42) Belleville spring (98) Friction washer
(43) "O" ring (99) Spacer
(45) Clutch M / brake L junction plate (101) Brake N disk
(46) Brake L disk (102) Intermediate plate
(47) Intermediate plate (103) Hub
(48) Screw (104) Backing plate
(49) Dynashift module housing (105) Clutch O disk
(50) Clutch M disk (106) Dynashift module output shaft
(51) Clutch M backing plate (107) Ball bearing
(52) Spring (108) Bush
(53) "O" ring (109) Washer
(54) Brake L piston (110) Screw
(55) "O" ring (111) "O" ring
(56) Spring washer (112) "O" ring
(57) Ball bearing (113) "O" ring
(59) Secondary crown wheel bell housing (114) "O" ring
(60) Secondary crown wheel

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.4.3.2 Dyna-6 blown-up view
Fig. 140
(1) Multiplier input shaft (5) Multiplier housing
(2) Lip seal (6) Ball bearing
(3) Multiplier cover plate (7) Clutch Q bell housing
(4) "O" ring (8) Screw

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(9) Friction washer (64) Circlip

(10) Friction washer (65) Circlip
(11) Intermediate plate (66) Snap ring
(12) Clutch Q / brake P junction plate (67) Ball bearing
(13) Brake P disk (68) Friction washer
(14) Sun gear (multiplier epicyclic gear train) (69) Pin
(15) Snap ring (70) Needle roller bearing
(16) Clutch Q cover plate (71) Planet gear
((17))Belleville spring (72) Primary sun gear
(18) Belleville spring (73) Screw
(19) Plug (74.) Primary planet carrier
(20) Friction washer (75) Plug
(21) Pin (76) Secondary planet carrier
(22) Needle roller bearing (77) Spacer
(23) Planet gear (78) Ball bearing
(24) Clutch Q disk (79) Friction washer
(25) Clutch Q backing plate (80) Pin
(26) Planet carrier (81) Plug
(27) Spring (82) Needle roller bearing
(29) Multiplier crown wheel (83) Planet gear
(30) Brake P piston (84.) Sun gear
(32) "O" ring (86) Clutch O cover plate
(33) PTO shaft (87) Spring washer
(34) Ball bearing (88) Snap ring
(35) Ring (89) N brake piston
(36) Friction washer (90;) "O" ring
(37) Friction washer (91.) "O" ring
(38) Ball bearing (92.) Centring pin
(39) Dynashift module input shaft (93) Dynashift module cover plate
((40))Hub (94) Spring
((41))M clutch bell housing (95) Clutch O / brake N junction plate
(42) Belleville spring (96) Clutch O bell housing
(43) "O" ring (97) Belleville spring
(44) "O" ring (98) Friction washer
(45) Clutch M / brake L junction plate (99) Spacer
(46) Brake L disk (100) Snap ring
(47) Intermediate plate (101) Brake N disk
(48) Screw (102) Intermediate plate
(49) Dynashift module housing (103) Hub
(50) Clutch M disk (104) Backing plate
(51) Clutch M backing plate (105) Clutch O disk
(52) Spring (106) Dynashift module output shaft
(54) Brake L piston (108) Bush
(56) Spring washer (110) Screw
(57) Ball bearing (111) "O" ring
(59) Secondary crown wheel bell housing (112) "O" ring
(60) Secondary crown wheel (113) "O" ring
(62) Screw (114) "O" ring
(63) Primary crown wheel

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.4.4 Removing/refitting Dyna-6
Procedure
3. Remove:
assembly),
NOTE:
pair of pliers.
Fig. 141
(E).
Fig. 142
9. Remove
• The PTO shaft

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.4.4.2 Removing the Powershift module
Procedure
1. If the entire gearbox has been removed, separate the Powershift module from the mechanical
gearbox.
4. CAUTION:
place.
the shackles.
NOTE:
Rotate the module anti-clockwise by
reverse layshaft.
Fig. 143
reassembly.
Fig. 144
10. Using the sling, raise and separate the front section of the unit (D) (multiplier module, Dynashift
module).
NOTE:
During this operation, the rear brake, reverse clutch and double epicyclic gear train stay on the
PowerShuttle.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.4.4.3 Refitting the Powershift module
Procedure
removal process.
Fig. 145
removal.
gearbox housing.
with the hole.
Fig. 146
11. Lightly smear the thread of an M10 screw (B) with Loctite 542 or equivalent and screw it into the
tapped through hole of the gearbox housing. Screw the other seven M10 screws (B) (without Loctite)
into the remaining tapped holes. Tighten the eight screws to a torque of 57 Nm - 77 Nm.
NOTE: The M10 screw (B) (with Loctite) should be located to the right and just below the horizontal
axis of the Powershift module when this module is refitted in the gearbox housing.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.4.4.4 Disassembling the Dynashift module
Procedure
1. Place the section with the reverse shuttle on
a suitable support, with the cover plate (93)
and planet carriers facing upward.
2. Remove the springs (94).
3. Take off the retainer ring (65) and remove the
planet carrier (74) fitted with the two planet
gear assemblies.
Fig. 147
4. Remove the snap ring (88).
5. Remove the bearing (78) and the spacer (77).
6. Split the two planet carriers (74) and (76).
8. Remove the bearing (67) and the sun gear
(72).
9. If necessary, extract the snap ring (66).
Fig. 148

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
10. Remove clutch/brake "O/N".

11. Take off the hub (103) and spring washer
(87).
12. Remove the screws (85), and take off the
sun gear (84).
13. Remove the screws (110), and take off the
cover plate (86) of clutch O.
14. Mark the order of assembly, then remove:
• the brake disks (101),
• the intermediate plate (102);
• the clutch disks (105),
• the backing plates (104),
Fig. 149
• the junction plate (95),
• the Belleville spring (97).
15. Remove the friction washer (98).
16. Position the front housing of the Powershift
module on a suitable support, with the crown
wheels facing upwards.
17. Extract the piston (89) fitted with its "O" rings
(90) and (91).
18. Fit a pin punch or screwdriver into one of the
holes in the bell housing (59) to stop it from
rotating, and loosen the screws (62).
19. Remove the secondary crown wheel (60).
Fig. 150

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Fig. 151
20. Using the tool 3376920M2 (see chapter Powershift module - Service tools, page 5-97 , 5B38) and
two locally made shims, compress the crown wheel (63). Do not force by tightening the screws. The
tool must allow the spring washer (56) under the bearing (57) to be compressed. The clearance
created allows the retainer ring (64) to be removed freely.
21. Extract the crown wheel (63). If required, remove the bearing (57) using a suitable extractor.
22. Remove the spring washer (56).
23. Take out the shaft (39) and hub (40).
24. Fit a pin punch or screwdriver into one of the
holes in the bell housing (59) to stop it from
rotating, and loosen the screws (48).
25. Remove the bell housing (59).
26. Extract the three "O" rings (112), (113) and
(114) from the housing ports (49).
27. Remove the attachment screws from the
housing (49). Remove the housing, pulling it
off the top.
28. Extract the brake piston (54) fitted with its
"O" rings (53) and (55). Fig. 152

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

• the intermediate plate (47),
• the Belleville spring (42).
30. Remove and discard the "O" rings (43) and
(111).
31. Remove the spring assembly (52).
Fig. 153
32. Remove the washer (37) and the bell housing
(41) from clutch M.
Fig. 154
5.4.4.5 Reassembling the Dynashift module
Procedure
1. Fit a washer (37) smeared with grease on the
housing (5).
2. On the housing (5), fit a brake disk (46), then
assemble clutch/brake M/L in the following
order:
• clutch bell housing (41),
• Belleville spring (42),
• junction plate (45),
• assembled hub (40) and pin (39),
• clutch disks (50) and backing plates (51).
NOTE: Ensure the Belleville spring is fitted
facing the correct direction.
Fig. 155
bath.
3. Fit the two other brake disks (46) with the
intermediate plate (47) positioned in the
middle.
4. Fit the springs (52) in their housing.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5. Fit two new oiled "O" rings (53) and (55) in

the grooves of the piston (54). Fit the piston
(54) in the housing (49) using a plastic
hammer.
Fig. 156
6. Place a new oiled "O" ring (43) in the groove

of the housing (49).
7. Fit the "O" rings (111), (112), (113) and (114)
in the clutch pilot ports.
Fig. 157
8. Fit the housing (49) to the housing (5), with
the piston (54) turned toward clutch/brake M/
L. Check for the presence and correct
positioning of the "O" ring (111) for the pilot
port.
Fig. 158

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
9. Fit the bell housing of the secondary crown

wheel (59) on clutch/brake M/L. Fit the
attachment screws (48) smeared with
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten the screws
to a torque of 33 Nm.
10. Fit the spring washer (56). If the bearing (57)
has been removed, fit a bearing on the
crown wheel (63), then fit the assembly on
top of the spring washer (56).
Fig. 159
11. Using tool 3376920M2 and two shims made
during disassembly (see
chapter Disassembling the Dynashift
module, page 5-116 ), replace the retainer
ring (64).
Fig. 160
12. Refit the crown wheel (60) on the bell

housing (59). Fit the attachment screws (62)
smeared with Loctite 242 or equivalent.
Tighten the screws to a torque of 165 Nm.
Fig. 161

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
13. Fit the washer (98) smeared with grease on

14. On the cover plate (93), fit a brake disk (101),
then assemble clutch/brake O/N in the
following order:
• clutch bell housing (96),
• Belleville spring (97),
• junction plate (95),
• hub (103),
• clutch disks (105) and backing plates
(104).
NOTE: Ensure the Belleville spring is fitted
Fig. 162
facing the correct direction.
bath.
15. Fit the clutch cover plate (86) and screws
(110) smeared with Loctite 242 or equivalent.
16. Fit the sun gear (84) and screws (85)
17. Fit the spring washer (87) on the sun gear.
Fig. 163
18. Ensure the lubricating ports of the planet
carriers (74) and (76) are clean.
19. Fit the bearing (67) in the planet carrier (76),
then refit the sun gear (72) fitted with the
snap ring (66).
20. Fit the screws (73) smeared with Loctite 242
or equivalent. Tighten to a torque of 33 Nm.
NOTE: To hold the planet carrier during
tightening, fit a long screwdriver into the
planet carrier.
21. Assemble the two planet carriers (76) and
(74). Turn the planet gears (71) to insert the
sun gear (72). Fig. 164
22. Fit the spacer (77) followed by the bearing
(78).
23. Fit the snap ring (88).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
24. On the shaft (106) refit the assembled

double planet carrier (74).
25. Refit the retainer ring (65).
NOTE: The spring washer (87) must be
compressed by pressing on the planet carrier
(74) to refit the retainer ring (65).
26. Assemble the Powershift module and the
reverse shuttle and refit the assembly in the
housing.
Fig. 165
5.4.4.6 Disassembling the multiplier module
Procedure
1. Disassemble the Dynashift module (see chapter Disassembling the Dynashift module, page 5-116 ).
2. Using a sling and a suitable lifting tool,
position the multiplier module with the cover
plate (3) turned upward.
3. Fit protective service tool 3378012M2 (see
chapter Powershift module - Service tools,
page 5-97 , 5B38) on the input shaft (1) to
protect the lip seal (2).
4. Remove the screws (A) from the cover plate
(3).
5. Remove the cover plate (3). Recover the
springs (27).
6. If required, take off the lip seal (2).
Fig. 166
7. Remove clutch/brake assembly Q/P from the
housing.
8. Remove the friction washer (9).
9. Remove the screws (8) and the cover plate
(16).
• the Belleville springs (17) and (18).
Fig. 167
11. Remove the input shaft (1) with the bearing
(6). If necessary, remove the bearing (6).
12. Extract the piston (30) fitted with its seals
(31) and (32).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
13. Remove the planet carrier assembly (26) and

planet gears (23).
14. Take off the crown wheel (29) with the
bearings (34) and (38) and the bronze ring
(35). If necessary, remove the bearing (38)
from the crown wheel.
Fig. 168
5.4.4.7 Reassembling the multiplier module
Procedure
1. Ensure all parts are in good condition. Ensure the clutch control ports and lubrication holes are clean.
2. Place a new oiled "O" ring (4) on the
multiplier module cover plate (3).
3. In the cover plate (3), fit a new lip seal (2)
smeared with grease on the inside and oiled
on the outside.
4. Fit the springs (27) in their housings. Fit a
disk (13) on the cover plate (3).
NOTE:
If the brake disks and clutch disks have been
replaced, they must be soaked for
bath.
Fig. 169
5. Assemble clutch/brake assembly Q/P. Fit the
parts in the following order:
• the pre-lubricated washer (9),
• the bearing (6),
• the Belleville springs (17) and (18),
• a disk (13),
• a second disk (13),
• the input shaft (1),
• the stacked disks (24)/backing plates (25),
• the clutch cover plate (16) with the sun Fig. 170
gear (14).
NOTE:
Ensure the Belleville springs are fitted in the
correct direction.
6. Fit the screws (8) smeared with Loctite 242
or equivalent. Tighten them to a torque of
33 Nm.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
7. Fit the service tool 3378012M2 on the shaft

(1).
8. Fit clutch/brake Q/P in the cover plate (3).
9. Fit the planet carrier (26) on the sun gear
(14). Fit the bearing (34) and ring (35).
10. Mark the cover plate (3) to record the
position of a planet gear. The mark will be
used during reassembly.
Fig. 171
Fig. 172
11. In the housing (5), fit the crown wheel (29) with the bearing (38).
12. Fit two new oiled "O" rings (31) and (32) in the grooves of the piston (30). Fit the piston (30) in the
housing (5) using a plastic hammer.
13. Place a visible mark on the housing at the same level as a notch in the piston.
14. Fit the housing (5) with the crown wheel and brake piston on top of the assembled cover plate (3),
clutch/brake Q/P, planet carrier (26) assembly.
NOTE:
Lower the housing (5) carefully to engage the planet gears (23) in the notches provided on the brake
piston. To do this, align the marks made previously.
15. Fit and tighten the cover plate (3) screws, after smearing them with Loctite 242 or equivalent.
Tighten to a torque of 29 Nm - 37 Nm.
16. Reassemble the Dynashift module (see chapter Reassembling the Dynashift module, page 5-119 ).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.4.4.8 Disassembling the planet gears

Reminder
planet carrier.
Fig. 173
Procedure
1. NOTE: The disassembly principle is the
same for all planet carriers. The following
example applies to planet gears in the
primary epicyclic gear train of the Dynashift
module.
Place the planet carrier (74) in a vice fitted
with protective jaws.
2. Using a drift and a mallet, drive out the pins
(69) from the planet carrier (74) by striking
the thicker side of the planet carrier.
3. Take out the planet gear and recover the
friction washers (68) and bearing needles
(70). Fig. 174
5.4.4.9 Reassembling the planet gears

Reminder
planet carrier.
Fig. 175

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Procedure
1. Clean all the parts, check their condition and
replace any that are defective.
2. Ensure that the lubrication holes in the planet
carriers and pins are clean.
NOTE: The pins of the planet gears (69) are
blocked by plugs (75). Check that the plugs
are present. Fit new ones if any are missing.
3. Prepare the planet gears. Fit the bearing
needles in the planet gears using miscible
grease.
4. Place the planet carrier on a suitable support.
Fit a planet gear (71) with the needle roller
bearing (70), and the two friction bearings Fig. 176
(68).
5. Insert the pin (69), then drive it in with a
hammer and a bronze drift. Insert the pin
until it is flush with the planet carrier surface.
NOTE: This procedure can be carried out
with a hydraulic press.
6. Check that the planet gears rotate freely.
5.4.4.10 Final steps
Procedure
1. Replace the PTO shaft.
module and in the housing, then refit the
lubrication pipe (D).
NOTE:
If the "O" rings have to be replaced, oil them
lightly.
3. Fit the retainer ring (C) that holds the pipe.
4. Fit the plug (A) and its seal (B).
Fig. 177
5. Clean and check the condition of the gearbox
hydraulic control unit.
module.
NOTE:
lightly.
Fig. 178

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
7. Ensure that there are "O" rings in the

hydraulic unit ports.
NOTE:
lightly.
8. Apply Loctite 510 or an equivalent sealing
product to the mating face of the unit.
9. Refit the connecting pipes, then the hydraulic
control unit.
10. Fit the screws and tighten them to a torque
of 67 Nm.
11. Assemble the gearbox with the engine and
the rear axle. Fig. 179
5.4.5 Service tools
5.4.5.1 General
5.4.5.2 Powershift module - Service tools

Reference 3376920M2

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Reference 3378012M2

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.5 GBA25/Robotic mechanical gearbox

5.5.1 General
The GBA25 gearbox is fitted to tractors with Dyna-4 or Dyna-6 transmission. This transmission is fully
automated. It allows shifting between all the ratios without declutching.
The gearbox is divided into two parts:
• the Powershift module, with four or six ratios for shifting under load,
• the robotically-controlled mechanical gearbox with four ratios.
The transmission assembly is controlled electronically by an Autotronic 5 controller.

The mechanical gearbox ratios are controlled like a ratio for shifting under load.
The ratios can be controlled manually or
automatically using AutoDrive mode.
Two levers control the ratios in manual mode:
Fig. 180
The mechanical gearbox is located between the
Powershift module and the rear axle. It comprises
two shafts (upper and lower shaftlines), on which
four helical gear trains rotate.
Input drive is supplied by the PowerShuttle and is
transmitted to the upper shaftline.
Output drive is transmitted via the lower shaftline
to a creeper unit or directly to the pinion of the
crownwheel and pinion.
Fig. 181
Lubrication
The oil from the lubrication system coming from the tractor 5 bar valve is sent to the lower shaftline and
the upper shaftline of the gearbox.
A network of internal channels directs the oil to the elements requiring lubrication.
Selecting ratios
Ratios are selected using two synchronizers, one single cone and one double cone. Each synchronizer is
engaged individually.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
The synchronisers are controlled by two selector rails and two forks. Each selector rail has a double-acting
piston, allowing ratio shifting.
The selector rail pistons are controlled hydraulically via the tractor 20 bar system (arrow).
The solenoid valves (X484), (X485), (X486) and
(X487), located on the right-hand side of the
gearbox, control selector rail movement.
The switches (X488), (X489), (X490) and (X491)
inform the controller of the selector rail positions.
Fig. 182
NOTE: The switches are pressed in by pins (131).
Fig. 183
Each ratio has a corresponding solenoid valve and switch (see table).
Solenoid valves Switches

X484 X485 X486 X487 X488 X489 X490 X491
Neutral 0 V or 12 V 12 V
Range 1 12 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Range 2 0V 12 V 0V 0V 12 V 0V 12 V 12 V
Range 3 0V 0V 12 V 0V 12 V 12 V 0V 12 V
Range 4 0V 0V 0V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 0V
5.5.2.1 Description and kinematics of ratios

The robotic gearbox allows four ratios to be obtained with only four gear trains, two shafts and two
synchronisers.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

• Range 1
1st synchroniser, then the third train.
Fig. 184
• Range 2
The 2nd synchroniser attaches the 2nd gear to
Fig. 185
• Range 3
the 3rd synchroniser.
Fig. 186

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
• Range 4
the 4th synchroniser.
Fig. 187
NOTE:
In forward position, input drive comes directly from the PowerShuttle to the primary shaft (1).
In reverse position, drive comes from the PowerShuttle via the gears (124), (119) and (116) and the shaft
(121). It enters via the 2nd driven gear 25, which is constantly meshed to the primary shaft (1).
Primary shaft
The primary shaft (1) is splined to the PowerShuttle forward hub. It is supported by two tapered roller
bearings (3) (4) and (50) (51). Shimming is carried out with shims (4).
The PTO shaft (71) is inserted through the center of the primary shaft (1). This cavity in the shaft (1) also
serves as a channel for lubrication oil.
The 1st and 2nd driving gear is cut into the primary shaft (1).
The double gear (26) turns idle on the shaft (1) and is supported by two tapered roller bearings (27) (28) and
(29) (30) and two needle roller bearings (37) (38). This gear is supported on the shaft by shims (20).
The 4th driving gear turns idle on the shaft (1). It is supported by a lubricated ring (49).
Secondary shaft
The secondary shaft (13) turns on two tapered roller bearings (89) and (46) (47). Holes in the center of the
shaft (13) ensure proper lubrication. Adjustment is controlled by shims (7).
The gear (25) turns idle on the shaft (13) and is supported by two tapered roller bearings (21) (22) and (23)
(24) and a needle roller bearing (32).
The gear (25) acts as a bearing to the intermediate gear (31). This gear (31) is in direct contact with the gear
(25). A layer of oil ensures that the mating faces are lubricated.
The gears (43) and (45) are splined to the shaft (13). They are separated by a spacer (44).
Synchronisers
The single cone synchronizer located on the primary shaft (1) allows shifting between the 3rd and 4th
gears. Its hub (60) is splined to the shaft (1). It is held in position by a retainer ring (42) on one side and by
the bearing cone (50) fitted tightly on the shaft (1).
By moving the sliding coupler (54), the shaft (1) is locked either:
• with the double gear (26) (3rd),
• or with the gear (48) (4th).
The double cone synchroniser located on the secondary shaft (13) allows shifting between the 1st and 2nd
gears. Its hub( 69) is integral to the gear (25). It is held in position by the snap ring (68).
By moving the sliding coupler (70), the shaft (13) is locked either:

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
• with the intermediate gear (31) (1st),

• or with the gear (43) (2nd).
Selecting ratios
The synchronisers are controlled conventionally by forks (72) and (96) and selector rails (73) and (98).
The selector rails are controlled hydraulically. The selector rails are controlled by double-acting pistons.
On the selector rail (98) that controls the 1st and 2nd synchroniser, the piston (92) is damped by a spring
(93) to give smooth shifting between ranges 1 and 2.
The selector rails are adjusted by tightening or loosening the castellated nuts (99) (101) and (108) (109).
Once adjusted, the stops are held in position by screws (100) and (107).
An interlock mechanism comprising two rods (104) (106) and a counter-nut (105) prevents the selector rails
from being engaged simultaneously. When one selector rail is engaged, the pin locks the other rail in a
groove.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.5.3.1 View of the primary and secondary shaft assembly
Fig. 188
(1) Primary shaft (3) Bearing cup
(2) Bearing cone (4) Shims

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(5) Gearbox housing (63) Ring

(6) Cover plate (64) Spring
(7) Shims (65) Brake cone
(8) Bearing cup (66) Cone
(9) Bearing cone (67) Flange
(11) Spring (69) Hub
(12) Lubrication pipe (70) Sliding coupler
(13) Secondary shaft (71) PTO shaft
(14) Spacer (72) Fork
(15) Circlip (73) Selector rail
(16) Washer (74.) "O" ring
(17) Shims (75.) "O" ring
(19) Washer (77) Liner
(20) Shims (78) "O" ring
(21) Bearing cup (79) "O" ring
(22) Bearing cone (80) Plug
(23) Bearing cone (81) "O" ring
(24) Bearing cup (82) Circlip
(25) Gear (83) "O" ring
(26) Double gear (84.) Circlip
(27) Bearing cup (85) Plug
(29) Bearing cone (87) Circlip
(30) Bearing cup (88) Liner
(31) Gear (89) "O" ring
(32) Needle roller bearing (90;) "O" ring
(33) Washer (91.) Snap ring
(34) Circlip (92.) Piston
(35) Circlip (93) Spring
(36) Spacer (-94) "O" ring
(37) Needle roller bearing (95) "O" ring
(38) Needle roller bearing (96) Fork
(39) Spacer (97) Pin
(41) Shims (99) Castellated nut
(42) Circlip (100) Screw
(43) Gear (101) Castellated nut
(44) Spacer (102) Plate
(45) Gear (103) Screw
(46) Bearing cone (104) Rod
(47) Bearing cup (105) Counter-nut
(48) Gear (106) Rod
(49) Ring (107) Screw
(50) Bearing cone (108) Castellated nut
(51) Bearing cup (109) Castellated nut
(52) Deflector (110) Screw
(53) Ring (111) Plate
(54) Sliding coupler (112) Circlip
(55) Ball bearing (113) Shims
(56) Pressure element (114) Bearing cup
(57) Brake cone (115) Bearing cone
(58) Spring (116) Gear
(59) Flange (117) Bearing cone
(60) Hub (118) Bearing cup
(61) Ball bearing (119) Gear
(62) Pressure element (120) Circlip

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(121) Shaft (127) Plug

(122) Bearing (128) "O" ring
(123) Powershift module cover plate (129) "O" ring
(124) Reverse gear hub (130) Pin
(125) Pin (131) Reverse pitch nut
(126) Plug

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.5.3.2 View of the reverse layshaft and synchroniser control assembly
Fig. 189
(1) Primary shaft (5) Gearbox housing
(2) Bearing cone (6) Cover plate
(3) Bearing cup (7) Shims
(4) Shims (8) Bearing cup

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

(17) Shims (75.) "O" ring
(25) Gear (83) "O" ring
(31) Gear (89) "O" ring
(36) Spacer (-94) "O" ring
(39) Spacer (97) Pin
(41) Shims (99) Castellated nut
(43) Gear (101) Castellated nut
(44) Spacer (102) Plate
(46) Bearing cone (104) Rod
(47) Bearing cup (105) Counter-nut
(48) Gear (106) Rod
(49) Ring (107) Screw
(59) Flange (117) Bearing cone
(60) Hub (118) Bearing cup
(61) Ball bearing (119) Gear
(62) Pressure element (120) Circlip
(63) Ring (121) Shaft
(64) Spring (122) Bearing
(65) Brake cone (123) Powershift module cover plate
(66) Cone (124) Reverse gear hub

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(125) Pin (129) "O" ring

(126) Plug (130) Pin
(127) Plug (131) Reverse pitch nut
(128) "O" ring
5.5.3.3 Blown-up view of the robotic mechanical gearbox
Fig. 190

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(1) Primary shaft (59) Flange

(2) Bearing cone (60) Hub
(3) Bearing cup (61) Ball bearing
(4) Shims (62) Pressure element
(5) Gearbox housing (63) Ring
(6) Cover plate (64) Spring
(7) Shims (65) Brake cone
(8) Bearing cup (66) Cone
((17))Shims (75.) "O" ring
(25) Gear (83) "O" ring
(31) Gear (89) "O" ring
((39))Spacer (97) Pin
((40))Circlip (98) Selector rail
((41))Shims (99) Castellated nut
((43))Gear (101) Castellated nut
((44))Spacer (102) Plate
((46))Bearing cone (104) Rod
((47))Bearing cup (105) Counter-nut
((48))Gear (106) Rod
((49))Ring (107) Screw

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(117) Bearing cone (125) Pin

(119) Gear (127) Plug
(121) Shaft (129) "O" ring
(122) Bearing (130) Pin
(123) Powershift module cover plate (131) Reverse pitch nut
(124) Reverse gear hub

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Procedure
2. Split the tractor to remove only the robotic
gearbox (if an operation is to be carried out
on the robotic gearbox only) or the complete
unit (then split the two housings).
3. Remove:
• The PTO shaft
NOTE: The following images may vary
slightly from the gearbox fitted to the tractor.
However, the procedures remain the same.
Fig. 191
5.5.4.2 Removing the primary and secondary shafts
Procedure
1. Position the gearbox vertically on blocks of approx. 120 mm with the cover plate (6) at the top.
2. Take off the cover plates (102) and (111).
Unscrew the castellated nuts (99) (101) and
(108) (109).
3. Retighten the interlock mechanism rod (106)
to its maximum.
Fig. 192
4. Remove the two plugs (126) and (127).
5. IMPORTANT: The pins will fall into the
gearbox housing. They must be recovered
when the gearbox is disassembled.
Drive out the two pins (97) and (125) holding
the forks on the selector rails.
Fig. 193

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
6. Remove the retainer ring (84) at the rear of

the gearbox.
7. Using a plastic hammer, remove the selector
rail (98) toward the rear of the gearbox.
NOTE: The rail control piston assembly is
fitted to the rail and is removed with it. Part
of the liner remains in the cylinder. If it must
be removed, take off the retainer ring (87)
and extract the liner.
Fig. 194
8. Remove the screws (A) from the cover plate
(6).
9. Fit two screws (B) in the threaded holes to
lift up the cover plate (6).
10. Remove the cover plate (6).
11. Recover the bearing cups (3), (8) and (114)
and the shims (4), (7) and (113).
Fig. 195
12. Recover the lubrication pipe (12), the ring
(10) and the spring (11).
Fig. 196

14. Using a plastic hammer, remove the selector
rail (73) toward the front of the gearbox.
NOTE: The rail control piston assembly is
fitted to the rail and is removed with it. Part
of the liner remains in the cylinder. If it must
be removed, take off the retainer ring (76)
and extract the liner.
Fig. 197

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Disassembling and reassembling the selector rail (98) (ranges 1 and 2)

15. Clamp the rail (98) in a vice fitted with
protective jaws.
16. Tighten the two pistons (92) in the vice to
compress the spring.
17. Remove a snap ring (91).
18. Remove the pistons (92) and the spring (93).
19. Replace the seals (129) on the rail (98).
20. Perform steps see step 19, page 5-145 to
see step 15, page 5-145 in reverse order to
assemble the selector rail.
Fig. 198
21. Turn the forks (75) and (96) inward in the
gearbox to allow them to enter the housing.
Fig. 199
22. Place service tool ref. 3378804M1 in the

primary and secondary shafts.
23. Sling the tool using a pulley hoist or a
suitable lifting system. Extract the two shafts
(1) and (13) from the gearbox housing.
NOTE: Take care when the 1st/2nd
synchronizer is passing beside the reverse
layshaft support.
NOTE: The total weight of the two shafts is
approximately 44 kg, lower shaftline = 27 kg,
upper shaftline = 17 kg.
24. Remove the assembly and place it on a
workbench. Remove the service tool and
separate the two shafts.
25. If required, extract the bearing cups (47), (51)
and (118) from the gearbox housing.
26. If necessary, remove the deflector (52).
Fig. 200

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.5.4.3 Refitting the primary and secondary shafts
Procedure
1. Ensure all parts are clean and in good condition. Check that the ratio lubricating and control ports are
clean.
2. Replace all the "O" rings, oiling them lightly before assembly.
NOTE: Do not forget to replace the "O" rings (74), (75), (78), (90), (94) and (95) in the selector rail
bores inside the housing.
3. Check that the bearing cups (47), (51) and (118) are present in the housing (5).
4. Assemble the shafts (1) and (13). Fit service
tool ref. 3378804M1.
5. Fit the forks (72) and (96) on the synchronizer
sliding couplers. The offset side of the fork
must be turned toward the front of the
tractor.
NOTE: The two forks are identical. They
have the same reference.
Fig. 201
6. Fit the two shafts in the housing. At the
same time, fit the reverse layshaft gear (116)
fitted with the two bearing cones (115) and
(117).
NOTE: Ensure that the gear (116) is the right
way round. The marks on the teeth should
be turned toward the bottom of the housing.
7. Refit the lubrication pipe (12) fitted with a
new "O" ring (10) and the spring (11).
8. If the liner (77) and retainer ring (76) have
been removed, lubricate the liner, insert it
into the cylinder, then fit the retainer ring
(77). Fig. 202
9. Thread the selector rail (73) with the lightly
greased piston assembly into its housing.
NOTE: To help insert the selector rail into the
fork, use a pin punch to hold the fork in
place.
10. Fit the plug (80) fitted with the two new "O"
rings (81) and (83). Fit the retainer ring (82).
Fig. 203

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
11. If the liner (88) and retainer ring (87) have

been removed, lubricate the liner, insert it
into the cylinder, then fit the retainer ring
(87).
12. Thread the selector rail (98) with the lightly
greased piston assembly into its housing.
NOTE: To help insert the selector rail into the
fork, use a pin punch to hold the fork in
place.
13. Fit the plug (85) fitted with two new "O" rings
(86) and (128). Fit the retainer ring (84).
Fig. 204
14. Align the holes in the forks (72) and (96) with
those in the corresponding selector rails.
15. Insert new pins to attach the forks to the
selector rails. Refit the plugs (126) and (127).
Fig. 205
16. Check that the safety finger is in position and
retighten the rods (104) and (106) to their
maximum tightness.
17. Fit the four switch thrust pins (130) using a
bit of grease to hold them in position.
18. In the cover plate (6), fit the bearing cups (3),
(8) and (114) smeared with grease to hold
them in position.
Also fit:
• the original thickness of shims if the
tapered roller bearings have not been
replaced
• the calculated thickness of shims if the Fig. 206
tapered roller bearings have been
replaced (see chapter Shimming the
primary shaft and reverse layshaft gear,
page 5-155 ).
19. Refit the cover plate (6).
20. Fit the cover plate 6 attachment screws (A),
smeared with Loctite 242. Tighten them to a
torque of 57 Nm - 77 Nm.
21. Refit the ring (52) with the lubricating port
turned toward the top of the gearbox. Fix it in
position with four punchmarks.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
22. Adjust the selector rails and forks (see

chapter Adjusting the selector rails and forks,
page 5-156 ).
23. Adjust the safety finger (see
chapter Adjusting the interlock mechanism,
page 5-161 ).
5.5.4.4 Disassembling the primary and secondary shafts

Remove the primary and secondary shafts (see chapter Removing the primary and secondary shafts, page
5-143 ).
Disassembling the primary shaft

NOTE: The bearing cones (2) and (50) are fitted tight on the shaft.
Procedure
1. Position the shaft on a work surface with a
suitable support to hold the shaft in a vertical
position.
2. Take off the ring (53) at the end of the shaft
(rear axle end).
Fig. 207
3. Fit a shouldered washer (arrow) to the end of
the shaft (1) so that a puller can be fitted.
4. Using the puller, pull the gear (48) and
remove the bearing (50) and the gear (48).
5. Recover the lubricating bush (49).
6. Remove the synchronizer assembly (60).
Remove the retainer ring (42).
Fig. 208

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
7. Take off the retainer ring (18) to remove the

double gear (26).
NOTE: The bearings (37) and (38) stay in the
double gear (26). The bearing cones (28) and
(29) stay on the shaft (1).
8. Recover the washer (19) and the shims (20).
9. Remove the bearing cup (30) from the gear
(26). Check whether or not there is a shim
behind the cup.
Fig. 209
10. Extract the snap ring (40). Take off the
needle roller bearings (38) and (37) with the
spacers (36) and (39). Remove the snap ring
(35) if necessary.
11. Remove the retainer ring (34), the washer
(33) and the bearing cones (28) and (29).
12. If necessary, remove the bearing cone (2).
Fig. 210
Disassembling the secondary shaft

NOTE: Take care not to pull the gear (25) or the synchroniser will come apart. The bearing cone (9) is freely
mounted on the shaft (1).
Procedure
1. Remove the bearing cone (9) and the spacer
(14).
2. Fit the shaft vertically on the gear (25). Pull
the shaft (13) upwards with the gears (43)
and (45), taking care not to disassemble the
synchroniser (69).
3. Recover the needle roller bearing (32).
Fig. 211

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
4. Extract the snap ring (68). Remove the

synchroniser (69) and the gear (31).
Fig. 212
5. Turn over the gear (25). Remove the retainer

ring (15), the washer (16) and the shims (17).
6. Remove and pair up the bearings (21) (22)
and (23) (24).
Fig. 213
7. Using a puller, pull the gear (45) and remove
the bearing (46).
8. Remove the spacer (44) and the gear (43).
Fig. 214

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.5.4.5 Reassembling the primary and secondary shafts
Reassembling the primary shaft
Procedure
1. Pair up the bearing cones (28) (29) and cups
(27) (30).
2. Fit the bearing cones (28) and (29) on the
shaft (1). Next install the washer (33) and
retainer ring (34).
NOTE: "X" assembly. The bearing cones are
fitted back to back.
3. Fit the cup (30) in the double gear (26).
Fig. 215
4. Check that the snap ring (35) is present in
the double gear.
5. Fit the spacer (36), the lubricated needle
roller bearings (37) and (38), and the spacer
(39) in the gear (26).
Fig. 216
7. Slide the shaft (1) into the gear (26).
8. Fit the washer (19) and the retainer ring (18).
NOTE: Do not insert shims to measure the clearance during this operation.
Shimming the gear (26)
9. To position the bearings correctly, push and
pull the gear (26) while turning it.
10. Place a dial gage feeler pin on the surface of
the gear (26).
11. Measure the clearance A at three points.
Calculate the average of the three readings.
12. Remove the retainer ring (18) and the washer
(19).
13. Between the cup (27) and the washer (19),
insert the thickness of shims required to
obtain clearance A: A = -0.05 mm to
0.05 mm Shim to the maximum tolerance
(low preload).
Fig. 217

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Shimming the synchronizer overlap

14. Fit the thickness of shims determined in the
previous step.
15. Fit the retainer ring (42) that holds the
synchronizer (60) in position.
16. Using a depth gage, measure the distance B
between the mating face of the synchronizer
(60) on the retainer ring (42) and the mating
face of the gear (26).
Fig. 218
17. Ensure distance B does not exceed
16.33 mm.
• If B is < 16.33 mm: the distance is
correct.
• If B is > 16.33 mm: Take out one
0.40 mm shim (20) used to shim the gear
(26), and place it between the gear (26)
and the cup (30).
NOTE:
There are no intermediate shim sizes; use
either the 0.40 mm shim or no shim.
18. Once shimming is complete, refit the
synchronizer (60). Fig. 219
NOTE: Make a paint mark to correctly align

the lubrication holes on the synchronizer hub
and the shaft (1).
19. Refit the ring (49) and the gear (48).
20. Using a makeshift tool, fit the bearing cones
(2) and (50) on the shaft (1).
Fig. 220

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Reassembling the secondary shaft
Procedure
1. On the shaft (13), fit:
• the gear (43),
• the spacer (44),
• the gear (45).
2. Fit the bearing cone (46) using a makeshift
tool.
Fig. 221
3. Fit the tapered bearings (21) (22) and (23)
(24) in the gear (25).
4. Fit the washer (16) then the retainer ring (15).
Do not fit the shims (17).
5. Using a set of shims, measure the clearance
C between the retainer ring (15) and the
washer (16).
Fig. 222
6. Between the bearing (21) and the washer
(16), insert the thickness of shims (17)
required to obtain the clearance C: C =
-0.05 mm to 0.05 mm Shim to the maximum
tolerance (low preload).
Fig. 223

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
7. On the gear (25), refit the gear (31), its inner

surface lightly smeared with grease.
8. Reassemble the synchronizer (69) on the
splines of the gear (25).
NOTE: Make a paint mark to correctly align
the lubrication holes on the synchronizer hub
and the gear (25).
10. Fit the pre-lubricated bearing (32).
Fig. 224
11. Position the gear (25) on a support, with the
synchronizer turned upward.
12. Thread on the shaft (13) assembled during
the previous steps, taking care when
inserting it through the needle roller bearing
(32).
Fig. 225
13. Fit the spacer (14) and the bearing cone (9)
on the shaft (13).
NOTE: Ensure that the spacer shoulder is
positioned the right way.
Fig. 226

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.5.4.6 Shimming the primary and secondary shafts in the housing
Shimming the primary shaft and reverse layshaft gear
Procedure
1. Ensure that the bearing cups (51), (47) and
(118) are fitted in the gearbox housing (5).
2. Place the primary shaft (1) in the gearbox
housing (5) (see chapter Reassembling the
primary shaft, page 5-151 ). At the same
time, fit the reverse layshaft gear (116).
3. In the cover plate (6), fit the bearing cups (3)
and (114) (assembled without shims) with
grease to keep them in the cover plate (6).
Fig. 227
4. Refit the cover plate (6) onto the housing (5).
Fit and tighten the cover plate attachment
screws (A).
5. Place a dial gage feeler pin at the end of the
primary shaft (1). To correctly seat the
bearings, pull and push hard on the shaft
while turning it.
NOTE: To pull the shaft, use a lever, passing
it underneath the gearbox.
6. Measure the clearance with a dial gage.
Calculate the thickness of shims required to
obtain the preload P1: P1 = 0.05 mm to
0.15 mm If possible, shim to the maximum
Fig. 228
tolerance. Example if the clearance
measured is 0.73 mm: 0.73 mm + 0.05 mm
= 0.78 mm 0.73 mm + 0.15 mm = 0.88 mm
The thickness of shims required will be
between 0.78 mm and 0.88 mm. Get as
close as possible to 0.88 mm.
7. Place the dial gage feeler pin on the reverse
layshaft gear.
8. Using a makeshift bent rod, pull the gear to
correctly seat the bearings.
Calculate the thickness of shims required to
obtain the preload P2: P2 = 0.05 mm to
0.15 mm
If possible, shim to the maximum tolerance.
10. Remove the screws (A) and the cover plate
(6).
11. Take out the primary shaft and reverse
layshaft gear. Fig. 229

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Shimming the secondary shaft
Procedure
1. Ensure that the bearing cup (47) is present in
the gearbox housing (5).
2. Place the secondary shaft (13) in the gearbox
housing (5) (see chapter Reassembling the
primary shaft, page 5-151 , see
chapter Reassembling the secondary shaft,
page 5-153 ).
3. In the cover plate (6), fit the bearing cup (8)
(assembled without shims) with grease to
keep the bearing cup in the cover plate (6).
4. Refit the cover plate (6) onto the housing (5).
Fit and tighten the cover plate attachment
screws (A).
Fig. 230
5. Place a dial gage feeler pin at the end of the
secondary shaft (13). To correctly seat the
bearings, pull and push hard on the shaft
while turning it.
NOTE: To pull the shaft, use a lever, passing
it underneath the gearbox.
Calculate the thickness of the shims required
to obtain preload P3: P3 = 0.05 mm to
0.15 mm If possible, shim to the maximum
tolerance.
7. Refit the shafts in the housing and fit the
cover plate with the calculated shim
thicknesses (see chapter Refitting the
primary and secondary shafts, page 5-146 ).
5.5.4.7 Adjusting the selector rails and forks

General
To carry out this adjustment, the primary and
secondary shafts must be refitted and correctly
shimmed in the housing.
X484 - Range solenoid valve 1
X488 - Range switch 1
Fig. 231
Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Fit solenoid valves X484, X485, X486 and X487

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
2. Fit a plug in the pressure accumulator port. Fashion a union to supply the control circuit at the rear of
the gearbox with compressed air at a maximum pressure of 4 bar (arrow).
Fig. 232
3. Connect the solenoid valve service test tool ref. 3378805M1 (see chapter Robotic mechanical
gearbox - Service tools, page 5-163 ).
Checking the selector rails before adjustment

Before adjusting the travel of the selector rails, it is important to check that their movement is within the
permitted tolerances.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Procedure
1. Using a depth gage and a suitable fixture,
check the following dimensions:
• X1: dimension between face F of the
housing and the end of the selector rail
with range 1 or 3 engaged
• Y: dimension between face F of the
housing and the end of the selector rail in
neutral position
• Z1: dimension between face F of the
with range 2 or 4 engaged.
2. Check the dimensions measured against the
values in the following table. If the measured
dimensions are outside these tolerances,
manually turn the gears using the reverse
gear, then repeat the measurements. If the
dimensions are still incorrect, check that the
selector rails and synchronisers have been
fitted correctly.
Ranges 1 Ranges 3
and 2 and 4
X1 20.785 mm ± 21.830 mm ±
0.5 mm 0.5 mm
Y 32.215 mm ± 33.213 mm ±
1.245 mm 1.093 mm
Z1 43.625 mm ± 44.425 mm ±
0.5 mm 0.5 mm
Fig. 233

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Adjusting the selector rails

Adjusting the selector rail (98) (ranges 1 and 2)
1. Set the rail (98) to neutral.
NOTE: To set a selector rail to neutral, the
two solenoid valves that control it must be
powered.
2. Fit the castellated nut without tightening
(109).
3. Engage range 2 (supply X485).
4. Tighten the nut (109) up against the cover
plate (6).
5. Reposition the selector rail to neutral.
Tighten the nut (109) by two more notches.
Fig. 234
6. With paint, mark the position of the nut (109)
in relation to the cover plate (6).
NOTE: The synchronizer may not fully
engage when the gearbox is not running. If
this is the case, position the shaft (121) and
reverse layshaft gear (119) and slowly run
the gearbox while engaging the range.
Fig. 235
7. Fit the castellated nut (108). Screw it on until

it is almost touching the nut (109).
NOTE: Be careful not to move the nut (109)
from its set position and not to erase the
paint marks.
8. Fit the plate (111). Fit the screws (107)
Tighten to a torque of 29 Nm - 37 Nm.
Fig. 236

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
9. Engage range 1 (supply X484).

10. Unscrew the nut (108) fitted home against
the plate (111).
11. Reposition the selector rail to neutral.
Unscrew the nut (108) by two more notches.
12. With paint, mark the nut (108) aligned with
the mark on the cover plate (6).
Fig. 237
13. Insert the screw (107) to lock the nuts (108)
and (109), aligning the marks made
previously.
14. Check for correct operation. The nuts should
act as a stop.
15. Firmly fit the screw (107), smeared with
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten to a torque
of 12 Nm - 16 Nm.
Fig. 238
Adjusting the selector rail (73) (ranges 3 and 4)
16. Repeat the previous steps with the selector
rail (73) and the nuts (99) and (101).
Checking the selector rails after adjustment

After adjusting the travel of the selector rails, it is necessary to check that their movement remains within
the permitted tolerances.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Procedure
1. Using a depth gage and a suitable fixture,
check the following dimensions:
• X2: dimension between face F of the
with range 1 or 3 engaged
• Z2: dimension between face F of the
with range 2 or 4 engaged.
2. Check the full travel of the forks by
calculating Z2-X2.
Ranges 1 Ranges 3
and 2 and 4
X2 21.25 mm ± 22.300 mm ±
0.585 mm 0.585 mm
Z2 43.155 mm ± 43.955 mm ±
0.585 mm 0.585 mm
Z2 - X2 21.9 mm ± 21.655 mm ±
1.4 mm 1.275 mm
If the measured dimensions are outside

these tolerances, manually turn the gears
using the reverse gear, then repeat the
measurements. If the dimensions are still
incorrect, check that the selector rails and Fig. 239
synchronisers have been fitted correctly.
Checking the switches for correct operation
3. Check for the presence of pins (130).
4. Fit limit switches X488, X489, X490 and
X491. Tighten the switches to a maximum of
50 Nm.
5. Using the solenoid valve service test tool ref.
3378805M1, check the shifting of each
range, the return to neutral and the operation
of the switches.
Fig. 240
5.5.4.8 Adjusting the interlock mechanism

NOTE: This adjustment must be carried out after setting the selector rails (see chapter Adjusting the
selector rails and forks, page 5-156 ).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Procedure
1. Screw home the rod (106) in the reverse
pitch nut (131).
2. Using the service tool ref. 3378805M1 (see
chapter Robotic mechanical gearbox -
Service tools, page 5-163 , 5B48) engage a
range on a selector rail and leave the other
selector rail in neutral.
Fig. 241
3. Unscrew the rod (104) until the lock reaches
maximum axial clearance as shown: J =
0.1 mm to 0.3 mm
4. Tighten the counter-nut (105).
Fig. 242
Check
5. Using the solenoid valve service test tool ref. 3378805M1 (see chapter Robotic mechanical gearbox -
Service tools, page 5-163 ), engage a range on a selector rail.
6. Try to shift a range on the other selector rail. It should not engage.
7. Repeat the procedure with all the ranges.
5.5.4.9 Final steps
Procedure
1. Fit the gearbox on the rear axle and engine.

2. Reconnect the harnesses and hydraulic pipes that were removed.
3. Check the transmission oil level.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
4. Carry out a gearbox calibration and check the operation of the transmission.
5.5.5 Service tools
5.5.5.1 General
5.5.5.2 Robotic mechanical gearbox - Service tools

Reference 3378804M1
Description Gearbox shaft slinging tool
Reference 3378805M1
Description Supplier’s electrical tool for solenoid valves

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.6 GBA25/Super creeper gears

5.6.1 General
The super creeper gears component is fitted as an
option.
It has a ratio of 13.68.
The super creeper gears component (VSR) is
located at the front of the center housing of the
GPA50 rear axle.
It is electrohydraulically controlled by two ON/OFF
solenoid valves managed by the tractor electronic
system and is supplied with a low pressure of
21 bar.
Each of the solenoid valves controls a position
(super creeper gears or direct drive). When one is
open (ON), the other is closed (OFF) and vice
versa.
The oil return from the piston of the hydraulic
mechanism is directed to the center housing by
the remaining passive solenoid valve (not
supplied).
IMPORTANT: The coupler with spur cut teeth can
only be activated by the tractor's electronic system
when the tractor is stopped.
Fig. 243

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

Super creeper gears position: ratio 1/13.68
Fig. 244
The kinematics of the super creeper gears component is provided by a driving gear (24) constantly
engaged with the teeth of the output shaft (AS) of the gearbox and by a layshaft (7) directly engaged with
the dog gear (3).
When the super creeper gears component is electronically and hydraulically engaged, the coupler (2)
splined to the pinion (PA) is released from the output shaft (AS) of the gearbox to clutch the splines of the
dog gear (3).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Direct drive: ratio 1:1
Fig. 245
When the relevant solenoid valve is supplied, the coupler (2) that is splined to the pinion (PA) moves
forward (as viewed from the operator's seat) to engage with the output shaft (AS) of the gearbox.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

Super creeper gears position
Fig. 246
Direct drive
Fig. 247

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.6.4.1 View of the assembly
Fig. 248
(1) Fork (2) Coupler
ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(3) Dog gear (16) Ring

(4) Washers (17) "O" ring
(6) Bearing cone (19) Cover plate
(7) Layshaft (20) Piston
(11) Shim(s) (24) Driving gear
(12) Cover plate (25) Ring
(13) Screw (AS) Gearbox output shaft specific to the super
(14) Solenoid valve creeper gears option
(15) Solenoid valve (PA) Pinion

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.6.4.2 Blown-up view
Fig. 249
(1) Fork (4) Washers
(2) Coupler (5) Bearing cup
(3) Dog gear (6) Bearing cone

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(7) Layshaft (18) "O" ring

(8) Screw (19) Cover plate
(9) Bearing cone (20) Piston
(11) Shim(s) (22) "O" ring
(12) Cover plate (23) Circlip
(13) Screw (24) Driving gear
(14) Solenoid valve (25) Ring
(15) Solenoid valve (AS) Gearbox output shaft specific to the super
(16) Ring creeper gears option
(17) "O" ring (PA) Pinion
5.6.5.1 Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the layshaft

General
Shimming the super creeper gear mechanism
layshaft tapered roller bearings with preload must
be checked after replacing one or more of the
following parts:
• the center housing
• layshaft (7)
• tapered roller bearing cones and cups (5) (6) (9)
(10).
Fig. 250
Preparing for shimming

1. Disconnect the tractor between the gearbox and the rear axle (refer to the chapter and section on
disassembly).
2. Remove:
• The right-hand hydraulic cover plate and the left-hand plate (57 l/min Open Center hydraulic system)
• The right-hand and left-hand hydraulic cover plates (100 l/min Open Center hydraulic system or 110 l/
min Closed Center hydraulic system).

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Procedure
1. Remove:
• the retainer ring (23);
• the driving gear (24).
Fig. 251
2. Unscrew the screws (13) and remove the

cover plate (12).
Fig. 252
3. Take off a thickness of shims (11) to obtain a

temporary clearance of approximately
0.15 mm to 0.20 mm in preparation for
shimming the layshaft tapered roller bearings
with preload.
Fig. 253

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
4. Refit the cover plate (12), positioning the

face (A) towards the tapered roller bearing.
Temporarily tighten the screws (13) to
29 Nm - 37 Nm.
Fig. 254
5. Screw service tool 4346871M1 onto the

threaded end of the layshaft (7).
Fig. 255

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Shimming
General
Shimming the tapered roller bearings (9) (10) (5) (6)
consists of using a dial gage and following the
conventional method by applying a firm axial push
and pull force on the layshaft (7) to measure a
clearance for shimming the layshaft tapered roller
bearings with preload.
Fig. 256
Fig. 256

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
Procedure
1. Fit the dial gage support on the center
housing. Position its feeler pin on the service
tool 4346871M1.
Fig. 257
2. Adjust the preload of the layshaft tapered

roller bearings by applying the following
procedure.
• Push the handle of tool 4346871M1 firmly
while turning it alternately from right to
left to correctly position the tapered roller
bearing cone (6) in the cup (5).
• Repeat the previous step by pulling firmly
to correctly position the tapered roller
Depending on the clearance reading on the
dial gage, select another thickness of shims
(11) to obtain a preload: Fig. 258
P = 0.05 mm to 0.15 mm
NOTE: As far as possible, shim to the
maximum tolerance.
3. Remove service tool 4346871M1.

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox

cover plate (12).
Fig. 259
5. Lightly smear the shim(s) (11) with miscible

grease and fit the shim(s) on the bearing cup
(10). Refit the cover plate (12), positioning
the face (A) towards the shim(s).
Fig. 260
6. Degrease the thread of the screws (13) and

lightly smear with Loctite 242 or equivalent.
Tighten the three screws to 29 Nm - 37 Nm.
Fig. 261

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
7. Refit:
• the driving gear (24)
• the retainer ring (23).
Fig. 262
After finishing the procedure

1. Refit the left-hand and right-hand hydraulic cover plates. Carry out the preliminary steps in reverse order
see chapter Preparing for shimming, page 5-171 .
2. Reconnect the tractor between the gearbox and the rear axle.
Procedure
1. Disconnect the tractor between the gearbox
(B.D.V) and the rear axle (P.AR) (refer to the
chapter and section on disassembly).
2. Remove the right-hand and left-hand
hydraulic cover plates.
• The right-hand hydraulic cover plate and
the left-hand plate (57 l/min Open Center
hydraulic system)
• The right-hand and left-hand hydraulic
cover plates (100 l/min Open Center
hydraulic system or 110 l/min Closed
Center hydraulic system).
Fig. 263

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
5.6.6.2 Disassembly
Procedure
1. Remove:
• the driving gear (24).
Fig. 264
2. Unscrew the screw (8) from the fork (1).

Remove:
• the cover plate (19)
• the piston (20)
• the "O" rings (17) (18) (21) (22) and discard
them.
Fig. 265

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
3. Remove the fork (1).
Fig. 266
4. Remove:
• the clutch assembly (E) from the rear PTO
and the gerotor lubrication pump
• the coupler (2).
Fig. 267
5. Unlock and remove the nut (E).
Fig. 268

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
6. Unscrew the screws (13). Remove the cover

plate (12).
Fig. 269
7. Release and remove the dog gear assembly

(3), ring (16) and washers (4) by pulling the
layshaft (7) forwards slightly.
Fig. 270
8. Remove the layshaft (7) fitted with the

tapered roller bearings (5) (6) and (9) (10).
Fig. 271

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
9. If necessary, extract:
• from the layshaft (7): the tapered roller
bearing cone (6) and the tapered roller
bearing cone (9) of the cup (10)
• from the center housing: the cup (5) from
the tapered roller bearing cone (6).
Fig. 272
5.6.6.3 Reassembly
Procedure
1. IMPORTANT:
Each bearing cone must be up against its
shoulder after fitting.
The bearing cup (5) must be up against the
shoulder of the center housing.
If it is necessary to extract the bearings, fit
the following:
• on the layshaft (7): the tapered roller
bearing cones (6) and (9)
• on the center housing: the bearing cup
(5).
2. Clean and check all components. Replace
those that are defective. Fig. 273
3. Partially refit the layshaft (7) fitted with its
tapered roller bearing cones.
Fig. 274

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
4. Refit and engage the dog gear assembly (3),

ring (16) and washers (4) by pushing the
layshaft (7) fully back toward the rear.
Fig. 275
5. Refit:
• the shim(s) (11) used to preload the
tapered roller bearings on the layshaft (7);
• the cover plate (12)
• the screws (13) after cleaning and lightly
smearing their threads with Loctite 242 or
equivalent. Tighten them to a torque of 29
Nm - 37 Nm.
Fig. 276
6. Refit the nut (E).
Fig. 277

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
7. Refit:
• partially the clutch assembly (E) of the
rear PTO and the gerotor lubrication pump
• the coupler (2).
8. Definitively attach the clutch assembly (E) of
the rear PTO and the gerotor lubrication
pump to the center housing. Tighten its
attachment screws smeared with Loctite
242 or equivalent.
Fig. 278
9. Refit the fork (1) after cleaning its tapped
hole.
Fig. 279
10. Lightly soak the "O" rings (17) (18) (21) (22) in
clean transmission oil. Fit them into the
grooves of the center housing, the piston
(20) and the cover plate (19) respectively.
Fig. 280

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
11. Mark:
• the position of the screw hole on the
front face of the piston (20) with a paint
mark (R)
• the position of the screw hole on the fork
(1) with a paint mark (R).
Fig. 281
12. Align the marks made previously by inserting

the piston (20) fitted with its "O" rings in the
bores of the center housing and the fork (1).
13. Fit the cover plate (19) fitted with its "O" ring.
14. Lightly smear the thread of the screw (8)
with Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten to a
Fig. 282
15. Manually check that the coupler (2) correctly
engages with the dog gear (3).
NOTE: For this check, manually support the
cover plate (19) and activate the fork (1).
Fig. 283

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
16. Refit:
• the driving gear (24)
Fig. 284
5.6.6.4 Final steps
Procedure
1. Refit the left-hand and right-hand hydraulic cover plates.
2. Reconnect the tractor between the gearbox
(B.D.V) and the rear axle (P.AR) (refer to the
chapter and section on reassembly).
Fig. 285
5.6.7 Service tools
5.6.7.1 General
5.6.7.2 Super creeper gears - Service tools

Reference 4346871M1
Description Tool for pushing and pulling the layshaft

ACT0021460
5. Gearbox
(A) Handle
(B) M8 threaded rod L = 200 mm
(C) Dial gage thrust plate

ACT0021460
Table of contents
6. Rear axle
6.1 GPA50/General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

6.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.3 Schematic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.3.1 Main kinematics of the GPA50 rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.3.2 Kinematics of the two-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.1.3.3 Kinematics of the three-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.1.3.4 Kinematics of the super creeper gear mechanism – final drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.1.3.5 Kinematics of the super creeper gear mechanism – direct drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.1.4 Center housing with two-speed or three-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.1.4.1 View of the center housing with two-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.1.4.2 View of the center housing with three-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.1.4.3 View of the center housing with GSPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.1.4.4 Exploded view of GPA50 center housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.1.4.5 2-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.1.4.6 3-speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.1.5 Center housing with creeper gear mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.1.5.1 Super creeper gears (option) (ratio 1:13.68) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.1.5.2 Super creeper gears (option) (ratio 1:1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.1.6.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.2 GPA50/GPA52 trumpet housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.2.3.1 View of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.2.3.2 View of the GLA52 trumpet housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.2.4.1 Shimming the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.2.4.2 Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the axle shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6.2.5.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6.2.5.2 Removing and refitting the trumpet housing assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6.2.5.3 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the planet carrier . . . . . . . . 6-51
6.2.5.4 Replacing tapered roller bearings and seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
6.2.5.5 Replacing a stud on the flanged axle shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.2.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.2.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.2.6.2 GPA50/Final drives - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.3 GPA50/GPA54 trumpet housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6.3.3.2 View of GPA54 trumpet housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
6.3.4.1 Shimming the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
6.3.4.2 Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the axle shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.3.5.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77

ACT0021460
Table of contents
6.3.5.2 Removing the trumpet housing assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79

6.3.5.3 Removing the final drive ring gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
6.3.5.4 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the planet carrier . . . . . . . . 6-84
6.3.5.5 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
6.3.5.6 Replacing a stud on the flanged axle shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
6.3.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
6.3.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
6.3.6.2 GPA50/Final drives - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
6.4 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 9x40 and 10x42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
6.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
6.4.3.1 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - Cross-section view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
6.4.3.2 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
6.4.3.3 Rear differential mechanism and its lock - Cross-section view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
6.4.4.1 Adjusting the position of the pinion in the center housing (taper distance) . . . . 6-105
6.4.4.2 Shimming the pinion tapered roller bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
6.4.4.3 Shimming the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly tapered roller bearings . 6-117
6.4.4.4 Adjusting and checking the backlash between the ring gear and the pinion . . . 6-124
6.4.5.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128
6.4.5.2 Preliminary step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130
6.4.5.3 Removing and refitting the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly . . . . . . 6-135
6.4.5.4 Removing and refitting the rear differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-141
6.4.5.5 Removing and refitting the crown wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145
6.4.5.6 Removing and refitting the planet gears and sun gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149
6.4.5.7 Removing and refitting the pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-151
6.4.5.8 Replacing the left-hand lubrication sleeve lip seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165
6.4.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-168
6.4.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-168
6.4.6.2 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 9x40 and 10x42 - Service tools . . . . . . . . 6-169
6.5 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 10x47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173
6.5.1 GPA50 general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173
6.5.3.1 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - GPA50 cross-section view . . . . . . . . . 6-178
6.5.3.2 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-180
6.5.3.3 Rear differential mechanism and its lock - Cross-section view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-182
6.5.4.1 Adjusting the position of the pinion in the center housing (taper distance) . . . . 6-183
6.5.4.2 Shimming the pinion tapered roller bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-185
6.5.4.3 Shimming the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly tapered roller bearings . 6-195
6.5.4.4 Adjusting and checking the backlash between the ring gear and the pinion . . . 6-202
6.5.5.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206
6.5.5.2 Preliminary step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208
6.5.5.3 Removing and refitting the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly . . . . . . 6-213
6.5.5.4 Removing and refitting the rear differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-219
6.5.5.5 Removing and refitting the crown wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223
6.5.5.6 Removing and refitting the planet gears and sun gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-227
6.5.5.7 Removing and refitting the pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-229
6.5.5.8 Replacing the left-hand lubrication sleeve lip seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-243
6.5.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-246
6.5.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-246
6.5.6.2 GPA50 rear crown wheel and pinion 10x47 - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-247
6.6 GPA50/Tractor braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-251

ACT0021460
Table of contents
6.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-251

6.6.3.1 Overview of the main brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-254
6.6.3.2 Blown-up view of the main brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-256
6.6.3.3 Location of the hand brake control components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-258
6.6.4.1 Adjusting the main brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-259
6.6.4.2 Adjusting the hand brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-264
6.6.4.3 Bleeding the main brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-264
6.6.5.1 Removing and refitting the disks, the intermediate plates and a brake
mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-266
6.6.5.2 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-272
6.6.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-283
6.6.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-283
6.6.6.2 GPA50/Tractor braking – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-284
6.7 Pneumatic trailer braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-285
6.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-285
6.7.1.2 Schematic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-287
6.7.3 Test and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-290
6.7.3.1 Pneumatic system test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-290
6.7.3.2 Sealing test on the pneumatic system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-292
6.7.4.1 Adjusting the hand brake rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-292
6.7.4.2 Adjusting the pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-293
6.7.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-295
6.7.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-295
6.7.5.2 Pneumatic trailer brake — Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-296
6.8 GPA50/Linkage and hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-298
6.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-298
6.8.2 General information about the linkage angular sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-300
6.8.3 Layout of the linkage components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-301
6.8.3.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-301
6.8.4 Layout of the hitch mechanism components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-302
6.8.4.2 Exploded view of hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-303
6.8.5.2 Removing/refitting a draft sensor (bottom link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-310
6.8.5.3 Removing/refitting the draft sensor (top link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-312
6.8.5.4 Removing/refitting the linkage angular sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-316
6.8.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-320
6.8.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-320
6.8.6.2 GPA50/Linkage and hitch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-321
6.9 GPA50/Auto-hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-322
6.9.1 Auto-hitch general features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-322
6.9.2.2 Blown-up view of the auto-hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-324
6.9.3.1 Adjusting the auto-hitch tie-rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-324
6.9.3.2 Adjusting the control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-326

ACT0021460
Table of contents
6.9.4.1 Refitting the auto-hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-327

6.10 GPA50/Wheels and hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-328
6.10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-328
6.10.2 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-330
6.10.2.1 Layout of wheel and hub components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-330
6.10.2.2 Exploded view of a steel front wheel and its hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-331
6.10.2.3 Blown-up view of a steel rear wheel and its hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-332
6.10.3 Disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-333
6.10.3.1 Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-333
6.10.3.2 Removing/refitting a rear wheel on a flanged shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-334
6.10.3.3 Replacing a rear wheel stud on a flanged shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-336

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1 GPA50/General
6.1.1 General
The GPA50 rear axle comprises four housings:
• The center housing
On the inside, it includes:
• the super creeper gear mechanism (depending on option)
• the rear differential/crown wheel and pinion assembly
• the rear PTO clutch
• the 4WD clutch
• the hand brake control mechanism
• the main brakes
On the outside, it includes:
• The right-hand hydraulic cover plate and the left-hand plate (57 l/min Open Center hydraulic system)
• The right-hand and left-hand hydraulic cover plates (100 l/min Open Center hydraulic system)
• the right-hand and left-hand hydraulic cover plates (110 l/min Load Sensing hydraulic system)
• the hitch and linkage mechanism
• The rear PTO housing
The rear PTO housing is different depending on whether it houses a two-speed or three-speed PTO,
depending on the tractor model.
• The right-hand and left-hand trumpet housings
Two versions of trumpet housing are available from the Parts Book:
• GPA52 trumpet housings, depending on the tractor model.
• GPA54 trumpet housings, depending on the tractor model.
They are fitted to either side of the center housing and house the rear wheel drive system.
In this section, only a partial description is given of each component, as more specific and detailed
descriptions are given in their respective sections.
Construction
The crown wheel and pinion assembly contains the pinion and the crown wheel.
These two parts are inseparable.
• The helical pinion is supported by two tapered roller bearings fitted in an O arrangement.
The adjustment of its position is effected using shim(s) placed between the rear bearing cup mounted
freely in its bore and the center housing.
The rear bearing cone of the pinion is force-fitted. In contrast, the front bearing cone is mounted freely
to allow the fitting of the shims necessary for the preload shimming of the tapered roller bearings.
The pinion can support a driving gear for the 4WD mechanism. In the 2WD version, a ring replaces the
gear.
• The helical crown wheel is screwed on to the differential unit. The differential unit is supported by two
tapered roller bearings fitted in an X arrangement.
It needs to be adjusted and shimmed to be reliable:
• adjustment of the backlash
• shimming with preload of the tapered roller bearings
The differential component consists of two sun gears and four planet gears.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
It is housed in a unit closed by the crown wheel.

A spring-loaded mobile dog clutch controls it hydraulically under a pressure of 21 bar.
The 4WD clutch component is a clutch/gear assembly fitted in the lower part of the GPA50 rear axle. A
cover plate mounted underneath the center housing provides access to this assembly after splitting the
tractor between the GBA25 or GBA50 gearbox, depending on the tractor model, and the GPA50 rear axle.
The 4WD clutch component consists of:
• a shaft rotating on two ball bearings fitted in the bore of the center housing
• a clutch assembly controlled hydraulically under a pressure of 21 bar. It is splined to the shaft
• a bell gear driving the disks and the shaft of the rotating clutch assembly
The rear PTO clutch component is located at the front and in the upper part of the center housing.
It controls the operation of the rear PTO under a pressure of 21 bar.
It is connected in rotation to a vibration damper fitted to the engine flywheel and a line comprising two
shafts.
The clutch of the rear PTO consists of a unit supported by two ball bearings centered in the support of the
Gerotor lubrication pump.
The clutch assembly and Gerotor pump is fitted to the center housing. The clutch piston is housed in a
unit.
This unit comprises:
• at the front a straight-tooth gear which ensures the rotation of the engine towards the hydraulic
pump(s) (depending on the hydraulic equipment fitted: Open Center 57 l/min, 100 l/min) or 110 l Load
Sensing system
• at the rear a bell fitted with a set of disks and intermediate plates closed by a cover plate and a retainer
ring
The rear PTO component is housed in a unit located at the rear of the GPA50 rear axle.
It is connected to the multidisc clutch located at the front of the GPA50 rear axle by means of two shafts.
The power take-off brake component consists of a cylindrical piston fitted with an "O" ring.
This piston is housed in a bore of the rear PTO unit.
It is subjected to a hydraulic pressure of 21 bar when the rear PTO disengages.
The main brakes component consists of two hydraulic units fitted to the top right-hand and left-hand
sections of the center housing.
They are controlled by the hydraulic pressure generated by the brake master cylinders.
Each hydraulic unit consists of:
• a mechanism with extendable platforms
• a series of disks
• a series of intermediate plates
• a cover plate
The hand brake component is controlled by cable.
It is mechanically connected to the hydraulic units via two rods.
The super creeper gears component is controlled hydraulically under a pressure of 21 bar.
It receives the rotation of the output shaft of the gearbox and transmits it to the pinion of the helical crown
wheel and pinion assembly.
This output shaft is specific to the super creeper gears option.
The super creeper gears component consists of:

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
• an output shaft incorporated in the gearbox

• a driving gear constantly meshed with the teeth of the output shaft
• a relay shaft with integrated gear
• a dog gear rotating freely on the pinion
• a dog clutch with external and internal teeth
• a fork
• a hydraulically-controlled piston
Helical crown wheel and pinion assembly

The helical crown wheel and pinion assembly, composed of the pinion and the crown wheel, controls the
rotation from the output shaft of the gearbox to drive the rear axle of the tractor via the differential and its
unit.
Differential
• In a straight line
When the wheels turn at the same speed, the planet gear/sun gear assembly is locked and its rotation
prevented.
In this configuration, the movement is transmitted only to the differential unit towards the rear wheels
of the tractor.
• Turning
When the wheels no longer turn at the same speed (right or left turn), the differential mechanism
operates and enables the planet gears and sun gears to turn at a differential speed according to the
trajectory of the wheels.
The movement is then transmitted to the differential unit towards the rear wheels of the tractor via the
rotating sun gears.
4WD clutch
• Clutch disengaged position
The 4WD solenoid valve fitted to the center housing is controlled by the tractor's electronic system.
It supplies oil to the interior of the shaft via the axial and radial channels under a pressure of 21 bar.
The 4WD clutch piston then moves on the hub and pulls the bell. The bell compresses the Belleville
springs and releases the disks.
In this configuration, the bell gear then turns idle on the shaft and does not transmit movement towards
the front axle.
• Clutch engaged position
When the pressure is cut, the Belleville springs decompress and push back the bell in order to
compress the disks and the intermediate plates.
The bell gear then attaches to the bell, transmitting in this way the rotation of the pinion to the shaft
and the front axle.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Rear PTO clutch

The rear PTO clutch is supplied by the 21 bar low-pressure hydraulic system and via a proportional
solenoid valve located on the hydraulic cover plate and above the rear axle.
A transfer pipe connects the hydraulic cover plate to the clutch.
The pressurized oil penetrates the clutch unit and then travels towards the rear of the piston via an
internal channel.
The pressure pushes the piston, which compresses the disks and the intermediate plates.
The intermediate plates are attached to the bell by lugs.
The disks are splined to the hub.
The movement is then transmitted to the driving shaft and the mechanical components of the rear
power take-off.
When the solenoid valve no longer supplies the power take-off clutch, the piston is brought back
against the unit by a spring.
The oil in the piston chamber is directed to the return by the solenoid valve.
The ball bearing leaves the seat of the valve crimped on the clutch bell to facilitate the decompression
of the piston chamber.
Main brakes
When force is applied to a brake pedal, the relevant master cylinder directs pressure towards the piston of
the hydraulic brake unit located above the rear axle.
This pressure is proportionate to the force applied to the pedal.
The hydraulic brake unit operates on the plates of the mechanism and separates them by angular rotation.
As a result, the disks and the intermediate plates are compressed and brake the input sun gear of the
trumpet housing splined to the brake disks.
The same logic applies for the second brake pedal.
Hand brake
The operating principle of the hand brake control is identical to that of the main brakes, except that a cable
replaces the pressure generated by the brake master cylinders towards the hydraulic brake units.
PTO brake
The brake piston located in the rear housing is pressurized (21 bar) and gradually brakes the lower line
of the rear PTO until it stops completely.
The brake piston is no longer pressurized. The lower line of the power take-off is thus released.
Super creeper gears (optional)

The super creeper gear mechanism is operated by two ON/OFF solenoid valves under a pressure of 21 bar.
Super creeper gears position: ratio 13.68
When the relevant solenoid valve is supplied, the piston of the super creeper gear hydraulic mechanism
drives the control fork back and shifts the dog clutch splined to the pinion.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
In this configuration, the dog clutch, which is constantly meshed with the pinion by means of splines,
releases itself from the output shaft and clutches the splines of the dog gear.
The movement then passes from the output shaft of the gearbox to the pinion of the rear axle via a relay
shaft and three gears.
Direct drive: ratio 1:1
When the relevant solenoid valve is supplied, the dog clutch, which is constantly meshed with the pinion,
moves forward and attaches itself to the output shaft of the gearbox.
In each position (super creeper gears or direct drive), the oil return from the piston of the hydraulic
mechanism is directed to the center housing by the remaining passive solenoid valve (not supplied).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.3.1 Main kinematics of the GPA50 rear axle
Fig. 1
(1) Transmission of movement from the pinion to the rear wheels

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.3.2 Kinematics of the two-speed PTO
Fig. 2

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(2) Ratio 540 rpm (3) Transmission of movement from the output shaft of the gearbox to the crown wheel and pinion assembly of the
GPA50 rear axle
NOTE: When the coupler moves towards the rear (as viewed from the operator's seat), the ratio of 540 E is
(4) Transmission of movement from the output shaft of the gearbox to the 4WD unit
obtained.
NOTE: Mechanical action.
6.1.3.3 Kinematics of the three-speed PTO
Fig. 3

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(2) Ratio 1000 rpm NOTE: When the coupler moves (as viewed from the operator's seat):
• towards the rear, the ratio of 540 E is obtained
• towards the front, the ratio of 540 rpm is obtained
(3) Transmission of movement from the output shaft of the gearbox to the crown wheel and pinion assembly of the
GPA50 rear axle
(4) Transmission of movement from the output shaft of the gearbox to the 4WD unit
NOTE: Mechanical action.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.3.4 Kinematics of the super creeper gear mechanism – final drive
Fig. 4
(4) Transmission of movement from the output shaft of the gearbox to the 4WD unit of the GPA50 rear axle (5) Transmission of movement from the output shaft of the gearbox to the crown wheel and pinion assembly of the
(mechanical action) via the engaged super creeper gear mechanism (reduction 1:13.68) GPA50 rear axle via the engaged super creeper gear mechanism (reduction 1:13.68)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.3.5 Kinematics of the super creeper gear mechanism – direct drive
Fig. 5
(6) Transmission of movement from the output shaft of the gearbox to the crown wheel and pinion assembly of the
GPA50 rear axle (mechanical action) via the disengaged super creeper gear mechanism (direct drive 1:1)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.4 Center housing with two-speed or three-speed PTO
6.1.4.1 View of the center housing with two-speed PTO
Fig. 6

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.4.2 View of the center housing with three-speed PTO
Fig. 7

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.4.3 View of the center housing with GSPTO
Fig. 8

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.4.4 Exploded view of GPA50 center housing
Fig. 9

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.4.5 2-speed PTO
Fig. 10
(1) Gerotor lubrication pump (5) Center housing
(2) Lubrication pressure relief valve (6) Tube de lubrification de l'arbre inférieur du bloc de prise de force arrière
(3) Rear PTO clutch (7) Coupling sleeve
(4) Tube de lubrification du pignon d'attaque (8) 4WD clutch shaft

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(9) 4WD clutch NOTE: The 4WD clutch is isolated from the rest of the components. This position limits the emulsion of oil
created by its rotation.
(10) Helical crown wheel and pinion assembly and rear differential
(11) Rear PTO unit
6.1.4.6 3-speed PTO
Fig. 11

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(1) Gerotor lubrication pump (8) 4WD clutch shaft

(2) Lubrication pressure relief valve (9) 4WD clutch
(3) Rear PTO clutch
NOTE: The 4WD clutch is isolated from the rest of the components. This position limits the emulsion of oil
(4) Tube de lubrification du pignon d'attaque
created by its rotation.
(5) Center housing
(6) Tube de lubrification de l'arbre inférieur du bloc de prise de force arrière
(11) Rear PTO unit
(7) Coupling sleeve

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.5 Center housing with creeper gear mechanism
6.1.5.1 Super creeper gears (option) (ratio 1:13.68)
Fig. 12
(1) Gerotor lubrication pump (3) Rear PTO clutch
(2) Lubrication pressure relief valve (4) Tube de lubrification du pignon d'attaque

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(5) Center housing NOTE: The 4WD clutch is isolated from the rest of the components. This position limits the emulsion of oil
(6) Tube de lubrification de l'arbre inférieur du bloc de prise de force arrière created by its rotation.
(8) 4WD clutch shaft (10) Helical crown wheel and pinion assembly and rear differential
(9) 4WD clutch (11) Rear PTO unit
(12) Overview of super creeper gear mechanism
(14) Output shaft of the GBA50 gearbox
NOTE: A special output shaft for the super creeper gears option is included in the spare parts catalog.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.5.2 Super creeper gears (option) (ratio 1:1)
Fig. 13
(1) Gerotor lubrication pump (5) Center housing
(2) Lubrication pressure relief valve (6) Tube de lubrification de l'arbre inférieur du bloc de prise de force arrière
(3) Rear PTO clutch (8) 4WD clutch shaft
(4) Tube de lubrification du pignon d'attaque (9) 4WD clutch

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
NOTE: The 4WD clutch is isolated from the rest of the components. This position limits the emulsion of oil (12) Overview of super creeper gear mechanism
created by its rotation. (14) Output shaft of the GBA50 gearbox
NOTE: A special output shaft for the super creeper gears option is included in the spare parts catalog.
(11) Rear PTO unit

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.1.6.1 Specifications
Fig. 14

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(1) Two-speed rear PTO unit (B) Backlash (teeth clearance between pinion and crown wheel)
(2) Three-speed rear PTO unit (R) Retreat of the Mecanindus pin in relation to the surface F of the differential unit
Fig. 15
(3) Super creeper gear mechanism (depending on option)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.2 GPA50/GPA52 trumpet housings

6.2.1 General
The GPA52 trumpets of tractors equipped with a
GTA5050 transmission support the right-hand and
left-hand flanged axle shafts.
They contain the final drive units that transmit the
rotation from the differential assembly.
The GPA52 trumpets have mechanical
components whose structure and shape vary
according to the power of the tractor.
The main difference is in relation to the final drive
(planet carrier, planet gear pin and crown wheel).
The width of the teeth of the planet gears and the
crown wheel as well as the number of teeth varies
according to the type of trumpet housing specified
in the following table.
Type of Width of teeth Number of

trumpet of planet gears teeth
housing
Planet Ring
gear gear
GPA52 47.6 mm 23 65
The crown wheel of the GPA52 trumpets is

knurled on its rim and force-fitted into the trumpet
housing. Fig. 16
Extracting it from the trumpet housing is not an

option. Only the trumpet housing/crown wheel
assembly is available in the spare parts catalog for
repairs.
The two GPA52 trumpets are symmetrical and can
be inverted from right to left and vice-versa.
Construction
The flanged axle shaft is supported by two tapered roller bearings fitted opposite one another.
External sealing is ensured by a three-lipped seal and internal sealing by a single-lip seal. The planet carrier
assembly of the final drive has three planet gears. It is held in position by a tripod washer and an M20
screw locked by a special washer. It is splined in rotation with the flanged axle shaft.
Shims placed at the end of the axle shaft allow the tapered roller bearings to be preloaded.
The final drive crown wheel is force-fitted into the trumpet housing.
The brake disks are housed in the right-hand and left-hand cavities of the center housing.
They are splined to the trumpet housing input sun gears.
The axle shaft and the planet carrier are held in position by a tripod washer and an M20 screw locked by a
special washer.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 17
Operation of the trumpet housing epicyclic final drive

The rotational speed of the axle shafts (A) is reduced by a classic epicyclic final drive (RF) in each trumpet
housing.
Its operation is ensured by a drive input and output.
• Input movement
It is generated by the gearbox (BV) and transmitted to the sun gear (P) of the trumpet (T) via the crown
wheel and pinion assembly of the rear axle.
• Output movement
It is transmitted to the shaft (A) and the wheel (R) via the planet carrier (PS) and the three planet gears
(S) of the classic final drive (RF).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 18
(1) Wheel stud (3) Bearing cone
(2) Threaded plug (4) Bearing cup

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(5) Trumpet housing/final drive crown wheel assembly (18) Shim(s)

(6) Circlip (19) Lip seal
(7) Bearing cup (20) Flanged axle shaft
(8) Planet gear pins (21) M16 screws
(9) Lock washer (22) Mecanindus locating pins
(10) Tripod washer (23) Three-lipped seal
(11) Planet gears (24) Friction cage
(12) M20 screw (A) Grease chamber
(13) Bearing needles (C) Final drive crown wheel
(14) Bearing cone (E) Imprint
(15) Planet carrier (P) Sun gear
(16) Shim(s) (T) Tapped hole
((17))Washer (thickness 1.5 mm)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.2.3.2 View of the GLA52 trumpet housing
Fig. 19
(1) Wheel stud (5) Trumpet housing/final drive crown wheel assembly
(2) Threaded plug (6) Circlip
(4) Bearing cup (8) Planet gear pins

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(9) Lock washer (20) Flanged axle shaft

(10) Tripod washer (21) M16 screws
(11) Planet gears (22) Mecanindus locating pins
(12) M20 screw (23) Three-lipped seal
(13) Bearing needles (24) Friction cage
(14) Bearing cone (A) Grease chamber
(15) Planet carrier (C) Final drive crown wheel
(16) Shim(s) (E) Imprint
((17))Washer (thickness 1,5 mm) (P) Sun gear
(18) Shim(s) (T) Tapped hole
(19) Lip seal

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.2.4.1 Shimming the planet gears

1. Remove the trumpet housing assembly.
2. Remove and disassemble the planet carrier.
General
The planet gears (11) are shimmed using the
shim(s) (16), which are fitted between the planet
gears and the planet carrier (15) (retainer ring side
(6)).
Fig. 20

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Temporarily fit:
• the planet gears (11) fitted with their
needle rollers in the planet carrier, always
positioning the imprint (E) toward the
retainer ring (6);
• the washer (17) (thickness 1,5 mm);
• a 1,5 mm thick shim (16) to limit the
surplus clearance before shimming.
2. Engage the three pins (8) in the planet gears.
3. Using the set of shims, gage the space
between the temporary shim (16) and the
planet gears (11). Depending on the
measurement, determine definitive shim
thickness(es) in order to obtain a clearance
for each planet gear of: J = 0,15 mm to 0,60
mm
NOTE:
The shim(s) (16) with a thickness of 1,5 mm
to 2,3 mm are available from the spare parts
catalog.
NOTE:
If possible, shim to the minimum tolerance.
Fig. 21

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. Take out the pins (8).

5. IMPORTANT:
Always fit the thickest shim against the row
of needle rollers.
Fit the previously selected shim(s) (16).
Fig. 22

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6. Drive in the pins by positioning their flat

section (M) toward the center of the planet
carrier (15). Fit the retainer ring (6) using
appropriate pliers.
7. Manually check the rotation of each planet
gear.
Fig. 23

1. Refit the planet carrier.
2. Refit the trumpet housing assembly.
6.2.4.2 Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the axle shaft

1. Remove the trumpet housing assembly (see chapter Removing and refitting the trumpet housing
assembly, page 6-48 ).
2. Remove the planet carrier (see chapter Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the planet
carrier, page 6-51 ).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
If the following parts are to be replaced, the

shimming of the tapered roller bearings on the axle
shaft must be checked or carried out:
• flanged axle shaft (20)
• tapered roller bearings (3) (4) and (7) (14)
• trumpet assembly housing
• planet carrier (15).
Fig. 24

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
NOTE:
The preload shimming of the tapered roller
bearings on the axle shaft is carried out using the
shim(s) (18) fitted between the end of the axle
shaft (20) and the tripod washer (10).
IMPORTANT:
In order to shim the tapered roller bearings under
the correct conditions, place the trumpets in a
vertical position so that all the parts press against
each other with their own weight.
Fig. 25

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Fit:
• The bearing cone (14);
• the planet carrier (15).
Fig. 26

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Fit the shim(s) (18) with a thickness greater

than the space between the end of the axle
shaft (20) and the mating face of the tripod
washer (10) on the planet carrier. This should
give a temporary clearance J.
3. Fit the tripod washer (10). Temporarily lock
the M20 screw (12) to 50 Nm.
Fig. 27

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Shimming
Procedure
Fig. 28
1. Tap the rim of the planet carrier with a bronze hammer while turning the trumpet assembly housing
by several turns.
2. Fit a dial gage on the trumpet assembly housing (5) with its feeler pin positioned near the center of
the planet carrier (15). Set the dial gage needle to zero.
3. Using two diametrically opposed levers approximately 400 mm in length, move the planet carrier
vertically. Measure clearance J. Repeat the step several times. Calculate the average of the clearance
J readings.
4. Reduce the shim (18) thickness according to value J (0.025 mm to 0.125 mm) to obtain a preload
P1 = 0.025 mm to 0.125 mm.
NOTE:
If possible, shim to the maximum tolerance.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

• Definitively fit the tripod washer (10).
Fig. 29
• IMPORTANT: Position the lock washer (9) on the head of the M20 screw (12) and in the slot of the
planet carrier (see chapter Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the planet carrier, page
6-51 ).
Tighten the M20 screw (12) to 485 Nm.
• Refit the trumpet housing assembly (see chapter Removing and refitting the trumpet housing
This section presents the tightening torques and information on the shimming value of the main
components of the GPA52 trumpet.
On tractors fitted with a GTA5050 transmission, the tightening torque (A) of the screw (12) is subject to a
special method, which is explained in the section on the disassembly/reassembly of the GPA52 trumpet
(see chapter Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the planet carrier, page 6-51 ).
This method must be strictly adhered to in order to ensure that this screw, which fixes the axle shaft to the
planet carrier, is tightened and locked correctly.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 30
(R) IMPORTANT:
This lock washer (R) prevents the screw (12)
from loosening after it has been tightened to
torque.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.2.5.2 Removing and refitting the trumpet housing assembly

Removal
Procedure
1. Drain the rear axle center housing.
NOTE:
To drain the rear axle fully, you must unscrew two plugs. One is located on the cover of the 4WD
clutch unit and the other on the center housing.
2. Immobilize the tractor. Apply the hand brake. Chock between the frame and the front axle (optional).
3. Take off the wheel concerned. Position an axle stand beneath the rear axle.
4. IMPORTANT:
Check that there is sufficient space between
the windscreen and the engine cover to
perform the operation without any problem.
If not, remove the hood and its fins if
necessary.
Visualize the separation of the trumpet
housing from the center housing, checking
that the trumpet housing and the cab will not
obstruct each other.
If this is not the case, proceed as follows:
• Unscrew the cab attachment screw on
the trumpet housing support.
• Raise the rear of the cab slightly to allow
the trumpet housing to move away from
the center housing.
• Chock the cab.
NOTE:
If the tractor is fitted with a suspended cab
(1) (2), consult the relevant chapter.
5. Unscrew the stabilizer support (2) and the
cab support (1).
6. If a draft sensor is fitted to the lower arm of
the trumpet housing (depending on version),
remove its guard and its electrical harness
from the trumpet housing.
Fig. 31

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 32
7. Support the trumpet housing using a suitable support secured to a trolley jack or using a hydraulic
table.
8. Unscrew the M16 screws (21).
9. IMPORTANT:
It is strongly recommended that you use guide studs to remove the trumpet housing so that the
brake disks do not bear (via the input sun gear (P)) the weight of the trumpet housing while it is being
removed.
Screw two makeshift guide studs (G) of approximately 150 mm in length into opposing holes on the
center housing.
10. Detach the trumpet housing from the center housing by tightening, if necessary, two locally made
extraction screws (VE) into the tapped holes of the trumpet housing.
NOTE:
Originally, these tapped holes were used to attach a component outside the trumpet housing.
NOTE:
When the trumpet housing detaches from the center housing, the input sun gear (P) can occupy two
positions depending on certain circumstances:
• being trapped by the brake disks
• being driven by the final drive of the trumpet housing

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
11. Remove:
• the input sun gear (P)
• the guide studs (G)
Refitting
Procedure
1. Clean the mating faces of the trumpet housing and center housing with solvent. Check that the
groove of the NBR seal on the center housing is free of dirt. Dry the components.
2. Attach a new NBR seal (J) to the service tool
4346869M1 (see chapter GPA50/Final drives
- Service tools, page 6-60 ).
3. IMPORTANT:
It is strongly recommended that the NBR
seal (J) is fitted using the service tool. Fitting
it without the tool will stretch the seal and
cause a loop to form in the final assembly
phase.
Position the tool fitted with the NBR seal (J)
on the center housing. Exert strong manual
pressure on the tool so that the seal lodges
correctly in the groove of the center housing.
Fig. 33
4. Remove the tool. Check that the NBR seal (J)
is correctly positioned in the groove of the
center housing.
5. Fit the Mecanindus locating pin (22) (if
removed) to the trumpet housing (5),
observing the dimension of 10 mm marked
at see Fig. 34 .
6. On the center housing, screw in two guide
studs (G) at the same positions as for
removing the trumpet housing.
7. If the input sun gear (P) of the trumpet
housing was removed, refit it by sliding it
gradually into the splines of each brake disk
until encountering firm resistance.
NOTE:
This resistance is the contact of the input
sun gear of the trumpet housing with that of
the differential. Fig. 34
If the input sun gear (P) was not removed,

manually check that it is engaged properly in
the splines of the five brake disks before
refitting the trumpet housing.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
8. Support the trumpet housing with the

equipment used when removing it, and slide
it on to the guide studs. Engage the teeth of
the input sun gear (P) of the trumpet housing
with the three planet gears (11) of the final
drive. If the latter does not engage, turn the
axle shaft and push hard horizontally on the
trumpet housing to couple it to the center
housing.
9. Tighten the M16 screws (21) to 320 Nm -
340 Nm.
Fig. 35
10. If a draft sensor is fitted to the linkage arm, reposition its electrical harness and its guard.
11. Refit the cab support and the stabilizer support.
12. If it was necessary to lift the cab, reposition it on the trumpet housing support(s). Screw in the cab
attachment screws. Refit the engine cover (if removed).
NOTE:
If the tractor is fitted with a suspended cab, consult the relevant chapter.
13. Refit any parts removed from around the trumpet housing. Refit the wheel. Torque tighten the nuts
to 400 Nm - 450 Nm.
14. Top up the center housing oil level.
15. Remove the shims between the frame and the front axle, if they were used.
16. Carry out a road test on the brake system.
17. Check the sealing of the trumpet housing.
6.2.5.3 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the planet carrier

General

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(1) Right-hand final drive

(2) Left-hand final drive
NOTE:
The input sun gear (P) of the left-hand trumpet
housing is different to that of the right trumpet
housing.
It has:
• two rows of splines, respectively splined to the
left-hand differential sun gear and the brake
disks
• a smooth area for accommodating the lip of the
seal
Fig. 36
Preliminary steps
Procedure
assembly, page 6-48 ). If possible, place it in a vertical position with the planet carrier facing upward.
2. Immobilize the axle shaft or the planet carrier.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Removal
Procedure
Remove:
• the lock washer (9)
• the M20 screw (12)
• the tripod washer (10)
• the shim(s) (18)
• the planet carrier (15) of the crown wheel
(C)
NOTE:
The lock washer (9) is fixed with Loctite 431.
NOTE:
The spare parts catalog does not allow for
the replacement of the crown wheel as a
separate part. If this part is faulty, replace the
trumpet housing/crown wheel assembly.
Fig. 37

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Disassembly
Procedure
2. Remove from the planet carrier (15):
• the pins (8), noting their positions
• the friction washer (17)
• the planet gears (11)
3. Recover and pair up the 15 needle rollers (13)
of each planet gear.
Fig. 38
Reassembly
Procedure
1. Fit each planet gear with a row of needle rollers previously smeared with miscible grease.
2. Install (see Fig. 38 ):
• the planet gears (11) in the planet carrier (15), making sure to position their facial indentations (E)
toward the face of the planet carrier (retainer ring side (6))
3. IMPORTANT:
If the axial clearance of one or more planet gear is less than 0,15 mm or greater than 0,60 mm, shim
it/them.
If necessary, shim the planet gears (11).
4. In relation to the holes of the pins of the planet carrier (15), center:

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

5. Engage the three planet gear pins (8) in their
holes.
NOTE:
If reusing the three planet gear pins, replace
them in the holes they were in before if
possible.
Align the flat section of each planet gear pin
(8) toward the center of the planet carrier
(15). Fit the retainer ring (6) using suitable
pliers.
gear.
Fig. 39
Refitting
Procedure
1. Refit the planet carrier (15). If necessary, shim the tapered roller bearings of the axle shaft (see
chapter Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the axle shaft, page 6-40 ).
2. Immobilize the axle shaft (20) or the planet carrier (15).
3. Refit the shim(s) (18) and the tripod washer (10).
4. Screw in and tighten the M20 screw (12) to 485 Nm.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
5. Slide the lock washer (9) on to the head of

the M20 screw (12). Check that its tab (B) is
correctly housed in a molded slot (E) of the
planet carrier (15). If not, repeat the step,
trying a second molded slot (E), and if the tab
is still not correctly housed, repeat again with
a third.
NOTE:
At each of the molded slots (E), it may be
necessary to turn the lock washer (9) to
obtain an angular displacement of 7.5°.
Depending on the result (whether it is
possible to fit the lock washer or not),
proceed to step see step 6, page 6-56 or
see step 8, page 6-56 .
NOTE:
A single lock washer is available from the
spare parts catalog.
6. Case 1: It is possible to fit the lock washer.
Mark the orientation of the lock washer in
relation to the planet carrier using two spots
of paint applied face-to-face.
7. Remove the lock washer (9) and smear the
surface facing the tripod washer (10) with
three spots of Loctite 431 or equivalent.
NOTE:
Using Loctite 431 prevents the lock washer
(9) from moving when the trumpet housing is
being refitted to the center housing.
When the trumpet housing is refitted, the
input sun gear (P) of the final drive holds the
lock washer in place.
8. Case 2: It is not possible to fit the lock
Fig. 40
washer. Gently retighten the M20 screw
(12), taking care not to exceed the maximum
tightening torque of 560 Nm. Restart the
step see step 5, page 6-56 . If necessary,
repeat step see step 8, page 6-56 several
times.
Final step
Procedure
Refit the trumpet housing assembly (see chapter Removing and refitting the trumpet housing
6.2.5.4 Replacing tapered roller bearings and seals

Disassembly
Procedure

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 41
2. Remove the planet carrier (15) (see chapter Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the
planet carrier, page 6-51 ).
3. Remove:
• the flanged axle shaft (20)
ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
• the bearing cone (3)
• the seals (23) (19) and discard them
5. Using a suitable puller or a makeshift tool, extract or drive out:
• the bearing cups (4) (7)
• the friction cage (24)
Reassembly
Procedure
1. Clean and check all components. Replace those that are defective.
2. Smear the external surface of the external seal (19) with a film of clean transmission oil.
3. IMPORTANT:
If a groove has been worn into the axle shaft at the location of the old lip of the old seal (19), offset
the new seal slightly so that its lip ensures that the axle shaft is completely sealed beyond the worn
groove.
Using a suitable fitting drift, fit the seal (19) to within approximately 6 mm of the shoulder of the cup
(7) in the trumpet housing, positioning its lip toward the bearing cone (14).
4. Using a suitable fitting drift, fit:
• the bearing cups (4) (7) against their respective shoulders
• the friction cage (24) according to the dimension indicated in see Fig. 41
5. Fit the new three-lipped seal (23) according to the dimension indicated in see Fig. 41 .
6. Using a locally made inertia tool, fit the bearing cone (3) against the shoulder of the axle shaft.
7. Lightly smear the bearing cone (3) and the lips of the seals (19) (23) with AGCO M1105 grease or
equivalent.
8. Protect the seal lip (19) by temporarily masking the splines on the axle shaft with a very thin and very
flexible protective film. Insert the prepared axle shaft into the trumpet housing fitted with the seal
(19) and the bearing cups (4) (7), positioning the three lips of the seal (23) toward the outside of the
trumpet housing.
9. Refit:
• the planet carrier (15); if necessary, shim the tapered roller bearings (see chapter Shimming the
tapered roller bearings of the axle shaft, page 6-40 )
• the trumpet housing assembly (see chapter Removing and refitting the trumpet housing
assembly, page 6-48 )

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
10. Temporarily replace the plug (B) with a

grease nipple. Partially fill the cavity (A) with
AGCO M1105 bearing grease or equivalent.
Remove the grease nipple and replace it with
the original plug (B).
Fig. 42
6.2.5.5 Replacing a stud on the flanged axle shaft
Procedure
1. Take off the wheel concerned.

2. Drive out the defective stud.
3. Clean the new stud and its housing on the flange.
4. According to the wear of the stud housing on the flange, lightly smear the ribbed part of the new
stud with Loctite 270 or equivalent. Fit the latter using a bronze drift and a large hammer.
6.2.6 Service tools
6.2.6.1 General

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.2.6.2 GPA50/Final drives - Service tools

Reference 4346869M1
Description Tool for fitting the final drive seal(s)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.3 GPA50/GPA54 trumpet housings

6.3.1 General
The GPA54 trumpet housings of tractors equipped
with a GTA5050 or GTA2550 transmission support
the right-hand and left-hand flanged axle shafts.
They contain the final drive units that transmit the
rotation from the differential assembly.
The shape of the final drive (planet carrier, planet
gears, planet gear pins and final drive ring gear) is
optimized compared to that of the GPA52
trumpets.
The planet carrier of the GPA54 trumpet housings
has planet gears with 23 teeth and a length of
64 mm.
Fig. 43
The two GPA54 trumpet housings are symmetrical
and can be inverted from right to left and vice-
versa.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Construction
The flanged axle shaft is supported by two tapered
roller bearings fitted opposite one another.
The external sealing of the trumpet housings is
ensured by a three-lipped seal and internal sealing
by a single-lip seal.
Two NBR seals fitted respectively on the trumpet
housing and the center housing ensure the
tightness of the final drive ring gear.
The planet carrier assembly of the final drive has
three planet gears. It is held in position by a tripod
washer and an M20 screw locked by a special
washer.
It is splined in rotation with the flanged axle shaft.
Shims placed at the end of the axle shaft allow the
tapered roller bearings to be preloaded.
The final drive ring gear is removable. It is screwed
to the trumpet housing and placed between it and
the center housing of the rear axle.
The brake disks are housed in the right-hand and
left-hand cavities of the center housing.
They are splined to the trumpet housing input sun
gears.
Fig. 44
Fig. 45

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Operation of the trumpet housing epicyclic final drive

The rotational speed of the axle shafts (A) is reduced by a classic epicyclic final drive (RF) in each trumpet
housing.
Its operation is ensured by a drive input and output.
• Input movement
It is generated by the gearbox (BV) and transmitted to the sun gear (P) of the trumpet (T) via the crown
wheel and pinion assembly of the rear axle.
• Output movement
It is transmitted to the shaft (A) and the wheel (R) via the planet carrier (PS) and the three planet gears
(S) of the classic final drive (RF).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 46
(1) Wheel stud (3) Bearing cone
(2) Threaded plug (4) Bearing cup

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(5) Trumpet housing assembly (19) Lip seal

(6) Circlip (20) Flanged axle shaft
(7) Bearing cup (21) M16 screws
(8) Planet gear pins (22) Mecanindus locating pins
(9) Lock washer (23) Final drive ring gear
(10) Tripod washer (24) NBR seal
(11) Planet gears (25) Three-lipped seal
(12) M20 screw (26) Friction cage
(13) Bearing needles (27) M8 screw
(14) Bearing cone (28) Spacer
(15) Planet carrier (A) Grease chamber
(17) Washer (thickness 1.5 mm) (P) Sun gear
(18) Shim(s)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.3.3.2 View of GPA54 trumpet housing
Fig. 47
(1) Wheel stud (5) Trumpet housing assembly
(2) Threaded plug (6) Circlip
(4) Bearing cup (8) Planet gear pins

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(9) Lock washer (21) M16 screws

(10) Tripod washer (22) Mecanindus locating pins
(11) Planet gears (23) Final drive crown wheel
(12) M20 screw (24) NBR seal
(13) Bearing needles (25) Three-lipped seal
(14) Bearing cone (26) Friction cage
(15) Planet carrier (27) M8 screw
(16) Shim(s) (28) Spacer
((17))Washer (thickness 1,5 mm) (A) Grease chamber
(19) Lip seal (P) Sun gear
(20) Flanged axle shaft

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.3.4.1 Shimming the planet gears

1. Remove the trumpet housing assembly (see chapter Removing the trumpet housing assembly, page
6-79 ).
2. Remove and disassemble the planet carrier (see chapter Removal, page 6-86 ).
General
The planet gears (11) are shimmed using the
shim(s) (16), which are fitted between the planet
gears and the planet carrier (15) (retainer ring side
(6)).
Fig. 48

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Temporarily fit:
• the planet gears (11) fitted with their
needle rollers in the planet carrier, always
positioning the imprint (E) towards the
retainer ring (6);
• the washer (17) (thickness 1.5 mm)
• a shim (16) of a thickness of 1.5 mm to
limit the surplus clearance before
shimming.
2. Engage the three pins (8) in the planet gears.
3. Using the set of shims, gage the space
between the temporary shim (16) and the
planet gears (11).
Depending on the measurement, determine
definitive shim thickness(es) in order to
obtain a clearance for each planet gear of:
J = 0.15 mm to 0.60 mm
NOTE: The shim(s) (16) with a thickness of
1.5 mm to 2.3 mm are available from the
spare parts catalog.
NOTE: If possible, shim to the minimum
tolerance.
Fig. 49

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. Take out the pins (8).

5. IMPORTANT: Always fit the thickest shim
against the row of needle rollers.
Fit the previously selected shim(s) (16) (see
Fig. 50 ).
Fig. 50

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6. Drive in the pins by positioning their flat

section (M) towards the center of the planet
carrier (15). Fit the retainer ring (6) using
appropriate pliers.
gear.
Fig. 51

1. Refit the planet carrier (see chapter Reassembly, page 6-87 ).
2. Refit the trumpet housing assembly (see chapter Removing the trumpet housing assembly, page
6-79 ).
6.3.4.2 Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the axle shaft

6-79 ).
2. Remove the planet carrier (see chapter Removal, page 6-86 ).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
General
If the following parts are to be replaced, the
shimming of the tapered roller bearings on the axle
shaft must be checked or carried out:
• flanged axle shaft (20)
• tapered roller bearings (3) (4) and (7) (14)
• trumpet assembly housing
• planet carrier (15).
Fig. 52
NOTE: The preload shimming of the tapered roller
bearings on the axle shaft is carried out using the
shim(s) (18) fitted between the end of the axle
shaft (20) and the tripod washer (10).
IMPORTANT: In order to shim the tapered roller
bearings under the correct conditions, place the
trumpets in a vertical position so that all the parts
press against each other with their own weight.
Fig. 53

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Fit:
• the planet carrier (15).
Fig. 54

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Fit the shim(s) (18) with a thickness greater

than the space between the end of the axle
shaft (20) and the mating face of the tripod
washer (10) on the planet carrier. This should
give a temporary clearance J.
3. Fit the tripod washer (10). Temporarily lock
the M20 screw (12) to 50 Nm.
Fig. 55

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Shimming
Procedure
Fig. 56
1. Tap the rim of the planet carrier with a bronze hammer while turning the trumpet assembly housing
by several turns.
2. Fit a dial gage on the trumpet assembly housing (5) with its feeler pin positioned near the center of
the planet carrier (15). Set the dial gage needle to zero.
3. Using two diametrically opposed levers approximately 400 mm in length, move the planet carrier
vertically. Measure clearance J. Repeat the step several times. Calculate the average of the clearance
J readings.
4. Reduce the shim (18) thickness according to value J (0.02 mm to 0.12 mm) to obtain a preload
P1 = 0.02 mm to 0.12 mm.
NOTE: If possible, shim to the maximum tolerance.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

• Definitively fit the tripod washer (10).
Fig. 57
• IMPORTANT: Position the lock washer (9) on the head of the M20 screw (12) and in the slot of the
planet carrier (see chapter Reassembly, page 6-87 ).
Tighten the M20 screw (12) to 485 Nm.
• Refit the trumpet housing assembly (see chapter Removing the trumpet housing assembly, page
6-79 ).
This section presents the tightening torques and information on the shimming value of the main
components of the GPA54 trumpet housing
On tractors fitted with a GTA5050 transmission, the tightening torque (A) of the screw (12) is subject to a
special method, which is explained in the section on the disassembly/reassembly of the GPA54 trumpet
housing (see chapter Removal, page 6-86 ).
This method must be strictly adhered to in order to ensure that this screw, which fixes the axle shaft to the
planet carrier, is tightened and locked correctly.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 58
(B) NBR seal with spurs (P)
(R) IMPORTANT: This lock washer (R) prevents
the screw (12) from loosening after it has
been tightened to torque.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.3.5.2 Removing the trumpet housing assembly
Procedure
1. Drain the rear axle center housing.
NOTE: To drain the rear axle fully, you must unscrew two plugs. One is located on the cover of the
4WD clutch unit and the other on the center housing.
2. Immobilize the tractor. Apply the hand brake. Chock between the frame and the front axle (optional).
3. Take off the wheel concerned. Position an axle stand beneath the rear axle.
4. IMPORTANT: Check that there is sufficient
space between the windscreen and the
engine cover to perform the operation
without any problem. If not, remove the
hood and its fins if necessary.
Visualize the separation of the trumpet
housing from the center housing, checking
that the trumpet housing and the cab will not
obstruct each other.
If this is not the case, proceed as follows:
• Unscrew the cab attachment screw on
the trumpet housing support.
• Raise the rear of the cab slightly to allow
the trumpet housing to move away from
the center housing.
• Chock the cab.
NOTE: If the tractor is fitted with a
suspended cab (1) (2), consult the relevant
chapter.
5. Remove the stabilizer support (2) and the cab
support (1).
6. If a draft sensor is fitted to the lower arm of
the trumpet housing (depending on version),
remove its guard and its electrical harness
from the trumpet housing.
Fig. 59

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 60
7. Support the trumpet housing using a suitable support secured to a trolley jack or using a hydraulic
table.
8. Unscrew the M16 screws (21).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
9. IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended that you use guide studs to remove the trumpet housing
so that the brake disks do not bear (via the input sun gear (P)) the weight of the trumpet housing
while it is being removed.
Screw two makeshift guide studs (G) of approximately 150 mm in length into opposing holes on the
center housing.
10. Split the trumpet housing from the center housing.
NOTE: When the trumpet housing detaches from the center housing, the input sun gear (P) can
occupy two positions depending on certain circumstances:
• being trapped by the brake disks
• being driven by the final drive of the trumpet housing
11. Remove:
• the input sun gear (P)
• the guide studs (G)
Refitting the trumpet housing assembly
Procedure
1. Clean the mating faces of the final drive ring gear and the center housing with solvent. Check that the
groove of the NBR seal on the center housing is free of dirt. Dry the components.
2. Attach a new NBR seal (J) to the service tool
3. IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended
that the NBR seal (J) is fitted using the
service tool. Fitting it without the tool will
stretch the seal and cause a loop to form in
the final assembly phase.
Position the tool fitted with the NBR seal (J)
on the center housing. Exert strong manual
pressure on the tool so that the seal lodges
correctly in the groove of the center housing.
4. Remove the tool. Check that the NBR seal (J) Fig. 61
is correctly positioned in the groove of the
center housing.
5. Fit the Mecanindus locating pin (22) (if
removed) to the final drive ring gear (23),
observing the dimension 10 mm marked at
see Fig. 62 .
6. On the center housing, screw in two guide
studs (G) at the same positions as for
removing the trumpet housing.
7. If the input sun gear (P) of the trumpet
housing was removed, refit it by sliding it
gradually into the splines of each brake disk
until encountering firm resistance.
NOTE: This resistance is the contact of the
input sun gear of the trumpet housing with Fig. 62
that of the differential.
If the input sun gear (P) was not removed,
manually check that it is engaged properly in
the splines of the five brake disks before
refitting the trumpet housing.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
8. Support the trumpet housing with the

equipment used when removing it, and slide
it on to the guide studs. Engage the teeth of
the input sun gear (P) of the trumpet housing
with the three planet gears (11) of the final
drive. If the latter does not engage, turn the
axle shaft and push hard horizontally on the
trumpet housing to couple it to the center
housing.
9. Tighten the M16 screws (21) to 320 Nm -
340 Nm.
Fig. 63
10. If a draft sensor is fitted to the linkage arm, reposition its electrical harness and its guard.
11. Refit the cab support and the stabilizer support.
12. If it was necessary to lift the cab, reposition it on the trumpet housing support(s). Screw in the cab
attachment screws. Refit the engine cover (if removed).
NOTE: If the tractor is fitted with a suspended cab, consult the relevant chapter.
13. Refit any parts removed from around the trumpet housing. Refit the wheel. Torque tighten the nuts
to 400 Nm - 450 Nm.
14. Top up the center housing oil level. Check it using the sight glass located to the left of the rear PTO
unit.
15. Remove the shims between the frame and the front axle, if they were used.
16. Carry out a road test on the brake system.
17. Check the sealing of the trumpet housing.
6.3.5.3 Removing the final drive ring gear
Procedure
6-79 ). If possible, place it in a vertical position with the planet carrier facing upwards.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Unscrew the screws (27) of the final drive

ring gear (23).
3. Remove:
• the planet carrier (15)
• the NBR seal (24)
• the final drive ring gear (23)
Fig. 64

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Refitting the final drive crown wheel
Procedure
1. Clean the mating surfaces of the trumpet
housing and of the final drive crown wheel
(23) with solvent. Check that the groove of
the NBR seal on the trumpet housing is free
of dirt. Dry the components.
2. IMPORTANT: The NBR seal (24) has spurs
(P).
Attach a new NBR seal (24) to the tool
3. IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended
that the NBR seal (24) is fitted using the
service tool. Fitting it without the tool will
stretch the seal and cause a loop to form in
the final assembly phase.
Position the tool fitted with the NBR seal (24)
on the housing (5) of the trumpet housing
assembly. Exert strong manual pressure on
the tool while turning it so that the seal
lodges correctly in the groove of the trumpet
housing assembly (5).
4. Remove the service tool. Check that the
NBR seal (24) is correctly positioned in its
groove.
5. Refit:
• the final drive crown wheel (23),
positioning the countersunk attachment
holes at the top
• the planet carrier (15) (see
chapter Refitting, page 6-88 ).
6. Screw in and tighten the M8 screws (27) to
25 Nm to 35 Nm.
7. Refit the trumpet housing assembly (see
Fig. 65
chapter Removing the trumpet housing
6.3.5.4 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the planet carrier

General

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

NOTE:
The input sun gear (P) of the left-hand trumpet
housing is different to that of the right trumpet
housing.
It has:
disks
seal
Fig. 66
Preliminary steps
General
NOTE: The input sun gear (P) of the left-hand
trumpet housing is different to that of the right
trumpet housing.
It has:
disks
seal
Fig. 67

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

6-79 ). If possible, place it in a vertical position with the planet carrier facing upwards.
2. Immobilize the axle shaft or the planet carrier (15).
Removal
Procedure
Remove:
• the lock washer (9)
• the M20 screw (12)
• the tripod washer (10)
• the planet carrier (15) of the final drive
ring gear (23)
• the final drive ring gear (23) (if necessary)
(see chapter Removing the final drive ring
gear, page 6-82 )
NOTE:
The lock washer (9) is fixed with Loctite 431.
Fig. 68

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Disassembly
Procedure
2. Remove from the planet carrier (15):
• the pins (8), noting their positions
3. Recover and pair up the 42 needle rollers (13)
of each planet gear.
NOTE: The planet gears have a double row
of needle rollers separated by a spacer (28).
Fig. 69
Reassembly
Procedure
1. Fit each planet gear with a row of needle rollers smeared in advance with miscible grease, separating
each row with the spacer (28).
2. Install (see Fig. 69 ):
• the planet gears (11) in the planet carrier (15), making sure to position their facial indentations (E)
towards the face of the planet carrier (retainer ring side (6))
3. IMPORTANT: If the axial clearance of one or more planet gears is less than 0.15 mm or greater than
0.60 mm, perform shimming.
If necessary, shim the planet gears (11) (see chapter Shimming the planet gears, page 6-69 ).
4. In relation to the holes of the pins of the planet carrier (15), center:

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

5. Engage the three planet gear pins (8) in their
holes.
NOTE: If reusing the three planet gear pins,
replace them in the holes they were in
before if possible.
Align the flat section of each planet gear pin
(8) toward the center of the planet carrier
(15). Fit the retainer ring (6) using appropriate
pliers.
gear.
Fig. 70
Refitting
Procedure
1. Refit:
• the final drive ring gear (23) (if removed) (see chapter Removing the final drive ring gear, page
6-82 )
• the planet carrier (15). If necessary, shim the tapered roller bearings of the axle shaft (see
chapter Preparing for shimming, page 6-72 )
2. Immobilize the axle shaft (20) or the planet carrier (15).
3. Refit the shim(s) (18) and the tripod washer (10).
4. Screw in and tighten the M20 screw (12) to 485 Nm.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
5. Slide the lock washer (9) onto the head of

the M20 screw (12). Check that its tab (B) is
correctly housed in a molded slot (E) on the
planet carrier (15). If this is not the case,
repeat the step trying a second molded slot
(E), and the third if the tab is still not correctly
housed.
NOTE: At each of the molded slots (E), it
may be necessary to turn the lock washer (9)
to obtain an angular displacement of 7.5°.
Depending on the result (whether it is
possible to fit the lock washer or not),
proceed to step see step 6, page 6-89 or
see step 8, page 6-89 .
NOTE: A single lock washer is available from
the spare parts catalog.
6. Case 1: It is possible to fit the lock washer.
Mark the orientation of the lock washer in
relation to the planet carrier using two spots
of paint applied face-to-face.
7. Remove the lock washer (9) and smear the
surface facing the tripod washer (10) with
three spots of Loctite 431 or equivalent.
NOTE: Using Loctite 431 prevents the lock
washer (9) from moving when the trumpet
housing is being refitted to the center
housing.
When the trumpet housing is refitted, the
input sun gear (P) of the final drive holds the
lock washer in place.
8. Case 2: It is not possible to fit the lock
washer. Gently retighten the M20 screw
(12), taking care not to exceed the maximum
Fig. 71
torque of 560 Nm. Restart the step
see step 5, page 6-89 . If necessary, repeat
step see step 8, page 6-89 several times.
Final step
Procedure
Refit the trumpet housing assembly (see chapter Removing the trumpet housing assembly, page
6-79 ).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.3.5.5 Disassembly
Procedure
Fig. 72
1. Remove:

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
• the trumpet housing assembly (see chapter Removing the trumpet housing assembly, page 6-79 )
• the planet carrier (15) (see chapter Removal, page 6-86 ).
Fig. 72
2. Remove:
• the flanged axle shaft (20)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

• the seals (25) (19) and discard them
4. Using a suitable puller or a makeshift tool, extract or drive out:
• the bearing cups (4) (7)
• the friction cage (26)
Reassembly (see Fig. 72 )
Procedure
2. Smear the external surface of the external seal (19) with a film of clean transmission oil.
3. IMPORTANT: If a groove has been worn into the axle shaft at the location of the old lip of the old
seal (19), offset the new seal slightly so that its lip ensures that the axle shaft is completely sealed
beyond the worn groove.
Using a suitable fitting drift, fit the seal (19) to approximately 5 mm of the shoulder of the bearing cup
(7) in the trumpet housing, positioning its lip toward the bearing cone (14).
4. Using a suitable fitting drift, fit:
• the bearing cups (4) (7) against their respective shoulders
• the friction cage (26) according to the dimension indicated in see Fig. 72
5. Fit the new three-lipped seal (25) according to the dimension indicated in see Fig. 72 .
6. Using a locally made inertia tool, fit the bearing cone (3) against the shoulder of the axle shaft.
7. Lightly smear the bearing cone (3) and the lips of the seals (19) (25) with AGCO M1105 grease or
equivalent.
8. Protect the seal lip (19) by temporarily masking the splines on the axle shaft with a very thin and very
flexible protective film. Insert the prepared axle shaft into the trumpet housing fitted with the seal
(19) and the bearing cups (4) (7), positioning the three lips of the seal (25) towards the outside of the
trumpet housing.
9. Refit:
• the planet carrier (15); if necessary, shim the tapered roller bearings (see chapter Shimming, page
6-76 )
• the trumpet housing assembly (see chapter Removing the trumpet housing assembly, page 6-79 )

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
10. Temporarily replace the plug (B) with a

grease nipple. Partially fill the cavity (A) with
AGCO M1105 bearing grease or equivalent.
Remove the grease nipple and replace it with
the original plug (B).
Fig. 73
6.3.5.6 Replacing a stud on the flanged axle shaft
Procedure
1. Take off the wheel concerned.

2. Drive out the defective stud.
3. Clean the new stud and its housing on the flange.
4. According to the wear of the stud housing on the flange, lightly smear the ribbed part of the new
stud with Loctite 270 or equivalent. Fit the latter using a bronze drift and a large hammer.
6.3.6 Service tools
6.3.6.1 General

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.3.6.2 GPA50/Final drives - Service tools

Reference 4346869M1

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.4 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 9x40 and 10x42

6.4.1 General
The crown wheel and pinion is helical.
It is of conventional type: the pinion and ring gear have a common shaft.
The rear differential unit/ring gear assembly is supported:
• on the right-hand side by a large diameter tapered roller bearing housed in a removable support
mounted on the right-hand side of the center housing. This support also incorporates the hydro-
mechanically controlled rear differential lock.
• on the left-hand side by a tapered roller bearing housed in the wall of the center housing.
A lubrication sleeve fitted with a lip seal and sealing ring lubricate the left-hand tapered roller bearing. This
is also used to lubricate the planet gears and sun gears housed in the sealed rear differential unit.
The crown wheel and pinion has a different number of teeth as shown in the following table:
GPA5050 rear axle fitted with trumpet housings Number of pinion/ring gear teeth
GPA52 9/40 or 10/42
GPA54 10/42
The ring gear is located inside the center housing and on the right-hand side of the pinion (viewed from the
driving position). The ring gear and the fixed dog clutch for the rear differential unit form a block. This block
also acts as a cover plate for the rear differential unit.
The backlash between the pinion and the ring gear is adjusted by shims. These are located between the
large diameter tapered roller bearing cup of the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly and the right-hand
support of the center housing (viewed from the driving position).
The rear differential unit/ring gear assembly tapered roller bearing preload is also adjusted by shims. These
are located between the tapered roller bearing cup and the lubrication sleeve mounted on the left-hand
side of the center housing (viewed from the driving position).
Rear differential unit

The GPA50 rear axle is fitted with a rear differential comprising two sun gears and four planet gears.
Sun gears and planet gears are located in an enclosed unit lubricated by the lubrication system.
Hydro-mechanical differential lock

The GPA50 rear axle is fitted with a mechanical differential lock. This is located in the right-hand support of
the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly. It comprises a fixed dog clutch forming a unit with the ring
gear and mobile dog clutch with a return spring.
The rear differential lock is electrohydraulically controlled.
Lubrication
The pinion and left-hand taper roller bearing of the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly are lubricated by
an internal oil line from the right-hand hydraulic cover plate.
The large diameter right-hand tapered roller bearing of the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly is
lubricated by oil splash lubrication.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
The lubrication pipe to the pinion has a hole (O)

with a diameter of approximately 1.5 mm.
A jet of oil is sprayed onto the gear mesh section
of the tapered teeth of the pinion and ring gear.
This concept provides continuous lubrication of the
above-mentioned teeth, whatever the ground
profile (slopes or uneven ground).
Fig. 74

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Operation of the hydro-mechanical differential lock
Fig. 75

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
The rear differential lock is supplied by the 21 bar low-pressure hydraulic system of the rear axle, via an
ON/OFF solenoid valve.
When the solenoid valve is activated, oil travels towards the right-hand support (17) of the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly (E) and supplies the chamber (C) of the piston (19).
The piston moves to the left (as viewed from the operator's seat) and drives the mobile dog clutch (21) to
engage it with the fixed dog clutch (CF) that is attached to the rear differential unit/crown wheel.
When the solenoid valve is no longer activated, a spring (22) disengages the mobile dog clutch from the
fixed dog clutch: This is the disengagement phase. The oil in the chamber (C) is then directed toward the
return via the solenoid valve.
Explanation of the operation of the rear differential

Tractor moving without the steering operated
Fig. 76
The movement coming from the gearbox drives the crown wheel and pinion and the rear differential unit
where the planet gear/sun gear assembly is locked in rotation (mechanical lock).
When the steering is not operated, the wheels follow the same course. Therefore, they turn at the same
speed.
Tractor moving with the steering operated

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 77
The movement coming from the gearbox drives the crown wheel and pinion and the rear differential unit.
The rear differential unit in turn drives the planet gear/sun gear assembly at differential speeds, thus giving
each of the wheels a different course.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.4.3.1 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - Cross-section view
Fig. 78
(1) Pinion (2) Nut
ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(3) Spacer (tractors without super creeper) (23) M12x40 screw

(4) Bearing cup (24) Stop pin
(5) 2-wheel drive ring or 4-wheel drive driving (25) Shim(s)
gear (depending on option) (26) Bearing cone
(6) Shim(s) (27) Bearing cone
(7) Bearing cup (28) Seal ring (hook type)
(8) Ring gear (29) Left-hand lubrication sleeve
(9) Bearing cone (30) Lip seal
(10) Shim(s) (31) Rear differential unit
(11) Bearing cone (32) Sun gear
(12) Shim(s) (33) Planet gear
(13) Bearing cup (34) Mecanindus pin
(14) Bearing cup (35) Planet gear pin
(15) Circlip (36) M12x30 screw
(16) "O" ring (37) Spherical washer
((17))Right-hand differential support and rivet (38) Friction washer
(18) "O" ring (39) Planet gear pin
(19) Piston ((41))Dowel
(21) Mobile dog clutch (CC) Center housing
(22) Spring

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.4.3.2 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - Blown-up view
Fig. 79
(1) Pinion (4) Bearing cup
(2) Nut (5) 2-wheel drive ring or 4-wheel drive driving
(3) Spacer (tractors without super creeper) gear (depending on option)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(6) Shim(s) (25) Shim(s)

(7) Bearing cup (26) Bearing cone
(8) Ring gear (27) Bearing cone
(9) Bearing cone (28) Seal ring (hook type)
(10) Shim(s) (29) Left-hand lubrication sleeve
(13) Bearing cup (32) Sun gear
(14) Bearing cup (33) Planet gear
(15) Circlip (34) Mecanindus pin
(17) Right-hand differential support and rivet (36) M12x30 screw
(19) Piston (38) Friction washer
(20) Friction washer (39) Planet gear pin
(21) Mobile dog clutch (41) Dowel
(23) M12x40 screw (CC) Center housing
(24) Stop pin

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.4.3.3 Rear differential mechanism and its lock - Cross-section view
Fig. 80
(31) Rear differential unit (34) Mecanindus pin
(32) Sun gear (35) Planet gear pin
(33) Planet gear (36) M12x30 screw

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(37) Spherical washer (39) Planet gear pin

(38) Friction washer ((41))Dowel
6.4.4.1 Adjusting the position of the pinion in the center housing (taper distance)
Introduction
The adjustment of the pinion in the center housing must be checked after replacement of one or more of
the following parts:
• the pinion
• the head bearing with tapered roller bearings (cone and cup).
IMPORTANT: Replacement of the pinion always requires replacement of the crown wheel.
IMPORTANT: The position of the pinion (taper distance) in the center housing must be adjusted before
shimming the pinion tapered roller bearings.
Description of the adjustment

The adjustment consists of positioning the pinion
in the center housing relative to the shaft of the
crown wheel to ensure that the pinion is correctly
engaged with the crown wheel.
This adjustment is obtained by a thickness of
shims (E) inserted between the bearing cup (7) and
the center housing.
The thickness E of shim(s) (6) required to position
the pinion is calculated according to the formula
below:
E = Z - Y2 - deltaY2 - Y1
• E = thickness of shim(s) to be fitted
• Z = theoretical nominal dimension of the center
housing 193 mm
• Y2 = theoretical nominal dimension of the
crown wheel and pinion 163 mm
• deltaY2 = variation of the theoretical nominal
dimension of the crown wheel and pinion
engraved on the top of the pinion by the
supplier
NOTE: The tooth size tolerance engraved on
the pinion by the supplier may be +/- 0,3 mm.
• Y1 = dimension to measure from the tapered
roller bearing assembly (cone (9) and bearing
cup (7))
Fig. 81

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Measurement of dimension Y1 for bearings (7) and (9)

1. Place the base of the bearing assembly (7)
(9) on a hard, perfectly flat cast-iron surface
(for example: a workshop bench plate).
2. It is important that this measurement is
taken with the help of a second operator.
One person applies a vertical, even and firm
manual pressure (C) on the bearing cup (7)
while turning it several times from left to
right on the bearing cone (9). Without
releasing the firm load (C) on the bearing cup
(7), the second operator measures the
dimension Y1 for the bearing assembly at
three points equidistant from the cup (7)
using a depth gage.
3. Take the average of the three readings. This
average should be between 29,25 mm and
29,45 mm.
Fig. 82
4. Calculate the thickness of the shim(s) (6) to
insert between the bearing cup (7) and the
center housing in order to correctly position
the pinion in the center housing relative to
the shaft of the crown wheel.
Example
• Z = 193 mm
• Y2 = 163 mm
• deltaY2 = 0 mm
• Y1 = 29,33 mm Fig. 83
E = 193 - 163 - 0 - 29.30

E = 0,67 mm

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
NOTE: The difference between the

theoretical value and the thickness of shim(s)
E should not exceed 0,03 mm.
5. Calculate the shims to use to obtain the
correct pinion position. Theoretical value: E =
0,67 mm Thickness of selected shims E: E =
0.30 + 0.35 = 0,65 mm
6.4.4.2 Shimming the pinion tapered roller bearings
Introduction
Shimming the pinion tapered roller bearings with preload in the center housing must be checked after
replacing one or more of the following parts:
• the pinion
IMPORTANT: Shimming the tapered roller bearings with preload in the center housing must be carried out
after adjusting the position of the pinion (taper distance).
This shimming consists of loading the tapered roller bearings by preloading, by fitting the cones in the
bearing cups and by manually pushing and pulling the pinion.

This section describes shimming of the pinion tapered roller bearings of a GPA50 rear axle with or without
the super creeper option.
For each of the fittings, the shimming principle is the same. Only the profile and number of parts differ
depending on whether or not the option is fitted.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Immobilize the pinion (1) using service tool
4346859M2.
Fig. 84

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Add a thickness of shims (10) to obtain a

temporary clearance of approximately 0,15
mm to 0,20 mm in preparation for shimming
the pinion tapered roller bearings with
preload.
Slide the following onto the pinion:
• the thickness of shims (10), calculated
previously
• service tool 4373043M1
3. Screw a new test fit nut (2) onto the pinion
(with no Loctite on the thread).
Fig. 85

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the torque wrench

is properly positioned in order to obtain the
correct tightening torque for the nut.
Immobilize the nut (2) using wrench
4346857M1.
5. Using the socket 4346858M1, turn the pinion
anti-clockwise until a tightening torque of
200 Nm - 250 Nm is obtained.
Fig. 86
6. Free the pinion by removing service tool
4346859M2 fitted in step see step 1, page
6-108 .
7. Slide service tool 4346861M1 onto the
splined end of the pinion (1) in order to
manually push and pull the pinion. Tighten
the 3 screws (V).
Fig. 87

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Shimming
Shimming the tapered roller bearings (11) (4) and
(9) (7) is carried out in two phases and with the
center housing in the vertical position.
Fig. 88
Phase 1
This phase consists of using a dial gage and
following the conventional method by applying a
firm axial push and pull force on the pinion (1) to
measure a clearance for the P1 shimming of the
pinion tapered roller bearings with preload.
Fig. 89

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Phase 2
This phase should fine-tune the P1 shimming by
measuring and adjusting the rotational torque of
the pinion tapered roller bearings (if necessary)
using a dial-type torque wrench.
Fig. 90

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Phase 1
Procedure
housing. Position its tip on the service tool
4373043M1.
2. Push the handle of tool 4346861M1 firmly
while turning it alternately from right to left
3. Repeat the previous step by pulling firmly to
correctly position the tapered roller bearing
cone (9) in the cup (7).
4. Depending on the clearance reading on the
(10) to obtain a preload: P1 = 0,01 mm to
0,07 mm
maximum tolerance.
Example
• P1 = preload = 0,01 mm
• E1 = thickness of shim(s) selected to
obtain a clearance = 1,35 mm
• J = clearance measured using the dial
gage = 0,23 mm
• E = thickness of final shim(s)
E = E1 - J - P1
E = 1.35 - 0.23 - 0.01
E = 1.11
Thickness of final shim(s) according to the
available shims (use a maximum of 3 shims):
E = 0.55 + 0.55 = 1,10 mm. This gives a
preload of 0,02 mm
Fig. 91

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

4346859M2.
Fig. 92
6. Loosen the nut (2) using service tools

4346857M1 and 4346858M1 used
previously.
Remove:
• the spacer (3)
• the bearing cone (11).
Slide the shim(s) (10) selected at step
see step 4, page 6-113 between the driving
gear (PM) and the bearing cone (11).
7. Refit the spacer (3).
8. Torque tighten the nut (2) to 200 Nm - 250
Nm using service tools 4346857M1 and
4346858M1 used previously. Fig. 93
9. Free the pinion by removing the service tool
6-114 .

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Phase 2
Procedure
1. IMPORTANT: Fine-tuning the adjustment
consists of adding or removing one or more
shims to obtain the required rotational
torque. If possible, fine tune the shimming to
the maximum tolerance.
Using a dial-type torque wrench, socket
4346858M1 and two locally made drives (R),
gently and smoothly turn the pinion several
turns without stopping and without changing
speed.
2. Read the rotational torque on the dial-type
torque wrench. This should be between 0.50
Nm and 3 Nm.
Fig. 94

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Preparing the nut (2)
Procedure
1. After having carried out the adjustments
(shimming phases 1 and 2), unscrew the
new test fit nut (2) fitted previously.
2. Degrease the threads of the nut (F) and the
pinion.
3. Dry off all threads using a jet of compressed
air.
4. Lightly smear the first threads of the new nut
with Loctite 270 or equivalent and screw the
nut onto the pinion.
Fig. 95

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

Immobilize the nut using wrench
4346857M1.
6. Using socket 4346858M1, turn the pinion
counterclockwise until a tightening torque of
Fig. 96
6.4.4.3 Shimming the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly tapered roller bearings
General
Shimming the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly tapered roller bearings with preload must be
checked after replacing one or more of the following parts:
• left-hand lubrication sleeve
• crown wheel and pinion
• tapered roller bearings
• rear differential unit
• rear differential right-hand support.
This shimming consists of loading the tapered roller bearings by a load applied using service tool
4346860M1 after fitting carried out by manual rotation of the cones in the bearing cups.

Both faces of the left-hand lubrication sleeve (29) are reground. This left-hand sleeve is therefore included
in the dimensioning procedure for shimming the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. The following parts are not included in the
shimming procedure:
• the pinion
• the original fit shim(s) (12)
• the hook-type sealing ring (28)
Fig. 97
2. Refit the left-hand lubrication sleeve (29) in

the left-hand bore of the center housing.
NOTE: This left-hand lubrication sleeve (29)
is grease fitted and shouldered in the bore of
the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly.
It can only be fitted from inside the center
housing.
Fig. 98

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Refit the bearing cup (13) in the bore of the

rear differential unit/ring gear assembly.
Fig. 99
4. With the help of a second operator, fit the

rear differential unit/ring gear assembly in the
center housing and guide it into the left-hand
lubrication sleeve (29).
Fig. 100
Shimming
The preload shimming of the tapered roller bearings (13) (27) and (14) (26) of the rear differential unit/crown
wheel assembly will be carried out in the center housing lying on the left-hand side.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Fit service tool 4346860M1 onto the tapered
roller bearing assembly (cone (26) and cup
(14)).
2. Torque tighten the six screws (23) by
applying cross tightening.
3. Torque tighten the center screw (VC) of
service tool 4346860M1 to 15 Nm.
NOTE:
Turn the crown wheel of the crown wheel
and pinion a few turns to correctly fit the
cones in the bearing cups.
After doing this, check the tightening torque
of the service tool center screw (VC) again.
If necessary, retighten it to a torque of 15
Nm.
Fig. 101

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. Using a suitable depth gage and measuring

rule (R), read off the distance (E).
Fig. 102
5. On the center housing (CC), calculate the

dimension (C) between the bearing cup (14)
and the mating face (F) of the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly right-hand
support according to the formula below: C =
(124 + E) - (69 + 16) C = (124 + E) - 85
124 Dimension of the finger and plate

assembly of service tool
4346860M1
(69) Dimension of the calibrated pins of

service tool 4346860M1
(16) Dimension of the plate of service

tool 4346860M1
E Distance to measure
NOTE: When calculating (E), do not
forget to subtract the thickness of
the measuring rule (R) (15 mm).
6. Remove service tool 4346860M1 fitted at

Fig. 103

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
7. On the rear differential unit/crown wheel

assembly support (17), measure the
dimension C1, by the difference between (a)
minus (b) using a suitable depth gage and
taken at three equidistant points. Calculate
the average of the three readings (this
average will be referred to as C1).
Fig. 104

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
8. Calculate the gap (I) between the mating

face of the bearing cup (14) and the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly right-
hand support (17) according to the formula
below: C - C1
Fig. 105
9. To this gap (I), add a shim thickness (E) of

between 0.05 mm and 0.15 mm to obtain a
preload P2 for the rear differential unit/crown
wheel assembly so that: P2 = 0.05 mm to
0.15 mm
NOTE: (I) plus (E) will be used later to adjust
the backlash between the crown wheel and
the pinion.
(I) plus (E) must not exceed 0.04 mm.
10. Check and adjust the backlash between the
crown wheel and the pinion (see
chapter Adjusting and checking the backlash
between the ring gear and the pinion, page
6-124 ).
Fig. 106

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Preliminary steps
1. Remove the rear differential unit/ring gear
assembly from the center housing.
2. Permanently refit the previously adjusted
pinion (position and shimming of the tapered
roller bearings) into the center housing (see
chapter Adjusting the position of the pinion in
the center housing (taper distance), page
6-105 and see chapter Shimming the pinion
tapered roller bearings, page 6-107 ).
Fig. 107
Adjusting the backlash between the crown wheel and the pinion
The backlash between the crown wheel and pinion is made in the center housing lying on the left-hand
side.
The method for adjusting the backlash between
the crown wheel and pinion consists of fitting (I)
then (E) selected at step see Adjusting the
backlash between the crown wheel and the
pinion step 9, page 6-123 between the bearing cup
(13) and the left-hand lubrication sleeve (29).
Temporarily fitting all the shims on the left-hand
side of the rear differential unit/crown wheel
assembly (viewed from the driving position) helps
to separate the tapered teeth of the crown wheel
from the teeth of the pinion as much as possible.
For the adjustment, simply offset the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly from the Fig. 108
top to the bottom or vice versa, by spreading (I)
plus (E) (without changing the overall thickness)
until a backlash of between 0.15 mm and 0.45 mm
is obtained.
This spread must be done alternately and evenly at
each end (right-hand and left-hand sides) of the
rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly.
This is done so as not to modify the tapered roller
bearing preload adjustment of this assembly (see
chapter Shimming the rear differential unit/ring
gear assembly tapered roller bearings, page
6-117 ).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Checking the backlash between the crown wheel and the pinion
The tip of the dial gage is placed at mid-height and
at the end of the tooth over three equidistant
points of the crown wheel to obtain a backlash
(crown wheel/pinion) of between 0.15 mm and
0.45 mm.
NOTE: If possible, keep to the nominal tolerance.
Fig. 109

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Final steps
Procedure
1. Remove the rear differential unit/crown
wheel assembly from the center housing,
taking care not to disperse or mix up the
shims fitted at either end of this assembly
when adjusting the backlash.
2. Fit the left-hand sleeve (29) the correct way
around so that the lubrication holes (T) are
facing towards the bottom of the center
housing.
NOTE: Take care to observe this position to
ensure that the planet gears, sun gears and
tapered roller bearings of the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly are lubricated
properly.
Fig. 110

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Slide a new lubricated sealing ring (28) into

the groove of the left-hand lubrication sleeve
(29) and hook on its ends without breaking
them.
Fig. 111
4. In the left-hand bore of the rear differential

unit/crown wheel assembly, refit:
• the shims marked previously at the
beginning of the section
• the bearing cup (13).
Fig. 112

rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly
in the center housing and guide it onto the
left-hand lubrication sleeve (29) without
damaging the new sealing ring (28).
Fig. 113

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6. In the right-hand support (17) of the rear

differential unit/crown wheel assembly, refit:
7.
Fig. 114
This section gives the tightening torques and adjustments for the main components of the rear crown
wheel and pinion.
The backlash of 0.08 mm to 0.28 mm between the planet gears and sun gears is not adjustable. It is
merely shown for information.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 115
(B) Backlash between pinion and crown wheel (E) Rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly
(B1) Fitting the shim(s) to adjust the backlash (F) Surface of the differential unit
between the pinion and crown wheel (J) Clearance
(DC) Fitting the shim(s) to adjust the position of (P) Preload
the pinion in the center housing (Taper (R) Retreat of the Mecanindus pins in relation to
Distance [DC]) the surface of the rear differential unit (F)
ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(Y) Pinion distance in mm relative to the rear Y = 163 mm

differential unit/crown wheel assembly (SM) Manual tightening
6.4.5.2 Preliminary step

On the GPA50 rear axle, the rear differential lock is located on the right-hand side of the center housing
(viewed from the driving position).
Procedure
Remove:
• the right-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet assembly (depending on version)
• the right-hand brake system.
Remove the rear differential right-hand support and the mobile dog clutch from the center
housing
Procedure
1. Select three M12 screws (23) fitted at
approximately 120° on the differential right-
hand support (17) and undo them.
2. In their place, screw in three retaining studs
(G) (M12 approximate length 240 mm) until
one of their ends is in contact with the crown
wheel (8).
NOTE: The retaining studs (G) are used to
immobilize and keep the unit/crown wheel
assembly in the vertical position so as not to
damage the sealing ring (28) of the left-hand
3. Unscrew the other three M12 screws (23).
Fig. 116

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. If necessary, alternately and gradually screw

two suitable locally made M12 extraction
screws (V) into the tapped holes (T) of the
differential right-hand support until the
support is fully extracted.
Fig. 117
5. Remove the differential right-hand support

(17). Recover or discard the "O" ring (J). This
seal is used to seal the rear differential lock
hydraulic line between the differential right-
hand support and the center housing.
Fig. 118

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Removing the rear differential mobile dog clutch and its spring
Procedure
On the differential right-hand support (17),
remove:
• the spring (22) from the mobile dog clutch
• the mobile dog clutch (21)
• the friction washer (20).
Fig. 119
Refitting the rear differential mobile dog clutch and its spring
Procedure
1. Check:
• that the 21-bar rear differential lock piston
supply line is not obstructed, using a jet
of compressed air: piston reaction should
be visible
• the condition of the friction washer (20).
After checking, smear one face of this
friction washer with miscible grease.
2. On the differential right-hand support (17),
refit:
• the friction washer (20) on the mobile dog
clutch (21)
• the spring (22). Fig. 120
Refit the rear differential right-hand support and the mobile dog clutch onto the center
housing
Procedure
1. Clean the mating face of the rear differential right-hand support and the mating face of the center
housing.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Lightly smear the "O" ring (J) with miscible

grease and fit it into the recess of the rear
differential right-hand support (17).
Fig. 121
3. On the center housing, check the presence

of the three retaining studs (G) for the crown
wheel (8) used to remove the rear differential
right-hand support.
Fig. 122
4. On the right-hand support (17), check for the

presence of:
• the adjusting shim(s) (25)
• the bearing cup (14)
• the spring (22).
Fig. 123

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
5. Align and refit the differential right-hand

support (17) onto the center housing while
guiding the spring and the mobile dog clutch
through the center hole in the fixed dog
clutch.
Screw the three original M12 screws (23) on
fully without locking them.
Unscrew the three retaining studs (G) from
the crown wheel (8). In their place, screw the
other three M12 screws (23) in fully without
locking them.
Tighten the six screws to 100 Nm–130 Nm.
Fig. 124
Final steps
Procedure
1. Refit:
• the right-hand brake system
• the right-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet assembly (depending on version).
2. Carry out a road test of:
• the brake system
• the rear differential lock.
3. Check the sealing of the trumpet assembly.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.4.5.3 Removing and refitting the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly
General
It is possible to work directly on the rear axle when
it is still connected to the tractor, when working on
the following parts only:
• the rear differential lock (piston, seals, mobile
dog clutch, friction washer and spring) housed
in the right-hand support (17)
• the planet gears, sun gears and pins housed in
their unit after having removed the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly;
• the sealing ring (28) located on the left-hand
end of the rear differential unit/crown wheel
assembly (viewed from the operator's seat).
Fig. 125

Remove:
• the rear hitch hook
• the right-hand and left-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet assemblies (depending on version)
• the two input sun gears (P), marking each of them on the center housing
• the two or three-speed rear PTO (depending on version)
• the pipes (T)
NOTE: The left-hand input sun gear is different to the right-hand sun gear.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the left-hand brake system as this does not interfere with removal of
the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 126
Removal
1. Remove:
• the differential right-hand support. Repeat steps see Removing and refitting the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly step 1, page 6-130 to see Removing and refitting the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly step 5, page 6-131 (loosen and remove the retaining studs (G))
the differential mobile dog clutch and its spring. Repeat step see Removing and refitting the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly step 1, page 6-132

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Remove the rear differential/crown wheel

assembly using the locally made guide (G).
Fig. 127
Refitting
3. Check that the 21 bar line for the rear differential unit is not obstructed.
4. Visually inspect the condition:
• of the cones and bearing cups

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
• of the helical teeth of the pinion and crown wheel

• of the sealing ring used to lubricate the left-hand bearing and the planet gears and sun gears of
5. With the help of a second operator, guide
and fit the differential/crown wheel assembly
into the left-hand lubricating sleeve (29)
without damaging the sealing ring (28) and
by following the method used for removal.
Screw the three retaining guide studs (G)
(M12 approximate length 240 mm) to
approximately 120° on the center housing
until one of their ends is in contact with the
crown wheel (8).
immobilize and keep the rear differential unit/
crown wheel assembly in the vertical
position.
Fig. 128

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6. Refit the mobile dog clutch (21), its friction

washer (20) and its spring (22) onto the right-
hand support (17) of the rear differential.
Check that the following are present:
• the shims (25)
Fig. 129

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
7. If it is necessary to work on the pinion and

crown wheel assembly, the tapered roller
bearings, the left-hand lubricating sleeve, the
differential unit and right-hand support, it is
essential to re-adjust the crown wheel and
pinion .
Otherwise, check for the presence of the
seal (J) and fit the right-hand support (17) on
the center housing by guiding the mobile dog
clutch and its spring inside the fixed dog
clutch.
Fully tighten the three M12 screws (23) in a
diametrically opposed manner without
locking them.
Undo the retaining studs (G) of the crown
wheel (8) and screw the other three M12
screws (23) fully in their place without
locking them. Tighten the six M12 screws
(23) to 100 Nm - 130 Nm.
Fig. 130

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

1. Refit:
• the pipes (T)
• the two or three-speed rear PTO (depending
on version)
• the two input sun gears (P) in their original
location
• the right-hand and left-hand GPA52 or
GPA54 trumpet assemblies (depending on
version)
• the rear hitch hook.
3. Check the sealing of the trumpet assemblies.
Fig. 131
6.4.5.4 Removing and refitting the rear differential lock

Remove the right-hand support (17) (see
chapter Preliminary step, page 6-130 ) and the
mobile dog clutch (21) from the rear differential
followed by the friction washer (20) and the spring
(22).
Fig. 132

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Remove the following from the right-hand
support (17):
2. Drive out the piston (19) using a jet of
compressed air directed toward the 21 bar
line (C).
3. Remove and discard the "O" rings (16) (18)
and (J).
Fig. 133
Reassembly
those that are defective. Check:
• for the presence and correct fitting of the
lock pin (24)
• that the 21 bar line (C) is not obstructed.
Fig. 134

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
5. On the right-hand support (17), refit:

• the new "O" rings (16) (18) in their
respective groove after lubricating them
with clean transmission oil
• the new "O" ring (J) lightly smeared with
miscible grease into its location.
Fig. 135
6. Make a paint mark (R) on the external face of

the piston (19) to identify the location of the
lock pin (24). Make another paint mark (R) on
the right-hand support (17) opposite the
previous mark.
7. Check that the "O" rings for the piston are
correctly fitted in the base of the groove in
the right-hand support.
8. Line up the two paint marks (R) and fit the
piston in the right-hand support (17) using a
plastic hammer. When fitting, check there
are no seal fragments on the circumference
of the piston.
Fig. 136

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

10. When working on the piston (porosity), seals
(wear) and the right-hand support, it is
necessary to check the sealing of the rear
differential lock.
Fig. 137

1. Refit:
• the right-hand support (17) (see
chapter Preliminary step, page 6-130 ) and
the mobile dog clutch (21) for the rear
differential followed by the friction washer
(20) and the spring (22)
• the right-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet
assembly (depending on version).
Fig. 138

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.4.5.5 Removing and refitting the crown wheel

General
The rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly is
removed through the rear opening space left free
by the removal of the rear PTO.
IMPORTANT:
If the crown wheel is replaced, the pinion must
also be replaced (see chapter Removing and
refitting the pinion, page 6-151 ).
Each part bears the same number and the same
letter. They must be fitted as pairs.
The spare parts catalog makes provision for
replacement of the crown wheel and pinion under
the same reference.
Fig. 139

Remove:
• the components around the center housing blocking access to the rear differential unit/crown wheel
assembly (see chapter Removing and refitting the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly, page
6-135 )
• the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly.
Removal
1. Place the rear differential unit fitted with the
crown wheel (8) on a suitable locally made
support.
Fig. 140

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Using a pneumatic screwdriver, loosen the

screws (23) for the crown wheel (8) by
several turns. Finish unscrewing using a
standard wrench (as required).
Fig. 141

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Release the crown wheel (8) and remove it

from the rear differential unit (31).
Fig. 142
Refitting
4. IMPORTANT: Carefully clean and degrease
the tapped holes (T).
Check the parts. Clean the mating faces of
the crown wheel and rear differential unit.
5. Check:
• the presence of the dowel (41)
• the presence of the friction washer (38)
• the retreat of the Mecanindus pins in
relation to the surface of the rear
differential unit.
Fig. 143

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6. Screw a locally made guide stud (M12x50)

into a tapped hole (T) of the rear differential
unit. Refit the crown wheel (8) onto the rear
differential unit (31) by aligning the dowel
(41) opposite its housing. Fit the crown
wheel onto the differential unit and unscrew
the guide stud.
7. IMPORTANT: For repairs, it is essential to
use the screws (36) referenced in the spare
parts catalog. Their resistance is suitable for
the assembly design and their threads are
already impregnated with a threadlock
product. However, if this threadlock product
appears to be missing from the thread of one Fig. 144
or more screws, it is essential to lightly
smear the thread of the screw(s) affected
with Loctite 270 or an equivalent product
before fitting.
Check for threadlock on the threads of the
twelve crown wheel mounting screws
(M12x30).
8. Tighten the twelve screws (36) to 77 Nm - 94
Nm by cross tightening.
After tightening, check:
• that the crown wheel is correctly fitted to
the rear differential unit
• that the sun gears and planet gears turn
normally.
NOTE: The backlash between the sun gears
and the planet gears is not adjustable. It
must be between 0.08 mm and 0.28 mm.
9. Carry out the various adjustments and
shimming operations in the following order: Fig. 145
• adjustment of the pinion position (taper
distance)
• shimming with preload of the pinion
tapered roller bearings
• adjustment of the backlash between the
crown wheel and the pinion
• shimming with preload of the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly
tapered roller bearings.

Refit:
• the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly (see chapter Removing and refitting the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly, page 6-135 ) permanently
• all the components on the center housing that were blocking the removal of the rear differential unit/
crown wheel (see chapter Removing and refitting the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly, page
6-135 ).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.4.5.6 Removing and refitting the planet gears and sun gears

Remove:
• the components around the center housing
blocking access to the rear differential unit/ring
gear
• the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly
• the ring gear (8).
Fig. 146
Removal
1. Remove:
• the first friction washer (38)
• the first sun gear (32)
• the first Mecanindus pin (34)
• the first half-shaft (39)
• the first planet gear (33) with its spherical
washer (37)
• the second Mecanindus pin (34)
• the second half-shaft (39)
• the second planet gear (33) with its
spherical washer (37)
Fig. 147

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Remove:
• the third Mecanindus pin (34)
• the shaft (35)
• the third and fourth planet gears (33) with
their spherical washer (37)
• the second sun gear (32)
• the second friction washer (38).
NOTE: The dowel (41) is force fitted into the
rear differential unit (31).
Fig. 148
3. If necessary, extract the tapered roller

bearing cone (27).
Fig. 149

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Refitting
4. If the bearing cone (27) was replaced, fit it up
against the shoulder of the rear differential
unit (31) using a suitable tool in contact with
the inner cage of the bearing.
Fig. 150
5. Refitting the planet gears and sun gears does

not present any particular difficulties.
However, care should be taken when fitting
the Mecanindus pins (34). They are correctly
fitted when their end (ring gear side) is
slightly set back (R) from the mating face of
the ring gear on the rear differential unit.
6. Refit the planet gears and sun gears by
following the steps in reverse order to
removal.
Fig. 151

Refit:
• the ring gear (8)
ring gear assembly.
6.4.5.7 Removing and refitting the pinion

1. Split the tractor between the gearbox and rear axle.
2. Remove:
• the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly
• the right-hand hydraulic cover plate;
• the left-hand plate (57 l/min Open Center hydraulic system) or the left-hand hydraulic cover plate
(depending on option)
• the 4WD unit.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Removal
Procedure
4346859M2.
Fig. 152

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Tractors without super creeper or tractors

with super creeper option
Unlock the nut (2) and immobilize it using
wrench 4346857M1. Turn the pinion (1)
clockwise to release and remove the nut (2)
using socket 4346858M1.
Fig. 153
Tractors without super creeper
3. Remove:
• the spacer (3)
• the shim(s) (10) used to preload the pinion
tapered roller bearings (1).
6-152 .
Fig. 154

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Tractors with the super creeper option

5. Remove the super creeper unit and the
driving gear (PM) fitted to the pinion (1).
Refer to the chapter and section on removing
the super creeper unit and its driving gear.
Fig. 155
6. Remove:
6-152 .
Fig. 156
Tractors with 2WD
8. Take out the pinion (1) fitted with the bearing
cone (9) and the spacer (E) through the rear
of the center housing.
Fig. 157

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Tractors with 4WD

cone (9) through the rear of the center
housing.
10. Remove the 4WD driving gear (5).
Fig. 158
Tractors with 2WD or 4WD
11. Remove:
• the shim(s) (6) used to position the pinion
in the center housing (taper distance).
Fig. 159
12. Extract or drive out (if necessary):

• the bearing cup (4) from the center
housing
• the bearing cone (9) from the pinion (1).
Fig. 160
Refitting
Procedure
1. Clean and check all components. Replace those that are defective. In particular, check that the pinion
axial line and radial ports are not obstructed.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. IMPORTANT: Suitable locally made tool (for

example: a pipe of sufficient length and
resistance) must be in contact with the inner
cage of the tapered roller bearing cone when
fitting.
Force fit the tapered bearing cone (9) (if
removed) up against the pinion shoulder (1)
using a press and a suitable tool.
Fig. 161
3. If necessary, adjust the taper distance Y2 of
the pinion in relation to the shaft of the
crown wheel. This adjustment must be made
after replacing the following parts:
• tapered roller bearings.
Fig. 162
4. Refit:
in the center housing (taper distance)
Fig. 163

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Tractors with 2WD

5. Insert the pinion (1) fitted with the bearing
Fig. 164
Tractors with 4WD
cone (9) through the 4WD driving gear (5)
through the rear of the center housing.
Fig. 165

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

4346859M2.
Fig. 166

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
8. IMPORTANT:
If necessary, adjust the preload of the pinion
tapered roller bearings. This adjustment must
be made after replacing the following parts:
• spacer (E) (2WD tractors)
• driving gear (5) (4WD tractors).
Refit:
tapered roller bearings (1)
• the spacer (3).
Fig. 167

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

4346859M2.
Fig. 168

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
10. IMPORTANT:
Refit:
Fig. 169
11. Refit the super creeper unit and the driving

gear (PM) to the pinion (1). Refer to the
chapter and section on refitting the super
creeper unit and its driving gear.
Fig. 170

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Tractors with or without the super creeper option

12. Degrease the thread (F) of the new nut (2)
and the pinion nut. Dry off all threads using a
jet of compressed air. Lightly smear the first
threads of the new nut (2) with Loctite 270
or equivalent and screw it onto the pinion.
6-158 or see step 9, page 6-160 .
Fig. 171

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

Lock the nut using wrench 4346857M1.
Using the socket 4346858M1, turn the pinion
200 Nm - 200 Nm is obtained.250 Nm
Fig. 172

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
15. Remove tools.

16. Lock the nut (2) by bending its collar without
breaking it, into the two opposing grooves of
the pinion, using a suitable punch.
17. Manually check the correct rotation of the
pinion.
Fig. 173

1. Refit:
• the 4WD unit
• the super creeper option unit
• the right-hand hydraulic cover plate (depending on option)
• the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly (see chapter Removing and refitting the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly, page 6-135 ).
4. Check tightness of:
• the mating faces
• Of the hydraulic unions.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.4.5.8 Replacing the left-hand lubrication sleeve lip seal
Overview of the left-hand lubrication sleeve and its associated parts

(28) Sealing ring (with hooks)
(29) Left-hand lubrication sleeve
(30) Lip seal
(42) Snap ring
(G) Circular lubrication groove
(T) Lubrication hole
Fig. 174

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
The left-hand lubrication sleeve (29) is located

between the left-hand shoulder of the center
housing and the rear differential unit/crown wheel
assembly. It can be removed when the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly is removed
from the center housing.
Fig. 175
Only the lip seal (30) can be accessed by removing
just the left-hand trumpet assembly.
Fig. 176

Remove:
• the left-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet assembly (depending on version)
• the left-hand brake system.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Replacing the lip seal

1. Remove the snap ring (42). Extract the worn
lip seal (30) and discard it.
Fig. 177
Refitting the lip seal
2. Clean the lip seal location on the center
housing. Check:
• that this housing is free of shavings or
filings
• that the lubrication port (O) on the left-
hand lubrication sleeve (29) is not
obstructed.
Fig. 178

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Correctly position the lubricated lip seal (30)

and slide it up against the shoulder of service
tool 4346870M1. Use the service tool to fit
the lip seal so that the face (F) of the service
tool is in contact with the machined face of
the center housing. When this condition is
met, the lip seal (30) should be set back
approximately 3.60 mm from the face of the
left-hand lubrication sleeve (29).
4. IMPORTANT: In particular, do not forget to
fit the snap ring to prevent movement of the
lip seal due to the lubrication pressure effect.
Fit the snap ring (42) into the groove of the
center housing.
Fig. 179

Refit:
• the left-hand brake system
• the left-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet assembly (depending on version).
6.4.6 Service tools
6.4.6.1 General

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.4.6.2 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 9x40 and 10x42 - Service tools
Reference 4346857M1
Description Tool for immobilizing the pinion nut
Reference 4346858M1
Description Socket for pinion

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Reference 4346859M2
Description Retaining tool for pinion
Reference 4346860M1
Description Rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly
shimming tool

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Reference 4346861M1
Description Tool for pushing/pulling the pinion
Reference 4346870M1
Description Tool for fitting the left-hand lubrication sleeve lip
seal

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Reference 4373043M1
Description Dial gage thrust plate for shimming the pinion

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.5 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 10x47

6.5.1 GPA50 general information
The crown wheel and pinion is helical.
It is a hypoid type: The pinion is lower than the crown wheel.
The rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly is supported:
• on the right-hand side by a large diameter tapered roller bearing housed in a removable support
mounted on the right-hand side of the center housing. This support also incorporates the hydro-
mechanically controlled rear differential lock.
• on the left-hand side by a tapered roller bearing housed in the wall of the center housing.
A lubrication sleeve fitted with a lip seal and sealing ring lubricate the left-hand tapered roller bearing. This
is also used to lubricate the planet gears and sun gears housed in the sealed rear differential unit.
The crown wheel and pinion has a different number of teeth as shown in the following table:
GPA5050 rear axle fitted with trumpet housings Number of pinion/crown wheel teeth
GPA54 10/47
The crown wheel is located inside the center housing and on the right-hand side of the pinion (viewed from
the driving position). The crown wheel and the fixed dog clutch for the rear differential unit form a block.
This block also acts as a cover plate for the rear differential unit.
The backlash between the pinion and the crown wheel is adjusted by shims. These are located between
the large diameter tapered roller bearing cup of the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly and the
right-hand support of the center housing (viewed from the driving position).
The rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly tapered roller bearing preload is also adjusted by shims.
These are located between the tapered roller bearing cup and the lubrication sleeve mounted on the left-
hand side of the center housing (viewed from the driving position).
Rear differential unit

The GPA50 rear axle is fitted with a rear differential comprising two sun gears and four planet gears.
Sun gears and planet gears are located in an enclosed unit lubricated by the lubrication system.
Hydro-mechanical differential lock

The GPA50 rear axle is fitted with a mechanical differential lock. This is located in the right-hand support of
the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly. It comprises a fixed dog clutch forming a unit with the
crown wheel and mobile dog clutch with a return spring.
The rear differential lock is electrohydraulically controlled.
Lubrication
The pinion and left-hand taper roller bearing of the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly are
lubricated by an internal oil line from the right-hand hydraulic cover plate.
The large diameter right-hand tapered roller bearing of the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly is
lubricated by oil splash lubrication.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
The lubrication pipe to the pinion has a hole (O)

with a diameter of approximately 1,5 mm.
A jet of oil is sprayed onto the gear mesh section
of the tapered teeth of the pinion and crown
wheel.
This concept provides continuous lubrication of the
above-mentioned teeth, whatever the ground
profile (slopes or uneven ground).
Fig. 180

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Operation of the hydro-mechanical differential lock
Fig. 181

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
The rear differential lock is supplied by the 21 bar low-pressure hydraulic system of the rear axle, via an
ON/OFF solenoid valve.
When the solenoid valve is activated, oil travels towards the right-hand support (17) of the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly (E) and supplies the chamber (C) of the piston (19).
The piston moves to the left (as viewed from the operator's seat) and drives the mobile dog clutch (21) to
engage it with the fixed dog clutch (CF) that is attached to the rear differential unit/crown wheel.
When the solenoid valve is no longer activated, a spring (22) disengages the mobile dog clutch from the
fixed dog clutch: This is the disengagement phase. The oil in the chamber (C) is then directed toward the
return via the solenoid valve.
Explanation of the operation of the rear differential

Tractor moving without the steering operated
Fig. 182
The movement coming from the gearbox drives the crown wheel and pinion and the rear differential unit
where the planet gear/sun gear assembly is locked in rotation (mechanical lock).
When the steering is not operated, the wheels follow the same course. Therefore, they turn at the same
speed.
Tractor moving with the steering operated

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 183
The movement coming from the gearbox drives the crown wheel and pinion and the rear differential unit.
The rear differential unit in turn drives the planet gear/sun gear assembly at differential speeds, thus giving
each of the wheels a different course.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.5.3.1 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - GPA50 cross-section view
Fig. 184
(1) Pinion (2) Nut
ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(3) Spacer (tractors without super creeper) (23) M12x40 screw

(4) Bearing cup (24) Stop pin
(5) 2-wheel drive ring or 4-wheel drive driving (25) Shim(s)
gear (depending on option) (26) Bearing cone
(6) Shim(s) (27) Bearing cone
(7) Bearing cup (28) Seal ring (hook type)
(8) Ring gear (29) Left-hand lubrication sleeve
(11) Bearing cone (32) Sun gear
(12) Shim(s) (33) Planet gear
(13) Bearing cup (34) Mecanindus pin
(14) Bearing cup (35) Planet gear pin
(15) Circlip (36) M12x30 screw
((17))Right-hand differential support and rivet (38) Friction washer
(19) Piston ((41))Dowel
(21) Mobile dog clutch (CC) Center housing
(22) Spring

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.5.3.2 Pinion and rear differential mechanism - Blown-up view
Fig. 185
(1) Pinion (4) Bearing cup
(2) Nut (5) 2-wheel drive ring or 4-wheel drive driving
(3) Spacer (tractors without super creeper) gear (depending on option)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(6) Shim(s) (25) Shim(s)

(8) Ring gear (27) Bearing cone
(9) Bearing cone (28) Seal ring (hook type)
(10) Shim(s) (29) Left-hand lubrication sleeve
(13) Bearing cup (32) Sun gear
(14) Bearing cup (33) Planet gear
(15) Circlip (34) Mecanindus pin
(17) Right-hand differential support and rivet (36) M12x30 screw
(19) Piston (38) Friction washer
(20) Friction washer (39) Planet gear pin
(21) Mobile dog clutch (41) Dowel
(23) M12x40 screw (CC) Center housing
(24) Stop pin

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.5.3.3 Rear differential mechanism and its lock - Cross-section view
Fig. 186
(31) Rear differential unit (34) Mecanindus pin
(32) Sun gear (35) Planet gear pin
(33) Planet gear (36) M12x30 screw

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(37) Spherical washer (39) Planet gear pin

(38) Friction washer ((41))Dowel
6.5.4.1 Adjusting the position of the pinion in the center housing (taper distance)
Introduction
The adjustment of the pinion in the center housing must be checked after replacement of one or more of
the following parts:
• the pinion
IMPORTANT: The position of the pinion (taper distance) in the center housing must be adjusted before
shimming the pinion tapered roller bearings.
Description of the adjustment

The adjustment consists of positioning the pinion
in the center housing relative to the shaft of the
crown wheel to ensure that the pinion is correctly
engaged with the crown wheel.
This adjustment is obtained by a thickness of
shims (E) inserted between the bearing cup (7) and
the center housing.
The thickness E of shim(s) (6) required to position
the pinion is calculated according to the formula
below:
• Z = theoretical nominal dimension of the center
housing 195,25 mm
• Y2 = theoretical nominal dimension of the
crown wheel and pinion 163 mm
• deltaY2 = variation of the theoretical nominal
dimension of the crown wheel and pinion
engraved on the top of the pinion by the
supplier
NOTE: The tooth size tolerance engraved on
the pinion by the supplier may be +/- 0,3 mm.
• Y1 = dimension to measure from the tapered
roller bearing assembly (cone (9) and bearing
cup (7))
Fig. 187

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Measurement of dimension Y1 for bearings (7) and (9)

1. Place the base of the bearing assembly (7)
(9) on a hard, perfectly flat cast-iron surface
(for example: a workshop bench plate).
2. It is important that this measurement is
taken with the help of a second operator.
One person applies a vertical, even and firm
manual pressure (C) on the bearing cup (7)
while turning it several times from left to
right on the bearing cone (9). Without
releasing the firm load (C) on the bearing cup
(7), the second operator measures the
dimension Y1 for the bearing assembly at
three points equidistant from the cup (7)
using a depth gage.
3. Take the average of the three readings. This
average should be between 31,5 mm and
31,7 mm.
Fig. 188
4. Calculate the thickness of the shim(s) (6) to
insert between the bearing cup (7) and the
center housing in order to correctly position
the pinion in the center housing relative to
the shaft of the crown wheel.
Example
• Z = 195,25 mm
• Y2 = 163 mm
• deltaY2 = 0 mm
• Y1 = 31,62 mm Fig. 189
E = 195.25 - 163 - 0 - 31.62

E = 0,63 mm

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

E should not exceed 0,03 mm.
5. Calculate the shims to use to obtain the
correct pinion position. Theoretical value: E =
0,63 mm Thickness of selected shims E: E =
0.30 + 0.30 = 0,60 mm
6.5.4.2 Shimming the pinion tapered roller bearings
Introduction
Shimming the pinion tapered roller bearings with preload in the center housing must be checked after
replacing one or more of the following parts:
• the pinion
IMPORTANT: Shimming the tapered roller bearings with preload in the center housing must be carried out
after adjusting the position of the pinion (taper distance).
This shimming consists of loading the tapered roller bearings by preloading, by fitting the cones in the
bearing cups and by manually pushing and pulling the pinion.

This section describes shimming of the pinion tapered roller bearings of a GPA50 rear axle with or without
the super creeper option.
For each of the fittings, the shimming principle is the same. Only the profile and number of parts differ
depending on whether or not the option is fitted.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
4346859M2.
Fig. 190

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Add a thickness of shims (10) to obtain a

temporary clearance of approximately 0,15
mm to 0,20 mm in preparation for shimming
the pinion tapered roller bearings with
preload.
Slide the following onto the pinion:
• the thickness of shims (10), calculated
previously
• service tool ACT0013350
3. Screw a new test fit nut (2) onto the pinion
(with no Loctite on the thread).
Fig. 191

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

Immobilize the nut (2) using wrench
ACT0013330.
5. Using socket ACT0013320, turn the pinion
Fig. 192
6. Free the pinion by removing service tool
4346859M2 fitted in step see Preparing for
shimming step 1, page 6-108 .
7. Slide service tool ACT0013360 onto the
splined end of the pinion (1) in order to
manually push and pull the pinion. Tighten
the 3 screws (V).
Fig. 193

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Shimming
Shimming the tapered roller bearings (11) (4) and
(9) (7) is carried out in two phases and with the
center housing in the vertical position.
Fig. 194
Phase 1
This phase consists of using a dial gage and
following the conventional method by applying a
firm axial push and pull force on the pinion (1) to
measure a clearance for the P1 shimming of the
pinion tapered roller bearings with preload.
Fig. 195

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Phase 2
This phase should fine-tune the P1 shimming by
measuring and adjusting the rotational torque of
the pinion tapered roller bearings (if necessary)
using a dial-type torque wrench.
Fig. 196

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Phase 1
Procedure
housing. Position its tip on the service tool
ACT0013350.
2. Push the handle of tool ACT0013360 firmly
while turning it alternately from right to left
3. Repeat the previous step by pulling firmly to
correctly position the tapered roller bearing
cone (9) in the cup (7).
(10) to obtain a preload: P1 = 0,01 mm to
0,07 mm
maximum tolerance.
Example
• P1 = preload = 0,01 mm
• E1 = thickness of shim(s) selected to
obtain a clearance = 1,35 mm
• J = clearance measured using the dial
gage = 0,23 mm
• E = thickness of final shim(s)
E = E1 - J - P1
E = 1.35 - 0.23 - 0.01
E = 1.11
Thickness of final shim(s) according to the
available shims (use a maximum of 3 shims):
E = 0.55 + 0.55 = 1,10 mm. This gives a
preload of 0,02 mm
Fig. 197

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

4346859M2.
Fig. 198
6. Loosen the nut (2) using service tools

ACT0013330 and ACT0013320 used
previously.
Remove:
• the spacer (3)
Slide the shim(s) (10) selected at step
see Phase 1 step 4, page 6-113 between the
driving gear (PM) and the bearing cone (11).
7. Refit the spacer (3).
8. Tighten the nut (2) to a torque of 200 Nm -
250 Nm using the service tools ACT0013330
and ACT0013320used previously. Fig. 199
4346859M2 fitted in step see Phase
1 step 5, page 6-114 .

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Phase 2
Procedure
1. IMPORTANT: Fine-tuning the adjustment
consists of adding or removing one or more
shims to obtain the required rotational
torque. If possible, fine tune the shimming to
the maximum tolerance.
Using a dial-type torque wrench, socket
ACT0013320 and two locally made drives (R),
gently and smoothly turn the pinion several
turns without stopping and without changing
speed.
2. Read the rotational torque on the dial-type
torque wrench. This should be between 0,50
Nm and 3 Nm.
Fig. 200

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Preparing the nut (2)
Procedure
1. After having carried out the adjustments
(shimming phases 1 and 2), unscrew the
new test fit nut (2) fitted previously.
2. Degrease the threads of the nut (F) and the
pinion.
3. Dry off all threads using a jet of compressed
air.
4. Lightly smear the first threads of the new nut
with Loctite 270 or equivalent and screw the
nut onto the pinion.
Fig. 201

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

ACT0013330.
6. Using socket ACT0013320, turn the pinion
Fig. 202
6.5.4.3 Shimming the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly tapered roller bearings
General
Shimming the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly tapered roller bearings with preload must be
checked after replacing one or more of the following parts:
• left-hand lubrication sleeve
• rear differential unit
• rear differential right-hand support.
This shimming consists of loading the tapered roller bearings by a load applied using service tool
4346860M1 after fitting carried out by manual rotation of the cones in the bearing cups.

Both faces of the left-hand lubrication sleeve (29) are reground. This left-hand sleeve is therefore included
in the dimensioning procedure for shimming the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. The following parts are not included in the
shimming procedure:
• the pinion
• the original fit shim(s) (12)
• the hook-type sealing ring (28)
Fig. 203
2. Refit the left-hand lubrication sleeve (29) in

the left-hand bore of the center housing.
NOTE: This left-hand lubrication sleeve (29)
is grease fitted and shouldered in the bore of
the rear differential unit/ring gear assembly.
It can only be fitted from inside the center
housing.
Fig. 204

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Refit the bearing cup (13) in the bore of the

rear differential unit/ring gear assembly.
Fig. 205

rear differential unit/ring gear assembly in the
center housing and guide it into the left-hand
Fig. 206
Shimming
The preload shimming of the tapered roller bearings (13) (27) and (14) (26) of the rear differential unit/crown
wheel assembly will be carried out in the center housing lying on the left-hand side.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Fit service tool 4346860M1 onto the tapered
roller bearing assembly (cone (26) and cup
(14)).
2. Torque tighten the six screws (23) by
applying cross tightening.
3. Torque tighten the center screw (VC) of
service tool 4346860M1 to 15 Nm.
NOTE:
Turn the crown wheel of the crown wheel
and pinion a few turns to correctly fit the
cones in the bearing cups.
After doing this, check the tightening torque
of the service tool center screw (VC) again.
If necessary, retighten it to a torque of 15
Nm.
Fig. 207

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. Using a suitable depth gage and measuring

rule (R), read off the distance (E).
Fig. 208
5. On the center housing (CC), calculate the

dimension (C) between the bearing cup (14)
and the mating face (F) of the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly right-hand
support according to the formula below: C =
(124 + E) - (69 + 16) C = (124 + E) - 85
124 Dimension of the finger and plate

assembly of service tool
4346860M1
(69) Dimension of the calibrated pins of

service tool 4346860M1
(16) Dimension of the plate of service

tool 4346860M1
E Distance to measure
NOTE: When calculating (E), do not
forget to subtract the thickness of
the measuring rule (R) (15 mm).
6. Remove service tool 4346860M1 fitted at

Fig. 209

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
7. On the rear differential unit/crown wheel

assembly support (17), measure the
dimension C1, by the difference between (a)
minus (b) using a suitable depth gage and
taken at three equidistant points. Calculate
the average of the three readings (this
average will be referred to as C1).
Fig. 210

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
8. Calculate the gap (I) between the mating

face of the bearing cup (14) and the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly right-
hand support (17) according to the formula
below: C - C1
Fig. 211
9. To this gap (I), add a shim thickness (E) of

between 0.05 mm and 0.15 mm to obtain a
preload P2 for the rear differential unit/crown
wheel assembly so that: P2 = 0.05 mm to
0.15 mm
NOTE: (I) plus (E) will be used later to adjust
the backlash between the crown wheel and
the pinion.
(I) plus (E) must not exceed 0.04 mm.
10. Check and adjust the backlash between the
crown wheel and the pinion (see
chapter Adjusting and checking the backlash
between the ring gear and the pinion, page
6-124 ).
Fig. 212

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Preliminary steps
1. Remove the rear differential unit/ring gear
assembly from the center housing.
2. Permanently refit the previously adjusted
pinion (position and shimming of the tapered
roller bearings) into the center housing (see
chapter Adjusting the position of the pinion in
the center housing (taper distance), page
6-105 and see chapter Shimming the pinion
tapered roller bearings, page 6-107 ).
Fig. 213
Adjusting the backlash between the crown wheel and the pinion
The backlash between the crown wheel and pinion is made in the center housing lying on the left-hand
side.
The method for adjusting the backlash between
the crown wheel and pinion consists of fitting (I)
then (E) selected at step see Adjusting the
backlash between the crown wheel and the
pinion step 9, page 6-123 between the bearing cup
(13) and the left-hand lubrication sleeve (29).
Temporarily fitting all the shims on the left-hand
side of the rear differential unit/crown wheel
assembly (viewed from the driving position) helps
to separate the tapered teeth of the crown wheel
from the teeth of the pinion as much as possible.
For the adjustment, simply offset the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly from the Fig. 214
top to the bottom or vice versa, by spreading (I)
plus (E) (without changing the overall thickness)
until a backlash of between 0.15 mm and 0.45 mm
is obtained.
This spread must be done alternately and evenly at
each end (right-hand and left-hand sides) of the
rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly.
This is done so as not to modify the tapered roller
bearing preload adjustment of this assembly (see
chapter Shimming the rear differential unit/ring
gear assembly tapered roller bearings, page
6-117 ).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Checking the backlash between the crown wheel and the pinion
The tip of the dial gage is placed at mid-height and
at the end of the tooth over three equidistant
points of the crown wheel to obtain a backlash
(crown wheel/pinion) of between 0.15 mm and
0.45 mm.
NOTE: If possible, keep to the nominal tolerance.
Fig. 215

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Final steps
Procedure
1. Remove the rear differential unit/crown
wheel assembly from the center housing,
taking care not to disperse or mix up the
shims fitted at either end of this assembly
when adjusting the backlash.
2. Fit the left-hand sleeve (29) the correct way
around so that the lubrication holes (T) are
facing towards the bottom of the center
housing.
NOTE: Take care to observe this position to
ensure that the planet gears, sun gears and
tapered roller bearings of the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly are lubricated
properly.
Fig. 216

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Slide a new lubricated sealing ring (28) into

the groove of the left-hand lubrication sleeve
(29) and hook on its ends without breaking
them.
Fig. 217
4. In the left-hand bore of the rear differential

unit/crown wheel assembly, refit:
Fig. 218

rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly
in the center housing and guide it onto the
left-hand lubrication sleeve (29) without
damaging the new sealing ring (28).
Fig. 219

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6. In the right-hand support (17) of the rear

differential unit/crown wheel assembly, refit:
7.
Fig. 220
This section gives the tightening torques and adjustments for the main components of the rear crown
wheel and pinion.
The backlash of 0.08 mm to 0.28 mm between the planet gears and sun gears is not adjustable. It is
merely shown for information.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 221
(B) Backlash between pinion and crown wheel (E) Rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly
(B1) Fitting the shim(s) to adjust the backlash (F) Surface of the differential unit
between the pinion and crown wheel (J) Clearance
(DC) Fitting the shim(s) to adjust the position of (P) Preload
the pinion in the center housing (Taper (R) Retreat of the Mecanindus pins in relation to
Distance [DC]) the surface of the rear differential unit (F)
ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(Y) Pinion distance in mm relative to the rear Y = 163 mm

differential unit/crown wheel assembly (SM) Manual tightening
6.5.5.2 Preliminary step

On the GPA50 rear axle, the rear differential lock is located on the right-hand side of the center housing
(viewed from the driving position).
Procedure
Remove:
• the right-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet assembly (depending on version)
Remove the rear differential right-hand support and the mobile dog clutch from the center
housing
Procedure
1. Select three M12 screws (23) fitted at
approximately 120° on the differential right-
hand support (17) and undo them.
2. In their place, screw in three retaining studs
(G) (M12 approximate length 240 mm) until
one of their ends is in contact with the crown
wheel (8).
immobilize and keep the unit/crown wheel
assembly in the vertical position so as not to
damage the sealing ring (28) of the left-hand
3. Unscrew the other three M12 screws (23).
Fig. 222

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. If necessary, alternately and gradually screw

two suitable locally made M12 extraction
screws (V) into the tapped holes (T) of the
differential right-hand support until the
support is fully extracted.
Fig. 223
5. Remove the differential right-hand support

(17). Recover or discard the "O" ring (J). This
seal is used to seal the rear differential lock
hydraulic line between the differential right-
hand support and the center housing.
Fig. 224

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Removing the rear differential mobile dog clutch and its spring
Procedure
On the differential right-hand support (17),
remove:
• the spring (22) from the mobile dog clutch
• the friction washer (20).
Fig. 225
Refitting the rear differential mobile dog clutch and its spring
Procedure
1. Check:
• that the 21-bar rear differential lock piston
supply line is not obstructed, using a jet
of compressed air: piston reaction should
be visible
• the condition of the friction washer (20).
After checking, smear one face of this
friction washer with miscible grease.
2. On the differential right-hand support (17),
refit:
• the friction washer (20) on the mobile dog
clutch (21)
• the spring (22). Fig. 226
Refit the rear differential right-hand support and the mobile dog clutch onto the center
housing
Procedure
1. Clean the mating face of the rear differential right-hand support and the mating face of the center
housing.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Lightly smear the "O" ring (J) with miscible

grease and fit it into the recess of the rear
differential right-hand support (17).
Fig. 227
3. On the center housing, check the presence

of the three retaining studs (G) for the crown
wheel (8) used to remove the rear differential
right-hand support.
Fig. 228
4. On the right-hand support (17), check for the

presence of:
• the adjusting shim(s) (25)
• the spring (22).
Fig. 229

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
5. Align and refit the differential right-hand

support (17) onto the center housing while
guiding the spring and the mobile dog clutch
through the center hole in the fixed dog
clutch.
Screw the three original M12 screws (23) on
fully without locking them.
Unscrew the three retaining studs (G) from
the crown wheel (8). In their place, screw the
other three M12 screws (23) in fully without
locking them.
Tighten the six screws to 100 Nm–130 Nm.
Fig. 230
Final steps
Procedure
1. Refit:
• the right-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet assembly (depending on version).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.5.5.3 Removing and refitting the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly
General
It is possible to work directly on the rear axle when
it is still connected to the tractor, when working on
the following parts only:
• the rear differential lock (piston, seals, mobile
dog clutch, friction washer and spring) housed
in the right-hand support (17)
• the planet gears, sun gears and pins housed in
their unit after having removed the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly;
• the sealing ring (28) located on the left-hand
end of the rear differential unit/crown wheel
assembly (viewed from the operator's seat).
Fig. 231

Remove:
• the rear hitch hook
• the right-hand and left-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet assemblies (depending on version)
• the two input sun gears (P), marking each of them on the center housing
• the two or three-speed rear PTO (depending on version)
• the pipes (T)
NOTE: The left-hand input sun gear is different to the right-hand sun gear.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the left-hand brake system as this does not interfere with removal of

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 232
Removal
1. Remove:
• the differential right-hand support. Repeat steps see Removing and refitting the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly step 1, page 6-130 to see Removing and refitting the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly step 5, page 6-131 (loosen and remove the retaining studs (G))
the differential mobile dog clutch and its spring. Repeat step see Removing and refitting the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly step 1, page 6-132

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Remove the rear differential/crown wheel

assembly using the locally made guide (G).
Fig. 233
Refitting
3. Check that the 21 bar line for the rear differential unit is not obstructed.
4. Visually inspect the condition:
• of the cones and bearing cups

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
• of the helical teeth of the pinion and crown wheel

• of the sealing ring used to lubricate the left-hand bearing and the planet gears and sun gears of
5. With the help of a second operator, guide
and fit the differential/crown wheel assembly
into the left-hand lubricating sleeve (29)
without damaging the sealing ring (28) and
by following the method used for removal.
Screw the three retaining guide studs (G)
(M12 approximate length 240 mm) to
approximately 120° on the center housing
until one of their ends is in contact with the
crown wheel (8).
immobilize and keep the rear differential unit/
crown wheel assembly in the vertical
position.
Fig. 234

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6. Refit the mobile dog clutch (21), its friction

washer (20) and its spring (22) onto the right-
hand support (17) of the rear differential.
Check that the following are present:
• the shims (25)
Fig. 235

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
7. If it is necessary to work on the pinion and

crown wheel assembly, the tapered roller
bearings, the left-hand lubricating sleeve, the
differential unit and right-hand support, it is
essential to re-adjust the crown wheel and
pinion .
Otherwise, check for the presence of the
seal (J) and fit the right-hand support (17) on
the center housing by guiding the mobile dog
clutch and its spring inside the fixed dog
clutch.
Fully tighten the three M12 screws (23) in a
diametrically opposed manner without
locking them.
Undo the retaining studs (G) of the crown
wheel (8) and screw the other three M12
screws (23) fully in their place without
locking them. Tighten the six M12 screws
(23) to 100 Nm - 130 Nm.
Fig. 236

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

1. Refit:
• the pipes (T)
• the two or three-speed rear PTO (depending
on version)
• the two input sun gears (P) in their original
location
• the right-hand and left-hand GPA52 or
GPA54 trumpet assemblies (depending on
version)
• the rear hitch hook.
3. Check the sealing of the trumpet assemblies.
Fig. 237
6.5.5.4 Removing and refitting the rear differential lock

Remove the right-hand support (17) (see
chapter Preliminary step, page 6-130 ) and the
mobile dog clutch (21) from the rear differential
followed by the friction washer (20) and the spring
(22).
Fig. 238

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Remove the following from the right-hand
support (17):
2. Drive out the piston (19) using a jet of
compressed air directed toward the 21 bar
line (C).
3. Remove and discard the "O" rings (16) (18)
and (J).
Fig. 239
Reassembly
those that are defective. Check:
• for the presence and correct fitting of the
lock pin (24)
• that the 21 bar line (C) is not obstructed.
Fig. 240

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

• the new "O" rings (16) (18) in their
respective groove after lubricating them
with clean transmission oil
• the new "O" ring (J) lightly smeared with
miscible grease into its location.
Fig. 241
6. Make a paint mark (R) on the external face of

the piston (19) to identify the location of the
lock pin (24). Make another paint mark (R) on
the right-hand support (17) opposite the
previous mark.
7. Check that the "O" rings for the piston are
correctly fitted in the base of the groove in
the right-hand support.
8. Line up the two paint marks (R) and fit the
piston in the right-hand support (17) using a
plastic hammer. When fitting, check there
are no seal fragments on the circumference
of the piston.
Fig. 242

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

10. When working on the piston (porosity), seals
(wear) and the right-hand support, it is
necessary to check the sealing of the rear
differential lock.
Fig. 243

1. Refit:
• the right-hand support (17) (see
chapter Preliminary step, page 6-130 ) and
the mobile dog clutch (21) for the rear
differential followed by the friction washer
(20) and the spring (22)
• the right-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet
assembly (depending on version).
Fig. 244

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.5.5.5 Removing and refitting the crown wheel

General
The rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly is
removed through the rear opening space left free
by the removal of the rear PTO.
IMPORTANT:
If the crown wheel is replaced, the pinion must
also be replaced (see chapter Removing and
refitting the pinion, page 6-151 ).
Each part bears the same number and the same
letter. They must be fitted as pairs.
The spare parts catalog makes provision for
replacement of the crown wheel and pinion under
the same reference.
Fig. 245

Remove:
• the components around the center housing blocking access to the rear differential unit/crown wheel
assembly (see chapter Removing and refitting the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly, page
6-135 )
• the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly.
Removal
1. Place the rear differential unit fitted with the
crown wheel (8) on a suitable locally made
support.
Fig. 246

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Using a pneumatic screwdriver, loosen the

screws (23) for the crown wheel (8) by
several turns. Finish unscrewing using a
standard wrench (as required).
Fig. 247

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Release the crown wheel (8) and remove it

from the rear differential unit (31).
Fig. 248
Refitting
4. IMPORTANT: Carefully clean and degrease
the tapped holes (T).
Check the parts. Clean the mating faces of
the crown wheel and rear differential unit.
5. Check:
• the presence of the dowel (41)
• the presence of the friction washer (38)
• the retreat of the Mecanindus pins in
relation to the surface of the rear
differential unit.
Fig. 249

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6. Screw a locally made guide stud (M12x50)

into a tapped hole (T) of the rear differential
unit. Refit the crown wheel (8) onto the rear
differential unit (31) by aligning the dowel
(41) opposite its housing. Fit the crown
wheel onto the differential unit and unscrew
the guide stud.
7. IMPORTANT: For repairs, it is essential to
use the screws (36) referenced in the spare
parts catalog. Their resistance is suitable for
the assembly design and their threads are
already impregnated with a threadlock
product. However, if this threadlock product
appears to be missing from the thread of one Fig. 250
or more screws, it is essential to lightly
smear the thread of the screw(s) affected
with Loctite 270 or an equivalent product
before fitting.
Check for threadlock on the threads of the
twelve crown wheel mounting screws
(M12x30).
8. Tighten the twelve screws (36) to 77 Nm - 94
Nm by cross tightening.
After tightening, check:
• that the crown wheel is correctly fitted to
the rear differential unit
• that the sun gears and planet gears turn
normally.
NOTE: The backlash between the sun gears
and the planet gears is not adjustable. It
must be between 0.08 mm and 0.28 mm.
9. Carry out the various adjustments and
shimming operations in the following order: Fig. 251
• adjustment of the pinion position (taper
distance)
• shimming with preload of the pinion
tapered roller bearings
• adjustment of the backlash between the
crown wheel and the pinion
• shimming with preload of the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly
tapered roller bearings.

Refit:
• the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly (see chapter Removing and refitting the rear differential
unit/crown wheel assembly, page 6-135 ) permanently
crown wheel (see chapter Removing and refitting the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly, page
6-135 ).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.5.5.6 Removing and refitting the planet gears and sun gears

Remove:
• the components around the center housing
blocking access to the rear differential unit/ring
gear
• the ring gear (8).
Fig. 252
Removal
1. Remove:
• the first friction washer (38)
• the first sun gear (32)
• the first Mecanindus pin (34)
• the first half-shaft (39)
• the first planet gear (33) with its spherical
washer (37)
• the second Mecanindus pin (34)
• the second half-shaft (39)
• the second planet gear (33) with its
spherical washer (37)
Fig. 253

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Remove:
• the third Mecanindus pin (34)
• the shaft (35)
• the third and fourth planet gears (33) with
their spherical washer (37)
• the second sun gear (32)
• the second friction washer (38).
NOTE: The dowel (41) is force fitted into the
rear differential unit (31).
Fig. 254
3. If necessary, extract the tapered roller

bearing cone (27).
Fig. 255

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Refitting
4. If the bearing cone (27) was replaced, fit it up
against the shoulder of the rear differential
unit (31) using a suitable tool in contact with
the inner cage of the bearing.
Fig. 256
5. Refitting the planet gears and sun gears does

not present any particular difficulties.
However, care should be taken when fitting
the Mecanindus pins (34). They are correctly
fitted when their end (ring gear side) is
slightly set back (R) from the mating face of
the ring gear on the rear differential unit.
6. Refit the planet gears and sun gears by
following the steps in reverse order to
removal.
Fig. 257

Refit:
• the ring gear (8)
ring gear assembly.
6.5.5.7 Removing and refitting the pinion

1. Split the tractor between the gearbox and rear axle.
2. Remove:
• the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly
• the right-hand hydraulic cover plate;
• the 4WD unit.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Removal
Procedure
4346859M2.
Fig. 258

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Tractors without super creeper or tractors

with super creeper option
Unlock the nut (2) and immobilize it using
wrench ACT0013330. Turn the pinion (1)
clockwise to release and remove the nut (2)
using socket ACT0013320.
Fig. 259
3. Remove:
• the spacer (3)
4346859M2 fitted in step
see Removal step 1, page 6-152 .
Fig. 260

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

5. Remove the super creeper unit and the
driving gear (PM) fitted to the pinion (1).
Refer to the chapter and section on removing
the super creeper unit and its driving gear.
Fig. 261
6. Remove:
see Removal step 1, page 6-152 .
Fig. 262
Tractors with 2WD
Fig. 263

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Tractors with 4WD

cone (9) through the rear of the center
housing.
10. Remove the 4WD driving gear (5).
Fig. 264
11. Remove:
in the center housing (taper distance).
Fig. 265
12. Extract or drive out (if necessary):

• the bearing cup (4) from the center
housing
• the bearing cone (9) from the pinion (1).
Fig. 266
Refitting
Procedure
1. Clean and check all components. Replace those that are defective. In particular, check that the pinion
axial line and radial ports are not obstructed.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. IMPORTANT: Suitable locally made tool (for

example: a pipe of sufficient length and
resistance) must be in contact with the inner
cage of the tapered roller bearing cone when
fitting.
Force fit the tapered bearing cone (9) (if
removed) up against the pinion shoulder (1)
using a press and a suitable tool.
Fig. 267
3. If necessary, adjust the taper distance Y2 of
the pinion in relation to the shaft of the
crown wheel. This adjustment must be made
after replacing the following parts:
• tapered roller bearings.
Fig. 268
4. Refit:
in the center housing (taper distance)
Fig. 269

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Tractors with 2WD

Fig. 270
Tractors with 4WD
cone (9) through the 4WD driving gear (5)
through the rear of the center housing.
Fig. 271

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

4346859M2.
Fig. 272

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
8. IMPORTANT:
Refit:
• the spacer (3).
Fig. 273

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

4346859M2.
Fig. 274

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
10. IMPORTANT:
Refit:
Fig. 275
11. Refit the super creeper unit and the driving

gear (PM) to the pinion (1). Refer to the
chapter and section on refitting the super
creeper unit and its driving gear.
Fig. 276

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Tractors with or without the super creeper option

12. Degrease the thread (F) of the new nut (2)
and the pinion nut. Dry off all threads using a
jet of compressed air. Lightly smear the first
threads of the new nut (2) with Loctite 270
or equivalent and screw it onto the pinion.
see Refitting step 7, page 6-158 or
see Refitting step 9, page 6-160 .
Fig. 277

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

ACT0013330. Using the socket
ACT0013320, turn the pinion anti-clockwise
until a tightening torque of 200 Nm - 250 Nm
is obtained.
Fig. 278

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
15. Remove tools.

16. Lock the nut (2) by bending its collar without
breaking it, into the two opposing grooves of
the pinion, using a suitable punch.
17. Manually check the correct rotation of the
pinion.
Fig. 279

1. Refit:
• the 4WD unit
• the super creeper option unit
• the right-hand hydraulic cover plate (depending on option)
• the rear differential unit/crown wheel assembly (see chapter Removing and refitting the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly, page 6-135 ).
4. Check tightness of:
• the mating faces
• Of the hydraulic unions.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.5.5.8 Replacing the left-hand lubrication sleeve lip seal
Overview of the left-hand lubrication sleeve and its associated parts

(28) Sealing ring (with hooks)
(29) Left-hand lubrication sleeve
(30) Lip seal
(42) Snap ring
(G) Circular lubrication groove
(T) Lubrication hole
Fig. 280

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
The left-hand lubrication sleeve (29) is located

between the left-hand shoulder of the center
housing and the rear differential unit/crown wheel
assembly. It can be removed when the rear
differential unit/crown wheel assembly is removed
from the center housing.
Fig. 281
Only the lip seal (30) can be accessed by removing
just the left-hand trumpet assembly.
Fig. 282

Remove:
• the left-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet assembly (depending on version)
• the left-hand brake system.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Replacing the lip seal

1. Remove the snap ring (42). Extract the worn
lip seal (30) and discard it.
Fig. 283
Refitting the lip seal
2. Clean the lip seal location on the center
housing. Check:
• that this housing is free of shavings or
filings
• that the lubrication port (O) on the left-
hand lubrication sleeve (29) is not
obstructed.
Fig. 284

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Correctly position the lubricated lip seal (30)

and slide it up against the shoulder of service
tool 4346870M1. Use the service tool to fit
the lip seal so that the face (F) of the service
tool is in contact with the machined face of
the center housing. When this condition is
met, the lip seal (30) should be set back
approximately 3.60 mm from the face of the
left-hand lubrication sleeve (29).
4. IMPORTANT: In particular, do not forget to
fit the snap ring to prevent movement of the
lip seal due to the lubrication pressure effect.
Fit the snap ring (42) into the groove of the
center housing.
Fig. 285

Refit:
• the left-hand brake system
• the left-hand GPA52 or GPA54 trumpet assembly (depending on version).
6.5.6 Service tools
6.5.6.1 General

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.5.6.2 GPA50 rear crown wheel and pinion 10x47 - Service tools
Reference ACT0013330

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Reference 4346859M2
Reference 4346860M1
shimming tool

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Reference 4346870M1
seal

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.6 GPA50/Tractor braking

6.6.1 General
Some illustrations may show a slightly different hydro-mechanical main brake system, but its operation and
the applicable procedure are the same.
The brake concept of the GPA50 transmission has:
• a hydro-mechanical main brake system controlled by brake master cylinders
• a hand brake mechanism controlled by cable
Hydro-mechanical main brake system

The hydro-mechanical main brake system is also
called a "pulled brake system".
The mechanical components of this system are
housed in the right-hand and left-hand cavities of
the center housing of the GPA50 rear axle. The
main brake system consists of:
• two mechanisms, each composed of two
extendable platforms thanks to the balls (B)
housed in the ramps (R)
• two hydraulic brake units, located on the upper
right-hand and left-hand parts of the center
housing and controlled simultaneously or
individually by the pressure (PMC) of the brake
master cylinders
• a set of five disks and four intermediate plates
per mechanism.
Fig. 286

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 286
Hand brake mechanism

The hand brake mechanism is controlled
mechanically by cable.
It comprises:
• a lever located by the operator's left hand
• a cable connected to the two hydraulic brake
units
Fig. 287

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Operation of the hydro-mechanical main brake system

The operating principle of the hydro-mechanical
main brake system consists of pulling hydraulically
and simultaneously on the tie rod(s) of the
extendable mechanism(s) while one or both brake
pedals are pressed down.
This pulling is achieved by means of the pressure
(P) exerted on the piston(s) of the hydraulic brake
unit(s) by the brake master cylinder(s).
In this configuration, the brake disks attached to
the trumpet housing input sun gears by splines
and the intermediate plates attached to the center
housing by lugs compress and brake the axle
shafts, immobilizing them.
Fig. 288

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Operation of the mechanically-controlled hand brake mechanism

When you pull the hand brake lever located in the
cab, it pulls a cable and actuates the control rods
(B).
This forces the hand brake mechanisms to
separate and to compress the disks and the
intermediate plates, thus immobilizing the axle
shafts of the rear axle.
In conclusion: The hand brake mechanism
actuates the brake mechanisms as in the main
brake system, except that the action is purely
mechanical.
Fig. 289
6.6.3.1 Overview of the main brake system

NOTE: Some illustrations may show a slightly different profile of the components, but their locations are
the same.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 290
(1) Bleed screw (7) M5x80 screw
(2) Hand brake control rod (8) Cover plate
(3) M8x125 screw (9) Seal
(4) Locknut (10) Piston
(5) Ball joint (11) Seal
(6) Nut (12) Finger
ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(13) Hydraulic brake unit (21) Intermediate plates

(14) Seal (22) Mechanism
(15) Actuator lever (23) Seals
(16) Tie rod diameter 12 mm x 175 (24) Splined pin
(17) Clevis and pin (25) Ring
(19) M12x175 screw (27) Stops
(20) Cover plate (28) Straight union
6.6.3.2 Blown-up view of the main brake system

the same.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 291
(1) Bleed screw (7) M5x80 screw
(2) Hand brake control rod (8) Cover plate
(3) M8x125 screw (9) Seal
(4) Locknut (10) Piston
(5) Ball joint (11) Seal
(6) Nut (12) Finger
ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(13) Hydraulic brake unit (21) Intermediate plates

(14) Seal (22) Mechanism
(15) Actuator lever (23) Seals
(16) Tie rod diameter 12 mm x 175 (24) Splined pin
(17) Clevis and pin (25) Ring
(19) M12x175 screw (27) Stops
(20) Cover plate (28) Straight union
6.6.3.3 Location of the hand brake control components

the same.
Fig. 292
(1) Hand brake lever (8) Pin
(2) Hand brake cable (9) Washer
(3) Pin (10) Pin
(4) Flat washer (11) Hand brake switch
(5) Cotter pin (B) Adjustable stop (hand brake lever side)
(6) Clevis (B1) Adjustable stop (hydraulic brake units side)
(7) Spring

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.6.4.1 Adjusting the main brakes

General
The adjustment of the main brakes should be
performed on each right-hand and left-hand
hydraulic brake unit.
The first step is to tighten the adjusting nut (6)
from 9 Nm to 11 Nm.
The second step is to loosen this same nut by
three turns in order to free the disks and the
intermediate plates by approximately 0.3 mm.
A locknut (4) immobilizes the adjusting nut (6).
Fig. 293

Remove the cover plates of the right-hand and left-
hand hydraulic units. Release the hand brake lever
located in the cab. Check that the cable is not
pinched. If necessary, disconnect it.
Fig. 294
Pre-adjustment

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
IMPORTANT: This pre-adjustment should be performed on the two hydraulic brake units.
1. Before any operation, check that the
adjusting nuts (6) and the lock nuts (4) screw
freely onto the threaded length of the tie
rods of the mechanisms.
Fig. 295
2. Using a dial-type torque wrench, lock the

brake system by tightening the adjusting
nuts (6) from 9 Nm to 11 Nm.
Fig. 296

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Paint two witness marks (R) opposite each

other on the locally manufactured socket and
on the actuator lever.
Fig. 297
4. Turn the socket three turns anticlockwise

and in relation to the fixed witness mark (R)
to unlock the brake system (disks and
intermediate plates released).
Fig. 298

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
5. For the pre-adjustment phase, use the used

locknuts (4). Tighten them without causing
the adjusting nut (6) to move, using the
service tool ref. 4346868M1 (see
chapter GPA50/Tractor braking – Service
tools, page 6-284 ).
Fig. 299
6. Firmly depress each brake pedal several

times (approximately 60 kg) in order to
actuate the brake system.
Fig. 300

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
7. Unscrew:
• the used locknuts (4)
• the adjusting nuts (6)
Definitive adjustment
IMPORTANT: This definitive adjustment should
also be performed on the two hydraulic brake
units in order to eliminate the risk of imbalance
between the right-hand and left-hand brakes
when the tractor brakes.
8. Definitively adjust the two hydraulic brake
units. Repeat steps see step 2, page 6-260
to see step 4, page 6-261 .
Fig. 301
9. Discard the used locknuts (4). Replace them
with new locknuts. Lock them without
causing the adjusting nuts (6) to move, using
the service tool ref. 4346868M1 (see
chapter GPA50/Tractor braking – Service
tools, page 6-284 ).
Fig. 302

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

Refit the cover plates of the hydraulic brake units
fitted with their seal.
Fig. 303
6.6.4.2 Adjusting the hand brake

The hand brake control is adjusted after the main brakes have been adjusted.
Procedure
1. Adjust the length (A): 10 mm (start of the
thread up to the support) on the hand brake
lever support.
2. Adjust the length (B): 343 mm +/- 10 mm
between the brake control levers.
3. Adjust the length (C): 45 mm (start of the
thread up to the support).
4. Actuate the hand brake several times.
5. Check the operation of the hand brake. The
maximum force should be achieved between
7 and 12 notches.
6. If adjustment is necessary, place the lever in
the "brake applied" position, then adjust the
length of the cable on the threaded part at
the lever side or the transmission side.
Fig. 304
Installation

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Open Center version

see Fig. 305 .
excessively.
Fig. 305
3582045M1 see Fig. 305 .
excessively.
Fig. 306

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

Fig. 307
Bleeding procedure
Procedure
bubbles.
air bubbles.
bubbles.
Check
• The system
6.6.5.1 Removing and refitting the disks, the intermediate plates and a brake mechanism

Remove:
• the trumpet(s) (refer to the chapter and section on removing these)
• the hydraulic brake unit (refer to the chapter and section on removing these)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Removal
1. Remove the sun gear (P).
Fig. 308
2. Unscrew the screws (19).
Fig. 309
Fig. 310

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. Remove the first set of disks (18) and

intermediate plates (21), visualizing the order
of assembly in relation to the mechanism
(22): three disks and two intermediate plates
Fig. 311
5. Remove the mechanism (22).
Fig. 312
6. Remove the second set of disks (18) and

intermediate plates (21,) visualizing the order
of assembly: two disks and two intermediate
plates
Fig. 313

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Refitting
7. IMPORTANT: Visually check in particular any
possible wear of the mechanism (22), the
disks (18), the intermediate plates (21) and
IMPORTANT: If the brake disks need to be
replaced, they must be soaked in a bath of
clean transmission oil for about an hour
before being fitted.
Clean and check all components. Replace
those that are defective.
Fig. 314
8. Refit the second set (SJ) of disks (new or

reused) and intermediate plates, starting with
an intermediate plate (21) against the
differential support (S). Alternate disks and
intermediate plates until the two disks and
the two intermediate plates of the second
set (SJ) are installed. The assembly should
finish with a disk against the mechanism.
Fig. 315

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
9. Refit the mechanism (22).
Fig. 316
10. Refit the first set (PJ) of disks (new or

reused) and of intermediate plates, starting
with a disk (18) against the mechanism (22).
Alternate disks and intermediate plates until
the three disks and the two intermediate
plates of the first set (PJ) are installed. The
assembly should finish with a disk against
the cover plate.
Fig. 317
Fig. 318

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
12. Screw in and tighten the screws (19) to

80 Nm to 98 Nm.
Fig. 319

Refit:
• the hydraulic brake unit (refer to the chapter and section on refitting these)
• the trumpet(s) (refer to the chapter and section on refitting these)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.6.5.2 Removal
Procedure
1. Disconnect:
• the hydraulic supply pipe (T) coming from
the brake master cylinder
• the hand brake cable on the rod (2)
Unscrew the screws of the cover plate (8)
and remove them.
Fig. 320

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Unscrew:
• the locknut (4)
• the nut (6)
Fig. 321
3. Unscrew the screws (V).
Fig. 322
4. Remove the hydraulic brake unit.
Fig. 323

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Disassembly
The right-hand and left-hand hydraulic brake units can be repaired. The parts needed for repairing them are
available from the spare parts catalog.
IMPORTANT: The disassembly of a hydraulic brake unit should be performed attentively, carefully and in a
clean environment.
Procedure
1. Visually note the orientation of the rod (2).
Only one rod is referenced in the spare parts
catalog. This rod can be fitted on the right-
hand hydraulic brake unit (D) or the left-hand
hydraulic brake unit (G) provided that the
identification letter (D or G) marked
respectively on each of the faces is oriented
towards the rear of the tractor (as viewed
from the operator's seat). Conclusion: The
two rods are identical and interchangeable
Nevertheless, after removing them, visually
check:
• That each rod (2) is fitted on its
corresponding hydraulic braking unit
• That their identification letter (D) or (G) is
oriented Towards the rear of the tractor
(as viewed from the operator's seat).
Carefully drive out the pin (Gp). It is retained
by a 2-mm hex socket head screw (V)
located at the end of the splined pin (24).
NOTE: The hand brake rod (2) has an oblong
hole allowing the pin (Gp), attached to the
splined pin (24), to move there freely at an
angle. This oblong hole allows the pin (Gp) to
not cause the hand brake rod (2) to move
while the hydraulic brake unit is active
(pressure from the master cylinders).
Fig. 324

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Mark the splined pin (24) with three lines of

paint face-to-face according to the marks (R)
of the see Fig. 325 .
Remove:
• the retainer ring (C)
• the washer (R1)
• the splined pin (24)
Discard the "O" rings (23).
Fig. 325

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Remove the actuator lever (15)/finger (12)

assembly.
If necessary:
• unscrew the stops (B)
• drive out the pin (G)
NOTE: The stops (B) (M5x10 Allen screws)
enable the actuator lever to keep the correct
angle of incidence to pivot on its axis.
Fig. 326
4. If necessary, gradually drive out the piston

(10) using a jet of compressed air. Discard
the "O" ring (11).
Fig. 327

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Reassembly
Procedure
1. Meticulously clean and check the
components. Replace those that are
defective. In particular, check that the friction
rings (B) are in good condition.
Fig. 328
2. Drive out any dirt remaining in the piston

chamber (10). Lubricate the new "O" ring (11)
with clean transmission oil. Fit it into the
groove of the empty hydraulic brake unit.
Fig. 329

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. If the friction rings (B) were replaced, lightly

smear their rim with Loctite 638 or
equivalent. Using a suitable locally obtained
sleeve, carefully fit them into the empty unit
(B1) according to the dimensions specified in
see Fig. 330 . When the fitting is
completed, check that the splined pin (24)
slides and turns freely and smoothly in the
bore of the friction rings (B).
Fig. 330
4. If the stops (B) were removed, lightly smear

their threads with Loctite 242 or equivalent
and moderately tighten them.
Fig. 331

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
5. IMPORTANT: When the fitting is completed,

check that the actuator lever/finger joint is
not stiff.
Check that the pin (G) is in good condition.
Should it prove necessary to replace it, fit a
new pin through the actuator lever (15) and
the finger (12). Smear the spherical sections
(S1) (S2) of the finger (12) with graphite
grease (Loctite Anti-Seize or equivalent).
Refit the actuator lever (15)/finger (12)
assembly.
Fig. 332
6. Lubricate the new seals (23) with clean

transmission oil. Place them in their
respective positions on the splined pin (24).
Lubricate the friction rings (B). Refit the
splined pin (24) into the bore of the rings and
into the actuator lever (15) according to the
marks (R) made during step
see Reassembly step 2, page 6-275 (see
chapter Disassembly, page 6-274 ).
Fit:
• the washer (R1)
• the retainer ring (C)
Fig. 333

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
7. Slide the rod (2) onto the end of the splined

pin (24) according to the position marked
during step see Reassembly step 1, page
6-274 (see chapter Disassembly, page
6-274 ). Carefully fit the pin (Gp). Moderately
tighten its retaining screw (V) after lightly
smearing its thread with Loctite 242 or
equivalent.
Fig. 334
Refitting
Procedure
1. Fit a new "O" ring (14) into the groove of the
hydraulic brake unit. Refit the hydraulic brake
unit on the center housing.
Fig. 335

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. Screw in and tighten the screws (V) to

27 Nm–37 Nm.
Fig. 336
3. IMPORTANT: If the repair has only been

performed on one brake unit, it is essential
that you adjust the two brake mechanisms
(right-hand and left-hand) in order to
eliminate the risk of imbalance between the
right-hand and left-hand brakes when the
tractor brakes.
Adjust the right-hand and left-hand
mechanisms of the brake system using the
nuts (6) and tighten the locknut (4) (see
chapter Adjusting the main brakes, page
6-259 ).
4. Proceed with the sealing test of the hydraulic
brake unit(s).
Fig. 337
Sealing test of the hydraulic brake unit(s)

The sealing test consists of pressurizing the hydraulic brake unit(s) to 25 bar to 30 bar approximately (oil to
a minimum of 60°C) using the pressure from the master cylinder connected to the hydraulic brake unit to
be tested.
The test will be performed with a pressure gage with sufficient capacity, a T-fitting and a hose.
The pressure gage, the T-fitting and the hose should be obtained locally.
The sealing test of the hydraulic brake unit is only valid if the pressure gage and the oil supply line are
completely sealed.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Preparation for the test

1. Remove the original brake line, one end of
which is connected to the bottom right of the
cab, and the other end to the hydraulic brake
unit in question. As a replacement, connect a
pressure gage with sufficient capacity in
series, with the T-fitting and the hose on the
connection (28).
2. Start the tractor engine.
3.
Fig. 338
Testing
4. With the aid of an operator, press down the brake pedal (MC) connected to the hydraulic brake unit to
be tested until a pressure of approximately 25 bar to 30 bar is obtained at the hydraulic brake unit
input (detail 2).
Close the valve of the pressure gage.
Check that the needle remains still for approximately 3 minutes.
If the test is satisfactory, open the valve and progress to the step see step 5, page 6-282 ; if not, try
to identify the cause of the problem.
Check in particular:
• the condition of the internal surface of the hydraulic brake unit in question
• the depth of the groove of the seal on the hydraulic brake unit
• the "O" ring section
If necessary, consider replacing the hydraulic brake unit and the piston.
Reconditioning the tractor
5. Remove the pressure gage and its union and hose.
6. Refit and reconnect the original brake line.
ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
7. Adjust the hand brake control (C) (see

chapter Adjusting the hand brake, page
6-264 ).
Fig. 339
8. Refit the cover plates. Moderately tighten

the screws (V).
9.
Check in particular that the following are
working properly:
• the main brake system
• the hand brake control
Fig. 340
6.6.6 Service tools
6.6.6.1 General

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.6.6.2 GPA50/Tractor braking – Service tools

Reference 4346868M1
Description Tool for simultaneously holding the nut (A) and
torque tightening the counter-nut (B) of brake
mechanisms

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.7 Pneumatic trailer braking

6.7.1 General
Compressor (1)
The compressor is located on the front right of the engine and is permanently driven by the accessories
belt.
The compressor is connected to the engine lubrication system. Air sucked in by the compressor is filtered
through the engine air filter.
Anti-freeze pump (2)

An alcohol-based antifreeze system is injected into the lines of the pneumatic system to avoid freezing.
Regulator (3)
(1) Pressure from the compressor (via the anti-
freeze pump)
(2) Supply to the accumulators
The pressure inside the accumulators is limited by
the pressure regulator. The air pressure is
regulated between 6,9 bar and 8,3 bar. When the
pressure is reached, the surplus of air directed by
the compressor leaves the system via the
regulator and is discharged into the open air via a
muffler. This muffler is fitted on the pressure
regulator.
A safety valve opens at 12 bar.
Fig. 341
Accumulator(s) (4)
The accumulator is used as a tank. It stores a volume of pressurized air.
X168 - Pneumatic brake system pressure sensor (5)

The pressure sensor is located above the accumulator. This sensor monitors the pressure in the system.
The pressure is indicated on the central instrument panel screen.
If the pressure is below 4 bar, a warning indicator light illuminates on the instrument panel.
Manual bleed valve (6)

A manual bleed valve is located under each accumulator. This bleed valve is used to drain the water in the
system.
X339 - Progressivity solenoid valve for pneumatic trailer braking (Boost solenoid valve) (8)
The boost solenoid valve controls the control valve as well as the hydraulic control. It is controlled as soon
as the brake lights are illuminated.
The boost system improves the reaction time of the trailer braking.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Pressure relief valve (9)

(1) Pressure from the boost solenoid valve
(2) Output to the control valve control
The pressure relief valve allows you to adjust the
control pressure of the boost solenoid valve and
the trailer braking reaction time in order to have
balanced tractor/trailer braking. The higher the set
pressure, the more reactive the trailer braking. By
default, the pressure is set to the maximum.
Fig. 342
Control valve (10)

(1) Input supplied by the accumulators
(2) Output to the yellow brake coupler
(3) Bleeding the hydraulic system
(4) Control by the hydraulic braking system
(5) Control by the boost solenoid valve
The control valve is controlled by the tractor's
brake hydraulic system, the boost solenoid valve
and, mechanically, the park brake.
When the brake pedal is not activated, the control
valve is not supplied and so no pressure is
supplied to the yellow brake line.
As soon as the brake pedal is pressed, the valve is
supplied by the boost solenoid valve and then
supplied hydraulically by the braking system.
Fig. 343
Red brake coupler (12)

The red brake coupler supplies the trailer braking safety system. It is permanently supplied with
compressed air.
This coupler must be connected after the yellow brake coupler, then disconnected first.
Yellow brake coupler (13)

The yellow brake coupler supplies the trailer braking service system. The pressure in this line increases
according to the pressure on the brake pedals and use of the parking brake.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.7.1.2 Schematic diagram
Engine running, parking brake engaged
Fig. 344
The control valve (10) is mechanically activated by the park brake located on the rear axle.
The couplers (12) and (13) are under pressure.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Engine running, parking brake disengaged
Fig. 345
The solenoid valve (8) and control valve (10) are not activated.
The red coupler (12) is under pressure.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Engine running, parking brake disengaged and brake pedals actuated
Fig. 346
The solenoid valve (8) is supplied, and the brake pedals are activated.
The control valve (10) is controlled initially by the solenoid valve (8) as soon as the brake lights are
illuminated and then by the hydraulic pressure of the brake master cylinders (F1).
The couplers (12) and (13) are under pressure.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 347
(1) Compressor (9) Pressure relief valve
(2) Antifreeze pump (10) Control valve
(3) Regulator (12) Red coupler
(4) Accumulator (13) Yellow coupler
(5) Pressure sensor (F1) Hydraulic control
(6) Manual bleeding
(8) X339 - Progressivity solenoid valve for
pneumatic trailer braking
6.7.3 Test and diagnostics
6.7.3.1 Pneumatic system test

The test values are to be used to check whether the pneumatic trailer brake is functioning correctly.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Connect pressure gages to the pneumatic
couplers.
Fig. 348
2. The engine is at idle speed, the hand brake is engaged and the pedals are released.
Yellow coupler Red coupler
6,9 bar - 8,3 bar 6,9 bar - 8,3 bar

3. Release the hand brake.
0 bar 6,9 bar - 8,3 bar

4. Press the pedals several times to obtain a pressure lower than the regulator connection pressure (6,9
bar).
5. Wait for the regulator (3) to cut out, then check the pressures.
0 bar 7,9 bar - 8,3 bar

6. Press the pedals gently until the brake lights illuminate and hold this position for 3 seconds.
0,4 bar - 0,6 bar 6,9 bar - 8,3 bar
Without releasing the pedals, press down harder on the pedals.
6,9 bar - 8,3 bar 6,9 bar - 8,3 bar

7. Switch off the engine
0 bar 6,9 bar - 8,3 bar

8. Apply the hand brake.
6,9 bar - 8,3 bar 6,9 bar - 8,3 bar

9. Perform a sealing test on the pneumatic system.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.7.3.2 Sealing test on the pneumatic system.
Procedure
1. Empty the pneumatic-system accumulators.
2. Connect pressure gages to the couplers.
Fig. 349
3. Switch on the engine then switch it off once the pneumatic pressure is at maximum.
4. Read off the pressures.
5. Wait 10 minutes then read off the pressures.
6. The pressures must be within the tolerances (see table below) and must not have dropped by more
than 0.15 bar.
Coupler color Pressure value
Yellow 6.9 bar - 8.3 bar
Red 6.9 bar - 8.3 bar
If the pressure has dropped by more than 0.15 bar, perform a leak detection test on the system.
6.7.4.1 Adjusting the hand brake rod

The control valve (10) is connected to the park brake mechanical system via a connecting rod. This
connecting rod must be adjusted for maximum efficiency.
Procedure
1. Check the adjustment of the hand brake cable.
2. Disconnect the park brake cable (1).
3. Remove the rod (2).
Fig. 350

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. Check or adjust the value 116 mm ± 1 mm. .

To adjust the value, loosen the counter-nuts
(3), and then turn the ball joints (4).
Fig. 351
5. NOTE: The rod must be fitted such that it does not put stress on the levers.
Reassemble in reverse order to removal.
6. Perform a pressure test.If the pressure is not correct, adjust the rod.
Coupler color Brake pedals or hand brake not Brake pedals or hand brake in
in use use
Pressure value Pressure value
Yellow 0 bar 6,9 bar - 8,3 bar
6.7.4.2 Adjusting the pressure relief valve

The pressure relief valve allows you to adjust the trailer braking reaction time in order to have balanced
tractor/trailer braking.
IMPORTANT:
To prevent damage to the tractor brake disks, the pneumatic trailer brake must be actuated before the
tractor braking.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 352
(P1) Pneumatic braking pressure at yellow (1) Pressure relief valve set to 10 bar
coupler (2) Pressure relief valve set to 0 bar
(P2) Hydraulic pressure for the brake master
cylinders
The pressure relief valve setting varies the response time of the pneumatic braking between curve 1 and
curve 2.
Curve 1
As soon as the brake lights illuminate, there is a pressure of 0,4 bar at the yellow coupler.
Curve 2
The control valve is managed solely by the hydraulic braking system. The pneumatic pressure commences
at a hydraulic pressure of 7 bar, so the travel at the brake pedals will be even greater than that for curve 1.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Connect a pressure gage (10 bar) in place of
the plug (A).
Fig. 353
2. Connect a pressure gage to the yellow

coupler.
Fig. 354
3. Lift (1) and turn (2) the valve on the pressure

relief valve to adjust the pressure.
4. Re-lower the valve to lock it in position.
Fig. 355
6.7.5 Service tools
6.7.5.1 General

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.7.5.2 Pneumatic trailer brake — Service tools

Reference F278880020100
Description Red coupling head
Description Yellow coupling head

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Reference 4294527M1
Description Female part of the coupling head (United Kingdom)
Reference 4294528M1
Description Male part of the coupling head (United Kingdom)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.8 GPA50/Linkage and hitch

6.8.1 General
The (GPA50) rear axle is equipped with a linkage
single arm (7), which is assembled on the center
housing (S) by means of the pins (3).
Fitted on each support/bearing (S) is a friction ring
(4) on which is pivoted a pin (3) joined to the
linkage single arm (7) by the retaining pin (AR).
Fig. 356
Grease nipples (G) are fitted to each side of the
housing to ensure lubrication of the friction rings
(4) and the pins (3).
Fig. 357

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(1) Draft sensor

(2) Position sensor
(3) Top link support
(4) Pin
To enable checking of the position and the tractive
effort of the rear hitch, the tractor is fitted
(depending on model) with one or two draft
sensors and a position sensor, which are managed
by the electronic system.
The draft sensor (1) transmits an electrical signal
proportional to the tractive effort.
Fig. 358
Fig. 358

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.8.2 General information about the linkage angular sensor

The Elobau linkage sensor (6) is a magnetic Hall-
effect sensor with no mechanical stop.
It is connected to a three-track connector (X30) (9)
supplied with a voltage of 10 to 30 volts.
The Elobau linkage angular sensor (6) is connected
to the linkage single arm (7) via a sleeve (11) and
two Mecanindus pins (G) and (G1).
The pin (G) is held fast by two stop pins (Ga)
integral with the single arm (7).
This Elobau linkage angular sensor (6) informs the
tractor's electronic system of the different
positions of the single arm (7). It is fastened to a
support which in turn is fastened to the upper
right-hand side of the GPA50 center housing (as
viewed from the operator's seat).
Fig. 359
Construction
(M) Flat section
(T) Hole
(TO) Oblong hole
The Elobau linkage angular sensor (6) comprises:
• (7) a body/support with two oblong holes on
the side for angular adjustment
• (8) a sensor pin seal
• (9) a three-track connector
• (10) a pin with a flat section (M) and a pin hole
(T).
Fig. 360

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.8.3 Layout of the linkage components
Fig. 361
(5) Guard (7) Linkage single arm
(6) Linkage angular sensor (8) Single-acting lift ram (diameter 75 mm)
Fig. 362

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(3) Pivots/pins (7) Linkage single arm

(4) Friction rings (8) Single-acting lift ram (diameter 75 mm)
(5) Guard (S) Supports/bearings molded into the cast-iron
(6) Linkage angular sensor structure of the center housing
6.8.4 Layout of the hitch mechanism components
Fig. 363
(9) Adjustable tie rod (12) Hook-type or telescopic lower arm
(10) Stabilizer support (13) Pin and fasteners
(11) Adjustable stabilizer

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.8.4.2 Exploded view of hitch
Fig. 364
(9) Adjustable tie rod (13) Pin and fasteners
(10) Stabilizer support (CC) Center housing
(11) Adjustable stabilizer (T) Trumpet housing
(12) Hook-type or telescopic lower arm
Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector X30 - Rear linkage position sensor and remove the latter.
2. Remove the guard (5).
Fig. 365

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Disconnect the hydraulic hose pipes

connected to the rear auxiliary spool valve
block.
4. Remove the rear auxiliary spool valve block.
Fig. 366
5. Remove the upper pins (AS) from the lift
rods.
Fig. 367
6. Remove the upper pins (AS) from the lift

rams.
Fig. 368

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Removal
NOTE:
The single arm is supported by two pivots/pins (3). One of the ends of these pins is joined to the single
arm by a retaining pin (AR) and the other end is free in the bore of each friction ring.
Procedure
1. Drive out one of the two pins (Gp) of the
right-hand (D) and left-hand (G) retaining pins
(AR).
Fig. 369

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
2. The pivots/pins (3) have an axial threaded

hole for their removal. Extract the pivots/pins
using a screw (V: 10 x 150) which has been
locally made, screwed into each threaded
hole.
Fig. 370
3. With the help of an assistant, carefully

remove the linkage single arm (7) from the
supports (S) of the GPA50 rear axle.
Fig. 371

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Preparing for refitting
Procedure
1. Check the components and replace those
that are defective.
2. If necessary, drive out the friction rings (4)
and replace them with new friction rings
after lightly smearing their rim with all-
purpose bearing grease.
NOTE: The friction rings must be fitted using
a locally made fitting drift.
NOTE: The face (F1) of the friction rings
must be flat against the face (F) of the
support/bearings (S) after fitting.
3. Lightly smear the interior of the friction rings
with the same type of grease as used Fig. 372
previously.
4. If an operation must be performed on the
stop pins (Ga), fit them to the bottom of the
threaded holes provided for them in the
single arm and smear them with Loctite 648
or equivalent.
Fig. 373

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Refitting
Procedure
1. With the help of an assistant:
• Refit and carefully align the linkage single
arm (7) on the supports/bearings (S) of
the center housing
• Slide the pivots/pins (3) through the bores
of the linkage single arm (7) and the
friction rings until the holes (T) are aligned
with the grooves (G).
NOTE: The pivots/pins (3) fit freely in the
bores of the linkage single arm (7).
2. Fit the retaining pins (AR) and fit the
Mecanindus pins (Gp). Repeat step
see Refitting step 1, page 6-305 (see
chapter Removal, page 6-305 ).
Fig. 374
3. Refit the guard (5). Tighten the countersunk
screws (V) to 35 Nm–55 Nm after lightly
smearing their threads with Loctite 242 or
equivalent.
4. Refit the linkage angular sensor (6).
Fig. 375

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Final steps
Procedure
1. Using a grease pump, grease the friction
rings (4) via the right-hand and left-hand
grease nipples (G).
NOTE: The grease nipples are accessible
only when the single arm is in the raised
position.
Fig. 376
2. Lightly smear the rim of the upper pins AS of

the lift rams with graphite grease or
equivalent and refit them.
Fig. 377

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Lightly smear the rim of the upper pins AS of

the lift rods with graphite grease or
equivalent and refit them.
Fig. 378
4. Refit the rear auxiliary spool valve block.

5. Reconnect:
• The hydraulic pipes and hoses connected
to the rear auxiliary spool valve block
• The connector X30 - Rear linkage position
sensor.
Fig. 379
6. Calibrate the linkage device.
6.8.5.2 Removing/refitting a draft sensor (bottom link)

The steps are identical for the left-hand side.
Removal
1. Place the rear linkage in the lowered position.
2. Disconnect the connector of the draft sensor harness located above the rear axle.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
3. Unscrew the screws (1) and (2).

4. Remove the guard (3).
Fig. 380
5. Remove the lock (4).
Fig. 381
6. Place a fixed axle stand under the bottom

link.
7. Remove the draft sensor (5).
Fig. 382
Refitting
8. Lightly smear the draft sensor (5) with graphite grease or equivalent.
9. Follow the removal steps in reverse order to refit.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
10. Tighten the screws (2) to 70 Nm.

11. Check that the rear linkage operates
correctly.
Fig. 383
6.8.5.3 Removing/refitting the draft sensor (top link)

Position of the draft sensor
The draft sensor (15) of the rear linkage device is
located on the top link.
Fig. 384

1. Start the tractor engine. Raise the lower hitch
arms as far as possible using the tractor's
electronic system so that there is no obstacle
preventing the removal of the draft sensor.
Switch off the engine ignition. Chock the hitch
lower arms using wooden block(s).
2. Disconnect the connector (X32) from the draft
sensor harness located above the GPA50 rear
axle.
Fig. 385

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Removal
1. Release and remove the screws (V).
Fig. 386
2. Remove the cover (C).
Fig. 387
3. Remove the lock (18).
Fig. 388

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. Remove the draft sensor (15) from the top

link.
Fig. 389
Refitting
5. Lightly smear the rim of the draft sensor (15)
with graphite grease or equivalent and slide it
through the top link support.
Fig. 390
6. Position the draft sensor (15) correctly and

slide the lock (18) according to the
arrangement shown see Fig. 391 .
Fig. 391

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
7. Refit the cover plate (C). Screw on and

tighten the screws (V) to 5 Nm - 10 Nm after
lightly smearing their threads with Loctite
270 or equivalent.
Fig. 392

Remove the wooden blocks, immobilizing the hitch lower arms. Start the tractor engine. Lower the lower
hitch arms as far as possible using the tractor's electronic system. Check that the linkage device is
operating correctly.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.8.5.4 Removing/refitting the linkage angular sensor

1. Start the tractor engine. Lower the lower hitch
arms as far as possible using the tractor's
electronic system. If the tractor's electronic
system is faulty, operate the raising/lowering
solenoid valve on the linkage spool valve
located at the rear of the tractor.
2. Disconnect the (X30) sensor.
Fig. 393

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Removal
Fig. 394
2. Remove the linkage angular sensor (6).

IMPORTANT: If the angular sensor must be
replaced, prepare for refitting.
Fig. 395

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Preparing the linkage angular sensor

3. Check:
• That the pin (6) of the linkage angular
sensor rotates 360° freely
• The presence of the seal (J)
4. Position the flat section (M) of the linkage
angular sensor pin upward. Mark this
position with two paint marks (P) and (P1)
opposite one another.
NOTE: These paint marks indicating the
upward orientation of the flat section (M) of
the pin will be useful when refitting the
angular sensor on the single arm.
Fig. 396

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
5. Slide the sleeve (11) onto the angular sensor

pin (6). With the help of an assistant, fit:
• The Mecanindus pin (G1) in the sleeve
(11) while the latter is held in a suitable
fixture clamped in a vice (see detail A)
• The Mecanindus pin (G) oriented
according to the figure and fitted to the
indicated dimension according to the
previous method (see detail B)
Fig. 397

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Refitting
6. Check that the lower hitch arms are lowered
as far as possible.
7. Align the marks (P) and (P1).
8. Refit the linkage angular sensor (6):
• By sliding the pin (G) through the guard
and between the two stop pins (Ga)
• By positioning the socket (P) provided for
the connector (C) facing downward
9. In preparation for calibrating the linkage
device, turn the linkage angular sensor (6) so
that the screws (V) are in the center of the
oblong holes (O) of the sensor. Moderately
tighten the screws (V).
Fig. 398

1. Reconnect the (X30) connector.
2. IMPORTANT: Regardless of the type of operation performed on the linkage angular sensor 6 (removal/
replacement), the calibration procedure for the linkage device must be performed.
Calibrate the linkage device.
6.8.6 Service tools
6.8.6.1 General

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.8.6.2 GPA50/Linkage and hitch - Service tools

Reference -
Description Ring fitting drift
Supplier To be manufactured locally.

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.9 GPA50/Auto-hitch
6.9.1 Auto-hitch general features
Lift rod-type auto-hitch
The auto-hitch operates with the rear linkage for
lifting and lowering and a hydraulic ram to extend
the hitch. The hitch is locked in the high position. A
cable unlocks the hitch for lowering.
Fig. 399

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 400
(1) Fixed section (2) Moving section
ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(3) Hitch (5) Right-hand rod

(4) Left-hand rod
6.9.2.2 Blown-up view of the auto-hitch
Fig. 401
(1) Locking (8) Washer
(2) Fixed frame (9) Pin
(3) Moving plate ((10))Pin
(4) Ram ((11))Washer
(5) Moving plate (12) Snap ring
(6) Pin (13) Spring
(7) Hitch (14) Locking
6.9.3.1 Adjusting the auto-hitch tie-rods
Procedure
1. On the support, disconnect the lower clevises of the tie-rods and the control cable.
2. Start the engine
3. Activate the internal or external linkage control (depending on option) so that the linkage arms are in
the maximum high position (continuous pumping).

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
4. Compress the lower part of the hitch along

the tractor centreline, as shown by “F” using
a trolley jack, in order to obtain a dimension X
of 6 mm and 14 mm between the top of the
main support and the top of the mobile plate.
Fig. 402
5. Adjust the length of the tie rods by turning

their square section sliders (1) in order to
engage the clevises (2) in the pins (3) of the
support.
6. Fit the pins.
7. Remove the jack.
8. Reconnect the control.
Fig. 403
9. Check the operation of the mobile plate by
operating the lever (3) on the console inside
the cab.
NOTE: If the lock does not operate correctly,
the control must be adjusted.
Fig. 404

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.9.3.2 Adjusting the control

On the lever located in the cab
1. Remove the rear trim.
2. Leave the lever in the "rest" position.
3. Screw the handle (1) fully onto the end of the
threaded part of the cable.
4. Tighten the nut (2).
5. Adjust the sleeve stop on the support with
an equal length of thread showing on each
side of the nuts (3) and (4).
NOTE: Check that the cable is not pinched.
Fig. 405
On the auto-hitch
6. Check that the return spring of rod (B) is
present.
7. Screw the clevis (1) level with the threaded
end of the cable (2).
8. Fit the clevis on rod (B) using the clip (3)
while ensuring that the rod is in the locked
position. Tighten the nut (4).
9. Fit the sleeve stop (5) in the support (6) and
tighten the nuts (7) (8) so that there is no
play in the cable (2) and the cable is not
pinched.
NOTE: During adjustment, ensure that rod B
remains locked.
Fig. 406

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.9.4.1 Refitting the auto-hitch

Tightening torque for the screws
Fig. 407
(1) 280 Nm (3) 375 Nm
(2) 60 Nm

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.10 GPA50/Wheels and hubs

6.10.1 General
The GPA50 rear axle may be fitted with GPA52 or
GPA54 trumpets. They are equipped with a
flanged axle shaft.
The wheel disk is made of steel regardless of the
type of trumpet fitted.
Fig. 408
The rear axle beam track width of the GPA50 rear
axle can be adjusted.
Fig. 409

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Fig. 409
View of the 4WD front axle beam
Fig. 410

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.10.2.1 Layout of wheel and hub components
Fig. 411
(1) Steel rim (4) Wheel stud (M18x150)
(2) Fasteners (M16 screws, washer of diameter (5) Widening spacer (if fitted)
16,5 mm and M16 nut) (6) Steel wheel disk
(3) Hub (flanged axle shaft) (7) Tire

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.10.2.2 Exploded view of a steel front wheel and its hub
Fig. 412
(1) Steel rim (3) 4WD front axle beam
(2) Fasteners (M16 screws, washer of diameter (4) Wheel stud (M18x150)

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
(7) Tire
6.10.2.3 Blown-up view of a steel rear wheel and its hub
Fig. 413
(1) Steel rim (4) Wheel stud (M18x150)
(2) Fasteners (M16 screws, washer of diameter (5) Widening spacer (if fitted)
(3) Hub (flanged axle shaft) (7) Tire

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
6.10.3.1 Tightening torques

Rear wheels
Tightening torque for M18 wheel nuts: 400 Nm -
450 Nm
Tightening torque for the bolts (2): 180 Nm - 250
Nm
Fig. 414

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Front wheel
Tightening torque for M18 wheel nuts: 400 Nm -
450 Nm
Tightening torque for the bolts (2): 200 Nm - 260
Nm
Fig. 415
6.10.3.2 Removing/refitting a rear wheel on a flanged shaft

1. Immobilize the tractor. Carefully chock the front
wheels. Apply the hand brake.
2. Slightly release the nuts (1) of the wheel to be
removed.
3. Using a workshop trolley jack of sufficient
capacity, lift the appropriate side of the tractor.
Fig. 416

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle
Procedure
1. Remove:
• The wheel nuts (1)
• The wheel, using a lifting device and a
suitable sling to be inserted into the
threaded hole (T) of the wheel disk or
with the help of an assistant
• The widening spacer (E)
Fig. 417
2. Fit an axle safety stand under the trumpet

housing.
Refitting
Fig. 418
3. NOTE: If this is the first fitting of the
widening spacer(s) (E), be sure to check that
the wheel studs (4) are of the correct length.
Using a workshop trolley jack, slightly lift the
appropriate side of the tractor and fit a safety
stand.
4. Refit the widening spacer(s) (E) against the
axle shaft flange or to the outside of the
wheel disk (depending on the desired
adjustment of the rear axle beam track
width).
Fig. 419

ACT0021460
6. Rear axle

Refit:
• The wheel according to the same method used
for removal and with the previously used tools
• The wheel nuts (1) (M18x150) and tighten them
to the torque indicated in the corresponding
chapter.
Fig. 420
6.10.3.3 Replacing a rear wheel stud on a flanged shaft

NOTE: If there is a wide enough space between the inner side of the wheel and that of the transmission, it
might be possible to drive out the faulty stud from inside the wheel without removing the wheel, and then
fit a new stud. Otherwise, remove the wheel.
Procedure
1. Drive out the defective wheel stud.

2. Clean the new stud and its housing in the shaft flange.
3. Lightly smear the ribbed part of the replacement wheel stud with Loctite 270 or equivalent.
4. Fit the new stud using a bronze drift and a suitable hammer.
5. If the wheel has been removed:
• refit it as per the sling method used previously
• tighten the wheel nuts (M18x150) to the torque indicated in the corresponding chapter.

ACT0021460
Table of contents
7. Power take-off
7.1 GPA50/Rear PTO clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.1.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.2.1 View of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.2.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.1.2.3 Gerotor lubrication pump composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.1.2.4 Rear power take-off clutch composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.1.2.5 Identification of channels and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.1.3.1 Specifications - Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.1.3.2 Removing/refitting the clutch assembly/gerotor lubrication pump body . . . . . . . 7-14
7.1.3.3 Separation and assembly of the clutch assembly/gerotor lubrication pump body
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.1.3.4 Disassembling/reassembling the clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.1.3.5 Disassembling/reassembling the gerotor lubrication pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.1.4 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.1.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.1.4.2 GPA50/Rear PTO clutch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.2.2.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.2.2.3 Identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.2.2.4 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7.2.3.1 Shimming shafts of the rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.2.4.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.2.4.2 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the rear power take-off with
two electrohydraulic speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.2.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.2.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.2.5.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.3 GPA50/Rear PTO with three electrohydraulic speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
7.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
7.3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
7.3.2.1 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7.3.2.3 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
7.3.2.4 Identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
7.3.2.5 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
7.3.3.1 Preparation for shaft shimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82

ACT0021460
Table of contents
7.3.3.2 Shimming the drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84

7.3.3.3 Shimming the output shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
7.3.3.4 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
7.3.4.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
7.3.4.2 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the rear PTO with three
electrohydraulic speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
7.3.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-108
7.3.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-108
7.3.5.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with three electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools . . . . . . . . 7-108
7.4 GPA50/GSPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-110
7.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-110
7.4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-110
7.4.2.1 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-112
7.4.2.3 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-114
7.4.2.4 Identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-116
7.4.2.5 Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-118
7.4.3.1 Shimming the GSPTO gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-119
7.4.4.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-120
7.4.4.2 Removing/refitting the rear block with the GSPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-120
7.4.4.3 Disassembling/reassembling the GSPTO control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-122
7.5 Zuidberg front power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-125
7.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-125
7.5.2.1 Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-126
7.5.2.2 Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-127
7.5.2.3 Hydraulics diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-128
7.5.3.1 Exploded view of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-129
7.5.3.2 Exploded view of the hydraulic pump and the clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-130
7.5.3.3 Exploded view of drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-131
7.5.4 Tests and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-132
7.5.4.1 Electrical tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-132
7.5.4.2 Hydraulic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-133
7.5.5.1 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-133
7.5.5.2 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.1 GPA50/Rear PTO clutch

7.1.1 General
7.1.1.1 General
The 2- or 3-speed rear PTO clutch is electrically controlled by a proportional solenoid valve, which is itself
controlled by the tractor's electronic system.
The clutch (E)/housing (2 )assembly of the Gerotor
pump located in front of the upper section of the
center housing, rotationally connecting the engine
flywheel vibration damper to the mechanical
components of the rear PTO by two shafts.
Fig. 1
The clutch (E) consists of a unit supported by two
ball bearings centered in the body (2) of the
Gerotor pump (25) (26). The body is fitted to the
center housing and supports the clutch. The
hydraulic piston which compresses the disks and
the intermediate plates is lodged in the bell
housing.
The bell housing comprises:
• At the front, straight-tooth gear which drives
the hydraulic pump(s) (depending on the
hydraulic equipment);
NOTE: The bell housing and the straight-tooth
gear are machined as a single component. They Fig. 2
form a single-piece assembly.
• At the back, the bell housing is fitted with a set
of disks and intermediate plates.

The rear PTO clutch has two operation positions.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 3
(1) Clutch engaged position (2) Clutch disengaged position
Clutch engaged position

The rear PTO clutch is supplied by the 21-bar hydraulic system and by a proportional solenoid valve. The
latter is fitted on a cover plate located above the center housing.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
An internal transfer pipe hydraulically links the cover plate previously mentioned to the port and the 21-bar
channel of the rear PTO clutch.
Pressurized oil enters the body (2) via the 21-bar
ports (O) and then flows to the restrictor (28) and
the piston (8) via an internal channel.
The pressure moves the piston which compresses
the disks and intermediate plates. The
intermediate plates (11) are splined to the bell
housing (23). The disks (21) are splined to the drive
hub (18).
Fig. 4
The outlet movement of the rear PTO clutch is then transmitted to a shaft and then to a driving gear train
fitted in the rear PTO unit. This unit is lodged behind the center housing.
When the clutch is engaged, the rear PTO brake piston is at rest and releases the lower line of the 2- or 3-
speed rear PTO unit.
Clutch disengaged position

If the solenoid valve no longer supplies the rear
PTO clutch, the piston (8) is pressed against the
bell housing (23) by the spring (19).
The oil in the hydraulic chamber of the piston (8) is
directed to the return by the proportional solenoid
valve.
The valve ball (6) leaves its seat to assist in a faster
decompression of the piston hydraulic chamber.
Fig. 5

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 6
(1) Gerotor lubrication pump cover plate (17) Chamfered washer
(2) Gerotor lubrication pump housing (18) Drive hub
(3) 1.5-bar valve (19) Spring
(4) Rivets (20) Circlip
(5) Ball bearing (21) Disks
(6) Valve (22) Seal
(7) Seal (23) Bell
(8) Piston (24) Seal rings
(9) Belleville spring (25) Stator
(10) Spring support (26) Rotor
(11) Intermediate plates (27) Ball bearing
(12) Cover plate (28) Restrictor
(13) Spring seat (29) Circlip
(14) Circlip (30) Seal
(15) Ball bearing (31) Seal
(16) Chamfered screw (32) Seal

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
(33) Mecanindus pins (A) Gerotor lubrication pump support

(34) M6 screw (Allen screw) (B) Rear PTO clutch
(35) M10 screw x 35
Fig. 7

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
(1) Gerotor lubrication pump cover plate (20) Circlip

(2) Gerotor lubrication pump housing (21) Disks
(3) 1.5-bar valve (22) Seal
(4) Rivets (23) Bell
(5) Ball bearing (24) Seal rings
(6) Valve (25) Stator
(7) Seal (26) Rotor
(8) Piston (27) Ball bearing
(9) Belleville spring (28) Restrictor
(10) Spring support (29) Circlip
(11) Intermediate plates (30) Seal
(12) Cover plate (31) Seal
(13) Spring seat (32) Seal
(14) Circlip (33) Mecanindus pins
(15) Ball bearing (34) M6 screw (Allen screw)
(16) Chamfered screw (35) M10 screw x 35
(17) Chamfered washer (A) Gerotor lubrication pump support
(18) Drive hub (B) Rear PTO clutch
(19) Spring

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.1.2.3 Gerotor lubrication pump composition
Fig. 8
(1) Gerotor lubrication pump cover plate (30) Seal
(2) Gerotor lubrication pump housing (31) Seal
(3) 1.5-bar valve (32) Seal
(5) Ball bearing (33) Mecanindus pins
(25) Stator (34) M6 screw (Allen screw)
(26) Rotor (35) M10 screw x 35
(27) Ball bearing

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.1.2.4 Rear power take-off clutch composition
Fig. 9
(6) Valve (9) Belleville spring
(7) Seal (10) Spring support
(8) Piston (11) Intermediate plates

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
(13) Spring seat (20) Circlip

(14) Circlip (21) Disks
(15) Ball bearing (22) Seal
(16) Chamfered screw (23) Bell
(17) Chamfered washer (24) Seal rings
(18) Drive hub (28) Restrictor
(19) Spring

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.1.2.5 Identification of channels and ports

Identification of channels
Fig. 10

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
(1) Rear PTO clutch in clutch engaged position (2) Rear PTO clutch in clutch disengaged
(solenoid valve (E) powered) position (solenoid valve (E) not powered)
An external pipe directs the low pressure oil (21 bar) toward the front differential lock (B D AV).
21 bar low pressure
Lubrication
The rear PTO clutch is supplied by the proportional solenoid valve (E).
Identification of ports
(3) 1.5-bar valve
(A) Gerotor pump suction port
(R) Return port (if pressure is > 1.5 bar)
The Gerotor lubrication pump (G), located in front
of the rear PTO clutch, contributes to the
lubrication of some components of the gearbox. It
also ensures the internal lubrication of the rear
PTO clutch.
Fig. 11

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.1.3.1 Specifications - Tightening torques
Fig. 12
7.1.3.2 Removing/refitting the clutch assembly/gerotor lubrication pump body
Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Disconnect the tractor between the gearbox and the rear axle (refer to the chapter on separating the
assemblies).
2. Remove the spring (R).

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
3. Disconnect the X481 connector and remove

the sensor located above the center housing.
Fig. 13
Removal
Procedure
1. Unscrew the two diametrically opposed M10
screws (35) and replace them with two guide
pins. Unscrew the three remaining screws.
These five screws attach the Gerotor pump
clutch (E) / body (2) assembly of the to the
center housing.
2. Remove the Gerotor pump clutch (E) / body
(2) assembly from the center housing. The
21-bar low pressure supply tube of the port
(O) remains in the center housing.
NOTE: The body (2) of the Gerotor
lubrication pump is positioned on the center
housing using two Mecanindus pins (33).
3. Discard the "O" rings (30) (31) (32).
Fig. 14

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
4. If necessary, remove the valve (3) from the

lubrication circuit (1.5 bar).
Fig. 15
Refitting
Procedure
2. If the 1.5-bar valve (3) has been removed,
check:
• that it is free from dirt;
• that it operates manually and correctly.
3. Screw on and tighten the 1.5-bar valve (3)
(fitted with its seals) onto the cover plate (1)
to a torque of 28 Nm–30 Nm.
4. Lightly smear:
• a new "O" ring (31) with miscible grease
and place it in the groove on the suction Fig. 16
port (A) of the Gerotor pump body (2);
• a new "O" ring (32) with miscible grease
and place it in the 21-bar low pressure
port (O).
5. Check that the following are present:
• of the two guide pins screwed into the
center housing during removal of the
Gerotor pump clutch (E )/ body (2)
assembly;
• of the two Mecanindus pins (33) on the
Gerotor pump body (2).
6. Refit the Gerotor pump clutch (E) / body (2),
making sure that:
• the end of the 21-bar low pressure
transfer tube is positioned correctly in the
port (O) of the Gerotor pump body (2);
• the teeth (D) of the clutch bell housing
mesh correctly with the teeth of the
hydraulic pump gear(s) (depending on the
hydraulic equipment);
• the splines on the PTO shaft mesh
correctly with the splines on the clutch
hub.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7. Tap lightly on the Gerotor pump body so that

the pump is correctly positioned on the
mating face of the center housing.
8. Screw in and tighten three M10 screws (35)
to 57 Nm–77 Nm, having first lightly smeared
their threads with Loctite 242 or equivalent.
Take out the guide studs. Screw in and
tighten the remaining two M10 screws (35)
to 57 Nm–77 Nm, having first lightly smeared
9. Lightly smear the coils of the spring (R) with
miscible grease and place it in the clutch
port.
10. Lightly smear a new seal (30) with miscible
grease and place it in the groove on the
Gerotor pump body (2).
Fig. 17
Final steps
Procedure
1. Refit the X481 sensor along with its seal and
reconnect the connector.
NOTE: This sensor is not adjustable.
2. Manually check the backlash between the
teeth of the clutch bell housing and the
hydraulic pump gears (depending on the
hydraulic equipment).
3. Connect the tractor between the gearbox
and the rear axle (refer to the chapter on
separating the assemblies).
4. Start the tractor engine.
Check:
Fig. 18
• the correct operation of the clutch and all
hydraulic components;
• the tightness of the systems.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.1.3.3 Separation and assembly of the clutch assembly/gerotor lubrication pump body
Diagram
Fig. 19
(1) Gerotor lubrication pump and body (2) Rear PTO clutch
Separation
Procedure
1. Remove the Gerotor pump body / clutch assembly (see chapter Preliminary steps, page 7-14 ).
2. Place the clutch / pump body assembly on a bench.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off

4. Tap gently on the end of the clutch as
indicated by the arrow, using a plastic mallet.
5. Separate the clutch from the Gerotor pump
body.
Fig. 20
6. If necessary, remove the clutch seal rings
(24). If they are going to be reused, visually
identify the seal rings with regards to the
grooves in the sleeve.
Fig. 21
Assembling
Procedure
1. Check:
• the elasticity of the seal rings manually, without damaging or breaking them;
• their profile, visually.
If uncertain, replace them.
2. If the seal rings (24) are reused, lightly smear them with miscible grease and fit them into the
grooves previously marked on the sleeve. If new seal rings (24) are used, lightly smear them with
miscible grease and fit them, to the grooves on the sleeve.
In either case, check that the seals are correctly positioned in the bottom of the groove.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
3. Then reassemble the clutch and the body of

the Gerotor pump, aligning the flat section
(M) of the rotor (26) with the flat section of
the clutch bell sleeve (M1).
Fig. 22
4. Tap gently on the cover (1) of the Gerotor

pump using a plastic mallet to fit the clutch
assembly into the Gerotor pump body.
Fig. 23

6. Refit the clutch / Gerotor pump body
assembly (see chapter Preliminary steps,
page 7-14 ).
Fig. 24
7.1.3.4 Disassembling/reassembling the clutch
Disassembling the clutch

1. Remove the Gerotor lubrication pump clutch / body assembly (see chapter Preliminary steps, page
7-14 ).
2. Separate the Gerotor lubrication pump clutch / body assembly (see chapter Separation and assembly of
the clutch assembly/gerotor lubrication pump body, page 7-18 ).

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Procedure
1. Remove the seal rings (24). Discard them if
necessary.
Fig. 25
2. Remove:
• the cover plate (12);
• the disks (21) and intermediate plates
(11).
Fig. 26

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
3. Place the locally sourced tool on the clutch

bell housing (23). Grip the clutch bell housing
sleeve in a vice with protective jaws.
Fig. 27
Fig. 28
4. Unscrew the screw (16).
Remove:
• the hub (18);
• the spring seat (13);
• the spring (19);
• the spring support (10);
• the Belleville progressivity washer (9).

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 28
5. If necessary, remove the retainer ring (14) and drive out the bearing (15).
6. Gradually remove the piston (8) using a jet of compressed air or by tapping the clutch bell housing
(23) against the edge of a wooden workbench.
7. Remove and discard the seals (7) (22) of the piston (8).

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Reassembling the clutch

Preparing for reassembly
Fig. 29

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
1. Clean and replace parts. Replace those that are defective. Check the movement of the valve ball (6)
by rapidly shaking the bell housing (23) up and down vertically: the movement of the ball should be
audible. If not, replace the valve. Check for the presence of the restrictor (28).
2. Using a press and a suitable fixture in contact with the external surface of the bearing (15), fit the
bearing up to the shoulder of the hub (18).
Reassembly
4. Lubricate and fit new seals (7) (22) on the
piston (8) respectively.
5. Fit the piston using a plastic hammer,
checking during the fitting process that there
are no fragments of seal on its rim.
6. Refit:
• the Belleville progressivity washer (9)
according to the position determined
insee Fig. 29 ;
• the spring support (10);
• the spring (19);
• the spring seat (13).
7. Refit the pre-assembled hub (18), with the Fig. 30
tool used during disassembly, to gradually
compress the spring (19).
8. Tighten the front section of the clutch bell
housing (23) in a vice fitted with protective
jaws.
9. Position the washer (17) correctly in the drive
hub (18).
10. Lightly smear the thread of the screw (16)
with Loctite 242 or equivalent and tighten to
24 Nm–28 Nm.
11. Stack the new or reused disks (21) and the
intermediate plates (11), starting with an
intermediate plate against the spring support
(10). Alternate the assembly until the number
of disks and intermediate plates found during
disassembly is reached.
14. Refit the seal rings (see chapter Separation
and assembly of the clutch assembly/gerotor
lubrication pump body, page 7-18 ).

Reassemble the Gerotor lubrication pump clutch / body assembly (see chapter Separation and assembly of
7.1.3.5 Disassembling/reassembling the gerotor lubrication pump

1. Remove the Gerotor lubrication pump clutch / body assembly (see chapter Preliminary steps, page
7-14 ).
2. Separate the Gerotor lubrication pump clutch / body assembly (see chapter Separation and assembly of
ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Disassembly
1. Remove the "O" rings (30) (31) (32).
2. If necessary:
• Remove the 1.5-bar valve (3);
• Drive out the Mecanindus pins (33);
• Extract the ball bearing (5).
3. Unscrew the four screws (34).
4. Separate the cover plate (1) from the housing
(2) of the Gerotor pump.
5. Remove:
• stator (25);
• rotor (26).
Fig. 31
Reassembly
those that are defective. Ensure that the
hydraulic channels of the cover plate (1) and
the housing (2) of the Gerotor pump are not
obstructed. Check that the rivets (R) are
present.
7. Lightly lubricate the rotor (26) and the stator
(25) with clean transmission oil and slide
them into the housing (2) of the Gerotor
pump.
Fig. 32

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
8. Position the cover plate (1) and the housing

(2) of the Gerotor pump in order to align the
two indicated recesses see Fig. 33 . Fit the
two parts.
9. IMPORTANT: After tightening the screw
(34), check that the elements of the Gerotor
pump are not pinched.
If the screws (34) are reused, lightly smear
Screw in and tighten these screws to
12 Nm–16 Nm.
NOTE: The threads of the new screws (34)
available from the spare parts catalog are
pre-soaked with a brake compound.
Fig. 33
10. If work is necessary on the parts mentioned
in the operation see step 2, page 7-26 , carry
out the following steps:
• Fit the ball bearing (5) against the
shoulder of the Gerotor pump housing (2);
• Fit the Mecanindus pins (33) into the
recesses of the Gerotor pump housing
(2);
• Screw the 1.5-bar valve (3) (clean and
fitted with its seals) onto the cover plate
(1). Tighten to 28 Nm–30 Nm.
11. Replace the "O" rings (30) (31) (32).
Fig. 34

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off

1. Reassemble the clutch/Gerotor lubrication pump housing assembly (see chapter Separation and
assembly of the clutch assembly/gerotor lubrication pump body, page 7-18 ).
2. Refit the clutch/Gerotor lubrication pump housing assembly (see chapter Preliminary steps, page 7-14 ).
7.1.4 Service tools
7.1.4.1 General
7.1.4.2 GPA50/Rear PTO clutch - Service tools

Reference -
Description Spring compression tool
Supplier Makeshift tool

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds

7.2.1 General
7.2.1.1 General
The unit fitted to the rear of the GPA50 rear axle contains all the mechanical components of the two speed
rear PTO. These elements rest on tapered roller bearings for which certain cups are fitted "tightened" and
others are "free" in the single-piece housing.
The two-speed rear PTO is independent of the transmission.
Changing between the speeds (540 - 540E) of the two-speed PTO is managed hydraulically via the
electronic system of the tractor.
The two-speed rear PTO is divided into four parts:
• The clutch
The clutch is located on the upper power take-off shaftline and at the front of the center housing. The
front part is fitted with a Gerotor type lubrication pump which lubricates the clutch and the gearbox. It is
supported by two ball bearings fitted in a support mounted on the center housing.
• The upper shaftline
The upper shaftline of the rear PTO transmits the engine speed to the drive gears of the rear PTO unit
via the clutch and a line consisting of three shafts. The drive gears are housed in a single-piece housing.
The tapered roller bearings supporting the drive shaft and gears are shimmed with a preload using
shim(s) inserted between the front bearing cup and the single-piece housing cover plate.
• The lower shaftline
The rear PTO lower shaftline is supported by
two tapered roller bearings mounted
respectively in the single-piece housing
The bearings are held in position by a nut
screwed to the front end of the output shaft.
Shimming by preloading the tapered roller
bearings is achieved using shims which are
inserted between the front bearing cup and the
single-piece housing.
A lip seal fitted to the single-piece housing
ensures the output shaft tightness. Fig. 35
Improved sealing is provided for cases of
prolonged use in damp environments such as
paddy fields. A special seal is then fitted to the
end of the output shaft.
The output shaft is fitted with an
interchangeable end (E) which can have 6 or 21
splines.
NOTE: The number of splines on the output
shaft depends on the nature of the driven
implement and the required rotation speed.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
• The power take-off brake.

The rear PTO features an electrohydraulically
controlled piston brake (32). This piston is
located in the single-piece housing opposite the
540E driven gear (18).
A ribbed washer (31) (bimetallic) located
between the piston and the 540E driven gear
(18) ensures friction.
Fig. 36

Two-speed rear PTO (540 - 540E)
Fig. 37
The two-speed rear PTO is hydraulically controlled by two ON/OFF solenoid valves which are managed by
the electronic system of the tractor.
The mechanical kinematics of the two-speed rear PTO are handled by an input and output movement (M):
• Input movement
The input movement (M) is generated by the tractor engine and transmitted to the shaft (6) and gears
which drive the upper shaftline of the rear PTO via the clutch.
• Output movement
The output movement (M) is transmitted to the driven gears (18) or (21) of the lower shaftline of the
rear PTO depending on the position (540 or 540E) of the coupler (19).
Lubrication of the rear PTO components

The upper shaftline

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
A channel and tube take the lubricant oil under pressure to the upper shaftline of the rear power take-off.
The flow of oil to the drive gears and the tapered roller bearings is controlled by calibrated ports and a seal
ring which are located, respectively, in the single-piece housing and on the rear end of the drive gear.
The lower shaftline
The lower shaftline of the rear PTO is supplied with pressure via a tube located at the end of the output
shaft and connected to the main channel of the upper shaftline.
A central channel and radial holes in the output shaft ensure that the rings, the driven gears and the lip of
the seal are lubricated.
The tapered roller bearings are lubricated by splashing.
The power take-off brake.
The power take-off brake is not lubricated under pressure. Only the serration on the friction washer and the
splashing of oil in the single-piece housing allow a film of oil to pass between the friction washer and the
540E drive gear during operation.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 38
(1) Screw (2) Plate
ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
(3) Bearing cup (20) Hub

(4) Bearing cone (21) Gear (540 rpm)
(5) Single-piece housing (22) Shim(s)
(6) Drive shaft and gears (23) Bearing cup
(7) Screw (24) Bearing cone
(8) Guard (if fitted) (25) Shouldered thrust washer
(9) Hydraulic control unit (26) Nut
(10) Bearing cup (27) Lubrication tube and its mounting
(11) Bearing cone (28) Fork
(12) Seal rings (29) Rod
(13) Bearing cup (30) Shim(s)
(14) Lip seal (31) Friction washer
(15) Bearing cone (32) Piston
(16) Shaft (33) "O" ring
(17) Washer (34) Finger
(18) 540E gear (35) Circlip
(19) Coupler (36) Pad

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 39
(A) Single-piece housing, 540 - 540E (C) Rear view of the rear power take-off unit,
(B) Cross section of the hydraulic control ram, 540 - 540E
540 - 540E (D) Cross section of the fork and its control rod

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 40
(1) Screw (4) Bearing cone
(2) Plate (5) Single-piece housing
(3) Bearing cup (6) Drive shaft and gears

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
(7) Screw (23) Bearing cup

(8) Guard (if fitted) (24) Bearing cone
(9) Hydraulic control unit (25) Shouldered thrust washer
(10) Bearing cup (26) Nut
(11) Bearing cone (27) Lubrication tube and its mounting
(12) Seal rings (28) Fork
(13) Bearing cup (29) Rod
(14) Lip seal (30) Shim(s)
(15) Bearing cone (31) Friction washer
(16) Shaft (32) Piston
(17) Washer (33) "O" ring
(18) 540E gear (34) Finger
(19) Coupler (35) Circlip
(20) Hub (36) Pad
(21) Gear (540 rpm) (E) Improved sealing (paddy fields)
(22) Shim(s)

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 41
(A) Single-piece housing, 540 - 540E (D) Blown-up view of the fork and its control rod
(B) Blown-up view of the hydraulic control ram,
540 - 540E

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.2.2.3 Identification of ports
Fig. 42
(1) Hydraulic speed control ram and solenoid (2) Rear PTO brake and its ON/OFF solenoid
valves valve
21 bar low pressure (P)
ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Return (R)
7.2.2.4 Kinematics
Rear PTO: 540 rpm speed engaged
Fig. 43

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Rear PTO: 540E speed engaged
Fig. 44

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.2.3.1 Shimming shafts of the rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds
Preparing the drive shaft (6) for shimming
1. NOTE: For ease of access to the drive shaft
during the shimming phase P1, it is advised
to momentarily remove the output shaft and
its gears.
If the bearing cones (4) and (11) on the drive
shaft (6) require replacing, first fit the bearing
cone (11) using a press and a sleeve,
pressing against the inner ring of the bearing
cone. When the bearing cone (11) is fitted, fit
the bearing cone (4) in the same way. Lightly
lubricate the bearing cones (4) and (11) with
clean transmission oil. Check that the bearing
cup (10 )is in place. Fit the drive shaft (6)
along with its new or reused bearing cones Fig. 45
(4) and (11) in the housing.
2. Refit:
• the bearing cup (3);
• the plate (2) by momentarily removing the
shim(s).
Screw in and tighten the screws (1) to 20
Nm - 30 Nm.
Fig. 46
Shimming the drive shaft (6)
3. IMPORTANT: Pair up the bearing cup and
the shim(s).
Using a hammer and a bronze drift, tap lightly
on the end of the drive shaft, alternately
turning it from right to left.
Place a dial gage key on the inner ring of the
bearing cone (4).
Using the appropriate levers (L), apply
diametrically opposed pressure to the
bottom of the drive shaft.
With the help of an operator, set the dial
gage needle to zero. Fig. 47
Repeat the operation, exercising a strong
upward force.
Depending on the provisional clearance
displayed on the dial gage, determine a
thickness of shims to be used to achieve a
preload:
ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
P1 = 0 to 0,10 mm
maximum tolerance.
Refit the gears in the housing.
Preparing the output shaft (16) for shimming
4. NOTE: For ease of access to the output
shaft during the shimming phase P2, it is
advised to momentarily remove its gears and
to also remove the drive shaft.
IMPORTANT: The shoulder (E) of the
shouldered thrust washer (25) must be
oriented toward the bearing cone (24).
Check that the bearing cup (13) is in place.
Lightly lubricate the bearing cone (15) with
clean transmission oil and slide it onto the
output shaft (16). Return the output shaft,
without gears, to the housing. Slide the
bearing cup (23) onto the housing,
momentarily removing the shims.
Slide the following onto the other end of the
output shaft:
• the shouldered thrust washer (25);
Fig. 48
5. Immobilize the output shaft (16) in a vice

with protective jaws and a screw (V)
(diameter 8 mm), sourced locally.
Provisionally tighten the nut (26) without
loctite to 75 Nm - 100 Nm.
Fig. 49

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Shimming the output shaft (16)

6. Using a hammer and a fitting drift, tap lightly
on each end of the output shaft, alternately
turning it from right to left.
Place a dial gage key on the front end of the
output shaft.
Pull hard on the end (E) of the output shaft,
alternately turning it from right to left.
Set the dial gage needle to zero.
Repeat this operation while pushing firmly.
Depending on the provisional clearance
displayed on the dial gage, determine a
thickness of shims to be used to achieve a Fig. 50
preload:
P2 = 0 to 0,10 mm
maximum tolerance.
7. IMPORTANT: Pair up the bearing cup and
the shim(s).
IMPORTANT: Pair up the bearing cone and
cup.
Loosen the nut (26).
Remove:
• the bearing cone (24);
• the bearing cup (23);
• the shouldered washer (25);
• the output shaft (16);
Refit the gears in the housing.
Fig. 51
This paragraph presents the tightening torques and the adjustments of the main components of the rear
PTO.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Two-speed rear PTO unit, 540 - 540E
Fig. 52
(P) Preload
NOTE: The 540E speed is an economical ratio.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.2.4.2 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the rear power take-off with two
electrohydraulic speeds
Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Remove the rear hitch hook.
Mark then disconnect:
• the solenoid valves for speeds 540 -
540E;
• the PTO brake solenoid valve;
• the output speed sensor located close to
the output shaft;
• the input speed sensor.
NOTE:
The input speed sensor is located behind the
rear left-hand lift ram.
The center housing has two mounting ports Fig. 53
for the input speed sensor (1).
On this type of two-speed rear PTO, the
input speed sensor (1) is located in the rear
port (as viewed from the operator's seat).
2. Drain the center housing.
3. Remove the input speed sensor (1).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the sensor
when removing it from the rear PTO unit in
the center housing.
Fig. 54

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Removal
Procedure
Remove:
• the ON/OFF solenoid valve (E) guard (if
fitted);
• the ON/OFF solenoid valves (E), after first
marking their position.
Unscrew the screws (7).
Detach and move apart the two-speed rear
PTO unit, far enough from the center
housing so as to slide in the sling
4346862M1.
NOTE: On the rear PTO with two
electrohydraulic speeds, the sling must be
fitted with its spacer in order to compensate
for the insufficient thickness of the single-
piece housing.
Fix the sling to the rear PTO unit and remove
it.
Fig. 55
Disassembly
Procedure
1. Remove the output speed sensor (C).
Fig. 56

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
2. Place the two-speed rear PTO unit vertically

in a vice. Remove the lubrication tube (27)
and discard the "O" ring.
Fig. 57
3. Remove the retainer ring (25). Pull the rod

(29) and remove it from the fork (28). Move
the fork at an angle, in order to release the
finger (34) from the hydraulic control ram.
Fig. 58

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
4. Remove the fork (28).

5. Recover the pads (36) which may have fallen
into the unit.
Fig. 59
6. Place the rear PTO unit on a bench,
immobilizing the output shaft (16) in a vice
fitted with protective jaws. Unlock and
loosen the nut (26) using service tool
4346867M1 (see chapter GPA50/Rear PTO
with two electrohydraulic speeds - Service
tools, page 7-67 ).
NOTE: The output shaft (16) may be double-
locked by a screw (V) (diameter 8 mm),
sourced locally.
Fig. 60
7. Remove the nut (26).
Fig. 61

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
8. Remove the bearing cone (24).
Fig. 62
9. Remove the shouldered thrust washer (25).
Fig. 63
10. Remove the output shaft (16) along with its

end.
Fig. 64

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
11. Remove the coupler (19) / hub (20) assembly.

NOTE: Note the orientation of assembly of
the hub (20).
Fig. 65
Fig. 66
Fig. 67

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
14. Remove the shim(s) (30).
Fig. 68
15. Remove the bearing cup (3).
Fig. 69
16. Remove the shaft and driving gear assembly

(6) and the bearing cones (4) (11). Then
remove the seal ring (12) and discard it.
Extract the bearing cones using an
appropriate extraction tool.
Fig. 70

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
17. Remove the 540 rpm driven gear (21).
Fig. 71
18. Remove the 540E driven gear (18).
Fig. 72
19. Recover the washer (17) which may have

fallen into the single-piece housing.
Fig. 73

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
20. Remove the bearing cup (23).
Fig. 74
21. Remove the shim(s) (22).
Fig. 75
22. Extract the bearing cup (10) using an

appropriate extraction tool or a locally
available method.
Fig. 76

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
23. Remove the bi-metal friction washer (31).

Using a jet of compressed air, carefully drive
the brake piston (32) out of the single-piece
housing. Remove the "O" ring (33).
Fig. 77
24. Drive out the plug (O), if necessary.
Fig. 78
25. Remove the seal (14) by pushing it from

inside the housing with the bearing cone
(15), using an appropriate locally-sourced
tool. Remove the bearing cone (15) and the
bearing cup (13).
Fig. 79

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
26. Unscrew the screw (V) and remove the

cylinder (C). Remove the threaded plug /
coupler control piston assembly (E), after
unscrewing the threaded plug (B) (Allen
screws: 46 mm on flat sections). Remove
the "O" rings J1 to J4 from their respective
positions. Discard them.
Fig. 80
Reassembly
If it proves necessary to shim the drive shaft or the output shaft, see chapter Shimming shafts of the rear
PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds, page 7-41 .

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Procedure
Check:
• that the hydraulic channels in the housing
are not blocked;
• that all of the plugs or rivets are present
at the end of the hydraulic channels.
2. Oil the new seals J1 to J5. Place them in
their respective positions. Check that the
hydraulic channels of the coupler control are
not blocked. Refit the threaded plug / piston
assembly (E) in the cylinder (C).
Fig. 81
3. Lightly smear the thread of plug (B) with
Loctite 221 or equivalent. Tighten it to
160 Nm using service tool 4346905M1 (see
chapter GPA50/Rear PTO with two
electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools, page
7-67 ).
Fig. 82
4. Refit the cylinder (C). Tighten the screw (V).
Fig. 83

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
5. Refit the cup (13) and the bearing cone (15).

Lubricate the rim of the new seal (14) and
correctly position the seal before gradually
fitting it into the bore of the housing using
service tool 4346863M1 (see
chapter GPA50/Rear PTO with two
electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools, page
7-67 ). Check that the seal (14) is fitted
correctly and that its lip is not cut.
Fig. 84
6. If the plug (O) needs to be replaced, smear

its rim with Loctite 542 or equivalent and
gently bend the spherical section in the bore
of the housing using a suitable tool.
Fig. 85
7. Fit the new "O" ring (33) onto the piston (32).
Refit the piston into the housing, turning the
face (F) towards the hydraulic chamber. Refit
the bi-metal friction washer (31):
• by positioning its ribbed face opposite the
piston (32);
• by inserting its locking tab into the cavity
in the housing.
Fig. 86

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
8. IMPORTANT: During fitting, the sleeve must

touch the side of the cup.
Fit the bearing cup (10), using a locally
sourced sleeve.
Fig. 87
9. Refit the shim(s) (22).
Fig. 88
10. Refit the bearing cup (23).
Fig. 89

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
11. Lightly smear the washer (17) with miscible

grease and stick it to the 540E driven gear
(18) or as required, place it on the bearing
cone (15).
Fig. 90
12. Refit the 540E driven gear (18) with or

without the washer (17) (see operation
see step 11, page 7-59 ).
Fig. 91
13. Refit the 540 rpm driven gear (21).
Fig. 92

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
14. Fit the seal ring (12), lightly smeared with

miscible grease, to the drive shaft.
Fig. 93
15. Refit the drive shaft (6), bearing cones (4)

(11) and seal ring (12) assembly.
Fig. 94
16. Refit the bearing cup (3).
Fig. 95

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
17. Refit the shim(s) (30).
Fig. 96
18. Refit the plate (2).
Fig. 97
19. Screw in and tighten the screws (1) to

20 Nm–30 Nm, having first lightly smeared
Fig. 98

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
20. Reconnect the coupler (19) and the hub (20).

Lift up the 540 rpm driven gear (21). Position
the recess (C) of the hub (20) towards the
driven gear (18) and slide the coupler (19) /
hub (20) assembly between the two gears.
Center the coupler / hub assembly in the axis
of the gears.
Fig. 99
21. Carefully slide and turn the output shaft (16)

fitted with its end piece through:
• the seal (14);
• the washer (17);
• the driven gears (18) (21)/hub (20)
assembly.
Fig. 100
22. Position the shoulder (E) of the thrust washer

(25) in the direction of the arrow and slide it
onto the output shaft (16).
Fig. 101

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
23. Refit the bearing cone (24).
Fig. 102
24. Screw the nut (26) all the way down without
tightening.
Fig. 103
25. Place the rear PTO unit on a bench,

immobilizing the output shaft (16) in a vice
with protective jaws. Temporarily fit the nut
(26) without Loctite.
Release the output shaft (16) and check:
• the axial clearance of the gears;
• the free rotation of the shafts;
• the correct displacement of the 540 -
540E speed coupler.
Following these checks, immobilize the
output shaft (16) once again as before, using
a locally sourced screw (V) (diameter 8 mm).
Fig. 104
Lightly smear the thread of the nut (26) with
Loctite 270 or equivalent. Tighten it to a final
torque of 75 Nm–100 Nm using service tool
4346867M1 (see chapter GPA50/Rear PTO
with two electrohydraulic speeds - Service
tools, page 7-67 ). Using a suitable pin
punch, lock the nut (26) in place by bending
the collar into the grooves of the shaft.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
26. Impregnate the pads (36) of the fork (28)

with miscible grease and stick them to the
fork. Refit the fork by guiding the pads (36)
along the groove in the coupler (19).
Fig. 105
27. Align the fork (28) and the rod (29). Push the
rod completely through the fork.
Fig. 106
28. Refit the lubrication tube (27), fitted with a

new "O" ring.
29. Manually check the operation of the PTO
speeds (540 rpm and 540E).
Fig. 107

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
30. Refit the output speed sensor (C), fitted with

a new "O" ring.
Fig. 108
Refitting
Procedure
1. Clean the mating surfaces of the rear PTO
unit and the center housing using a suitable
product. Smear the mating surfaces of the
rear PTO unit with Loctite 5206 or
equivalent.
On the center housing, check the presence
of:
• the locating pins (G);
• the tubes (T) (21-bar low pressure and
lubrication);
• the PTO shaft (A).
On the rear PTO unit, check that the "O" rings
(J) are present in the 21-bar low pressure and
lubrication ports.
Fig. 109

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
2. Sling and refit the rear PTO unit with two

electrohydraulic speeds on the center
housing. Remove the sling. Screw in and
tighten the screws (7) to 100 Nm–130 Nm.
Refit the solenoid valves (E) in their initial
positions.
Fig. 110
Final steps
Procedure
1. Refit the input speed sensor (1) fitted with a
new "O" ring in the rear port of the center
housing (as viewed from the operator's seat).
2. Top up the oil level of the housings (center
housing and gearbox housing). Check it using
the sight glass located on the right-hand side
of the rear PTO unit (as viewed from the
operator's seat).
3. In accordance with the notes and markings
made in the preliminary steps, reconnect:
• the sensors;
• the ON/OFF 540 - 540E solenoid valves.
Check the operation of the two Fig. 111
electrohydraulic speeds of the rear PTO.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
4. Refit the hitch hook. Tighten the screws (V)

to 240 Nm–320 Nm.
Fig. 112
7.2.5 Service tools
7.2.5.1 General
7.2.5.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools

Reference 4346862M1
Description Sling for removal / refitting of the rear PTO unit

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Reference 4346863M1
Description Seal fitting drift
Reference 4346867M1
Description Socket for tightening the secondary-shaft nut

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Reference 4346905M1
Description Socket for hydraulic ram plug

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.3 GPA50/Rear PTO with three electrohydraulic speeds

7.3.1 General
7.3.1.1 General
The unit fitted to the rear of the GPA50 rear axle contains all the mechanical components of the three
speed rear power take-off. These components rest on tapered roller bearings for which certain cups are
fitted "tightened" and others are "free" in the cover plate.
The three-speed rear PTO is independent of the transmission.
Changing between the 540 - 540E/1000 rpm ratios of the three-speed rear PTO is managed hydraulically
via the electronic system of the tractor.
The three-speed rear PTO is divided into four parts:
• The clutch
The clutch is located on the upper power take-off shaftline and at the front of the center housing. The
front part is fitted with a Gerotor type lubrication pump which lubricates the clutch and the gearbox. It is
supported by two ball bearings fitted in a support mounted on the center housing.
• The upper shaftline
The upper shaftline of the rear PTO transmits the engine speed to the drive gears via the clutch and a
line comprising three shafts. The drive gears are housed in a housing / cover plate assembly.
The tapered roller bearings supporting the drive shaft and gears are shimmed with preload using
shim(s) inserted between the front bearing cup and the cover plate.
• The lower shaftline
The rear PTO lower shaftline is supported by
two tapered roller bearings mounted in the
housing and the cover plate respectively.
Shimming by preloading the tapered roller
bearings is achieved using shims which are
inserted between the front bearing cup and the
cover plate.
A lip seal fitted to the housing ensures the
output shaft sealing.
Improved sealing is provided for cases of
prolonged use in damp environments such as Fig. 113
paddy fields. A special seal is then fitted to the
housing and at the end of the output shaft.
The output shaft is fitted with an
interchangeable end (E) which can have 6 or 21
splines.
NOTE: The number of splines on the output
shaft depends on the nature of the driven
implement and the required rotation speed.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
• The power take-off brake.

The rear PTO features an electrohydraulically
controlled piston brake (32). This piston (32) is
located in the housing, opposite the 1000 rpm
driven gear (18).
A ribbed washer (bimetallic) (31) located
between the piston and the 1000 rpm driven
gear (18) ensures friction.
Fig. 114

The three-speed rear PTO is managed hydraulically by two ON/OFF solenoid valves controlled by an
electrical pulse. The position is secured by undercuts on the teeth.
Speeds 540 and 540E are engaged by their own ON/OFF solenoid valves. The speed of 1000 rpm is
reached when both ON/OFF solenoid valves (540 - 540E) are driven at the same time.
Rear PTO with three speeds, 540 - 540E / 1000
rpm
Fig. 115
The mechanical kinematics of the three speed rear PTO is handled by the input and output movement (M):
• Input movement
The input movement (M) is generated by the tractor engine and transmitted to the shaft (6) and gears
which drive the upper shaftline of the rear PTO via the clutch.
• Output movement
The output movement (M) is transmitted to the driven gears (18), (19) or (26) of the rear PTO depending
on the position (540, 540E or 1000 rpm) of the coupler (22).

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Lubrication of the rear PTO components

The upper shaftline
A channel and tube take the lubricant oil under pressure to the upper shaftline of the rear power take-off.
The flow of oil to the drive gears and the tapered roller bearings are controlled by a calibrated port and a
seal ring which are located, respectively, in the housing and on the rear end of the drive gear.
The lower shaftline
The lower shaftline of the rear PTO is supplied with pressure via a tube located at the end of the output
shaft and connected to the main channel of the upper shaftline.
A central channel and radial holes in the output shaft ensure that the rings, the driven gears and the lip of
the seal are lubricated.
The tapered roller bearings are lubricated by splashing.
The power take-off brake.
The power take-off brake is not lubricated under pressure. Only the serration on the friction washer and the
splashing of oil in the housing allow a film of oil to pass between the friction washer and the 1000 rpm
drive gear during operation.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.3.2.1 Layout of components
Fig. 116
(A) 540 - 540E and 1000 rpm housing
ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
(B) Cross section and blown-up view of the (C) Rear view of the rear PTO unit, 540 - 540E
hydraulic control ram. 1000 rpm
Fig. 117
(1) Shim(s) (2) Bearing cup

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
(3) Bearing cone (19) 540E gear

(4) Cover plate (20) Washer
(5) Housing (21) Circlip
(6) Drive shaft and gears (22) Coupler
(7) Bearing cup (23) Hub
(8) Bearing cone (24) Washer
(9) Screw (25) Snap ring
(10) Seal ring (26) Gear (540 rpm)
(11) Snap ring (27) Bearing cup
(13) Lip seal (29) Shim(s)
(14) Bearing cone (30) Lubrication pipe
(15) Shaft (31) Friction washer
(16) Countersunk washer (32) Piston
(17) Washer with flat sections (33) "O" ring
(18) Gear (1000 rpm)

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 118
(1) Shim(s) (4) Cover plate
(2) Bearing cup (5) Housing
(3) Bearing cone (6) Drive shaft and gears

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off

(8) Bearing cone (22) Coupler
(9) Screw (23) Hub
(10) Seal ring (24) Washer
(11) Snap ring (25) Snap ring
(12) Bearing cup (26) Gear (540 rpm)
(13) Lip seal (27) Bearing cup
(14) Bearing cone (28) Bearing cone
(15) Shaft (29) Shim(s)
(16) Countersunk washer (30) Lubrication pipe
(17) Washer with flat sections (31) Friction washer
(18) Gear (1000 rpm) (32) Piston
(19) 540E gear (33) "O" ring
(20) Washer
Fig. 119
(1) Rear PTO brake and its ON/OFF solenoid
valve
Return (R)

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 120
(2) Hydraulic speed control ram and solenoid
valves
Return (R)

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.3.2.5 Kinematics
Fig. 121

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Rear PTO: 540E speed engaged
Fig. 122

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 123

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.3.3.1 Preparation for shaft shimming
Procedure
1. If the bearings (3) and (8) of the driving shaft
(6) must be replaced, perform the operation
before shimming see Fig. 124 .
Fig. 124
2. If the bearings (16) and (28) or the output

shaft seal (15) must be replaced, perform the
operation before shimming see Fig. 125 .
3. Fit the service tool 7060234M1 on the power
take-off unit using the screws (9).
4. Leave the bearing cups on the shafts.
Fig. 125

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
5. On the cover plate (4) see Fig. 126 ,

remove:
• The bearing cup (2)
• Shim(s) (1).
Fig. 126
6. On the cover plate (4) see Fig. 127 ,

remove:
• The shim(s) (29)
Fig. 127
7. Measure the height of the thrust collar of

service tool 7060234. The value recorded will
be called M5 see Fig. 128 .
Fig. 128

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.3.3.2 Shimming the drive shaft
Procedure
1. On the cover plate, measure the depth
between the mating face and the bottom of
the bearing cup housing see Fig. 129 . The
value recorded will be called M3.
Fig. 129
2. Place the thrust collar on the bearing cup of

the driving shaft, tighten the screw to
10 Nm.
3. Using a depth gage, measure between the
mating face of the power take-off unit and
the top of the thrust collar see Fig. 130 .
The value recorded will be called M1.
Fig. 130
4. To determine the clearance of the driving shaft, the following calculation must be performed: M3 -
(M1 - M5). Depending on the clearance obtained, determine a thickness of the shim(s) to be used to
achieve a preload: P1 = 0 to 0.10 mm
NOTE: As far as possible, shim to the maximum tolerance.
Example
79 mm - (91.5 mm - 13 mm) = 0.50 mm
In this case, the thickness of the shim(s) will be 0.50 mm + 0.10 mm = 0.60 mm

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.3.3.3 Shimming the output shaft
Procedure
1. On the cover plate, measure the depth
between the mating face and the bottom of
the bearing cup housing see Fig. 131 . The
value recorded will be called M4.
Fig. 131
2. Place the thrust collar on the output shaft

bearing cup, tighten the screw to 10 Nm.
3. Measure between the mating face of the
power take-off unit and the top of the thrust
collar see Fig. 132 . The value recorded will
be called M2.
Fig. 132
4. To determine the clearance of the output shaft, the following calculation must be performed: M4 -
(M2 - M5). Depending on the clearance obtained, determine a thickness of the shim(s) to be used to
achieve a preload: P2 = 0 to 0.10 mm
NOTE: As far as possible, shim to the maximum tolerance.
Example
67 mm - (79.4 mm - 13 mm) = 0.60 mm.
In this case, the thickness of the shim(s) will be 0.60 mm + 0.10 mm = 0.70 mm.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.3.3.4 Reassembly
Procedure
1. On the cover plate (4), fit the following using
assembly grease see Fig. 133 :
• The shim(s) (1) (the thickness was
determined in step
see Reassembly step 4, page 7-84 )
Fig. 133
2. On the cover plate (4), fit the following using

assembly grease see Fig. 134 :
• The shim(s) (29) (the thickness was
determined in step
see Reassembly step 4, page 7-85 )
Fig. 134
This paragraph presents the tightening torques and the adjustments of the main components of the rear
PTO.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Three speed rear PTO unit, 540 - 540E and 1000
rpm
Fig. 135
(P) Preload

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.3.4.2 Removing/refitting and disassembling/reassembling the rear PTO with three

electrohydraulic speeds
Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Remove the rear hitch hook.
Mark then disconnect:
• the ON/OFF solenoid valves for speeds
540 - 540E;
• the rear PTO brake solenoid valve;
• the output speed sensor located close to
the output shaft;
• the input speed sensor.
NOTE:
The input speed sensor is located behind the
rear left-hand lift ram.
The center housing has two mounting ports Fig. 136
for the input speed sensor (1).
On this type of three-speed PTO, the input
speed sensor (1) is located in the front port
(as viewed from the operator's seat).
3. Remove the input speed sensor (1).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the sensor
when removing it from the rear PTO unit in
the center housing.
Fig. 137

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Removal
Procedure
2. Detach and move apart the three-speed rear
(4346862M1).
3. Fix the sling to the rear PTO unit and remove
it.
Fig. 138
Disassembly
Procedure
1. Remove:
• The ON/OFF solenoid valves (E), marking
their position beforehand;
• The output speed sensor (C).
Fig. 139

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
2. Place and shim the three-speed rear PTO

unit vertically on a workbench.
Fig. 140
3. Remove the lubrication pipe (30) and discard

its "O" ring. Unscrew the screws (V) and
remove the cover plate (4).
Fig. 141
4. Extract the bearing cone (28) using a suitable

puller and the 540 rpm driven gear.
Fig. 142

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
5. Using a "Rislan" clip and two locally provided

screws (V), keep the shaft and the driving
gears (6) away from the 540 rpm driven gear
(26). Remove the latter.
Fig. 143
6. Remove:
• The snap ring (25);
• The washer (24).
Fig. 144
7. Remove the hub (23).
Fig. 145

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
8. Drive out the Mecanindus pin (G).
Fig. 146
9. Remove the fork (F) and the coupler (22)

assembly.
Fig. 147
10. Remove:
• The washer (20).
Fig. 148

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
11. Remove the 540 E driven gear (19).
Fig. 149
12. Remove the 1000 rpm driven gear (18).
Fig. 150
13. Remove the shaft and driving gear assembly

(6) and the bearing cones (3) (8). Then
remove the seal ring (10) and discard it.
Extract the bearing cones using an
appropriate extraction tool.
Fig. 151

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
14. Remove the washers (16) (17) and the

retainer ring (11).
NOTE: The washer (16) and the retainer ring
(11) in see Fig. 152 will be subsequently
replaced with a countersunk washer and a
snap ring respectively.
Fig. 152
15. Remove the output shaft (15) with its 6- or

21-spline end fitting.
Fig. 153
16. Remove:
• The bearing cup (12).
Fig. 154

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
17. Extract the bearing cup (7) using a suitable

puller or a local method.
Fig. 155
18. Remove the bi-metal friction washer (31).

Using a jet of compressed air, carefully drive
out the brake piston (32) from the housing.
Remove the "O" ring (33) and discard it.
Fig. 156
19. Drive out the seal (13).
Fig. 157

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 158
21. Remove the cover plate (C) and its "O" ring.
Fig. 159
22. Remove the guides/piston assembly (B) of

the coupler control.
Fig. 160

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
23. Remove "O" rings J1 to J6 from their

respective components. Discard them.
Fig. 161
Reassembly
If it proves necessary to shim the drive shaft and/or the output shaft, see chapter Preparation for shaft
shimming, page 7-82 .

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Procedure
Check:
• that the hydraulic channels of the housing
and the cover plate are not blocked;
• that all of the plugs or rivets are present
at the end of the hydraulic channels.
2. Lubricate new seals J1 to J6. Fit them in
their respective components.
Fig. 162
3. Check that the hydraulic channels of the
coupler control are not blocked. Refit the
guides/piston assembly (B).
Fig. 163
4. Lightly smear the face of the housing (5) with

Loctite 5206 or equivalent. Refit the cover
plate (C). Tighten the screws (V) to 36 Nm–
46 Nm.
Fig. 164

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
5. Lubricate the new seal (13) and correctly

position the seal before gradually fitting it
into the bore of the housing using service
tool 4346863M1 (see chapter GPA50/Rear
PTO with three electrohydraulic speeds -
Service tools, page 7-108 ). Check that the
seal (13) is fitted correctly and that its lip is
not cut.
Fig. 165
6. Fit the new "O" ring (33) onto the piston (32).
Refit the piston into the housing, turning the
face (F) towards the hydraulic chamber. Refit
the bi-metal friction washer (31):
• by positioning its ribbed face opposite the
piston (32);
• by inserting its tab into the cavity in the
housing.
Fig. 166
7. Fit the bearing cups (7) (12).

Fit:
• The washer (16);
NOTE: The washer (16) and the retainer ring
(11) in see Fig. 167 will be subsequently
replaced with a countersunk washer and a
snap ring respectively.
Fig. 167

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
8. Fit the seal ring (10), lightly smeared with

miscible grease, on the drive shaft.
Fig. 168
9. Refit the drive shaft (6), bearing cones (3) (8)

and seal ring (10) assembly.
Fig. 169
10. Refit the washer with flat sections (17) on

the output shaft flat section.
Fig. 170

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
11. Assemble the 540E (19) and 1000 rpm gears

(18). Refit the washer (20). Fit the retainer
ring (21).
Fig. 171
12. Refit the 540E (19) and 1000 rpm gear set
(18).
Fig. 172
13. Refit the fork (F) and its coupler. Fit the pin
(G), using another hammer to fit it.
Fig. 173

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
14. Refit the hub (23).
Fig. 174
15. Refit:
• The washer (24);
• The snap ring (25).
Fig. 175
16. Using a "Rislan" clip and two locally provided

screws (V), keep the drive shaft (6) and gears
inclined towards the housing exterior. Refit
the 540 rpm driven gear (26).
Fig. 176

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
17. The output shaft (15) must be maintained at

its lower end by the wooden shims. Fit the
bearing cone (28), using a press and a
suitable fixture (the (T) pipe for example),
bracing against the internal ring of the
bearing cone.
Fig. 177

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off

• The locating pins (G) on the housing;
• Shims (1) (29) on the cover plate;
• Bearing cups (2) (27) on the cover plate.
Refit the cover plate (4). Screw in and tighten
the screws (V) to 29 Nm–37 Nm. Check that
the seal (J) is present. Replace it if
necessary. Refit the lubrication pipe (30)
fitted with a new "O" ring. Manually check
that speeds 540 - 540E and 1000 rpm shift
correctly.
Fig. 178

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
19. Remove the three-speed PTO unit from the

workbench.
Manually check:
• the axial clearance of the gears;
• the free rotation of the shafts;
• the correct movement of the coupler
towards speeds 540 - 540E and 1000
rpm.
Fig. 179
20. Refit:
• The sensor (C);
• The ON/OFF solenoid valves (E) in their
initial position.
Fig. 180

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Refitting
Procedure
1. Clean the mating faces of the rear PTO unit
and the center housing using a suitable
product. Smear the mating faces of the rear
PTO unit with Loctite 5206 or equivalent.
On the center housing, check the presence
of:
• the locating pins (G);
• the tubes (T) (21-bar low pressure and
lubrication);
• the PTO shaft (A).
On the rear PTO unit, check that the "O" rings
(J) are lodged in the 21-bar low pressure and
lubrication ports.
Fig. 181

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
2. Sling and refit the rear PTO unit with three

electrohydraulic speeds on the center
housing. Screw in and tighten the screws (9)
to 100 Nm–130 Nm.
Fig. 182
Final steps
Procedure
1. Refit the input speed sensor (1) fitted with a
new "O" ring in the front port of the center
housing (as viewed from the operator's seat).
2. Top up the oil level of the housings (center
housing and gearbox housing). Check it using
the sight glass located on the right-hand side
of the rear PTO unit (as viewed from the
operator's seat).
3. In accordance with the notes and markings
made in the preliminary steps, reconnect:
• the sensors;
• the 540 - 540E ON/OFF solenoid valves
and the rear PTO brake solenoid valve.
Fig. 183
Check that the three electrohydraulic speeds
540 - 540E and 1000 rpm and the rear PTO
brake are operating correctly.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
4. Refit the hitch hook. Tighten the screws (V)

to 240 Nm–320 Nm.
Fig. 184
7.3.5 Service tools
7.3.5.1 General
7.3.5.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with three electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools

Reference 4346862M1

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Reference 4346863M1
Reference 7060234M1
Description Power take-off bearing preload

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.4 GPA50/GSPTO
7.4.1 General
7.4.1.1 General
GSPTO is an abbreviation of "ground speed power take-off". It is designed to vary the rear power take-off
speed of rotation according to the forward speed of the tractor.
In contrast to the independent power take-off system where the power take-off shaft speed depends on
the engine speed, the GSPTO is driven by the pinion and therefore the power take-off shaft speed is
proportional to the tractor travel speed.
Fig. 185
(1) Engaged (2) Disengaged
Engaged position (1)

Engagement of the power take-off clutch is neutralized.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
The solenoid valve (X728) supplies the piston (19) which moves the fork (16) and the shaft (10) toward the
front. The splines of the shaft (10) engage in the driven gear (2). The drive shaft (10) on the rear power
take-off connects with the drive pinion.
The switch (X729) informs the Autotronic 5 of the position of the piston (19).
Disengaged position (2)

The low pressure system continuously supplies the piston (19) so that the splines of the shaft (10) are
disengaged from the gear (2).
X728 - GSPTO solenoid valve is located on the rear

axle housing.
A transfer pipe hydraulically connects the cover of
the solenoid valve and the rear power take-off unit.
Fig. 186
X729 - GSPTO switch is located behind the ground

speed sensor.
Fig. 187

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 188
(A) PTO clutch (E) Pinion
(B) GSPTO gear (F) 4WD clutch
(C) Shaft (G) Rear PTO unit
(D) GSPTO control

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 189
(A) Pinion (7) Bearing cup
(B) Screw (8) Bearing cone
(C) Driving gear (4WD) (9) Nut
(1) Driving gear ((10))Shaft
(2) Driven gear ((11))Thrust washer
(5) Spacer (14) Ring
(6) Shim(s) (15) Circlip

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off

GSPTO drive
Fig. 190
(1) Driving gear (7) Bearing cup
(2) Driven gear (8) Bearing cone
(3) Bearing cone (9) Nut
(4) Bearing cup ((10))Shaft
(5) Spacer ((11))Thrust washer
(6) Shim(s) (12) Circlip

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
GSPTO control
Fig. 191
((10))Shaft ((18))"O" ring
(13) Circlip ((19))Piston
(14) Ring (20) "O" ring
(15) Circlip ((21))"O" ring
((16))Fork ((22))Plug
((17))Stop screw ((23))Circlip

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 192
(1) GSPTO disengaged (2) GSPTO engaged
Return (R)
To engage the GSPTO (2), pressures P1 and P2 are identical.

Pressure P1 acting on the entire piston is greater than that applied to the annular face, which moves the
piston.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
GSPTO disengaged
Fig. 193
GSPTO engaged
Fig. 194

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.4.2.5 Kinematics
GSPTO: engaged
Fig. 195

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.4.3.1 Shimming the GSPTO gears
Shimming the driven gear (2)

It is necessary to shim the driven gear (2) if the bearings of the driven gear (2) have been replaced.
Procedure
1. Refit the assembly of the gear (2), the bearings (3) (4) (7) (8), the spacer (5) and the nut (8).
2. Tighten the nut (8) to 200 Nm
NOTE: Do not bend the collar of the nut (8) before the end of the shimming.
3. Turn the gear (2) five times to correctly seat the bearings.
housing. Position its tip on the driven gear
(2).
5. Apply an axial load between 150 kg and
200 kg on the gear (2).
dial gage, select a thickness of shim(s) (6) to
obtain a preload: P1 = 0 mm to 0,01 mm.
maximum tolerance.
Fig. 196

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Fig. 197
(P) Preload
7.4.4.2 Removing/refitting the rear block with the GSPTO

Removal

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
2. Disconnect the GSPTO switch connector

(X729) located above the center housing in
front of the lift arm.
Remove:
• the switch (X729)
• the pushrod (A). This pushrod links the
switch (X729) and the piston (19).
Fig. 198
3. Loosen the supply pipe (B).

4. Loosen and remove the union (C) and the
connecting pipe (D).
Fig. 199
6. Detach and move apart the three-speed rear
(4346862M1).
7. Fix the sling to the rear PTO unit and remove
it.
Fig. 200

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
Refitting
8. CAUTION:
Correctly position the pushrod (A). If the pushrod drops into the transmission
housing, remove the rear PTO unit to retrieve it.
Carry out the removal steps in reverse order.
7.4.4.3 Disassembling/reassembling the GSPTO control

Disassembly
1. Shim the rear PTO unit.
2. Remove:
• The low pressure pipe (A)
• The lubrication pipe (B) and discard its "O"
ring (if necessary)
• The cover (C) fitted with the shaft.
Fig. 201
3. Unscrew the screw (16) from the fork (17).
Fig. 202

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
4. Remove:
• The retainer ring (23)
• The plug (22) fitted with its "O" ring (21).
Fig. 203
5. Remove the piston (19) fitted with its seal

(20) so as to release the fork assembly (37).
6. Remove the fork (16) and shaft (10)
assembly.
Fig. 204
Reassembly
8. Refit by following the removal steps see step 1, page 7-122 to see step 6, page 7-123 in reverse
order.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
9. Lightly smear the thread of the screw (V)

with Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten to a
10. Manually check that the fork/piston assembly
of the GSPTO moves freely.
Fig. 205

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.5 Zuidberg front power take-off

7.5.1 General
The power take-off unit (1) comprises a housing,
which serves as the oil tank.
The housing contains the following parts:
• the power take-off driving gears
• a multidisc clutch
• a gear pump that supplies oil to the clutch and
lubrication to the gears
• a solenoid valve for engaging the clutch
• an oil filter
• a pressure relief valve for the clutch system
• a pressure relief valve for the cooling system
Fig. 206

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.5.2.1 Mechanical
Fig. 207
The unit (1) is driven by the engine via the shaft (2) fitted with shock absorbers. The rotation speed of the
output shaft is reduced by a train of spur gears housed in the unit (1).
Depending on the type of PTO (clockwise or anti-clockwise), the gear (5) drives the clutch bell housing (7)
via one or two gear(s) (6).

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.5.2.2 Hydraulics
Fig. 208
The PTO clutch (7) is a wet multidisc type. It drives a hydraulic gear pump (11), which provides the
pressure for engaging the clutch, lubricating the system and cooling.
The front power take-off hydraulic system is self-contained. The clutch unit (7) drives the pump gears (11)
via the gear (10). The system pressure is limited by a valve (12) set to 20 bar. The cooling system (14) is
protected by a valve (13) set to 6 bar. The solenoid valve (4) directs the pressure to the clutch or the tank.
NOTE:
The pump flow is around 4 l/min.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.5.2.3 Hydraulics diagram
Fig. 209
(1) Housing (9) Filter
(4) Solenoid valve (11) Gear pump
(5) Input gear (12) Valve 20 bar
(6) Idler gear (13) Valve 5 bar
(7) Clutch (14) Cooler

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.5.3.1 Exploded view of the unit
Fig. 210
(1) Housing (25) Plug
(4) Solenoid valve (26) Lip seal
(5) Input gear (27) Seal
(7) Clutch (28) Screw
(8) Hydraulic system (29) Bearing
(15) Seal (30) Bearing
(16) Lip seal (32) Centring pin
((17))Plug (36) Ring
(19) Plug (38) Spring washer
(20) Plug (39) Screw
(21) Screw ((40))"O" ring
(22) Plug ((41))"O" ring
(23) Screw (42) Connecting pipe
(24) Screw (43) Breather

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.5.3.2 Exploded view of the hydraulic pump and the clutch
Fig. 211
(4) Solenoid valve (60) Thrust plate
(9) Filter (61) Seal
(10) Gear (62) Bearing
(11) Gear pump (63) Circlip
(12) Valve 20 bar (64) Piston
(13) Valve 5 bar (65) "O" ring
((40))"O" ring (66) Cylinder
((41))"O" ring (67) Centring pin
(53) Output shaft (68) Spring
(55) Bearing (70) Disk
(56) Circlip (71) Thrust plate
(57) Shim (72) Centring pin
(58) Bearing (73) Spring
(59) Bearing

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.5.3.3 Exploded view of drive shaft
Fig. 212
(1) Housing (45) Hub
(2) Shaft (48a) Hub for 3-cylinder engine
(3) Shock absorber (48b) Hub for 4-cylinder engine
(44) Key (50) Clamp

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.5.4.1 Electrical tests
Checking the solenoid valve

Using a multimeter, check the resistance at the
solenoid valve terminals.
Resistance 5.3 to 5.6 Ohms
Fig. 213

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.5.4.2 Hydraulic tests

(C) Clutch pressure connector
(P) Pump pressure connector
Fig. 214
Clutch pressure test

Using a pressure gauge (30 bar) and a suitable union (M10x1), check the pressure of the PTO clutch
according to the following values:
PTO disengaged 0 bar
PTO engaged 22 ± 1 bar
Pump pressure test

Using a pressure gauge (30 bar) and a suitable union (M10x1), check the pressure of the pump delivery.
PTO disengaged and engaged 24 ± 1 bar
7.5.5.1 Disassembly
NOTE:
The PTO shown may differ slightly from the disassembled model. However, the procedure is identical.

Remove the front PTO unit.
Procedure
1. Place the PTO unit (1) on a workbench.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
2. On the rear face, remove the two pump

attachment screws.
3. NOTE:
Do not leave the seals (40) and (41) in the
PTO housing once the pump has been
removed.
Gently tap on the rear of the pump (8) to
release it and then take it out through the
front.
Fig. 215
4. Remove the screws (28) from the half-
housings. Separate the housing into two.
Fig. 216
5. Place the rear section of the housing on a

workbench.
6. Using two screwdrivers, prise loose and
remove the complete clutch (7).
7. Recover the connecting pipe (42) with the
seal and the spring.
Fig. 217

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
8. Place the clutch (7) on a press with the

output shaft facing downward. Using a shim,
compress the clutch by pressing on the shaft
(53).
9. Using two screwdrivers, prise loose and
remove the bearing (62).
Fig. 218
10. Check the bearing face of the connecting
pipe (42) on the shaft (53). If the bearing face
is excessively worn, the shaft must be
replaced.
11. Using a press and a locally made tool, slightly
compress the piston (64) and remove the
retainer ring (63).
12. Remove the complete cylinder (66).
Fig. 219

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
13. Remove the disks (70) and the backing plates

(71).
14. Using a press, separate the output shaft (53)
from the clutch unit. Recover the bearing
(58).
15. Remove the piston (64) from the cylinder
(66). Check the condition of the centring pins
(52).
16. Check the parts. Check the condition of the
wear points, replace the defective parts and
all the seals.
Fig. 220

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
7.5.5.2 Reassembly
Procedure
1. Carefully clean the parts that will be refitted.
2. Place the output shaft (53) in the clutch unit
with the bearings (55) and (59) and the
retainer ring (56).
3. Place the disks (70) and the backing plates
(71) alternately in the clutch unit.
4. IMPORTANT:
The pins have a rounded side which should
be fitted facing upward.
Fit the pins (67) and their springs (68).
5. Fit the springs (73).
Fig. 221

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
6. Fit the cylinder and piston assembly (64) -

(66) onto the clutch unit. Compress the
piston slightly using a press and a locally
made tool. Fit the retainer ring (63).
7. Check the clutch operation with compressed
air.
8. Using a press, fit the bearings (58) and (62)
onto the clutch.
NOTE:
Do not forget the washer (57) underneath
the bearing (58).
Fig. 222
9. Fit the lip seals (16) and (26) of the input and
output shafts onto each half-housing.
10. Check that the three ball bearings are fitted
under the thrust plate (60). The thrust plate
must rotate freely.
NOTE:
The thrust plate (60) allows the output shaft
to turn to provide assistance in hitching
implements.
11. Check the fitting of the screws (39) that hold
the thrust plate (60). The screws are fitted
with a spring washer (38) and a large washer
(37). Tighten the screws to 5 Nm.
12. Fit the connecting pipe (42) with a new seal.
Check that it slides properly in the housing.
Fig. 223

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off
13. Lubricate the mating face of the housing (1)

to support the seal (15).
14. Fit the clutch (7) and the input gear (5). Fit
the intermediate gear(s) (6) (depending on
model).
Fig. 224
15. Position the upper half-housing. Secure the two sections using a hammer.
16. Fit the screws (28) and tighten to 42 Nm.
NOTE:
Replace the sealing washers on the drain holes.
17. On the pump unit (8), position the new "O" rings (40) and (41) using grease to keep them in place.
18. Fit the pump (8) in the housing (1), keeping an eye on the "O" rings. Refit the two pump attachment
screws.
19. Refit the PTO unit.

ACT0021460
7. Power take-off

ACT0021460
Table of contents
8. Front axle
8.1 LODI 140 front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.2.1 View of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.2.2 Exploded view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.1.3 Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.1.3.1 Adjustments/General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.1.3.2 Track width adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.1.3.3 Wheel alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.1.4.1 Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2 DANA 730 front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.2.1.1 DANA General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.2.1.2 View of DANA 730 axle assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.2.1.3 DANA front axle - dimensions - specifications - identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.2.1.4 Topping up and checking oil levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.2.3.1 Layout of front axle components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.2.4.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8.2.5.1 Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.2.5.2 DANA Workshop Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.3 Front suspension for DANA 730 axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.3.1.1 General information - front suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.3.3.1 Layout of hydraulic components for the front suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8.3.3.2 Layout of mechanical components for the front suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.3.3.3 Layout of components for the suspension control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.3.4.1 Removing and refitting the front axle and front suspension assembly . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.3.4.2 Removing and refitting the front suspension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8.3.4.3 Removing and refitting the suspension rams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.3.4.4 Disassembling/reassembling the control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
8.3.4.5 Removing/refitting the accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
8.4 GPA50/4-wheel drive clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.4.2.3 Overview of 4WD clutch mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
8.4.2.4 Identification of channels and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
8.4.3.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

ACT0021460
Table of contents
8.4.3.2 Shimming the 4-wheel drive clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53

8.4.4.1 Removing/refitting the 4-wheel drive clutch assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
8.4.4.2 Disassembling/reassembling the 4-wheel drive clutch assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
8.4.4.3 Extracting/fitting the rear ball bearing and the hydraulic ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
8.4.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8.4.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8.4.5.2 GPA50/Clutch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8.5 Steering unit/Open Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
8.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
8.5.3.1 Cross-section view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
8.5.3.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
8.5.3.3 Identification of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
8.5.4.1 Removing/refitting the steering spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82
8.5.4.2 Disassembling/reassembling the steering spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
8.6 Steering unit/Closed Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
8.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
8.6.2 Hydraulic operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
8.6.3 Electrohydraulic operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93
8.6.4.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
8.6.5.1 Removing/refitting the steering spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
8.6.5.2 Disassembling/reassembling the steering spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.1 LODI 140 front axle

8.1.1 General
The two-wheel drive front axle is an important part of the tractor. Positioned at the front of the tractor, it
allows you to steer the tractor using steered wheels.
The front axle consists of various elements, including:
• The structure of the front axle that allows fixing between the frame and axle.
• A ram balanced for steering
• Two steering rods
• Two telescopic arms
• Two pin/stub axle assemblies fitted into the telescopic arm bores
Specifications
• PCD: Pitch circle diameter, measured between the center of the wheel and center of the stud hole

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 1
(1) Plug (15) Fixing connecting rod
(2) Castellated nut (16) Clip
(3) Washer ((17))Adjustment tube
(4) Tapered roller bearing (18) Axial ball joint
(5) Tapered roller bearing (19) Steering ram
(6) Seal (20) Ring
(7) Stop screw (21) Beam
(8) Thrust bearing (22) Telescopic steering arm
(9) Support (23) Support
(10) Ring (24) Ring
(11) Telescopic steering arm (25) Screw
(12) Stub axle (26) Hub
(13) Ring (27) Steering ball joint
(14) Retaining screw

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.1.2.2 Exploded view
Fig. 2
(1) Beam (4) Washer
(2) Screw (5) Nut
(3) Spacer (6) Nut

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
(7) Washer (19) Bearing

(8) Lever (20) Hub
(9) Screw (21) Bearing
(10) Seal (22) Washer
(11) Grease nipple (23) Nut
(12) Telescopic steering arm (24) Plug
(13) Thrust bearing (25) Screw
(14) Seal (26) Washer
(15) Stub axle (27) Pin
(16) Screw (28) Steering ram
((17))Washer (29) Track rod
(18) Seal
8.1.3.1 Adjustments/General
The geometry of the front axles refers to the set of dimensional and kinematic characteristics of the
mechanical system connecting the chassis to the front wheel. It also determines the degrees of freedom
of the steering system. This geometry is defined by three angles:
• Camber: This is the angle between the wheel
and the plane perpendicular to the ground along
the longitudinal axis of the tractor. This angle is
measured in degrees and minutes. We speak
of positive (1st image) or negative (2nd image)
camber. This angle is not adjustable with this
model of front axle.
Fig. 3
Fig. 3

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
• Castor angle: This causes self-alignment of the

steered wheels along the axis of movement of
the tractor. The castor angle is measured in
degrees and minutes. Castor plays an
important role in the steering behavior of the
tractor. When cornering, the castor gives
negative camber to the outer wheel and
positive camber to the inner wheel, which
increases the grip of the front axle. The
centrifugal force thus generates a moment that
returns the steering, because the steering
tends to turn in the opposite direction of
cornering. This angle is not adjustable with this
model of front axle. Fig. 4
• Wheel alignment: This is the only adjustable
angle on this type of front axle. It is easily
adjusted, does not require any complex tools
and takes the mechanic only a relatively short
time to carry out the adjustment. These
distances are adjustable using the adjustment
tubes at each end of the steering cylinders.
There are two possible positions for a front
axle. It is called toe-in when the planes of the
wheels tend to cross in front of the
undercarriage concerned. It is called toe-out
when the planes of the wheels tend to cross
behind the undercarriage concerned.
Fig. 5
8.1.3.2 Track width adjustment

The track width is the distance measured between the centers of the contact areas of the wheels of the
same axle.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 6
On this model of front axle, there are five standard track settings (1506-1606-1706-1806-1906 mm) and
one optional setting (2006 mm).
Procedure
1. Park the tractor on level and stable ground
2. Immobilise the tractor at the rear wheels
3. Raise the front of the tractor using a jack
4. Loosen the nuts (1) and (2) and remove the screws (3) and (4) on each side of the front axle
5. Pull out the knuckles of the beam according to the track setting. For the track width 2006 mm, use the
part (6).
6. Retighten the screws and nuts according to the tightening diagram.
Tests and trials before use

In an enclosed area, try steering, and check the turning radius as well as wheel alignment.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.1.3.3 Wheel alignment

The wheel alignment adjustment procedure is used to align the front wheels according to the
manufacturer's values (toe-in of 6 mm ± 3 mm)
The correct value is obtained by calculating (B) - (A)
= 6 mm ± 3 mm
Fig. 7
Procedure
1. Park the tractor on level and stable ground
2. Immobilise the tractor at the rear wheels
3. Loosen the nut (1) on each side of the front
axle
4. Turn the ball joint (2) one-half turn while holding
the tube (3), to obtain the correct toe-in value.
(toe-in of 6 mm ± 3 mm)
NOTE: It is important to have the same number
of threads visible of the part (2) on each side of
the axle.
5. Tighten the nuts (1) according to the tightening
diagram.
Fig. 8
Tests and trials before use

In an enclosed area, try steering, and check the turning radius as well as wheel alignment.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 9

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.2 DANA 730 front axle

8.2.1 General
8.2.1.1 DANA General

The axle described in this manual has been designed and manufactured according to the customer's
specifications. It comprises a housing containing the differential in its central section and a wheel hub
assembly at each end.
The differential has a dog clutch lock and is held in place by two half bearings mounted on a suitable
support allowing adjustment of the crown wheel and pinion assembly.
The bevel gear is supported by two bearings and is adjusted using shims.
The wheel hubs containing the final drives are held in place by two tapered roller bearings and driven by a
hydraulically-controlled steering gear.
The front axle is driven by the tractor's gearbox via a shaft passing underneath the engine.
8.2.1.2 View of DANA 730 axle assembly
Fig. 10
(1) Hub assembly (4) Steering ram assembly
(2) Axle beam assembly (5) Oscillation pivots
(3) Differential assembly (6) Steering pivot

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.2.1.3 DANA front axle - dimensions - specifications - identification
Dimensions: fixed axle 725
Fig. 11
725 730
A = 1835 mm A = 1830 mm
B = 1640 mm B = 1640 mm
C = Ø 275 mm C = Ø 275 mm
D = Ø 220 mm D = Ø 220 mm
E = 1360 mm E = 1360 mm
F = M18x1.5 F = M18x1.5
G = 34 mm G = 34 mm
H = 480 mm H = 500 mm
I = 276 mm I = 276 mm
J = 308 mm J = 347 mm
ACT0021460
8. Front axle
725 730
K = Ø 120 mm K = Ø 110 mm
L = 45 mm L = 45 mm
M = 43.5 mm M = 43 mm
Technical specifications
Description Axle model

725/154 725/155 730/563
Number of 13/27 14/34 14/34
pinion/crown
wheel teeth
Ratio of final 6 6
drives
Ratio of front 12.462 14.571 14.571
axle
Weight (without 275 kg 278 kg
oil)
Input shaft Anti-clockwise Anti-clockwise
direction of
rotation
Number of 4 planet gears 4 planet gears
differential planet
gears
Differential lock Dog clutch Dog clutch
type
Oil specifications SAE 85 W 90 (API GL5) SAE 85 W 90 (API GL5)
Differential oil 5l 5l
capacity
Final drive unit oil 2 x 0.8 l 2 x 0.8 l
capacity
Differential lock 21 bar 21 bar
clutch supply
pressure
Grease Type NLGI 3 EP Type NLGI 3 EP

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Product identification
The DANA front axle is identified by a plate fitted
to the axle beam.
(1) DANA model and type
(2) Serial number
(3) Reference
(4) Reduction ratio
Fig. 12
8.2.1.4 Topping up and checking oil levels

Levels assembly view
Fig. 13
(1) Final drives oil filler/drain and level plug (3) Differential oil drain plug
(2) Differential oil filler plug and oil level plug

ACT0021460
8. Front axle

The front axle receives movement via the
transmission shaft coming from the gearbox. The
transfer of this movement is governed by a clutch,
which is located between the gearbox and the
transmission shaft. The cab control is electric, but
the mechanical action on the clutch is hydraulic.
The transmission shaft drives the pinion (1) from
the crown wheel and pinion, which in turn drives
the ring gear. This then transfers the movement
through the differential, which drives the axle
shafts and the epicyclic gear trains of the reduction
units located in the final drives. The front wheels
are then set in motion.
Differential locking is governed by a dog clutch in
line with operator usage. The control is electric in
the cab and hydraulic in the front axle.
Fig. 14
A double-acting ram (2) provides the steering. This
is controlled by a hydraulic steering unit (3). The
steering unit is supplied by the tractor's high-
pressure hydraulic system.
Fig. 15

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.2.3.1 Layout of front axle components
Fig. 16
(1) Front axle assembly (2D) Suspension rams
(1A) Final drive (2E) Joke pin of the engine sump
(1B) Half shaft (3) Hydraulic system
(1C) Steering ram (3A) Accumulator
(2) Suspension assembly (3B) Hydraulic channels
(2A) Frame (3C) Control unit
(2B) Rear support of the front axle (4) Angular position sensor
(2C) Front support of the front axle (5) 4WD transmission shaft front axle

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.2.4.1 Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Solution

Differential lock operating Problem in the electrical circuit or See the chapter on electricity and/
incorrectly the hydraulic system for the or the chapter on hydraulics
differential lock control
Problem with leaks from the Inspect and repair the differential
differential lock piston lock system
(characterized by oil leaks from
the axle or an increase in the oil
level in the axle)
Wearing of the differential lock Replace the disks
disks
Noise when in traction and when Hub bearings damaged Replace the damaged parts
overrunning
Noisier when in traction than Insufficient oil level Top up the oil
when overrunning
Incorrect oil grade Drain, rinse and top up the oil
Wearing of the crown wheel and Inspect and replace the crown
pinion wheel and pinion
Wearing of the bearings for the Replace the damaged parts
crown wheel and pinion
Wearing of the sun gears or the Replace the damaged parts
bearings of the final drive
Noisier when overrunning than Pinion nut unscrewed Inspect the crown wheel and
when in traction pinion and the bearings. Check
the clearance. Adjust if necessary.
If nothing is damaged, retighten
the nut.
Only one pinion bearing is Replace the damaged parts
damaged
Noise when steering Planet gears and/or sun gear of Replace the damaged parts
differential damaged
A rubbing noise is produced Universal joint damaged Inspect and replace the universal
during shifting joint
Wheel loosened Inspect for potential damage to
the disks and to the wheel hub
studs. If necessary, replace the
damaged parts and retighten the
wheel nuts.
Swivel-housing seal damaged Replace the damaged parts
Planet gears free in the Check via the upper cover plate.
differential Replace the damaged parts
Wearing of the differential Replace the damaged parts
washers

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Problem Cause Solution

The front axle remains engaged Problem in the electrical circuit or See the chapter on electricity and/
the hydraulic system of the front or the chapter on hydraulics
axle clutch
Problem with leaks from the front Inspect and repair the clutch
axle clutch system
The front axle does not engage Wearing of the front-axle clutch Replace the disks
disks
Knocking occurs when the front Universal joint for the front-axle Inspect the transmission shaft
axle is in traction transmission shaft is damaged and replace the damaged parts
Steering not responding Leaks from the ram Inspect the ram, the hoses and
the steering Orbitrol. Replace the
damaged parts
Orbitrol not working Replace the Orbitrol
Irregular tire wear Tire size incorrect Change the tires for tires of an
appropriate size
Wheel alignment incorrect Check and adjust the angle in
accordance with the procedure
(see the final drives section)
Overload, poor weight distribution Remove the weights and check
over the axle the maximum permissible weight
Incorrect use of the product Replace the damaged parts

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 17

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Referen Description Torque to apply

ce
(1) Screw for steering pivot pins 104 Nm–128 Nm
(2) Screw for final drive cover plate 20 Nm–30 Nm
(3) Screw for final drive crown wheel 68 Nm–75 Nm
(4) Axle drain plug 80 Nm–95 Nm
(5) Final drive filler plug 80 Nm–95 Nm
(6) Axle filler plug 80 Nm–95 Nm
(7) Steering ball joint 240 Nm–270 Nm
(8) Steering setting nut 220 Nm–240 Nm
(9) Steering ball joint, connecting rod-stub axle 200 Nm–220 Nm
(10) Screw for differential housing cover plate 200 Nm–220 Nm
(11) Screw for differential crown wheel 104 Nm–128 Nm
(12) Steering ram screw 200 Nm–220 Nm
(13) Retaining nut for pinion 440 Nm–490 Nm
(14) Steering full lock stop 90 Nm
8.2.5.2 DANA Workshop Service Manuals

DANA 730:
• 730/563: See Workshop Service Manual

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.3 Front suspension for DANA 730 axle

8.3.1 General
8.3.1.1 General information - front suspension

Tractors in the MF 5700 SL range are fitted with a front suspension, the design of which takes into account
the power of the tractor. This suspension consists of two shock absorbers at the front, a front axle
attached to two bearings on a support that is hinged at the engine sump. This suspension provides
improved comfort.

In all scenarios, the 1.1 mm restrictor makes it possible to limit the flow rate when raising and lowering.
The 1.5 mm restrictor makes it possible to avoid having the entire flow rate of the pump at the 100 bar
pressure relief valve, and thus to avoid its oversizing.
The 250 bar valve is used in overload mode to avoid damaging the components in the hydraulic system.
Fig. 18
During lifting, the (RV) Riser Valve (Ref. 6) and (LV) Lower Valve (Ref. 5) solenoid valves are electrically
powered. The (RV) Riser Valve supplies fluid to the large displacement cylinders and accumulator (2) (Ref.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
2). The piston pushes the fluid from the small displacement cylinder through the controlled valves toward
the tank and toward the block up to point (A). At the same time, the pump sends fluid toward point (A) by
entering the (LV) Lower Valve solenoid valve. The relief valve (7) opens as soon as the pressure exceeds
100 bar and releases the fluid toward the tank. The two solenoid valves are supplied in order to create a
counter-pressure and thus reduce the lowering speed, which would be too sudden without this system.
Fig. 19
During lowering, the solenoid valve (LV) Lower Valve is electrically powered. The fluid enters the small
displacement cylinder. The piston pushes the fluid from the large displacement cylinder toward the tank
through the controlled valve (15) of the (RV) Riser Valve solenoid valve. At the same time, the pump sends
fluid toward the (LV) Lower Valve solenoid valve. This fluid is directed toward the small displacement
cylinders and toward the accumulator (1), until the pressure of the relief valve (7) 100 bar is reached. Once
this pressure has been exceeded it is directed toward the tank.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 20
In low position, to manually move the front axle to the lowered position, turn the screw (19). This screw,
which is located on the control unit, releases the pressure in the cylinder chambers (of the large
displacement cylinder), and so directs the fluid toward the tank.
WARNING:
Depending on the pressure in the cylinders, the axle may rise slightly before reaching the
low position, due to the pressure in the large displacement cylinder being greater than
that in the small displacement cylinder.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 21
With an open center hydraulic system, the operating principle is the same with regard to the
suspension, the (LS) signal is controlled by an auxiliary valve (9)

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.3.3.1 Layout of hydraulic components for the front suspension
Fig. 22
(1) 0.5 l 70 bar accumulator (8) Hydraulic line (PSA) Piston side
(2) 2 l 40 bar accumulator accumulator
(3) Suspension rams (9) Hydraulic line (RSA) Rode side accumulator
(4) Hydraulic control unit (10) Hydraulic connection pipe for small
(5) Solenoid valve (LV) Lower valve displacement cylinders
(6) Solenoid valve (RV) Riser valve (11) Hydraulic connection pipe for large
(7) relief valve displacement cylinders

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.3.3.2 Layout of mechanical components for the front suspension
Fig. 23
(1) Upper support (3D) Rear support of the front axle
(2) Suspension ram assembly (3E) Attachment screws and centring pins for the
(2A) Upper attachment screws front and rear support
(2B) Suspension ram (3F) Cotter pin attachment screws
(2C) Lower attachment pins (3G) Flanges
(2D) Attachment screws (3H) Cotter pin attachment screws
(3) Front axle support assembly (3I) Sensor attachment screws
(3A) Front support of the front axle (3J) Sensor assembly
(3B) Front bearing (3K) Suspension cotter pins
(3C) Rear bearing

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.3.3.3 Layout of components for the suspension control unit
Fig. 24
(5) Solenoid valve (LV) Lower valve (14) Controlled non-return valve for the line (RSA)
(6) Solenoid valve (RV) Riser valve Rode side accumulator
(7) relief valve (15) Controlled non-return valve for the line (PSA)
(8) Hydraulic line (PSA) Piston side Piston side accumulator
accumulator (16) Hydraulic line union (P)
(9) Hydraulic line (RSA) Rode side accumulator ((17))Hydraulic line union (LS)
(12) Relief valve 255 bar (18) Hydraulic line union (T)
(13) Relief valve 100 bar (19) Manual decompression control
8.3.4.1 Removing and refitting the front axle and front suspension assembly
General

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
The front wheels and mudguards must be

removed before removing the front axle and front
suspension assembly.
Fig. 25
Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Chock the tractor, place it on axle stands located under the engine spacer and remove the front
wheels and the mudguards.
2. Lower the pressure in the steering cylinder.
Removal
Procedure
1. Fit two M16 lifting rings on each side of the
tractor, as shown in the diagram.
Fig. 26

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
2. Keep the front axle and suspension assembly

in position using the four lifting rings and
straps with sufficient capacity. (C).
Fig. 27
3. (Fig 1) Remove the screws, the plate and the

guard from the right-hand and left-hand
suspension frames.
4. (Fig 2) Remove the pins from the right-hand
and left-hand suspension frames. A slide
5. (Fig 3) Remove the lower screws from the
right-hand and left-hand suspension rams.
6. (Fig 4) Remove the lower pins from the right-
hand and left-hand suspension rams. A slide
Fig. 28
7. Move away the left-hand and right-hand
suspension rams.
8. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the
steering cylinder and the front differential
lock.
9. Remove the transmission shaft from the
front axle.
Fig. 29

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
10. Lower the front axle using a lifting tool, and

slide it under the tractor to release it.
Fig. 30
Refitting
Procedure
No difficulties to report.
Fig. 31
2. (Fig 1) Fit the pins onto the right-hand and

left-hand suspension frames.
3. (Fig 2) Fit the screws smeared with
(LOCTITE 270), the plate and the guard onto
the right-hand and left-hand suspension
frames. Tighten the M16 screws to a torque
of 350 Nm ± 50 Nm and the M12 screws to
a torque of 105 Nm ± 15 Nm .
4. (Fig 3) Fit the lower pins onto the right-hand
and left-hand suspension rams.
5. (Fig 4) Fit the lower screws smeared with
(LOCTITE 270) onto the right-hand and left-
hand suspension rams. Tighten the screws
Fig. 32
to a torque of 105 Nm ± 15 Nm .
Final steps
Procedure
1. Remove the lifting rings.

2. Fit the front transmission shaft.
3. Fit the hydraulic hoses onto the steering cylinder, tightening torque for the unions 50 Nm, and onto
the front differential lock, tightening torque 45 Nm.
4. Refit the wheels and the mudguards.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
5. Check that there are no leaks from the hydraulic unions.
8.3.4.2 Removing and refitting the front suspension assembly

General
Removal of the front suspension assembly
requires removal of the front axle and suspension
assembly. (Refer to corresponding chapter.)
Fig. 33
Removal
Procedure
2. Recover the dowel pins (2).
3. Move aside the two half-supports (7) and (3).
4. If necessary, check and change the bushes
(5) and the seals (4).
5. If necessary, check and change the stops (6).
Fig. 34

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Refitting
Procedure
1. Fit the two dowel pins (2).
2. If necessary, fit two new stops (6) smeared
with (LOCTITE 270) to the corresponding
torque.
3. Fit the two half-supports and tighten the four
screws (1) smeared with (LOCTITE 270) to
the corresponding torque.
Fig. 35
Final steps
Procedure
Refit the front axle and suspension assembly on the tractor.
8.3.4.3 Removing and refitting the suspension rams

General
Ensure that the front suspension is at its lower
stop before operating on the rams.
Removal of the front suspension rams requires
removal of all the radiators.
Fig. 36
Removal
Procedure
1. Remove the cooling unit. Refer to the
corresponding chapter.
Fig. 37

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
2. Remove the plate to access the ram fixing

screws.
Fig. 38
3. Remove the ram fixing screws.
Fig. 39

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
4. Remove the ram fixing screws.

5. Remove the rear hydraulic unions (2) from
the rams.
6. Remove the front hydraulic unions (3) from
the rams.
7. Remove the lower fixing screws (4) from the
rams, then remove the suspension rams.
Fig. 40

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Refitting
Procedure
1. Refit the rams, then fit the screws (4).
2. Tighten the two screws (4) smeared with
(LOCTITE 270) to a torque of 105 Nm ±
15 Nm.
3. Fit the front hydraulic unions (3) on the rams.
4. Fit the rear hydraulic unions (2) on the rams.
5. Fit the two upper supports and screw in the
four screws (1) smeared with (LOCTITE 270)
to a torque of 105 Nm ± 15 Nm.
Fig. 41

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
6. Refit the plate on the front frame.
Fig. 42
7. Refit the cooling unit. Refer to the

corresponding chapter.
Fig. 43
Final steps
Procedure
1. Check the levels.

2. Check that operation is correct and that there are no leaks.
8.3.4.4 Disassembling/reassembling the control unit

General

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Ensure that the front suspension is at its lower

stop before operating on the hydraulic unit. The
screw (B) must be loosened slightly.
Fig. 44
Removal
Procedure
1. Remove the filter unit (1).
2. Disconnect the pipes (2) from the front of the
unit.
3. Disconnect the pipes (3) from the rear of the
unit.
Fig. 45

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
4. Remove the two nuts (4).

5. Remove the hydraulic unit.
Fig. 46
Refitting
Procedure
1. Install the hydraulic unit then fit the screws
(4).
2. Tighten the two screws (4) to a torque of
60 Nm ±10 Nm.
Fig. 47

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
3. Fit the hydraulic unions. Tightening torque for

hydraulic unions: 35 Nm.
4. Refit the filter unit (1).
Fig. 48
Final steps
Procedure
1. Retighten the bleed screw (B) of the hydraulic unit.

8.3.4.5 Removing/refitting the accumulators

General
Ensure that the front suspension is at its lower stop before operating on the hydraulic unit. The bleed
screw must be loosened slightly.
Removal
Procedure
1. Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the clips
securing the hydraulic pipes.
Fig. 49

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
2. Remove the unions (2).
Fig. 50
3. Remove the two screws (3).

4. Lift and remove all of the accumulators.
5. Remove the nuts (4) then remove the
accumulators.
Fig. 51

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
6. Check the accumulators.
Front suspension accumulator check
Reference Volume Pressure
5 2l 40 bar
6 0.75 l 70 bar
Refitting
Procedure
1. Fit the accumulators (5) and (6) onto the lug,
and tighten the clip nuts to the following
torques: Nut (7) to 100 Nm; nut (8) to
200 Nm
2. Fit the assembly onto the tractor chassis and
tighten the two unions (2) to a torque of
50 Nm
3. Tighten the two fixing screws (2) to a torque
of 30 Nm .
Fig. 52
Final steps
Procedure
1. Retighten the bleed screw (B) of the hydraulic unit.


ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.4 GPA50/4-wheel drive clutch

8.4.1 General
8.4.1.1 General
The 4WD front axle clutch assembly (E) is fitted on
the lower section of the GPA50 rear axle. A cover
plate (C) under the center housing provides access
to the 4WD clutch.
The tractor must be disassembled to allow access
to the retainer ring (2), which is sometimes
unfavorably oriented at an angle, and access to the
shaft (1) and to extract the hydraulic ring (12),
which is force fitted into the center housing.
Fig. 53

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Construction
The helical bell gear (13) is constantly meshed with
the driving gear (PM), which is splined to the
pinion.
Fig. 54
The clutch assembly (E) is shimmed in clutch
disengaged position (compressed Belleville springs
(16)) to obtain a clearance J1 from 0.9 mm to
1.1 mm between the retainer ring (9) and the
shim(s) (8).
Fig. 55

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Two ball bearings (10) and (21) support the shaft

(1) and no shimming is required. A single 1.95 mm
to 2.05 mm thick shim (3) fills the space between
the ball bearing (21) and the retainer ring (2).
Fig. 56
The shaft (35) is sealed by a lip seal (33) protected
by a dust seal (34).
An "O" ring (25) provides a seal between the center
housing and the bearing assembly (E).
Fig. 57

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Principles of operation
The clutch assembly is in 2WD mode when it is hydraulically engaged (21 bar) via its ON/OFF solenoid
valve: The disks and intermediate plates are then released by value J1 (0.9 mm to 1.1 mm).
The front axle then becomes passive.
The clutch assembly is in 4WD mode when the hydraulic pressure (21 bar) is cut and when the Belleville
springs are released to the limit of J1 (0.9 mm to 1.1 mm), locking the rotation of the disks and the
intermediate plates on the shaft.
The front axle is then active.

The 4WD clutch mechanism consists of:
• A shaft (1) turning on two ball bearings (10) and
(21) fitted in the bores of the center housing
• A hydraulic clutch assembly (E) attached to the
rotating shaft (1)
• A bell gear (13) driving the rotation of the disks
(14) of the clutch
NOTE: This gear is centered on the shaft (1) by
a friction ring.
• A hydraulic ring (12) and two hook-type seal
rings (11) for pressurized supply (21 bar) of the
4WD clutch.
Fig. 58

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 59
(1) Shaft (4) Deflector
(3) Single shim (6) Bell

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
(7) Cover plate (25) "O" ring

(8) Shim (26) Shim(s)
(10) Ball bearing (28) Bearing cup
(11) Hook-type seal rings (29) Washer
(12) Hydraulic ring (30) Circlip
(13) Bell gear (31) Bearing cone
(14) Disks (32) Bearing cone
(16) Belleville springs (34) Dust seal
(17) "O" ring (35) Shaft
(18) "O" ring (36) Sleeve
(19) Piston
NOTE: The shaft and sleeve are available
(20) "O" ring
under a single reference from the spare parts
(21) Ball bearing
catalog.
(22) Hub
(B) Plug
(23) Circlip
(PM) Driving gear
(24) Seal holder

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.4.2.3 Overview of 4WD clutch mechanism
Fig. 60
(1) Shaft (4) Deflector
(3) Single shim (6) Bell

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
(7) Cover plate (25) "O" ring

(8) Shim (26) Shim(s)
(10) Ball bearing (28) Bearing cup
(11) Hook-type seal rings (29) Washer
(12) Hydraulic ring (30) Circlip
(13) Bell gear (31) Bearing cone
(14) Disks (32) Bearing cone
(16) Belleville springs (34) Dust seal
(17) "O" ring (35) Shaft
(18) "O" ring (36) Sleeve
(19) Piston
NOTE: The shaft and sleeve are available
(20) "O" ring
under a single reference from the spare parts
(21) Ball bearing
catalog.
(22) Hub
(B) Plug
(23) Circlip
(PM) Driving gear
(24) Seal holder
8.4.2.4 Identification of channels and ports

The 4WD mechanism is supplied by an ON/OFF solenoid valve (E).

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Identification of channels
Fig. 61
21 bar low pressure
Lubrication

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 62
(BP) 21-bar low pressure port (R) Return port
(D) Movement of the bell in 2WD

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Shimming
(A) Shimming involves simply filling the space
between the front ball bearing and the
retainer ring with a single 1.95-mm- to 2.05-
mm-thick shim, without the need to measure
it
Fig. 63
Lubrication
The 4WD clutch assembly is immersed in
transmission oil. The oil comes from the axial
channel (C) and radial channels (C1) to (C4) to
lubricate the disks, intermediate plates, bell gear
ring and rear ball bearing by gravity.
The front ball bearing is lubricated as it moves.
The 4WD clutch assembly is housed in a
compartment isolated from the center housing in
order to limit any oil splashes or foam arising from
the rotational movement.
Fig. 64

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.4.3.2 Shimming the 4-wheel drive clutch
Procedure
1. Using a press and suitable fixture, apply a
load of 2880 daN on the cover plate to fully
compress the elastic washers (16).
Fig. 65
2. Fit the retainer ring (9) into the shim(s). Using

a set of shims, gage the temporary clearance
X between the cover plate (7) and the
retainer ring (9). Select the shim(s) (8) to
obtain a definitive clearance J1 from 0,9 mm
to 1,1 mm.
NOTE:
J1 represents the clearance required for the
disks and intermediate plates to rotate freely
in 2-wheel drive mode.
Remove the retainer ring (9). Position the
previously selected shim(s) between the
cover plate (7) and the retainer ring (9). Refit
the retainer ring (9).
3. Fit the piston (19); continue the fitting step.
Fig. 66

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
4. Reconnect the bell gear (13) and the 4-wheel

drive clutch (E).
5. Refit the 4-wheel drive clutch (E)/bell gear
(13) assembly.
Fig. 67
8.4.4.1 Removing/refitting the 4-wheel drive clutch assembly

General

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
The 4-wheel drive clutch is removed by separating

the tractor between the gearbox and the rear axle.
Disassembling the tractor allows access to the
retainer ring (2), which is sometimes unfavorably
oriented at an angle, and access to the shaft (1) in
order to extract the hydraulic ring (12), which is
force fitted into the center housing.
Fig. 68
Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Disconnect the tractor between the gearbox and the rear axle (refer to the chapter and section on
disassembly).
2. Drain any remaining oil from the cover plate located under the 4-wheel drive unit.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Removal
Procedure
1. Remove the cover (C).
Fig. 69

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
2. Remove:
• The single shim (3)
Fig. 70

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
3. Hold the 4-wheel drive clutch assembly (E) in

position and simultaneously take out the
shaft assembly (1), ball bearing (21), deflector
(4) and hook-type seal rings (11) from it.
Fig. 71
4. Remove the 4-wheel drive clutch assembly

(E).
Fig. 72

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Refitting
Procedure
2. On the shaft (1), ensure that:
• The hydraulic pipes (21 bar low pressure
(C5) to (C7)) and lubrication pipes ((C),
(C1), (C2) and (C4)) are not blocked
• There is a plug (B) at the end of the low
pressure channel 21 bar.
Fig. 73

ACT0021460
8. Front axle

• Hydraulic ring (12)
• Ball bearing (10)
• Hook type seal rings (11)
• Deflector (4)
• Ball bearing (21).
NOTE:
Ensure that the hook-type seal rings (11) are
in good condition and check that they turn
freely in their grooves.
Fig. 74

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
4. Refit the 4-wheel drive clutch assembly (E).

5. Hold the 4-wheel drive clutch assembly (E) in
position in the center housing. Turn and refit
the shaft assembly (1), ball bearing (21),
deflector (4) and pre-lubricated hook-type
seal rings (11) simultaneously in the 4-wheel
drive clutch assembly (E) and in the bores of
the center housing.
Fig. 75
6. Using a plastic hammer, gently tap on the
end of the shaft (1) to ensure that it is in
position. Lightly smear the only shim (3) with
miscible grease and fix it to the ball bearing
(21).
Fig. 76

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 77
8. Clean the cover plate (C) and its mating face

on the center housing. Smear the mating
face of the cover plate with Loctite 5206 or
equivalent. Refit the cover plate. Tighten the
screws (V) to 90 Nm - 120 Nm.
Fig. 78

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Final steps
Procedure
1. Reconnect the tractor between the gearbox and the rear axle (refer to the chapter and section on
reassembly).
2. Road test the 4WD clutch.
3. Check the sealing of the mating face on the cover plate (C) under the center housing.
8.4.4.2 Disassembling/reassembling the 4-wheel drive clutch assembly

Disassembly
Procedure
(E) (see corresponding chapter).
Fig. 79
2. Separate the bell gear (13) from the 4-wheel

drive clutch. Take out the retainer ring (5),
drive out the piston (19) and remove the "O"
rings (18) and (20).
Fig. 80

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
3. Using a press and a suitable fixture,

compress the elastic washers (16).
Remove:
• The shim(s) (8)
• The cover plate (7)
• The disks (14)
• The intermediate plates (15).
Fig. 81
4. Separate the hub (22) from the bell (6).

Remove the "O" ring (17). Remove the elastic
washers (16), marking their shape and the
direction in which they are fitted.
Fig. 82

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Reassembly
Procedure
1. Check and clean all components. Replace
Ensure that:
• The axial and radial shaft channels are not
blocked
• There is a plug (rivet) at the end of the
low pressure channel 21 bar.
2. Position the elastic washers (16) in the clutch
bell housing in the required fitting direction.
Lubricate and fit the "O" ring (17) onto the
hub (22). Refit the hub (22) in the bell
housing (6) until it comes into contact with
the elastic washers.
Fig. 83

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
3. Insert the disks (14) and the intermediate

plates (15), starting with a disk against the
bell (6). Fit the disks (a, c, e, g and i) and
intermediate plates (b, d, f and h) alternately
in alphabetical order until the number of
disks and plates removed during disassembly
is reached. Assembly should end with a disk
(14) against the cover plate (7). Fit the cover
plate (7).
4. Shim the 4-wheel drive clutch if one or more
shimming-related parts of the 4-wheel drive
clutch have been replaced.
Fig. 84

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
5. Once the 4-wheel drive clutch has/has not

been shimmed, center the disks and the
intermediate plates in relation to the pin of
the bell gear (13) and the pin of the shaft (1).
To do this, proceed as follows:
• Test-fit the 4-wheel drive clutch (E), bell
gear (13) and shaft (1) in a vertical position
without compressing the elastic washers
(16)
• Then, carefully separate the parts
mentioned above (4-wheel drive clutch
(E), bell gear (13) and shaft (1)) without
moving the disks and intermediate plates
diagonally.
Fig. 85

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
6. Place the 4-wheel drive clutch (E) on a table

press, still without moving the disks and
intermediate plates.
Using a press and a suitable fixture,
compress the elastic washers (16) and refit:
• The shim(s) (8)
Fig. 86
7. Lubricate and assemble the new "O" rings

(18) and (20) on the piston (19). Re-center
the piston in the bell (6) using a plastic
hammer. After fitting, check that there are no
fragments of seal. Fit the retainer ring (5).
Fig. 87
8. Reconnect the bell gear (13) and the 4-wheel

drive clutch (E).
9. Refit the 4-wheel drive clutch (E) and bell
gear (13) assembly.
Fig. 88

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.4.4.3 Extracting/fitting the rear ball bearing and the hydraulic ring
Extracting the rear ball bearing (10)
Procedure
(E).
2. Extract the rear ball bearing (10) using a
standard locally obtained puller with blades
around the circumference.
Fig. 89
Fitting the rear ball bearing (10)
Procedure
1. IMPORTANT:
The inserting sleeve must be up against the external bearing cage.
Using a locally obtained sleeve, fit the rear ball bearing (10) up against the shoulder of the center
housing.
2. Refit the 4WD clutch assembly (E) (see chapter Removing/refitting the 4-wheel drive clutch

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Extracting the hydraulic ring (12)
Procedure
1. Remove the 4WD clutch assembly (E) (see
chapter Removing/refitting the 4-wheel drive
clutch assembly, page 8-54 ).
2. Extract the hydraulic ring (12) using a
standard locally obtained puller with blades
around the circumference.
Fig. 90

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fitting the hydraulic ring (12)
Procedure
1. Using service tool 4346904M1, fit the
hydraulic ring (12) according to the dimension
shown see Fig. 91 . Using a jet of
compressed air, check that the ports and the
groove of the hydraulic ring (12) are correctly
positioned opposite the hydraulic channel of
the center housing. This check will eliminate
any obstruction in the hydraulic pipe due to
poor fitting.
2. Refit the 4WD clutch assembly (E) (see
chapter Removing/refitting the 4-wheel drive
clutch assembly, page 8-54 ).
Fig. 91
8.4.5 Service tools
8.4.5.1 General
8.4.5.2 GPA50/Clutch - Service tools

Reference 4346904M1
Description Hydraulic ring fitting drift

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
(A) Fitting drift

(B) Centring tool

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.5 Steering unit/Open Center

8.5.1 General
The spool valve (Orbitrol) is attached to the pedal
console and is housed in the center of the cab
front bulkhead. Its specifications are written on a
plate riveted to the lower part of the spool valve.
The hydrostatic steering system has no
mechanical connection between the steering
wheel and steering ram.
The system comprises the following main
components:
• A pressurized oil supply from the low flow rate
stage of the hydraulic pump
• A hydrostatic steering spool valve (Orbitrol)
fitted in parallel Fig. 92
• A double acting central ram fitted to the front
axle
The Orbitrol comprises a selector spool valve, a
spring centered supply sleeve and a drive shaft
linked to the steering column. The system is
protected by a relief valve, two security valves and
two suction valves.
It has four hydraulic ports:
• Pressure
• Return to the 21-bar valve
• Two supplies to the steering ram.

The spool valve receives a priority supply from the low flow rate system. When the steering wheel is
turned, the necessary oil flow is directed to the corresponding side of the steering ram. Excess flow rate
not required by the ram is directed via the return ports to the 21-bar valve located on the right-hand
hydraulic cover plate. In the event of an engine breakdown or hydraulic failure, the spool valve acts as a
manual pump and allows the tractor to be steered.
NOTE: Operating in this way requires greater effort to be applied to the steering wheel.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Neutral position (engine running)
Fig. 93
In neutral position (engine running), the spool valve (25) is centered in relation to the sleeve (27) by the
springs (13). The channels (P1) and (R) are not supplied. The oil coming from the port (P) passes directly via
the hose T to supply the 21-bar valve. The circuit is open center. Two security valves (20) and two suction
valves (23) are located in ports (L) and (R) of the spool valve. The security valves (20) protect the system
between the steering ram and the spool valve from shocks to the wheels. The suction valves (23) allow the
oil released by the security valves (20) to pass from the right-hand channel to the left-hand channel or vice
versa depending on the movement of the piston inside the steering ram.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Steering in lock position (engine running)
Fig. 94
Action on the steering wheel (to the right or left) produces an angular displacement of the spool valve (25)
in relation to the sleeve (27). The flow coming from the pump is directed to the metering device (stator (6)
and rotor (9)). The rotor (9) is rotated and directs back to the ram a quantity of oil proportional to the
rotational angle. The rotor (9) turns proportionally to the steering wheel. Example: Let us suppose that the
steering wheel is turned by 5°. An angular displacement of 5° of the spool valve (25) is produced in relation
to the sleeve (27). The rotor (9) is rotated as long as it is supplied. It drives with it the connecting shaft (11)
and the sleeve (27). When these have turned 5°, the spool valve (25) and the sleeve (27) are centered
again by the springs (13). The rotor is no longer supplied and stops. The same logic applies for greater
angles. The quantity of oil delivered by the steering unit to the ram (A) is therefore proportional to the
rotational angle of the steering wheel. Depending on whether steering lock is applied to the left or right,
the spool valve (25) directs the oil delivered by the metering device (stator (6) and rotor (9)) to port (L) or
(R). During rotation, the sleeve (27) ensures the synchronous communication of the metering device
cavities with the system from the pump, on the one-hand, and the system to the ram A, on the other hand.
A non-return valve (26) is screwed into the supply port of the spool valve. This one-way valve stops
excessive pressure received by the wheels from being transmitted to the pump whenever steering lock is
applied. If the pressure in the steering system is too high, the relief valve (18) located in the spool valve is
activated: The excess pressure is then directed to the channel (T).

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Manual steering (engine stopped)
Fig. 95
When the pump is no longer operating or the available pressure is too low, the metering device is no
longer hydraulically driven. It is no longer power assisted. In this case, action on the steering wheel
compresses the centring springs (13). The angular clearance between the pin (7) and the sleeve (27) is
reduced to zero, resulting in mechanical rotation of the metering device (stator (6) and rotor (9)). The spool
valve then operates in the same way as a hand pump. The oil returning from the ram (A) passes through
the non-return valve (22) and supplies the metering device. The pressure generated is proportional to the
torque applied to the steering wheel. A greater effort is therefore required to turn the steering wheel.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.5.3.1 Cross-section view
Fig. 96
(1) Screw (2) Screw
ACT0021460
8. Front axle
(3) Seal (18) Relief valve

(4) Cover plate (19) Seal
(5) "O" ring (20) Security valve
(6) Stator (21) Orbitrol spool valve
(7) Pin (22) Non-return valve
(8) "O" ring (23) Suction valves
(9) Rotor (24) Ring
(10) Spacer (25) Spool valve
(11) Link shaft (26) Non-return valve
(12) Washer (27) Sleeve
(13) Centring springs (28) "O" ring
(14) Needle roller bearing (29) Distribution plate
(15) Ring (30) "O" rings
(16) Washer (31) Manifold

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 97
(3) Seal (6) Stator

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
(7) Pin (20) Security valve

(8) "O" ring (21) Orbitrol spool valve
(9) Rotor (22) Non-return valve
(10) Spacer (23) Suction valves
(11) Link shaft (24) Ring
(12) Washer (25) Spool valve
(13) Centring springs (26) Non-return valve
(14) Needle roller bearing (27) Sleeve
(15) Ring (28) "O" ring
(16) Washer (29) Distribution plate
(17) "O" ring (30) "O" rings
(18) Relief valve (31) Manifold
(19) Seal (32) Screw

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.5.3.3 Identification of channels
Fig. 98
(A) Steering ram (T) Return from Orbitrol/supply to 21-bar valve
(P) Supply coming from the hydraulic pump (R) Supply to right-hand union of the steering
(right cover plate) ram

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
(L) Supply to left-hand union of the steering ram
Fig. 99
(A) Steering wheel (E) Steering spool valve return
(B) Steering column (F) Supply to the steering ram
(C) Steering spool valve (G) Steering ram
(D) Supply to the steering spool valve (H) Front axle
8.5.4.1 Removing/refitting the steering spool valve

Remove the bonnet and its support.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Removal
1. Remove the cover (1).
Fig. 100
2. Mark and disconnect the (T), (P), (R) and (L)

unions on the spool valve.
Fig. 101
3. Remove the retaining nuts (2) from the

steering unit support, and remove the
steering unit.
Fig. 102

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
4. Remove the fixing screws (3) from the

steering unit in order to separate it from its
support.
Fig. 103
5. If necessary, remove the screws (4) to

replace the rubber mounting (5).
Refitting
6. Check and clean the components. Replace
any defective parts.
Fig. 104
8. Connect the unions to the spool valve
according to the marks made during
disassembly.
9. Tighten the following unions to torque:
• T: 50 Nm
• P: 85 Nm
• R and L: 37 Nm
Fig. 105

Refit the cover and its support.Perform a steering test.Check that there are no leaks.
8.5.4.2 Disassembling/reassembling the steering spool valve
Reminder
If the steering spool valve (Orbitrol) is defective, ensure that it is replaced with a spool valve with the same
specifications.
Example: OSPC 150 ON OSP spool valve = Orbitrol steering pump C = valves incorporated into the spool
valve housing 150 = 150 cc displacement per rotor revolution ON = Open Center without feedback

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Disassembly
Procedure
1. Remove the spool valve from the tractor and tighten it in a vice fitted with plastic jaws.
2. Remove the screws (3). Separate the
manifold (31) from the spool valve (21).
3. Collect the seals (30).
Fig. 106

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
4. Remove the screws (1). Mark the position of

the screw (2) and then remove it.
5. Remove the cover plate (4), the "O" ring (5),
the stator (6) and the "O" ring (8).
Fig. 107
6. Remove the spacer (10), the rotor (9), the
distributor plate (29) and the "O" ring (28).
7. Take out the splined connecting shaft (11).
8. Unscrew the threaded bush and recover the
ball from the non-return valve (22).
9. Take out the two pins and the two balls from
the suction valves (23) of the spool valve.
Fig. 108

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
10. Extract by pushing the sleeve (27) and spool

valve (25) assembly, checking that the pin (7)
is in line with the horizontal axis.
11. Remove the washers (12) and (16), the
needle roller bearing (14) and the bush (24)
from the sleeve/spool valve assembly.
Remove the pin (7) and the centring springs
(13) by pressing on one of their ends.
Separate the sleeve (27) from the spool
valve (25).
Fig. 109
12. Unscrew the plug on the discharge valve
(18). Using an 8-mm Allen key, disassemble
the threaded bush and remove the seal, the
spring and the valve (the crimped seat
cannot be removed).
13. Unscrew the two plugs from the security
valves (20) and remove the seals. Using a 6-
mm Allen key, remove the threaded bushes
and take out the springs, the balls and their
seats (the crimped seats cannot be
removed).
14. Extract the seal (19), the bush (15) and the
"O" ring (17). Disassemble the non-return
valve (26).
Fig. 110

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Reassembly
Procedure
1. Check and clean the components. Replace any defective parts. Lubricate with clean transmission oil
before reassembly.
NOTE: During reassembly, the seals should always be replaced.
2. Reassemble the non-return valve (26).
3. Fit the seal (19), the "O" ring (17) and the
bush (15).
4. Place the balls and springs in the recesses of
the security valves (20). Screw in the
threaded bushes. Fit the seals and tighten
the plugs.
5. Fit the valve and spring in the recess of the
discharge valve (18). Screw in the threaded
bush. Fit the seal and tighten the plug to a
torque of 40–60 Nm.
Fig. 111

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
6. Insert the spool valve (25) into the sleeve

(27). Position the centring springs (13)
according to see Fig. 112 and fit the pin (7).
7. Position the bush (24) on the sleeve and
spool valve assembly so that the chamfer
facilitates assembly in the spool valve.
8. Fit the washers (12) and (16), with the
chamfer of the washer (12) turned towards
the centring springs (13), inserting the needle
roller bearing (14) between them.
9. Fit the sleeve and spool valve assembly in
the spool valve by oscillating it slightly.
Check that the pin (7) is held horizontally.
Fig. 112
10. Fit the two balls and the two pins in the
recesses of the suction valves (23).
11. Fit the ball in the recess of the non-return
valve (22). Screw in the threaded bush.
12. Position the splined connecting shaft (11).
13. Fit the "O" ring (28) and the distribution plate
(29).
Fig. 113

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
14. Fit the rotor (9) so that the two depressions

(C) lie along the axis of the slot in the splined
shaft (11). Refit the spacer (10).
Fig. 114
15. Fit the "O" rings (5) and (8) on the stator (6).
16. While avoiding moving the rotor (9), fit the
stator (6). Then move it so that its fixing
holes align with those of the spool valve.
NOTE: The rotor (9) and the pin (7) must be
in the position indicated.
18. Replace the seals.
Fit:
• The screw (2) (in the position marked
during disassembly).
• The opposing screws (1) to a torque of
30–35 Nm.
• The manifold (31) on the spool valve (21)
(screws tightened to 60 Nm).
• The sleeves (1) on the manifold.
Fig. 115
19. Using a test bench or a suitable fixture, check the adjustment and operation of the spool valve.
20. Refit the spool valve on the tractor.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.6 Steering unit/Closed Center

8.6.1 General
The steering system used on the tractors is a hydrostatic system with no mechanical linkage between the
steering wheel and the steering ram.
Its control system is closed center with a dynamic Load Sensing load signal.
Steering unit
The simple steering unit comprises:
• A main unit with pump supply ports, tank
return, Load Sensing and steering ram supply
• A selector spool valve activated by the steering
wheel
• A gear pump activated by the steering wheel
Fig. 116
The electrohydraulic steering unit comprises:
• A main unit with pump supply ports, tank
return, Load Sensing and steering ram supply
• A selector spool valve activated by the steering
wheel
• A gear pump activated by the steering wheel
• An electrohydraulic steering control unit
• A solenoid valve
Fig. 117
Electrohydraulic steering
The electrohydraulic steering unit assists with the operation of the SpeedSteer and Auto-Guide™ functions.
A rotary sensor is mounted between the steering
column and the steering unit. It informs the
controller of the position of the steering wheel.
Fig. 118

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
8.6.2 Hydraulic operating principle

Neutral steering wheel
Fig. 119
(Pdir Pump pressure (P) Gear pump
) (T) Spool valve distributor
(LS) Load Sensing (V) Steering ram
(D) Steering unit
The Load Sensing line (LS) is connected to the tank return.
The pump flow (Pdir) is blocked by the spool valve distributor (T). The pressure increases and enables the
priority valve to direct the pump flow to the non-priority functions.
Activated steering wheel

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 120
(Pdir Pump pressure (P) Gear pump
) (T) Spool valve distributor
(LS) Load Sensing (V) Steering ram
(D) Steering unit
The Load Sensing line (LS) is connected to the pump pressure from the spool valve distributor (T). This
pressure activates the priority valve. The pump flow (Pdir) is sent to the steering unit (D). The spool valve
distributor (T) sends the pump flow (Pdir) to the gear pump (P) then to the steering ram (V).
8.6.3 Electrohydraulic operating principle

Depending on the model, the steering unit may be electrohydraulically controlled to provide the
SpeedSteer and Auto-Guide™ functions. The unit includes additional spools and a PVE module for
electrohydraulic steering.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Hydraulic operation
Fig. 121
(PVE Electrohydraulic steering module (RV) Steering pressure relief valve
) (LSR Load Sensing valve
(EH) Electrohydraulic activation valve )
(EV) Solenoid valve (DV) Steering control spool
The EV solenoid valve must be powered for the electrohydraulic function. In this case:
• The PVE module is powered by the control pressure (12 bar) from the RV valve.
• The EH valve is moved by the control pressure and connects the steering control spool DV to the
steering ram
The PVE module provides control of the steering spool DV thanks to the pressure regulated by the RV
valve.
To power the steering ram (to turn right in this example), the PVE module moves the DV spool. The
pressure supply is connected to the steering ram and the Load Sensing LSR valve. The Load Sensing LSR
valve creates a restriction in the main Load Sensing line and closes the dynamic Load Sensing flow coming
from the priority valve. The Load Sensing pressure created controls the priority valve to provide the
necessary flow rate and pressure.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Description of PVE module
Fig. 122
(PE) Control pressure supply (E) Control solenoid valves
(DV) Steering control spool (C) Position sensor
The PVE module mainly consists of four solenoid valves (E) and one position sensor (C). The solenoid
valves (E) control the movement of the spool (DV) thanks to the pressure (PE). The sensor (C) informs the
controller of the spool position.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle

Standard Orbitrol
(P) Power supply
(T) Tank return
(L) Steering ram left-hand supply
(R) Steering ram right-hand supply
(LS) Control
Fig. 123
Electrohydraulic Orbitrol
(P) Power supply
(T) Tank return
(L) Steering ram left-hand supply
(R) Steering ram right-hand supply
(LS) Control
Fig. 124
X210 - Orbitrol steering sensor (SASA sensor)
X236 - Electrohydraulic Orbitrol (gray connector)
X237 - Electrohydraulic Orbitrol (black connector)
X372 - Orbitrol safety solenoid valve
Fig. 125

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 126
(3) Seal (6) Stator

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
(7) Pin (19) Seal

(9) Rotor (21) Orbitrol steering spool valve
(10) Spacer (22) Non-return valve
(11) Link shaft (23) Suction valves
(12) Washer (24) Ring
(13) Centring springs (25) Spool valve
(14) Needle roller bearing (26) Non-return valve
(15) Ring (27) Sleeve
(17) "O" ring (29) Distribution plate
(18) Relief valve

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
Fig. 127
(3) Seal (6) Stator

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
(7) Pin (19) Seal

(9) Rotor (21) Orbitrol steering spool valve
(10) Spacer (22) Non-return valve
(11) Link shaft (23) Suction valves
(12) Washer (24) Ring
(13) Centring springs (25) Spool valve
(14) Needle roller bearing (26) Non-return valve
(15) Ring (27) Sleeve
(17) "O" ring (29) Distribution plate
(18) Relief valve
8.6.5.1 Removing/refitting the steering spool valve

Remove the bonnet and its support.
Removal
1. Remove the cover (1).
2. For an electrohydraulic spool valve, mark and
disconnect all the steering unit connectors.
Fig. 128
3. Mark and disconnect the (T), (P), (LS), (R) and
(L) unions on the spool valve.
Fig. 129

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
4. Remove the retaining nuts (2) from the

steering unit support, and remove the
steering unit.
Fig. 130
5. Remove the fixing screws (3) from the

steering unit in order to separate it from its
support.
Fig. 131
6. If necessary, remove the screws (4) to

replace the rubber mounting (5).
Refitting
7. Check and clean the components. Replace
any defective parts.
Fig. 132

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
9. Connect the unions to the spool valve

according to the marks made during
disassembly.
10. Tighten the following unions to torque:
• T: 50 Nm
• P: 85 Nm
• LS: 15 Nm
• R and L: 37 Nm
Fig. 133

Refit the cover and its support.Perform a steering test.Check that there are no leaks.
8.6.5.2 Disassembling/reassembling the steering spool valve
Reminder
If the steering spool valve (Orbitrol) is defective, ensure that it is replaced with a spool valve with the same
specifications.
Example: OSPC 150 ON OSP spool valve = Orbitrol steering pump C = valves incorporated into the spool
valve housing 150 = 150 cc displacement per rotor revolution ON = Open Center without feedback
Disassembly
Procedure
1. Remove the spool valve from the tractor and tighten it in a vice fitted with plastic jaws.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
2. Remove the screws (3). Separate the

manifold (31) from the spool valve (21).
3. Collect the seals (30).
Fig. 134
4. Remove the screws (1). Mark the position of
the screw (2) and then remove it.
5. Remove the cover plate (4), the "O" ring (5),
the stator (6) and the "O" ring (8).
Fig. 135

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
6. Remove the spacer (10), the rotor (9), the

distributor plate (29) and the "O" ring (28).
7. Take out the splined connecting shaft (11).
8. Unscrew the threaded bush and recover the
ball from the non-return valve (22).
9. Take out the two pins and the two balls from
the suction valves (23) of the spool valve.
Fig. 136
10. Extract by pushing the sleeve (27) and spool
valve (25) assembly, checking that the pin (7)
is in line with the horizontal axis.
11. Remove the washers (12) (16), the needle
roller bearing (14) and the bush (24) from the
sleeve/spool valve assembly. Remove the
pin (7), and the centring springs (13) by
pressing on their ends. Separate the
sleeve (27) from the spool valve (25).
Fig. 137
12. Unscrew the plug on the discharge valve (18). Using an 8 mm Allen key, disassemble the threaded
bush and remove the seal, the spring and the valve (the crimped seat cannot be removed).

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
13. Unscrew the plug on the discharge valve

(18). Using a 8 mm Allen key, disassemble
the threaded bush and remove the seal, the
spring and the valve (the crimped seat
cannot be removed).
14. Unscrew the two plugs from the security
valves (20) and remove the seals. Using a 6
mm Allen key, remove the threaded bushes
and take out the springs, the balls and their
seats (the crimped seats cannot be
removed).
15. Extract the seal (19), the bush (15) and the
"O" ring (17). Disassemble the non-return
valve (26).
Fig. 138
Reassembly
Procedure
1. Check and clean the components and replace those that are defective. Lubricate the components
with clean transmission oil.
2. Reassemble the non-return valve (26).
3. Fit the seal (19), the "O" ring (17) and the bush(15).
4. Place the balls and springs in the recesses of the security valves (20). Screw in the threaded bushes,
fit the seals and tighten the plugs.
5. Fit the valve and spring in the recess of the relief valve (18), and screw in the threaded bush. Fit the
seal and tighten the plug to a torque of 40 Nm - 60 Nm.

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
6. Insert the drum (25) into the sleeve (27).

Position the centering springs (13) and fit the
pin (7).
7. Position the bush (24) on the sleeve and
spool valve assembly so that the chamfer
facilitates assembly in the spool valve.
8. Fit the washers (12) (16), with the chamfer of
the washer (12) turned toward the centring
springs (13), inserting the needle roller
bearing (14) between them.
9. Fit the sleeve and spool valve assembly in
the spool valve by oscillating it slightly.
Check that the pin (7) is held horizontally.
10. Fit the two balls and the two pins in the
recesses of the suction valves (23).
11. Fit the ball in the recess of the non-return
valve (22) and screw in the threaded bush.
Fig. 139
12. Position the splined connecting shaft (11).
13. Fit the "O" ring (28) and the distribution plate
(29).
14. Fit the rotor (9) so that the two depressions
(C) lie along the axis of the slot in the splined
shaft (11). Refit the spacer (10).
15. Fit the "O" rings (5) (8) on the stator (6).
Fig. 140

ACT0021460
8. Front axle
16. Align the fixing holes of the stator (6) with

those of the spool valve. Refit the stator on
the spool valve without moving the rotor (9).
NOTE: The rotor (9) and the pin (7) must be
in the position indicated.
18. Refit the screw (2) (in the position marked at
disassembly) and the screws (1) fitted with
their seals (3). Tighten opposing screws to
30 Nm - 35 Nm.
19. Using a test bench or a suitable fixture,
check the adjustment and operation of the
spool valve.
20. Refit the spool valve on the tractor.
21. Check the sealing of the unions.
Fig. 141

ACT0021460
8. Front axle

ACT0021460
Table of contents
9. Hydraulics
9.1 GPA50/Open Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

9.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.2.1 Low-pressure system, low flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.2.2 High-pressure system, high flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.1.3.1 Layout of components of the low pressure low flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.1.3.2 Layout of components of the high pressure high flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.1.3.3 Open Center lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.1.4 Hydraulic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.1.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.1.4.2 High flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.1.4.3 Low flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.1.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.1.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.1.5.2 Hydraulic test – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.2 GPA50/Open Center/Right-hand cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.2.2 Thermostatic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.2.3.1 View of external assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.2.3.2 View of internal assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.2.3.3 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.2.4 Removing/refitting the cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9.2.5 Disassembly/Reassembly: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9.2.5.1 Disassembling/reassembling the high pressure valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9.2.5.2 Disassembling/reassembling the 21-bar valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9.2.5.3 Disassembling/reassembling the lubrication valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.2.5.4 Disassembling/reassembling the brake lubrication valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9.2.5.5 Disassembling/reassembling the thermostatic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9.2.5.6 Disassembling/reassembling the cooling bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
9.2.5.7 Removing/refitting the pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
9.3 GPA50/100 l/min Open Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9.3.2.1 Low-pressure system, low flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9.3.2.2 High-pressure system, high flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9.3.3.1 Layout of components of the low pressure low flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
9.3.3.2 Layout of components of the high pressure high flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
9.3.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
9.3.4.2 High flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
9.3.4.3 Low flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
9.3.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
9.3.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

ACT0021460
Table of contents
9.4 GPA50/100 l/min Open Center/Right-hand cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65

9.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9.4.2 Thermostatic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9.4.3.3 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
9.4.5.2 Disassembling/reassembling the 21-bar valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
9.4.5.3 Disassembling/reassembling the lubrication valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
9.4.5.4 Disassembling/reassembling the brake lubrication valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
9.4.5.5 Disassembling/reassembling the thermostatic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
9.4.5.6 Disassembling/reassembling the cooling bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
9.5 GPA50/100 l/min Open Center/Left-hand cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
9.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
9.5.2.3 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
9.6 GPA50/Closed Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
9.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
9.6.3.2 Closed Center lubrication circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
9.6.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
9.6.4.2 High flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
9.6.4.3 Low flow rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
9.6.4.4 Lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
9.6.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
9.6.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
9.7 GPA50/Closed Center/Right-hand cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-115
9.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-115
9.7.3 Filtration and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119
9.7.4 Priority block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121
9.7.5.2 Exploded view of the hydraulic cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-127
9.7.5.3 Exploded view of the single priority block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128
9.7.5.4 Exploded view of the double priority block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129
9.7.6.1 Removing/refitting the cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-131
9.7.6.2 Disassembling/reassembling the right-hand cover plate and charge pump . . . . 9-134
9.7.6.3 Replacing the charge pump seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-137

ACT0021460
Table of contents
9.8 GPA50/Closed Center/Left-hand cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140

9.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140
9.8.3.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-145
9.8.4.1 Removing/refitting the cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-145
9.8.4.2 Disassembling/reassembling the cover plate and the variable displacement
pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-147
9.9 GPA50 Open Center/Spool valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-150
9.9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-150
9.9.3.1 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-156
9.9.4.1 Removing/refitting the spool valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-159
9.9.4.2 Fitting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-160
9.10 GPA50 Open Center/Rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-166
9.10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-166
9.10.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-166
9.10.3.1 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-169
9.10.3.2 Identification of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-170
9.10.4 Tests and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-170
9.10.4.1 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-170
9.10.5.1 Removing/refitting the linkage spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-171
9.11 GPA50 Open Center/Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-172
9.11.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-172
9.11.3.1 Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-175
9.11.4 Adjustments, bleeding and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-175
9.11.4.1 Setting the accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-175
9.12 GPA50 Open Center/Mid-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176
9.12.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176
9.12.5 Removing/refitting the Mid Mounted unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-180
9.12.5.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-180
9.12.5.2 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-182
9.12.5.3 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-182
9.13 GPA50 Closed Center/Spool valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-183
9.13.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-183
9.13.2 Layout of components and identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-184
9.13.3.1 Exploded view of the control valve block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-187
9.13.4.1 Removing/refitting the spool valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-189
9.14 GPA50 Closed Center/Rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-192
9.14.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-192
ACT0021460
Table of contents

9.14.4.1 Removing/refitting the linkage spool valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-194
9.15 GPA50 Closed Center/Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196
9.15.1.1 Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196
9.16 GPA50 Closed Center/Mid-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-198
9.16.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-198
9.16.5 Removing/refitting the Mid Mounted unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-202
9.16.5.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-202
9.16.5.2 Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204
9.16.5.3 Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204
9.17 GPA50/Brake master cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-206
9.17.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-206
9.17.3.1 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-210
9.17.3.2 Identification of Open Center system channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-211
9.17.3.3 Identification of Closed Center system channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-212
9.17.4.1 Bleeding the main brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-212
9.17.4.2 Bleeding the trailer brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-214
9.17.4.3 Adjusting brake pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-215
9.17.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-216
9.17.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-216
9.17.5.2 GPA50/Hydraulic braking – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-216
9.18 Open Center/Hydraulic trailer braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-217
9.18.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-217
9.18.3.1 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-221
9.18.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-225
9.18.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-225
9.19 Closed Center/Hydraulic trailer braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-227
9.19.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-227
9.19.3 Schematic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-230
9.19.5 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-233
9.19.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-233

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.1 GPA50/Open Center

9.1.1 General
The open center hydraulic system comprises two
separate systems.
These two systems are supplied by a two-stage
gear pump (1) fitted to the internal face of the
right-hand hydraulic cover plate (2). The pump
sucks transmission oil from the common tank
formed by the center housing and the gearbox
through a 150 micron strainer (3) fitted in the
transmission.
A 15 micron main filter (4) and a blockage indicator
(5) are fitted to the low flow rate system upstream
of the Orbitrol steering spool valve. The hydraulic
pump is driven by the ring gear of the PTO clutch
unit.
Fig. 1
9.1.2.1 Low-pressure system, low flow rate

NOTE: The first stage of the pump supplies the hydrostatic steering where the pressure can reach 170 bar.
Hydraulic flow
At the outlet of the 11-cm³ (GTA5050) or 14-cm³
(GTA2550) pump, the oil is directed to the 15-
micron filter (1). At the filter outlet, the oil supplies
the Orbitrol steering spool valve (2).
After supplying the Orbitrol steering spool valve as
required, the oil is redirected to the right-hand
cover plate attached to the center housing. This
cover plate performs several low-pressure
functions.
It ensures:
• an operating pressure for the various
transmission components via a 21-bar valve (2)
fitted downstream of the Orbitrol unit; Fig. 2
• cooling and lubrication of the gearbox and
connected components

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Transmission components
The 21-bar system, regulated by the valve (3), supplies, in parallel, the various transmission functions
through internal channels in the gearbox housing.
None of these functions has priority and they may be activated simultaneously. The solenoid valves (4-
wheel drive, power take-off, Dyna-4, Dyna-6 and reverse drive) are connected to the tractor's electronic
system.
The functions supplied by the low flow rate system are as follows:
• the hydrostatic steering
• the PowerShuttle
• the gearbox
• the Dyna-4, Dyna-6 ratios
• the differential lock (front and rear)
• the power take-off systems:
- clutch,
- brake,
- power take-off speed selector switch
- charge for brake master cylinders
Cooling and lubrication

After supplying the various transmission components, the oil passes through the thermostatic unit (4) (if
fitted) located on the right-hand cover plate. Depending on the temperature of the oil, it opens or does not
open the cooling system (5).
The oil leaving the thermostatic unit is directed to the lubrication system of the rear axle and power take-
off. The lubrication pressure is maintained by a valve set to 3 bar located in the right-hand cover plate.
The gearbox is lubricated by a gerotor type pump located at the rear of the gearbox and driven by the
power take-off shaft. A check valve limits its pressure to 1.5 bar.
9.1.2.2 High-pressure system, high flow rate

At the 19-cm³ pump outlet, the oil is directed to
the trailer brake spool valve (1) (if fitted), then to
the auxiliary spool valves (2) and the linkage valve
(3) located above the rear axle.
A safety valve, set to 195 bar (4) and fitted into the
right-hand cover plate, protects the high-pressure
system.
The excess flow rate from the spool valves returns
to the rear axle lubrication system, limited to 3 bar,
and to the pump suction manifold via a restrictor
without passing through the 150-micron filter.
Fig. 3

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.1.3.1 Layout of components of the low pressure low flow rate system
Fig. 4
(1) Front differential lock (25) Oil cooler
(3) Pressure connector (26) Brake master cylinder
(4) Hydrostatic steering spool valve (27) Master cylinder reservoir
(5) Forward clutch (30) Proportional PTO
(6) Reverse clutch (31) Range 1 solenoid valve
(7) Accumulator (32) Range 2 solenoid valve
(8) Creeper gear engagement (33) Range 3 solenoid valve
(9) Creeper gear disengagement (34) Range 4 solenoid valve
(10) Valve 3 bar (35) Pressure switch 12 bar
(12) PTO clutch (36) Pressure switch 0,4 bar
(13) 15 µ filter (43) Pump 11 cm³
(14) Blockage indicator (44) Main brakes
(15) 60 µ filter (45) 540 rpm PTO
((17))Valve 21 bar (46) 540E PTO
(21) 4WD clutch (48) PTO brake
(22) Rear differential lock (49) Cooling system with thermo valve

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(51) Valve 170 bar (56) Powershift module reverse clutch

(55) Powershift module forward clutch
9.1.3.2 Layout of components of the high pressure high flow rate system
Fig. 5
(16) Pump 19 cm³ (42) High pressure safety valve
(23) Auxiliary spool valves (54) Linkage valve
((41))Trailer brake valve

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.1.3.3 Open Center lubrication system
Fig. 6
(A) Gearbox lubrication feed (from right-hand (C) Reverse layshaft gear (nozzle 1.25 mm)
cover plate) (D) PowerShuttle and Powershift module
(B) Gearbox gerotor pump (E) Lower shaftline of the robotic gearbox

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(F) Rear axle lubrication feed (from right-hand (H) Power take-off unit lubrication
cover plate) (I) Differential lubrication
(G) Brake lubrication feed (from right-hand cover (J) Pinion lubrication
plate) (K) Brake lubrication
Fig. 7
(B) Gearbox gerotor pump (D) PowerShuttle and Powershift module
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(E) Lower shaftline of the robotic gearbox (K) Brake lubrication

(J) Pinion lubrication
9.1.4 Hydraulic tests
9.1.4.1 General
The open center hydraulic system comprises two systems: The low flow rate system and the high flow
rate system.
Functions of the low-pressure system (21 bar):
• PowerShuttle
• Powershift module
• Power take-off brake and clutch
• 4WD clutch
• Front and rear differential lock (if fitted)
• Ranges 1 to 4 of the robotic gearbox
• Steering spool valve (Orbitrol)
Functions of the high-pressure system:
• Trailer brake spool valve (if fitted)
• Auxiliary spool valves
• Linkage spool valve
• Suspended front axle (if fitted)
Preliminary steps
Before starting the tests, run the engine at 2000 rpm to raise the oil temperature to 60°C minimum.
To make the rise in temperature easier, connect a flowmeter to one of the auxiliary spool valves other than
the one supplied by the flow divider (if fitted) and limit the flow through the flowmeter.
As soon as the oil temperature reaches or exceeds 60°C, release the lever of the auxiliary spool valve and
open the flowmeter load valve to the maximum.
IMPORTANT:
In all cases, ensure the direction of oil flow is correct in order to avoid any damage to the flowmeter.
Also choose pressure gages, hoses and unions of sufficient capacity and strength for the checks to be
carried out.
NOTE: To perform the tests in this section, you are advised to use the pressure and flow rate test kit
available in the AGCO network under reference number AG01C.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.1.4.2 High flow rate system
Safety valve test
Procedure
1. Connect a pressure gage with a coupler ref.
3582045M1 to the diagnostics connector
(P12).
This diagnostics connector is located:
• either on the trailer brake valve (if fitted);
• or on the cover plate fitted to the right-
hand hydraulic cover plate.
2. Run the engine at 2200 rpm.
3. Activate an auxiliary spool valve to open the
valve.
4. Check (P12) = 195 ± 5 bar. If pressure (P12)
is not correct, adjust the safety valve using
Fig. 8
shim(s).
5. At 1000 rpm, the pressure should not drop.
Checking the flow divider (if fitted)
Procedure
1. Connect a flowmeter to a quick coupling of
the auxiliary spool valve (1) located beside
the flow divider (3). Connect the return
directly to the housing via the transmission
filler port (2).
2. IMPORTANT: Check that the flowmeter load
valve is open fully.
Connect a suitable pressure gage to the
diagnostics connector (P12) (see Fig. 8 ).
3. Activate the spool valve.
4. Adjust the flowmeter load valve to obtain
(P12).
5. Control the flow rate of the divider by turning
the adjusting knob shown (3).
6. Check Q2.
Engine P1 Q2
speed
2200 rpm 0 to 150 bar 0 to 53 L/min
NOTE: Do not take into consideration the

value of the pressure gage fitted to the
flowmeter. Look at the separate pressure
gage connected to the diagnostics connector
(1) (see Fig. 8 ). Fig. 9

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking Kick-out pressure on an auxiliary spool valve fitted with automatic return to neutral
Procedure
1. Connect a flowmeter to the relevant spool
valve (1). Connect the return directly to the
housing via the transmission filler port (2).
2. Connect a suitable pressure gage to the
4. Activate the spool valve in automatic return
position. Release the lever and gradually shut
the flowmeter load valve until the lever
returns to neutral position.
5. Check the kick-out pressure: (P12) = 150 bar
- 170 bar.
NOTE: Make sure that the spool valve is in
the automatic return position and not in the
floating position.
gage connected to the connector (1) (see
Fig. 8 ).
Fig. 10
Checking the pressure and flow rate of the trailer brake
Pressure
1. Connect a pressure gage to the trailer brake connector.
3. Lock the brake pedals together and apply a progressive force. The pressure reading must increase
gradually until it reaches (P8) = 130 bar - 150 bar maximum.
Flow rate
4. Connect a flowmeter to the trailer brake connector. Connect the return directly to the housing via the
transmission filler port. - Run the engine at 2200 rpm. - Activate the coupled brake pedals. - Check
(Q6) = 24 - 31 L/min.
Testing the linkage security valve
Procedure
Disconnect the supply hose pipes on the rams and connect them to a manual pump. - With the
engine stopped and the linkage valve in neutral position, inject pressure into the system. - Check the
valve opening pressure: (P3) = 200 - 210 bar.
9.1.4.3 Low flow rate system
Checking the flow rate of the pump

IMPORTANT: When carrying out tests, the rear axle must not be placed on chocks with the front axle
(4WD) engaged.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Procedure
1. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the flowmeter
load valve remains fully open throughout the
test.
Connect a flowmeter between the 15 micron
filter outlet (1), located on the right-hand
cover plate of the rear axle, and the supply
hose (2) to the Orbitrol spool valve.
2. Also connect a 200-bar pressure gage to the
low-pressure diagnostics connector (P11) on
the upper part of the right-hand hydraulic
cover plate.
Fig. 11
3. Check Q3.
NOTE: The steering must not be activated for this test.
Engine speed P11 Q3 Correct position

1000 rpm 18 ± 1 bar 16.0 ± 1 L/min steering at neutral
Checking the Orbitrol pressure
Procedure
1. Connect a 200-bar pressure gage to the low-
pressure diagnostics connector (P11) on the
upper part of the right-hand hydraulic cover
plate.
2. Turn the wheels of the tractor as far as the
steering full lock stop.
3. Check (P11) = 170 bar - 175 bar.
Fig. 12

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking for leaks at clutches and slave devices

NOTE: The flowmeter will be connected using a locally made fixture; only the tool will be provided. The
supply is provided by the pressure connector of the low flow rate system.
IMPORTANT: Two tools are necessary:
• For the proportional solenoid valves (PowerShuttle and power take-off clutch solenoid valves) ref.:
4343118M1
• For the other solenoid valves ref: 4373104M1.
Procedure
1. Connect a hose between the flowmeter inlet
and the low-pressure diagnostics connector
(P11)
2. Remove the solenoid valve for the function
to be tested.
3. Fit tool reference 4373104M1 in the position
of the solenoid valve to be tested.
4. Connect the flowmeter outlet to tool
4373104M1
5. Start the engine
6. Read the values with the function activated.
The measured value must not be greater
than the values listed in the table below. Fig. 13
7. Table of clutch and slave device leaks
PowerShuttle control unit Dyna

Forward clutch Reverse clutch A B C D
Leak recorded
Maximum permissible 1.5 l/min 1.5 l/min 0 l/min 0 L/min 0 l/min 0 l/min
leak
Pressure 19.5 ± 1 bar
Leak recorded Maximum Pressure

permissible leak
PTO clutch 1.5 l/min 19.5 ± 1 bar
PTO brake 0.5 l/min
Speed 540 0.5 l/min
Economy speed 0.5 l/min
Differential FRONT 0.5 l/min
REAR 0.5 l/min
4-wheel drive clutch 1.5 l/min
Front power take-off optional 1.5 l/min
clutch
8. If the values recorded are greater than the permitted values, replace the faulty parts.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking the gearbox lubrication pressure
Procedure
1. Connect a pressure gage with a capacity of
approximately 10 bar to the diagnostics
connector (P7). The diagnostics connector
(P7) is located on the right-hand side of the
transmission between the gearbox and the
rear axle.
2. Check the pressure (P7).
Engine speed (P7) minimum (P7) maximum

840 rpm 0.8 bar 1.5 bar
1500 rpm 1.7 bar 2.3 bar
2200 rpm 1.9 bar 2.3 bar
Fig. 14
Checking the brake lubricating pressure
Procedure
1. Replace the plug (1) with a diagnostics
connector (2) ref. 3384387M1.
Fig. 15

connector (P10).
Engine speed (P10) (P10)

minimum maximum
840 rpm 0.1 bar 0.3 bar
1500 rpm 0.3 bar 2.0 bar
2200 rpm 1.1 bar 1.4 bar
Fig. 16

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking the rear axle lubricating pressure
Procedure
(P9) is located on the right-hand cover plate.

840 rpm 0.9 bar 2.3 bar
1500 rpm 2.2 bar 3.2 bar
2200 rpm 2.4 bar 2.7 bar
Fig. 17
9.1.5 Service tools
9.1.5.1 General
9.1.5.2 Hydraulic test – Service tools

Reference AG01C
Description Hydraulic pressure and flow rate test kit

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG03
Description Pressure measurement kit - 4 pressure gages
Reference AG06
Description Hydraulic pipe kit for AG10

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08
Description Digital hydraulic test kit with two inputs. Includes 1
600 bar pressure sensor
Reference AG08A
Description Pressure sensor for AG08 - 60 bar

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08B
Description Hydraulic flowmeter for AG08 10 l/min - 300 l/min
Reference AG08C
Description Temperature sensor for AG08

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08D
Description Large empty carrying case for AG08 (required for
AG08B flowmeter option)
Reference AG08E

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08G
Description Universal sensor cable for AG08
Reference AG09

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG10
Description Reversible analog flowmeter, 10 l/min - 200 l/min

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.2 GPA50/Open Center/Right-hand cover plate

9.2.1 General
The right-hand cover plate is fitted to the rear axle housing and has two main functions:
• it supports numerous hydraulic system components
• it incorporates various suction and cooling channels of the high and low flow rate systems (high and low
pressure).
On its internal face, the cover plate is connected to the:
• two-stage hydraulic pump and its drive gear
• suction pipe
• inlet manifold
On its external faces, it is connected to the:
• safety valve in the high pressure system
• safety valve in the low pressure system
• safety valve in the lubrication system
• trailer brake valve (if fitted) or a cover plate (depending on option)
• diagnostics connectors
• 15 micron main filter
• filter switch
9.2.2 Thermostatic valve

A thermostatic valve can be fitted on the right-hand cover plate. This allows the oil cooling system to be
opened according to its temperature.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 18
(1) Thermostatic valve unit (3) Spring
(2) Thermostatic valve (4) Cooler

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Maximum flow rate 67 L/min

Start of opening 70°C
Full opening 85°C
Distance to maximum opening 8 mm
Spring preload 5.5 kg
Thermostatic valve closed (case A)

When the oil temperature is below 70°C, the spring (3) pushes the thermostatic valve (2), which directs the
oil to the outlet of the thermostatic valve unit (1) via an internal channel and then to the right-hand cover
plate.
The oil does not circulate in the cooler (4).
Thermostatic valve open (case B)

When the oil temperature reaches 70°C, the heat causes the thermostatic valve (2) to push back the spring
(3). The body of the thermostatic valve (2) gradually opens the cooling system and directs the oil to the
cooler (4).
When the temperature is 85°C or above, the thermostatic valve (2) is fully open. All the flow is directed to
the cooler (4).
The cooler return (4) passes through the thermostatic valve unit (1) and is then directed to the right-hand
cover plate.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.2.3.1 View of external assembly
Fig. 19
(1) 21-bar valve (2) 15 micron filter
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(3) Trailer brake valve (if fitted) (13) Blockage indicator

(4) Steering spool valve return (14) 12-bar pressure switch
(5) Supply to the steering spool valve (15) Lubrication pressure connector
(6) Auxiliary spool valve return (16) 19-cm³ pump pressure connector
(7) Auxiliary spool valve supply (17) 11 cm³ or 14 cm³ pump pressure connector
(8) To oil cooler (depending on model)
(9) Oil cooler return (18) 21-bar pressure connector
(10) 195-bar safety valve (19) Thermo valve (if fitted)
(11) 3-bar valve (20) Charge pressure for brake master cylinder
(12) 0.4-bar pressure switch
9.2.3.2 View of internal assembly
Fig. 20
(20) 19-cm³ pump delivery (25) 21 bar to 4-wheel drive clutch
(21) 11 cm³ or 14 cm³ pump delivery (depending (26) 21 bar to rear axle and power take-off unit
on model) (27) Brake lubrication
(22) Pump suction (28) Gearbox lubrication
(23) 21 bar to gearbox control (29) Rear axle and power take-off unit lubrication
(24) 21 bar to creeper gear control

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 21
(1) Right-hand cover plate (4) 60 micron strainer
(2) 0.4-bar pressure switch (5) 12-bar pressure switch
(3) 195-bar valve (6) 21-bar pressure connector

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(7) 11 cm³ or 14 cm³ pump pressure connector (21) 4-mm nozzle

(depending on model) (22) M22 union
(8) M22 union (23) M18 union
(9) M16 plug (24) "O" ring
(10) "O" rings (25) "O" ring
(11) 11-cm³ pump (26) "O" ring
(12) 19-cm³ pump (27) "O" ring
(13) 47-tooth gear (28) "O" ring
(14) Suction pipe (29) "O" ring
(15) "O" rings (30) "O" ring
(16) 6.8-mm nozzle (31) 21-bar valve
(17) Metal seal (32) 4.1-bar cooling check valve
(18) Lubrication pressure connector (33) 3-bar lubrication check valve
(19) Centring pins (34) 1.4-bar brake lubrication check valve
(20) Centring pin

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 22
(A) 195-bar auxiliary hydraulics (D) Lubrication system
(B) 19-cm³ pump delivery (E) 11 cm³ or 14 cm³ pump delivery (depending
(C) 21-bar system on model)

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(F) Brake lubrication (H) Pump suction

(G) Lubrication system
9.2.4 Removing/refitting the cover plate

1. Immobilize the tractor. Apply the hand brake.
2. Place an axle stand in position. Remove the right-hand rear wheel.
3. Drain the rear axle housing.
Removal
1. Disconnect X20 - Transmission filter
blockage sensor, X493 - Lubrication switch
and X494 - Low-pressure switch.
Fig. 23
2. Mark and disconnect the supply/return pipes

on the right-hand cover plate.
3. Remove the 15 micron filter cartridge.
4. Remove the screws from the right-hand
cover plate (1).
5. Remove the right-hand cover plate.
Fig. 24
Refitting
6. Clean the mating faces of the housing and
cover plate.
7. Check that the two centring pins (1) and
nozzles (2) and (3) are present.
8. Fit a new metal seal (4).
Fig. 25

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9. Fit two (M12) guide studs on the rear axle

housing.
Fig. 26
10. Refit the cover plate.

11. Fit the screws and remove the M12 guide
studs.
12. Torque tighten the screws.
• (A) M12x100 mm: 72 Nm - 96 Nm
• (B) M12x40 mm: 72 Nm - 96 Nm
Fig. 27
13. Refit the supply/return pipes on the right-hand cover plate.
14. Refit the 15 micron filter.
15. Reconnect the electrical connectors.

1. Refit the rear right-hand wheel.
2. Top up the transmission oil level of the rear axle and check it using the gage located to the rear of the
center housing.
3. Check the operation of the electrical circuits, the low pressure switch, the solenoid valves, the filter
switch and the blockage indicator.
4. If the pump has been replaced, or if the disassembly of one or several hydraulic component(s) was
necessary, check the system by carrying out the relevant tests.
5. Check the tightness of the cover plate mating face, the strainer and the hydraulic unions.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.2.5 Disassembly/Reassembly:
9.2.5.1 Disassembling/reassembling the high pressure valve

Operation
If pressure (P) rises above 195 ± 5 bar, the spring
(1) is compressed, opening the valve (2) to allow
oil to flow into the housing via the port (R).
Fig. 28
Location
Fig. 29

1. Lift the side concerned enough to prevent oil from flowing out.
2. Remove the rear wheel. Position a safety stand.
3. Clean the right-hand cover plate and the surrounding area to prevent any contamination of the hydraulic
system.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Disassembly
1. Unscrew the plug (3). Recover the shims (6)
and take out the spring (2).
2. Remove the "O" ring (5), extract the
body( 4 )with the valve (1) and the washer (7)
from the right-hand cover plate.
NOTE: The ball bearing (8) is crimped in the
body of the valve.
Fig. 30
Reassembly
3. Check that the valve (2) slides freely in the valve body (4).
4. Place the washer (7), fit the valve body (4) with the valve (2) into the cover plate. Position the "O" ring
(5).
5. Fit the spring (1) and shims (6), and tighten the plug (3) to a torque of 70–100 Nm.

1. Refit the wheel (if removed). Tighten the nuts to the recommended torque.
9.2.5.2 Disassembling/reassembling the 21-bar valve

Operation
The valve is supplied by the steering spool valve
return via the port (D). If the pressure (P) exceeds
21 bar, the spring (3) compresses and the spool (2)
moves and allows oil to flow to the cooling system
via the port (R).
Fig. 31

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Location
Fig. 32

1. If necessary, take off the right-hand rear wheel. Position a safety stand.
system.
Disassembly
1. Unscrew the valve body (1) and remove it.
2. Place the body (1) in a vice. Loosen the plug
(4).
NOTE: Watch out for the force of the spring
(3).
3. Remove the spool assembly (2), the spring
(3) and the shims (6).
4. Remove the plug (5) if the seal is to be
changed.
Fig. 33
Reassembly
5. Clean the components. Replace the seals if necessary.
6. Check that the spool (2) slides freely in the valve body (1).
7. Fit the spool (2), the spring (3) and the shims (6) in the valve body (1).
8. Fit the plug (4).
9. Refit the valve (1) on the cover plate. Tighten the valve (1) to a torque of 40–55 Nm.

1. Refit the wheel (if removed). Tighten the nuts.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.2.5.3 Disassembling/reassembling the lubrication valve

Operation
The valve is supplied by the auxiliary spool valve
return via the channel (P). When the pressure (P)
reaches 3 bar, the spring (3) compresses and the
valve (2) moves and allows oil to flow to the tank
via the port (R).
Fig. 34
Location
Fig. 35

system.
Disassembly
1. Disconnect the spool valve return pipe.
2. Remove the pipe (1).
3. Using a magnet, extract the valve (2) and the
spring (3).
Fig. 36

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reassembly
5. Fit the spring (3) then the valve (2).
6. Fit the pipe (1).

9.2.5.4 Disassembling/reassembling the brake lubrication valve

Operation
The valve is supplied by the lubrication system via
the channel (P). When the pressure (P) reaches
1.4 bar, the spring (2) compresses and the valve
(1) opens and allows oil to flow to the brakes via
the port (F).
If the pressure in the lubrication system drops (in
particular when the auxiliary spool valves are used
and the lubrication flow rate is reduced), the valve
(1) closes and allows the gearbox and rear axle to
be lubricated.
Fig. 37
Location
Fig. 38

system.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Disassembly
1. Remove the plug (4).
2. Remove the ring (3).
3. Using a magnet, extract the spring (2) and
the valve (1).
Fig. 39
Reassembly
5. Fit the valve (1) then the spring (2).
6. Fit and tighten the ring (3) to a torque of 20–30 Nm.
7. Refit the plug (4).

9.2.5.5 Disassembling/reassembling the thermostatic valve

system.
Disassembly
1. Disconnect the cooler supply pipe (1).
2. Disconnect the cooler return pipe (2).
Fig. 40

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
4. Remove the valve (4) with its spring.

5. Check the condition of the seals (5).
Fig. 41
Reassembly
8. Tighten the screws (3) to a torque of 20–28 Nm.

9.2.5.6 Disassembling/reassembling the cooling bypass

Operation
The bypass limits the excess pressure in the
cooling system. When the pressure (P) reaches
4 bar, the spring (2) compresses and the valve (1)
moves and allows oil to flow into the lubrication
system via the port (F).
Fig. 42
Location
Fig. 43

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

system.
Disassembly
the valve (1).
Fig. 44
Reassembly

9.2.5.7 Removing/refitting the pump

Removal
1. Remove the cover plate (see
chapter 9.2.4 Removing/refitting the cover
plate, page 9-32 ).
2. Remove the screws (8) and the 15 micron
filter support (7).
Fig. 45

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

4. Remove the pump suction pipe (1).
Fig. 46
5. Remove the pump attachment screws (9).
6. Remove the pump (2) see Fig. 46 .
Fig. 47
Refitting
7. Clean the components and replace any
defective parts. Check that none of the
related cover plate channels are obstructed.
8. Fit the centring pins (3) (if required) to the
cover plate.
9. On the cover plate, fit new "O" rings (10) in
the recesses of the high and low flow rate
channels.
10. Inside the cover plate, apply a bead of Loctite
574 or equivalent around the four pump
screw holes.
11. Refit the pump on the centring pins.
12. Smear the screws (9) with Loctite 221 or Fig. 48
equivalent, and tighten them to a torque
of30–32 Nm.
13. Refit the pump suction pipe (1) with new "O"
rings (4) and (6) (see Fig. 46 ).
14. Refit the screws (5) and tighten them to a
torque of 10–13 Nm (see Fig. 46 ).
15. Reassemble and refit the cover plate (see
plate, page 9-32 ).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.3 GPA50/100 l/min Open Center

9.3.1 General
The 100 L/min Open Center hydraulic system
comprises three separate systems.
These three systems are supplied by a two-stage
gear pump (1), which is fitted to the internal face
of the right-hand hydraulic cover plate (2) and by a
gear pump (3) fitted to the internal face of the left-
hand hydraulic cover plate (4). The pumps suck
transmission oil from the common tank formed by
the center housing and the gearbox through a 150
micron strainer (5) fitted in the transmission.
A 15 micron main filter (6) and a blockage indicator
(7) are fitted to the low flow rate system upstream
of the Orbitrol steering spool valve. The hydraulic
pumps are driven by the ring gear of the PTO
clutch unit.
Fig. 49
9.3.2.1 Low-pressure system, low flow rate

NOTE: The first stage of the pump supplies the hydrostatic steering where the pressure can reach 170 bar.
Hydraulic flow
At the outlet of the 11-cm³ (GTA5050) or 14-cm³
(GTA2550) pump, the oil is directed to the 15-
micron filter (1). At the filter outlet, the oil supplies
the Orbitrol steering spool valve (2).
After supplying the Orbitrol steering spool valve as
required, the oil is redirected to the right-hand
cover plate attached to the center housing. This
cover plate performs several low-pressure
functions.
It ensures:
• an operating pressure for the various
transmission components via a 21-bar valve (2)
fitted downstream of the Orbitrol unit; Fig. 50
• cooling and lubrication of the gearbox and
connected components

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Transmission components
The 21-bar system, regulated by the valve (3), supplies, in parallel, the various transmission functions
through internal channels in the gearbox housing.
None of these functions has priority and they may be activated simultaneously. The solenoid valves (4-
wheel drive, power take-off, Dyna-4, Dyna-6 and reverse drive) are connected to the tractor's electronic
system.
The functions supplied by the low flow rate system are as follows:
• the hydrostatic steering
• the PowerShuttle
• the gearbox
• the Dyna-4, Dyna-6 ratios
• the differential lock (front and rear)
• the power take-off systems:
- clutch,
- brake,
- power take-off speed selector switch
- charge for brake master cylinders
Cooling and lubrication

After supplying the various transmission components, the oil passes through the thermostatic unit (4) (if
fitted) located on the right-hand cover plate. Depending on the temperature of the oil, it opens or does not
open the cooling system (5).
The oil leaving the thermostatic unit is directed to the lubrication system of the rear axle and power take-
off. The lubrication pressure is maintained by a valve set to 3 bar located in the right-hand cover plate.
The gearbox is lubricated by a gerotor type pump located at the rear of the gearbox and driven by the
power take-off shaft. A check valve limits its pressure to 1.5 bar.
9.3.2.2 High-pressure system, high flow rate

19 cm³ pump system
At the 19-cm³ pump outlet, oil is directed towards
the trailer brake spool valve (1) (if fitted) then
towards the left-hand cover plate through an
internal channel (2) see Fig. 52 .
A safety valve set to 195 bar (3) and fitted into the
right-hand cover plate protects the high-pressure
system of the linkage spool valve.
The excess flow from the linkage spool valve
returns to the rear axle lubrication, limited to 3 bar,
and to the pump suction manifold via a restrictor
without passing through the 150-micron filter.
On the left-hand cover plate see Fig. 52 , the
flow from the 19-cm³ pump is directed via the Fig. 51
spool (9):
• Solenoid valve (6) not supplied
Towards the outlet (5) then towards the linkage
spool valve.
• Solenoid valve (6) supplied
Towards the outlet (4) then towards the
auxiliary spool valves.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
14 cm³ pump system

At the outlet of the 14-cm³ pump, oil is directed
towards the outlet (4) then towards the auxiliary
spool valves.
A safety valve (7), set to 195 bar and fitted into the
right-hand cover plate, protects the high-pressure
system of the auxiliary spool valves.
Fig. 52

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Pump coupling
Fig. 53
• A
The pumps are not coupled. The flow from the 19-cm³ pump (10) goes to the linkage spool valve. The
flow from the 14-cm³ pump (11) goes to the auxiliary spool valves.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
• B
The pumps are coupled together. The solenoid valve (6) activates the spool (9) via the 21-bar pressure
(8). The spool directs the flow from the 14-cm³ pump (11) towards the auxiliary spool valves.
9.3.3.1 Layout of components of the low pressure low flow rate system
Fig. 54
(1) Front differential lock (17) 21-bar valve
(3) Pressure connector (21) 4WD clutch
(4) Hydrostatic steering spool valve (22) Rear differential lock
(5) Forward clutch (25) Oil cooler
(6) Reverse clutch (26) Brake master cylinder
(7) Accumulator (27) Master cylinder reservoir
(8) Creeper gear engagement (30) Proportional PTO
(9) Creeper gear disengagement (31) Range 1 solenoid valve
(10) 3-bar valve (32) Range 2 solenoid valve
(12) PTO clutch (33) Range 3 solenoid valve
(13) 15 µ filter (34) Range 4 solenoid valve
(14) Blockage indicator (35) 12-bar pressure switch
(15) 60 µ filter (36) 0.4-bar pressure switch

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(43) 11-cm³ pump (49) Cooling system with thermo valve

(44) Main brakes (51) 170-bar valve
(45) 540 rpm PTO (55) Powershift module forward clutch
(46) 540E PTO (56) Powershift module reverse clutch
(48) PTO brake (57) Pump coupling solenoid valve
9.3.3.2 Layout of components of the high pressure high flow rate system
Fig. 55
(16) 19-cm³ pump (42) High pressure safety valve
(23) Auxiliary spool valves (54) Linkage valve
(41) Trailer brake valve

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 56
(57) 14 cc pump (59) Pump coupling solenoid valve
(58) High pressure safety valve
9.3.4.1 General
The open center hydraulic system comprises two systems: The low flow rate system and the high flow
rate system.
• PowerShuttle
• 4WD clutch

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

• Suspended front axle (if fitted)
Preliminary steps
To make the rise in temperature easier, connect a flowmeter to one of the auxiliary spool valves other than
the one supplied by the flow divider (if fitted) and limit the flow through the flowmeter.
IMPORTANT:
In all cases, ensure the direction of oil flow is correct in order to avoid any damage to the flowmeter.
carried out.
Safety valve test
Procedure
(P12).
This diagnostics connector is located:
• either on the trailer brake valve (if fitted);
• or on the cover plate fitted to the right-
hand hydraulic cover plate.
Fig. 57

(P13). This diagnostics connector is located
on the left-hand hydraulic cover.
4. Couple the flow rate from the 19-cm³ and 14-
cm³ pumps by pressing the button in the
cab.
5. Activate an auxiliary spool valve to open the
valve.
6. Check (P12) = 195 ± 5 bar and (P13) = 195 ±
5 bar. If the pressures are not correct, adjust
the relevant safety valves using shims. Fig. 58
7. At 1000 rpm, the pressure should not drop.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking the 14 cm³ pump flow rate
Procedure
an auxiliary spool valve other than the one
supplied by the flow divider (1). Connect the
return directly to the housing via the
transmission filler port (2).
2. IMPORTANT:
Check that the flowmeter load valve is open
fully.
(P13)
NOTE:
Do not take into consideration the value of
the pressure gage fitted to the flowmeter.
Look at the separate pressure gage
connected to the diagnostics connector (P13)
(see Fig. 58 ).
5. Check Q1.
Engine P13 Q1
speed
2200 100 bar 43.3 ± 2 L/

min Fig. 59

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking the 19 cm³ pump flow rate
Procedure
Connect a flowmeter to a quick coupling of
an auxiliary spool valve other than the one
supplied by the flow divider (1). Connect the
return directly to the housing via the
transmission filler port (2).
Fig. 60

3. Couple the flow rate from the 19-cm³ and 14-
cm³ pumps by pressing the button in the
cab.
(P12).
(P12) (see Fig. 61 ). Fig. 61
6. Check Q1.
Engine P12 Q1
speed
2200 100 bar 95.5 ± 2 L/
min

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking the flow divider (if fitted)
Procedure
the auxiliary spool valve (1) located beside
the flow divider (3). Connect the return
directly to the housing via the transmission
filler port (2).
(P13).
5. Control the flow rate of the divider by turning
the adjusting knob shown (3).
6. Check Q2.
Engine P13 Q2
speed
2200 rpm 0 to 150 bar 0 to 43 L/min

(1) (see Fig. 58 ). Fig. 62

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Procedure
1. Connect a flowmeter to the relevant spool
valve (1). Connect the return directly to the
housing via the transmission filler port (2).
4. Activate the spool valve in automatic return
position. Release the lever and gradually shut
the flowmeter load valve until the lever
returns to neutral position.
5. Check the kick-out pressure: (P13) = 150 bar
- 170 bar.
NOTE: Make sure that the spool valve is in
the automatic return position and not in the
floating position.
gage connected to the connector (P13) (see
Fig. 58 ).
Fig. 63
Pressure
1. Connect a pressure gage to the trailer brake connector.
3. Lock the brake pedals together and apply a progressive force. The pressure reading must increase
gradually until it reaches (P8) = 130 bar - 150 bar maximum.
Flow rate
4. Connect a flowmeter to the trailer brake connector. Connect the return directly to the housing via the
transmission filler port. - Run the engine at 2200 rpm. - Activate the coupled brake pedals. - Check
(Q6) = 24 - 31 L/min.
Procedure
valve opening pressure: (P3) = 200 - 210 bar.
Checking the flow rate of the pump

IMPORTANT: When carrying out tests, the rear axle must not be placed on chocks with the front axle
(4WD) engaged.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Procedure
1. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the flowmeter
load valve remains fully open throughout the
test.
Connect a flowmeter between the 15 micron
filter outlet (1), located on the right-hand
cover plate of the rear axle, and the supply
hose (2) to the Orbitrol spool valve.
2. Also connect a 200-bar pressure gage to the
low-pressure diagnostics connector (P11) on
the upper part of the right-hand hydraulic
cover plate.
Fig. 64
3. Check Q3.
NOTE: The steering must not be activated for this test.
Engine speed P11 Q3 Correct position

Checking the Orbitrol pressure
Procedure
1. Connect a 200-bar pressure gage to the low-
pressure diagnostics connector (P11) on the
upper part of the right-hand hydraulic cover
plate.
2. Turn the wheels of the tractor as far as the
steering full lock stop.
3. Check (P11) = 170 bar - 175 bar.
Fig. 65

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking for leaks at clutches and slave devices

NOTE: The flowmeter will be connected using a locally made fixture; only the tool will be provided. The
supply is provided by the pressure connector of the low flow rate system.
IMPORTANT: Two tools are necessary:
• For the proportional solenoid valves (PowerShuttle and power take-off clutch solenoid valves) ref.:
4343118M1
• For the other solenoid valves ref: 4373104M1.
Procedure
1. Connect a hose between the flowmeter inlet
and the low-pressure diagnostics connector
(P11)
2. Remove the solenoid valve for the function
to be tested.
3. Fit tool reference 4373104M1 in the position
of the solenoid valve to be tested.
4. Connect the flowmeter outlet to tool
4373104M1
5. Start the engine
6. Read the values with the function activated.
The measured value must not be greater
than the values listed in the table below. Fig. 66
7. Table of clutch and slave device leaks
PowerShuttle control unit Dyna

Forward clutch Reverse clutch A B C D
Leak recorded
Maximum permissible 1.5 l/min 1.5 l/min 0 l/min 0 L/min 0 l/min 0 l/min
leak
Pressure 19.5 ± 1 bar
Leak recorded Maximum Pressure

permissible leak
PTO clutch 1.5 l/min 19.5 ± 1 bar
PTO brake 0.5 l/min
Speed 540 0.5 l/min
Economy speed 0.5 l/min
Differential FRONT 0.5 l/min
REAR 0.5 l/min
4-wheel drive clutch 1.5 l/min
Front power take-off optional 1.5 l/min
clutch
8. If the values recorded are greater than the permitted values, replace the faulty parts.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking the gearbox lubrication pressure
Procedure
(P7) is located on the right-hand side of the
transmission between the gearbox and the
rear axle.

840 rpm 0.8 bar 1.5 bar
1500 rpm 1.7 bar 2.3 bar
2200 rpm 1.9 bar 2.3 bar
Fig. 67
Checking the rear axle lubricating pressure
Procedure
(P9) is located on the right-hand cover plate.

840 rpm 0.9 bar 2.3 bar
1500 rpm 2.2 bar 3.2 bar
2200 rpm 2.4 bar 2.7 bar
Fig. 68
Procedure
connector (2) ref. 3384387M1.
Fig. 69

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

connector (P10).

minimum maximum
840 rpm 0.1 bar 0.3 bar
1500 rpm 0.3 bar 2.0 bar
2200 rpm 1.1 bar 1.4 bar
Fig. 70
9.3.5 Service tools
9.3.5.1 General

Reference AG01C

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG03
Reference AG06

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08
Reference AG08A

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08B
Reference AG08C

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08D
Reference AG08E

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08G
Reference AG09

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG10

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.4 GPA50/100 l/min Open Center/Right-hand cover plate

9.4.1 General
pressure).
• two-stage hydraulic pump and its drive gear
• suction pipe
• inlet manifold
• safety valve in the low pressure system
• safety valve in the lubrication system
• trailer brake valve (if fitted) or a cover plate (depending on option)
• diagnostics connectors
• 15 micron main filter
• filter switch
9.4.2 Thermostatic valve

A thermostatic valve can be fitted on the right-hand cover plate. This allows the oil cooling system to be
opened according to its temperature.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 71
(1) Thermostatic valve unit (3) Spring
(2) Thermostatic valve (4) Cooler

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Maximum flow rate 67 L/min

Start of opening 70°C
Full opening 85°C
Distance to maximum opening 8 mm
Spring preload 5.5 kg
Thermostatic valve closed (case A)

When the oil temperature is below 70°C, the spring (3) pushes the thermostatic valve (2), which directs the
oil to the outlet of the thermostatic valve unit (1) via an internal channel and then to the right-hand cover
plate.
The oil does not circulate in the cooler (4).
Thermostatic valve open (case B)

When the oil temperature reaches 70°C, the heat causes the thermostatic valve (2) to push back the spring
(3). The body of the thermostatic valve (2) gradually opens the cooling system and directs the oil to the
cooler (4).
When the temperature is 85°C or above, the thermostatic valve (2) is fully open. All the flow is directed to
the cooler (4).
The cooler return (4) passes through the thermostatic valve unit (1) and is then directed to the right-hand
cover plate.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 72
(1) 21-bar valve (2) 15 micron filter
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(3) Trailer brake valve (if fitted) (12) 0.4-bar pressure switch
(4) Steering spool valve return (13) Blockage indicator
(5) Supply to the steering spool valve (14) 12-bar pressure switch
(6) Auxiliary spool valve return (15) Lubrication pressure connector
(7) Thermo valve (if fitted) (16) 19-cm³ pump pressure connector
(8) To oil cooler (17) 11 cm³ or 14 cm³ pump pressure connector
(9) Oil cooler return (depending on model)
(10) 195-bar safety valve (18) 21-bar pressure connector
(11) 3-bar valve (19) Charge pressure for brake master cylinder
Fig. 73
(19) Spool valve supply (via left-hand cover plate) (24) 21 bar to creeper gear control
(20) 19-cm³ pump delivery (25) 21 bar to 4-wheel drive clutch
(21) 11 cm³ or 14 cm³ pump delivery (depending (26) 21 bar to rear axle and power take-off unit
on model) (27) Brake lubrication
(22) Pump suction (28) Gearbox lubrication
(23) 21 bar to gearbox control (29) Rear axle and PTO unit lubrication

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 74
(1) Right-hand cover plate (4) 60 micron strainer
(2) 0.4-bar pressure switch (5) 12-bar pressure switch
(3) 195-bar valve (6) 21-bar pressure connector

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(7) 11 cm³ or 14 cm³ pump pressure connector (21) 4-mm nozzle

(depending on model) (22) M22 union
(8) M22 union (23) M18 union
(9) M16 plug (24) "O" ring
(10) "O" rings (25) "O" ring
(11) 11-cm³ pump (26) "O" ring
(12) 19-cm³ pump (27) "O" ring
(13) 47-tooth gear (28) "O" ring
(14) Suction pipe (29) "O" ring
(15) "O" rings (30) "O" ring
(16) 6.8-mm nozzle (31) 21-bar valve
(17) Metal seal (32) 4.1-bar cooling check valve
(18) Lubrication pressure connector (33) 3-bar lubrication check valve
(19) Centring pins (34) 1.4-bar brake lubrication check valve
(20) Centring pin

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 75
(A) 195-bar auxiliary hydraulics (D) Lubrication system
(B) 19-cm³ pump delivery (E) 11 cm³ or 14 cm³ pump delivery (depending
(C) 21-bar system on model)

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(F) Brake lubrication (H) Pump suction

(G) Lubrication system

2. Place an axle stand in position. Remove the right-hand rear wheel.
Removal
1. Disconnect X20 - Transmission filter
blockage sensor, X493 - Lubrication switch
and X494 - Low-pressure switch.
Fig. 76

on the right-hand cover plate.
3. Remove the 15 micron filter cartridge.
4. Remove the screws from the right-hand
cover plate (1).
5. Remove the right-hand cover plate.
Fig. 77
Refitting
cover plate.
7. Check that the two centring pins (1) and
nozzles (2) and (3) are present.
9. Check the condition of the "O" rings (5) and
(6). Replace them if necessary.
Fig. 78

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

housing.
Fig. 79
11. Refit the cover plate. Check that the transfer

pipes are engaged correctly between the
right-hand and left-hand cover plate.
studs.
• (A) M12x 100 mm: 72–96 Nm
• (B) M12x 40 mm: 72–96 Nm
Fig. 80
14. Refit the supply/return pipes on the right-hand cover plate.
15. Refit the 15 micron filter.
16. Reconnect X20 - Transmission filter blockage sensor, X493 - Lubrication switch and X494 - Low-
pressure switch.

1. Refit the left-hand rear wheel.
center housing.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

Operation
Fig. 81
Location
Fig. 82

system.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Disassembly
body of the valve.
Fig. 83
Reassembly
(5).

9.4.5.2 Disassembling/reassembling the 21-bar valve

Operation
The valve is supplied by the steering spool valve
return via the port (D). If the pressure (P) exceeds
21 bar, the spring (3) compresses and the spool (2)
moves and allows oil to flow to the cooling system
via the port (R).
Fig. 84

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Location
Fig. 85

system.
Disassembly
1. Unscrew the valve body (1) and remove it.
2. Place the body (1) in a vice. Loosen the plug
(4).
NOTE: Watch out for the force of the spring
(3).
3. Remove the spool assembly (2), the spring
(3) and the shims (6).
4. Remove the plug (5) if the seal is to be
changed.
Fig. 86
Reassembly
6. Check that the spool (2) slides freely in the valve body (1).
7. Fit the spool (2), the spring (3) and the shims (6) in the valve body (1).
8. Fit the plug (4).
9. Refit the valve (1) on the cover plate. Tighten the valve (1) to a torque of 40–55 Nm.


ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.4.5.3 Disassembling/reassembling the lubrication valve

Operation
The valve is supplied by the auxiliary spool valve
return via the channel (P). When the pressure (P)
reaches 3 bar, the spring (3) compresses and the
valve (2) moves and allows oil to flow to the tank
via the port (R).
Fig. 87
Location
Fig. 88

system.
Disassembly
1. Disconnect the spool valve return pipe.
2. Remove the pipe (1).
3. Using a magnet, extract the valve (2) and the
spring (3).
Fig. 89

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reassembly
5. Fit the spring (3) then the valve (2).
6. Fit the pipe (1).

9.4.5.4 Disassembling/reassembling the brake lubrication valve

Operation
The valve is supplied by the lubrication system via
the channel (P). When the pressure (P) reaches
1.4 bar, the spring (2) compresses and the valve
(1) opens and allows oil to flow to the brakes via
the port (F).
If the pressure in the lubrication system drops (in
particular when the auxiliary spool valves are used
and the lubrication flow rate is reduced), the valve
(1) closes and allows the gearbox and rear axle to
be lubricated.
Fig. 90
Location
Fig. 91

system.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Disassembly
the valve (1).
Fig. 92
Reassembly

9.4.5.5 Disassembling/reassembling the thermostatic valve

system.
Disassembly
1. Disconnect the cooler supply pipe (1).
2. Disconnect the cooler return pipe (2).
Fig. 93

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
4. Remove the valve (4) with its spring.

5. Check the condition of the seals (5).
Fig. 94
Reassembly
8. Tighten the screws (3) to a torque of 20–28 Nm.

9.4.5.6 Disassembling/reassembling the cooling bypass

Operation
The bypass limits the excess pressure in the
cooling system. When the pressure (P) reaches
4 bar, the spring (2) compresses and the valve (1)
moves and allows oil to flow into the lubrication
system via the port (F).
Fig. 95
Location
Fig. 96

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

system.
Disassembly
the valve (1).
Fig. 97
Reassembly


Removal
1. Remove the cover plate (see
plate, page 9-32 ).
2. Remove the screws (8) and the 15 micron
filter support (7).
Fig. 98

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

4. Remove the pump suction pipe (1).
Fig. 99
5. Remove the pump attachment screws (9).
6. Remove the pump (2) see Fig. 99 .
Fig. 100
Refitting
7. Clean the components and replace any
defective parts. Check that none of the
related cover plate channels are obstructed.
8. Fit the centring pins (3) (if required) to the
cover plate.
9. On the cover plate, fit new "O" rings (10) in
the recesses of the high and low flow rate
channels.
10. Inside the cover plate, apply a bead of Loctite
574 or equivalent around the four pump
screw holes.
12. Smear the screws (9) with Loctite 221 or Fig. 101
equivalent, and tighten them to a torque
of30–32 Nm.
13. Refit the pump suction pipe (1) with new "O"
rings (4) and (6) (see Fig. 99 ).
14. Refit the screws (5) and tighten them to a
torque of 10–13 Nm (see Fig. 99 ).
15. Reassemble and refit the cover plate (see
plate, page 9-32 ).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.5 GPA50/100 l/min Open Center/Left-hand cover plate

9.5.1 General
The left-hand cover plate, fitted to the rear axle housing, supports the 14-cm³ pump system supplying the
linkage or the auxiliary spool valves.
• two-stage 14-cm³ hydraulic pump and its drive gear
• suction pipe connected to the right-hand cover plate suction pipe
• inlet manifold
• diagnostics connector
• pump coupling solenoid valve
• the linkage valve and auxiliary spool valve supply pipes

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 102
(1) 195-bar valve (5) Auxiliary spool valve supply
(2) 14-cm³ pump pressure connector (6) Linkage valve supply
(3) Pump coupling solenoid valve (7) Pump coupling spool
(4) Cover plate (8) 21-bar supply

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 103
(9) Right-hand cover plate 19-cm³ pump delivery (11) To 195-bar tank valve
(10) 14-cm³ pump delivery

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 104
(1) 195-bar valve (17) Inlet manifold
(2) 14-cm³ pump pressure connector (18) "O" ring
(3) Pump coupling solenoid valve (19) Suction pipe
(4) Cover plate (20) Connecting pipe
(7) Pump coupling spool (21) "O" ring
(8) 21-bar supply union (22) 21-bar supply tube
(12) Cover plate (23) "O" rings
(13) Metal seal (24) Plug
(14) "O" ring (25) Clamp
(15) 14 cc pump (26) Union
(16) "O" ring (27) "O" ring

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 105
(A) 19 cm³ pump for 195-bar auxiliary hydraulics (D) To auxiliary spool valves
(B) 14 cm³ pump for 195-bar auxiliary hydraulics (E) 21-bar control
(C) To linkage valve

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

2. Place an axle stand in position. Remove the rear left-hand wheel.
Removal
1. Disconnect the solenoid valve X727 -
Transmission hydraulic-pumps coupling
solenoid valve.
Fig. 106

on the left-hand cover plate.
3. Remove the screws from the left-hand cover
plate (A).
4. Remove the left-hand cover plate.
Fig. 107
Refitting
cover plate.
6. Check the two centring pins (1) are present.
8. Check the condition of the "O" rings (3) and
(4). Replace them if necessary.
Fig. 108

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

housing.
Fig. 109
10. Refit the cover plate. Check that the transfer

pipes are engaged correctly between the
right-hand and left-hand cover plate.
studs.
• (A) M12x 40 mm: 72–96 Nm
Fig. 110
13. Refit the supply/return pipes on the left-hand cover plate.
14. Refit the connector X727 - Transmission hydraulic-pumps coupling solenoid valve.

1. Refit the left-hand rear wheel.
center housing.
5. Check the tightness of the cover plate mating face and the hydraulic unions.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

Operation
Fig. 111
Location
Fig. 112

system.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Disassembly
body of the valve.
Fig. 113
Reassembly
(5).


Removal
1.
2. Remove the pump attachment screws (7)
and (8).
3. Remove the pump (2) and inlet pipe (1)
assembly.
4. Remove the screws (5), then the inlet pipe
(1).
Fig. 114
Refitting
5. Clean the components and replace any defective parts. Check that none of the related cover plate
channels are obstructed.
6. Refit the pump suction pipe (1) with a new "O" ring (4).
7. Refit the screws (5) and tighten them to a torque of 10 Nm - 13 Nm.
8. Fit the centring pins (3) (if required) to the cover plate.
9. Fit a new "O" ring (6) on the cover plate.
11. Fit and tighten the screws (7) and (8) to a torque of 30 Nm - .
12.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.6 GPA50/Closed Center

9.6.1 General
The hydraulic system is closed center with controlled pressure and flow rate.
It consists of two separate systems (high and low pressure) supplied by a variable displacement pump with
a maximum flow rate of 45 cm³ per revolution. The variable displacement pump is supplied by a fixed
displacement charge pump of 60 cm³ per revolution.
The two pumps are driven by the PTO clutch external teeth.
Charge pump
The charge pump is fitted to the right-hand cover plate. It sucks oil through a strainer from the common
tank formed by the center housing and gearbox.
The charge flow is then directed towards the thermostatic valve/main filter assembly, and towards the
cooling system depending on the oil temperature. The charge system supplies:
• The variable displacement pump on the left-hand cover plate via a connecting pipe
• Brake lubrication
• Rear PTO lubrication
• Differential lubrication
• Pinion lubrication
• Gearbox lubrication
The safety valve set to 3 bar, located in the right-hand cover plate, maintains the charge pressure.
Variable displacement pump

The variable displacement pump fitted on the left-hand cover plate supplies via a connecting pipe either
one or two priority blocks (depending on option) fitted on the right-hand cover plate:
• One block for tractors without hydraulic trailer braking
• Two blocks for tractors with hydraulic trailer braking
The first block supplies:
• First priority, the steering system
• Second priority, the 21-bar slave system.
If a second unit is fitted, it shares the priority between the steering system and the trailer braking system.
Once the priorities have been met, the remaining oil flow becomes available to the auxiliary spool valves
and the linkage spool valve.
All the control signals from the various high-pressure valves are directed to the priority block(s) to then be
transmitted to the variable displacement pump regulator.
The regulator takes into account the control signal corresponding to the function requiring the highest
pressure.
Principle of the Load Sensing system

The purpose of the closed center Load Sensing hydraulic system is to limit the power absorbed by the
engine. If no hydraulic slave device is actuated, no flow is discharged by the variable displacement pump.
When a function is activated, the pump only supplies the output required for that function.
IMPORTANT: If the housing is drained, or if the main filter is replaced or any service operation results in air
entering the system, it is essential to prime the hydraulic system.
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Hydraulic component specifications

Suction strainer (1)
Type Cartridge
Filtration threshold 150 µ
Charge pump (2)

Brand Rexroth
Displacement 60 cm³ per revolution
Flow rate 139 L/min at 2000 rpm
Main filter (3)

Filtration threshold 15 µ
With differential 7 bar
pressure bypass
With differential 5 bar
pressure switch
Safety valve (4)

Fig. 115
Calibration 22 or 24 bar
Fitted on the low-pressure system
Safety valve (5)

Calibration 5 bar
Slave devices not used resupplying the charge
pump
Switch 5 bar (blockage
indicator fitted on main
filter)
• opening: 3 bar
• closing: 2 bar
• fitted in parallel to
filter
• linked to indicator
light on instrument
panel

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Variable displacement
pump (6)
Brand Brueninghauss
Type Axial pistons
Variable displacement between 0 and 45 cm3 per
revolution
Flow rate (depending 0 to 105 L/min at
on option) 2000 rpm
Minimum pressure 22 bar
Maximum pressure 200 bar
Internal lubrication with return to housing
Fig. 116
(1) Priority block (2) Trailer brake unit

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(3) 15 µ filter (16) Front suspension accumulator

(4) 150 µ strainer (17) Front suspension unit
(5) Range solenoid valves (18) Brake master cylinder
(6) Reverse shuttle and Powershift ratio control (19) Steering spool valve
unit (20) Mid Mounted unit
(7) Front loader couplers (21) Mid Mounted control accumulator
(8) Oil cooler (22) Rear left-hand lift ram
(9) Steering ram (23) Rear linkage valve
(10) Right-hand suspension ram (24) Mechanical spool valves
(11) Front right-hand lift ram (25) Electrohydraulic rear coupler
(12) Front couplers (26) Electrohydraulic rear coupler
(13) Front left-hand lift ram (27) External supply
(14) Left-hand suspension ram (28) Rear right-hand lift ram
(15) Front suspension accumulator (29) 21-bar control block

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.6.3.2 Closed Center lubrication circuit
Fig. 117
(A) Gearbox lubrication feed (from right-hand (C) Reverse layshaft gear (nozzle 1.25 mm)
cover plate) (D) PowerShuttle and Powershift module
(B) Gearbox gerotor pump (E) Lower shaftline of the robotic gearbox

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(F) Rear axle lubrication feed (from right-hand (H) Power take-off unit lubrication
cover plate) (I) Differential lubrication
(G) Brake lubrication feed (from right-hand cover (J) Pinion lubrication
plate) (K) Brake lubrication
Fig. 118
(B) Gearbox gerotor pump (D) PowerShuttle and Powershift module
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(E) Lower shaftline of the robotic gearbox (K) Brake lubrication

(J) Pinion lubrication
9.6.4.1 General
The Load Sensing (closed center) hydraulic system with flow rate and pressure regulation comprises two
separate systems: The low pressure system and the high pressure system.
• PowerShuttle
• 4WD clutch
• Front axle suspension (if fitted)
• Cab suspension (if fitted)
Preliminary steps
To assist the rise in temperature, connect a flowmeter to an auxiliary spool valve and limit the flowmeter
flow rate.
IMPORTANT: In all cases, ensure the direction of oil flow is correct in order to avoid any damage to the
flowmeter.
carried out.
Values measured during the tests

• Minimum flow rate: 5 L/min
• Maximum pressure: 200 bar
• Minimum pressure: 0.4 bar

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Pressure connectors
Fig. 119

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Marks Description Maximum pressure measured

BP Charge and cooling system pressure connector 6 ± 1 bar
HP High-pressure system pressure connector 200 bar
LS Load Sensing line pressure connector 200 bar
21B Low-pressure system pressure connector 21 ± 1 bar
IMPORTANT: Use pressure gages with a capacity greater than the maximum measured value.
Checking the charge pressure (P1)
Procedure
1. Connect a pressure gage to the (BP) pressure connector to measure (P1).

2. Check (P1).
Engine speed (P1)

1000 rpm 5 ± 1 bar
2000 rpm 6 ± 1 bar
Checking the Load Sensing pressure (P2) and the delivery pressure (P3)
The pump delivery pressure is equal to the Load Sensing pressure + 22 bar, therefore (P3) = (P2) + 22 bar.
22 bar are needed to balance the flow regulator spring inside the pump.
The standby pressure is measured with the engine running and the high pressure functions at rest.
The Load Sensing pressure (P2) is the pressure required to activate the requested function, the delivery
pressure (P3) is measured at the pump outlet.
IMPORTANT:
Pressure gages with a capacity of 30 bar can be used for greater accuracy.
In this case, in order to avoid damage to the pressure gages during this test, do not activate any high
pressure components (for example, the steering).
Procedure
1. Connect a pressure gage to the (LS) pressure connector to measure (P2).

2. Connect a pressure gage to the (HP) pressure connector to measure (P3).
3. Check (P2) and (P3).

1000 rpm 4 ± 1 bar 26 ± 1 bar

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking the flow rate and pressure of the variable displacement pump
Procedure
1. Connect a flowmeter to a spool valve (1).
Connect the return directly to the housing via
the transmission filler port (2).
2. Connect a pressure gage to the (LS) pressure
connector to measure (P2).
3. Connect a pressure gage to the (HP)
pressure connector to measure (P3).
Fig. 120
4. Set the flow control valve (3) to maximum
flow rate on the spool valve concerned.
5. Activate the auxiliary spool valve and
gradually close the flowmeter load valve in
order to reduce the flow and increase the
pressure.
Fig. 121
6. Check the values:
Engine speed (P2) (P3) (Q1)

2000 rpm 110 bar (P2) + 22 bar 100 l/min
2000 rpm 130 bar (P2) + 22 bar 100 l/min
2000 rpm 150 bar (P2) + 22 bar 100 l/min
2000 rpm 170 bar (P2) + 22 bar 100 l/min
2000 rpm 200 bar 200 bar 0 L/min
Procedure
1. Use the same assembly as for see chapter Checking the flow rate and pressure of the variable
displacement pump, page 9-102 .
3. Activate the spool valve in automatic return position. Release the lever and gradually shut the
flowmeter load valve until the lever returns to neutral position.
4. Check the kick-out pressure: (P2) = 150 bar - 170 bar.
NOTE: Make sure that the spool valve is in the automatic return position and not in the floating
position.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
NOTE: Do not take into consideration the value of the pressure gage fitted to the flowmeter. Look at
the separate pressure gage connected to the connector (P2).

Pressure
1. Connect a pressure gage to the trailer brake
connector.
3. Lock the brake pedals together and apply a
progressive force. The pressure should
increase gradually until it reaches (P3) =
130 bar - 150 bar maximum.
Flow rate
4. Connect a flowmeter to the trailer brake
connector. Connect the return directly to the
housing via the transmission filler port. - Run
the engine at 2200 rpm. - Activate the
coupled brake pedals. - Check (Q2) = 24 L/
min - 31 L/min.
Checking the maximum linkage pressure
Procedure
4. Use the external linkage control button (4) to
reach the maximum raised position where
(P2) = (P3) = 195 ± 1 bar.
Fig. 122
Procedure
valve opening pressure: (P4) = 200 bar - 210 bar.
Checking the maximum steering pressure
Procedure


ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
3. Slowly turn the steering and make sure that (P2) and (P3) gradually increase to: (P2) = 146 ± 1 bar;
(P3) = 169 ± 1 bar.
Testing the steering system security valves
Procedure
1. With the engine stopped, connect a manual pump to one of the two supplies of the steering ram.
2. Use this pump to apply pressure to the system.
3. Check the valve opening pressure: (P5) = 220 bar - 240 bar.
4. Apply the same procedure to the second supply of the ram.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Pressure connectors
Fig. 123

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Marks Description Maximum pressure measured

BP Charge and cooling system pressure connector 6 ± 1 bar
HP High-pressure system pressure connector 200 bar
LS Load Sensing line pressure connector 200 bar
21B Low-pressure system pressure connector 21 ± 1 bar
IMPORTANT: Use pressure gages with a capacity greater than the maximum measured value.
General check of the low-pressure system
Procedure
1. Connect a pressure gage to the pressure connector (21B) to measure (P6).

3. Check that all the low pressure functions are at neutral.
NOTE: Specific information for the following functions:
• The front axle should be engaged (clutch not supplied)
• The gearbox must be in position D for the Dyna-6, in C for the Dyna-4 and in neutral for the
PowerShuttle.
4. Note the initial pressure, which should be 20 ± 1 bar.
5. Test each function individually. When engaging the function, the pressure must not drop below
14 bar. After, the pressure should return to its initial value.
Checking the pressure of the PowerShuttle (forward and reverse) clutches

DANGER:
To keep the tractor stationary, position it on axle stands and remove the four wheels.
Procedure
1. Connect a pressure gage to the (AV) and (AR)
pressure connectors of the gearbox control
unit.
3. Operate the shuttle lever and check the
pressure of the clutches.
Shuttle lever Clutch (AV) Clutch (AR)

position
Forward 20 ± 1 bar 0 bar
Neutral or de- 0 bar 0 bar
clutched
Reverse 0 bar 20 ± 1 bar Fig. 124
Checking the pressure of the Dyna-4 transmission clutches

DANGER:

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Procedure
1. Connect a pressure gage to the pressure
connectors (1) and (3) of the gearbox control
unit.
3. Engage the Powershift ratios and check the
pressures.
Ratio Pressure (1) Pressure (3)

A 0 bar 20 ± 1 bar
B 20 ± 1 bar 20 ± 1 bar
C 0 bar 0 bar
D 20 ± 1 bar 0 bar Fig. 125
Checking the pressure of the Dyna-6 transmission clutches

DANGER:
Procedure
1. Connect a pressure gage to the pressure
connectors (1) (2) and (3) of the gearbox
control unit.
3. Engage the Powershift ratios and check the
pressures.
Ratio Pressure Pressure Pressure

(1) (2) (3)
A 20 ± 1 bar 0 bar 20 ± 1 bar
B 20 ± 1 bar 0 bar 0 bar
C 0 bar 0 bar 20 ± 1 bar
Fig. 126
D 0 bar 0 bar 0 bar
E 0 bar 20 ± 1 bar 20 ± 1 bar
F 0 bar 20 ± 1 bar 0 bar

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Checking the gearbox lubricating pressure
Procedure
connector (2) ref. 3384387M1 on the right-
hand side of the transmission between the
gearbox and rear axle.Depending on the
version, a lubrication supply tube may be
fitted in place of the plug (1). In this case, the
plug (1) is located on the tubing.
connector (2) to check (P7).
Engine (P7) (P7)

speed minimum maximum Fig. 127
840 rpm 0,8 bar 1,5 bar
1500 rpm 1,7 bar 2,3 bar
2200 rpm 1,9 bar 2,3 bar
Procedure
1. Replace the plug (1) with an elbow (2) ref.
3793673H91 and a diagnostics connector (3)
ref. 3384387M1.
connector (P8).
Engine (P8) (P8)

speed minimum maximum
840 rpm 0.1 bar 0.3 bar
1500 rpm 0.3 bar 2.0 bar
2200 rpm 1.1 bar 1.4 bar Fig. 128
9.6.5 Service tools
9.6.5.1 General

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

Reference AG01C
Reference AG03

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG06
Reference AG08

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08A
Reference AG08B

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08C
Reference AG08D

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG08E
Reference AG08G

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reference AG09
Reference AG10

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.7 GPA50/Closed Center/Right-hand cover plate

9.7.1 General
pressure)
• it incorporates various lubrication channels of the rear axle and the gearbox
On its internal face, the cover plate is connected to
the:
• hydraulic charge pump (A) and its drive gear
• charge pump inlet manifold (B)
• safety valve in the low pressure system (C)
• connecting channels (D) connecting the right-
hand cover plate to the left-hand cover plate.
On its external face, the cover plate is connected
to:
• the priority block (E)
• the trailer brake unit (F) (if fitted)
• the diagnostics connectors for the various
systems
• the main 15 µ filter (G) incorporating the
thermostatic valve
• the filter switch (H)
• the lubrication system pressure switch (I)
• the low-pressure system pressure switch (J).
Fig. 129

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

Charge system and filtration
Fig. 130
The charge pump (2) is driven by the PTO clutch unit (3). Oil is sucked into the bottom of the rear axle
housing via a 150 µ strainer (1). At the pump outlet (2), the oil is directed by the manifold (4) towards the
right-hand cover plate then the 15 µ filter (5). The 15 µ filter is fitted with a thermostatic valve that sends
the oil towards the cooling system, depending on its temperature. In the right-hand cover plate, the filtered
and cooled oil supplies the lubricating channels for the brake master cylinder transmission and charge. The
oil flow is then sent towards the left-hand cover plate and the high-pressure pump by a tube connecting
the two hydraulic cover plates (6).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Lubrication system
Fig. 131
The 15 µ filter and cooling system return (5) supplies:

• the gearbox lubrication (8) via the 6.8-mm nozzle (7)
• the brake lubrication (9) via the 1.4-bar valve (10)

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
• the lubrication of the differential, drive pinion and power take-off unit (13) via the 4-mm nozzle (12)
• the feed for the brake master cylinder (11)
The 3-bar valve (14) regulates the charge pressure.
Low pressure system
Fig. 132

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
The priority block supplies the 21-bar low-pressure system via the channel (15). The safety valve (16) is set
to 26 bar and helps to prevent overpressure in the system. The low-pressure safety switch (17) informs the
tractor's electronic system if the pressure is too low. The pressure connector (18) is used to control the
system. The low-pressure system passes through the 60 µ filter (19) before supplying the various
functions.
The low-pressure system supplies:
• the creeper unit controls (20)
• the gearbox controls (21)
• the 4-wheel drive clutch (22)
• the rear PTO controls (23).
9.7.3 Filtration and cooling
15 µ filter and thermostatic valve
Fig. 133
The 15 µ filtration unit (1) has a thermostatic valve (6) that opens or closes the oil cooling system (7).
The flow (2) from the charge pump, located on the internal face of the right-hand cover plate, enters the
unit and is then directed to the filter (4).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
The filtered oil (5) is directed by the thermostatic valve (6):

• if the oil is cold: toward the right-hand cover plate and the lubrication and charge system via the channel
(3)
• if the oil is hot: toward the oil cooler (7) located on the engine cooling unit, then toward the right-hand
cover plate and the lubrication and charge system via the channel (3).
The bypass valve (8) opens in case of overpressure in the cooling system.
The filter blockage switch (9) informs the tractor's electronic system if there is a difference in pressure
greater than 5 bar between the filter inlet and outlet.
Fig. 134
The filter blockage switch (9) informs the tractor's electronic system if there is a difference in pressure
greater than 5 bar between the filter inlet and the filter outlet.
The valve(10) opens at (7 bar) in the event of a filter blockage.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.7.4 Priority block
Description
The priority block fitted on the right-hand cover plate is available in two versions: one with trailer braking
and one without trailer braking. The version with trailer braking is fitted with an extra-thick double priority
block, which is described in more detail in its own specific section.
The priority block fitted on the right-hand hydraulic cover plate has two functions:
• To ensure a priority flow to the steering and to the trailer braking (in the case of a double priority block)
• To ensure supply to the 21-bar low-pressure system
Tractors without trailer braking are fitted with a single priority block.
This block has two spools and receives the flow from the variable displacement pump. It ensures priority to
the steering system and the 21-bar low-pressure system. The oil is then directed to the auxiliary spool
valves and the linkage spool valve.
Tractors with trailer braking are fitted with a double priority block.
The inner block is similar to the single priority block. The outer block manages the flow priority between
the steering spool valve and the trailer braking.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Identification of the Load Sensing ports of the priority block
Fig. 135
(A) Orbitrol supply (C) LS pilot flow to the variable displacement
(B) High pressure (HP) supply from variable pump hydraulic regulator
displacement pump (drilled port on the (D) LS pilot flow from the Orbitrol
mating face of priority block and cover plate) (F) Spool valve (auxiliary and linkage) supply

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(G) LS pilot flow from the spool valves (N) Pilot flow from the trailer brake
(I) 21-bar outlet (R) Return
(L) LS pilot flow from the linkage valve and other (HP) High-pressure (HP) spool
equipment (BP) Low-pressure (BP) spool
(M) Trailer brake supply

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Operation
Fig. 136
1st priority: Steering

The spool (2) moves to the right under the action of the spring (3).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
The flow coming from the variable displacement pump via channel B is by priority directed towards the
Orbitrol spool valve via channel A.
• Steering at neutral - The steering spool valve (Orbitrol) is in closed position. The pump pressure moves
the spool (2) to the left and the flow is directed into channel H.
• Steering activated - Pilot flow pressure from the Orbitrol arrives at port D and pushes the spool (2) to
the right, allowing the flow to enter port A and supply the Orbitrol.
NOTE: A flow rate of approximately 0.5 L/min is directed through port A towards port D via a drilled
hole and a restrictor in the spool (2). This flow creates a pressure of approximately 6 bar at port D. The
LS line directs this pressure to the variable displacement pump regulator, which is adjusted to 22 bar to
obtain a standby pressure of 28 bar.
2nd priority: 21-bar pressure control valve
The spool (4) moves to the right under the action of the spring (5), allowing the flow from channel H to be
directed to port I (21-bar low pressure). As soon as the pressure in this port reaches 21 bar, the spool
reaches equilibrium thus allowing the low pressure to be maintained and the flow to be directed towards
port F (linkage and auxiliary). When the linkage and auxiliary spool valves are used, an LS pilot flow
pressure is sent to the block via port G to join the LS line at port C.
Checking after service

If the single priority block had to be replaced:
• Lightly smear the thread of the fixing screws with Loctite 542 or equivalent. Tighten these screws to a
torque of 25–35 Nm.
• Carry out the hydraulic tests
Check the sealing of the unions and "O" rings fitted between the priority block and the right-hand hydraulic
cover plate.
Carry out a road test.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 137
(1) Right-hand hydraulic cover plate (12) 4-mm nozzle for lubrication of the
(2) Lubrication pressure switch differential, drive pinion and power take-off
(3) Low pressure system switch unit
(4) Pressure connector - high-pressure system (13) Return
(5) Trailer brake supply (14) Safety valve for 21-bar system
(6) Pressure connector - low-pressure system (15) 21-bar supply for the 4-wheel drive clutch
(7) 60 µ filter - low-pressure system (16) 21-bar supply for the creeper gear controls
(8) Pressure connector - cooling and lubrication (17) Charge pump inlet manifold
system (18) 60-cm³ charge pump
(9) Charge system - high-pressure pump supply (19) Brake lubrication
towards the left-hand hydraulic cover plate (20) 6.8-mm nozzle for gearbox lubrication
(10) High-pressure system - high pressure pump (21) 21-bar supply for the gearbox
outlet from the left-hand hydraulic cover (22) Charge pump suction channel
plate (23) Priority block
(11) 21-bar supply for the power take-off controls (24) Trailer brake unit
(25) Charge pressure for brake master cylinder

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.7.5.2 Exploded view of the hydraulic cover plate
Fig. 138
(1) Right-hand hydraulic cover plate (28) Nut
(2) Lubricating pressure switch (29) "O" ring
(3) Low pressure system switch (30) 3-bar valve
(4) Pressure connector - high-pressure system (31) Centring pin
(6) Pressure connector - low-pressure system (32) Key
(7) 60 µ filter - low-pressure system (33) "O" ring
(8) Pressure connector - cooling and lubrication (34) Cover plate seal
system (35) Centring pin
(12) 4-mm nozzle for lubrication of the (36) "O" rings
differential, drive pinion and power take-off (37) Sealing washers
unit (38) "O" ring
(14) Safety valve for 21-bar system (39) Ring
(17) Charge pump inlet manifold (40) 1.4-bar valve
(18) 60-cm³ charge pump (41) Screw M12x 40 mm
(20) 6.8-mm nozzle for gearbox lubrication (42) Screw M12x 70 mm
(26) Pump gear (43) Screw M10x 95 mm
(27) Flat washer

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.7.5.3 Exploded view of the single priority block
Fig. 139
(1) Right-hand hydraulic cover plate (49) Auxiliary Load Sensing union
(23) Priority block (50) Plug
(44) Auxiliary spool valve supply union (51) Steering spool valve supply union
(45) Screw M8x 75 mm (52) Auxiliary Load Sensing union
(46) Load Sensing pressure connector (53) Mounting flange
(47) Pump regulator pipe (54) Steering spool valve Load Sensing union
(48) Pump regulator (left-hand cover plate)

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.7.5.4 Exploded view of the double priority block
Fig. 140
(1) Right-hand hydraulic cover plate (49) Auxiliary Load Sensing union
(23) Priority block (50) Plug
(24) Trailer brake unit (51) Steering spool valve supply union
(44) Auxiliary spool valve supply union (52) Auxiliary Load Sensing union
(45) Screw M8x 135 mm (53) Mounting flange
(46) Load Sensing pressure connector (54) Steering spool valve Load Sensing union
(47) Pump regulator pipe (55) Trailer brake supply
(48) Pump regulator (left-hand cover plate) (56) Pilot flow from the trailer brake

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 141
(A) Charge pump suction (D) Transmission lubrication system
(B) Charge pump delivery (E) Brake lubrication system
(C) 15 µ filter return - high-pressure pump supply (F) High-pressure pump delivery

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(G) 21-bar system (H) Free return
9.7.6.1 Removing/refitting the cover plate

2. Place an axle stand in position. Remove the
right-hand rear wheel.
4. Remove the connectors X20 - Transmission
filter blockage sensor, X493 - Lubrication
switch and X494 - Low-pressure switch.
Fig. 142
Removal
1. Remove the first flange (1) and the second
flange fitted on the gearbox.
2. Mark and disconnect the oil cooling system
pipes (2) and (3).
3. Mark and disconnect the trailer brake control
pipe (4).
4. Mark and disconnect the brake master
cylinder charge pipe (5).
Fig. 143

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
5. Mark and disconnect the trailer brake supply

pipe (6).
6. Mark and disconnect the Mid Mounted unit
supply pipe (7).
7. Mark and disconnect the Load Sensing signal
pipe (8) of the Mid Mounted unit.
Fig. 144
8. Mark and disconnect the spool valve supply
pipe (9).
9. Mark and disconnect the spool valve Load
Sensing signal pipe (10).
decompression pipe (11).
pipe (12).
Fig. 145

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
12. Remove the filter (13).

13. Remove the priority block (14).
Fig. 146
14. Remove two of the screws (15) from the
cover plate. Replace them with two (M12)
studs.
15. Remove the other screws (15) from the
cover plate.
17. If necessary, remove the transfer pipes (16)
and (17).
Fig. 147

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Refitting
housing.
19. Refit the cover plate (16) using the screws
(15) tightened to 120 Nm - 160 Nm.
20. Refit the priority block (14) fitted with with
new "O" rings using screws tightened to
25 Nm - 35 Nm.
21. Refit the filter (13) fitted with new "O" rings
using screws tightened to 50 Nm - 70 Nm.
22. Carry out these removal steps in reverse
order.
Fig. 148
23. Reconnect the electrical connectors.

1. Refit the rear right-hand wheel.
center housing.
9.7.6.2 Disassembling/reassembling the right-hand cover plate and charge pump

Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover plate.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Disassembly
1. On the internal face of the cover plate,
remove the screws (1).
2. Remove the manifold (2) and the seal (3).
3. On the external face of the cover plate,
remove the screws (4) and the sealing
washers (5).
4. Remove the pump (6) and the seal (7).
5. Remove the nut (9), the washer (10) and
extract the gear (8) and its key.
Fig. 149
7. Safety valve for the low-pressure system
Remove the 26-bar safety valve assembly
(insert (12), spring (13) and valve (14)).
8. Safety valve for the charge system Using a
locally made pin wrench, undo the 3-bar
check valve (15).
9. Remove the retainer ring (16) in order to take
out the spring (17) and the valve (18).
Fig. 150

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

11. Brake lubrication valve Unscrew the insert
(20), then remove the spring (21) and 1.4-bar
brake lubrication valve (22).
12. Unscrew the low-pressure system filter (23).
13. As required, remove:
• the low pressure system switch (24);
• the lubrication system switch (25);
• the charge and cooling systems pressure
connector (26);
• the low pressure system pressure
connector (27);
• the high pressure system pressure
connector (28).
Fig. 151
Reassembly
14. Reassembling the cover plate is not especially difficult and requires carrying out the disassembly
steps in reverse order.
Check the condition of the parts and replace if necessary.
To reassemble, follow the torque specifications and the retaining compound product specifications:
Description Tightening torque Retaining compound product
Low pressure system switch (24) 30 Nm–35 Nm -
Lubrication system switch (25)

Pressure connectors (26), (27) and 20 Nm–30 Nm -
(28)
Low-pressure system filter (23) 25 Nm–35 Nm -
Charge system relief valve (15) 20 Nm–30 Nm Threadlock, Loctite 221 or
equivalent
Pump nut (9) 50 Nm–60 Nm Threadlock, Loctite 242 or
equivalent
Pump screw (4) 40 Nm–50 Nm -

1. Refit the right-hand hydraulic cover plate.
center housing.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.7.6.3 Replacing the charge pump seals

Remove the cover plate and the charge pump.
Disassembly
1. NOTE: Removal of the charge pump is identical irrespective of the type of rear axle.
Moderately secure the charge pump in a vice fitted with protective jaws.
cover plate (7).
Fig. 152

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 153
3. Remove: the retainer ring 3, the seal 4, the "O" rings 5 and 6 on the cover 7.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reassembly
4. Carefully fit the seal (4) using a suitable
fixture. Lubricate its lip (with miscible
grease). Fit the retainer ring (3).
5. Lightly smear the "O" rings (5) (6) with
miscible grease. Position these seals in the
grooves of the cover plate (7).
6. Correctly position the cover plate above the
charge pump and then refit the cover plate.
Screw in and tighten the screws (1) to 30–
40 Nm.
7. Manually check the rotation of the charge
pump.
Fig. 154

Refit the charge pump and the left-hand cover plate.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.8 GPA50/Closed Center/Left-hand cover plate

9.8.1 General
The left-hand cover plate is fitted to the rear axle
housing and supports:
• the Load Sensing variable displacement pump
(1)
• the Load Sensing variable displacement pump
hydraulic regulator (2)
• the high-pressure system pressure relief valve
(3).
Fig. 155

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

Variable displacement pump system
The flow (G) from the charge pump (right-hand
cover plate) supplies the variable displacement
pump (1) then supplies the high-pressure system
(P) (towards the right-hand cover plate). The
regulator (2) regulates the pump flow rate (1)
according to the Load Sensing (LS) pressure from
the priority block (right-hand cover plate). The
pressure in the high-pressure system is limited by
the relief valve (3).
Fig. 156
Pressure relief valve

The high-pressure flow delivered by the variable
displacement pump passes through the channel
(P) in the hydraulic cover plate.
The pressure relief valve (3) set to 230 ± 5 bar,
screwed onto the hydraulic cover plate, ensures
the safety of the high-pressure system.
In case of any abnormal increase in pressure, valve
(C) rises and the oil is directed to the housing via
ports (R) in the relief valve.
Fig. 157

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Regulation system
Fig. 158
(C) Adjusting screw (22 bar) (R) To piston (4)
(D) Adjusting screw (200 bar) (S) Return
(O) Decompression port (LS) Signal
(P) Variable displacement pump pressure

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
IMPORTANT: Screws (C) and (D) are factory-set. Do not modify these settings.
• Standby position.
When the engine stops, the spring (8) automatically places the pump in its maximum flow rate position.
When the engine is started, all ports are closed, and in theory no flow is required. The pressure
increases in line (P). When it reaches 22 bar, it pushes the hydraulic regulator spool (a) and connects
with the port (R). The pressure acts on the piston (4) and the pushrod (9) of the pump, which moves the
plate (6) into the zero flow rate position. In practice, a low 3–5 bar flow rate remains in the steering
system, increasing the standby pressure to 28 bar.
• Working position.
When a function is activated (for example: an auxiliary spool valve), the circuit is opened and the 22 bar
standby pressure drops. The 22-bar spring restores the hydraulic regulator spool (a) to its initial position.
The piston (4) is linked to the return via (S) and (R). The spring (8) returns the pump plate (6) to full flow
rate.
The flow rate from the pump creates the LS pressure required to activate the function.
The LS function created then balances the piston (a) between the LS pressure plus the 22 bar pressure
of the spring and the pump output pressure (P).
As long as the spool (a) is not balanced and maintained by the pump supply, the piston (4) remains
connected to the return and pump plate (6) at full flow rate (pump P pressure = LS pressure + 22 bar).
NOTE: The closed center system varies the pressure and flow rate in the hydraulic system.
NOTE: Pump delivery pressure = LS operating pressure + standby pressure (22 bar).
NOTE: A sufficient flow rate, determined by the through-section of the spool valve, is supplied by the
pump to maintain the pressure difference at the spool valve terminals (22 bar).
• Maximum position - zero flow rate.
When the pressure at the port (P) reaches 200 bar, the spool (b) is pushed forwards, compressing its
spring. The ports (P) and (R) are placed in communication and the piston (4) is brought to the zero flow
rate position.
The hydraulic regulator (2), fitted on the hydraulic cover plate (8) regulates the variable displacement
pump pressure and flow rate according to information transmitted by the LS signal.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 159
(1) Variable displacement pump (3) 230-bar pressure relief valve
(2) Regulator (5) Pump gear

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 160
(1) Variable displacement pump (12) Centring pin
(2) Regulator (13) Seal
(3) 230-bar pressure relief valve (14) Pump supply pipe
(5) Pump gear (15) "O" ring
(6) Flat washer (16) Pump delivery pipe
(7) Nut (17) Ring
(8) "O" rings (18) "O" ring
(9) Centring pins (19) M12x cover plate screw 70 mm
(10) Sealing washers (20) M12x cover plate screw 40 mm
(11) M12x pump screw 60 mm (21) M6x regulator screw 30 mm
9.8.4.1 Removing/refitting the cover plate

2. Place an axle stand in position. Remove the rear left-hand wheel.
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

4. Remove the fuel tank.
Removal
1. Remove the pump regulator control pipe (1).
2. Remove two of the screws (2) from the
cover plate. Replace them with two (M12)
studs.
3. Remove the other screws (2) from the cover
plate.
5. If necessary, remove the transfer pipes (4)
and (5).
Fig. 161
Refitting
housing.
7. Refit the cover plate (3) using the screws (2)
tightened to a torque of 120–160 Nm.
8. Carry out these removal steps in reverse
order.
Fig. 162

1. Refit the rear left-hand wheel and the fuel tank.
center housing.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.8.4.2 Disassembling/reassembling the cover plate and the variable displacement pump

Remove the left-hand hydraulic cover plate.
Disassembly
Fig. 163
1. On the external face of the cover plate, remove the screws (1).
2. Take out the variable displacement pump (2) and discard the seals (3).
3. Remove the pump regulator (4).
4. Remove the pressure relief valve (5).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Reassembly
5. Clean the hydraulic cover plate and its
channels.
6. Check the "O" ring (6) of the pressure relief
valve (5) and replace it if necessary. Refit the
pressure relief valve (5). Tighten it to a torque
of 40 Nm.
Fig. 164
7. Check the condition of the seal (7) of the
pump regulator (4) and replace it if
necessary. Refit the pump regulator (4).
Tighten the screws (8) to a torque of 14–
20 Nm.
Fig. 165
8. If the pump gear (2) has been removed, refit

the gear ( 9), the washer (10) and the nut (11)
Tighten the nut to a torque of 50–60 Nm.
Fig. 166

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9. Check that the pump centring pins are

present.
10. Fit a set of new "O" rings (3). Refit the
variable displacement pump (2) and the
screws (1) fitted with new sealing washers.
Tighten the screws (1) to a torque of 120–
160 Nm.
Fig. 167

1. Refit the left-hand hydraulic cover plate.
center housing.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.9 GPA50 Open Center/Spool valves

9.9.1 General
The Rexroth SM12 auxiliary spool valves are fitted on the high flow rate system. They are fed by oil coming
from the trailer brake valve or the cover plate (depending on version).
When the spool valves are not activated, the oil is available for the other functions. The auxiliary spool
valves are mounted on a support which is itself fitted to the rear of the linkage cover plate. Quick couplings
are fitted directly on the spool valve body.
To obtain sufficient distance between couplings, the spool valves are fitted with blocks serving as spacers.
These blocks are also used to let the oil flow to the next spool.
Specifications:
• Functions: Double-acting; Single and double-acting (convertible). These functions are also recognized by
the abbreviations SE and DE
• Positions: Three; Four with one in floating position
• Return to neutral: By spring or automatic system
• Zero leak: With or without
Each spool valve is actuated by a lever in the cab and has three phases of travel: - 35% reduced flow rate -
45% progressive increase of flow rate and pressure - 20% full flow rate. The gradual increase of flow rate
and pressure ensures uniform operation of the implements. This specification also allows two spool valves
to be activated simultaneously, the total flow rate being shared. The flow rate to each quick coupling is
proportional to the position of the control lever. The flow divider is fitted between spool valve no. 1 and
spool valve no. 2.

The spool valves are supplied by:
• 57 L/min Open Center version: the 19-cm³ pump located on the right-hand cover plate
• 100 L/min Open Center version: the 14-cm³ pump located on the left-hand cover plate, or the 19-cm³
and 14-cm³ coupled pumps
The valves are mounted in series and supplied by the continuity line (N).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
3-position spool valve, SE/DE with return to
neutral by spring
Fig. 168
Neutral position
Oil is not available from outlets (A) or (B). Oil is directed via the continuity channel (N) to the linkage valve
and passes directly to the suction manifold of the pump when the linkage is in neutral position. Channels
(N) and (P) are connected in the intermediate block to supply the subsequent spool valves.
Inlet-outlet position
When the spool (2) is moved upwards or downwards, the continuity channel is cut, the pressure increases
and raises the valve (1). The oil is then directed to the internal channels via grooves located on the spool.
Depending on the spool position, outlet (A) or (B) is supplied. Simultaneously, the oil returning from the
ram is directed depending on the position of the spool to outlet (A) or (B) to reach the return channel (R).
Single/double-acting change-over
To obtain the single-acting position, unscrew the valve (4). Outlet (A) then opens into the channel (R) and
outlet (B) supplies the hydraulic slave device. To obtain the double-acting position, screw in the valve (4).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
3-position spool valve, SE/DE with automatic
return to neutral
Fig. 169
Neutral position
The operating principle of the 3-position single or double acting spool valve with automatic return to neutral
is the same as for the previous 3-position SE/DE spool valve, with return to neutral by spring.
Inlet-outlet position
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Operation is identical to the 3-position SE/DE spool valve with return to neutral by spring, with automatic
return to neutral as an added feature. A system fitted in the unit (1) locks when the spool (2) is activated.
The spool returns automatically when the pressure reaches 150–170 bar. The pressure passes through
holes machined in the spool. It then releases a system comprising ball bearings and springs allowing the
automatic return of the spool to neutral. The unit (1) is joined to the channel (R).
NOTE: A residual pressure in the housing (greater than 2 bar) may cause inadvertent return of the spool to
neutral.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
3-position SE/DE spool valve with non-return
valve and automatic return
Fig. 170
Operation is identical to that of the 3-position SE/DE spool valve with automatic return to neutral.
Operation of the non-return valve

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
When the spool (2) is moved upwards, the oil coming from channels (N) and (P) is directed to outlet (B) by
lifting the non-return valve (3) to supply the slave device. In the neutral position, the non-return valve
ensures system tightness. When the spool is moved downwards, the oil coming from the channels (N) and
(P) lifts the valve (1). It is then directed to an internal channel, via grooves machined on the spool, and
supplies the slave device via the outlet (A). The movement of the spool shifts the pushrod (4). This raises
the ball bearing, causing a drop in pressure on the slave device side, which allows the valve (3) to rise from
its seat and oil to flow through to the channel (R).
IMPORTANT: When removing the spool (2), it is essential to remove the non-return valve (3) and pushrod
(4) first.
4-position DE spool valve, with automatic return
to neutral and floating position
Fig. 171
Operation
When the spool (2) is moved upwards or downwards, the same positions are obtained as with the previous
spool valves. The 4-position DE spool valve with automatic return to neutral and floating position has an
added feature: a floating position (F) when the spool has moved beyond the limit of the automatic return to
neutral position. In this position (F), the channels of outlets (A) and (B) open into the return channel (R). The
oil can then circulate freely.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 172
(1) Support block (2) Plate with seals
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(3) Spool valve no. 1 (10) Spool valve no. 3

(4) Flow divider (11) Spool valve no. 4
(5) Spool valve no. 2 (12) Cover plate
(6) Stud (13) Gear plate
(7) Nut (14) "O" ring
(8) Control lever (15) "O" ring

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 173
(1) Linkage cover plate (4) Flow regulation section
(2) Spool valve support (5) Spool valve no. 2
(3) Spool valve no. 1 (6) Cover plate and tank return

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(N) Oil connection to spool valves (R) Return

(P) Pressure (HP)
9.9.4.1 Removing/refitting the spool valves
Removal
Auxiliary spool valves can be removed and refitted directly on the tractor by separating each component
individually and leaving only the main support (1) fitted to the linkage cover plate.
Preliminary steps
1. Remove the component(s) close to the
auxiliary spool valves that might obstruct
access to them (e.g. hydraulic valve for auto-
hitch).
2. Disconnect:
• the tank return pipe from the cover plate
(7)
• the supply pipe from the flow divider (3)
(if fitted)
3. Separate the control cables of the supports
and spool valves.
Fig. 174
4. Remove the locknuts (12) located at the ends
of the spool valve set.
5. Release and remove each hydraulic
component after visually noting its position.
Do not discard or lose the plates and seals
(9).
Fig. 175
Refitting
6. Refitting operations are not difficult. They therefore require carrying out the removal steps in reverse
order. However, during refitting it is necessary to ensure that:

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
• parts to be fitted have no dirt, filings, dents etc. on them.

• the seals are oiled
7. The support rods (11) of the spool valve set must be tightened to a torque of 22 Nm. The locknuts
(12) of the spool valve set must be tightened to a torque of 8 Nm.
Final steps
8. Check the correct operation of each spool
valve in the two, three or four positions
(depending on model).
9. Check the pressure on the quick couplings.
9.9.4.2 Fitting the control cables
Layout of the spool valves and control cables

The control levers and spool valves are fitted in the
same order.
Fig. 176

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
The control cables are maintained in the cab by the

flange (B). The flange can be accessed by
removing the trim (A).
Fig. 177
On the support and lever
Procedure
1. Remove the screws (1) and (2) and the trim
of the spool valve levers.
Fig. 178

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

3. Remove the units (4) and (5).
Fig. 179
5. Separate the unit into two parts (7) and (8).
6. Recover the spring (9).
7. Separate the lever (6) and the cable (11).
Fig. 180
Angle attachment and levers

Spool valves with 3 and 4 positions have different operating travels. The angle attachments (10) and levers
(12) adapted for each spool valve must be used. The parts have a visual mark.
NOTE: Using an incorrect angle attachment or lever makes it impossible to adjust the spool valve.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
The angle attachments (10) are marked "3P" for 3-

position spool valves and "4P" for 4-position spool
valves.
CAUTION:
The casting of the angle attachments
is unique and can only be
distinguished by the drilled hole for
the lever (offset A=4 mm) and the
marking.
Fig. 181
The levers (12) are marked with a "3" for the 3-
position spool valves and with a "4" for the 4-
position spool valves.
Fig. 182
NOTE: Exception to this rule

The 4-position spool valves reference 4304306M2 (4-position, single/double-acting, zero leak, notches in
floating position) must be used with the angle attachments and 3-position levers.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fitting on the spool valve
Procedure
1. Fit the angle attachment (10) and the screws
(11) on the spool valve.
2. Fit the lever (12) on the angle attachment
(10) using the pin (16) and a retainer ring (14).
NOTE: Do not confuse pins (13) and (16). Pin
(16) has a flat section in order to lock it using
the screw (15).
3. Fit the screw (15) and lock the pin (16).
4. Fit the pin (13) and a retainer ring (14) on the
spool of the spool valve.
Fig. 183

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
5. Screw the clevis (17) to the threaded part of

the cable (18).
6. Fix the clevis on the lever (12) using the clip
(19). Tighten the nut (20).
7. Adjust the stop (21) using the nut (22.)
8. Tighten the nut (23), ensuring that the cable
is not pinched.
Fig. 184

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.10 GPA50 Open Center/Rear linkage

9.10.1 General
The BOSCH (EHR5) linkage spool valve is fitted to tractors equipped with an Open Center hydraulic
system. It is fitted to the auxiliary spool valve support. It regulates the flow rate of oil to and from the lift
rams, according to the signals that it receives from the electronic system's controller. It comprises a series
of spools and valves, most of which cannot be repaired as separate parts.
Neutral position
• Engine stopped
When the engine is stopped:
• The linkage spool valve (5) is in neutral
position
• The lifting and lowering solenoid valve
spools (2) and (3) are held in position by their
respective springs
• The flow rate adjustment spool (4) is held
down by its own spring
Fig. 185

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
• Engine running
When the engine is running, the 19-cm³
hydraulic pump supplies the linkage spool valve
(5) via the priority hydraulic equipment fitted:
• Trailer brake spool valve (if fitted);
• Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves (57 L/min
version only).
Fig. 186
Lifting position
The solenoid valve (8) is activated to lift the
drawbars. The lifting spool (2) is moved
downwards, thus directing the main flow to the
non-return valve (1). As soon as the pressure
acting on the valve exceeds the pressure in the
rams, the valve opens and the flow enters port V
to raise the hitch. When the hitch is in the required
position, the tractor's electronic system cuts the
supply to the solenoid valve (8).
As a result:
• The non-return valve closes
• The lifting spool is positioned on return channel
R
• The flow rate adjustment spool (4) is fixed in
the raised position, once more allowing the oil
to flow through continuity channel N
Fig. 187

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Lowering position
The solenoid valve (7) is activated to lower the
drawbars. The lowering spool (3) is moved
downwards. Its position allows oil to return from
the rams via port V to return R.
NOTE: The lowering phase has no effect on the
flow rate adjustment spool (4).
Fig. 188

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

(5) Linkage spool valve
(12) Lift rams
(13) Spool valve support
(14) Screw
(15) "O" ring
(16) "O" ring
Fig. 189

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

(5) Linkage spool valve
(7) Lowering solenoid valve
(8) Lifting solenoid valve
(P) Pressure
(V) To lift rams
(N) Continuity line
(R) Tank return
Fig. 190
9.10.4.1 Diagnostics
To determine whether a problem is hydraulic or
electrical, operate the push buttons (A) and (B) at
the end of the solenoid valves. This allows
solenoid valve movement to be controlled
manually.
Fig. 191

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.10.5.1 Removing/refitting the linkage spool valve

Removal
1. NOTE: Auxiliary spool valves can be
removed and refitted directly on the tractor.
Fully lower the linkage arms.
2. Mark and disconnect the harnesses of the
lowering (D) and lifting (C) solenoid valves.
3. Mark, disconnect and block the lift ram
supply union (A).
4. Mark, disconnect and block the linkage spool
valve supply union (B).
5. Remove the screws (14) and separate the
spool valve (5) from its support.
Fig. 192
6. Recover the "O" rings (15) and (16).
Fig. 193
Refitting
order. However, during refitting it is necessary to ensure that:
• parts to be fitted have no dirt, filings, dents etc. on them.
• the seals are oiled and in good condition
8. The screws (14) must be tightened to a torque of 25–30 Nm.
9. Check the operation of the linkage and that there are no leaks.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.11 GPA50 Open Center/Front linkage

9.11.1 General
The front linkage is controlled hydraulically from the cab by means of an auxiliary spool valve and two
bypass valves.
At the spool valve outlet, the system is diverted by the valves, which enable:
• The spool valve to be used normally (implement supplied by couplers)
• The front linkage to be controlled in single-acting mode
• The front linkage to be controlled in double-acting mode
• The front linkage to be locked in transport control system position
• The linkage to be controlled in single-acting transport control system mode

Single-acting
• Valve (1) connects the small chambers of the
lift rams (3) to the spool valve for lifting/
lowering.
• Valve (4) connects the large chambers of the lift
rams (3) to the tank return.
Lifting is actuated by the spool valve. Lowering is
actuated by the weight of the hitched implement.
Fig. 194

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Double-acting
• Valve (1) connects the small chambers of the
lift rams (3) to the spool valve for lifting.
rams (3) to the spool valve for lowering.
Lifting and lowering are actuated by the spool
valve.
Fig. 195
Transport control system

• The valve (1) connects the small chambers of
the lift rams (3) to the accumulator (2).
Lifting and lowering are locked. The linkage
movements are absorbed by the accumulator (2).
Fig. 196

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Single-acting transport control system

• The valve (1) connects the small chambers of
the lift rams (3) to the spool valve for lifting/
lowering and the accumulator (2).
Lifting is actuated by the spool valve. Lowering is
actuated by the weight of the hitched implement.
The linkage movements are absorbed by the
accumulator (2).
Fig. 197

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.11.3.1 Front linkage
Fig. 198
(1) Front linkage rams (4) Front hydraulic couplers
(2) Selector valves (5) Front linkage supply pipes
(3) Front linkage suspension accumulator (6) Front hydraulic coupler supply pipes
9.11.4.1 Setting the accumulator

The pressure of the front linkage suspension accumulator can be set according to the load applied to the
front linkage.
Load Pressure
500 kg 30 bar (standard pressure)
1000 kg and above 44 bar

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.12 GPA50 Open Center/Mid-mounted

9.12.1 General
The Mid Mounted pack consists of a hydraulic unit (1) containing two electrohydraulic spool valves These
two spool valves supply several front or rear functions.
The electrohydraulic spool valves are controlled by a joystick or FingerTIPs according to the configuration
and options on the tractor.
Operation
The Mid-Mounted unit (1) is used to control the
rear coupler, front linkage, front coupler and front
end loader functions, using just two spool valves.
Fig. 199
The two spool valves are activated in the cab by
the joystick (2) or the FingerTIPs (3) depending on
the equipment on the tractor.
Fig. 200
WARNING:
The implements supplied by the Mid-Mounted unit must be disconnected when they are
not in use to avoid their being activated by mistake.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Spool valve 1 Spool valve 2
Output A2 Output a2 Output B2 Output b2 Output A1 Output a1 Output B1 Output b1
Loader Implemen Implemen Loader Loader

t t (lifting) (lowering)
Front Front Front Front Front

linkage and coupler coupler linkage linkage
couplers (lowering) (lifting)
Rear Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse

couplers coupler coupler coupler coupler
Electrohydraulic control
The Mid-Mounted unit has a control unit with 5
solenoid valves connected to the 21 bar system
and a pressure accumulator. Each spool is
activated by two proportional solenoid valves
supplied by the tractor's 21 bar system.
The solenoid valves activate:
• (X): Mid-Mounted unit pilot circuit cut-off.
• (A1) and (B1): Spool valve 1.
Fig. 201
Each spool valve has a sensor informing the
controller of the spool movement.
• (C1): Spool valve 1 position sensor.
Fig. 202

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Hydraulic supply
Fig. 203
The Mid-Mounted unit has 2 separate circuits.

• The low-pressure circuit activates the spools.
The 21 bar low-pressure circuit supplies the solenoid valve block via the pipe (X1). The tank return
transits via the pipe (L) then flows directly into the rear axle housing. The pressure accumulator (X2) on
the low-pressure supply line avoids a pressure drop in the pilot circuit.
• The high-pressure circuit supplies the spool valves.
The pump flow arrives via the pipe (P). The flow that is not used by the spool valves leaves via the
continuity line (C) to the lubrication circuit. The tank return transits via the pipe (T) then flows directly
into the gearbox housing.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 204
(P) Pump pressure (B1) Front linkage and rear coupler supply
(T) Tank return (A2) Front coupler and rear coupler supply
(C) Continuity line (B2) Front coupler and rear coupler supply
(L) Return, 21 bar system (a1) Front-end loader supply
(X1) supply (b1) Front-end loader supply
(X2) Pressure accumulator, 21 bar system (a2) Front-end loader supply
(A1) Front linkage and rear coupler supply (b2) Front-end loader supply

The pressure of the Mid-Mounted unit accumulator can be controlled and adjusted.
Accumulator pressure: 13 bar ± 1 bar

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.12.5 Removing/refitting the Mid Mounted unit

Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Remove the cab.

2. Chock the rear axle on an axle stand and remove the rear wheels.
9.12.5.1 Removal
Procedure
1. On the Mid Mounted unit (1), mark and
disconnect the following connectors:
• X855 - Spool 2 position sensor;
• X857 - Electrohydraulic block supply
solenoid valve;
• X858 - Solenoid valve B1;
• X860 - Solenoid valve A1;
• X861 - Solenoid valve A2.
Fig. 205

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
2. Mark and remove the following pipes:

• the accumulator pipe (2) (tightening
torque: 35 Nm)
• the return pipe (3) (tightening torque:
35 Nm)
• the supply pipe 21 bar (4) (tightening
torque: 35 Nm) (tightening torque: 35 Nm)
3. Remove the continuity pipe (5) and the high-
pressure supply pipe (6) (tightening torque:
60 Nm).
4. Remove the pipe flanges (7) and (8).
Fig. 206
6. Mark and remove the front-end loader supply
pipes (11) (tightening torque: 70 Nm).
• Front coupler supply pipes (12) and (13)
(tightening torque: 50 Nm)
• Tank return pipe (14) (tightening torque:
70 Nm).
Fig. 207
8. Mark and remove the rear coupler supply
Fig. 208

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9. Loosen the nut (16).

10. Remove the support screws (17) and (18).
Fig. 209
11. Remove the screws (19) in order to separate
the Mid Mounted unit (1) from its support.
Fig. 210
9.12.5.2 Refitting
Procedure
Refitting operations are not difficult. They therefore require carrying out the removal steps in reverse
order.
Procedure
1. Refit the cab.

2. Check the loader, the front and rear couplers and the front linkage for correct operation.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.13 GPA50 Closed Center/Spool valves

9.13.1 General
The proportional auxiliary spool valves, of the Bosch/Rexroth SB23 LS type, are fitted to the high flow rate
high pressure system. They are fed by the oil coming from the priority block(s).
When no functions are activated, the entire flow rate is directed towards the spool valves. If certain priority
functions are being supplied, the remaining flow is then available for the auxiliary spool valves.
The main spool of the valve is controlled by a cable linked to a lever in the cab. The spool directs oil
towards either outlet port. Each outlet port is linked to the LS pilot line of the variable displacement pump
regulating valve via the priority block(s).
The auxiliary spool valves are made up of elements themselves comprising spools and valves.
Some elements cannot be identified as spare parts.
Couplers
The dirty oil coming from the separation of hydraulic couplers flows into a transparent flexible tank that is
fixed at the back of the left trumpet housing.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.13.2 Layout of components and identification of ports

Layout of components
Fig. 211
(1) Main spool (3) One-way valve
(2) Valve (4) Flow regulation control rod
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(5) Flow regulation control spool (7) Flow regulation control knob
(6) Unit and locking system
On the inlet block (14)
(P) High pressure supply from variable
displacement pump via the priority block(s)
(depending on version)
(R) Return from auxiliary spool valves (beneath
the oil level)
(LS) Signal to variable displacement pump
regulator via the linkage spool valve and the
priority block(s) (depending on version).
Fig. 212
On the auxiliary spool valves

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 213
(A) Outlet to coupler (R) Return from auxiliary spool valves (beneath
(B) Outlet to coupler the oil level)
(C) Restrictor (LS) Signal to variable displacement pump
(D) Grooves regulator via the linkage spool valve and the
(E) Channel priority block(s) (depending on version).
(F) Chamber
(P) High pressure supply from variable
displacement pump via the priority block(s)
(depending on version)

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.13.3.1 Exploded view of the control valve block
Fig. 214
(1) Control valve block (4) Kickout
(2) Zero leak valve (5) Main spool
(3) Non-return valve (6) Flow regulator

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 215
(D) Hydraulic spool valve (G) 0.6 mm nozzle for decompression of the (LS)
(S) Spool valve support line
(R) Linkage spool valve (B) Priority block

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(P) High pressure supply (LS) Load Sensing line

(T) Tank return
9.13.4.1 Removing/refitting the spool valves

Removal
1. NOTE: Depending on the model and its options, it is possible that not all the equipment mentioned in
this section will be present. However, the procedure will remain the same.
Remove and set aside:
• The trailer lighting connector
• The Isobus connector
• The trailer brake coupler
2. Remove the selector valves from the front
linkage (1) (if fitted).
3. Remove the selector valve from the auto-
hitch (2) (if fitted).
Fig. 216
4. Remove the leak recovery units from the
spool valves (3) and the pipes (4).
Fig. 217

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
5. Loosen the supply pipes of the couplers (7)

(if fitted).
7. Remove the support assembly (6) and the
couplers (7).
Fig. 218
8. Mark the position of the spool valve control
cables.
9. For each spool valve:
• Remove the clip (8).
• Loosen the nut (9) and release the control
cable.
Fig. 219
10. Remove the nuts (10) (tightening torque:
24 Nm).
11. Remove the cover plate (11) then the spool
valves (12) and (14), and the intermediate
plate (13).
12. Check the condition of the "O" rings and
replace them if necessary on reassembly.
Fig. 220

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Refitting
order.

1. Check that the linkage operates correctly.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.14 GPA50 Closed Center/Rear linkage

9.14.1 General
The BOSCH (EHR5) linkage spool valve is fitted to tractors equipped with a Closed Center hydraulic
system. It is fitted underneath the auxiliary spool valve support. It regulates the flow rate of oil to and from
the lift rams, according to the signals that it receives from the electronic system's controller. It comprises a
series of spools and valves, most of which cannot be repaired as separate parts.

When the engine is stopped:
• the lifting and lowering solenoid valve spools
(3) and (4) are held in position by their
respective springs
• the flow rate adjustment spool (2) is held in the
fully open position by its spring.
When the engine is running:
• the lifting and lowering solenoid valve spools
(3) and (4) are held in position by their
respective springs
• The standby pressure of the Load Sensing line
forces the spring of the flow rate adjustment
spool (2) into the closed position.
Lifting position
The lifting solenoid valve is activated to lift the
drawbars. The spool (3) moves and opens the
system. The pressure drop in the Load Sensing
line opens the flow rate adjustment spool (2) and
increases the pump flow rate.
The flow is directed via a non-return valve towards
the lift rams (6). When the lifting solenoid valve is
no longer activated, the system returns to neutral
position.
Fig. 221
Lowering position
The lowering solenoid valve is activated to lower
the drawbars. The spool (4) moves and opens the
system towards the oil sump return, enabling the
lowering of the linkage arms.
NOTE: The lowering phase has no effect on the
flow rate adjustment spool (2).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 222
(D) Hydraulic spool valve (S) Spool valve support
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(R) Linkage spool valve (P) High pressure supply

(G) 0.6 mm nozzle for decompression of the (LS) (T) Tank return
line (LS) Load Sensing line
(B) Priority block
9.14.4.1 Removing/refitting the linkage spool valve

Removal
1. On the linkage spool valve (1), mark and
disconnect the connectors:
• X27 - Rear linkage lifting solenoid valve;
• X28 - Rear linkage lowering solenoid
valve.
2. Lower the linkage fully by pressing the push
button X28 - Rear linkage lowering solenoid
valve.
3. Disconnect the delivery pipe (2) for the lift
rams.
Fig. 223

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

5. Remove the linkage spool valve (1). If
necessary, replace the seals (4).
Fig. 224
Refitting
order.

1. Check that the linkage operates correctly.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.15 GPA50 Closed Center/Front linkage

9.15.1.1 Front linkage
Fig. 225
(1) Front linkage rams (5) Front linkage supply pipes
(2) Selector valves (6) Front hydraulic coupler supply pipes
(3) Front lift suspension accumulator (if fitted) (7) Mid Mounted unit (if fitted)
(4) Front hydraulic couplers

The pressure of the front linkage suspension accumulator can be set according to the load applied to the
front linkage.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Load Pressure
500 kg 30 bar (standard pressure)
1000 kg and above 44 bar

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.16 GPA50 Closed Center/Mid-mounted

9.16.1 General
The Mid Mounted pack consists of a hydraulic unit (1) containing two electrohydraulic spool valves These
two spool valves supply several front or rear functions.
The electrohydraulic spool valves are controlled by a joystick or FingerTIPs according to the configuration
and options on the tractor.
Operation
The Mid-Mounted unit (1) is used to control the
rear coupler, front linkage, front coupler and front
end loader functions, using just two spool valves.
Fig. 226
The two spool valves are activated in the cab by
the joystick (2) or the FingerTIPs (3) depending on
the equipment on the tractor.
Fig. 227
WARNING:
The implements supplied by the Mid-Mounted unit must be disconnected when they are
not in use to avoid their being activated by mistake.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Spool valve 1 Spool valve 2
Output A1 Output a1 Output B1 Output b1 Output A2 Output a2 Output B2 Output b2
Loader Loader Loader Implemen Implemen

(lifting) (lowering) t t
Front Front Front Front Front

linkage linkage linkage coupler coupler
and (lowering) (lifting)
couplers
Rear Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse

couplers coupler coupler coupler coupler
Electrohydraulic control
The Mid-Mounted unit has a control unit with 5
solenoid valves connected to the 21 bar system
and a pressure accumulator. Each spool is
activated by two proportional solenoid valves
supplied by the tractor's 21 bar system.
The solenoid valves activate:
• (X): Mid-Mounted unit pilot circuit cut-off.
Fig. 228
Each spool valve has a sensor informing the
controller of the spool movement.
Fig. 229

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Hydraulic supply
Fig. 230
The Mid-Mounted unit has 2 separate circuits.

• The low-pressure circuit activates the spools.
The 21 bar low-pressure circuit supplies the solenoid valve block via the pipe (X1). The tank return
transits via the pipe (L) then flows directly into the rear axle housing. The pressure accumulator (X2) on
the low-pressure supply line avoids a pressure drop in the pilot circuit.
• The high-pressure circuit supplies the spool valves.
The pump flow arrives via the pipe (P). The (LS) line is used to regulate the pump flow according to the
needs of the spool valves. The tank return transits via the pipe (T) then flows directly into the gearbox
housing.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 231
(P) Pump pressure (B1) Front linkage and rear coupler supply
(T) Tank return (A2) Front coupler and rear coupler supply
(LS) Load Sensing line (B2) Front coupler and rear coupler supply
(L) Return, 21 bar system (a1) Front-end loader supply
(X1) supply (b1) Front-end loader supply
(X2) Pressure accumulator, 21 bar system (a2) Front-end loader supply
(A1) Front linkage and rear coupler supply (b2) Front-end loader supply

The pressure of the Mid-Mounted unit accumulator can be controlled and adjusted.
Accumulator pressure: 13 bar ± 1 bar

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.16.5 Removing/refitting the Mid Mounted unit

Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Remove the cab.

2. Chock the rear axle on an axle stand and remove the rear wheels.
9.16.5.1 Removal
Procedure
1. On the Mid Mounted unit (1), mark and
disconnect the following connectors:
• X857 - Electrohydraulic block supply
solenoid valve;
• X860 - Solenoid valve A1;
• X861 - Solenoid valve A2.
Fig. 232

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

• the accumulator pipe (2) (tightening
torque: 35 Nm)
• the return pipe (3) (tightening torque:
35 Nm)
• the supply pipe 21 bar (4) (tightening
torque: 35 Nm) (tightening torque: 35 Nm)
• the LS pilot flow pipe (5) (tightening
torque: 35 Nm).
3. Remove the high-pressure supply pipe (6)
(tightening torque: 60 Nm).
Fig. 233
6. Mark and remove the front-end loader supply
Fig. 234
• Front coupler supply pipes (12) and (13)
(tightening torque: 50 Nm)
• Tank return pipe (14) (tightening torque:
70 Nm).
Fig. 235

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
8. Mark and remove the rear coupler supply

Fig. 236
9. Loosen the nut (16).

10. Remove the support screws (17) and (18).
Fig. 237
11. Sling the Mid Mounted unit (1) and its
support.
12. Remove the screws (19) in order to separate
the Mid Mounted unit (1) from its support.
Fig. 238
9.16.5.2 Refitting
Procedure
Refitting operations are not difficult. They therefore require carrying out the removal steps in reverse
order.
Procedure
1. Refit the cab.

2. Check the loader, the front and rear couplers and the front linkage for correct operation.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.17 GPA50/Brake master cylinders

9.17.1 General
The brake master cylinders are attached to the
pedal console and are housed to the right of the
cab front bulkhead. They act on the tractor main
brake located in the center housing.
The master cylinders have different specifications
depending on the option fitted on the tractor:
• Brake master cylinders without a trailer brake
• Brake master cylinders with a trailer brake
supply
Fig. 239
The master cylinders are maintained at constant
level by a residual oil flow from the hose (1) (Open
Center version) or (2) (Closed Center version). This
hose is connected to the lubrication circuit on the
right-hand cover plate.
Fig. 240

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Depending on user requirements, the master

cylinders can be activated separately or together in
locked mode via a pedal latch (2).
IMPORTANT: For use on the road, the brake
pedals must always be locked together.
Fig. 241
Master cylinders
Fig. 242
Construction
The double circuit master cylinder is composed of two master cylinders comprising a shared housing. Each
brake pedal activates a piston acting on the right-hand or left-hand wheel brake. The double circuit master
cylinder is available with or without a trailer brake.
The housing (1) mainly contains a piston (4), activated by a rod (3) and the pedals and a spring (7). This
assembly is maintained in place by the plug (6).
At rest
The residual oil flow from the transmission lubrication system maintains a permanent oil level in the
reservoir (2). When the pedals are not pressed, the chamber of each master cylinder is not under pressure,
therefore no action is exerted on the brake system.
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 243
Pedals uncoupled
The force applied to a pedal is transmitted by the rod (3) to the piston (4) which moves in the bore of the
active master cylinder. The valve (5) closes the supply port. Oil is directed under pressure towards the
main brake ports.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 244
Trailer brake supply
When the tractor is fitted with a trailer brake, a valve (8) integrated into the master cylinder is used to
control the trailer brake valve.
The valve is composed of a shuttle (9) and is maintained by the plug (10) on the master cylinder.
• Pressing the two coupled brake pedals:
The two pistons pressurize the brake systems (11) and (12). As the brake pressures are balanced, the
shuttle (9) enables the brake pressure to control the trailer brake valve (13).
• Pressing one brake pedal only:
The pressure exerted by the brake piston moves the shuttle (9) and closes the pipe towards the trailer
brake (13).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 245
(1) Master cylinder (4) Supply pipe
(2) Tank (5) Rear right-hand brake supply
(3) Return pipe (6) Rear left-hand brake supply

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.17.3.2 Identification of Open Center system channels
Fig. 246
(A) Charge pressure of master cylinders (D) Rear left-hand brake supply
(B) Tank return (E) Trailer brake supply (option)
(C) Rear right-hand brake supply

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.17.3.3 Identification of Closed Center system channels
Fig. 247
(A) Charge pressure of master cylinders (D) Rear left-hand brake supply
(B) Tank return (E) Trailer brake supply (option)
(C) Rear right-hand brake supply
Installation

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Open Center version

see Fig. 248 .
excessively.
Fig. 248
3582045M1 see Fig. 248 .
excessively.
Fig. 249

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

Fig. 250
Bleeding procedure
Procedure
bubbles.
air bubbles.
bubbles.
Check
• The system


ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Procedure
Sensing version.
bleeding procedure.
Fig. 251
9.17.4.3 Adjusting brake pedals
Procedure
1. Adjust the clevis in order to obtain a
dimension (A) = 160 ± 0.5 mm between the
mating face and the mounting pin.
2. Lock the counter-nut.
3. Check pedals for correct operation. Ensure
they are at the same height when not
activated and that they return freely to their
initial position.
Fig. 252

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
4. Carry out the same procedure on the second

clevis and ensure that the locking latch (2)
operates smoothly.
5. Check pedals for correct operation. Ensure
they are at the same height when not
activated and that they return freely to their
initial position.
Fig. 253
9.17.5 Service tools
9.17.5.1 General
9.17.5.2 GPA50/Hydraulic braking – Service tools
Ref. 3582045M1
Description Hydraulic female coupling for

creating a brake bleed pipe
Control AGCO Beauvais
Fig. 254

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.18 Open Center/Hydraulic trailer braking

9.18.1 General
The tractors are equipped with an open center hydraulic system; they are fitted with a trailer braking
mechanism comprising:
• a valve assembly (6) (spool valve) fitted on the right-hand hydraulic cover plate,
• a pipe linking the spool valve to a connector (1) located at the rear of the tractor,
• a control line connected to the master cylinders.
The valve receives a priority supply from the high pressure system. The oil not used for braking the trailer
is directed to the spool valves (auxiliary and linkage). The valve regulates the flow rate and pressure to the
trailer brakes. It is controlled by the tractor braking system pressure, generated by the master cylinders, so
as to obtain progressive tractor/trailer braking that is proportional to the force applied to the pedal. The
trailer brake only operates if the two brake pedals are locked together.
Identification of pipes, hoses and ports

(1) Trailer brake valve
(2) Trailer brake connector
(3) Brake master cylinders and pedals
(B) Supply to the trailer brake connector
(N) Continuity to spool valves (auxiliary and
linkage)
(P) Pressure
(R) Return to housing
(Y) Pilot flow from tractor brake mechanism
(master cylinders)
Fig. 255

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

Brakes released
Fig. 256
(15) Piston (N) Continuity to spool valves (auxiliary and
((16))Impulse spring linkage)
((17))Spool (P) Pressure
((18))Reaction needle (R) Return to housing
((19))Return spring (Y) Pilot flow from tractor brake mechanism
(B) Supply to the trailer brake connector (master cylinders)
When the return spring (19) is at rest, it pushes the spool (17) to neutral.
All the flow coming from the pump (P) is directed towards the continuity channel (N), allowing the auxiliary
spool valves and linkage to be used.
The control pressure (Y) is zero. The trailer brake supply (B) connects with the housing return (R), so the
trailer brake is fully released.
Partial braking
Fig. 257
(15) Piston ((19))Return spring
((16))Impulse spring (B) Supply to the trailer brake connector
((17))Spool (N) Continuity to spool valves (auxiliary and
((18))Reaction needle linkage)

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(P) Pressure (Y) Pilot flow from tractor brake mechanism

(R) Return to housing (master cylinders)
When the brakes are applied gradually, the control pressure (Y) increases and moves the spool (17).
The flow from the pump (P) is directed partially towards the trailer brake (B) and the continuity channel (N).
The connection between the trailer brake pressure (B) and the housing return (R) is cut.
The trailer brake pressure (B) varies in proportion to the control pressure (Y), i.e. according to the force
applied to the brake pedal of the tractor.
Full braking
Fig. 258
When the brakes are fully applied, the control pressure (Y) increases and moves the spool (17) completely.
The flow from the pump (P) is directed fully towards the trailer brake (B).
The connection between the trailer brake pressure (B) and the housing return (R) is cut.
The trailer brake pressure (B) increases quickly and is then adjusted to 150 bar.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Brake pressure regulation
Fig. 259
When the trailer brake pressure (B) reaches 150 bar, the pressure is limited by the return spring (19) and by
the trailer brake pressure (B) pushing back the spool of the reaction needle (18).
The pressures are balanced by the springs (16) and (19), and the trailer brake pressure (B) is maintained at
150 bar.
Once the pressure (B) is regulated, the continuity channel (N) sends the flow from the pump (P) to the
hydraulic system components.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 260
(1) Trailer brake valve (9) Control unit
(2) Trailer brake connector ((10))Bleed screw
(4) Right-hand hydraulic cover plate ((11))Screw
(5) "O" ring (12) "O" ring
(6) "O" ring (13) "O" ring
(7) "O" ring (14) Trailer brake valve unit
(8) Pressure connector

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Fig. 261
(B) Supply to the trailer brake connector (P) Pressure
(N) Continuity to spool valves (auxiliary and (R) Return to housing
linkage)

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(Y) Pilot flow from tractor brake mechanism

(master cylinders)
Installation
Open Center version
see Fig. 262 .
excessively.
Fig. 262

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

3582045M1 see Fig. 262 .
excessively.
Fig. 263
Fig. 264
Bleeding procedure
Procedure
bubbles.
air bubbles.
bubbles.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Check
• The system

Procedure
Sensing version.
bleeding procedure.
Fig. 265
9.18.5.1 General

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Ref. 3582045M1

Fig. 266

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.19 Closed Center/Hydraulic trailer braking

9.19.1 General
The trailer brake mechanism comprises a hydraulic
unit with two priority blocks. It is located on the
right-hand hydraulic cover plate of the rear axle
housing. The priority blocks are screwed together.
The inner unit (1) ensures that the steering and
braking system has priority and supplies the 21-bar
system and hydraulic spool valves.
The outer unit (2) shares priority between the
steering and trailer braking supply.
Fig. 267

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

Trailer brake unit (6)
Fig. 268
The trailer brake unit is made up of two spools

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
• Steering priority spool (2)

The spool moves to the left under the action of spring (5). The flow from the channel (B) is directed as a
priority to the steering spool valve (Orbitrol) via the channel (A). With the steering in a neutral position,
there is no flow in this channel.
The increasing pressure forces the spool to move to the right and compress spring (5) thus allowing the
flow to pass into channel (J).
During operation, a pilot flow pressure from the steering spool valve (Orbitrol) arrives through channel
(D) and pushes the spool back to the left, thus allowing the flow rate required by the steering to enter
channel (A).
The remaining flow is directed into channel (J).
• Trailer brake spool (6)
When the trailer brake is not activated, the pressure in channel (K) is zero and the spool allows
communication between channels (L) and (R).
As soon as the tractor brake is activated, the pressure existing in channel (K) moves piston (7), which
pushes the spool to the left, allowing the flow to pass between channels (J) and (L).
The increasing pressure in channel (L) acts on the end of the spool (6) and compresses the spring (8) to
create a balance allowing the pressure in channel (L) to be maintained according to the pressure in
channel (K).
This pressure is maintained by linking channel L either to channel J or port R.
NOTE: As with the "no trailer braking" priority block, a flow rate of 0.5 L flows through channel (A) towards
channel (D) (dynamic steering) via a hole and a restrictor in the spool (2).

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
9.19.3 Schematic diagram

Hydraulic unit with two priority blocks
Fig. 269
(P1) High pressure hydraulic line (R) Return below oil level
(P2) Provision for high pressure connector
ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
(LS) Signal to the variable displacement pump

regulator via the hydraulic unit with two
priority blocks
Installation
Open Center version
see Fig. 270 .
excessively.
Fig. 270

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics

3582045M1 see Fig. 270 .
excessively.
Fig. 271
Fig. 272
Bleeding procedure
Procedure
bubbles.
air bubbles.
bubbles.

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Check
• The system

Procedure
Sensing version.
bleeding procedure.
Fig. 273
9.19.5.1 General

ACT0021460
9. Hydraulics
Ref. 3582045M1

Fig. 274

ACT0021460
Table of contents
10. Electricity
10.1 Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10.1.1 List of generic procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.2 Checking the insulation of a harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.3 Checking the continuity of a harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.4 Checking the CAN network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.1.5 Checking a harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.1.6 Measuring a voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.1.7 Measuring the resistance of a component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.8 Measuring current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.9 Hook-on ammeter procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.1.10 Ammeter procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.2 Electrical circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.1.2 Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.1.3 Electricity - color code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2.1.4 Schematic diagram of the electrical circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.2.2 Lighting - Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.3 Cab fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.3.2.1 Fuse box - Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.3.3.1 Removing and refitting the fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.4 Fuse box on battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.4.1.1 Description of the secondary fuse box (depending on model) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.4.2.1 Removing/refitting the secondary fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.5 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.5.1 Alternator - Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.5.2.1 Alternator - test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.5.3.1 Removing and refitting the drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.5.3.2 Removing and refitting the alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.5.4 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.5.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.5.4.2 Belt - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.6 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.6.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.6.1.3 Schematic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
10.6.2 Starter - Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10.6.3.1 Starter diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

ACT0021460
Table of contents
10.6.4.1 Removing/refitting the starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

10.7 Circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10.7.1.1 Battery isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10.8 Triflash triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10.8.1.1 Triflash on standard roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10.8.1.2 Triflash on high-visibility roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.1 Diagnostic procedure

10.1.1 List of generic procedures
List of generic procedures
see chapter 10.1.3 Checking the continuity of a harness, page 10-3
see chapter 10.1.2 Checking the insulation of a harness, page 10-3
see chapter 10.1.4 Checking the CAN network, page 10-5
see chapter 10.1.5 Checking a harness, page 10-7
see chapter 10.1.7 Measuring the resistance of a component, page 10-8
see chapter 10.1.8 Measuring current, page 10-8
see chapter 10.1.6 Measuring a voltage, page 10-7
see chapter 10.1.9 Hook-on ammeter procedure, page 10-8
see chapter 10.1.10 Ammeter procedure, page 10-9
10.1.2 Checking the insulation of a harness

Checking the insulation of a harness
Test instrument
An ohmmeter is used to test the insulation of a harness.
Procedure
Connect the ohmmeter between a harness
point and the earth. The measured value
should be an infinite resistance (except for an
earth wire).
Fig. 1
10.1.3 Checking the continuity of a harness

Checking the continuity of a harness
Test instrument
An ohmmeter is used to test the continuity of a harness because this is also a measurement of resistance.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Procedure
1. Disconnect the connectors furthest away
from the harness.
2. Connect the ohmmeter to each end of the
harness.
Fig. 2
3. Interpreting the measured value
Measured value Meaning and actions
Equal or close to 0 Ohms (resistance of the wire) The conductor presents no faults.
Between 4 Ohms and several kiloohms There is a fault on the harness creating a
resistance to the current flow.
1. Disconnect and measure each piece of the
harness to locate the faulty section, see Fig.
3 .
2. Also check that the connectors are in good
condition.
3. Replace the faulty harness if necessary.
In megohms or infinite value (displayed by a "1" The circuit is open between the harness points.
on the ohmmeter screen)
1. Disconnect and measure each piece of the
harness to locate the faulty section, see Fig.
3 .

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Measured value Meaning and actions
2. Replace the faulty harness if necessary.
Fig. 3
10.1.4 Checking the CAN network

Checking the CAN network
Procedure
1. Checking the fuses
Measured value Theoretical value If OK, proceed to If not OK...

operation...
Fuse correct see step 2, page Replace faulty fuses.

10-5
2. Checking for controllers on the CAN network

Switch on the ignition and use the diagnostic tool (EDT) to display the status of the various controllers
on the network in the Network Scan screen.

operation...
A green disk means see step 3, page see step 6, page

that the controllers are 10-5 10-6
communicating
3. Checking the Ohms value of the CAN bus

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
With the ignition off, test the resistance of the CAN bus between the terminals of the diagnostic
connector (see relevant terminals in the electrical diagram for the function).

operation...
60 Ohms see step 4, page see step 8, page

10-6 10-6
4. Checking the CAN network load

Start the tractor. Use the diagnostic tool (EDT) to display the CAN network load and the frame error
counter in the CAN network status screen.

operation...
The CAN network load see step 12, page see step 5, page
must not exceed the 10-7 10-6
maximum value
displayed on the EDT
(red bar). The frame
error counter must be
zero.
5. Checking for an interference controller

Disconnect the controllers one by one while checking the value of the error counter and the CAN load
on the EDT. If the absence of a controller causes the situation to return, replace it.
6. Checking the power supply of the absent controller in EDT
Disconnect the controller that is displaying a red disk in EDT. Test the voltage between the controller
power supply terminals and the tractor earth. Then test the continuity of the controller earth wires.

operation...
Voltage: 12 V see step 3, page 10-5 see step 7, page

10-6
Resistance: 60 Ohms
7. Check the connections and/or replace the harness.

8. Checking a CAN bus resistor
The CAN bus resistors are fitted:
• directly on the CAN network (as a component),
• or built into certain controllers.
In both cases, disconnect the component and test the value of the resistor between its terminals.

operation...

10-6 10-7
9. Checking the other CAN bus resistor

Disconnect the resistor and test its value.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity

operation...
10-7 10-7
10. Replace the faulty resistor or controller.

11. Checking the continuity of the CAN network
Disconnect the two controllers. Test the continuity of the CAN low between the terminals of each
controller. Repeat this step for the CAN high.

operation...
0 Ohms between see step 3, page 10-5 see step 7, page 10-6
terminals
Infinite between
terminals and earth
12. Check that the parameters and the program of the controllers are correct.

operation...
Program and see step 13, page see step 14, page
parameters correct 10-7 10-7
13. Replace the controller.

14. Load the latest program versions and set the parameters.
10.1.5 Checking a harness

Checking a harness
Procedure
1. Check the voltage at the component terminals.
2. Check the supply voltage(s) of the relevant controller.
3. Check the continuity of the controller earth circuits.
4. Check the continuity of the component earth circuits.
5. Check the continuity of the wires between the controller and the component.
6. Check the current consumed by the component.
10.1.6 Measuring a voltage

Measuring a voltage
Measuring instrument
A voltmeter is used to measure an electrical voltage.
IMPORTANT:
A voltmeter is always connected in parallel.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Procedure
1. Select a suitable value to obtain optimum
accuracy. The correct value is the smallest
value immediately higher than the
measurement. Important: To avoid obtaining
incorrect results, take care not to confuse
position "DC" for direct current and position
"AC" for alternating current.
2. Connect the terminal marked "V" or "+" to the
highest potential (positive side) and the
terminal marked "COM" or "-" to the lowest
potential (for example: tractor chassis).
3. Compare the measured value to the value
given in the component file.
Fig. 4
10.1.7 Measuring the resistance of a component

Measuring the resistance of a component
An ohmmeter is used to measure resistance.
CAUTION:
The measurement is always taken with the component switched off.
Procedure
1. Disconnect the component.
2. Choose a suitable value on the multimeter or
select the automatic value. Measure the
component resistance value(s).
3. Compare the measured values with the
values given in the component file
Fig. 5
10.1.8 Measuring current

Measuring current
There are two different instruments to measure an electrical current:
• an ammeter,
• a hook-on ammeter.
10.1.9 Hook-on ammeter procedure

Hook-on ammeter procedure

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
The hook-on ammeter is used to measure the intensity of a current flowing within a circuit without having
to disconnect the circuit to fit an ammeter in series.
Procedure
1. Use the selector to select the "Ampere"
position using the value closest to the
measurement to be taken. Select position
"DC" for direct current and calibrate the
ammeter display to obtain maximum
accuracy.
(A) Component
2. Fit the conductor in the ammeter, taking care
to follow the electrical current direction of
circulation (from + to -): an arrow on the
ammeter indicates the fitting direction.
3. Supply the circuit with power and read off
the measurement on the ammeter display. Fig. 6
4. Compare the measured value to the value
given in the component file.
10.1.10 Ammeter procedure

Ammeter procedure
CAUTION:
The ammeter is always connected to the circuit in series. This means that the circuit must
be cut so that it can be fitted in place.
1. It is wise to set the ammeter to its highest
value when connecting. This value must then
be decreased if necessary to obtain optimum
accuracy. The correct value is the smallest
value immediately higher than the
measurement. Important: To avoid obtaining
incorrect results, take care not to confuse
position "DC" for direct current and position
"AC" for alternating current. The current
should enter via the terminal marked "10A" or
"mA" (depending on the scale) and leave via
the terminal marked "COM".
2. Supply the circuit with power and compare
the measured value to the value given in the Fig. 7
component file.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.2 Electrical circuit

10.2.1 General
10.2.1.1 General
The electrical circuit supplies:
• the lighting (lights, signals, interior lighting etc.)
• the engine starter
• the electronic controllers (engine, transmission, hydraulic control, suspension etc.)
• the air conditioning (fan, automatic air conditioning controller etc.)
• the accessory power sockets.
Voltage 12 V
Earth Negative
Battery 1x505 A, maintenance-free

Electrical specifications
The electrical current is generated by 1 or 2 alternators (depending on model) and is stored in 1 12-V
battery or 2 12-V batteries installed in parallel.
The battery is located at the front-right of the cab
in the battery box.
Fig. 8
The alternator is located on the right-hand side of
the engine.
Fig. 9
The circuit is protected by an electronic circuit breaker situated in the battery box.

The tractor electrical circuit is powered by 1 alternator (1) driven by the engine. The current is stored in 1
battery (2), via the fuse box (7) located in the battery box.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
The starter (3) has a specific circuit due to the high current required to start the engine.
The fuse box (7) protects the charging circuit of each alternator and supplies the preheating circuit (8) and
the fuse box in the cab (4).
The fuse box in the cab (4) protects and distributes the current to the various circuits of the tractor
(controllers, lighting etc.).
The automatic circuit breaker (6) cuts the battery power supply to the tractor's electrical circuit.
10.2.1.3 Electricity - color code

A color code and an abbreviation inscribed on the wires enable identification of the type of wire and its
usage.
Wire Color Abbreviation
Chassis earth Black N
12 Volt battery Brown B
12 Volt ignition on Red R
12 Volt accessories Red - White R_W
10 Volt (Auto5) Pink K
10 Volt earth (Auto5) Gray - Pink GA_K
8.5 Volt (EXT Lite) Orange O
8.5 Volt earth Gray - Orange GA_O
5 Volt (instrument panel/Auto5) Blue U
5 Volt earth (instrument panel/ Gray - Blue GA_U

Auto5)
CAN1 (Tractor) Green - White / Yellow - White G_W/Y_W
CAN2 (Isobus) Green / Yellow G/Y
CAN3 (Engine) Green - Orange / Yellow - Orange G_O/Y_O

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Wire Color Abbreviation
CAN4 (linkage/hydraulics) Green - Blue / Yellow - Blue G_U/Y_U
AGCO Power CAN Green - Violet / Yellow - Violet G_P/G_P
Signal White W
Color codes for electrical wires
10.2.1.4 Schematic diagram of the electrical circuit
Fig. 10
(1) Alternator (6) Circuit breaker
(2) Battery (7) Fuse box on battery
(3) Starter (8) Preheating resistor
(4) Fuse Box in cab

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.2.2 Lighting - Layout of components
Europe models
Fig. 11
(1) Rotary beacon: H1 55 W (9) Low beam lamps: H1 55 W
(2) Front xenon work light: HID DIS 35 W (10) High beam lamps: H1 55 W
(3) Front work light: H3 55 W (11) Rear xenon work light: HID DIS 35 W
(4) Hand rail lights: H4 60 W / 55 W (12) Rear work light: H3 55 W
(5) Front indicators/warning lights: 21 W (13) Rear work light: H3 55 W
(6) Front side lights: 10 W (14) Rear indicators/warning lights: 21 W
(7) Front work light: H3 55 W (15) Rear brake lights/side lights: 21 W / 5 W
(8) Front work light: H9 65 W

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
North America models
Fig. 12
(1) Rotary beacon: H1 55 W (8) High beam lamps: H1 55 W
(2) Front xenon work light: HID DIS 35 W (9) Rear xenon work light: HID DIS 35 W
(3) Front work light: H3 55 W (10) Warning lights: 21 W
(4) Warning lights: 21 W (11) Indicator: 21 W
(5) Front work light: H3 55 W (12) Rear brake lights/side lights: 21 W / 5 W
(6) Front work lights: H9 65 W (13) Rear warning lights: 21 W
(7) Low beam lamps: H1 55 W (14) Rear work light: H3 55 W

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.3 Cab fuse box

10.3.1 General
10.3.1.1 General
The fuse box is a printed circuit board that groups together the main fuses and relays protecting the
electrical circuit on the tractor. The fuse box is linked to the positive and negative terminals of the battery.
Each circuit is then supplied with power from the fuse box.

The fuse box protects the entire electrical circuit on the tractor against:
• short circuits
• overcurrents
In the event of a short circuit or overcurrent, the fuses open the circuit. Depending on the function to be
supplied with power, the fuse can resist different currents.
The relays fitted into the fuse box provide control of functions that require strong currents, while limiting
the current passing through the control system.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.3.2.1 Fuse box - Connectors
Fig. 13
X63 - Instrument panel harness connection X348 - Cab transmission harness connection
on fuse box on fuse box
X64 - Instrument panel harness connection X362 - Fuse box (+12 V battery)
on fuse box X638 - Connection between the fuse holder
X117 - Isobus +12 V battery power socket board and the hazard warning light unit
X129 - Fuse box +12 V battery connection X639 - Connection between the fuse holder
X162 - Pillar harness connection on fuse box board and the cab interior transmission
X172 - Cab transmission harness connection harness
on fuse box X640 - Connection between the fuse holder
X268 - Pillar harness connection on fuse box board and the pillar harness
X324 - Fuse box +12 V APC connector X641 - Connection between the fuse holder
(battery isolator) board and the cab interior lighting harness
X331 - Pillar harness connection on fuse box X642 - Connection between the fuse holder
X347 - Cab transmission harness connection board and the instrument panel harness
on fuse box

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.3.3.1 Removing and refitting the fuse box

Removal
Procedure
Fig. 14
1. Disconnect the batteries.
2. Remove the cover (1) from the fuse box.
3. Remove the screws and then remove the pillar trim (2), the lower plate (3) and upper plate (4).
NOTE:
Mark and disconnect the various switches.
4. Remove the attachment screws (5) and nut (6) from the fuse board.
5. Mark the fuse board connectors and disconnect them.
6. Remove the fuse board.
Refitting
Procedure
1. Refitting is carried out in reverse order to the steps described above.

2. Check the whole tractor for correct operation.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.4 Fuse box on battery

10.4.1.1 Description of the secondary fuse box (depending on model)

Description of the secondary fuse box (depending on model)
Functions of the fuse box elements

F Fuse
SH Shunt (shunts are fuses)
K Relay
X Connector
Fuse power and size
Amperage Size Color

3 Small
5 Small
7.5 Small
10 Small
15 Small
15 Average
20 Average
25 Average
30 Average
50 Large
60 Large
Secondary fuse box

A second fuse box is located above the batteries.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Number Amperage Size Protected function

1 225 A Specific +BAT X241 - AGCO Power engine preheating
supply (Grid Heater)
2 175 A Specific +BAT X192 - B + alternator 1
3 200 A Specific Cab power supply + BAT
4 175 A Specific +BAT X193 - B + alternator 2
5 Specific BUSBAR +BAT or not used
6 - F104 25 A Average X185 - Engine controller +BAT
7 - F105 70 A Large K106 start relay power circuit

ACT0021460
10. Electricity

8 - F111 10 A Average EGR valve supply
9 - F112 10 A Average Turbocharger wastegate power supply
10 - F113 10 A Average NOx sensors power supply
11 - F114 3A Average X185 - Engine controller earth protection
12 - F115 25 A Average K107 relay power circuit
K106 Starter relay
K107 preheater relay
K108 X185 - Engine controller earth relay
K109 Power supply relay for engine sensors
Additional fuses
Fig. 18

X828 3A Specific X826 relay power circuit supplying the battery
isolator
1. + BAT = + 12 V batteries
10.4.2.1 Removing/refitting the secondary fuse box

Removal

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Procedure
Fig. 19
1. Remove the cover (1) from the battery box
2. Disconnect the battery
3. Remove the cover from the secondary fuse box (3).
NOTE:
Mark and disconnect the connectors.
4. Remove the fixing screws (2)
5. Remove the fuse board.
Refitting
Procedure
1. Refitting is carried out in reverse order to the steps described above.

2. Check the whole tractor for correct operation.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.5 Alternator
10.5.1 Alternator - Layout of components
Fig. 20
(1) Right-hand alternator (4) Fuse box
(2) Battery (5) 175 A fuse
(3) Battery/alternator harness
10.5.2.1 Alternator - test procedure
Alternator connections
Preliminary checks
Procedure
1. Check the alternator earth. Check that there is no paint between the alternator body and the chassis.
Also check that the alternator is properly tightened on its support.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
2. Carefully check the charging circuit and the electrical circuit. Check the condition of the cables, and
that the electrical connections and the alternator body acting as earth are correctly tightened.
3. Check the battery. The minimum open-circuit voltage of a battery must be approx. 12.5 V if it has not
been subjected to charging or discharging within the last 24 hours. If the voltage is weak at the
battery terminals, recharge the battery. If it is not possible to wait until the battery has recharged, use
another charged battery to perform the diagnostics procedure.
4. Check the drive. The alternator belt and the pulley must be in good condition, free from oil, grease
and paint. Check the tension of the drive belt for the alternator is correct. For engines with two belts
fitted with tensioners, the deflection must be less than 5 mm.
5. Switch on the ignition and check that the voltage between alternator terminal (D+) and the alternator
earth is between 12 and 12.5 V.
Check the alternator wiring
Procedure

2. Disconnect alternator terminals (B+) and (D+).
Electrically isolate the terminal (B+) from the chassis (earth).
3. Reconnect the battery. Switch on the ignition. Do not start the engine.
4. Check the voltage between terminal (B+) of the harness and the earth.
Check the voltage between terminal (D+) of the harness and the earth.
In both cases, the voltage must be equal to that of the battery. If this is not the case, check the
electrical harness.
5. Disconnect the battery to reconnect the alternator cables then reconnect the battery.
Check the load current and regulated voltage
Procedure
1. Ensure that all of the tractor electrical components are off and that the ignition is switched off.
2. Connect a voltmeter between terminal (B+) and the alternator body (earth).
3. Connect an ammeter clamp onto the cable connected to terminal (B+).
4. Start the engine and adjust the speed to between 1200 and 1500 rpm.
Check the results on the ammeter and the voltmeter:
• If the voltage exceeds 14.7 V: The alternator is faulty and the alternator regulator must be
replaced
• If the voltage is below 13.6 V: One of the alternator components is faulty
• If the amperage is close to 0 A: One of the alternator components is faulty
• If the voltage is between 13.6 V and 14.7 V: The alternator is functioning normally.
Check the maximum output of the alternator
Procedure
1. Establish a connection identical to that in procedure see chapter Check the load current and regulated
voltage, page 10-23 .
2. Gradually activate all the components that draw electricity (lights, fan etc.) and observe the load
current. The current at the alternator output on terminal (B+) should increase.
3. If the maximum alternator output is obtained before all the tractor electrical components are
activated, the alternator is not powerful enough.
Check that the connections at terminal (B+) of the alternator and at the battery terminals are not
overheating. In the event of overheating, check that the bolt connections are fixed in place and that
the harness crimping is correct. Adjust these if necessary.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Looking for a voltage drop in the insulated circuit
Procedure
1. Ensure that the ignition is switched off.

2. Connect a voltmeter between the positive battery terminal and terminal (B+).
4. Gradually activate all the components that draw electricity (lights, fan etc.).
5. Ensure that the voltage does not exceed 400 mV.
If the reading exceeds 400 mV, there is high resistance and therefore too great a drop in the
alternator external circuit.
Looking for a voltage drop in the earth circuit
Procedure
1. Ensure that the ignition is switched off.

2. Connect a voltmeter between the negative battery terminal and the alternator earth.
4. Ensure that the voltage does not exceed 200 mV.
If the result exceeds 200 mV, there is excessive resistance and therefore too great a drop in the
earth circuit.
If the nominal alternator output cannot be obtained and the result on the voltmeter is below 200 mV,
one of the alternator components is faulty. If the total voltage drop value is exceeded (600 mV),
check that the connections between the alternator and its support and the connections between the
support and engine are clean and sufficiently tightened. Check that there is no break in continuity
(including fuses) or break in the harness between the terminal (B+) of the alternator and the positive
battery terminal. Voltage drops may cause the indicator light on the instrument panel to light up
without the alternator presenting a fault.
10.5.3.1 Removing and refitting the drive belts

Specifications of the various belts
(1) Air conditioning compressor
(2) Crankshaft pulley
(3) Belt tensioner
(4-1)Left-hand alternator
(4-2)Right-hand alternator
(5) Air compressor belt
(6) Belt for the air conditioning compressor and
for the left-hand alternator
(7) Belt for the coolant pump and for the right-
hand alternator
(8) Air compressor
(9) Water pump pulley
(10) Idler pulleys
The belts (5) and (6) are elasticated and do not have a tensioner. The belt (7) is tensioned by the automatic
tensioner (3).

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Preliminary steps
Procedure
1. Lift the engine cover.

2. Remove the side protective grilles.
Removal of the air compressor belt (5) (if fitted)

NOTE:
If replacing the belt, move the coolant pump fan to one side. Disconnect the X190 - Vistronic connector.
Unscrew the Vistronic (tightening torque: 100 Nm) and then move it back against the radiators.
Procedure
Remove the belt (5) using a tool for removing elasticated belts.
Remove the belt for the coolant pump and the right-hand alternator (7)
NOTE:
If replacing the belt:
• Move the coolant pump fan to one side. Disconnect the X190 - Vistronic connector. Unscrew the
Vistronic (tightening torque: 100 Nm) and then move it back against the radiators.
• Move the front PTO shaft forward (if the tractor is fitted with one). Refer to the relevant chapter.
Procedure
1. Remove the belt (5) (if fitted).

2. Use a square imprint tool (1/2") to turn the tensioner (3) anti-clockwise in order to slacken the belt (7).
3. Remove the belt (7).
Remove the belt for the air conditioning and the left-hand alternator (6)
NOTE:
If replacing the belt, move the coolant pump fan to one side. Disconnect the X190 - Vistronic connector.
Unscrew the Vistronic (tightening torque: 100 Nm) and then move it back against the radiators.
Procedure
1. Remove the belt (5) (if fitted).

2. Remove the belt (7).
3. Remove the belt (6) using a tool for removing elasticated belts.
Refitting of the belts

NOTE:
The tension of the belts (5) and (6) is automatic and requires no adjustment.
Procedure
1. Reassemble the belts by repeating the disassembly steps in reverse order.

2. If the belts have been changed, refit the Vistronic (tightening torque: 100 Nm). Refit the connector
X190 - Vistronic.
3. Before starting the engine, check that the belts are correctly placed in the various pulleys.
10.5.3.2 Removing and refitting the alternators

Removal

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Procedure
1. Disconnect the batteries.
2. Remove the right-hand side protective grille
(1).
3. Release the belts (2) and (3) from the pulleys.
4. Mark and disconnect the electrical
connections of the alternator (4).
5. Remove the fixing screws of the alternator
(4).
6. Remove the alternator(s) as per assembly.
Fig. 22
Refitting
Procedure
Carry out the removal steps in reverse order.
10.5.4.1 General
10.5.4.2 Belt - Service tools

Reference ACP0066570
Description Gates tool for elasticated belt

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.6 Starter
10.6.1 General
10.6.1.1 General
The starter is a 12 V electric motor that starts the engine. It is connected to the positive terminal of the
battery by large diameter cables that can withstand a high current. The earth passes through the chassis
and the starter body.
The starter is fitted on the right-hand side of the engine (or on the left-hand side, depending on the model),
at the same level as the engine flywheel. At start-up, it drives the ring gear on the engine flywheel.

The starter is connected to two electrical circuits:
• the power circuit, connected directly to the battery
• the control circuit, connected to the start switch
The start switch (4) in the cab operates a relay and then the solenoid (2) via the starter terminal (5).
When the solenoid moves, the starter pinion engages with the engine flywheel ring gear (3) and the starter
terminals (6) and (7) are brought into contact in order to supply the starter power circuit see Fig. 23 .

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Fig. 23
(1) Starter (4) Start switch
(2) Solenoid (5) Solenoid supply
(3) Ring gear (6) Power supply

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
(7) Starter supply
10.6.2 Starter - Layout of components
Fig. 24
(1) Starter on the right-hand side of the engine (5) Battery circuit breaker.
(2) Starter relay above the battery/batteries (6) Battery
(depending on assembly) X327 - Battery earth (chassis)
(3) Fuse above the battery/batteries (depending X328 - Battery isolator earth terminal
on assembly) X341 - Starter supply
(4) Fuse box X342 - Positive battery terminal

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.6.3.1 Starter diagnostics
Fault Possible cause Check point

The solenoid is working Flat battery Check whether the battery is charged, then
recharge it or replace it if necessary
Disconnected cables or Check that the battery terminals and the earth and
battery terminals supply cables are connected properly
Faulty starter Remove the starter, check that it is working on a
workbench and replace it if necessary
The solenoid is not The solenoid is not Check the solenoid connection and supply
working supplied with power
The start relay is faulty Check the start relay connection and supply
Flat battery Check whether the battery is charged, then
recharge it or replace it if necessary
Disconnected cables or Check that the battery terminals and the earth and
battery terminals supply cables are connected properly
Faulty starter Remove the starter, check that it is working on a
workbench and replace it if necessary
10.6.4.1 Removing/refitting the starter

Removal
Procedure
1. Turn the wheels so that the starter can be accessed. Remove the front right-hand wheel if necessary.
3. Remove the protective guard (1).
Fig. 25

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
4. Remove the starter solenoid protective

cover.
5. Disconnect the supply cable (1), the solenoid
connector (2) and the earth cable.
6. Remove the mounting nuts (3) and remove
the starter.
Fig. 26
Refitting
Procedure
1. Follow the removal steps above in reverse order to refit the starter.
2. Tighten the fixing bolts on the starter to a torque of 60 Nm.

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.7 Circuit breaker

10.7.1 General
10.7.1.1 Battery isolator

A device isolates the battery/batteries (depending on assembly) from all the other electrical equipment on
the tractor.
This isolator is programmed for automatic cut-off after a delay of 60 minutes after switching off the
ignition. Therefore, the operator does not have to activate the device; this system is self-managed in terms
of activation and cut-off, depending on the position of the ignition key.
The isolator timer control can vary according to the tractor configuration.
The temporary control conditions for the closed isolator are as follows:
1. the time required to drain the DEF or AdBlue™™ system
2. the Datatronic CCD standby time
3. power supply maintained on an ISOBUS or Auto-GuideAuto-Guide™ implement
Whatever the status of the above conditions, the isolator will always open after a maximum period of 60
minutes after the ignition key has been set to the OFF position.
The permanent control condition for the closed isolator is as follows:
1. Activation of the hazard warning lights
NOTE:
The battery isolator will open once the hazard warning lights have been deactivated.
IMPORTANT:
In the event of electrical faults on the tractor or the implement, emergency cut-off of the isolator is
possible via a switch located under the controllers housing cover plate in the cab, but only if the ignition
key is in the OFF position. The DEF or AdBlue™™ system is drained even after pressing the switch for the
emergency cut-off of the battery isolator.
1. Open the cover (A) on the cab floor (right-hand
side).
Fig. 27

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
1. Press the switch (B) to execute an emergency

cut-off of the battery isolator.
Fig. 28

X328 - Battery isolator earth terminal
X329 - Battery isolator earth terminal
X338 - Earth (battery isolator)
The battery isolator functions as a relay that opens
the connection between the negative terminal of
the batteries and the tractor chassis.
Fig. 29

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
The accessory position (2) of the ignition switch is

used to "wake up" (close) the battery isolator when
the tractor is started.
Fig. 30
The engine controller is used to keep the battery
isolator closed during the time it takes to drain the
urea system (X185 - Engine controller , pin 27),
and the time requested by the Dash Control
Center in order to control the standby of the
Datatronic CCD and maintain the (ISOBUS) power
supply.
Fig. 31
Lighting module (warning) information.
Fig. 32

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Fig. 33
(1) Battery circuit breaker. X336 - Battery isolator
(2) Emergency stop switch X338 - Earth (battery isolator)
(3) Battery X340 - + terminal on battery for fuse box
(4) Cab earth X646 - Battery isolator switch
(5) Engine earth X647 - Battery isolator harness/cab interior
(6) Battery earth transmission harness connection
X129 - Fuse box +12 V battery connection X711 - Emergency stop switch relay
X324 - Fuse box +12 V APC connector X826 - Relay for battery isolator supply
(battery isolator) (F10) Battery isolator protection fuse

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10.8 Triflash triangle

10.8.1.1 Triflash on standard roof

Connector location
The X818 - Triflash connection (1) connector is
located on the left-hand part of the roof under the
rotary beacon
Fig. 34
Assembly
Procedure
1. Remove the four screws (1) of the support
2. Drill the support in the chosen location and fit
the triflash triangle
3. Fit the four screws (1) of the support and
tighten them to a torque between 10 Nm
and 14 Nm
Fig. 35

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
4. Remove the lower left-hand section of the

roof to access the X818 - Triflash connection
connector
5. Remove the four screws (3)
Fig. 36
6. Drill a 21-mm hole in the vertical face of the
location shown in (1)
7. Fit a grommet (2) 3783677M1 to ensure
sealing.
8. Then route the triflash triangle harness
through this hole
Fig. 37
9. Fit the adhesive clips (1) 1677803M1 onto
the upper section to secure the harness as
well as to enable access to the filter
Fig. 38

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
10. Connect the power supply wires and the

earth to the connector. This is a Tyco Faston
250 Black male connector
11. Connect the power supply wire at (1) and the
earth wire at (2)
Fig. 39
(A) View from the front

(B) View from the back
12. Connect the triflash triangle connector above
onto the X818 - Triflash connection (3)
connector located under the rotary beacon in
the left-hand section of the roof
Fig. 40

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
13. Refit the lower left-hand section of the roof

14. Tighten the four screws (3) to a torque of
4.8 Nm
Fig. 41
10.8.1.2 Triflash on high-visibility roof

Connector location
Lift the rear roof hatch (1) to access the connector.
The X818 - Triflash connection (2) connector is
located on the rear right-hand side of the roof.
Fig. 42
Assembly

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
Procedure
1. Remove the two screws (1) of the bar
2. Drill the bar (2) in the chosen location and fit
the triflash triangle
3. Screw the two screws (1) of the bar onto the
right-hand and left-hand supports and tighten
them to a torque of between 25 Nm and 35
Nm
Fig. 43
4. Lift the rear roof hatch (1)
5. Route the power supply wire (2) correctly
under the hatch in the position indicated in
the photo
6. Smear with sealing paste to ensure a good
seal
Fig. 44

ACT0021460
10. Electricity
7. Connect the power supply wires and the

earth to the connector. This is a Tyco Faston
250 Black male connector
• (A) View from the front
• (B) View from the back
8. Connect the power supply wire at (1) and the
earth wire at (2)
Fig. 45
9. Connect the connector above with the X818
- Triflash connection (3) connector
Fig. 46

ACT0021460
10. Electricity

ACT0021460
Table of contents
11. Electronics
11.1 Diagnostic tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11.1.1 Diagnostic tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.2 Telemetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.1.3 Schematic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.2.2 Telemetry error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.2.4 Programming and setting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.2.5.1 Access to the AGCOMMAND aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.2.5.2 Disassembling the AM50 AGCOMMAND unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

ACT0021460
Table of contents

ACT0021460
11. Electronics
11.1 Diagnostic tool

11.1.1 Diagnostic tool
Use the Electronic Diagnostic Tool (EDT) to
configure, program and diagnose the tractor.
Fig. 1

ACT0021460
11. Electronics
11.2 Telemetry
11.2.1 General
11.2.1.1 General
Definition
The telemetry system designed and developed by Massey Ferguson is called AgCommand™.
The principle of the AgCommand™ system allows:
• automatic measurement of machine data,
• automatic and remote transmission of machine data,
• storage of machine data on a Massey Ferguson server,
• customer access to data related to the customer's machine(s),
• users to increase machine operating efficiency,
• users to increase their margin by managing vehicle performance.
Advantages
This system enables end users to:
• check the vehicle fleet (current machine locations, machine statuses, current and past activity, alarms
and service intervals),
• access machine data almost in real time,
• configure alarms to send them to a mobile phone or an email account,
• automatically record machine data without any intervention by the driver,
• automatically transfer machine data without any intervention by the driver,
• generate activity reports at any time.
Equipment and options

AgCommand™ Complete
The AgCommand™ Complete option includes the
AgCommand™ wiring harness, the AgCommand™
AM50 unit and the AgCommand™ GPS/GSM/
GPRS aerial.
Fig. 2

The tractor's GPS position and various sensor values are read on the tractor's CAN network. All of this data
is stored by the AM50 unit and sent via the GSM network.
During normal operation, the system stores a set of values every 60 seconds. This data is then sent to the
Massey Ferguson server every 15 minutes.
If the tractor is being used in an area with a weak GSM signal, the AM50 unit has an internal memory that
can store up to 50 hours of data.
ACT0021460
11. Electronics
The various sensor values are read and stored directly from the tractor's CAN networks.
The stored CAN messages are:
• engine status (ON or OFF);
• tractor status (in working position or not);
• forward speed;
• number of hours;
• distance covered (necessary for changing status).
The tractor's GPS position is also affected by these various values.
All of this information is used to define the tractor's status and is sent to the Massey Ferguson server.
NOTE:
This operating mode is valid for the "Standard plus" version.
Fig. 3
(1) Vehicle position determined by the GPS (4) The data can be accessed via a secure
receiver Internet connection, anywhere and at any
(2) Information received from the tractor's CAN time. The customer can also make this
network and the GPS aerial access available to his dealer in order to
(3) Database transferred to the Massey schedule services and maintenance for the
Ferguson central server via the GSM machine.
network
ACT0021460
11. Electronics
(5) Contractors can share specific information on

their customers' crops.
Fig. 4
(A) Engine running, working position "ON" and detected. Headland mode will only be
forward speed detected displayed for a distance of 100 m.
(B) Engine running, working position "OFF" and (D) After headland mode, with the engine
forward speed detected running, working position "OFF" and forward
(C) Engine running, working status switching speed detected for a distance greater than
from "ON" to "OFF" and forward speed 100 m.
(E) Engine running and no forward speed
detected.
Working position "ON" is activated when the following conditions are met:
• No forward speed detected (less than 1 kph) and the power take-off is "ON" for more than 10 seconds
• Forward speed detected (greater than 1 kph) and either the power take-off is "ON" or the linkage is
switched to the lowering position.
• Relative to the trigger set in the Datatronic CCD memory
Working status can be switched from "ON" to "OFF" in the following conditions:
• No forward speed (less than 1 kph) and the power take-off is switched off for 10 seconds
• Forward speed detected (greater than 1 kph) and the power take-off is switched off or linkage lifting is
activated.
11.2.2 Telemetry error codes

The telemetry function can be diagnosed in two different ways:
• On the AM50 unit, by reading the status of the diodes
• with the Electronic Diagnostic Tool (EDT).

ACT0021460
11. Electronics
Reading the status of the diodes on the AM50 unit

The AM50 unit can be diagnosed using the diodes
located on the unit. For this purpose, the right-
hand side panel must be removed and the
following coding must be used.
Fig. 5
Status Diode A (red) Diode B (red) Diode C (red) Diode D (green)
OFF No response from Engine off and No GPS signal System "OFF"
the modem working position
"OFF"
Flashing Searching for Working position Establishing the Remote loading of

network "ON" GPS position new software.
ON Connected to Engine running GPS position System "ON"

network established
Diagnostics with EDT

The telemetry function can also be diagnosed with
EDT.
The diagnostics screen (1) provides the following
information:
• aerial detection;
• number of satellites visible;
• signal strength;
• GPRS status;
• GSM status;
• network provider used;
• machine status;
• time between two changes in tractor status;
• distance covered in the current tractor status;
• status of the diodes on the AM50 unit. Fig. 6
NOTE:
For more information on the various tabs, use the
online help section (2).

ACT0021460
11. Electronics

(1) Telemetry aerial
The aerial is located in the roof.
Fig. 7
(2) AM50 unit
The unit is fixed underneath the trim behind the
operator's seat.
Fig. 8
11.2.4 Programming and setting parameters
General
It is not possible to program the AM50 unit directly using a diagnostic tool. If necessary, the program can
be updated automatically via the GSM network.
Update options
There are two ways to implement updates:
• updating the unit configuration (the customer has bought a new option, for example) (software loading
time: 30 secs;
• a new software version becomes available (software loading time: 3 mins).
NOTE:
The time values given for loading software can vary depending on the software.
Automatic updates
Every time the tractor is started up, the AM50 unit compares the software version available on the
AgCommand™ server with the version installed on the machine. If the two versions are different, the new
version is automatically downloaded. If the signal is lost or there is an error during the update attempt, the
system will continue to operate with the old software version until the next time the tractor is started up.
IMPORTANT:
The AM50 unit does not record any tractor data while the software download or update is taking place.
ACT0021460
11. Electronics
11.2.5.1 Access to the AGCOMMAND aerial
Procedure
1. Remove the Auto-Guide™ aerial from the
support (1), if fitted.
2. Remove the roof hatch (2).
Fig. 9
3. The aerial (3) is located at the front left.
Fig. 10
4. Remove theAgCommand™aerial (3) from its

support (4).
NOTE:
The aerial is fixed with a magnetic stand.
NOTE:
When removing the aerial harness, it is
necessary to remove all the right-hand side
cab trim, the right-hand pillar trim and the
trim behind the operator's seat.
Fig. 11

ACT0021460
11. Electronics
11.2.5.2 Disassembling the AM50 AGCOMMAND unit
Procedure
1. Remove the passenger seat backrest (1).
2. Remove the trim from the hand brake lever
(2).
Fig. 12
3. Remove the left-hand pillar (3).
Fig. 13
4. Unscrew the screw (5) then remove the

storage tray assembly (4).
Fig. 14

ACT0021460
11. Electronics
5. Disconnect the connectors (6) from

theAgCommand™unit.
• GSM signal
• GPS signal
• Connector (X594)
6. Unscrew the attachment screws (7) and
remove the unit (8).
Fig. 15

ACT0021460
11. Electronics

ACT0021460
Table of contents
12. Cab
12.1 Standard air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

12.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.1.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.1.1.3 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.1.1.4 Schematic diagram of the air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12.1.1.5 Air conditioning hydraulics diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.1.2.1 Diagram of the air conditioning compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.1.2.2 Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.1.3.1 Air conditioning tests - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
12.1.3.2 Air conditioning tests - Air conditioning unit breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.1.3.3 Air conditioning tests - Cleaning the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.1.4.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.1.4.2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.1.4.3 Adjusting the clutch air gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.1.4.4 Draining the system and checking for leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12.1.4.5 Filling the unit (engine stopped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
12.1.4.6 Checking pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.1.5.1 Removing and refitting the roof trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.1.5.3 Air conditioning - Replacing the dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12.1.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
12.1.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
12.2 Self-regulating air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.2.1.2 Using the air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.2.1.3 Fan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.2.1.4 Activating the compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.2.1.5 Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.2.1.6 Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.2.1.7 Special conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12.2.2.1 Diagram of the air conditioning compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
12.2.2.3 Self-regulating air conditioning - Layout of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
12.2.3.1 Air conditioning tests - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
12.2.3.2 Air conditioning tests - Air conditioning unit breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
12.2.3.3 Air conditioning tests - Cleaning the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38
12.2.4.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38
12.2.4.2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
12.2.4.3 Adjusting the clutch air gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40
12.2.4.4 Draining the system and checking for leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41
12.2.4.5 Filling the unit (engine stopped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42
ACT0021460
Table of contents
12.2.4.6 Checking pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43

12.2.5.1 Removing and refitting the roof trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45
12.2.5.3 Air conditioning - Replacing the dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48
12.2.6 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50
12.2.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50
12.3 Cab suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52
12.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52
12.3.2.2 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55
12.3.3.1 Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56

ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.1 Standard air conditioning

12.1.1 General
12.1.1.1 General
Standard air conditioning provides a source of air with an adjustable temperature in the cab. The user can
adjust the temperature and flow of air pumped into the cab. Depending on weather conditions, the
operator can choose to cool or heat the cab manually. An electronic thermostat controls the compressor
electromagnetic clutch, with a temperature sensor on the evaporator. The heating is adjusted by a valve
which controls the flow of water from the engine to the radiator. The heating and the temperature at the
evaporator can be adjusted separately. The compressor can be activated in cold weather to defrost and
dehumidify the cab.
The temperature in the cab can be controlled but variations in outside conditions (sun/shadow etc.) can
change the cab temperature, in which case it is necessary to adjust the controls.
Ventilation is also a significant factor. The cab temperature depends on the flow of air blown by the fan.
The greater the flow rate, the faster the change in temperature.
Air recycling also plays a part in the temperature control and defrosting. It allows conditioned air to be
used; this is drier and closer in temperature to the required air temperature.
Air conditioning control

(1) fan control (main fan and side fan)
(2) cold control (compressor)
(3) heat control
Fig. 1
Temperature controls
Electronic thermostat:
It controls the compressor electromagnetic clutch according to the cooling required at the evaporator. A
temperature sensor informs the electronic thermostat of the temperature at the evaporator. The
thermostat is adjusted by a potentiometer (2) on the air conditioning control panel. The compressor is
activated depending on the sensor reading and thermostat adjustment.
Electromagnetic clutch:
It transmits the engagement of the air conditioning compressor. The electronic thermostat controls its level
of engagement by a relay.
A 50 Amp fuse protects the air conditioning system. A high/low pressure switch disengages the
compressor clutch if the pressure drops or rises unexpectedly in the high-pressure part of the refrigeration
system.
The compressor cannot be engaged if no fan speed has been selected to ensure heat exchange at the
evaporator.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Heating valve:
It adjusts the flow rate of hot water in the radiator. It is controlled by the user from the control panel in the
cab via a rotary knob (3). The valve and compressor are controlled separately. For this reason, with the
heating switched on, it is possible to activate the compressor to dehumidify the air.
This knob is used to select either heating or the entry of air at outside temperature.
Ventilation control
Fan:
The fan is controlled by turning the fan control knob (1). There are four different fan speeds. The cab is
fitted with five adjustable air vents and four air outlets to defrost the windows.
Air recycling:
Air recycling is controlled manually from the cab. A grille with a handle fitted to the top left-hand side in the
cab is used to select outside or inside (recycled) air.
The air recycling system should not be used for long periods. After 25 minutes, it is advised to stop it and
renew the cab air to ensure the air in the cab is clean.
Air recycling has several advantages:
• it prevents air from entering from outside, for example to prevent unpleasant smells from entering
• it saves energy cooling the cab. The air conditioning system is more efficient if the air source is cold.
When the outside air temperature is very high, it is recommended to use the recycling system as it
uses the cooler air in the cab, which avoids cooling the hot air outside the cab. In this way the
compressor workload is reduced.
12.1.1.3 Technical specifications
Compressor
Brand SANDEN
Type SD-7H15
Cubic capacity 154.9 cm³/rev.
Number of cylinders 7
Oil capacity 190 cm³
Weight 7.5 kg
Electromagnetic clutch
Voltage 12 V
Current 3.6 - 4.2 A
Tightening torques
Clutch clip nut 30 Nm
Cylinder head screw 34 Nm
Filler plug with "O" ring 15 Nm

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Air conditioning
Refrigerant type R134a
Capacity 1400 g
Operating pressure and temperature
Ambient temperature 30–40°C at sea level
Low pressure side 0.3–0.65 bar
High pressure side 12–18.5 bar
High / low pressure safety pressure switch
Low pressure limit 2 bar
High pressure limit 27 bar
Compressor
The compressor, its clutch and pulley form a removable assembly.
The compressor compresses the low-pressure R134a refrigerant gas to high pressure and allows the
refrigerant to flow in the system.
Electromagnetic clutch
Allows engagement and disengagement of the compressor depending on system requirements.
The coupling comprises two main parts: the stationary induction coil (continuous induction field) and the
rotor.
The induction coil is fitted directly onto the compressor. The grooved pulley is fitted to the tapered end of
the crankshaft.
The current transmitted to the coil creates a magnetic field, and the disk is magnetically pulled against the
pulley. The compressor starts running. When the current is stopped, the rotor is demagnetised and the
mechanical coupling is broken.
When changing one of the following parts: evaporator, condenser, dryer, compressor or regulator, drain the
system, taking the precautions stated in the filling and maintenance section.
Condenser
The condenser receives high pressure, high temperature refrigerant gas from the compressor and changes
it into high pressure pre-cooled liquid. It is designed to withstand variations in temperature between the
hot refrigerant in gas form and the cold air outside. As the refrigerant cools, the gas turns to liquid. This
cooling is achieved by exposing it to a cold air flow (vehicle speed, motor fan). The refrigerant temperature
in the condenser varies from 49 to 77°C for pressures of 10.5 to 21 bar.
If it is necessary to replace the condenser, avoid damaging the cooling fins in order to ensure maximum
operating efficiency.
Dryer
The dryer is an important element of the air conditioning system. It receives liquid refrigerant from the
condenser and extracts humidity and "particles" that could otherwise enter the system.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
The container is a temporary refrigerant storage tank, depending on demand from the regulator.
Regulator
The regulator is located at the evaporator inlet. It controls the amount of refrigerant that can enter the
evaporator and expands it. It automatically regulates refrigerant flow depending on the amount of heat in
the evaporator.
It reacts depending on the temperature of its sensitive element and the liquid pressure.
To avoid the effects of an excessive pressure drop in the evaporator, the regulator is fitted with a pressure
compensation system with a bulb, which operates according to the gas temperature at the evaporator
outlet. This bulb is also connected to the valve diaphragm.
If the regulator is to be replaced:
• always lightly oil the unions using oil for refrigerant
• ensure correct operation of the needle valve prior to assembly by spraying liquid refrigerant on the bulb
and checking the needle valve movement
• ensure the regulator is properly connected
• handle the capillary tubes with care.
Evaporator
Located in front of the fan, the evaporator cools and dehumidifies the ambient air.
In the evaporator, the liquid is brought to a low pressure and a low temperature after passing through the
regulator. The liquid boils and starts to evaporate immediately. This process allows the absorption of heat
from the air sucked from the cab. Condensation starts to form on the evaporator from the humidity in the
air. This water is recovered in the bottom of the air conditioning unit and is discharged via two pipes
extending along the length of the cab.
Fan unit
An electric motor drives two turbines. The motor and these two turbines are fitted on a separate support
and are on the same axis. Air passes through the air filter, evaporator and radiator before being forced by
the turbines into the air ducts. The air is distributed around the cab via air ducts opening through adjustable
air circulation vents and demisters. The air also cools a chilled compartment if the tractor is fitted with one.
High / low pressure safety pressure switch

The safety pressure switch, located on the high pressure system, is fitted to the dryer and is connected to
the compressor's electromagnetic clutch control system. It protects the system by cutting the clutch
supply in case of an excessive pressure drop or increase in the high pressure system.
Engagement 2.1 bar
Cut-off 2 bar
27 bar
Pressure switch operating pressure
Service unions
Service unions with quick-connect male couplers are located on the high and low pressure pipes at the rear
of the compressor.
High and low pressure pipes

The high and low pressure hoses are made from nitrile with nylon core. To prevent damage to the air
conditioning hoses, a minimum bend radius must be respected when routing them.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Hose external diameter Min. bend radius
18 mm 86 mm
21 mm 105 mm
26 mm 130 mm
12.1.1.4 Schematic diagram of the air conditioning
Fig. 2
(A) Heat discharged outside (7) Blower
(B) Ambient air (8) Regulator
(C) Fresh air
Low pressure gaseous state
(1) Compressor
(2) Compressor clutch High pressure gaseous state
(3) Condenser
High pressure liquid state
(4) Fan unit
(5) Dehydrating filter Low pressure liquid state
(6) Evaporator
The compressor (1) sucks in refrigerant and compresses it. The pressure and the temperature of the
refrigerant increase. The refrigerant condenses in the lower temperature of the condenser coils (3). The air

ACT0021460
12. Cab
passing through the condenser absorbs the heat from the refrigerant. The dryer (5) filters impurities and
humidity from the refrigerant. The regulator (8) allows the pressure to drop. The refrigerant in the
evaporator (6) absorbs the heat from the air passing over the coils, and vaporizes. The air is cooled by this
process. The refrigerant is sucked in gas form by the compressor to restart the cycle.
In the system, the refrigerant exchanges heat with the air via the exchangers. The fluid releases its heat in
the condenser and absorbs heat from the cab air in the evaporator.
Changes in the state and pressure of the fluid allow heat exchanges to take place at the exchangers
(condenser and evaporator).
Referenc Locations in State of fluid Pressure Temperature Comments

e see the system
Fig. 2
(1) Compressor Gas Passes from Passes from Produces high

low to high low to high pressure, high
temperature gas
(1) (3) Compressor Gas high high -

outlet to
condenser inlet
(3) Condenser Gas + liquid high Passes from Outside air

high to medium temperature causes
the gas to condense
into a liquid, and the
heat is discharged out
of the cab. This
exchange is facilitated
by electric fans.
(3) (8) Condenser Liquid high medium Allows humidity to be

outlet drained from the
system and
Dryer
assessment of how
Regulator inlet full it is.
(8) Regulator Liquid + gas Passes from Passes from The fluid release leads
high to low medium to low to a drop in pressure
(> 20%)
and temperature,
causing some of the
liquid (> 20%) to
vaporize.
(8) (6) Regulator outlet Liquid + gas low low -

Evaporator inlet
(6) Evaporator Liquid + gas low low The liquid is vaporized

by absorbing the heat
contained in the cab
air. This “cold
generation”
phenomenon is
activated by the
blower mechanism.
(6) (1) Evaporator Gas low low -

outlet

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Referenc Locations in State of fluid Pressure Temperature Comments

e see the system
Fig. 2
Compressor
inlet

ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.1.1.5 Air conditioning hydraulics diagram
Fig. 3
(1) Compressor (4) High/low-pressure switch
(2) Condenser (5) Regulator
(3) Dryer (6) Evaporator

ACT0021460
12. Cab
(7) Low-pressure filling union (8) High-pressure filling union
12.1.2.1 Diagram of the air conditioning compressor
Fig. 4

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Fig. 5
(A) Standard air conditioning (2) Roof cover
(B) Self-regulating air conditioning (3) Fan
(1) Air conditioning unit (4) Heating valve

ACT0021460
12. Cab
(5) Regulator (10) Resistance

(6) Heater radiator (11) Temperature sensors
(7) Evaporator (12) Regulator
(8) Harness (13) Sender unit
(9) Thermostat
(14) Compressor
(15) Condenser
(16) Service union
((17))Service union
Fig. 6
12.1.3.1 Air conditioning tests - General

As a general rule, pressure values are linked to atmospheric conditions (pressure and temperature). For
ambient temperatures between 30 and 40°C at sea level, the pressures vary from 0.3 to 0.65 bar for low
pressure and from 12 to 18.5 bar for high pressure.
To locate failures, connect the manifold pressure gages to the service unions at the rear of the
compressor.
Leaks in the system cause: insufficient cooling, and high and low pressures that are too low. If it is not full
enough, bubbles appear continuously at the dryer tank sight glass, as well as the same symptoms as
stated above.
If the evaporator is blocked or the regulator is blocked or iced up, a vacuum forms in the low pressure area
and the high pressure is too low. If the system is overfilled, a regulator is stuck open or a condenser is
blocked, the low pressure is too high.
If a condenser is blocked or the system is overfilled, the high pressure becomes excessively high.
System overfill
In a correctly filled unit, the R134a vapors delivered through the compressor loses the superheat absorbed
in the compressor at the first condenser coil, then condenses into liquid form in the subsequent coils.
Before being directed into the dryer, this liquid is stored in the last condenser coil. If the system is
overfilled, the liquid level rises in the condenser. There are therefore fewer coils active in the condensation
process. The temperature and pressure increase, and may cause the pipes to burst in certain cases:
1. During operation:
• overfilling
• worn pipes
• pipes worn by friction
• pipes cut by plate edges
• bend radii too small
• exposure to the battery (acid)

ACT0021460
12. Cab
2. When stopped:
Same reasons as during operation, in addition to the following:
• engine compartment ventilation shut-off
• residual engine heat after switch-off
If a pipe is strained to its limit, the temperature increase at switch-off raises the pipe temperature and its
internal pressure.
The heat also decreases the strength of the pipe and all factors combine to burst the pipe.
This is more likely to occur in units overfilled with R134a and when pipes are worn or wrongly positioned
(close to a hot area).
12.1.3.2 Air conditioning tests - Air conditioning unit breakdown
Preliminary checks
The most commonly occurring air conditioning system failure is the lack of cold air. It is therefore
necessary to carry out a number of checks to identify the failure.
• Check that the scheduled maintenance has been carried out: belt tension, cleanliness of various parts
(cab air filter, condenser, evaporator, etc.), damage to parts.
• Check electrical supplies, fuses, condition of connections and supply wires.
• Examine all channels and unions and look for possible build-up of dirt, oil or traces of dampness, which
could indicate a leak.
• Supply the compressor clutch directly from the battery and record the pressure values on the pressure
gages, and check the evaporator is cold. If the system pressures are normal and there is cold in the
evaporator, the failure is electrical. On the other hand, incorrect pressure and lack of cold suggest the
failure is gas-related or gas-related and electrical.
High pressure too high

• Coolant overfill: System must be bled. Avoid excessive bleeding of the system.
• Air in the system, despite correct low pressure level: Bleed system then refill.
• Spaces between condenser fins blocked by insects: Clean condenser.
• Refrigerant remains in liquid form in the suction pipe at the evaporator outlet. This is indicated by damp
or ice on the pipe or on the suction valve of the compressor. Check that the regulator bulb is correctly
fitted on the suction pipe.
• Plug left inside pipe during assembly, indicated by temperature difference upstream and downstream of
plug.
• High pressure very high, low pressure normal, air bubbles at dryer and icing in dryer tank, flow
restricted at dryer inlet which acts as regulator.
High pressure too low

• Incorrect filling: Insufficient refrigerant indicated by presence of air bubbles in dryer.
• Compressor cylinder head gasket split or leaks at valves.
Low pressure too low and insufficient cooling

• Pipe or dryer restricted. This symptom is indicated by a temperature difference upstream and
downstream of the restriction or by cooling of the dryer tank during operation of the unit.
• Insufficient filling indicated by the regulator sensor. Hold the end of the thermostatic bulb in order to
warm it. The suction pressure should rise quickly to at least 1.45 bar when the engine is running at idle
speed. If not, replace the thermostatic regulator.
• The capillary tube of the regulator is broken or leaking: regulator stays closed, making the unit operate
at very low pressure.
• Ice forms in the regulator or in the nozzle. The regulator or nozzle can ice up even if the pipes do not.
ACT0021460
12. Cab
• Regulator is blocked. Presence of corrosion products. When the end of the thermostatic bulb is heated,
the low pressure value does not change. The regulator can open after a period of deactivation and
blocks after a period of operation.
• Check that the air inlet port of the evaporator is not blocked.
• There is insufficient refrigerant. Check for air bubbles in the sight glass when the unit is operating, with
the fans turning.
Low pressure too high

• Compressor belt loose.
• Regulator thermostatic bulb fitted incorrectly.
• Regulator needle valve stuck in open position. Excess refrigerant flow into the coil, causing the suction
pipe to cool or ice up.
• Compressor inlet valve filter blocked.
• Leak at compressor suction and delivery valves.
• If high pressure is low, low pressure is high, and the fill level is correct, leak at compressor cylinder
head or faulty valves.
Insufficient cooling
• Incorrect compressor operation
• Incorrect regulator operation
• High and low pressure too low, a vacuum forms with correct fill level, temperature too low at
evaporator outlet, causing regulator to close, poor synchronization between thermostat cycle and
opening of regulator.
Noisy regulator (steady whistling sound)

• Insufficient refrigerant indicated by bubbles in the sight glass.
Irregular compressor operation (irregular cycle)

• Check the belt tension.
• Check the clutch clearance (air gap).
• Check voltage and current of the clutch coil.
• Check the compressor itself.
Unusual noise from compressor

1. In clutched position:
• Check compressor assembly.
• Check clutch and absence of slip.
• Check R134a refrigerant level.
• Check bearings in clutch and compressor.
• Check quantity of cooling oil.
• Check compressor suction and delivery valves.
2. In declutched position:
• Check clutch air gap.
12.1.3.3 Air conditioning tests - Cleaning the system

The air conditioning system must always stay clean to ensure optimal operation.
Cab air filter

The cab air filter should be cleaned every 100 hours of operation and replaced every 1,000 hours of
operation. If working in dusty conditions, cleaning should take place at shorter intervals. Take care to keep

ACT0021460
12. Cab
the filter in good condition, because dust gathers on the evaporator where it comes into contact with
humidity; this then must be removed for cleaning, requiring the system to be drained.
Condenser
The condenser should be cleaned on a daily basis if the tractor is working in very dusty conditions. The
condenser is normally located in front of the engine cooling radiator and should be cleaned with a jet of
compressed air. Special care should be taken with the condenser fins. They ensure correct operation of the
air conditioning system.

It is very important to work in a clean environment to prevent dirty particles from entering the system.
Carefully clean the unions, then lightly oil with compressor oil before connecting them.
Do not use compressed air to clean the pipes, for example, to drive out particles that may have entered:
only use refrigerant in this case.
Only remove the pipe protectors at the last minute. Cut hose pipes with a knife; never with a saw.
Carefully block pipes when they are in storage.
The oil in the air conditioning system is a cooling oil. This oil is miscible with the refrigerant.
Precautions
The air conditioning system can be dangerous. It can be compared with a pressurized steam boiler. If a
pipe bursts, the refrigerant evaporates or boils very quickly.
It can be very dangerous after expansion. An air conditioning engineer must always take precautions when
working to prevent unstoppable refrigerant leaks. R134a refrigerant is non-combustible, non-toxic (except
upon contact with fire) and non-corrosive (except upon contact with water).
Take great care when handling R134a. Direct contact can freeze the skin or eyes.
On contact with fire or at high temperatures, it decomposes into phosgene gas, which is highly
toxic.
Never handle refrigerant without wearing protective goggles and gloves.
Never try to drain the system by loosening a union. Slow, safe draining is only possible using draining /
filling apparatus designed for R134a refrigerant. Do not drain the system in the same room as a naked
flame. The same precautions must be taken for leak detection.
When it is necessary to retighten a union, use two wrenches to avoid bending the pipe, which can cause
leaks.
Never weld or steam-clean near a system containing refrigerant. This can cause excessive pressure and
leakage.
Do not store R134a refrigerant in direct sunlight, near a heat source or in a damp place. Always replace the
bottle protection plugs when it is not being used. Also avoid impacts. Do not transport the bottle in the
passenger compartment of a vehicle.
In case of spillage of R134a

If R134 comes into contact with your eyes, wash with cold water and seek medical advice immediately.
NOTE: Freezing (frostbite) caused by liquid refrigerant can be treated by gradually warming the affected
area with cold water, and then applying cold cream. Seek medical advice immediately.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Recommendation
All operations described in this section must be carried out using servicing and repair equipment (draining/
filling station, refrigerant recovery station, leak detector etc.) specifically designed for R134a refrigerant.
12.1.4.2 General maintenance

IMPORTANT: Before switching on the air conditioning system, ensure that the windows and doors are
properly closed. The cab interior must be kept as clean as possible. If for any reason the cab cannot be
kept completely sealed, the air recycling system must be switched off. Failure to respect this advice can
cause evaporator blockage, stopping the air conditioning system and risking damage to the compressor.
For correct operation of the system, the cab air filter, condenser, fan turbines and evaporator must be
checked periodically. Any blockage causes an increase in the high and low pressures, reducing the
effectiveness of the cooling. The tension and alignment of the drive belt must be checked.
Starting at the evaporator, check the condition of the condensation water drain pipes. Any water build-up
can cause icing in the evaporator, preventing refrigerant flow or reducing performance.
To keep the whole system in good condition, it is recommended to operate the unit for several minutes
every week to lubricate all the seals, because the oil in the compressor is miscible with the refrigerant.
Preventive maintenance
Carry out the checks and services as described in the preceding paragraphs.
Visually check the evaporator, pipes, condenser, dryer, compressor, unions, belt and condensation water
flow in the evaporator.
Carry out an internal check with the low-pressure gage (blue) and high-pressure gage (red), with the engine
running at 1500 rpm, adjusted to the maximum cold setting and the fan at high speed.
Check component temperature.
Regulator outlet (evaporator side), evaporator, low pressure pipes and “inlet valve” on the compressor
should be cold to the touch.
Regulator inlet, condenser, high pressure pipes, “delivery valve" and compressor should be hot to the
touch.
The dryer and oil must be replaced at least every 1500 hours of operation or every three years, or
whenever it is necessary to refill the system.
If the system is too full (more than 2 kg of R134a refrigerant), there is a risk of blockage in the regulator
and dryer.
With air conditioning switched on, if the high and low pressure systems are equal, the compressor is
faulty.
If there is water in the system, there is a risk of blockage in the regulator (needle valve) if a water droplet
freezes: decrease in low and high pressure.
12.1.4.3 Adjusting the clutch air gap

NOTE:
The air gap is determined by the thickness shims. When refitting the clutch assembly, first fit with the
original shims.
When fitting a new clutch on a compressor, use the following shims: 1.02 mm - 0.05 mm - 0.12 mm.
Tighten the nut to a torque of 30 Nm.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Procedure
1. Check the air gap using a set of shims to
obtain a clearance of 0.4–0.8 mm.
2. If the air gap is not uniform around the whole
periphery, gently lift and strike the places
where the gap is biggest.
Fig. 7
Filling the oil

IMPORTANT:
It is essential to use only Polyalkylene-Glycol (PAG) synthetic oil to fill or top up the compressor.
• Recommended oil: PAG SANDEN SP20
• Compressor capacity: 190 cm³
In case of a system problem and each time a part (pipe, dryer, condenser) must be replaced, it is advisable
to drain the compressor oil and replace it with the recommended quantity of clean oil rather than topping
up the existing level.
Procedure
1. Drain the R134a refrigerant.

2. Remove the plug.
3. Fill or top up the oil level.
4. Refit the plug on the port. Check the condition and correct position of the "O" ring in its seat.
5. Tighten the plug to a torque of 15 Nm. In case of leakage, do not force the plug; remove it and fit a
new "O" ring.
6. Refill the unit with R134a refrigerant.
7. Check the air conditioning system for correct operation.
12.1.4.4 Draining the system and checking for leaks

Drafting the system and detecting leaks

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Procedure
1. Connect the pipes to the air conditioning
system. The red connection is for high
pressure and the blue connection is for low
pressure.
2. Open the high- and low-pressure valves.
3. Start the system's drafting cycle and check
for leaks.
4. If necessary, work on the system. The
system is now clean and can be filled with
coolant.
Fig. 8

ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.1.4.5 Filling the unit (engine stopped)
Procedure
1. Draft the system.
2. Measure the amount of oil recovered and
add a similar amount of new oil.
3. Display the required amount of refrigerant on
the device screen.
4. Start the filling cycle.
5. Start the engine, then switch on the air
conditioning system.
Fig. 9
Checking for leaks and checking the pressures during operation
Procedure
1. Inspect the air conditioning system with a
testing device to detect any refrigerant leaks.
Fig. 10

ACT0021460
12. Cab
2. Set a temperature value in the cab and check

it with a thermometer at the air vent outlet.
3. Close the low- and high-pressure valves of
the device in order to check the air
conditioning system with the pressure gages
of the device.
4. Check the variation range of the high
pressure and low pressure on the charging
device when the required temperature is
reached inside the cab (blue range for low
pressure and red range for high pressure).
5. The air conditioning system is operational
when the high- and low-pressure gages
Fig. 11
indicate the correct values.
6. Stop the engine and then disconnect the
unions of the device from the air conditioning
system.
7. Refit the plugs to the pressure connectors of
the system.
8. Bleed the pipes by starting the bleed cycle
on the device.
Oil adding method
Service required on system Quantity of oil to add
Draining the system Measure the amount of oil recovered and add a
similar amount of new oil
Burst pipe or other major leaks + 100 ml
Replacing a condenser + 30 ml
Replacing an evaporator + 30 ml
Replacing the dryer tank + 15 ml
Replacing a pipe + 10 ml
Oil is added by being sucked into the air conditioning system from the charging device (except for the
100 ml charge to be carried out preferably directly into the compressor).
Oil use precautions:
• Because oils are hygroscopic, it is recommended to store them in plastic containers that can be
compressed after each use in order to prevent damp air mixing with the oil inside.
• Do not mix different brands or types of oil.
WARNING:
PAG oil is an irritant and detergent. Gloves should be worn. In case of contact with skin,
wash hands thoroughly with soap and water to prevent irritation.
12.1.4.6 Checking pressures

General
When the air conditioning is switched off, the pressures are balanced and the low and high pressure values
are between 4 bar and 5 bar in a correctly charged system. However, these values vary depending on the
outside temperature.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
When the air conditioning is in operation, the low pressure is between 0.3 bar and 0.65 bar and the high
pressure is between 12 bar and 18.5 bar.
All these values can change according to the outside temperature.
After filling, the air conditioning should be checked for correct operation.
Parameters required to • Maximum cooling and fan speed

perform check • Engine speed at 1800-2000 rpm
Procedure
Procedure
1. Connect the pressure gages to the
compressor see Fig. 12 .
2. Run the engine, set the ventilation at
maximum and the air conditioning at
maximum cold.
3. After a short period of operation, the high-
pressure pipe should be hot and the low-
pressure pipe should be cold. There should
be no bubbles at the dryer tank.
4. Check the compressor cycles. The
compressor operating time must be
approximately equal to the stoppage time
once the cab temperature is balanced.
Fig. 12

ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.1.5.1 Removing and refitting the roof trim

Removal
2. Remove the screws (1) at the front. Remove
the front panel (5). Disconnect the work
lights and the windscreen washer pipe.
3. Remove the screws (2) at the rear. Remove
the rear panel (6). Disconnect the work lights
and the windscreen washer pipe.
4. Remove the screws (4). Remove the side
panels (7) and (8).
Fig. 13

ACT0021460
12. Cab
5. Remove the rotary beacon(s) (9) and

disconnect the power supply cable.
6. Remove the screws (11) and the support(s)
(10).
Fig. 14

ACT0021460
12. Cab
7. Remove and disconnect the number plate

lighting (12).
8. Remove the roof hatch screws (13).
Disconnect the radio aerial.
Remove the hatch.
9. Remove the roof trim screws (14).
Remove the trim.
Fig. 15
Refitting
10. Refit the roof trim by following the steps in reverse order to removal.

Lift the hood and remove the side protection grilles.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
NOTE:
• Move the coolant pump fan to one side.
Disconnect the X190 - Vistronic connector.
Unscrew the Vistronic (tightening torque:
100 Nm) and then move it back against the
radiators.
• Move the front PTO shaft forward (if the tractor
is fitted with one). Refer to the relevant
chapter.
1 Air conditioning compressor
2 Crankshaft pulley
3 Tensioner
4 Idle pulley
5 Alternator
6 Idle pulley
7 Water pump pulley
8 Air compressor (if fitted)
Fig. 16
Procedure
1. Using a square tool (1/2"), turn the tensioner (3) counter-clockwise to slacken and remove the
alternator belt.
2. Remove the compressor belt using a tool for removing elastic belts.
12.1.5.3 Air conditioning - Replacing the dryer

NOTE: It is only necessary to replace the dryer if the air conditioning system is left open for a long time or
if one of the air conditioning system components is being replaced.
2. Remove the condenser.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Procedure
Fig. 17
Fig. 18

ACT0021460
12. Cab
3. Take out the dryer element (3) and replace it

with a new element.
4. Check the condition of the plug (2), replace it
if necessary, then refit it.
Fig. 19

1. Refit the condenser.
2. Refill the air conditioning system and perform a leak check.
12.1.6.1 General

ACT0021460
12. Cab


ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.2 Self-regulating air conditioning

12.2.1 General
12.2.1.1 General
Cabs can be fitted with a self-regulating air conditioning system as an option.
This system makes it possible for the cab to be kept at a constant temperature, which is as close as
possible to the temperature selected by the operator.
The controller adjusts the temperature of the air blown by the fan in the cab according to external data
(internal/external air temperature, sun, engine water temperature).
The self-regulating air conditioning system also has automated functions such as defrosting or air recycling.
Air conditioning controls

(1) Manual/automatic fan control
(2) Digital display (LCD)
(3) Compressor ON/OFF button
(4) Defroster button
(5) Recirculation button
(6) Temperature control knob
(7) Left-hand side fan ON/OFF switch
Fig. 20
12.2.1.2 Using the air conditioning system

Digital display screen
The screen (2) see Fig. 21 indicates the temperature setting and air recycling position.
The displayed temperature is the temperature desired by the user and not the actual cab temperature. It
may be displayed in degrees Celsius or degrees Fahrenheit.
To change the display from Celsius to Fahrenheit, follow the steps below (see step 1, page 12-30 to
see step 4, page 12-30 ).
Procedure
1. Switch off the tractor ignition.
2. Set the fan potentiometer (1) to OFF.
3. Move the temperature potentiometer (6) to
maximum heat position (red).
4. Switch on the ignition and, within 5 seconds,
press the defroster button (3) and the
recirculation button (5) simultaneously. The
temperature symbol (°C or °F) will appear.
Fig. 21

ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.2.1.3 Fan control

The ventilation can be adjusted using the fan
potentiometer (1). In the automatic position (A), air
flow is determined by the control unit according to
the comfort settings which have been entered. In
this case, the air flow does not exceed 75% of the
maximum possible air flow.
The selection can be made manually by turning the
potentiometer (1) to adjust the air flow. The
maximum air flow can thus exceed the limit of
75% imposed by the automatic setting.
An OFF position (B) on this button switches off the
temperature regulation system. When selected,
the compressor, heater and fan are switched off. Fig. 22
Air recycling is activated and the corresponding
icon is displayed.
12.2.1.4 Activating the compressor

The compressor can be activated by pressing the
button (3). The LED indicates if it is activated.
It is activated automatically when the following
functions are selected:
• defrosting
• air recycling
• maximum cooling
• maximum heating
As well as cooling the cab, the compressor is used
to reduce the atmospheric humidity in the cab. Air
passing through the evaporator leaves behind part
of its humidity, which is removed by condensation. Fig. 23
12.2.1.5 Defrosting
This function is activated (LED lit) and deactivated (LED not lit) by button (4) see chapter General, page
12-30 . The function remains active for a maximum of 3 minutes.
When the defrosting system is activated:
• The hot water circuit opens
• ventilation is set at 75% of maximum air flow (if on automatic setting)
• air is allowed to enter the cab (no recycling)
• active air conditioning compressor
• "HI" is displayed on the screen
12.2.1.6 Recirculation
Air recycling is activated by pressing button (5) see chapter General, page 12-30 . Two electrically
controlled shutters determine the air source (outside or cab).
Three different settings are available, and are selected by pressing button (6) repeatedly see
chapter General, page 12-30 :

ACT0021460
12. Cab
•
Press once: the icon appears. Cab air is recycled. The compressor operates to expel the humidity
building up in the air. Press button (3) to switch off the compressor. After 25 minutes, fresh air is
introduced from outside for approximately 1 minute to renew the cab air.
•
Press twice: the icon appears. Air from outside is used to ventilate the cab.
•
Press three times: the icon appears. Air recirculation is in automatic mode. The system
automatically selects the air source (outside or cab). The shutters are in intermediary position in order to
mix air from inside and outside. The air source whose temperature is closest to the desired cab
temperature is selected.
When using tractors fitted with an "antitox" filter (charcoal filter) in polluted or unhealthy air conditions
(spraying, spreading powder fertilizers), do not recycle cab air, so that cab air pressure is higher.
The inlet for outside air allows a rise in pressure. A higher cab pressure limits the amount of air and dirty
particles entering.
Select the air source manually by pressing button (6), rather than using the automatic setting see
chapter General, page 12-30 .
If the tractor is not fitted with an antitox filter and the outside air is polluted, it is recommended to recycle
cab air.
12.2.1.7 Special conditions

When the system is started, if the outside temperature is very high and above a set level, outside air is
automatically introduced into the cab for two minutes to clean the cab interior before changing to the
recycled air setting.
During very cold weather, a start-up procedure is operated automatically until the heater water reaches a
higher temperature.
This procedure incorporates the following:
• minimum ventilation
• outside air (no air recycling)
• compressor, depending on outside temperature

ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.2.2.1 Diagram of the air conditioning compressor
Fig. 24

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Fig. 25
(A) Standard air conditioning (2) Roof cover
(B) Self-regulating air conditioning (3) Fan
(1) Air conditioning unit (4) Heating valve

ACT0021460
12. Cab
(5) Regulator (10) Resistance

(6) Heater radiator (11) Temperature sensors
(7) Evaporator (12) Regulator
(8) Harness (13) Sender unit
(9) Thermostat
(14) Compressor
(15) Condenser
(16) Service union
((17))Service union
Fig. 26
12.2.2.3 Self-regulating air conditioning - Layout of components

Sensor locations
(1) Internal temperature sensor
(2) Solar radiation sensor
Fig. 27
Fig. 28

ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.2.3.1 Air conditioning tests - General

As a general rule, pressure values are linked to atmospheric conditions (pressure and temperature). For
ambient temperatures between 30 and 40°C at sea level, the pressures vary from 0.3 to 0.65 bar for low
pressure and from 12 to 18.5 bar for high pressure.
To locate failures, connect the manifold pressure gages to the service unions at the rear of the
compressor.
Leaks in the system cause: insufficient cooling, and high and low pressures that are too low. If it is not full
enough, bubbles appear continuously at the dryer tank sight glass, as well as the same symptoms as
stated above.
If the evaporator is blocked or the regulator is blocked or iced up, a vacuum forms in the low pressure area
and the high pressure is too low. If the system is overfilled, a regulator is stuck open or a condenser is
blocked, the low pressure is too high.
If a condenser is blocked or the system is overfilled, the high pressure becomes excessively high.
System overfill
In a correctly filled unit, the R134a vapors delivered through the compressor loses the superheat absorbed
in the compressor at the first condenser coil, then condenses into liquid form in the subsequent coils.
Before being directed into the dryer, this liquid is stored in the last condenser coil. If the system is
overfilled, the liquid level rises in the condenser. There are therefore fewer coils active in the condensation
process. The temperature and pressure increase, and may cause the pipes to burst in certain cases:
1. During operation:
• overfilling
• worn pipes
• pipes worn by friction
• pipes cut by plate edges
• bend radii too small
• exposure to the battery (acid)
2. When stopped:
Same reasons as during operation, in addition to the following:
• engine compartment ventilation shut-off
• residual engine heat after switch-off
If a pipe is strained to its limit, the temperature increase at switch-off raises the pipe temperature and its
internal pressure.
The heat also decreases the strength of the pipe and all factors combine to burst the pipe.
This is more likely to occur in units overfilled with R134a and when pipes are worn or wrongly positioned
(close to a hot area).
12.2.3.2 Air conditioning tests - Air conditioning unit breakdown
Preliminary checks
The most commonly occurring air conditioning system failure is the lack of cold air. It is therefore
necessary to carry out a number of checks to identify the failure.
• Check that the scheduled maintenance has been carried out: belt tension, cleanliness of various parts
(cab air filter, condenser, evaporator, etc.), damage to parts.
• Check electrical supplies, fuses, condition of connections and supply wires.
ACT0021460
12. Cab
• Examine all channels and unions and look for possible build-up of dirt, oil or traces of dampness, which
could indicate a leak.
• Supply the compressor clutch directly from the battery and record the pressure values on the pressure
gages, and check the evaporator is cold. If the system pressures are normal and there is cold in the
evaporator, the failure is electrical. On the other hand, incorrect pressure and lack of cold suggest the
failure is gas-related or gas-related and electrical.
High pressure too high

• Coolant overfill: System must be bled. Avoid excessive bleeding of the system.
• Air in the system, despite correct low pressure level: Bleed system then refill.
• Spaces between condenser fins blocked by insects: Clean condenser.
• Refrigerant remains in liquid form in the suction pipe at the evaporator outlet. This is indicated by damp
or ice on the pipe or on the suction valve of the compressor. Check that the regulator bulb is correctly
fitted on the suction pipe.
• Plug left inside pipe during assembly, indicated by temperature difference upstream and downstream of
plug.
• High pressure very high, low pressure normal, air bubbles at dryer and icing in dryer tank, flow
restricted at dryer inlet which acts as regulator.
High pressure too low

• Incorrect filling: Insufficient refrigerant indicated by presence of air bubbles in dryer.
• Compressor cylinder head gasket split or leaks at valves.
Low pressure too low and insufficient cooling

• Pipe or dryer restricted. This symptom is indicated by a temperature difference upstream and
downstream of the restriction or by cooling of the dryer tank during operation of the unit.
• Insufficient filling indicated by the regulator sensor. Hold the end of the thermostatic bulb in order to
warm it. The suction pressure should rise quickly to at least 1.45 bar when the engine is running at idle
speed. If not, replace the thermostatic regulator.
• The capillary tube of the regulator is broken or leaking: regulator stays closed, making the unit operate
at very low pressure.
• Ice forms in the regulator or in the nozzle. The regulator or nozzle can ice up even if the pipes do not.
• Regulator is blocked. Presence of corrosion products. When the end of the thermostatic bulb is heated,
the low pressure value does not change. The regulator can open after a period of deactivation and
blocks after a period of operation.
• Check that the air inlet port of the evaporator is not blocked.
• There is insufficient refrigerant. Check for air bubbles in the sight glass when the unit is operating, with
the fans turning.
Low pressure too high

• Compressor belt loose.
• Regulator thermostatic bulb fitted incorrectly.
• Regulator needle valve stuck in open position. Excess refrigerant flow into the coil, causing the suction
pipe to cool or ice up.
• Compressor inlet valve filter blocked.
• Leak at compressor suction and delivery valves.
• If high pressure is low, low pressure is high, and the fill level is correct, leak at compressor cylinder
head or faulty valves.
Insufficient cooling
• Incorrect compressor operation
• Incorrect regulator operation
ACT0021460
12. Cab
• High and low pressure too low, a vacuum forms with correct fill level, temperature too low at
evaporator outlet, causing regulator to close, poor synchronization between thermostat cycle and
opening of regulator.
Noisy regulator (steady whistling sound)

• Insufficient refrigerant indicated by bubbles in the sight glass.
Irregular compressor operation (irregular cycle)

• Check the belt tension.
• Check the clutch clearance (air gap).
• Check voltage and current of the clutch coil.
• Check the compressor itself.
Unusual noise from compressor

1. In clutched position:
• Check compressor assembly.
• Check clutch and absence of slip.
• Check R134a refrigerant level.
• Check bearings in clutch and compressor.
• Check quantity of cooling oil.
• Check compressor suction and delivery valves.
2. In declutched position:
• Check clutch air gap.
12.2.3.3 Air conditioning tests - Cleaning the system

The air conditioning system must always stay clean to ensure optimal operation.
Cab air filter

The cab air filter should be cleaned every 100 hours of operation and replaced every 1,000 hours of
operation. If working in dusty conditions, cleaning should take place at shorter intervals. Take care to keep
the filter in good condition, because dust gathers on the evaporator where it comes into contact with
humidity; this then must be removed for cleaning, requiring the system to be drained.
Condenser
The condenser should be cleaned on a daily basis if the tractor is working in very dusty conditions. The
condenser is normally located in front of the engine cooling radiator and should be cleaned with a jet of
compressed air. Special care should be taken with the condenser fins. They ensure correct operation of the
air conditioning system.

It is very important to work in a clean environment to prevent dirty particles from entering the system.
Carefully clean the unions, then lightly oil with compressor oil before connecting them.
Do not use compressed air to clean the pipes, for example, to drive out particles that may have entered:
only use refrigerant in this case.
Only remove the pipe protectors at the last minute. Cut hose pipes with a knife; never with a saw.
Carefully block pipes when they are in storage.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
The oil in the air conditioning system is a cooling oil. This oil is miscible with the refrigerant.
Precautions
The air conditioning system can be dangerous. It can be compared with a pressurized steam boiler. If a
pipe bursts, the refrigerant evaporates or boils very quickly.
It can be very dangerous after expansion. An air conditioning engineer must always take precautions when
working to prevent unstoppable refrigerant leaks. R134a refrigerant is non-combustible, non-toxic (except
upon contact with fire) and non-corrosive (except upon contact with water).
Take great care when handling R134a. Direct contact can freeze the skin or eyes.
On contact with fire or at high temperatures, it decomposes into phosgene gas, which is highly
toxic.
Never handle refrigerant without wearing protective goggles and gloves.
Never try to drain the system by loosening a union. Slow, safe draining is only possible using draining /
filling apparatus designed for R134a refrigerant. Do not drain the system in the same room as a naked
flame. The same precautions must be taken for leak detection.
When it is necessary to retighten a union, use two wrenches to avoid bending the pipe, which can cause
leaks.
Never weld or steam-clean near a system containing refrigerant. This can cause excessive pressure and
leakage.
Do not store R134a refrigerant in direct sunlight, near a heat source or in a damp place. Always replace the
bottle protection plugs when it is not being used. Also avoid impacts. Do not transport the bottle in the
passenger compartment of a vehicle.
In case of spillage of R134a

If R134 comes into contact with your eyes, wash with cold water and seek medical advice immediately.
NOTE: Freezing (frostbite) caused by liquid refrigerant can be treated by gradually warming the affected
area with cold water, and then applying cold cream. Seek medical advice immediately.
Recommendation
All operations described in this section must be carried out using servicing and repair equipment (draining/
filling station, refrigerant recovery station, leak detector etc.) specifically designed for R134a refrigerant.
12.2.4.2 General maintenance

IMPORTANT: Before switching on the air conditioning system, ensure that the windows and doors are
properly closed. The cab interior must be kept as clean as possible. If for any reason the cab cannot be
kept completely sealed, the air recycling system must be switched off. Failure to respect this advice can
cause evaporator blockage, stopping the air conditioning system and risking damage to the compressor.
For correct operation of the system, the cab air filter, condenser, fan turbines and evaporator must be
checked periodically. Any blockage causes an increase in the high and low pressures, reducing the
effectiveness of the cooling. The tension and alignment of the drive belt must be checked.
Starting at the evaporator, check the condition of the condensation water drain pipes. Any water build-up
can cause icing in the evaporator, preventing refrigerant flow or reducing performance.
To keep the whole system in good condition, it is recommended to operate the unit for several minutes
every week to lubricate all the seals, because the oil in the compressor is miscible with the refrigerant.
Preventive maintenance
Carry out the checks and services as described in the preceding paragraphs.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Visually check the evaporator, pipes, condenser, dryer, compressor, unions, belt and condensation water
flow in the evaporator.
Carry out an internal check with the low-pressure gage (blue) and high-pressure gage (red), with the engine
running at 1500 rpm, adjusted to the maximum cold setting and the fan at high speed.
Check component temperature.
Regulator outlet (evaporator side), evaporator, low pressure pipes and “inlet valve” on the compressor
should be cold to the touch.
Regulator inlet, condenser, high pressure pipes, “delivery valve" and compressor should be hot to the
touch.
The dryer and oil must be replaced at least every 1500 hours of operation or every three years, or
whenever it is necessary to refill the system.
If the system is too full (more than 2 kg of R134a refrigerant), there is a risk of blockage in the regulator
and dryer.
With air conditioning switched on, if the high and low pressure systems are equal, the compressor is
faulty.
If there is water in the system, there is a risk of blockage in the regulator (needle valve) if a water droplet
freezes: decrease in low and high pressure.
12.2.4.3 Adjusting the clutch air gap

NOTE:
The air gap is determined by the thickness shims. When refitting the clutch assembly, first fit with the
original shims.
When fitting a new clutch on a compressor, use the following shims: 1.02 mm - 0.05 mm - 0.12 mm.
Tighten the nut to a torque of 30 Nm.
Procedure
1. Check the air gap using a set of shims to
obtain a clearance of 0.4–0.8 mm.
2. If the air gap is not uniform around the whole
periphery, gently lift and strike the places
where the gap is biggest.
Fig. 29
Filling the oil

IMPORTANT:
It is essential to use only Polyalkylene-Glycol (PAG) synthetic oil to fill or top up the compressor.
• Recommended oil: PAG SANDEN SP20
• Compressor capacity: 190 cm³
In case of a system problem and each time a part (pipe, dryer, condenser) must be replaced, it is advisable
to drain the compressor oil and replace it with the recommended quantity of clean oil rather than topping
up the existing level.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Procedure
1. Drain the R134a refrigerant.

2. Remove the plug.
3. Fill or top up the oil level.
4. Refit the plug on the port. Check the condition and correct position of the "O" ring in its seat.
5. Tighten the plug to a torque of 15 Nm. In case of leakage, do not force the plug; remove it and fit a
new "O" ring.
6. Refill the unit with R134a refrigerant.
7. Check the air conditioning system for correct operation.
12.2.4.4 Draining the system and checking for leaks

Drafting the system and detecting leaks
Procedure
1. Connect the pipes to the air conditioning
system. The red connection is for high
pressure and the blue connection is for low
pressure.
2. Open the high- and low-pressure valves.
3. Start the system's drafting cycle and check
for leaks.
4. If necessary, work on the system. The
system is now clean and can be filled with
coolant.
Fig. 30

ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.2.4.5 Filling the unit (engine stopped)
Procedure
1. Draft the system.
2. Measure the amount of oil recovered and
add a similar amount of new oil.
3. Display the required amount of refrigerant on
the device screen.
4. Start the filling cycle.
5. Start the engine, then switch on the air
conditioning system.
Fig. 31
Checking for leaks and checking the pressures during operation
Procedure
1. Inspect the air conditioning system with a
testing device to detect any refrigerant leaks.
Fig. 32

ACT0021460
12. Cab
2. Set a temperature value in the cab and check

it with a thermometer at the air vent outlet.
3. Close the low- and high-pressure valves of
the device in order to check the air
conditioning system with the pressure gages
of the device.
4. Check the variation range of the high
pressure and low pressure on the charging
device when the required temperature is
reached inside the cab (blue range for low
pressure and red range for high pressure).
5. The air conditioning system is operational
when the high- and low-pressure gages
Fig. 33
indicate the correct values.
6. Stop the engine and then disconnect the
unions of the device from the air conditioning
system.
7. Refit the plugs to the pressure connectors of
the system.
8. Bleed the pipes by starting the bleed cycle
on the device.
Oil adding method
Service required on system Quantity of oil to add
Draining the system Measure the amount of oil recovered and add a
similar amount of new oil
Burst pipe or other major leaks + 100 ml
Replacing a condenser + 30 ml
Replacing an evaporator + 30 ml
Replacing the dryer tank + 15 ml
Replacing a pipe + 10 ml
Oil is added by being sucked into the air conditioning system from the charging device (except for the
100 ml charge to be carried out preferably directly into the compressor).
Oil use precautions:
• Because oils are hygroscopic, it is recommended to store them in plastic containers that can be
compressed after each use in order to prevent damp air mixing with the oil inside.
• Do not mix different brands or types of oil.
WARNING:
PAG oil is an irritant and detergent. Gloves should be worn. In case of contact with skin,
wash hands thoroughly with soap and water to prevent irritation.
12.2.4.6 Checking pressures

General
When the air conditioning is switched off, the pressures are balanced and the low and high pressure values
are between 4 bar and 5 bar in a correctly charged system. However, these values vary depending on the
outside temperature.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
When the air conditioning is in operation, the low pressure is between 0.3 bar and 0.65 bar and the high
pressure is between 12 bar and 18.5 bar.
All these values can change according to the outside temperature.
After filling, the air conditioning should be checked for correct operation.
Parameters required to • Maximum cooling and fan speed

perform check • Engine speed at 1800-2000 rpm
Procedure
Procedure
1. Connect the pressure gages to the
compressor see Fig. 34 .
2. Run the engine, set the ventilation at
maximum and the air conditioning at
maximum cold.
3. After a short period of operation, the high-
pressure pipe should be hot and the low-
pressure pipe should be cold. There should
be no bubbles at the dryer tank.
4. Check the compressor cycles. The
compressor operating time must be
approximately equal to the stoppage time
once the cab temperature is balanced.
Fig. 34

ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.2.5.1 Removing and refitting the roof trim

Removal
2. Remove the screws (1) at the front. Remove
the front panel (5). Disconnect the work
lights and the windscreen washer pipe.
3. Remove the screws (2) at the rear. Remove
the rear panel (6). Disconnect the work lights
and the windscreen washer pipe.
4. Remove the screws (4). Remove the side
panels (7) and (8).
Fig. 35

ACT0021460
12. Cab
5. Remove the rotary beacon(s) (9) and

disconnect the power supply cable.
6. Remove the screws (11) and the support(s)
(10).
Fig. 36

ACT0021460
12. Cab
7. Remove and disconnect the number plate

lighting (12).
8. Remove the roof hatch screws (13).
Disconnect the radio aerial.
Remove the hatch.
9. Remove the roof trim screws (14).
Remove the trim.
Fig. 37
Refitting
10. Refit the roof trim by following the steps in reverse order to removal.

Lift the hood and remove the side protection grilles.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
NOTE:
• Move the coolant pump fan to one side.
Disconnect the X190 - Vistronic connector.
Unscrew the Vistronic (tightening torque:
100 Nm) and then move it back against the
radiators.
• Move the front PTO shaft forward (if the tractor
is fitted with one). Refer to the relevant
chapter.
1 Air conditioning compressor
2 Crankshaft pulley
3 Tensioner
4 Idle pulley
5 Alternator
6 Idle pulley
7 Water pump pulley
8 Air compressor (if fitted)
Fig. 38
Procedure
1. Using a square tool (1/2"), turn the tensioner (3) counter-clockwise to slacken and remove the
alternator belt.
2. Remove the compressor belt using a tool for removing elastic belts.
12.2.5.3 Air conditioning - Replacing the dryer

NOTE: It is only necessary to replace the dryer if the air conditioning system is left open for a long time or
if one of the air conditioning system components is being replaced.
2. Remove the condenser.

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Procedure
Fig. 39
Fig. 40

ACT0021460
12. Cab
3. Take out the dryer element (3) and replace it

with a new element.
4. Check the condition of the plug (2), replace it
if necessary, then refit it.
Fig. 41

1. Refit the condenser.
2. Refill the air conditioning system and perform a leak check.
12.2.6.1 General

ACT0021460
12. Cab


ACT0021460
12. Cab
12.3 Cab suspension

12.3.1 General
Tractors can be fitted with a suspended cab as an option.
The suspension system is 100% mechanical. The cab is suspended at the rear by two spring-shock
absorber combinations.
The front of the cab rests on rubber mountings identical to those used on the non-suspended version.
The cab suspension does not require any particular adjustment. Neither the hardness of the shock
absorbers nor the comfort is adjustable.
NOTE:
It is recommended to replace the suspension shock absorbers every 5000 hours. The spring/shock
absorber combinations cannot be removed.
Front support
The upper half-shell is attached to the cab and fits
inside the lower half-shell (A). This system assists
cab removal/refitting.
The front supports (B) are fixed to the gearbox on
each side.
Fig. 42
Rear support
The spring-shock absorber combinations (4) are
mounted between the stabilizer supports and the
cab supports (E).
The supports (9) are mounted on the rear final
drives.
Fig. 43

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Lateral restraint
The connecting rod (8) is fitted with two rubber
mountings.
NOTE:
The rod (8) must be horizontal when tightening the
screws.
Fig. 44
The connecting rod (6) is fitted with rubber
washers.
Fig. 45
Stop
Movement of the suspension is limited by
movement of the rods in the supports (9).
The rings (F) also restrain the cab in the event of
overturning.
Fig. 46

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Fig. 47
(1) Cab (7) Rear left-hand support
(2) Chassis (8) Rear spring-shock absorber combination
(3) Front left-hand support (9) Rear spring-shock absorber combination
(4) Front left-hand rubber mounting (10) Rear right-hand connecting rod
(5) Front right-hand rubber mounting (11) Rear right-hand support
(6) Rear left-hand connecting rod

ACT0021460
12. Cab
Fig. 48
(1) Front support (4) Spring/shock absorber combination
(2) Front rubber mounting (5) Rubber mounting
(3) Lower half-shell (6) Right-hand rod

ACT0021460
12. Cab
(7) Spacer (9) Rear support

(8) Left-hand rod

(1) 84 Nm
(2) 105 Nm
(3) 115 Nm
(4) 185 Nm
(5) 280 Nm
(6) 350 Nm
(7) 490 Nm
Fig. 49

ACT0021460
Table of contents
13. Accessories
13.1 accessories kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

13.1.1 Accessories kits - Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.2 Accessories kits - Rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.3 Accessories kits - Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.4 Accessories kits - Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.1.5 Accessories kits - Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.1.6 Accessories kits - Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

ACT0021460
Table of contents

ACT0021460
13. Accessories
13.1 accessories kits

13.1.1 Accessories kits - Engine
The kits must be ordered from the AGCO spare parts department and the fitting instructions must be
downloaded from AGCONET or Epsilon, depending on the case.
Kit reference Description Engine type Fitting instructions

reference
4390517M11 Water separator filter with or without T4F ACT000235A

loader
4390515M11 110 V block preheater T4F ACT000234B
4390516M11 220 V block preheater T4F ACT000234B
ACW0731120 Fuel preheater T4F ACT0024220
13.1.2 Accessories kits - Rear axle

Kit reference Description Transmission Fitting instructions

type reference
ACW0694360 Hydraulic trailer braking - Tractor equipped GTA2550 ACT00024130

with an Open Center hydraulic system
ACW0696610 Hydraulic trailer braking - Tractor equipped GTA2550 ACT0024140

with a Load Sensing (Closed Center)
hydraulic system
4384145M14 1,8 t front linkage frame GTA2550
4386181M11/43104 110 V transmission preheater GTA2550 ACT000143A

32M11
4386182M11/43104 220 V transmission preheater GTA2550 ACT000143A

25M11
13.1.3 Accessories kits - Power take-off


type reference
4381243M12 Parts kit for front power take-off unit. All types 7060233M3
Comprises: Connecting shaft, hydraulic kit,
cooler, cab switch and electrical harness
4376429M91 6-spline anti-clockwise front power take-off All types 7060233M3

unit
4278511M91 21-spline anti-clockwise front power take- All types 7060233M3

off unit

ACT0021460
13. Accessories
13.1.4 Accessories kits - Hydraulics


type reference
4381989M13 3rd or 4th mechanical spool valve for Open GTA2550 7060206M3
Center hydraulic system
4393015M13 3rd mechanical spool valve for Load GTA2550 ACT0002690

Sensing hydraulic system
4393028M13 4th mechanical spool valve for Load GTA2550 ACT0002690

Sensing hydraulic system
4387005M13 Oil recovery unit GTA2550 ACT0021250
4383207M12 Free return for Open Center hydraulic GTA2550 ACT0021380

system
4383208M11 Free return for a Load Sensing hydraulic GTA2550 ACT0021440

system
ACW067992A Electrohydraulic spool valves with joystick GTA2550 ACT0021230

for Open Center system
4390700M16 Front linkage pipes + 1 front coupler (for GTA2550 -

Essential model)
4392674M16 Front linkage pipes + 1 front coupler (for GTA2550 -

Efficient model)
ACW0675650 Front loader pipes for Open Center GTA2550 ACT0021240

hydraulic system
13.1.5 Accessories kits - Electronics


type reference
ACW0763170 Datatronic CCD All types -
4288370M11 Camera All types -
4357012M15 AgCommand™ telemetry (standard roof) All types -
4384397M12 AgCommand™ telemetry (high-vis roof) All types -
4378327M13 Isobus All types -
13.1.6 Accessories kits - Cab


ACT0021460
13. Accessories
Kit reference Description Type of cab Fitting instructions

reference
4281567M12 Rear fender extensions 6 pillars 4373738M4
ACW0461640 Coded key (4 barrels + 2 keys) 6 pillars ACT0016300
ACW0461630 Service key for kit ACW0461640 6 pillars -
4385965M12 Tank protection 6 pillars ACT000242A
4384048M11 Reversing light 6 pillars ACT0024230

ACT0021460
13. Accessories

ACT0021460
Table of contents
14. Service tools
14.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

14.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.2 Separation of assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.2.1 Separation of assemblies - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.3 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.3.1 AGCO Power engine - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.3.1.1 Cylinder block tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.3.1.2 Timing gear and flywheel housing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.3.1.3 Cylinder head and valve mechanism tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.3.1.4 Crank mechanism tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.3.1.5 Coolant pump tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14.3.1.6 Engine control system tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14.3.1.7 Maintenance and troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14.3.2 3rd generation SCR engine - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14.4 Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14.4.1 Robotic mechanical gearbox - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14.4.2 Powershift module - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
14.4.3 PowerShuttle - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
14.4.4 Super creeper gears - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
14.5 Rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.5.1 GPA50/Final drives - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.5.2 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 9x40 and 10x42 - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.5.3 GPA50 rear crown wheel and pinion 10x47 - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
14.5.4 GPA50/Linkage and hitch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
14.5.5 GPA50/Tractor braking – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
14.5.6 Pneumatic trailer brake — Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
14.6 Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
14.6.1 GPA50/Rear PTO clutch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
14.6.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
14.6.3 GPA50/Rear PTO with three electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
14.7 Front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14.7.1 GPA50/Clutch - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14.7.2 Front axle - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14.7.3 DANA 730 - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33
14.8 Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
14.8.1 Hydraulic test – Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
14.8.2 Tractor braking - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40
14.9 Electricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41
14.9.1 Belt - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41
14.10 Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42
14.10.1 Harness - Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42

ACT0021460
Table of contents

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.1 General
14.1.1 General

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.2 Separation of assemblies

14.2.1 Separation of assemblies - Service tools
Reference 4315657M1
Description Cab lifting device

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.3 Engine
14.3.1 AGCO Power engine - Service tools
14.3.1.1 Cylinder block tools
Fig. 1
Ref. Description Order 33 44 49 66 74 84 98

number
1 Puller for cylinder liner V905173100 x x x x x
1 Puller for cylinder liner V910451500 x x
2 Milling cutter for cylinder V910165600 x x x x x
liner seat
2 Milling cutter for cylinder V910452000 x x
liner seat
Spare cutting blade for V904587600 x x x x x x x
milling cutter
5 Drift for fitting camshaft cup V902587400 x x x x x x x
plug
6 Press tool for cylinder liner V910166300 x x x x x x x
7 Holder for dial gauge V902579200 x x x x x x x

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.3.1.2 Timing gear and flywheel housing tools
Fig. 2

number
1 Centring tool for flywheel V905246400 x x x x x
housing
1 Centring tool for flywheel V910452700 x x
housing
2 Drift for fitting rear V905246300 x x x x x
crankshaft seal
2 Drift for fitting rear V910452600 x x
crankshaft seal
3 Drift for fitting front V910394600 x x x x x x
crankshaft seal
4 Drift for fitting front V923517520 x
crankshaft seal
5 Drift for tension pins in V902598800 x x x x x x
timing gear housing
6 Drift for tension pins in V902598700 x x x x x x x
timing gear housing

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.3.1.3 Cylinder head and valve mechanism tools
Fig. 3

number
1 Tightening tool for injector V920179670 x x x x x x x
wiring connector
2 Fitting tool for valve stem V920185580 x x x x x x x
gasket
3 Milling cutter kit for valve V837062635 x x x x x x x
seat
4 Milling tool for injector seat V912085400 x x x x x x x
5 Drift for removing valve V921085300 x x x x x x x
guide
6 Drift for fitting valve guide V912085000 x x x x x x x
8 Drift for 45 mm cup plug V910394800 x x x x

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.3.1.4 Crank mechanism tools
Fig. 4

number
1 Puller for crankshaft gears V905248800 x x x x x x
2 Spanner for crankshaft nut V902455800 x x x x x x x
3 Puller for crankshaft hub V920182390 x x x x x x x
4 Piston fitting tool V920185840 x x x x x
4 Piston fitting tool V923106340 x x
5 Piston ring pliers V905246900 x x x x x x x
6 Drift for fitting oil deflector V910394900 x x x x x x
ring, crankshaft front end

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.3.1.5 Coolant pump tools
Fig. 5

number
1 Puller for coolant pump V910193200 x x
impeller
2 Drift for fitting coolant pump V920197870 x x x x x
water seal
water seal
bearing (V610060124)
4 Fitting tool for coolant pump V920186480 x x x x
pump with 115,5 mm belt
pulley
4 Fitting tool for coolant pump V920218980 x x
pump with 100 mm belt
pulley
5 Socket for coolant pump V920187410 x x x x x x x
nut[1]
[1] Nut V836759512

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.3.1.6 Engine control system tools
Fig. 6

number
1 Sisutronic EEM 4 service 8370 79541 x x x x x x x
tool (incl. USB adapter)
2 Adapter for application 8370 79553 x x x x x x x
connector
3 Extension cable (L = 5 m) 8368 62483 x x x x x x x
14.3.1.7 Maintenance and troubleshooting tools

(1) Return quantity tester V837079449
Fig. 7
(4) Fuel filter wrench V837079717
Fig. 8

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
(5) Socket for injector wiring V920179670
Fig. 9
14.3.2 3rd generation SCR engine - Service tools

Reference 4346206M1
Description Tool for the urea tank gage

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.4 Gearbox
14.4.1 Robotic mechanical gearbox - Service tools
Reference 3378804M1
Description Gearbox shaft slinging tool
Reference 3378805M1
Description Supplier’s electrical tool for solenoid valves

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.4.2 Powershift module - Service tools

Reference 3376920M2
Reference 3378012M2

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.4.3 PowerShuttle - Service tools

Reference ATP3002
Description Belleville spring compression tool
14.4.4 Super creeper gears - Service tools

Reference 4346871M1
Description Tool for pushing and pulling the layshaft
(A) Handle
(B) M8 threaded rod L = 200 mm
(C) Dial gage thrust plate

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.5 Rear axle

14.5.1 GPA50/Final drives - Service tools
Reference 4346869M1
14.5.2 GPA50/Rear crown wheel and pinion 9x40 and 10x42 - Service tools
Reference 4346857M1

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference 4346858M1
Reference 4346859M2

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference 4346860M1
shimming tool
Reference 4346861M1

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference 4346870M1
seal
Reference 4373043M1

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.5.3 GPA50 rear crown wheel and pinion 10x47 - Service tools

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference 4346859M2
Reference 4346860M1
shimming tool

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference 4346870M1
seal

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.5.4 GPA50/Linkage and hitch - Service tools

Reference -
Description Ring fitting drift
Supplier To be manufactured locally.

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.5.5 GPA50/Tractor braking – Service tools

Reference 4346868M1
Description Tool for simultaneously holding the nut (A) and
torque tightening the counter-nut (B) of brake
mechanisms

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.5.6 Pneumatic trailer brake — Service tools

Description Red coupling head
Description Yellow coupling head

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference 4294527M1
Description Female part of the coupling head (United Kingdom)
Reference 4294528M1
Description Male part of the coupling head (United Kingdom)

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.6 Power take-off

14.6.1 GPA50/Rear PTO clutch - Service tools
Reference -
Description Spring compression tool
Supplier Makeshift tool

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.6.2 GPA50/Rear PTO with two electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools

Reference 4346862M1
Reference 4346863M1

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference 4346867M1
Description Socket for tightening the secondary-shaft nut
Reference 4346905M1
Description Socket for hydraulic ram plug

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.6.3 GPA50/Rear PTO with three electrohydraulic speeds - Service tools

Reference 4346862M1
Reference 4346863M1

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference 7060234M1
Description Power take-off bearing preload

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.7 Front axle

14.7.1 GPA50/Clutch - Service tools
Reference 4346904M1
Description Hydraulic ring fitting drift
(A) Fitting drift

(B) Centring tool
14.7.2 Front axle - Service tools

Reference 3378059M1
Description Accumulator test kit
Description Quantity

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Allen key 1
Pressure gage 250 bar 1
Pressure gage 25 bar 1
A3 adapter 1
Hose 2,5 m 1
G3 adapter for France 1
Reference 4315319M1
Description DR200H pressure relief valve (0 to 200 bar)
Reference AG01C

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.7.3 DANA 730 - Service tools

Reference 4373087M1
Description Fitting tool for the axle shaft seal
Description Tool for the pinion nut

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.8 Hydraulics
14.8.1 Hydraulic test – Service tools
Reference AG01C
Reference AG03

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference AG06
Reference AG08

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference AG08A
Reference AG08B

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference AG08C
Reference AG08D

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference AG08E
Reference AG08G

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference AG09
Reference AG10

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.8.2 Tractor braking - Service tools

Reference 3582045M1
Description Hydraulic female coupling for creating a brake bleed
pipe

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.9 Electricity
14.9.1 Belt - Service tools

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
14.10 Electronics
14.10.1 Harness - Service tools
Reference 4346612M1
Description ParkLock check
Details "Deutsch 03v" connector
Reference 4346614M1
Description ITT pedal check
Details "Tyco 12v AMPSEAL" connector

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference ACT000223A
Description TopDock connector on roof check
Details "ECTA233 12V Amphenol" connector
Reference ACT000333A
Description TopDock check
Details "Deutsch DT-12SA" connector

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Description TopDock check
Details "Deutsch DT-12SB" connector
Reference X899.980.031.201
Description Check of the steering spool valve and of the
auxiliary spool valves
Details Tyco 04v JPT HSG2 connector

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference X899.980.316.202
Description Steering spool valve check
Details Tyco 04v JPT HSG1 connector
Reference X899.980.288.206
Description 2-pin adapter harness
Details Deutsch DT06-2S connector

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference X899.980.246.201
Details Tyco 02v JPT connector
Reference X899.980.246.202
Details Tyco 03v JPT connector

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference X899.980.246.204
Details Tyco 02v Superseal connector
Reference X899.980.246.205

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference X899.980.246.206
Details "Tyco 06v Superseal" connector

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Reference X899.980.246.207
Description Checking the Dyna-VT transmission control unit
Details Deutsch DT06-08S connector
Details "Delphi 02v" connector

ACT0021460
14. Service tools
Description Checking the speed sensors
Details Molded connector
Description Checking the throttle pedal potentiometer
Reference 4379719M1
Description Checking the diagnostics connectors
Details "Deutsch HD16-9-1939SE" connector

ACT0021460
© AGCO Corporation, 2016. All rights reserved.
ACT0021460 (English)
January 2016

SM Tractor Massey 5710-13 SL, 21460, en - Jan16

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SM Tractor Massey 5710-13 SL, 21460, en - Jan16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Workshop Service Manual

MF 5700 SL series tractors

MF 5700 SL series tractors

2 Separation of assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

MF 5700 SL series tractors

2.3.1.1 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

MF 5700 SL series tractors

3.1.7.6 Coolant pump tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

MF 5700 SL series tractors

5.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

MF 5700 SL series tractors

5.5.2.1 Description and kinematics of ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-131

6 Rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2 GPA50/GPA52 trumpet housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

MF 5700 SL series tractors

MF 5700 SL series tractors

6.7.3.2 Sealing test on the pneumatic system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-292

7 Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

MF 5700 SL series tractors

7.1.3.1 Specifications - Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

MF 5700 SL series tractors

7.4.2.4 Identification of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-116

8 Front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

MF 5700 SL series tractors

8.3.3.2 Layout of mechanical components for the front suspension . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

MF 5700 SL series tractors

MF 5700 SL series tractors

9.4.5.5 Disassembling/reassembling the thermostatic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80

MF 5700 SL series tractors

9.9.3.1 Blown-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-156

9.16.3.1 Identification of channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-201

MF 5700 SL series tractors

10.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

MF 5700 SL series tractors

11.2.1.3 Schematic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

12.2.4.4 Draining the system and checking for leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41

14 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

MF 5700 SL series tractors

MF 5700 SL series tractors

MF 5700 SL series tractors

1.1 MF 5700 SL - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

MF 5700 SL series tractors 1-1

1-2 MF 5700 SL series tractors

1.1 MF 5700 SL - General

Structure of the manual

Repairs and parts replacement

1.1.2 General specifications

1.1.2.1 MF 5700 SL models

Model MF 5710 SL MF 5711 SL MF 5712 SL MF 5713 SL

Brand AGCO Power

MF 5700 SL series tractors 1-3

Model MF 5710 SL MF 5711 SL MF 5712 SL MF 5713 SL

Maximum torque, Nm 420 Nm 468 Nm 502 Nm 545 Nm

Displacement in liters 4.4

Piston travel 120 mm

Piston diameter 108 mm

Compression ratio 17,4 bar : 1 bar

Idle speed, hand brake engaged 750 rpm

Idle speed, hand brake 850 rpm

Nominal speed 2100 rpm

Maximum speed 2260 rpm

Engine weight 430 kg

High-pressure pump brand Bosch